Effluent Quality Monitoring System

Operation & Maintenance
Manual
Package : EQMS Package for NTPC Power Stations

Package No : WR-IHQ-C&M-EQMS-001(R)-9
Supplied by:
Swan Environmental Pvt. Ltd.,

Plot No: 922 & 935,
Swami Ayyappa Co. Op Society
Madhapur, Hyderabad-500081
Ph: 0091 40 - 40216184, 40216185
Fax: 0091 40-40216183.
INDEX
1. Philosophy of EQMS
2. Datasheet of BOD / COD analyzer
3. Datasheet of Conductivity-pH-TSS-OIW
4. Datasheet of Clamp On-Open Channel
5. Datasheet of Temp element
6. Datasheet of DAS-Data Sheet
7. Datasheet of Pump-Sampling
8. Datasheet of Zero-Air-Generator
9. Datasheet of Air conditioner
10. Datasheet of Timer-Air Conditioner
11. Datasheet of UPS
12. Datasheet of Weir Calculations
13. Datasheet of Desktop-PC
14. Datasheet of IP 55 enclosure

Operating Manuals
1. Power Distribution box Circuit

2. Operation Manual BOD / COD analyzer
3. Operation Manual pH
4. Operation Manual Conductivity
5. Operation Manual TSS
6. Operation Manual OIW
7. Operation Manual Clamp On flow meter
8. Operation Manual Open Channel flow meter
9. Operation Manual Temp element
10. Operation Manual DAS-Data Sheet
11. Operation Manual Zero-Air-Generator

LEGEND
Temperature Element with

Ultrasonic Clamp on head mounted transmitter
flow meter
Ultrasonic Level measurement SDL-999V

based open channel Data Acquisition System
flow meter
Controller with pH or
Conductivity or TSS or Oil GPRS/GSM
in water sensor Antenna
Flash drive
BOD/COD 4-Port Ethernet

analyzer switch
with two
outputs
Effluent Quality Monitoring System NTPC

4-20mA
Ultrasonic clamp on flow meter Server in CPCB
4-20mA
SDL-999V
Temperature Element with DAS
transmitter
pH (4-20mA) Server in SPCB

GPRS/GSM
Antenna
COD/BOD analyzer
Conductivity (2 X 4-20mA)
(4-20mA)
TSS (4-20mA)
Site server
PC
Oil in Water *Swan will establish connectivity between
(4-20mA) local EQMS PC and plant DCS/Recorder/PLC
PC. This will be done either by using LAN or
internet at plant end.
Effluent Quality Monitoring System
Flow cell
Water C
Instrument Air
sample
Drain
All the above shown items are in the scope of Swan

Drain will be connected to downstream of the open
channel
Sample and water flow circuit for EQMS

The latest generation online PC is provided to meet the following functionalities and this PC
is to be installed in the enclosure :
a. Visualisation of acquired values of data from all analysers.
b. Average computation of data (programmable time like 30min, 1 hour, 24 hours, 48 hours
or 1 week)
c. Trend representation of raw, and averaged data (trend time period shall be freely
PC, loaded with SEW2.2 data logging
selectable)
software (Data logging software
d. Archiving in simple formats like MS Excel etc.
16 developed by Swan Real Time
e. Alarm setting and annunciation
Networks. SEW software configuration
f. Calibration procedures
details attached)
g. Annual cumulative mass of pollutants
h. Diagnostics.
i. Capabilities of comparison of data w.r.t. standard/threshold values.
j. Auto Report generation.
k. Channel configuration for range, unit etc.
l. Data transmission
a.Swan will establish connectivity & transfer data to CPCB, SPCB, and NTPC central server
(Noida)
b.Required software/hardware for achieving the data connectivity, & transfer included.
c.Bi directional communication via GPRS/GSM built in the DAS unit. d.Model no.
of GPRS/GSM modem: GL-868 Dual; Telit make; Modem is integral part of DAS;
e.External 6dB Omni antenna of Anlogics make will be connected to DAS unit
f.Communication between DAS unit and local PC (supplied by Swan) and NTPC site server
17 DATA COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
will be established by using LAN switch (Refer to Schematic)
g.Data will be transmitted from DAS to servers, local PC, NTPC site server every 15 minutes
Operati g Te perature: 0-60C
Operating Humidity: 5-100% non condensing
Title Data Sheet of DAS (Data Acquisition System)

Doc. No. SEPL/NTPC/31/EQMS/DS/DAS
Effluent Quality Monitoring System (31nos.) for NTPC power
Project
stations.
Ref Package No.WR-IHQ-C&M-EQMS-001(R)-9
Client NTPC Limited, Samruddi Venture park, MIDC, Marol, Andheri (E),
Mumbai
Supplier
Swan Environmental Private Limited, Madhapur, Hyderabad
CPCB SERVER
4-20mA
4-20mA
SDL-999V DAS
COD/ BOD
AI-01 SPCB SERVER
4-20mA AI-02
pH
AI-03
GPRS/ GSM
AI-04 TELIT M ODEM
Conduct ivi 4-20mA
ty AI-05 1. FTP file transfer to the
GPRS/ GSM
SIM server (* .csv, * .txt)
AI-06 Antenna
2. Email Sending & receiving
4-20mA AI-07
TSS
AI-08
RS 232 NTPC FTP SERVER
AI-09 at NOIDA Wit h St at ic IP & int ernet
4-20mA
OIW
AI-10
AI-11 Et hernet cable For detail

4-20mA ( supplied & laid by
TE+TT refer
AI-12 NTPC
Figure-2
PORT
4-20mA DI-01 RS232

FT
DI-02 NTPC SERVER at SITE
L C
RJ 45 LOCAL PC at
A A
UPS Alarm DI-03 EQM S
N R
USB
DI-04 D
SWAN w ill install necessary

softw are at local PC to meet the SWAN w ill install necessary softw are
specification functional at NTPC Server to establish the bi-
USB port-Flash drive
requirement. directional communication and
Figure-1 transfer of data
SPCB SERVER
GPRS/ GSM
D
TELIT M ODEM
A
S
RS 232 GPRS/ GSM
SIM SWAN w ill install necessary softw are at respective SPCB
Antenna
to establish the bi-directional communication , transfer of data,
reporting based on alarm and reporting based on interrogation.
SITE-01
CPCB SERVER
1. FTP file t ransfer t o t he server (* .csv, * .t xt )

2. Em ail Sending & receiving
SWAN w ill install necessary softw are at CPCB to establish

the bi-directional communication , transfer of data,
GPRS/ GSM reporting based on alarm and reporting based on
D
TELIT M ODEM interrogation.
A
S Applicable for all 31 nos Station
RS 232 GPRS/ GSM
SIM
Antenna 1. FTP file transfer to the NTPC FTP SERVER
server (* .csv, * .txt) at NOIDA Wit h St at ic IP &
SITE-02 2. Email Sending & int ernet
receiving
SITE-.
SITE-.
D GPRS/ GSM
A TELIT M ODEM
NTPC will inst all a FTP server at Noida wit h st at ic IP and int ernet connect ion.
S
From local sit e GPRS M odem wit h SIM based int ernet connect ion, SWAN will
send t he (* .csv, * .t xt ) files t o NTPC FTP server using FTP from each sit e.
RS 232 GPRS/ GSM
SIM The local sit e GPRS M odem will download a file from t he FTP server t hrough
Antenna
FTP and execut e command for dat a ret rieval.
SITE-31
SWAN will provide t he above files format s in non-encrypt ed form t o enable
SWAN will provide SIM card and bear all t he charges NTPC t o use t hese * .csv, * .t xt and generat e report for int ernal purpose/ access.
relat ed to GSM / GPRS Dat a Transmission like Furt her, NTPC sit es may access t his NTPC FTP server at Noida t o view t he dat a.
GSM / GPRS usage fees, charges of GSM / GPRS No propriet ary soft ware required by NTPC for above applicat ion
Service provider etc for a period of SIX years (t wo SWAN is not required t o inst all any soft ware in NTPC FTP server
years warrant y + four years CM C)* * * * NTPC t o bear t he dat a usage charges based on t he dat a download & dat a
Figure-2 upload bet ween NTPC FTP server at Noida and respect ive sit e.
Data Acquisition System for NTPC-EQMS
Hardware
Analogue inputs
DAS (Data Acquisition System) unit has 12 nos. of 4-20mA Analogue inputs
8 channels are used for BOD, COD, TSS, pH, Conductivity, Oil in Water, Flow and Temperature.
Remaining 4 channels are spare channels for future.
Contact inputs
DAS has 4 contact inputs.

First and second inputs are used for the following
Main (Raw) power to UPS failed
Enclosure door open
RJ45 port
DAS has one RJ45 port.

This port is used to connect Laptop/PC to DAS unit to configure/program the DAS unit.
Also, this port is used to transfer data from DAS to local PC and local NTPC server through LAN
switch.
Either configuration or data acquisition is possible at a time.
This port can be used to connect to internet when GPRS/GSM modem is not in use.
USB
DAS has one USB port.

This port is used to connect Laptop/PC to DAS unit to configure/program the DAS unit.
A flash drive can be connected to USB port to transfer the data saved in DAS unit to flash drive.
This port can also be used to upload the firmware from flash drive to DAS unit.
Configuration
There is just one page for configuration which has different segments as described below.
General details
This segment allows the user to configure the following details
Location (eg: NTPC-Faridabad)
DAS SL. No. (serial number of DAS unit)
S/w version (as given by manufacturer. No entry allowed)
*Interval: 1 to 49 minutes (configurable by user)
APN (Access Point Name)name (eg: airtelgprs.com)
LAN/GPRS :T o enter 00 for no data transfer, 01 for LAN and 10 for SIM card
*Example: When the interval time is 5 minutes, the data from DAS unit gets transferred to servers
every 5 minutes. Data in DAS gets saved for every one minute. After 5 minutes, we get one file that
has data averaged over 5 minutes . This file gets transferred to servers simultaneously after 5
minutes since in the present example interval time is 5 minutes. This is possible only when
connectivity is established.
FTP details
Totally 5 FTPs are being configured for NTPC project to transfer data from DAS unit to the following
CPCB server
State PCB server
NTPC central server in Noida
Local PC which is part of EQMS
NTPC site server.
The details to be entered include, serial no. enable or disable, FTP IP, User name, password, Inbound
and outbound.
FTP IP, user ID and password to be given by respective users. We have 5 users in the present case.
Each FTP will have two folders, inbound and outbound.
Inbound contains the data received from DAS unit which has to be transferred to the user.
Outbound contains the data received from user which has to be transferred to the DAS unit.
The above said inbound and outbound folders facilitate bidirectional communication.
LAN details
The details to be entered in this segment are

DAS unit/Data logger IP
Subnet mask
DNS server IP
DIPS (Digital Inputs)
These are digital (Contact) inputs: DAS has 4 contact inputs.

The details to be entered in this segment include
Enable (1) or Disable(0) and Description of the input.
When enabled (E/D=1), the channel becomes operational.
Analogue Inputs
No. of channels are configurable based on the availability of channels. DAS unit has 12 channels (all
accept 4-20mA signals). Therefore no. of channels can be configured anywhere between 1 and 12.
No. of channels is entered in the specified column.
The other details to be entered are as follows.
Sensor ID (not applicable to NTPC as it is used for digital communication like RS485). The sensor ID
thus in the present case will be 1
Reading enabled (E/D=1) or disabled (E/D=0). When enabled parameter is displayed in DAS.
Transmission enabled (E/D=1) or disabled (E/D=0). When enabled parameter is transmitted from
DAS.
Sensor name (eg: BOD)
Sensor code :TOC-1; BOD-2; COD-3; pH-4; TSS-5; Flow-8; Temp-9; oil in water-12; Conductivity-7;
S-Low (Signal low) eg: 4mA
S-High (Signal high) eg: 20mA
Unit (eg: c for current)
LRV: Lower Range Value (Value of the parameter to be displayed corresponding to 4mA input)
URV: Upper Range Value (Value of the parameter to be displayed corresponding to 20mA input)
E.U.: Engineering Units (eg: mg/L)
C-type (current type) (eg: 420 for 4 to 20mA)
ALV: Alarm Low Value (eg: If this value is 20 and the parameter value goes 20, alarm is generated)
AHV: Alarm High Value (eg: If this value is 70 and the parameter value goes 70, alarm is generated)
BM: This is the value of m in the equation Y=mX+c and is for BOD computation
BC: This is the value of c in the equation Y=mX+c and is for BOD computation
BLV: This is BOD Low Value (Alarm)
BHV: This is BOD High Value (Alarm)
CM: This is the value of m in the equation Y=mX+c and is for COD computation
CC: This is the value of c in the equation Y=mX+c and is for COD computation
CLV: This is COD Low Value (Alarm)
CHV: This is COD High Value (Alarm)
It is to be noted that the values of BOD and COD are computed from the value of TOC.
Whenever, TOC is considered, the system by default generates BOD and COD parameters in the
display (Analogue status page).
Alarms are generated in this segment

Display
Analogue status
Sensor name, parameter value, parameter units and status are displayed in this page.
The status reads OK, when the parameter is within the alarm limits set in the configuration page.
The readings get refreshed every minute
Digital input/output status
The status of Digital input/output will be displayed in two tables in this page.
For each I/O, there will be description and the present status (ON/OFF).
Digital outputs are considered in the present case.
The readings get refreshed every minute
Screen shots
\
SWAN REAL TIME NETWORK PVT. LTD.
SEW SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION
1|Page
Table of Contents
Current Channel Dashboard .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 4
Company: ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6
StationDetails: ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 7
Channel .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7
Graphs ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 8
History Trends ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 8
Live Graph ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 10
Reports ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 11
Data Report .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 11
RawData Report ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 12
Alarm Report ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 12
Summary Report ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 13
Diurnal Graph ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 14
Annual Cummulative Mass of Pollutants Report ..................................................................................................................................................... 16
Alarm Reading Report: ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 17
Events Reading Report: ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 18
Application Settings ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 20
Monitoring Type ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 20
Parameter Type........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 21
Alarms ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 21
2|Page
Parameter Order Settings ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 22
Config Settings ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 23
Email Settings........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 25
Features ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 25
1. Email Configuration ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 25
2. SMS Configuration ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 26
User Settings ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 27
Data Acquisition System .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 30
Softwares & Installation Location ................................................................................................................................................................................ 31
NTPC requirement Features Check List ....................................................................................................................................................................... 32
3|Page
The installed SEW V2.2 software will be in a Local PC (at each Site) at this folder C:\Program Files (x86)\ SEW2.2\
a E iroWat h are . Ope the Co figetti gs. o fig file from this folder, this will have the database configurations for the
station/central database that is installed using SEW Installer. Apply the settings for the database server and SEW database in the
ConfigSettings.config file, as shown in the following diagram.
Current Channel Dashboard:
Now open the SEW V2.2 software from the installation folder or from the desktop shortcut, it brings up the login screen. Login to the
application with the default credentials Ad i a d s a realti e as the password. This brings up the Current Channel
4|Page
Dashboard screen, if the company, stations & parameters are configured and data is being logged then the current channel data will
be displayed on this screen as shown in the following screen.
If they are not configured it displays the empty screen.
5|Page
Company:
tarti g ith Co pa Co figuratio , li k o the Company fro left side pa el tree ie , it ope s the o pa ies list if there are
any and if there are no companies in the list user could add a company using the following screen.
The upper portio of the Co pa I fo ta ill list out the o pa ies a d lo er portio ill displa the o pa i for atio in
detail for the selected item from the list.
6|Page
StationDetails:
The second node from the tree view is StationDetails, it opens the stations list if there are any and if there are no stations in the list
user ould add a statio li ki g o Add utto fro the detail i do .
Channel
The third node from the tree view is Channel, it opens the channel list if there are any and if there are no channel in the list user
ould add a ha el for ea h e er statio li ki g o Add utto fro the detail i do .
7|Page
Cli ki g o Edit utto ill ope up the selected channel in edit mode so that the user could apply modifications to the channel
information and update it.
Graphs: There are 4 different graphs that can be generated in the software they are HistoryTrends, Live Graph, Diurnal graph,
Windrose & Pollutionrose.
History Trends:
This feature generates an annonated graph (trends) for the selected station and parameters. This will be generated on one year data starting
from the current date and time. The criteria options available for this graph are as shown in the below image. Cli ki g o ele t a Co pa
drop down will retrieve all the companies that are live (as shown in below image), and enables the user to select a company for which the graph
is to e ge erated. Cli ki g o ele t a tatio drop down will retrieve all the Live Stations of the selected company (as shown in below image),
and enables the user to select a station for which the graph is to be generated.
8|Page
Cli ki g o ele t Para eters drop down will retrieve all the active parameters of the selected station (as shown in below image), and user
ould sele t ultiple para eters he ki g the he k o s fro the para eter list. ele t All Che k Bo a e he ked hen the user
wanted to select all the parameters, instead of checking each parameter individually.
The elo sho i age is the ge erated histor tre ds graph for a statio a d its para eters. The Data Vie i this graph ill display the
data on which the graph is generated. Following images are in bar graph and line graph representation.
9|Page
Live Graph:
This feature makes the user to view the live graph generated on contemporary data of the selected parameter from a station. The criteria can be
applied as shown in the below image. Cli ki g o ele t a Co pa drop down will retrieve all the companies that are live (as shown in below
image), and enables the user to select a company for which the graph is to be generated. Cli ki g o ele t a tatio drop do ill retrie e
all the Live Stations of the selected company (as shown in below image), and enables the user to select a station for which the graph is to be
10 | P a g e
generated. Cli ki g o ele t a Para eter drop down will retrieve all the active parameters of the selected station (as shown in below image),
and user could select a parameters from the parameter list.
A line graph will be generated starting from the latest data value of the selected parameter to past 5 minutes data. This graph will extend the
generated line as the parameters are retrieved from the station every minute; this enables the user to view the online data graph for the
selected parameter as shown in the following image.
Reports: We have the following reports that can be generated using the software Data Report, RawData Report, Alarm Report,
Summary Report, Pivot Report.
Data Report: This report is used to generate hourly/2 hours/4H/6H/8H/12H average report for a certain time period and selected
para eters. Cli ki g o the tatisti al Vie ill ge erate statisti al report for the riteria applied.
11 | P a g e
RawData Report: This a minute data/raw data report that will be generate for the chosen time period.
Alarm Report: Based on the alarm settings for the selected parameter it generates the report that will have the data of the
parameter that exceded the maximum alarm value and is less than the minimum alarm value. It brings the count of minutes for each
hour of the selected time period where the alarms are raised.
12 | P a g e
638-94581
Oct. 2011
ON-LINE TOTAL ORGANIC

CARBON ANALYZER
TOC-4200
USER'S MANUAL
Read the instruction manual thoroughly before you use the product.
Keep this instruction manual for future reference.
This page is intentionally left blank.
Introduction
Read this Instruction Manual thoroughly before using

TOC-4200.
Thank you for purchasing the TOC-4200 (hereafter referred to as the "instrument"). This manual
describes the installation, operation, hardware validation, usage cautions, accessories and options for
this product. Read this manual thoroughly before using the product and operate the product in
accordance with the instructions in this manual.
Also, keep this manual for future reference.
Original version is approved in English.
IMPORTANT
If the user or usage location changes, ensure that this Instruction Manual is always kept together with
the product.
If this manual or a product warning label is lost or damaged, immediately contact your Shimadzu
representative to request a replacement.
To ensure safe operation, read all Safety Instructions before using the product.
To ensure safe operation, contact your Shimadzu representative if product installation, adjustment, or
re-installation (after the product is moved) is required.
Notice
Information in this manual is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment
on the part of the vendor.
Any errors or omissions which may have occurred in this manual despite the utmost care taken in its
production will be corrected as soon as possible, although not necessarily immediately after
detection.
All rights are reserved, including those to reproduce this manual or parts thereof in any form without
permission in writing from Shimadzu Corporation.
Other company names and product names mentioned in this manual are trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective companies. The TM and symbols are omitted in this manual.
2011 Shimadzu Corporation. All rights reserved.
TOC-4200 i
Introduction
Notes Regarding this Instruction Manual
Indications Used in This Manual

Dangers, Warnings, Cautions, and Notes are indicated using the following conventions:
Indication Meaning
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will
DANGER result in serious injury or death.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could
WARNING result in serious injury or possibly death.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may
CAUTION result in minor to moderate injury or equipment damage.
Emphasizes additional information that is provided to ensure the
proper use of this product.
The following symbols are used in this manual:
Indication Meaning
Indicates an action that must not be performed.
Indicates an action that must be performed.
Indicates information provided to improve product performance.
Indicates the location of related reference information.
Indicates text displayed on screen including buttons, menu items,

[ ] settings, screen names, and icon names.
Example: Click [OK].
ii TOC-4200
Safety Instructions
Safety Instructions
Make sure you read and understand this "Operational Precautions" section before using the product
for the first time. Always observe the precautions described in this section as they are crucial for
maintaining safety.
Product Applications
WARNING
This device is a total organic carbon analyzer. Do NOT use this instrument for
any purpose other than that described in this manual.
Using this instrument for other purposes could result in accidents.
Installation Site
WARNING
Do NOT install the instrument at a site where fire is prohibited.
The instrument contains parts that become extremely hot. In addition, be aware that fire
may break out due to inflammable substances generated from samples that contain large
amounts of volatile organic substances.
Always install fire extinguishers nearby as a safety precaution.
Do NOT use the instrument in hazardous areas.

The construction of the instrument is not explosion-proof.
CAUTION
Do NOT install the instrument near equipment that generates strong magnetic
fields, electric fields, or high frequency waves.
Add a noise filter to power supply lines that may suffer from excessive noise.
TOC-4200 iii
Introduction
Installation
In order to ensure safety when using this instrument, contact your Shimadzu representative to request
installation, adjustment, or reinstallation, after moving the instrument, by a technician from or
designated by Shimadzu.
WARNING
Always secure the instrument using foundation bolts to prevent it from tipping
over if an earthquake occurs.
The instrument may tip over due to shaking and cause personal injury.
Only connect a suitable power supply to the instrument.

Using an incompatible power supply voltage could result in fire, electric shock, or
malfunction.
Ground the power supply appropriately. (Class 3 grounding, grounding

resistance: less than 100 )
Improper grounding could cause an electric shock. Grounding is also important to secure
stable instrument operation.
CAUTION
Do NOT use objects such as water pipes, gas pipes, or lightning arresters for
grounding purposes.
Using such objects for grounding could cause accidents, instrument damage or
malfunction, and electric shock.
Do NOT touch or spill any waste liquid discharged from the drain tubing.
Waste liquid from the drain tubing may contain corrosive substances including acids and
direct contact with the skin could cause personal injury.
Contact your Shimadzu representative to request installation, adjustment, or

reinstallation, after moving the instrument, by a technician from or designated by
Shimadzu.
Failure to observe the instruction could result in personal injury or damage to the
instrument. This is also important to secure stable instrument operation.
Release all discharged gas either outside or into an exhaust pit.

Release discharged gas below atmospheric pressure in order to prevent backpressure.
Beware of gaps between the components during installation.

Injury may result if fingers become caught.
Be careful not to pinch your fingers when opening and closing doors on the
instrument.
Doing so could result in personal injury.
iv TOC-4200
Safety Instructions
Operation
DANGER
Never touch any energized internal components.
High-voltage terminals are located on the inside of the cover on top of the instrument.
Do NOT remove the cover or touch the devices contained within. Doing so could result
in serious accidents including electrocution.
If you detect the odor of ozone when using the instrument, turn OFF the
instrument's power switch, provide ventilation, and contact your Shimadzu
service representative.
Continued use of the ozone generator in this state is dangerous to the respiratory system
and may damage the instrument.
Inspect the cable insulation for damage before use.

Using cables with damaged insulation could result in serious accidents including
electrocution.
WARNING
Do NOT measure explosive, combustible, or inflammable substances or
introduce them into the instrument.
The instrument contains parts that become extremely hot. Explosive, combustible, or
inflammable substances may cause fire to break out.
Always install fire extinguishers nearby as a safety precaution.
Always wear protective eyewear and protective gloves when handling reagent
and samples.
Solution entering the eyes may cause blindness.
If solution enters your eyes, immediately rinse your eyes and seek medical attention.
CAUTION
If operation is problematic or unusual noises are heard, stop using the
instrument immediately and contact your Shimadzu service representative.
Do NOT raise the temperature of the electric furnace without the combustion
tube installed.
This may damage sample injection parts (plastic parts).
In order to prevent these parts deforming when heating up the electric furnace without
the combustion tube installed, either remove the parts from the instrument in advance or
cover the hole to the center of the electric furnace with quartz wool or other suitable
insulator.
TOC-4200 v
Introduction
CAUTION
Do NOT touch the electric furnace with your hands or any other part of your
body when increasing the temperature of the electric furnace.
The area around the center of the electric furnace (where the combustion tube is
inserted) is extremely hot and may cause burns.
Do NOT press on the touchscreen with hard, sharp objects.

The touchscreen is designed to be touched lightly with fingers. Pressing down hard with
your fingers or pressing with a sharp object will damage the touchscreen.
Do NOT touch the touchscreen with wet hands.

Touching the touchscreen with wet hands or spilling water on the touchscreen may cause
it to malfunction.
Do NOT close the door with USB flash memory connected.

Doing so could cause breakage of USB flash memory or damage to the instrument.
Inspection and Maintenance
DANGER
Inspect the condition of cables at regular intervals.
Damaged cable insulation could result in an electric shock.
WARNING
Strictly follow the micro syringe removal/installation procedure.
Failure to follow the procedure when removing or installing a syringe could result in
personal injury due to the discharge of acid for IC removal (dilute hydrochloric acid)
from the syringe connection port.
CAUTION
Do NOT touch the combustion tube or catalyst when the electric furnace is hot.
Doing so could result in burns.
Check the temperature of the electric furnace on the monitor screen. Only handle the
combustion tube and catalyst after confirming that the temperature of the electric
furnace has decreased to room temperature on the monitor screen.
Do NOT use any service tool such as a spanner when handling the combustion
tube.
Doing so could cause breakage of the combustion tube and possible injury.
vi TOC-4200
Safety Instructions
CAUTION
Do NOT allow any part of your body to come near the syringe pump type sample
injector while in operation.
Do NOT allow the syringe barrel to sustain physical impacts.

The syringe barrel is made of glass.
Physical impacts may cause breakage and possible injury.
Do NOT apply excessive force to the syringe when attaching it to the holder.
This may cause the syringe to break.
Do NOT damage any part of the plunger tip.

This may cause leaks to occur.
Do NOT allow combustion tubes to sustain physical impacts.

Combustion tubes are made of quartz glass.
Do NOT allow carrier gas purification tubes to sustain physical impacts.

Carrier gas purification tubes are made of quartz glass.
Do NOT allow POC combustion tubes to sustain physical impacts.

POC combustion tubes are made of quartz glass.
Do NOT allow the CO2 absorber container for POC measurement to sustain
physical impacts.
The CO2 absorber container for POC measurement is made of glass.
Do NOT allow the ozone treatment unit vessel to sustain physical impacts.
The ozone treatment unit vessel is made of quartz glass.
Do NOT attempt to repair the instrument yourself.

Contact your Shimadzu service representative when maintenance is required.
Do NOT modify or disassemble the instrument.

Doing so could result in an electric shock or accidents from short circuits. This could
also cause personal injury or damage to the instrument.
When removing the reactor, do NOT undo anything other than the prescribed
reactor screws.
The removal of other parts may result in damage to the reactor.
TOC-4200 vii
Introduction
CAUTION
Always perform routine inspections.
Preventative maintenance is necessary to maintain long term instrument safety and
performance.
Fill the cut areas on the insulator, located at the top of the electric furnace, with
quartz wool without leaving any space unfilled.
Any unfilled space could cause damage to the instrument.
Do NOT inhale quartz wool when filling.

This could adversely affect your respiratory system.
Always wear protective gloves when handling the combustion tube.

Combustion tubes are made of quartz glass. Personal injury could occur.
Always tighten connections with your fingers when attaching the syringe.
Do NOT use tools since overtightening may cause deformation of the internal valve
body, leaks, or breakage.
Only use the plunger tip prescribed by Shimadzu.

The use of other plunger tips may result in malfunction or a decrease in performance.
Always wear protective eyewear and protective gloves when handling

hydrochloric acid.
Hydrochloric acid is a deleterious substance.
Direct contact with skin could cause personal injury.
Always handle hydrochloric acid in well ventilated areas.

Hydrochloric acid produces volatile gas.
When adding hydrochloric acid to pure water, always cool the container used
with water as required.
Heat is generated when adding hydrochloric acid to pure water.
Always wear protective eyewear, protective gloves, and a protective mask when
handling dehydrated lithium hydroxide crystals.
Dehydrated lithium hydroxide crystals comprise a corrosive (strongly basic) powder.
Direct contact with skin and inhalation could cause personal injury.
Always stop the instrument before performing maintenance on the

chemiluminescence detector.
Contact with drive parts or removal of tubing while the instrument is operating could
cause the drive parts to suddenly move, resulting in personal injury.
Do NOT allow your fingers to become caught in parts of the instrument when the
8-port valve rotates.
This task requires the application of force for the initial rotation, which may lead to
personal injury.
viii TOC-4200
Safety Instructions
CAUTION
Always stop instrument operation when attaching or removing tubing from the
sample injector of the 8-port valve or other moving parts.
cause the drive parts to suddenly move, resulting in personal injury. Liquid may also
leak from tubing, which may lead to corrosion.
If using the optional sample stream kit, stop the supply of water when attaching
or removing tubing from the sample aspiration port on the 8-port valve.
Sample water pressure is maintained with respect to the sample aspiration port on the
8-port valve of the sample water sampler even when instrument operation is stopped.
Sample may spill from any removed tubing and cause corrosion of parts.
Always turn OFF the power switch on the instrument before replacing the oil
seal.
Unexpected rotation of the mixing blades may cause personal injury.
Dangers Associated with Repair, Overhaul and Modification
CAUTION
Do NOT modify or disassemble the instrument without permission.
Doing so could result in an electric shock or accidents from short circuits. This could
also cause personal injury or damage to the instrument.
Contact your Shimadzu service representative when repairs are required.

Failure to observe the instruction could result in fire, electric shock or personal injury.
TOC-4200 ix
Introduction
Emergency and Power Outage Measures

Refer to the following items if an emergency stop or power outage occurs.
Item Description Reference

Immediately turn OFF the power switch if the
"3.2.3 Emergency Stop" P.14
Emergency stop instrument starts making a strange noise or
"7.1 Inspection" P.109
gives off a questionable odor.
Instrument stops due to a
The instrument will stop when an instantaneous
momentary stoppage or "3.2.4 Responding to a Power
decrease in voltage occurs due to factors such
instantaneous decrease in Failure" P.14
as a lightening strike.
voltage
x TOC-4200
Warning Labels
Warning Labels
Part Number: S037-72999-04
Part Number: S631-85661
TOC-4200 xi
Introduction
Right side of the instrument
Left side of the instrument
xii TOC-4200
Warranty
Warranty
Shimadzu provides the following warranty for this product.
1. Period: Please contact your Shimadzu representative for information about the period
of this warranty.
2. Description: If a product/part failure occurs for reasons attributable to Shimadzu during the
warranty period, Shimadzu will repair or replace the product/part free of
charge. However, in the case of products which are usually available on the
market only for a short time, such as personal computers and their peripherals/
parts, Shimadzu may not be able to provide identical replacement products.
3. Limitation of 1. In no event will Shimadzu be liable for any lost revenue, profit or data, or for
Liability: special, indirect, consequential, incidental or punitive damages, however
caused regardless of the theory of liability, arising out of or related to the use
of or inability to use the product, even if Shimadzu has been advised of the
possibility of such damage.
2. In no event will Shimadzu's liability to you, whether in contract, tort
(including negligence), or otherwise, exceed the amount you paid for the
product.
4. Exceptions: Failures caused by the following are excluded from the warranty, even if they
occur during the warranty period.
1. Improper product handling
2. Repairs or modifications performed by parties other than Shimadzu or
Shimadzu designated companies
3. Product use in combination with hardware or software other than that
designated by Shimadzu
4. Computer viruses leading to device failures and damage to data and software,
including the product's basic software
5. Power failures, including power outages and sudden voltage drops, leading to
device failures and damage to data and software, including the product's basic
software
6. Turning OFF the product without following the proper shutdown procedure
leading to device failures and damage to data and software, including the
product's basic software
7. Reasons unrelated to the product itself
8. Product use in harsh environments, such as those subject to high temperatures
or humidity levels, corrosive gases, or strong vibrations
9. Fires, earthquakes, or any other act of nature, contamination by radioactive or
hazardous substances, or any other force majeure event, including wars, riots,
and crimes
10.Product movement or transportation after installation
11. Consumable items
Note:Recording media such as floppy disks and CD-ROMs are
considered consumable items.
* If there is a document such as a warranty provided with the product, or there is a separate contract agreed upon
that includes warranty conditions, the provisions of those documents shall apply.
* A separate warranty applies to special specification products and system products.
TOC-4200 xiii
Introduction
After-Sales Service and Availability of

Replacement Parts
After-Sales Service If any problem occurs with this product, perform an inspection and take
appropriate corrective action as described in this manual's
troubleshooting section. If the problem persists, or the symptoms are not
covered in the troubleshooting section, contact your Shimadzu
representative.
Replacement Parts Replacement parts for this product will be available for a period of seven
Availability (7) years after the product is discontinued. Thereafter, such parts may
cease to be available.
Note, however, that the availability of units or parts not manufactured by
Shimadzu shall be determined by the relevant manufacturers.
Maintenance, Inspections, and Adjustment

In order to maintain the instrument's performance and obtain accurate measurement data, daily
inspection and periodic inspection are necessary.
For daily maintenance and periodic inspection, see "7 Maintenance".
For consumable parts and maintenance parts, see "10 Technical Information".
The replacement cycle for each part is given at a rough estimate.
Replacement may be required earlier than the replacement cycle depending on the environment and
frequency of usage.
Disposal Precautions
Dispose of this instrument according to local regulations for the relevant area and request
processing by an industrial waste disposal company. Gather and seal insulation material waste into
plastic bags and request disposal by an industrial waste disposal company licensed to process glass,
concrete, and ceramic waste.
All used catalyst should be sent to a licensed industrial waste disposal company.
All used CO2 absorbers should be sent to a licensed industrial waste disposal company.
All used halogen scrubbers should be sent to a licensed industrial waste disposal company.
All used catalyst from the ozone treatment unit should be sent to a licensed industrial waste disposal
company.
The optional measurement circuit for purgeable organic carbon (POC) uses a CO2 absorber filled
with lithium hydroxide to remove carbon dioxide. All used lithium hydroxide crystals should be
sent to a licensed industrial waste disposal company.
xiv TOC-4200
Action for Environment (WEEE)
Action for Environment (WEEE)

To all users of Shimadzu equipment in the
European Union:
Equipment marked with this symbol indicates that it was sold on or after 13th
August 2005, which means it should not be disposed of with general household
waste. Note that our equipment is for industrial/professional use only.
Contact Shimadzu service representative when the equipment has reached

the end of its life. They will advise you regarding the equipment take-back.
WEEE Mark
With your co-operation we are aiming to reduce contamination from waste electronic and electrical
equipment and preserve natural resource through re-use and recycling.
Do not hesitate to ask Shimadzu service representative, if you require further information.
TOC-4200 xv
Introduction
Electromagnetic Compatibility
This product complies with European standard EN55011 class A for electromagnetic emission and
EN61326-1 for electromagnetic immunity.
EN55011 Emissions (Electromagnetic Interference)

This product complies with European EMI (Electro Magnetic Interference) standard EN55011 class
A equipment. This product is not designed for use in a residential environment.
when this product causes an electromagneticdisturbance to devices being used near this product, create an
appropriate distance between those devices and this product in order to eliminate the disturbance.
In addition, please connect this product to a large power supply of the capacity as much as possible.
EN61326-1 Immunity (Electromagnetic Susceptibility)

This product complies with European standard EN61326-1 for electromagnetic immunity.
Test conditions are as follows.
IEC 61000-4-2 Electrostatic Discharge: Air: 8 kV, Direct: 4 kV,
IEC 61000-4-3 Radiated, Radio-Frequency, 10 V/m (0.08-1 GHz), 3 V/m (1.4-2 GHz),
Electromagnetic Field: 1 V/m (2-2.7 GHz)
IEC 61000-4-4 Transient/Burst 2.0 kV to AC power line and ground
(Electrical Fast Transients): 1.0 kV signal lines
IEC 61000-4-5 Voltage Surge: 1.0 kV line to line, 2 kV line to ground
IEC 61000-4-6 Conducted RF Immunity: 3 Vrms (150 kHz-80 MHz)
IEC 61000-4-11 Voltage Variations/Dips/Interrupts: 0 % UT 1.0 cycles (20 ms),
40 % UT 10 cycles (200 ms),
70 % UT 25 cycles (500 ms),
0 % UT 250 cycles (5000 ms)
Compliance with these standards does not ensure that the product can operate at a level of electromagnetic
interference that is stronger than the level tested.
Interference stronger than the values specified in the condition above may cause the product to
malfunction.
To above electromagnetic disturbances, follow the recommendations below.
(1) Before touching the product, discharge the electro static charged in operator's body to ground
touching metallic structure connected to ground.
(2) Do not install this product in such environment where strong electromagnetic fields are generated
near by.
xvi TOC-4200
Regulatory Information
Regulatory Information
For Europe:
The Product complies with the requirements.
EMC Directive 2004/108/EC
LOW VOLTAGE Directive 2006/95/EC
Product Name Total Organic Carbon (/Total Nitrogen) Analyzer
Model Name TOC-4200
Manufacturer SHIMADZU CORPORATION

ANALYTICAL & MEASURING
INSTRUMENTS DIVISION
Address 1 NISHINOKYO-KUWABARACHO
NAKAGYO-KU KYOTO,604-8511,JAPAN
Authorized Representative in EU Shimadzu Europa GmbH
Address Alberlt-Hahn-Strasse 6-10, 47269 Duisburg, F.R.Germany
TOC-4200 xvii
Introduction
xviii TOC-4200
Contents
Introduction
Notes Regarding this Instruction Manual.......................................................................................ii
Safety Instructions ........................................................................................................................ iii
Emergency and Power Outage Measures.....................................................................................x
Warning Labels.............................................................................................................................xi
Warranty ..................................................................................................................................... xiii
After-Sales Service and Availability of Replacement Parts ........................................................ xiv
Maintenance, Inspections, and Adjustment ................................................................................ xiv
Disposal Precautions .................................................................................................................. xiv
Action for Environment (WEEE) ..................................................................................................xv
Electromagnetic Compatibility .................................................................................................... xvi
Regulatory Information .............................................................................................................. xvii
1 Overview
1.1 Features...............................................................................................................1
1.1.1 Operations for Administrators and Operators..................................................................... 2
2 Part Names and Functionality

2.1 Instrument............................................................................................................3
2.1.1 Exterior ............................................................................................................................... 3
2.1.2 Interior ................................................................................................................................ 4
2.1.3 Options ............................................................................................................................... 5
2.2 Operation Panel...................................................................................................7

2.2.1 Screen Configuration.......................................................................................................... 7
2.2.2 Top Menu Screen ............................................................................................................... 8
2.2.3 Adjusting the Screen Contrast............................................................................................ 9
2.2.4 Operation and Alarm Sounds ............................................................................................. 9
3 Startup and Shutdown

3.1 Checks Prior to Startup......................................................................................11
3.2 Startup and Shutdown .......................................................................................11
3.2.1 Startup .............................................................................................................................. 11
3.2.2 Shutdown ......................................................................................................................... 12
Normal Shutdown ....................................................................................................................... 12
Prolonged Shutdown .................................................................................................................. 12
3.2.3 Emergency Stop ............................................................................................................... 14
TOC-4200 xix
Contents
3.2.4 Responding to a Power Failure ........................................................................................ 14
4 Measurement Preparation
4.1 Preparing for Measurement............................................................................... 15
5 Operation
5.1 Operation Procedures ....................................................................................... 17
5.2 Measurement..................................................................................................... 18
5.2.1 Configuring Online Measurement Conditions and Starting Measurement ....................... 18
5.2.2 Configuring Detailed Conditions for Online Measurement ............................................... 19
Measurement Conditions for Each Stream ................................................................................. 21
Schedule ..................................................................................................................................... 24
Schedule Setting Example .......................................................................................................... 32
Conditions for Alarms, Output, and Calculation Processing ....................................................... 38
Automatic Calibration and Control Sample Measurement Conditions ........................................ 43
Measurement Operation Settings ............................................................................................... 46
Loading, Saving, and Printing Measurement Conditions ............................................................ 51
5.2.3 Configuring Offline Measurement Conditions and Starting Measurement ....................... 53
5.3 Measurement and Checking Results................................................................. 55

5.3.1 Display During Measurement and Display of Results (Online Measurement).................. 55
Standard Measurement Mode..................................................................................................... 55
Load Calculation Measurement Mode ........................................................................................ 57
EPA Mode ................................................................................................................................... 58
5.3.2 Detailed Display During Measurement and for Measurement Results
(Online/Offline Measurement) .......................................................................................... 59
Measurement Value Display ....................................................................................................... 59
Peak Display ............................................................................................................................... 61
Full Display and Specific Display of Peaks ................................................................................. 62
5.3.3 Operations During Online Measurement .......................................................................... 63
Stat Measurement....................................................................................................................... 64
Stat Calibration............................................................................................................................ 65
5.3.4 Operations During Offline Measurement .......................................................................... 66
5.4 Calibration ......................................................................................................... 67

5.4.1 Starting Calibration and Creating Calibration Curves....................................................... 67
Online Batch Calibration ............................................................................................................. 68
Selected Calibration .................................................................................................................... 69
Creating and Editing Calibration Curves ..................................................................................... 70
Deleting and Printing Calibration Curves .................................................................................... 74
5.4.2 Calibration and Detailed Calibration Results Display ....................................................... 75
Full Display and Specific Display of Peaks ................................................................................. 76
Operations During Calibration..................................................................................................... 77
5.5 Reports .............................................................................................................. 78

5.5.1 Report Display .................................................................................................................. 78
Measurement Reports................................................................................................................. 79
Error and Alarm Reports ............................................................................................................. 81
xx TOC-4200
Contents
Maintenance Reports.................................................................................................................. 82
Calibration and Control Sample Measurement Reports ............................................................. 82
Room Temperature Reports ....................................................................................................... 85
5.5.2 Searching, Saving, and Printing Reports ......................................................................... 86
Searching Reports ...................................................................................................................... 87
Printing........................................................................................................................................ 87
6 System Settings
6.1 System Settings.................................................................................................89
6.1.1 System Information .......................................................................................................... 90
6.1.2 System Settings ............................................................................................................... 91
Date and Time ............................................................................................................................ 92
Screen Display and Printer Settings ........................................................................................... 92
Gas Flow Rate ............................................................................................................................ 93
Password Protection................................................................................................................... 94
Automatic Protection................................................................................................................... 95
Conversion Formula List ............................................................................................................. 96
6.1.3 Monitor ............................................................................................................................. 98
Instrument Status........................................................................................................................ 98
Gas Flow Rate ............................................................................................................................ 99
Flow Input (When the Relevant Option Is Provided)................................................................. 100
6.1.4 Contact Input and Output Settings ................................................................................. 100
Contact Output.......................................................................................................................... 101
Measurement Pause Signals.................................................................................................... 105
Communications ....................................................................................................................... 106
Flow Input (When the Relevant Option Is Provided)................................................................. 107
6.1.5 Loading and Saving Settings.......................................................................................... 108
7 Maintenance
7.1 Inspection ........................................................................................................109
7.1.1 Routine Inspection.......................................................................................................... 109
Check Points............................................................................................................................. 109
7.1.2 Periodic Inspection ......................................................................................................... 110
Amount of Liquid in the Bottles for Acid for IC Removal, Diluent, Standard Solution ............... 110
Humidifier Water Level ............................................................................................................. 110
Water Level of the Drain Container for the Electronic Dehumidifier ......................................... 110
Water Level of the B-Type Halogen Scrubber .......................................................................... 110
Sample Injection State.............................................................................................................. 110
7.1.3 Simple Performance Check............................................................................................ 112
7.2 Combustion Tube and Catalyst .......................................................................113

7.2.1 Selecting a Catalyst and Filling the Combustion Tube ................................................... 113
Precautions on Initial Use of a New Catalyst ............................................................................ 113
Catalyst for TOC Measurement ................................................................................................ 114
Catalyst for TOC/TN Measurement (When the TN Option Is Provided) ................................... 116
7.2.2 Connecting the Combustion Tube .................................................................................. 117
7.2.3 Washing and Replacing Catalyst and the Combustion Tube ......................................... 121
Catalyst..................................................................................................................................... 121
TOC-4200 xxi
Contents
Combustion Tube...................................................................................................................... 123
7.3 Carrier Gas Purification Tube and Catalyst ..................................................... 123

7.3.1 Filling the Carrier Gas Purification Tube with Catalyst ................................................... 123
7.3.2 Connecting the Carrier Gas Purification Tube................................................................ 124
7.3.3 Washing and Replacing Catalyst and the L-Shaped Combustion Tube......................... 125
7.4 POC Combustion Tube and Catalyst (When the POC Option Is Provided) .... 126
7.4.1 Filling the POC Combustion Tube with Catalyst............................................................. 126
7.4.2 Connecting the POC Combustion Tube ......................................................................... 126
7.4.3 Washing and Replacing Catalyst and the POC Combustion Tube ................................ 126
7.5 Installing the Reagent...................................................................................... 127

7.5.1 Acid for IC Removal........................................................................................................ 127
7.5.2 Diluent ............................................................................................................................ 129
7.6 Preparing and Installing Standard Solution ..................................................... 130

7.6.1 Zero Water (Dilution Water)............................................................................................ 130
7.6.2 Preparing Standard Solution .......................................................................................... 130
TC Standard Solution................................................................................................................ 130
TN Standard Solution................................................................................................................ 130
TN/TOC Mixed Standard Solution............................................................................................. 131
IC Standard Solution (When the IC Option Is Provided) ........................................................... 131
POC Standard Solution (When IC/POC Option Is Provided) .................................................... 131
7.6.3 Installing the Standard Solution...................................................................................... 132
7.7 Replacement ................................................................................................... 133

7.7.1 Maintenance Window ..................................................................................................... 133
Replacing the Syringe ............................................................................................................... 134
Removing Bubbles from Streams ............................................................................................. 138
Adjusting the Injection Status.................................................................................................... 139
Syringe Zero Point Detection .................................................................................................... 140
Regenerating Catalyst............................................................................................................... 140
Setting Residual Sample and Alarm Values ............................................................................. 141
Replacing the Oil Seal............................................................................................................... 142
7.7.2 Connecting and Replacing the CO2 Absorber................................................................ 144
CO2 Absorber for Carrier Gas Purification, Purging the Optical System,
Short-Cell Purge, NOx Absorber, and Sparging ....................................................................... 144
CO2 Absorber for POC Measurement (When the POC Option Is Provided) ............................ 145
7.7.3 Connecting and Replacing the Ozone Treatment Unit (When Provided as an Option).. 147
Connecting the Ozone Treatment Unit...................................................................................... 147
Replacing the Catalyst for the Ozone Treatment Unit............................................................... 148
7.7.4 Halogen Scrubber .......................................................................................................... 149
7.7.5 B-Type Halogen Scrubber .............................................................................................. 149
7.7.6 Replacing O-Rings on the Sliding Sample Injector......................................................... 150
7.7.7 Rotor and Stator for the 8-Port Valve ............................................................................. 150
7.7.8 Chemiluminescence Detector (When Provided as an Option) ....................................... 154
7.7.9 Ozone Generator............................................................................................................ 155
7.8 Additional Maintenance Procedures................................................................ 156

7.8.1 Ensuring Proper 8-Port Valve Operation on Instrument Restart .................................... 156
7.8.2 Cleaning the Flanged Tubing for Sparging..................................................................... 157
xxii TOC-4200
Contents
7.8.3 Supplying the Electronic Dehumidifier Drain Pot with Water.......................................... 158
When the IC or IC-POC Measurement Option Is Provided ...................................................... 159
7.8.4 Supplying the Humidifier with Water .............................................................................. 160
7.8.5 Filling the Printer and Recorder with Chart Paper (When Provided as an Option)......... 161
Filling the Printer with Chart Paper ........................................................................................... 161
Filling the Recorder with Chart Paper ....................................................................................... 163
7.8.6 Cleaning the Sampling Unit (Option) .............................................................................. 164
Multi-stream suspended solids sampling unit ........................................................................... 164
Single Stream Suspended Solids Sampling Unit ...................................................................... 165
Backwash Strainer Sample Sampling Unit ............................................................................... 166
7.8.7 Cleaning the Wash Water Pressure Reducing Valve (Option) ....................................... 167
How to Clean the Strainer......................................................................................................... 167
How to Drain Water .................................................................................................................. 168
8 Troubleshooting
8.1 Problem Indication Methods ............................................................................169
LCD Screen Display ................................................................................................................. 169
Deactivating Instrument and Measurement Value Alarms........................................................ 170
8.2 Error Messages ...............................................................................................171

Fatal Error Messages ............................................................................................................... 171
Instrument Alarm Messages ..................................................................................................... 173
Measurement Value Alarm Messages ...................................................................................... 175
8.3 Responding to Problems .................................................................................176

8.4 Corrective Measures for Malfunctions .............................................................177
Improper Baseline Position for the TOC Detector (NDIR) ........................................................ 177
Improper Baseline Position for the Chemiluminescence Detector............................................ 177
Unstable Baseline for the TOC Detector (NDIR) ...................................................................... 178
Unstable Baseline for the Chemiluminescence Detector.......................................................... 179
Low Sample Measurement Repeatability ................................................................................. 180
Measurement Values Display Zero........................................................................................... 181
9 Installation
9.1 Installation Environment ..................................................................................183
9.2 Connecting and Grounding the Power Supply.................................................184
9.3 Tubing Connections.........................................................................................185
9.3.1 Drain Tubing ................................................................................................................... 185
9.3.2 Gas Line ......................................................................................................................... 186
Gas Supply ............................................................................................................................... 186
Gas Discharge (When the Relevant Options Are Provided) ..................................................... 187
9.3.3 Sample Streams (When the Relevant Options Are Provided)........................................ 187
TOC-4200 xxiii
Contents
10 Technical Information
10.1 Measurement Principles .................................................................................. 189
10.1.1Types of Measurement Methods .................................................................................... 190
NPOC Measurement................................................................................................................. 190
TOC (TC - IC) Measurement..................................................................................................... 190
TOC (POC + NPOC) Measurement.......................................................................................... 190
Peak Shape............................................................................................................................... 191
10.1.2Sample Types and Handling During Measurement........................................................ 192
Measuring Samples that Contain Suspended Solids ................................................................ 192
Measuring Samples that Contain Acids, Alkalis, and Salts....................................................... 192
Performing TC Measurement on Samples that Contain Acids and Salts.................................. 192
Performing TC Measurement on Alkaline Samples .................................................................. 193
Accumulation of Salts................................................................................................................ 193
Using the Dilution Function ....................................................................................................... 193
10.1.3TC (Total Carbon) Measurement Principle..................................................................... 194
10.1.4NPOC (Non-Purgeable Organic Carbon) Measurement Principle ................................. 195
10.1.5TN (Total Nitrogen) Measurement Principle ................................................................... 196
10.1.6POC (Purgeable Organic Carbon) Measurement Principle
(When the IC/POC Option is Provided) .......................................................................... 197
10.1.7IC (Inorganic Carbon) Measurement Principle (When the IC Option is Provided) ......... 198
10.2 Measurement Operations ................................................................................ 199

10.2.1Sample Measurement Method ....................................................................................... 199
10.2.2Carrier Gas Purification .................................................................................................. 200
10.2.3Sample Extraction .......................................................................................................... 200
10.2.4Preprocessing (Sample Dilution, Acidification, and Sparging) ....................................... 201
10.2.5Stream Diagrams............................................................................................................ 202
10.2.6Peak Area Measurement................................................................................................ 208
10.2.7Washing after Measurement Is Complete ...................................................................... 208
10.3 Calibration Curves ........................................................................................... 209

10.3.1Calibration Curves .......................................................................................................... 209
Shifting to the Origin (Zero Shift)............................................................................................... 209
Sparging During Standard Solution Measurement.................................................................... 210
10.3.2Multi-Point Calibration Curves ........................................................................................ 211
10.4 Quantitative Calculation................................................................................... 212

10.4.1Load Calculation............................................................................................................. 212
Load Calculation Formulae ....................................................................................................... 212
Handling Missing Data in the Daily Report Summary ............................................................... 213
10.4.2EPA Calculation ............................................................................................................. 214
TOC Removal Rate Calculation Formula.................................................................................. 214
10.5 Measurement Conditions................................................................................. 215

10.5.1Automatic Setting ........................................................................................................... 215
10.5.2Automatic Change .......................................................................................................... 215
10.6 External Input/Output Signals.......................................................................... 216

10.6.1Contact Input .................................................................................................................. 217
Contact Input Timing Chart ....................................................................................................... 220
xxiv TOC-4200
Contents
10.6.2Contact Output ............................................................................................................... 221

Contact Output Timing Chart .................................................................................................... 226
10.6.3Transmission Output ...................................................................................................... 228
10.6.4Transmission Input (When the Relevant Options are Provided) .................................... 229
10.6.5Serial Input/Output ......................................................................................................... 230
RS-485...................................................................................................................................... 230
RS-232C (When Provided as an Option).................................................................................. 231
10.7 Data Storage on USB Flash Memory ..............................................................232

10.7.1Folder Configuration ....................................................................................................... 232
10.7.2Units of File Storage ....................................................................................................... 233
10.7.3Example of CSV Format Output ..................................................................................... 234
10.8 Printing (Option)...............................................................................................237

10.9 Product Specifications .....................................................................................247
10.10External Dimensions Diagram .........................................................................251
10.11Accessories .....................................................................................................252
10.11.1Standard Accessories................................................................................................... 252
10.11.2Optional Parts ............................................................................................................... 253
10.11.3Additional Functions Available with Options ................................................................. 257
TN, IC Measurement and IC-POC Measurement Options ....................................................... 257
Recorder Kit.............................................................................................................................. 258
Printer Kit .................................................................................................................................. 258
10.12Consumable Parts ...........................................................................................259

10.13Maintenance Parts...........................................................................................262
10.14Material Safety Data Sheets............................................................................263
10.14.1Hydrochloric Acid (HCl) ................................................................................................ 263
10.14.2CO2 Absorber, Ca(OH)2, KOH, NaOH: Soda Lime ...................................................... 266
10.14.3Ceramic Fiber ............................................................................................................... 269
Check Sheet for Periodic Replacement Parts .......................................................................... 271
Index ............................................................................................. 273
TOC-4200 xxv
Contents
xxvi TOC-4200
1 1 Overview
1.1 Features 1
A Broad Range of Measurements Supported
The TOC-4200 instrument measures the amount of carbon in water by applying the principles behind
the catalyst combustion method and non-dispersive infrared gas detection (NDIR) method.
1
A standard specification instrument can measure TC (total carbon) and NPOC (non-purgeable
organic carbon). 1
The addition of options enables the instrument to support a broad range of measurements including
POC (purgeable organic carbon), IC (inorganic carbon), and TN (total nitrogen). 1
"10.1.5 TN (Total Nitrogen) Measurement Principle" P.196
"10.1.6 POC (Purgeable Organic Carbon) Measurement Principle (When the IC/POC Option is
1
Provided)" P.197
"10.1.7 IC (Inorganic Carbon) Measurement Principle (When the IC Option is Provided)" P.198 1
Easy Operation 1
The TOC-4200 features an easy-to-view color LCD touchscreen and straightforward operation.
1
Switch between Multiple Streams
The addition of an option to the TOC-4200 enables measurement that can switch between a
1
maximum of six streams.
1
USB Flash Memory Support
The TOC-4200 supports the reading and writing of configured measurement conditions to and from
1
USB flash memory devices. This is convenient to separate multiple sets of measurement conditions.
1
1
1
1
1
TOC-4200 1
1 Overview
1.1.1 Operations for Administrators and Operators

While operators can perform routine and periodic inspections, measurement condition configuration
and system configuration must be performed by an administrator.
Administrator Tasks
Task Reference
Stopping measurement "5.3.3 Operations During Online Measurement" P.63
"5.3.4 Operations During Offline Measurement" P.66
"Operations During Calibration" P.77
Configuring measurement conditions "5.2.1 Configuring Online Measurement Conditions and Starting
Measurement" P.18
"5.2.2 Configuring Detailed Conditions for Online Measurement"
P.19
"5.2.3 Configuring Offline Measurement Conditions and Starting
Measurement" P.53
Creating and editing calibration curves "Creating and Editing Calibration Curves" P.70
Deleting calibration curve information "Deleting and Printing Calibration Curves" P.74
System configuration "6 System Settings" P.89
Periodic inspection "7.1.2 Periodic Inspection" P.110
Consumable replacement and refilling "7 Maintenance" P.109
Setting a security code in order to access the system configuration prevents inadvertent changes to settings.
For details, see "Password Protection" P.94.
Operator Tasks
Task Reference
Routine inspection
Alarms "7.1.1 Routine Inspection" P.109
Visual inspection of problems inside "8 Troubleshooting" P.169
the instrument, such as water leaks
Operations
Copying measurement data from the "5.5.2 Searching, Saving, and Printing Reports" P.86
instrument using USB flash memory
Checking measurement values on the "5.3.1 Display During Measurement and Display of Results
instrument screen (Online Measurement)" P.55
2 TOC-4200
2 2 Part Names and
Functionality
2.1 Instrument 2
2.1.1 Exterior
2
2
2
Touchscreen
2
2
2
Power switch
2
2
2
Left side of the instrument

2
2
2
2
Right side of the instrument 2
2
TOC-4200 3
2.1.2 Interior
Touchscreen
Pressure
adjustment
knob
8-port valve
Electronic
dehumidifier
B-type halogen
scrubber
Halogen
scrubber
Electric furnace
Diluent bottle
Humidifier
CO2 absorber
Front door Syringe pump type sample injector
Acid bottle for IC removal
Standard solution bottle
4 TOC-4200
2.1 Instrument
2.1.3 Options
Multi-stream suspended solids sampling unit Multi-stream sample switching unit
TOC-4200 5
Single stream sampling unit Single stream suspended solids sampling unit
Backwash strainer sample sampling unit Printer
6 TOC-4200
2.2 Operation Panel
2.2 Operation Panel

2.2.1 Screen Configuration
[Online Meas.] start screen [Online Meas.>Cond.] screen
Power switch ON P.18 P.19
Initialization screen
2
[Offline Measurement>Cond.]
screen P.53
Top menu screen P.8
[Calibration] screen P.67
[Maintenance] screen P.133
[Reports] screen P.78
[System] screen P.89
TOC-4200 7
2.2.2 Top Menu Screen

The top menu screen is displayed after initialization is complete. Press the desired button on the top
menu screen to change to the corresponding operation screen for configuring measurement
conditions, starting measurements, calibration, or maintenance.
Printing/error
Processing screen display

area
Instrument status Current time

USB mark
Name Description Reference

[Online Measurement] Configure online measurement conditions and start online P.18
measurement.
[Offline Measurement] Configure offline measurement conditions and start offline P.53
measurement.
[Calibration] Perform batch calibration, optional calibration, calibration curve P.67
creation and editing.
[Maintenance] Perform zero point adjustment on the syringe, catalyst P.133
regeneration, and bubble removal from streams.
[Reports] Review online measurements, calibration, and malfunction and P.78
alarm reports.
[System] Check the instrument status, contact output, and transmission P.89
conditions.
Processing screen display Displays each processing screen. -
area
Instrument status Displays the status of the instrument. -
Current time Displays the current time. -
This mark is displayed when the instrument recognizes that USB -
(USB mark) flash memory is connected.
This button is displayed at the top right of the screen when printing P.51
(printing/error) or when an error occurred. P.74
P.86
(printing): Click to stop printing. P.170
(error): Click to display the [Alarm] screen.
(printing/error): Click to display a screen used to select the

[Print] or [Alarm] screen.
8 TOC-4200
2.2 Operation Panel
2.2.3 Adjusting the Screen Contrast
1 Press any point on the screen for more than five seconds.
This will display an operation button in each of the four corners of the screen.
2 Press [ ] or [ ] to adjust the contrast.
3 Press [OK].
The buttons in the four corners disappear.
2.2.4 Operation and Alarm Sounds

This instrument outputs a buzzer sound when the screen is pressed or when malfunctions or alarms
occur.
Operations that sound the buzzer and the type of buzzer sound are listed in the table below.
Operation
Sound/ Operation/State Buzzer Sound
Alarm Sound
Operation Turning the power switch ON Long beep once1
sounds
Pressing an operable button Short beep once2
Pressing an inoperable button Short beep twice2
Setting a value outside the allowable range
Measurement complete Long beep twice1
Printing complete Long beep once1
Data output to USB flash memory complete Long beep once1
Alarm sounds Error message displayed Short beep twice2
Instrument alarm occurred Long beep once1
Incorrect password input Short beep twice2
Fatal error occurred Long continuous beep (played until
deactivated)1
1) Long beep: 1 second at 0.5-second intervals

2) Short beep: 0.1 seconds at 0.1-second intervals
TOC-4200 9
10 TOC-4200
3 3 Startup and
Shutdown
3.1 Checks Prior to Startup 3
Always check the following items before starting up the instrument.
The instrument is correctly set up (including wiring and piping connections).
Diluent is prepared.
3
Standard solution is prepared (when required).
Carrier gas is flowing when the temperature of the electric furnace is to be increased. 3
3.2 Startup and Shutdown 3
This section explains how to start up and shut down the instrument after the instrument has been set
up correctly.
3
3.2.1 Startup 3
1 Turn ON the power switch on the right side of the instrument.
Instrument initialization starts and the following screen is displayed during initialization.
3
3
3
3
The top menu screen is displayed after initialization is complete. 3
"2.2.2 Top Menu Screen" P.8
3
If an error message is displayed during initialization, determine the cause of the error and take the
appropriate corrective measures.
For details regarding error messages, see "8.2 Error Messages" P.171.
3
3
3
3
TOC-4200 11
3.2.2 Shutdown
CAUTION
When stopping operation of the instrument, first turn OFF the electric furnace
switch and then wait at least 30 minutes before turning OFF the instrument's
power switch.
The electric furnace must cool down before turning off power to the instrument.
Normal Shutdown
1 Turn OFF the electric furnace switch.
RS-232C connector (option)
ON
Maintenance switch
OFF
ON
ON
Electric furnace switch
Power switch
OFF
OFF
2 Wait at least 30 minutes and then turn OFF the instrument's power switch.
3 Stop the carrier gas supply.
Prolonged Shutdown
Items to prepare
Two containers with pure water (approx. 50 mL for the offline port, approx. 10 mL for the acid aspiration
port)
Three empty containers
1 If necessary, save any data on the instrument to a USB flash memory device.
"Loading, Saving, and Printing Measurement Conditions" P.51
12 TOC-4200
3.2 Startup and Shutdown
2 Take out acid and standard solution.
3 Put the tube of standard solution into an empty container.
4 Put the tubes from the acid aspiration port and offline port into the containers with pure
water.
The offline port requires approx. 50 mL of pure water and the acid aspiration port requires approx.
10 mL.
5 Perform "Bubble Removal".

3
"Removing Bubbles from Streams" P.138
6 Perform offline measurement.

Read measurement conditions from the stream 1 online conditions, and set "5" for the number of
measurements and the maximum number of measurements.
"5.2.3 Configuring Offline Measurement Conditions and Starting Measurement" P.53
7 Remove the containers in which the offline, standard solution, acid, and dilution water
tubes are placed.
Put these tubes into empty containers to prevent dripping.
8 Perform "Bubble Removal".
"Removing Bubbles from Streams" P.138
9 Perform offline measurement under the same conditions as 6.
10 To remove the liquid remaining in the tube, loosen all the tube bushings that connect
to the 8-port valve.
11 Ensure that the liquid is completely removed and tighten the tube bushings.
If sample is accidentally spilled inside the instrument, carefully wipe it up.
12 Turn OFF the electric furnace switch.
13 Wait at least 30 minutes and then turn OFF the instrument's power switch.
14 Stop the carrier gas supply.
TOC-4200 13
3.2.3 Emergency Stop

Immediately turn OFF the power switch if the instrument starts making a strange noise or gives off a
questionable odor.
Always perform an inspection before restarting operation of the instrument. If any problems are
uncovered during the inspection, contact your Shimadzu service representative.
"7.1 Inspection" P.109
3.2.4 Responding to a Power Failure
1 Turn OFF the power switch.
2 Start up the instrument using the normal procedure after power is restored.
Power Failure Recovery Function

Situation Description
When a power failure occurs The online measurement restarts automatically when power is restored.
while measuring online1 The following functionality is also restored:
Transmission output and contact output (stream identification signals)
Instrument alarm, measurement value alarm, contact output (instrument
alarm, measurement value alarm)
When a power failure occurs The initial display screen is displayed.
while measuring offline
1) If a power failure occurs during sample measurement or calibration, the measurement or calibration stops and
cannot be restored.
14 TOC-4200
4 4 Measurement
Preparation
4.1 Preparing for Measurement 4
1 Select the catalyst to use and fill the combustion tube.
4
Catalyst Name Description Reference
Catalyst for TOC
measurement
Use this catalyst for TOC measurement using the TOC
(TC-IC) method or NPOC method. Set the temperature of
P.114
4
the electric furnace to 680 C when using this catalyst.
Note that TN measurement cannot be performed using the
catalyst for TOC measurement. 4
Standard catalyst: For standard usage.
TC high sensitivity catalyst: For usage in measurements
where TOC concentration is less than 1 mgC/L. This type 4
helps to keep blank values low. (When provided as an option)
Catalyst for TOC/TN
measurement
Use this catalyst for TOC and TN measurements. Set the
temperature of the electric furnace to 720 C when using
P.116
4
this catalyst. (When provided as an option)
4
2 Connect the combustion tube.
"7.2.2 Connecting the Combustion Tube" P.117 4

3 Fill the carrier gas purification tube with catalyst and then connect the tube.
4
"7.3 Carrier Gas Purification Tube and Catalyst" P.123
4
4 Attach the 8-port valve cover.
"7.7.7 Rotor and Stator for the 8-Port Valve" P.150

4
5 Install the syringe to the syringe pump type sample injector. 4

"Replacing the Syringe" P.134
4
6 Prepare the reagent and place it in the proper location.
4
"7.5.1 Acid for IC Removal" P.127
4
7 Fill the diluent bottle with water and place it in the proper location.
"7.5.2 Diluent" P.129 4

TOC-4200 15
4 Measurement Preparation
8 Connect the CO2 absorber and ozone treatment unit.
"CO2 Absorber for Carrier Gas Purification, Purging the Optical System, Short-Cell Purge, NOx
Absorber, and Sparging" P.144
"7.7.3 Connecting and Replacing the Ozone Treatment Unit (When Provided as an Option)"
P.147
9 Supply the drain pot of the electronic dehumidifier with water.
"7.8.3 Supplying the Electronic Dehumidifier Drain Pot with Water" P.158
10 Prepare the standard solution and place it in the proper location.
"7.6 Preparing and Installing Standard Solution" P.130
11 Fill the humidifier with water.
"7.8.4 Supplying the Humidifier with Water" P.160
12 Add 0.05 N hydrochloric acid to the B-type halogen scrubber.
"7.7.5 B-Type Halogen Scrubber" P.149
13 Rotate the pressure adjustment knob (P.4) to adjust the carrier gas pressure to
200 kPa on the [Gas Flow] screen accessible from [Monitor].
"Gas Flow Rate" P.99
The carrier gas pressure cannot be adjusted for two minutes after turning ON power to the
instrument because the solenoid valve that supplies the carrier gas is closed for initialization.
The gas flow rate is set in advance to 150 mL/min for carrier gas and 100 mL/min for sparge gas.
Change the gas flow on the [Gas Flow] screen accessible from [System Settings].
"Gas Flow Rate" P.93
14 Configure the system settings.
"6 System Settings" P.89
Preparation for Installed Options

Option Name Description Reference
POC combustion tube Filling with catalyst and connection P.126
Printer, recorder Filling the printer and recorder with chart paper P.161
Electronic dehumidifier Filling the drain pot with water P.158
Humidifier Filling the humidifier with water P.160
16 TOC-4200
5
7
5 Operation
5.1 Operation Procedures 5

This section explains the basic operation procedures for online measurement, offline measurement,
calibration, and reports.
5
Online
Measurement
Configuring Measurement Conditions
and Starting Measurement
P.18 5
Measurement and Checking Results P.55
5
Operations During Measurement P.63
5
Stat Measurement P.63
Stat Calibration P.63

5
5
Offline Configuring Measurement Conditions
Measurement
and Starting Measurement
P.53
5
Measurement and Checking Results P.59
5
Operations During Measurement P.66
5
Calibration Starting Calibration P.68
5
Creating and Editing Calibration Curves P.70
5
Calibration and Checking Results P.75
Operations During Calibration P.77

5
5
Reports Report Display P.78
5
Searching Reports P.86
5
TOC-4200 17
5 Operation
5.2 Measurement
This section explains measurement settings and how to start measurement for both online and offline
measurement.
5.2.1 Configuring Online Measurement Conditions and Starting

Measurement
1 Press [Online Measurement] on the top menu screen.
2 Configure detailed conditions using the [RUN mode], [MEAS. mode], [Initial Calib.],
[Data Reset], and [Auto-Print] settings on the [Online Meas.] screen.

[RUN mode] Set the operation mode for the measurement. P.216
[Local]: Perform measurement according to the configured
schedule.
[Cont. Ctrl. (Level)]: Perform measurement according to the
configured schedule. Measurements are controlled by contact
input.
[Cont. Ctrl. (Pulse)]: All functional operations such as
measurement, calibration, pause are controlled by contact
input.
[Comm. Ctrl.]: All functional operations such as
measurement, calibration, pause are controlled via an RS-485
or RS-232C (option) connection.
18 TOC-4200
5.2 Measurement

[MEAS. mode] Set the measurement mode for measurement. -
[Standard]: Perform standard measurement.
[Load Calc.]: Calculate the load using the concentration and
flow rate of the sample.
[EPA]: Calculate the TOC removal rate by comparing the
TOC concentration of streams 1 and 2.
[Initial Calib.] Set [ON] or [OFF] for calibration before measurement. -
When setting this option to [ON], calibration will start right
after measurement start.
[Data Reset] Set [ON] or [OFF] for resetting any summarized data. -
Set this option to [ON] to reset the analog outputs and any
summary data, such as for daily reports.
[Auto-Print] Set printing to [ON] or [OFF] (when the printer option is -
provided).
When setting this option to [ON], the measurement results
will be printed.
[Meas. Schedule Start] Displays the start date and time of the measurement P.24 5
schedule.
[Cond.] Set detailed measurement conditions. P.19
3 Press [Start].
Online measurement starts and the measurement screen for the configured measurement mode (standard,
load calculation, EPA) is displayed.
Press [Ret.] to return to the top menu screen.
5.2.2 Configuring Detailed Conditions for Online Measurement
1 Press [Cond.] on the [Online Meas.] screen.
If [Use Password] is set to [ON] in the system settings, a screen prompting input of the password is
displayed.
TOC-4200 19
5 Operation
2 Configure settings on the [Online Meas.>Cond.] screen.

[Stream Meas. Cond.] Set the measurement conditions for each stream. P.21
[Schedule] Set the online measurement schedule. P.24
[Alarm Output Calc.] Set alarms, transmission output, and the calculation P.38
method.
[Auto Cal Set the conditions for automatic calibration and control P.43
Control Smpl Meas.] sample measurement.
[Device Action] Set operation settings for the instrument. P.46
Displays the [Online Meas. Cond. Menu] screen. P.51
(menu)
3 Press [Close].
The display returns to the [Online Meas.] screen.
20 TOC-4200
5.2 Measurement
Measurement Conditions for Each Stream
1 On the [Online Meas.>Cond.] screen, press the stream number for which to set
conditions.
2 Set the required conditions for measurement for each stream.
Setting Screen Description

[Online Meas.>Cond. 1/5] screen [Meas. Type]
Stream Measurement Set the measurement type.
number method
Set this option to [OFF] to prevent measurement of the selected
stream.
Measurement method
Set the measurement method.
[Combi]: Measure all measurement types with a single sampling.
[Indiv]: Perform sampling for each measurement type.
[TOC Disp. Type]
Set the name of the TOC value in the measurement results.
5
[TOC]: Displayed as "TOC".
[Meas. Type]: Displayed as the name set above for [Meas. Type].
[Auto Re-meas.]
Set [ON] or [OFF] for automatic remeasurement.
[ON]: If the measurement value exceeds the reference value, the
injection volume and dilution factor are automatically updated and
measurement is performed again.
[OFF]: Measurement is not performed again even if the measurement
value exceeds the reference value.
TOC-4200 21
5 Operation

[Online Meas.>Cond. 2/5] screen [TOC Conv.] / [TN Conv.]
Set [ON] or [OFF] for TOC conversion/TN conversion.
[TOC Conv.] / [TN Conv.]
Set a name for TOC conversion/TN conversion and values of
coefficient A and coefficient B.
Name Coefficient A Coefficient B Conversion formula list
Name: Maximum of four alphanumeric characters or symbols

Coefficient A: -9999 to 9999
Coefficient B: 0.000 to 9999
(TOC conversion formula list)

The [Conversion Formula List] screen is displayed.
Conversion formula selection
Select a conversion formula from the list and set the conversion
coefficients.
"Editing Conversion Formulae" P.96

"Deleting, Saving, and Loading Conversion Formulae" P.97
[Online Meas.>Cond. 3/5] screen [Cal. Curve]
Select a calibration curve.
[Range]
Set the range for the calibration curve type.
TC/NPOC: 0.0 to 20000 (mg/L)
IC: 0.0 to 5000 (mg/L)
POC: 0.0 to 2500 (mg/L)
TN: 0.0 to 10000 (mg/L)
[Dilution Factor]
Set the dilution factor.
Setting range: 1 to 50 (times)
[Inj. Vol.]
Set the injection volume for the calibration curve type.
TC/NPOC/TN (without the high sensitivity measurement option):
20 to 150 (L)
TC/NPOC/TN (with the high sensitivity measurement option):
20 to 500 (L)
IC: 800 to 4500 (L)
POC: 800 to 4500 (L)
22 TOC-4200
5.2 Measurement

[Online Meas.>Cond. 4/5] screen [Acid Vol.]
Set the volume of acid for addition.
Setting range: 0 to 999 (L)
[Sparge Time]
Set the sparge time.
POC: 10 to 999 (seconds)
Other than POC: 0 to 999 (seconds)
[Online Meas.>Cond. 5/5] screen [Repeat]1

Set the number of times to perform measurement. Measurement is
repeated for the set number of times and the mean value is output
as part of the measurement result.
[Max.]1
Set the maximum number of times to perform measurement. If the
SD and CV values for the measurement results do not fall within
5
the reference value range, additional measurements are performed
up to the set limit.
[SD Tol.]2
Set a reference value used to determine whether to automatically
perform additional measurements.
Setting range: 0 to 10000
[CV Tol.]2
1) Set a value that satisfies (number of measurements) (maximum number of measurements).

2) Measurement is complete when the value for either [SD Tol.] or [CV Tol.] falls within the reference value
range.
3 Press [OK].
The display returns to the [Online Meas.>Cond.] screen.
TOC-4200 23
5 Operation
Schedule
1 Press [Schedule] on the [Online Meas.>Cond.] screen.
2 Set the schedule for online measurement.

[Schedule 1/3] screen [Meas. Start Date & Time]
Set the start date and time for the measurement schedule.
[Month]: 1 to 12 (Jan to Dec)
[Date]: 1 to 31
[Year]: 2000 to 2099
[Time]: 00:00 to 23:59
Example1
When entering "0123", "01:23" will be displayed.
[Meas. Timing]
Set the measurement timing.
[Cyclic]: Perform measurement according to the configured cycle.
[Continuous]: Perform continuous measurement using the shortest
measuring period.
[Schedule 2/3] screen2 [Stream]

Set the stream number.
Setting range: Streams 1 to 6
[Cycle(Min)]
Set the measurement cycle.
Setting range: #3 to 1440 (minutes)
[Repetition]
Set the number of times to perform measurement.
[Schedule 3/3] screen Date buttons, day buttons
Day buttons Set pausing, calibration, catalyst regeneration, and control sample
measurement schedules for the selected date or day.
"Setting Weekly and Daily Schedules" P.25

[Adv]
Collectively set schedules for pausing, calibration, catalyst
regeneration, and control sample measurement.
[Daily]: Set a daily schedule.
[Long Pause <Date>]: Set the start and end date for pausing.
[Long Pause <Week>]: Set the start and end day for pausing.
Date buttons Month
information
"Batch Schedule Settings (Daily)" P.28
"Batch Schedule Settings (Pause Period)" P.30
[Previous Week], [Next Week]
Displays the previous or next week in the calendar.
24 TOC-4200
5.2 Measurement
1) The time input method is the same across all screens.

2) Press [Clear] to clear the currently selected schedule.
3) #: The smallest setting range for [Cycle(Min)] differs according to the measurement type.
Setting Weekly and Daily Schedules
1 Display the [Schedule 3/3] screen from the [Online Meas.>Cond.] screen.
"Schedule" P.24
2 Press a day button or date button for the schedule to be set.
Day buttons
Date buttons
3 Press [Edit] when setting a pausing schedule.
Proceed to step 7 when pausing schedule is unnecessary.

Press [Long Pause] to display the [Long Pause Start Date (Start Day)] screen for batch input.
For details, see "Batch Schedule Settings (Daily)" P.28.
TOC-4200 25
5 Operation
4 Select the checkbox of the relevant items and set a start time and end time.
A start time within one hour from the current time cannot be set.
A maximum of four pausing patterns can be configured.
5 Press [OK].
6 Press [Yes].
The display returns to the screen in step 3.
7 Press [Next].
8 Press [Edit] for the relevant item.
26 TOC-4200
5.2 Measurement
9 Select the [Execute] checkbox and enter a start time.
The setting method is the same for [Calibration], [Catalyst Reg.], and [Control Sample Meas.].
When setting a daily schedule, press [Load Week] to load the schedule for that week.
10 Press [OK].
Proceed to step 12 when setting a daily schedule.

5
11 Press [Yes].
12 Press [Ret.].
The display returns to the [Schedule 3/3] screen.
An icon of the set schedule is displayed on the corresponding date (day) button.
TOC-4200 27
5 Operation
Batch Schedule Settings (Daily)
Conditions set via the [Adv] button are overwritten. When adding conditions to day or date, schedules must
be set respectively.
"Schedule" P.24
2 Press [Adv].
3 Press [Daily].
4 Press the button of the item for which a schedule is to be set.

1
28 TOC-4200
5.2 Measurement
1 Select the checkbox of the relevant items and set a start time and end time.
A maximum of four pausing patterns can be configured.
2 Select the [Execute] checkbox and enter a start time.
The setting method is the same for [Calibration], [Catalyst Reg.], and [Control Sample Meas.].
3 Press [OK].
5 Press [Yes].
6 Press [Ret.].
The display returns to the [Advanced] screen.
TOC-4200 29
5 Operation
Batch Schedule Settings (Pause Period)
Conditions set via the [Adv] button are overwritten. When adding conditions to day or date, schedules must
be set respectively.
"Schedule" P.24
2 Press [Adv].
3 Press [Long Pause <Date>] or [Long Pause <Week>].
4 Select the start day or start date for the pause period and then press [Next].
Long pause (start day) Long pause (start date)
The color of the date (day) button changes when selected.
30 TOC-4200
5.2 Measurement
5 Set the start time and then press [Next].
6 Select the end day or end date for the pause period and then press [Next].
7 Set the end time and then press [Next].
8 Verify the settings and press [OK].
5
Long pause (start day) Long pause (start date)
9 Press [Yes].
10 Press [Ret.].
The display returns to the [Advanced] screen.
TOC-4200 31
5 Operation
Schedule Setting Example
Setting a Weekly Schedule for Calibration on Wednesday at 9:00
1 Press the Wednesday button on the [Schedule 3/3] screen.
2 Press [Next].
3 Press [Edit] next to [Calibration].
32 TOC-4200
5.2 Measurement
4 Select the [Execute] checkbox and enter a start time of "0900".
5 Press [OK].
6 Press [Yes].
7 Press [Ret.]. 5
A calibration icon is displayed on the Wednesday button.
Setting a Weekly Schedule for Pausing from Friday 17:00 to Monday 7:00
1 Press the Friday button on the [Schedule 3/3] screen.
2 Press [Long Pause].
TOC-4200 33
5 Operation
3 Press [Next].
4 Enter a start time of "1700" and then press [Next].
5 Select Monday and then press [Next].
6 Enter an end time of "0700" and then press [Next].
34 TOC-4200
5.2 Measurement
8 Press [Yes].
9 Press [Ret.].
A pausing icon is displayed on the buttons from Friday to Monday. 5
Setting a Schedule for an Extended Idle Period (28th December 17:00 to 5th January
7:00)
1 Press the [Adv] button on the [Schedule 3/3] screen.
2 Press [Long Pause <Date>].
TOC-4200 35
5 Operation
3 Select 28th December and then press [Next].
4 Enter a start time of "1700" and then press [Next].
5 Select 5th January and then press [Next].
6 Enter an end time of "0700" and then press [Next].
36 TOC-4200
5.2 Measurement
8 Press [Yes].
9 Press [Ret.].
A pausing icon is displayed on the buttons from 28th December to 5th January. 5
TOC-4200 37
5 Operation
Conditions for Alarms, Output, and Calculation Processing
1 Press [Alarm Output Calc.] on the [Online Meas.>Cond.] screen.
2 Perform settings on the [Alarm/Out/Cal.] screen.

[Analog Output] Perform settings for analog output (transmission output, P.39
recorder output).
[EPA Calculation] Set the TOC removal rate calculation conditions. P.40
[Load Calc.] Set the load calculation conditions. P.40
[Moving Average] Set the number of moving averages. P.41
[Conc. Alarm] Set alarms related to concentration. P.42
[EPA Alarm] Set alarms related to EPA. P.42
[Load Alarm] Set alarms related to load. P.42
3 Press [Ret.].
38 TOC-4200
5.2 Measurement
Analog Output Settings
1 Press [Analog Output] on the [Alarm/Out/Cal.] screen.
2 Set [Meas. Type], [Range], [Hold], and [OUT] for each stream.
Output number
Output selection button
Name Description
Output number Displays an output number according to the type of output. 5
Transmission output: AO01 to AO12
(varies depending on the number of transmission outputs)
Recorder output: AO01 to AO06 (when the recorder option is provided)
[Stream] Set the stream number.
Setting range: 1 to 6, EPA
[Meas. Type] Set the measurement type.
TC, IC, POC, NPOC, TOC
TOC# (moving average), *XXXX (TOC conversion value)1
*XXXX# (TOC conversion value moving average)1
TN, TN# (moving average), *XXXX (TN conversion value)1
*XXXX# (TN conversion value moving average)1
*XXXX-L (load)1
[Range] Set the range.
Setting range: 0.0 to 99999
[Hold] Set the output of the final measurement value to be held after
measurement of each stream stops.
Select the corresponding checkbox to enable holding.
Output selection button Set the destination of output.
[Trans.]: Set transmission output.
[Recorder]: Set recorder output. (When the recorder option is provided)
[OUT] Set the output method.
[Indiv]: Set the output method for each CH.
[Combi]: Output TOC to CH1 and TN to CH2.
1) XXXX: Displays the conversion name.
3 Press [OK].
The display returns to the [Alarm/Out/Cal.] screen.
TOC-4200 39
5 Operation
EPA Calculation
1 Press [EPA Calculation] on the [Alarm/Output/Calc.] screen.
2 Set values for [CaCO3 Alkali Level] and [Calculation Interval].
Name Description
[CaCO3 Alkali Level] Set the concentration of CaCO3 added in tap water treatment. Admission
criteria will change due to the set value.
Setting range: 0.0 to 100 (%)
[Calculation Interval] Set interval of calcuation between streams. The TOC removal rate is
calculated from the TOC concentration taken from each stream.
Setting range: 10 to 1440 (minutes)
3 Press [OK].
Load Calculation
1 Press [Load Calc.] on the [Alarm/Out/Cal.] screen.
2 Set values for [Data Smpl. Int], [Report Time], [Daily Calc Time], the number of
decimal places for load and flow rate, and [Effective Time].
40 TOC-4200
5.2 Measurement
Name Description
[Data Smpl. Int] Set the format to use when summarizing load data.
[1h]: Summarize load data every hour.
[1 min]: Summarize load data every minute.
[Report Time] Set whether to handle the summarized data as data for the current time or
data for the previous hour.
Example: When the current time is "3:00"
[-1h]: Handles data collected between 2:00 and 3:00 as data for 2:00.
[Cur. Time]: Handles data collected between 2:00 and 3:00 as data for 3:00.
[Daily Calc Time] Set daily sum range of report data to either [1-24] or [0-23].
[Num of Dec. for Load] Set the number of decimal places to display for load.
[Num of Dec. for Flow Set the number of decimal places to display for flow rate.
Rate] Setting range: 0 to 3
[Effective Time] Set the number of effective data entries in the measurement results.
Hourly reports are calculated by collecting measurement results each
minute. If the amount of effective data is less than the amount of data for
5
the effective time, the data for that time is processed as missing.
Example: When [Effective Time] is set to "60"
If 60 measurements are performed and the amount of effective data is less
than 60, the data for the hour is processed as missing.
3 Press [OK].
Moving Average
1 Press [Moving Average] on the [Alarm/Out/Cal.] screen.
2 Set the number of moving averages for each stream.
Name Description
Streams 1 to 6 Set the number of moving averages for each stream.
TOC-4200 41
5 Operation
3 Press [OK].
Alarm Value Settings
1 Press [Conc.Alarm] on the [Alarm/Out/Cal.] screen.
2 Configure the [Alarm], [Chk Count], [Hysteresis], and [Hold] settings.
Stream selection button
Measurement type
selection button
Name Description
[Alarm] Set the alarm value.
Setting range: 0 to 99999, --- (no alarm)
[Chk Count] Set a number. An alarm is generated when amount of overlimit (or
underrun) reaches this criteria.
[Hysteresis(%)] Set a hysteresis (dead band) value.
After an alarm is generated, and when [Hold] is set [OFF], if the
measurement value falls inside the alarm value range counting hysteresis,
the alarm is deactivated.
Setting range: 0 to 99 (%)
[Hold] Set [ON] or [OFF] for maintaining the alarm output after the
measurement value falls within the alarm value range.
Stream selection button Change the stream number for which an alarm value is to be set.
Measurement type Change the measurement type for which an alarm value is to be set.
selection button For concentration: [TOC], [TOC Conversion Value], [TN], [TN Conversion
Value]
For load: [Load TOC], [Load TN]
EPA: Not displayed.
Set a value for [Alarm] that satisfies the following condition: [Ext. High Limit] > [High Limit] >
[Low Limit] > [Ext. Low Limit].
The screen shown above is the alarm concentration screen. Settings are the same for EPA and
load alarms.
3 Press [OK].
42 TOC-4200
5.2 Measurement
Automatic Calibration and Control Sample Measurement Conditions
1 Press [Auto Cal Ctrl Smpl Meas.] on the [Online Meas.>Cond.] screen.
2 Configure settings using the [Auto Cal/Ctrl. Meas.] screen.

[Auto Calib.] Set whether to use conditions as well as a reference value P.44
for automatic calibration.
[Ctrl Smpl Meas.] Set the conditions for control sample measurement. P.45
3 Press [Ret.].
TOC-4200 43
5 Operation
Automatic Calibration
1 Press [Auto Calib.] on the [Auto Cal/Ctrl. Meas.] screen.
2 Configure the [Update Restr.] and [Tolerance] settings.
Name Description
[Update Restr.] Set the restriction of calibration curve updates to [ON] or [OFF].
[Tolerance] Set the reference value to use when updating the calibration curve.
Calibration curves will be updated only if the difference between the
current and previous span area falls within this tolerance.
Setting range: 0.0 to 100 (%)
3 Press [OK].
The display returns to the [Auto Cal/Ctrl. Meas.] screen.
44 TOC-4200
5.2 Measurement
Control Sample Measurement
1 Press [Ctrl Smpl Meas.] on the [Auto Cal/Ctrl. Meas.] screen.
2 Set the conditions required for control sample measurement.

[Ctrl. Meas. 1/5] screen [Meas. Type]
Measurement method Set the measurement type.
Set this option to [OFF] to prevent measurement of the control
sample.
Measurement method
[Sampling Port No.]
Set the number of the port to use for sampling.
[Shft Org Invalid]
5
Set whether to deactivate the zero shift function configured at
calibration.
[ON]: Deactivate the zero shift function.
[OFF]: Activate the zero shift function (Only if the zero shift
function configured at calibration is ON.)
[Ctrl. Meas. 2/5] screen [Tolerance]
Set the reference range for TOC and TN measurements.
Recalibration is performed when values are outside the reference
range.
TOC upper limit/lower limit: 0.0 to 99999, None (mg/L)
TN upper limit/lower limit (when the TN option is provided): 0.0 to
99999, None (mg/L)
[Ctrl. Meas. 3/5] screen

"[Online Meas.>Cond. 3/5] screen" P.22
TOC-4200 45
5 Operation


3 Press [OK].
The display returns to the [Auto Cal/Ctrl. Meas.] screen.
Measurement Operation Settings
1 Press [Device Action] on the [Online Meas.>Cond.] screen.
2 Configure settings on the [Device Action] screen.

[Syringe Wash] Set the number of times to wash the syringe using diluent P.47
and sample.
[Sampling Pump] Set the operation time for the sampling pump. P.47
[Sampler] Configure the sampling unit. P.48
[Flow Line Wash] Set the stream washing conditions. P.49
[Pause] Set [ON] or [OFF] for the electric furnace and carrier gas. P.50
46 TOC-4200
5.2 Measurement
3 Press [OK].
Number of Syringe Washes
1 Press [Syringe Wash] on the [Device Action] screen.
2 Set [Dil. (Times)] and [Sample] for each stream.
Name Description
[Dil. (Times)] Set the number of times to wash the syringe using diluent for each stream.
[Sample] Set the number of times to wash the syringe using sample for each stream.
3 Press [OK].
The display returns to the [Device Action] screen.
Sampling Pump
1 Press [Sampling Pump] on the [Device Action] screen.
2 Select the [Pump Use] checkbox for the relevant streams and set a value for [Pump
Time(s)].
TOC-4200 47
5 Operation
Name Description
[Pump Use] Select the checkbox of the relevant stream to activate the sampling pump.
[Pump Time(s)] Set the operation time for each stream.
Setting range: 0 to 999 (seconds)
3 Press [OK].
Sampling Unit
1 Press [Sampler] on the [Device Action] screen.
2 Set conditions for operating sample unit.

[Sampler 1/2] screen [Sample(s)]
Set the amount of time to extract sample.
[Homogen(s)]
Set the homogenizing time.
[Wash Rep.]
Set the number of sample washes.
[Sampler 2/2] screen [Tap Water Wash Rep.]

Set number of tap water wash.
[Bubbling Cycle]
Set the bubbling cycle (active when using the backwash strainer
sample sampling unit (with pump)).
[Bubbling Time]
Set the bubbling time (active when using the backwash strainer
sample sampling unit (with pump)).
3 Press [OK].
48 TOC-4200
5.2 Measurement
Stream Washing
1 Press [Flow Line Wash] on the [Device Action] screen.
2 Configure the [Flow Line Wash], [Wash Vol], [Acid Add.], and [Wash Rep.] settings.
Name Description
[Flow Line Wash] Set [ON] or [OFF] for stream washing. 5
Set this option to [ON] to wash the online sampling tube for each
measurement (injection operation).
[Wash Vol] Set the amount of water to use in stream washing.
Use 0.3 mL under normal conditions and 1.0 mL when contaminants are
considered to remain.
Setting range: 0.3, 1.0 (mL)
[Acid Add.] Set [ON] or [OFF] for acid addition.
Use acid when organic contaminants are present.
[Wash Rep.] Set the number of times to wash the streams.
Set 1 time under normal conditions and multiple times when contaminants
are considered to remain.
3 Press [OK].
TOC-4200 49
5 Operation
Pause
1 Press [Pause] on the [Device Action] screen.
2 Configure settings for [Furnace] and [Carrier Gas].
Name Description
[Furnace] Set [ON] or [OFF] for the electric furnace during pausing.
[OFF]: Turn the electric furnace OFF.
[ON]: Leave the electric furnace ON during pausing.
[Carrier Gas] Set [OFF] or [ON] for the carrier gas during pausing.
[OFF]: Stop carrier gas supply.
[ON]: Maintain carrier gas supply during pausing (only when the [Carrier
Gas Supply] option on the [Gas Flow] screen in the [System Settings] is set to
[Always ON]).
3 Press [OK].
50 TOC-4200
5.2 Measurement
Loading, Saving, and Printing Measurement Conditions
CAUTION
1 Press (menu) on the [Online Meas.>Cond.] screen.
2 Press the button corresponding to the operation you wish to perform.

[Load Cond.] Pressing this button displays a file selection screen. -
Move to the parent

folder
File information
File selection
[Reference]: Move to the selected folder.

[Load]: Load online measurement conditions from USB flash
memory.
[Save Cond.] Save the measurement conditions to USB flash memory. P.232
[Print] Print the online measurement conditions (when the printer P.237
option is provided).1
TOC-4200 51
5 Operation

[Printer Feed] Feed the printer paper (when the printer option is provided). -
1) (printing) is displayed in the top right of the screen when printing. Printing can be stopped by
clicking this button.
3 Press [Close].
52 TOC-4200
5.2 Measurement
5.2.3 Configuring Offline Measurement Conditions and Starting

Measurement
1 Press [Offline Measurement] on the top menu screen.
An interruption confirmation message is displayed when online measurement is in progress.

Pressing [OK] displays the [Offline Measurement>Cond] screen after the current measurement
completes. 5
2 Set the conditions required for offline measurement.

[Offline Measurement>Cond. [Sample ID]
1/5] screen Set the sample ID.
Measurement method Setting range: 001 to 999
[Sample Name]
Set the sample name.
Setting range: 0 to 10 alphanumeric characters or symbols
[Meas. Type]
Set the measurement type.
Measurement method
[Auto Re-meas.]
Set [ON] or [OFF] for automatic remeasurement.
[ON]: If the measurement value exceeds the reference value, the
injection volume and dilution factor are automatically updated and
measurement is performed again.
[OFF]: Measurement is not performed again even if the measurement
value exceeds the reference value.
[Load Online]
Load the online measurement conditions.
Select a stream number to load the measurement conditions of the
selected stream.
"Measurement Conditions for Each Stream" P.21
TOC-4200 53
5 Operation

[Offline Measurement>Cond.
2/5] screen "[Online Meas.>Cond. 2/5] screen" P.22
3 Press [Next].
The screen for starting offline measurement is displayed.
54 TOC-4200
5.3 Measurement and Checking Results

This section explains the screens displayed during measurement and the display of measurement
results.
5.3.1 Display During Measurement and Display of Results (Online

Measurement)
Standard Measurement Mode
Measurement status
Measurement results
Remarks

Measurement results Displays the latest measurement results. -
When TOC conversion and TN conversion are both ON
TOC value
TOC conversion value
Remarks
TN value
TN conversion value
When TOC conversion is OFF and TN conversion is ON

TOC value
Remarks
TN value
TN conversion value
TOC-4200 55
5 Operation

Measurement results When TOC conversion and TN conversion are both OFF -
TOC value
Remarks
TN conversion value
When there are no latest measurement results
Displays the [Online Meas. Menu] screen. P.63

(menu)
Select operations such as verifying or changing configured
conditions performing stat measurement, and calibration.
[Detail] Displays detailed measurement results and peaks. P.59
When all 1st upper/lower, 2nd upper/lower limit alarms are set.
The background color is displayed in orange when 1st upper and lower alarms are generated.
The background color is displayed in red when 2nd upper and lower alarms are generated.
When only 1st upper and lower alarm limits are set.
The background color is displayed in red when 1st upper and lower alarms are generated.
If changes are made to measurement conditions, the corresponding text is displayed in purple.
56 TOC-4200
Load Calculation Measurement Mode
Measurement status
Time signal
Measurement results
Display data
selection button

Time signal Displays the time of the latest measurement results. -
Measurement results Displays the results of load calculation. -
Displays the stream number, concentration, remarks (RMK), load,
and flow rate. 5
Meaning of remarks
[F]: The peak exceeded the full scale.
[R]: Measurement was performed in the ready NG state.
[T]: Tailing
[S]: No peak could be detected.
[H]: The measurement value exceeded the range.
(When the TN option is provided: concentration, remarks (RMK),
load, and flow rate for the TN value)
(menu)
Display data selection Switch between standard measurement results and load calculation P.55
button measurement results.
[Detail] Display detailed measurement results and peaks. P.59
TOC-4200 57
5 Operation
EPA Mode
Measurement status
Measurement results
Display data
selection button

Measurement results Displays the results of EPA measurement. -
[REM]: Displays the TOC removal rate.
[S#]: Displays the measurement value for each stream.
[Fail]: Only displayed when the measurement result judgment results
in "Fail".
(menu)
Display data selection Switch between standard measurement results and EPA P.55
button measurement results.
[Detail] Display detailed measurement results. P.59
The background color is displayed in red when the measurement results are judged as "Fail".
58 TOC-4200
5.3.2 Detailed Display During Measurement and for Measurement

Results (Online/Offline Measurement)
Measurement Value Display

Online measurement
Display detailed measurement results by pressing the [Detail] button on the screen for each mode described
in "5.3.1 Display During Measurement and Display of Results (Online Measurement)" P.55.
Offline measurement
A detailed display is shown during measurement after measurement is started and of the results.
Processing
status
Stream
number and Sample ID
measurement and sample
type
name
Measurement
Measurement
results
results
[MN] / [SD]
/ [CV]
[MN] / [SD]
/ [CV]
5
Online measurement Measurement Offline measurement Measurement

value and value and
conversion conversion
value value

Measurement results The measurement results are displayed as measurement values. -
Displays exclusion mark, area value, remarks, concentration,
injection volume, and dilution factor.
Meaning of remarks
[T]: Tailing
[H]: The measurement value exceeded the range.
[MN] / [SD] / [CV] Displays the area value and concentration for the measurement -
data.
[MN]: Mean value
[SD]: Standard deviation
[CV]: Coefficient of variation
Measurement value and Displays the measurement value and conversion value. -
conversion value When the specific type is TN, the TN measurement value
(concentration) and TN conversion value are displayed.
When the specific type is not TN, the TOC measurement value
(concentration) and TOC conversion value are displayed.
TOC-4200 59
5 Operation

Screen selection button P.61
(for online measurement)
Display data Specific type Display

selection selection selection
button button button
Display data selection: Change the display between the [Curr.] and
[Latest] screens.
Specific type selection: Change the specific measurement type. The
measurement results for the selected specific type are redisplayed.
Display selection: Change the display between the [Meas.] and
[Peak] screens.
(for offline measurement) P.66
Specific type Display

selection selection
button button
(menu): Displays the [Offline Measurement Menu] screen.

Select an operation to perform during offline measurement such as
stopping measurement, referring to or changing conditions, or
displaying reports.
Specific type selection: Change the specific measurement type. The
measurement results for the selected specific type are redisplayed.
Display selection: Change the display between the [Meas.] and
[Peak] screens.
60 TOC-4200
Peak Display
Press the display selection button in the detailed measurement results screen to change to the peak
display.
Processing
status
Sample ID
and sample
name
Measurement Measurement
results results
Online measurement Offline measurement
Name
Measurement results
Description
Displays the peak for the measurement results.
Reference
-
5
Displays the (full) peak for all sample injections. P.62
(full display)

(for online measurement)
Display data Specific type Display

Changes to each type of screen.

(for offline measurement) P.66
Specific type Display

selection selection
button button
Changes to each type of screen.
TOC-4200 61
5 Operation
Full Display and Specific Display of Peaks
Press (full display) in the peak display to see all peaks.
Initial
Full/specific display
display
button
Full display Specific display
Name Description
Set the display range.
(range change)
Setting range: 10 to 90 mV (increments of 10 mV), 100 to 1000 mV (increments
of 100 mV)
Full/specific display Switch the display between all sample injections and single sample injection.
button
Returns the graph scale and display range to their default values and redisplays
(initial display)
the peak.
The above screen features full and specific displays for online measurement. The screens for offline
measurement display the same information.
62 TOC-4200
5.3.3 Operations During Online Measurement
1 Press (menu) on the measurement results screen for the corresponding

measurement mode.
2 Select the operation to perform during online measurement.
Name Description Reference 5

[Stop] Stop the measurement. -
If [Use Password] is set to [ON] in the system settings, a

screen prompting input of the password is displayed.
[Stat Meas.] Perform offline measurement while performing online P.64
measurement.
[Stat Cal.] Perform automatic calibration while performing online P.65
measurement.
[Schd.] Displays the calendar screen for the schedule settings. P.24
Settings can be reviewed and changed.
[Cond.] Displays the [Online Meas.>Cond.] screen. Online P.19
measurement conditions can be checked.
[Reports] Displays reports for online measurement. P.79
Standard mode: Displays reports for online measurement.
Load calculation mode: Displays reports for load calculation.
EPA mode: Displays reports for TOC removal rate.
[Monitor] Displays the [Monitor] screen in the system settings. P.98
Verify the instrument status, gas flow rate, and flow rate
input.
[To Top Menu] Displays the top menu screen. P.18
3 Press [Close].
The display returns to the measurement results screen for the corresponding measurement mode in
which (menu) was pressed.
TOC-4200 63
5 Operation
Stat Measurement
Offline measurement can be performed at any time. Use stat measurement when measuring a
different sample from the one in online measurement.
1 Press [Stat Meas.] on the [Online Meas. Menu] screen.
A screen to confirm the interruption is displayed when online measurement is in progress.
2 Press [Yes].
The [Offline Measurement>Cond.] screen is displayed after the current online measurement is complete.
64 TOC-4200
Stat Calibration
Calibration can be performed at any time. Use stat calibration to perform calibration shortly after
preparing standard solution.
1 Press [Stat Cal.] on the [Online Meas. Menu] screen.
A screen to confirm the interruption is displayed when online measurement is in progress.
2 Press [Yes].
Calibration is performed after the current online measurement is complete.
"5.4 Calibration" P.67
TOC-4200 65
5 Operation
5.3.4 Operations During Offline Measurement
1 Press (menu) on the detailed offline measurement results screen.
2 Select the operation to perform during offline measurement.

[Stop] Stop the measurement. -

[Save] Save the offline measurement results to USB flash memory. P.232
[Cond.] Displays the [Offline Measurement>Cond.] screen. Verify P.53
the offline measurement conditions.
[Reports] Displays reports for offline measurement. P.79
input settings.
3 Press [Close].
Return to the detailed offline measurement results screen.
66 TOC-4200
5.4 Calibration
5.4 Calibration
This section explains how to start calibration, create and edit calibration curves, and describes the
screen displayed during calibration and for the calibration results.
5.4.1 Starting Calibration and Creating Calibration Curves
1 Press [Calibration] on the top menu screen.
2 Calibration curves can be created and edited from the [Calibration] screen.

[Calibration (Online, Collectively calibrate calibration curves used in the online P.68
Used)] measurement conditions.
[Calibration (Selected)] Calibrate the selected calibration curve. P.69
[Create/Edit Cal. Curve] Create and edit calibration curves. P.70
3 Press [Ret.].
The display returns to the top menu screen.
TOC-4200 67
5 Operation
Online Batch Calibration
1 Press [Calibration (Online, Used)] on the [Calibration] screen.
2 Check that the calibration curves for calibration are indicated and then press [Next].
3 Set the samples to their respective ports and press [Start].
Calibration starts and measurement values are displayed.
"5.4.2 Calibration and Detailed Calibration Results Display" P.75
68 TOC-4200
5.4 Calibration
Selected Calibration
1 Press [Calibration (Selected)] on the [Calibration] screen.
2 Select the checkbox of the intended calibration and then press [Next].
Calibration curve information
Calibration curve selection button
5
The calibration curve type can be changed by pressing the calibration curve selection button.
Calibration curve type: TC, NPOC, IC, POC, TN (IC, POC, and TN are active when the relevant
options are provided)
3 Check that the calibration curves for calibration are indicated and then press [Next].
4 Set the samples to their respective ports and press [Start].
Calibration starts and measurement values are displayed.
"5.4.2 Calibration and Detailed Calibration Results Display" P.75
TOC-4200 69
5 Operation
Creating and Editing Calibration Curves
Creating a New Calibration Curve
1 Press [Create/Edit Cal. Curve] on the [Calibration] screen.
2 Select the calibration curve number for creation and then press [Create/Edit].
displayed.
Press (menu) to display the [Calibration Menu] screen. The calibration menu can be used to
stop measurement, refer to and change calibration conditions, and display measurement reports.
For details, see "Deleting and Printing Calibration Curves" P.74.
3 Set the conditions required to create the calibration curve.

[Create/Edit Cal. Curve 1/4] [Calib. Type]
screen Set the number of points for the calibration curve.
Calibration curve number Setting range: 1- to 5-point calibration.
[Shift to Origin]
Set [ON] or [OFF] for zero shift.
[Stock Solution Use]
Set [ON] or [OFF] for using of stock solution.
70 TOC-4200
5.4 Calibration

[Create/Edit Cal. Curve 2/4] [Standard Solution]
screen Set the standard solution concentration.
When [Stock Solution Use] is set to [OFF]
TC/NPOC: 0 to 20000 (mg/L)
IC: 0 to 5000 (mg/L)
POC: 0 to 2500 (mg/L)
TN: 0 to 10000 (mg/L)
When [Stock Solution Use] is set to [ON]
TC/NPOC: 0 to 1000 (mg/L)
IC: 0 to 100 (mg/L)
POC: 0 to 50 (mg/L)
TN: 0 to 200 (mg/L)
Page scroll
button [Port]
Set the port for calibration curve creation.
[Stock Solution]
Set the stock solution concentration.
Setting range: 0 to 50000 (mg/L)
5
[Create/Edit Cal. Curve 3/4] [Dilution Factor]
screen Set the dilution factor.
[Inj. Vol.]
Set the injection volume for the calibration curve type.
TC/NPOC (without the high sensitivity measurement option):
20 to 150 (L)
TC/NPOC (with the high sensitivity measurement option):
20 to 500 (L)
TN: 20 to 150 (L)
IC: 800 to 4500 (L)
POC: 800 to 4500 (L)
[Acid Vol.]
Set the volume of acid for addition.
Setting range: 0 to 999 (L)
[Sparge Time]
Set the sparge time.
TOC-4200 71
5 Operation

[Create/Edit Cal. Curve 4/4] [Repeat]1
screen Set the number of times to perform measurement. Measurement is
repeated for the set number of times and the mean value is output
as part of the measurement result.
[Max.]1
Set the maximum number of times to perform measurement. If the
SD and CV values for the measurement results do not fall within
the reference value range, additional measurements are performed
up to the set limit.
[SD Tol.]2
[CV Tol.]2
1) Set a value that satisfies (number of measurements) (maximum number of measurements).

2) Measurement is complete when the value for either [SD Tol.] or [CV Tol.] falls within the reference value
range.
A screen for verifying the calibration curve is displayed.
"Online Batch Calibration" P.68, steps 2
Editing Calibration Curves
1 Press [Create/Edit Cal. Curve] on the [Calibration] screen.
2 Select the number of the calibration curve for editing and then press [Create/Edit].
Information for the selected calibration curve is displayed.
72 TOC-4200
5.4 Calibration
displayed.
Press (menu) to display the [Calibration Menu] screen. The calibration menu can be used to
delete calibration curves and print conditions.
For details, see "Deleting and Printing Calibration Curves" P.74.
3 Press [Next].
Calibration curve
Calibration
information
curve point
selection
buttons
5
Calibration
curve point
mark
Two or less points on the calibration curve Three or more points on the calibration curve
Name Description
Calibration curve Standard solution concentration, [MN], [SD], and [CV] values for the
information (list display) span of the selected calibration curve are displayed.
Calibration curve Information for the selected calibration curve is displayed as a graph.
information (graph display)
[Shift to Origin] Set [ON] or [OFF] for zero shift.
When [Shift to Origin] is set to [ON] When [Shift to Origin] is set to [OFF]
Information for a single calibration curve point is displayed for calibrations curves with three or
more points.
A mark is displayed on the target calibration curve point.
Move between the calibration point marks by pressing the calibration curve point selection
buttons.
Press (menu) to print out calibration data.
TOC-4200 73
5 Operation
4 Set each item.
"Creating and Editing Calibration Curves" P.70, step 3
Deleting and Printing Calibration Curves
1 Press (menu) on the [Create/Edit Cal. Curve] screen.
2 Select to delete calibration curves or to print calibration curve conditions.

[Delete Selected Cal. Delete the selected calibration curve. -
Curves]
[Print Cond. of Selected Print the conditions of the selected calibration curve (when P.237
Cal. Curves] the printer option is provided).1
[Print Cond. of All Cal. Print the conditions of all the calibration curves (when the P.237
Curves] printer option is provided).1
3 Press [Close].
The display returns to the [Create/Edit Cal. Curve] screen.
74 TOC-4200
5.4 Calibration
5.4.2 Calibration and Detailed Calibration Results Display

Processing
status
Calibration
curve number
Measurement
value title
Measurement
results
[MN] / [SD] /
[CV]
List display Peak display
5
Measurement results The measurement results are displayed as measurement values. -
The number of measurements for the calibration curve, exclusion
marks for each calibration curve point, concentration, and remarks
(RMK) are displayed.
Meaning of remarks
[T]: Tailing
[H]: The measurement value exceeded the output range.
[MN] / [SD] / [CV] Displays each calibration curve point. -
[MN]: Mean value
[SD]: Standard deviation
[CV]: Coefficient of variation
(during list display)
Display selection
button
(menu): Displays the [Calibration Menu] screen. The

calibration menu can be used to stop measurement, refer to and
change calibration conditions, and display measurement reports.
Display selection: Change the display between the measurement
values and peaks.
[End]: Displayed after calibration is complete. Press [End] to return
to the calibration start confirmation screen.
TOC-4200 75
5 Operation

(during peak display)
Display Calibration
selection curve selection
button button
(menu): Displays the [Calibration Menu] screen. The

calibration menu can be used to stop measurement, refer to and
change calibration conditions, and display measurement reports.
Display selection: Change the display between the measurement
values and peaks.
Calibration curve selection: Press the calibration curve selection
button to change between calibration curves when there are more than
two curves. The selected calibration curve is redisplayed on the
graph.
Graph display: A tool bar is displayed. The scale of the graph can be
changed.
Displays the (full) peak for all sample injections. -
(full display)
Full Display and Specific Display of Peaks
Press (full display) in the peak display to see all peaks.
Processing
status
Full/specific Initial
display button display
Full display Specific display
Name Description
Set the display range.
(range change)
Setting range: 10 to 90 mV (increments of 10 mV), 100 to 1000 mV (increments
of 100 mV)
Full/specific display Switch the display between all sample injections and single sample injection.
button
Returns the graph scale and display range to their default values and redisplays
(initial display)
the peak.
76 TOC-4200
5.4 Calibration
Operations During Calibration
1 Press (menu) on the detailed calibration results screen.
2 Select the operation to perform during calibration.

[Stop] Stop the measurement. - 5
[Cond.] Calibration curve conditions can be reviewed and changed. P.72
[Reports] Displays reports for calibration. P.79
input settings.
3 Press [Close].
The display returns to the detailed calibration results screen.
TOC-4200 77
5 Operation
5.5 Reports
This section explains how to view, search, save, and print reports.
5.5.1 Report Display
1 Press [Reports] on the top menu screen.
2 Review reports on the [Reports] screen.

[Measurement] Displays reports for online measurement, load calculation, P.79
and EPA removal rate.
[Error/Alarm] Displays reports generated due to errors, alarms, and power P.81
failures.
[Maintenance] Displays maintenance reports. P.82
[Cal./Control] Displays reports for calibration and control sample P.82
measurement.
[Room Temperature] Displays room temperature reports. P.85
3 Press [Ret.].
78 TOC-4200
5.5 Reports
Measurement Reports
1 Press [Measurement] on the [Reports] screen.
2 Press the measurement mode of the report to be displayed.
Reports for the selected measurement mode are displayed.
5
Report Report
information information
Report display Trend graph display

Report information The report information is displayed as a list or a graph. -
The list display shows the date and time, measurement type,
concentration, area, any remarks for the online
measurement report.
Meaning of remarks
[T]: Tailing
[H]: The measurement value exceeded the output range.
Change the scale of the graph. -
(change scale)
Range: 1 to 99999
Time: 1 to 24 hours (in units of 3 hours)
TOC-4200 79
5 Operation

Report display selection P.86
button1
Display Stream Display data
(menu): Displays the [Report Menu] screen.

This menu can be used to search, save, and print reports.
Display selection: Change the display between reports and
the trend graph.
Stream selection: Change the stream for which reports are to
be displayed.
Display data selection: Change the display data between
[TOC] and [TN] ([TN] when the TN option is provided).
Trend graph display P.86
selection button1
Display Stream Display data
(menu): Displays the [Report Menu] screen.

This menu can be used to search, save, and print reports.
Display selection: Change the display between reports and
the trend graph.
Stream selection: Change the stream for which reports are to
be displayed.
Display data selection: Change the display data between
[TOC] and [TN] ([TN] when the TN option is provided).
1) EPA measurement reports do not feature stream selection or a graph display.
3 Press [Ret.] repeatedly.

The display returns to the [Reports] screen.
80 TOC-4200
5.5 Reports
Error and Alarm Reports
1 Press [Error/Alarm] on the [Reports] screen.
2 Press the item for which to display reports.
Reports are displayed for the selected item.

[Fatal Error] Displays reports for fatal errors. -
[Meas.Value Alarm] Displays reports for measurement value alarms. -
[Meas. Skip] Displays reports for pauses in measurement. P.86
Report information
Stream selection
button
(menu): Displays the [Report Menu] screen. This menu

can be used to search, save, and print reports.
Stream selection: Reports for each stream can be reviewed.
[Instrument Alarm] Displays reports for instrument alarms. -
[Power Outage] Displays reports for power outages. -

TOC-4200 81
5 Operation
Maintenance Reports
1 Press [Maintenance] on the [Reports] screen.

Maintenance reports are displayed.
Report information

Calibration and Control Sample Measurement Reports
Calibration Reports for Calibration Curves
1 Press [Cal./Control] on the [Reports] screen.
2 Press [Calibration].
3 Select a calibration curve and then press [View].
82 TOC-4200
5.5 Reports
Calibration reports for the selected calibration curve are displayed.
Report information
Page scroll button
Point selection button
Name
Report information Displays report information.
Description
5
[Measured]: Displays the date and time of measurement
[Area]: Mean area value during calibration
[1st]: Variation (%) from the area of the first calibration
[Pre.]: Variation (%) from the area of the previous calibration
[SD]: Standard deviation of the area value from statistical calculation
[CV]: Coefficient of variation of the area value from statistical calculation
Point selection button Change between the points for which reports are displayed.
1 point: [Span]
2 points: [Zero], [Span]
3 points: [Zero], [PT-2], [Span]
4 points: [Zero], [PT-2], [PT-3], [Span]
5 points: [Zero], [PT-2], [PT-3], [PT-4], [Span]

TOC-4200 83
5 Operation
Control Sample Measurement Reports
1 Press [Cal./Control] on the [Reports] screen.
2 Press [Control Sample].
Control sample measurement reports are displayed.
Report information
Measurement type selection button
Name Description
Report information Displays report information.
[Measured]: Displays the date and time of measurement
[Meas. Type]: Displays the measurement type
[Conc.]: Displays the concentration
[Status]
Empty: Success
R: Recalibrated
Change measurement Change between measurement types for which reports are displayed.
type button

84 TOC-4200
5.5 Reports
Room Temperature Reports
1 Press [Room temperature] on the [Reports] screen.

Room temperature reports are displayed.
Report information

5
TOC-4200 85
5 Operation
5.5.2 Searching, Saving, and Printing Reports
CAUTION
1 Press (menu) on the relevant report screen.

[Search] Search reports. P.87
[Save] Save the selected report to USB flash memory. P.232
[Print] Set the printing range (when the printer option is P.87
provided).1 P.237
3 Press [Close].
The display returns to the reports screen.
86 TOC-4200
5.5 Reports
Searching Reports
1 Press [Search] on the [Report Menu] screen.
2 Set the year, month, and day for searching and press [OK].
Reports are displayed in order for the set date.
3 Press [Ret.] repeatedly. 5

Printing
1 Press [Print] on the [Report Menu] screen.
2 Set the printing range and press [OK].
Specifying a period Specifying 1 day
Name Description
[Method] Set the range for printing reports as [Period] or [1 day].
[Start] / [End] Set the start and end date of the period for printing.
[Period]: Set the start and end year, month, and day for printing.
[1 day]: Set the year, month, and day for printing.
[Month] / [Day] / [Year] Set the date for printing.
A print confirmation screen is displayed.
3 Press [OK].
The display returns to the [Report Menu] screen after printing.
TOC-4200 87
5 Operation
88 TOC-4200
6 6 System Settings
6.1 System Settings 6

This section explains how to check the system status and configure contact outputs, password
protection, and transmission conditions.
6
1 Press [System] on the top menu screen.
6
6
6
6
displayed. 6
6
2 Check the system status and configure settings via the [System] screen.
6
6
6
6
[System Info.] Check the system information of the instrument. P.90
[System Settings] Configure settings for date and time, display/printer, gas P.91 6
flow rate, password protection, automatic protection, and
[Monitor]
the conversion formula list.
Check the instrument, gas flow rate, and flow rate input. P.98
6
[I/O Settings] Configure the input/output related settings of the P.100
instrument. 6
Displays the [System Menu] screen. P.108
(menu)
6
TOC-4200 89
6 System Settings
3 Press [Ret.].
6.1.1 System Information
1 Press [System Info.] on the [System] screen.
2 Check the system information, option information, and detector information on the
displayed screen.
System
information Detector
information
Option
information
3 Press [OK].
The display returns to the [System] screen.
90 TOC-4200
6.1 System Settings
6.1.2 System Settings
1 Press [System Settings] on the [System] screen.
2 Check and configure settings via the [System Settings] screen.

[Date & Time] Set the date and time on the instrument. P.92
[Display/Printer] Configure settings related to screen display and the printer. P.92
[Gas Flow]
[Password]
Set the flow rate, gas type, and supply method.
Set [ON] or [OFF] for password protection and set a
P.93
P.94
6
password.
[Self Protection] Configure the valve protection period and LCD backlight P.95
auto-off settings.
[Conversion Formula Edit, delete, and save conversion formulae. P.96
List]
3 Press [Ret.].
TOC-4200 91
6 System Settings
Date and Time
1 Press [Date & Time] on the [System Settings] screen.
2 Set values for [Date] and [Time].
The set time is displayed at the bottom right of the screen.
3 Press [OK].
The display returns to the [System Settings] screen.
Screen Display and Printer Settings
1 Press [Display/Printer] on the [System Settings] screen.
2 Configure settings for screen display and the printer.
Name Description
[Num. of Dec.] Set the number of decimal places to display for concentration values.
Note that concentration is not displayed if the specified number of
decimal places exceeds the valid numerical range.
Setting range: Arbitrary, 1, 2
[Conc. Unit] Set the unit used to display concentration.
Setting range: mg/L, ug/L, ppm, ppb
[Negative Conc.] Set whether to display negative values when concentration shows up
negative.
[ON]: Displays negative values when concentration is negative.
[OFF]: Displays "0" when concentration is negative.
92 TOC-4200
6.1 System Settings
Name Description
[Print Dir.] Set the printing direction (when the printer option is provided).
[Normal]: Print in chronological order from top to bottom.
[Inverted]: Print in reverse chronological order.
3 Press [OK].
Gas Flow Rate
1 Press [Gas Flow] on the [System Settings] screen.
2 Configure settings for [Car. Gas Flow Rate], [Carrier Gas Type], [Sparge Gas Flow
Rate], and [Carrier Gas Supply].
Name Description
[Car. Gas Flow Rate] Set the carrier gas flow rate.
Setting range: 50 to 200 (mL/min)
[Carrier Gas Type] Set the type of carrier gas to [Air], [Nitrogen], or [Oxygen].
[Sparge Gas Flow Rate] Set the flow rate of the sparge gas.
Setting range: 50 to 200 (mL/min)
[Carrier Gas Supply] Set the method of carrier gas supply.
[Always ON]: Always supply carrier gas.
[At Meas. Only]: Only supply carrier gas during measurement.
3 Press [OK].
TOC-4200 93
6 System Settings
Password Protection
A password can be set in order to prevent inadvertent changes to measurement conditions and system
settings.
Set [Use Password] to [ON] to display a password entry screen whenever subsequent operations are
performed.
Passwords should always be managed by the administrator. Do not forget passwords.
Item Reference
Stopping measurement "Operations During Online Measurement" P.63
"Operations During Offline Measurement" P.66
"Operations During Calibration" P.77
Configuring measurement conditions "5.2.1 Configuring Online Measurement Conditions and Starting
Measurement" P.18
"5.2.2 Configuring Detailed Conditions for Online Measurement"
P.19
Creating and editing calibration curves "Creating and Editing Calibration Curves" P.70
Deleting calibration curve information "Deleting and Printing Calibration Curves" P.74
System settings "6.1 System Settings" P.89
1 Press [Password] on the [System Settings] screen.
2 Set [Use Password] to [ON].
3 Press [Change Password] and set a password.
94 TOC-4200
6.1 System Settings
1 Press [Change Password] to change the current password.

2 Enter the current password.
3 Enter a new password.
4 Reenter the new password.
5 Press [OK].
The display returns to the [Password] screen.
Set a password using four digits in the range 0000 to 9999.
4 Press [OK].
Automatic Protection
1 Press [Self Protection] on the [System Settings] screen.
2 Configure the settings for [Valve Self Maint. Int.] and [LCD Auto-Off]. 6
Name Description
[Value Self Maint. Int.] Set the value protection period.
The 8-port valve will rotate once in the set interval. This will prevent the
rotors from sticking.
Setting range: 1 to 24 (hours)
[LCD Auto-Off] Set the auto-off setting for the LCD backlight of the operation panel to
[ON] or [OFF].
Setting this option to [ON] automatically turns off the LCD backlight if
the operation panel has not been used for 10 minutes.
3 Press [OK].
TOC-4200 95
6 System Settings
Conversion Formula List
Editing Conversion Formulae
1 Press [Conversion Formula List] on the [System Settings] screen.
2 Select the conversion formula to edit using the

Select an empty line to create a new conversion formula.
buttons.
3 Press [Edit].
4 Enter the conversion formula and press [OK].
An update confirmation screen for the conversion formula list is displayed.
5 Press [Yes].
The display returns to the [Conversion Formula List] screen.
A maximum of 20 formulae can be set.
96 TOC-4200
6.1 System Settings
Deleting, Saving, and Loading Conversion Formulae
1 Press [Conversion Formula List] on the [System Settings] screen.
2 Select the desired conversion formula using the buttons.
3 Press (menu).

[Delete Selected Formula] Delete the selected conversion formula. -
[Save Conversion Save the measurement conditions to USB flash memory. P.232
Formula List]
[Load Conversion Displays a file selection screen. -
Formula List]
Move to the parent folder
File information
File selection

[Load]: Load conversion formulae from USB flash memory.
5 Press [Close].
The display returns to the [Conversion Formula List] screen.
TOC-4200 97
6 System Settings
6.1.3 Monitor
1 Press [Monitor] on the [System] screen.
2 Monitor the system status and configure settings via the [Monitor] screen.

[Instrument] Check the status of the instrument. P.98
[Gas Flow] Check the flow rate, gas type, and supply method of gas. P.99
[Flow Input] Check the flow rate of sample for each stream. (When the P.100
relevant option is provided)
3 Press [Ret.].
Instrument Status
1 Press [Instrument] on the [Monitor] screen.
2 Check the status of the instrument.

Signal value
Detector information
Detector selection button
Name Description
Signal value Displays the signal value of the detector in graph format.
98 TOC-4200
6.1 System Settings
Name Description
Change the scale of the graph.
(change scale)
Setting range:
10 to 100 (in units of 10 mV)
100 to 1000 (in units of 100 mV)
Detector selection button Switch between the [TOC] and [TN] detector information ([TN] when the
TN option is provided).
[Car. Gas] Control the carrier gas status.
[Ozone] Control the generation of ozone (when the TN option is provided).
3 Press [OK].
The display returns to the [Monitor] screen.
6
Gas Flow Rate
1 Press [Gas Flow] on the [Monitor] screen.
2 Check the flow rate for [Carrier Gas Flow] and [Sparge Gas Flow].
Flow rate information
Name Description
[Car. Gas] Control the carrier gas status.
3 Press [OK].
TOC-4200 99
6 System Settings
Flow Input (When the Relevant Option Is Provided)
1 Press [Flow Input] on the [Monitor] screen.
2 Check the sample flow rate for each stream.
Flow rate information
3 Press [OK].
6.1.4 Contact Input and Output Settings
1 Press [I/O Settings] on the [System] screen.
2 Configure inputs and outputs via the [I/O Settings] screen.

[Contact Output] Configure settings related to contact output. P.101
[Meas. Skip] Set the response time for the measurement pause signal. P.105
[Communication] Configure settings related to communications. P.106
[Flow Input] Configure settings related to flow rate. (When the relevant P.107
option is provided)
3 Press [Ret.].
100 TOC-4200
6.1 System Settings
Contact Output
1 Press [Contact Output] on the [I/O Settings] screen.
2 Configure contact numbers and logic on the [Contact Out] screen.

[Analog Sync.] Set the contact output for stream identification, status, and P.102
triggers.
[Sampling Pump]
[Operation Status]
Set the contact output for the sampling pump.
Set the contact output for the operation status of the
P.103
P.103
6
instrument.
[Error] Set the contact output for instrument alarms and fatal P.104
errors.
[Conc. Alarm] Set the contact output for alarms. P.104
[EPA Alarm]
[Load Alarm]
Contact Numbers and Logic

Name Description
Contact number Configure contacts for outputting signals.
Setting range: 3 to 36, not set
Logic Set the output state of the contact.
[NC]: The contact is normally closed. The contact opens when an alarm is
generated.
[NO]: The contact is normally open. The contact closes when an alarm is
generated.
3 Press [Ret.].
The display returns to the [I/O Settings] screen.
TOC-4200 101
6 System Settings
Analog Synchronization
1 Press [Analog Sync.] on the [Contact Out] screen.
2 Press the button of the item for configuration.
3 Configure settings for [Contact #] and [Logic].
" Contact Numbers and Logic" P.101

"10.6.2 Contact Output" P.221
4 Press [Ret.].
The display returns to the [Analog Sync.] screen.
102 TOC-4200
6.1 System Settings
Sampling Pump
1 Press [Sampling Pump] on the [Contact Out] screen.
2 Set [Contact #] and [Logic] for each stream.
3 Press [OK].
The display returns to the [Contact Out] screen.
6
Operation Status
1 Press [Operation Status] on the [Contact Out] screen.
2 Press the button of the item for configuration.
3 Set [Contact #] and [Logic].

4 Press [OK].
The display returns to the [Operation Status] screen.
TOC-4200 103
6 System Settings
Error Output
1 Press [Error] on the [Contact Out] screen.
3 Press [OK].
Alarm Output (Concentration, EPA, Load)
1 Press the alarm for setting on the [Contact Out] screen.
Alarm types
Stream selection button
Display type selection button
Name Description
Alarm type Displays the alarm types.
Display type selection The type of display can be changed for concentration and load.
button
Stream selection button The stream number can be changed for concentration and load.
Streams number: 1 to 6
104 TOC-4200
6.1 System Settings
[EPA Alarm] is only displayed when using two or more streams.

[Load Alarm] is only displayed when using the flow input option.
3 Press [OK].
Measurement Pause Signals
1 Press [Meas. Skip] on the [I/O Settings] screen.
2 Set the response time.
6
Response times
Name Description
Response time Set the response time for the measurement pause signal.
Measurement will pause after receiving the input continuously for the set
period. This can be used, for example, to pause measurement after sample
has run out.
3 Press [OK].
TOC-4200 105
6 System Settings
Communications
1 Press [Communication] on the [I/O Settings] screen.
2 Set the communication conditions.
Name Description
[Data Length] Set the data length.
Setting range: 7 or 8 (bits)
[Stop Bit] Set the stop bit.
Setting range: 1 or 2 (bits)
[Parity] Set the parity bit.
Setting range: OFF, Odd, Even
[Trans. Speed] Set the transmission speed.
Setting range: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200, 28800, 38400,
57600, 115200 (bps)
[Device Address] Set the device address (when the protocol is MODBUS).
[Mode] Set the mode (when the protocol is MODBUS).
Setting range: RTU or ASCII
3 Press [OK].
106 TOC-4200
6.1 System Settings
Flow Input (When the Relevant Option Is Provided)
1 Press [Flow Input] on the [I/O Settings] screen.
2 Set the range for each stream.
Range
Name Description
Range Set the range.
Setting range: 0.001 to 9999 (m3/h)
6
3 Press [OK].
TOC-4200 107
6 System Settings
6.1.5 Loading and Saving Settings
CAUTION
1 Press (menu) on the [System] screen.

[Load Cond.] Displays a file selection screen. -
Move to the parent

folder
File information
File selection

[Load]: Load settings from USB flash memory.
[Save Cond.] Save setting to USB flash memory. P.232
3 Press [Ret.].
108 TOC-4200
7 7 Maintenance
7.1 Inspection 7
7.1.1 Routine Inspection
7
DANGER
7
Inspect the condition of cables before using the instrument.
7
Damaged cable insulation could result in serious accidents including electrocution.
CAUTION
7
Always perform routine inspections.
Preventative maintenance is necessary to maintain long term instrument safety and
7
performance.
7
Check Points
Check for damaged cable insulation. 7
Check for leakage from tubing.
Confirm that the instrument is not making an unusual noise or generating smoke.
Confirm that there are no error messages displayed on the operation panel. 7
Confirm that calibration values have not changed significantly since the last calibration in the calibration
history.
Check that sample flows properly.
7
Check the chart paper condition (when printer option provided).
Collect the chart paper if necessary. 7
7
7
7
7
7
TOC-4200 109
7 Maintenance
7.1.2 Periodic Inspection

Amount of Liquid in the Bottles for Acid for IC Removal, Diluent, Standard
Solution
Inspect each bottle to confirm that there is adequate liquid for measurement.
Humidifier Water Level

Inspect the water level of the humidifier. If the water level is low, fill the humidifier with pure water
to the upper marker.
Water Level of the Drain Container for the Electronic Dehumidifier

Check that the water level in the drain container is at a height within about 10 mm of the overflow tube on
the side of the drain container. Add pure water to the drain container if the water level is lower than this.
While supplying carrier gas at 150 mL/min, check whether carrier gas is leaking from the drain tube in the
drain container.
If carrier gas is leaking even though the water level in the drain container is adequate, this may indicate that
the halogen scrubber is clogged. However, note that the drain tube may discharge bubbles immediately
after sample injection.
Water Level of the B-Type Halogen Scrubber

Check whether the carrier gas is bubbling.
Sample Injection State
CAUTION
The manner in which sample is discharged from the sample injector into the combustion tube affects
measurement repeatability. The sample should be injected vertically onto the catalyst in the
combustion tube.
Check the state of sample injection by looking into the combustion tube while the instrument is
operating. Adjust the sample injector if sample is discharged obliquely or in a scattered spray.
110 TOC-4200
7.1 Inspection
"Adjusting the Injection Status" P.139
Vertical Oblique Scattered spray
TOC-4200 111
7 Maintenance
7.1.3 Simple Performance Check

To detect any apparent problem of the instrument, carry out measurement for performance check at
regular intervals as described below, in addition to ordinary routine inspection.
Items to prepare
Zero water (Dilution water)
TC standard solution (100 mgC/L)
TC standard solution (200 mgC/L)
1 Select offline measurement, set "4" for the number of measurements and "15" for the
maximum number of measurements, and perform NPOC measurement of zero water
(to stabilize the instrument).
2 Create a calibration curve of NPOC 200 mgC/L, and set "4" for the number of
measurements and "5" for the maximum number of measurements.
3 Use the measurement conditions for the calibration curve created in step 2, and
perform a calibration measurement using a TC standard solution of 200 mgC/L.
Take the mean area value of measurement result as "A".
"5.4 Calibration" P.67

Check that the CV value is 3 % or less (repeatability and sensitivity check).
4 Select offline measurement, set "4" for the number of measurements and "5" for the
maximum number of measurements, and perform NPOC measurement using a TC
standard solution of 100 mgC/L.
Use the calibration curve created in step 2.
Take the mean area value of measurement result as "B".
5 Use "A" and "B" of measurement results and calculate the linearity.
Check that the calculated result is 3 % or less.
(Linearity calculation formula)

(B-A/2) /A*100 (%)
If the above criterion is not satisfied, see "8.4 Corrective Measures for Malfunctions" and take
appropriate action.
If the value is greatly deviated from the criterion, contact your Shimadzu representative.
112 TOC-4200
7.2 Combustion Tube and Catalyst

7.2.1 Selecting a Catalyst and Filling the Combustion Tube
CAUTION
Do NOT allow combustion tubes to sustain physical impacts.
Combustion tubes are made of quartz glass.
Select the type of catalyst to use according to the properties for measurement.
Do not contaminate the catalyst or allow contaminants to enter the combustion tube when filling it with
catalyst.
Contaminants will cause erratic and high blank values.
Contact your Shimadzu service representative if you wish to change to a different catalyst.
7
The temperature of the electric furnace requires adjustment according to the type of catalyst.
Precautions on Initial Use of a New Catalyst
TC Measurement
In high sensitivity TC measurement, using a catalyst for the first time will result in high blank values.
Calibration and measurement performed with high blank values will affect measurement values and
cause errors. For this reason, stabilize blank values by repeatedly injecting water and sample into the
combustion tube.
1 Perform the catalyst regeneration process once or twice and then measure distilled
water or deionized water for four to five hours (about 100 measurements).
2 Normally, set the injection volume to 100 L and determine whether blank values have
stabilized by monitoring the changes in peak area.
The appropriate magnitude of blank values depends on the quality of water used (concentration of
TC contained in the water as an impurity) and the TC measurement range when actually measuring
the sample.
Example: When using a concentration of about 100 mgC/L or greater
While a blank value equivalent to 1 mgC/L only affects the measurement values to a small degree,
measuring concentrations of about 10 mgC/L requires a stabilized blank value equivalent to
0.5 mgC/L or less.
TOC-4200 113
7 Maintenance
TN Measurement
In TN measurement, using a catalyst for the first time will result in low and stable blank values.
Perform measurement about 10 times on distilled water or deionized water with the injection volume
set to 100 L. The catalyst should pose no problems in practice if the resulting blank values are low.
Catalyst for TOC Measurement

Use this catalyst for TOC measurement that employs the TOC (TC-IC) method or NPOC method. Set
the temperature of the electric furnace to 680 C when using this catalyst.
There are two types of catalyst for TOC measurement: standard and high sensitivity.
Catalyst for TOC measurement is not suitable for TN measurement and therefore should only be used when
TN measurement is not performed.
TC Catalyst
TC catalyst should be used as the standard catalyst.
Combustion tube
Platinum catalyst
(Alumina spherical support) About 100 mm
Platinum mesh
(2 pieces)
Due to high blank values, use TC high sensitivity catalyst (option) to measure concentrations of TOC less
than 1 mgC/L with high accuracy.
114 TOC-4200
TC High Sensitivity Catalyst (When this Option Is Provided)

This type of catalyst keeps blank values low and is mainly used to measure trace amounts of TOC
(less than 1 mgC/L) in, for example, pure water.
A single filling requires two cylindrical containers worth of catalyst. Align the mouth of the
combustion tube with the opening on the cylindrical catalyst container and then push the catalyst into
the combustion tube via the other opening.
Combustion tube
TC high sensitivity
catalyst About 130 mm
Platinum mesh
(2 pieces)
Since a low detection rate of IC components that exceed 5 mgC/L renders the TOC (TC-IC) method
unsuitable for use with the catalyst for TOC measurement, use the NPOC method for TOC measurement
instead.
7
TOC-4200 115
7 Maintenance
Catalyst for TOC/TN Measurement (When the TN Option Is Provided)

Use this catalyst for TC and TN measurements. Set the temperature of the electric furnace to 720 C
when using this catalyst.
Since a low detection rate of IC components that exceed 10 mgC/L renders the TOC (TC-IC) method
unsuitable for use with the catalyst for TOC/TN measurement, use the NPOC method for TOC
measurement instead.
When TN measurement is not performed, select a catalyst for TOC measurement that permits a lower
temperature in the electric furnace. This will extend the service life of both the catalyst and the
combustion tube.
1 Fill the combustion tube with platinum catalyst up to a height about 140 mm from the
top of the tube.
2 Introduce a small amount (0.20 - 0.25 g) of ceramic fiber over the platinum catalyst.
3 Lightly press down on the ceramic fiber using the catalyst filling rod to attain a
thickness of about 10 mm.
About 140 mm
Combustion tube
Ceramic fiber About 10 mm
Platinum catalyst
(Alumina spherical support)
Platinum mesh
(2 pieces)
Because the filling height of the catalyst and ceramic fiber affects the TN detection rate, evenly cover the
entire surface of platinum catalyst with a 10 mm thickness of ceramic fiber.
Always use ceramic fiber. Never use quartz wool.
116 TOC-4200
7.2.2 Connecting the Combustion Tube
CAUTION

1 Fit the narrow end of the combustion tube filled with catalyst into the hole (approx.
22 mm) in the center of the electric furnace.
2 Hook up the scrubber and connect it to the bottom end of the combustion tube.
Loosen the hexagon cap nut on the PTFE union joint and connect the joint to the combustion tube.
7
Bottom end of the
combustion tube
PTFE union joint
PC washer
Scrubber
To the electronic dehumidifier
Scrubber connection
TOC-4200 117
7 Maintenance
3 Fit the top end of the combustion tube into the hole in the base of the sliding sample
injector.
Refasten the knurled screws at their original positions on the sliding sample injector.
Knurled screws for

securing the sliding
sample injector
Sliding sample
injector
Electric furnace
Scrubber
Allow some leeway in the vertical direction of the coupling between the slider and the gear that
drives the slider to make sure that the slider does not move in the vertical direction. If the slider
moves in the vertical direction, the airtightness between the slider and the O-ring of the sample
injection block will decrease.
4 Use quartz wool to fill the space at the bottom of the hole for fitting the combustion
tube in the electric furnace (the area that surrounds the narrow end of the combustion
tube).
This prevents the heat in the electric furnace from escaping.
Use quartz wool no smaller than 0.6 g and break it into five or six chunks to completely fill up the space.
Be sure to use quartz wool of the specified amount (0.6 g and more) for filling.
Any unfilled space could affect the measurement performance.
Always use new quartz wool when the combustion tube is replaced.
Do not break quartz wool minutely or crumble into pieces.
Minute pieces of quartz wool could fall from the electric furnace.
Combustion
tube
Electric
furnace
Quartz wool
Bottom end of the combustion tube
118 TOC-4200
5 Check if there is any space unfilled in the cut areas on the insulator located at the top
of the electric furnace.
If any unfilled space is left, fill up the space with quartz wool.
Insulator
Fill up with quartz wool.
TOC-4200 119
7 Maintenance
TN Option Installed
When the TN option is provided, the cover located under the electric furnace must be removed before
connecting the scrubber.
Remove the cover according to the procedure below before connection.
1 Remove the two screws.
Screws
Front view
2 Remove the cover.

Pull the cover a little towards you, move it down, and pull it further until it is removed.
Cover
Removing direction
Left side view
3 Reattach the cover to its original position after connection is complete.
120 TOC-4200
7.2.3 Washing and Replacing Catalyst and the Combustion Tube
CAUTION
Do NOT use any service tool such as a spanner when handling the combustion
tube.
Doing so could cause breakage of the combustion tube and possible injury.
Always wear protective gloves when handling the combustion tube.

Combustion tubes are made of quartz glass. Personal injury could occur.
Catalyst
Perform catalyst regeneration if the effectiveness of the catalyst deteriorates. If the effectiveness of
the catalyst is not restored by the regeneration process, either wash or replace the catalyst by
following the procedure below.
7
"Regenerating Catalyst" P.140
Washing Catalyst
1 If a large amount of salt has accumulated in the catalyst due to the measurement of
samples with high salt concentrations, wash the catalyst thoroughly with tap water to
flush out the salt.
2 Neutralize alkalis with hydrochloric acid diluted with five parts water.
3 Wash the catalyst with pure water (deionized water is acceptable) and then dry it at a
temperature lower than 700 C.
Catalyst can be reused several times through washing.
A large quantity of high-temperature steam is initially produced when the regenerated catalyst is
placed in the electric furnace and heated. Leave the outlet of the combustion tube open until steam
is no longer produced.
Replacing Catalyst
If the effectiveness of the catalyst is not restored by washing, replace the catalyst (alumina spherical
support).
TC high sensitivity catalyst cannot undergo regeneration. If measurement sensitivity and repeatability
are not restored through the regeneration process, replace the TC high sensitivity catalyst and reuse
the platinum mesh and combustion tube after washing them with hydrochloric acid.
TOC-4200 121
7 Maintenance
"7.2.1 Selecting a Catalyst and Filling the Combustion Tube" P.113
All used catalyst should be sent to a licensed industrial waste disposal company. When requesting disposal,
clearly indicate using an industrial waste manifest that the catalyst contains platinum.
122 TOC-4200
7.3 Carrier Gas Purification Tube and Catalyst
Combustion Tube
When washing or replacing catalyst, also wash the platinum mesh, combustion tube, and the inside of
the carrier gas purification tube with one part concentrated hydrochloric acid diluted with two parts
water. Then rinse these parts with water, dry, and reuse.
Replace the combustion tube, carrier gas purification tube, or POC combustion tube if it is broken or
cracked, causing gas leakage. The inside surface of the combustion tube will devitrify to a white
appearance with use due to the reaction with salt contained in samples. As long as there is no gas
leakage from the combustion tube, it can be used in this condition.
CAUTION
7
Do NOT allow carrier gas purification tubes to sustain physical impacts.
Carrier gas purification tubes are made of quartz glass.
7.3.1 Filling the Carrier Gas Purification Tube with Catalyst

Fill the L-shaped combustion tube with platinum catalyst.
Insert a small amount of quartz wool into the bottom (straight end) of the L-shaped combustion tube.
The purpose of the quartz wool is to prevent the catalyst from falling downwards.
Carrier gas
purification tube
Bottom of the L-shaped

combustion tube
Swage lock
Platinum catalyst
PTFE tubing
Quartz wool (Alumina spherical
support)
TOC-4200 123
7 Maintenance
Avoid inserting too much quartz wool as this will increase airflow resistance.
Do not contaminate the catalyst or allow contaminants to enter the L-shaped combustion tube when
filling it with catalyst.
Contaminants will cause erratic and high blank values.
7.3.2 Connecting the Carrier Gas Purification Tube
CAUTION

1 Fit the straight end of the L-shaped combustion tube filled with platinum catalyst into
the front hole of two (approx. 8 mm) on the electric furnace.
2 Connect the tubing to the L-shaped combustion tube.

Attach the swage lock onto the L-shaped combustion tube and tighten the lock's hexagon cap nut.
Always tighten tubing connections with your fingers.

Do not use tools as overtightening may cause deformation, leaks, or breakage.
3 Check if there is any space unfilled in the cut areas on the insulator located at the top
of the electric furnace.
If any unfilled space is left, fill up the space with quartz wool.
Insulator
Fill with quartz wool.
124 TOC-4200
TN Option Installed
When the TN option is provided, the cover located under the electric furnace must be removed before
connecting the scrubber.
Remove the cover according to the procedure below before connection.
1 Remove the two screws.
Screws
Front view
2 Remove the cover.

Pull the cover a little towards you, move it down, and pull it further until it is removed.
Cover
Removing direction
Left side view
3 Reattach the cover to its original position after connection is complete.
7.3.3 Washing and Replacing Catalyst and the L-Shaped Combustion

Tube
"7.2.3 Washing and Replacing Catalyst and the Combustion Tube" P.121
TOC-4200 125
7 Maintenance
7.4 POC Combustion Tube and Catalyst

(When the POC Option Is Provided)
CAUTION
Do NOT allow POC combustion tubes to sustain physical impacts.

POC combustion tubes are made of quartz glass.
POC combustion tubes are the same as L-shaped combustion tubes.
7.4.1 Filling the POC Combustion Tube with Catalyst

The method for filling the POC combustion tube with platinum catalyst is the same as the method for
filling the carrier gas purification tube.
"7.3.1 Filling the Carrier Gas Purification Tube with Catalyst" P.123
7.4.2 Connecting the POC Combustion Tube

Fit the POC combustion tube into the rear hole of two (approx. 8 mm) on the electric furnace.
The connection method for the POC combustion tube is the same as the method for the carrier gas
purification tube.
"7.3.2 Connecting the Carrier Gas Purification Tube" P.124
7.4.3 Washing and Replacing Catalyst and the POC Combustion Tube
126 TOC-4200
7.5 Installing the Reagent

7.5.1 Acid for IC Removal
CAUTION
Always wear protective eyewear and protective gloves when handling
hydrochloric acid.
Hydrochloric acid is a deleterious substance.
Direct contact with skin could cause personal injury.
Always handle hydrochloric acid in well ventilated areas.

Hydrochloric acid produces volatile gas.
When adding hydrochloric acid to pure water, always cool the container used
with water as required.
Heat is generated when adding hydrochloric acid to pure water.
1 Prepare the acid for IC removal by diluting hydrochloric acid with 10 parts pure water.
Preparation Procedure [Example] Preparing 2 L of hydrochloric acid diluted with 10 parts

diluent 7
1 Accurately measure 200 mL of hydrochloric acid and 1800 mL of pure water.
2 Stir the pure water while adding small amounts of hydrochloric acid until the two are
completely mixed.
2 Pour the acid for IC removal into the acid bottle for IC removal (2 L plastic tank).
3 Attach the cap to the bottle.
TOC-4200 127
7 Maintenance
4 Place the acid bottle for IC removal on its corresponding bottle stand.
Acid bottle for IC removal
Bottle stand
5 Feed the acid delivery tube for IC removal (PTFE tubing, 1.6 mm external diameter)
through the hole in the center of the cap and down to the bottom of the bottle.
128 TOC-4200
7.5.2 Diluent
1 Rinse the provided diluent bottle (10 L plastic tank) with pure water several times.
2 Fill the diluent bottle (10 L plastic tank) with pure water.
Always use pure water free from contaminants.
"7.6.1 Zero Water (Dilution Water)" P.130
3 Attach the cap to the diluent bottle.
4 Place the diluent bottle on its corresponding bottle stand.
Diluent delivery tube
Tube guide
Diluent bottle
Bottle stand
Right side of the instrument
5 Feed the diluent delivery tube through the hole in the center of the cap and down to
the bottom of the bottle.
TOC-4200 129
7 Maintenance
7.6 Preparing and Installing Standard Solution

7.6.1 Zero Water (Dilution Water)
Zero water (dilution water) is the diluent used during measurement and refers to either standard
solution with zero concentration of TC, IC, or TN, or the water used to prepare standard solution.
The degree of purity required for zero water (dilution water) varies depending on the measurement
range. For example, commercially available purified water is acceptable in practice when measuring
samples with TC concentrations of a few hundred mgC/L or mgN/L.
The quality of the zero calibration water should be considered together with the measurement range.
"Carbon Dioxide Content of Distilled Water in Equilibrium with the Atmosphere (mg/L)" P.210
7.6.2 Preparing Standard Solution

TC Standard Solution
TC standard solution can also be used as the standard solution for NPOC measurement.
1 Accurately weigh 2.125 g of reagent grade potassium hydrogen phthalate to be

dissolved in zero water (dilution water).
2 Put this substance into a 1 L volumetric flask and then add zero water (dilution water)
up to the marker.
The carbon concentration of this solution is equivalent to 1000 mgC/L. Keep this solution as a standard
stock solution. Standard stock solution does not always have to be prepared to 1000 mgC/L and can be
made at other concentrations, for example, 2000 mgC/L.
3 Add dilute hydrochloric acid.

The amount of dilute hydrochloric acid (acid for IC removal in Section 7.5.1) to be added is about 20 mL
for every 500 mL of standard solution (the concentration of hydrochloric acid after dilution should be
about 0.05 N). Dilute with zero water (dilution water) to adjust the concentration.
TN Standard Solution
1 Accurately weigh 7.219 g of reagent grade potassium nitrate to be dissolved in zero

water (dilution water).
2 Put this substance into a 1 L volumetric flask and then add zero water (dilution water)
up to the marker.
The nitrogen concentration of this solution is equivalent to 1000 mgN/L.
3 Add dilute hydrochloric acid.
"TC Standard Solution" P.130
130 TOC-4200
7.6 Preparing and Installing Standard Solution
TN/TOC Mixed Standard Solution

When the standard solution switching kit is not provided, the number of standard solution bottles is
limited to one.
In order to perform TC (or NPOC) and TN measurement at the same time, a mixed standard solution
of TC components and TN components can be prepared for use in both of these measurements.
Prepare mixed standard solution according to the preparations of TC standard solution and TN
standard solution.
Add hydrochloric acid to the mixed standard solution preparation to obtain a concentration of about
0.05 N.
"TC Standard Solution" P.130, "TN Standard Solution" P.130
IC Standard Solution (When the IC Option Is Provided)
1 Accurately weigh 3.497 g of reagent grade sodium hydrogen carbonate and 4.412 g of
sodium carbonate (heated to 285 C for one hour and then left to cool in a sulfuric acid
desiccator in advance) to be dissolved in zero water (dilution water).
2 Put these substances into a 1 L volumetric flask and then add zero water (dilution
water) up to the marker.
The concentration of this solution is equivalent to 1000 mgC/L. 7
3 Dilute with zero water (dilution water) to adjust the concentration.
Do not add dilute hydrochloric acid to IC standard solution.

Adding dilute hydrochloric acid will cause some IC components to be lost from the standard
solution.
POC Standard Solution (When IC/POC Option Is Provided)

IC standard solution is used in POC standard solution.
Do not add dilute hydrochloric acid to POC standard solution.
TOC-4200 131
7 Maintenance
7.6.3 Installing the Standard Solution
1 Pour the standard solution into the provided standard solution bottle (0.5 L plastic
tank).
2 Attach the cap to the bottle.
3 Place the standard solution bottle at the position shown in the figure below.
If using the optional standard solution switching kit, place the standard solution bottle on its
corresponding bottle stand.

(When the optional standard
solution switching kit is
provided)
Bottle stand
4 Feed the standard solution delivery tube (PTFE tubing No. "3", 1.6 mm external
diameter) through the hole in the center of the cap and down to the bottom of the
bottle.
132 TOC-4200
7.7 Replacement
7.7 Replacement
7.7.1 Maintenance Window
1 Press [Maintenance] on the top menu screen.
2 Press the button of the item for maintenance.

[Syringe Replace.] Replace the syringe. P.134
[Acid Bubble Rem.] Remove bubbles from the streams. P.138
[Injection Chk.] Check the stream injection status. P.139
[Syr. Zero Detect.] Detect the syringe zero point. P.140
[Catalyst Regen.] Regenerate catalyst. P.140
[Counter] Check the remaining amount of acid, standard solution (1 to P.141
8), and carrier gas, and set alarm values.
[Oil Seal Replace.] Replace the oil seal on the sampling unit. P.142
3 Press [Ret.].
TOC-4200 133
7 Maintenance
Replacing the Syringe
WARNING
Strictly follow the micro syringe removal/installation procedure.
Failure to follow the procedure when removing or installing a syringe could result in
personal injury due to the discharge of acid for IC removal (dilute hydrochloric acid)
from the syringe connection port.
CAUTION
Do NOT allow the syringe barrel to sustain physical impacts.

The syringe barrel is made of glass.
Do NOT apply excessive force to the syringe when attaching it to the holder.
This may cause the syringe to break.
Always tighten connections with your fingers when attaching the syringe.
Do NOT use tools as overtightening may cause deformation of the internal valve body,
leaks, or breakage.
1 Press [Syringe Replace.] on the [Maintenance] screen.
2 Press [Execute].
3 Replace the syringe.

Initialization of the syringe pump and 8-port valve may be performed depending on the condition of the
instrument.
134 TOC-4200
7.7 Replacement
4 Remove the cap from the syringe connection port (downward facing port) of the 8-port
valve and then attach the syringe.
Syringe
Holder
C surface
A-A cross section
A A
Holder
Syringe
5 Insert the metal end of the syringe into the holder.

Attach the holder so that it touches surface C, indicated in the figure.
6 Pressing the up button raises the plunger holder, which in turn pushes the plunger,
and then it stops. 7
Pressing the down button lowers the plunger.
Up button
Down button
TOC-4200 135
7 Maintenance
7 Secure the plunger fastening screw onto the plunger holder by tightening the screw
with your fingers.
Barrel
Sparge gas supply port
Sparge gas line
Bush
Plunger
Spacer
Plunger
fastening screw
8 Put the bush and spacer on the syringe and connect the syringe to the sparge gas
line.
9 Once syringe replacement is complete, press [Replaced].

The finalization processing for syringe replacement starts automatically. The screen returns to the
[Maintenance] screen once processing is complete.
Remove the syringe by performing the attachment procedure in reverse order.

Execute [Syringe Replace.] on the [Maintenance] screen when removing the syringe and reattach
the cap on the connection port after removing the syringe.
Replacing the Plunger Tip on the Syringe
CAUTION
Do NOT damage any part of the plunger tip.
This may cause leaks to occur.
Only use the plunger tip prescribed by Shimadzu.

The use of other plunger tips may result in malfunction or a decrease in performance.
The fluororesin plunger tip wears out with use and this can result in gaps between the tip and the glass
barrel of the syringe causing leaks to occur.
If bubbles are generated near the plunger tip when sample is drawn into the syringe or sample leaks
from the bottom of the barrel when delivering the sample, replace the plunger tip according to the
following procedure.
136 TOC-4200
7.7 Replacement
1 Remove the syringe using the procedure described in "Replacing the Syringe" P.134.
2 Make two to three incisions on the bottom end of the plunger tip using a cutter knife.
Plunger tip
Incisions (2 to 3 locations)
Plunger
3 Pinch the plunger tip with pliers or another suitable tool and remove the plunger tip
from the plunger as well as the three O-rings set inside the plunger.
These O-rings are not reused.
4 Fit a new plunger tip onto the plunger.
5 Press the new plunger tip vertically into the plunger tip cradle and then push in the
plunger.
Plunger
Push down 7
O-rings
New plunger tip
Plunger tip cradle
The plunger tip cradle is included with the syringe. Keep the plunger tip cradle and do not throw it
away.
6 Attach the syringe using the procedure described in "Replacing the Syringe" P.134.
TOC-4200 137
7 Maintenance
Removing Bubbles from Streams

In normal operation, bubbles are automatically removed in conjunction with syringe zero point
detection. Bubbles that appear in tubing when refilling the dilute hydrochloric acid are removed via
the tubing connected to the acid aspiration port (port number 4) on the 8-port valve of the syringe
pump type sample injector.
1 Press [Acid Bubble Rem.] on the [Maintenance] screen.
2 Press [Execute].
The process for removing bubbles from the streams starts automatically. The display returns to the
[Maintenance] screen once removal is complete.
138 TOC-4200
7.7 Replacement
Adjusting the Injection Status

Check the sample injection status as described in "Sample Injection State" P.110 and follow the
procedure below if a problem is detected.
This procedure employs diluent delivery to check the sample injection status.
1 Remove the slider together with the sample injection tube from the injector block.
2 Press [Injection Chk.] on the [Maintenance] screen.
3 Press [Execute] and check the status of diluent delivery.
200 l of diluent is delivered three times.
Delivery Status Description 7

An obstruction exists on the end of Remove the obstruction by washing the tube.
the tube
Discharge occurs obliquely or in a Use a cutter knife to remove about 1 mm from the end of the
scattered spray sample injection tube by cutting perpendicular to the tube's
axis.
4 Press [Execute] again and check the status of diluent delivery.

If diluent is discharged vertically from the tube, return to the [Maintenance] screen.
Reattach the slider and sample injection tube.
TOC-4200 139
7 Maintenance
Syringe Zero Point Detection
1 Press [Syr. Zero Detect.] on the [Maintenance] screen.
2 Press [Execute].
Syringe zero point detection starts automatically. The display returns to the [Maintenance] screen once
detection is complete.
Regenerating Catalyst
Catalyst includes the remnants of inorganic matter contained in samples as salt and oxides.
Measurement sensitivity and repeatability may deteriorate with an increase in the amount of residual
substances.
Moreover, measuring standard solution or zero water (dilution water) with new catalyst or catalyst
unused for an extended period of time will cause initial measurement values to be higher than usual
and then gradually decrease.
In these circumstances, perform regeneration processing to restore the effectiveness of the catalyst.
Catalyst regeneration processing is necessary when performing TC measurement. NPOC
measurement does not require catalyst regeneration because acid for IC removal is always added to
the sample before injection into the combustion tube.
If the effectiveness of the catalyst is not restored by the regeneration process, either wash or replace the
catalyst.
For details, see "7.2.3 Washing and Replacing Catalyst and the Combustion Tube" P.121.
Do not perform catalyst regeneration processing when the temperature of the electric furnace is low.
140 TOC-4200
7.7 Replacement
1 Press [Catalyst Regen.] on the [Maintenance] screen.
2 Press [Execute].
Catalyst regeneration processing starts automatically. The display returns to the [Maintenance] screen
once processing is complete.
Setting Residual Sample and Alarm Values
1 Press [Counter] on the [Maintenance] screen.
2 Set the [Remaining] and [Alarm] values for diluent, acid, standard solution, and carrier
gas.
7
Name Description
[Remaining] Set the remaining amount of each substance.
Setting range: 0 to 99999 (mL) (carrier gas unit: L)
[Alarm] Set alarm values that generate an alarm when reached.
Setting range: 0 to 99999, ---- (no alarm)
3 Press [OK].
The display returns to the [Maintenance] screen.
Entering a value about 10 % less than the actual remaining amount for [Remaining] will generate an
alarm before the sample completely runs out.
TOC-4200 141
7 Maintenance
Enter the value (V) determined by the formula below for the remaining amount of carrier gas.
PB
V = ------- V B
0.1
PB: Remaining pressure in the gas cylinder (MPa)

VB: Gas cylinder capacity (L)
Replacing the Oil Seal
CAUTION
Always turn OFF the power switch on the instrument before replacing the oil
seal.
Unexpected rotation of the mixing blades may cause personal injury.
1 Stop the supply of sample.
2 Press [Oil Seal Replace.] on the [Maintenance] screen.
3 Press [Execute].
4 Turn OFF the power switch on the instrument.
5 Remove the top cover from the sampling unit.
6 Remove the screws and the sampling plate.
Sampling plate
Screws
Top view of the sampling unit
142 TOC-4200
7.7 Replacement
7 Remove the screws from the motor bracket and then remove the motor unit.
8 Remove the oil seal assembly and replace it with a new one.
Oil seal assembly
Motor bracket
Screws
Motor unit
9 Reassemble the motor unit by reversing the procedure and reattach the top cover.
10 Turn ON the power switch on the instrument.
11 Once oil seal replacement is complete, press [Replaced].
12 Restart the supply of sample.
TOC-4200 143
7 Maintenance
7.7.2 Connecting and Replacing the CO2 Absorber

The installation position of the CO2 absorber is shown in the figure below.
CO2 absorber for POC measurement (when

the POC option is provided)
Pallet
3 4
2 5
1 Humidifier
Front side
No. Part Name Remarks

1 CO2 absorber for carrier gas purification -
2 CO2 absorber for purging the optical system -
3 CO2 absorber for short-cell purge When provided as an option
4 CO2 absorber for the NOx absorber When provided as an option
5 CO2 absorber for sparging When provided as an option
- CO2 absorber for POC measurement When provided as an option
CO2 Absorber for Carrier Gas Purification, Purging the Optical System,
Short-Cell Purge, NOx Absorber, and Sparging
The CO2 absorber container for carrier gas purification, purging the optical system, short-cell purge,
NOx absorber, and sparging should be replaced in its entirety.
A used CO2 absorber already saturated with CO2 can be used for the NOx absorber because it can still
absorb NOx gas.
While the replacement period for the CO2 absorber differs depending on instrument usage, always
replace the CO2 absorber for carrier gas purification and the NOx absorber every two months.
All used CO2 absorbers should be sent to a licensed industrial waste disposal company. When requesting
disposal, clearly indicate that the absorber contains soda lime using an industrial waste manifest.
144 TOC-4200
7.7 Replacement
1 Remove the rubber caps on the two pipes located on the lid of the container.
2 Connect the PTFE tubes to the container.

The two PTFE tubes (one with a Viton connector, the other with a Viton connector and filter) located
near the pallet on the lower section of the instrument connect to the absorber container. Connect the tube
labeled "L#" to the pipe labeled "L" on the CO2 absorber. Connect the tube labeled "S#" to the pipe
labeled "S".
The "#" symbol represents the numbers 1 to 5 of the "L#" and "S#" labels on the PTFE tubes. Match
the PTFE tube number with the corresponding CO2 absorber number.
Example: Connect the "L1" PTFE tube to the pipe labeled "L" on the No. 1 CO2 absorber for carrier
gas purification.
For details, see "7.7.2 Connecting and Replacing the CO2 Absorber" P.144.
3 Place the container on the pallet.
CO2 Absorber for POC Measurement (When the POC Option Is Provided)
CAUTION
Do NOT allow the CO2 absorber container for POC measurement to sustain
physical impacts. 7
The CO2 absorber container for POC measurement is made of glass.
Always wear protective eyewear, protective gloves, and a protective mask when
handling dehydrated lithium hydroxide crystals.
Dehydrated lithium hydroxide crystals comprise a corrosive (strongly basic) powder.
Direct contact with skin and inhalation could cause personal injury.
Air resistance increases gradually with CO2 absorber usage. The service life of the CO2 absorber is
determined by an increase in air resistance as opposed to decreased effectiveness in absorption of
carbon dioxide gas. If measurement values become unstable or there is resistance in the carrier gas
flow, replace the lithium hydroxide crystals in the CO2 absorber.
There are two types of lithium hydroxide crystals: dehydrated and hydrated. Use dehydrated lithium
hydroxide crystals for replacement.
Dehydrated lithium hydroxide crystals absorb carbon dioxide gas when they come into contact with air.
Quickly refill and reconnect the CO2 absorber because leaving this substance in direct contact with air
will reduce the amount of carbon dioxide it can absorb.
Do not strongly compress quartz wool or lithium hydroxide crystals when filling.
All used lithium hydroxide crystals should be sent to a licensed industrial waste disposal company.
When requesting disposal, clearly indicate using an industrial waste manifest that the waste is lithium
hydroxide crystals.
TOC-4200 145
7 Maintenance
1 Fill the CO2 absorber container for POC measurement with dehydrated lithium
hydroxide crystals.
A single filling requires 6 g of dehydrated lithium hydroxide crystals.
Cap
Nipple
Flat o-ring
Quartz wool
Fill with lithium

hydroxide crystals.
Quartz wool
Glass CO2 absorber container
2 Attach the CO2 absorber container for POC measurement to the clamp and reconnect
it.
Clamp
Electric furnace
146 TOC-4200
7.7 Replacement
7.7.3 Connecting and Replacing the Ozone Treatment Unit (When

Provided as an Option)
CAUTION
Do NOT allow the ozone treatment unit vessel to sustain physical impacts.
The ozone treatment unit vessel is made of quartz glass.
Connecting the Ozone Treatment Unit
1 Remove the caps from the gas inlet and outlet on the ozone treatment unit.
2 Point the gas inlet of the ozone treatment unit upwards and set it into the insertion
position.
7
Gas inlet
Gas outlet
Ozone treatment unit insertion position
Top view of the electric furnace Ozone treatment unit
3 Connect the Viton tube on the right side of the electric furnace to the gas inlet of the
ozone treatment unit and then secure it with a provided hose clamp.
4 Connect the Viton tube for evacuation on the lower section of the electric furnace to
the gas outlet of the ozone treatment unit and then secure it with another provided
hose clamp.
TOC-4200 147
7 Maintenance
Replacing the Catalyst for the Ozone Treatment Unit
The ozone treatment unit decomposes the ozone gas produced by the ozone generator. Periodically
replace the catalyst in the ozone treatment unit.
Always replace the Viton tubes together with the ozone treatment catalyst.
All used catalyst from the ozone treatment unit should be sent to a licensed industrial waste disposal
company. When requesting disposal, clearly indicate using an industrial waste manifest that the ozone
treatment catalyst contains manganese dioxide.
1 Remove the ozone treatment unit by reversing the connection procedure.
2 Remove the fluoro rubber plug on the gas outlet of the ozone treatment unit and take
out the used ozone treatment catalyst and polypropylene packing material.
3 Point the gas outlet downwards.
Gas inlet
Polypropylene packing material

Gas outlet
About 20 mm
Catalyst
Point the gas outlet downwards
Polypropylene packing material
Fluoro Wiring bands

rubber plug
Gas outlet Gas inlet
Ozone treatment unit Filling with catalyst
4 Insert a small amount of new polypropylene packing material down to the gas inlet end
and then fill with ozone treatment catalyst up to about 20 mm below the gas outlet.
The amount of catalyst is about 150 g.
5 Insert a small amount of polypropylene packing material into the gas outlet and
reattach the fluoro rubber plug that was removed in step 2.
6 Replace the Viton tube that connects the exhaust of the detector to the inlet of the
ozone treatment unit.
7 Reattach the ozone treatment unit to its original position and connect the Viton tubes.
"Connecting the Ozone Treatment Unit" P.147
148 TOC-4200
7.7 Replacement
7.7.4 Halogen Scrubber

The absorbent in the halogen scrubber changes color as chlorine is absorbed. As the amount of
absorbed chlorine increases, the area of color change extends towards the inlet of the sample cell.
Replace the halogen scrubber before the area of color change reaches the indicated position.
Replace with a new halogen scrubber before

Gas flow direction the color change reaches this point
Electronic
To the sample cell
dehumidifier
Portion filled with halogenating agent
Because the baseline can fluctuate immediately after replacement, leave the instrument to run until
the baseline stabilizes. Normally, the baseline should stabilize within one hour.
All used halogen scrubbers should be sent to a licensed industrial waste disposal company.
When requesting disposal, clearly indicate using an industrial waste manifest that the halogen scrubber
contains copper.
7.7.5 B-Type Halogen Scrubber

Chemical elements such as chlorine, bromine, iodine, and fluorine may corrode the inside of the
7
measurement cell.
In samples that contain these elements, the combustion process may cause the elements to be
discharged from the combustion tube in the form of hydrogen chloride, chloride, and chloric acid.
Substances discharged in the form of acids, such as hydrogen chloride, have a strong oxidation
capability and react corrosively with gold plating.
Substances discharged in the form of acids are easily dissolved in water and converted into
hydrochloric acid by bubbling them through the B-type halogen scrubber. Hydrochloric acid
dissolves the main components of the stainless mesh in the B-type halogen scrubber, iron and
chromium, to produce iron chlorides (FeCl2) and chromium chlorides. These chlorides possess a
strong reducing power and react with and absorb chlorine and bromine. The B-type halogen scrubber
removes bromine, iodine, and fluorine in addition to chlorine and has a greater absorption efficiency
and larger absorption capacity when compared to the conventional halogen scrubber.
As a guide, replace the solution in the B-type halogen scrubber with 0.05 N hydrochloric acid every three
months.
The effectiveness of the stainless mesh in the B-type halogen scrubber is lost once it completely dissolves.
While the mesh is expected to last for six months, regularly check the amount remaining.
Use the hydrochloric acid provided with the maintenance parts for the instrument or adjust and use reagent
grade hydrochloric acid.
"10.11.1 Standard Accessories" P.252

"10.12 Consumable Parts" P.259
TOC-4200 149
7 Maintenance
7.7.6 Replacing O-Rings on the Sliding Sample Injector

Two types of O-ring are inserted overlaid between the slider and the injection block of the sliding
sample injector. Replace both types of O-ring at once if a gas leak is occurring at this location.
Top White O-ring
Rounded side
Bottom
Black O-ring
Do not damage the O-rings or the O-ring insertion point during replacement.
To prevent gas leaks, install the O-rings (PTFE) in the correct orientation as shown in the figure above
when replacing the O-rings.
7.7.7 Rotor and Stator for the 8-Port Valve

The rotor and stator inside the 8-port valve of the syringe pump type sample injector are made of
ceramic material and normally do not require maintenance.
However, hard particles, such as fine sand, contained in a sample will damage the sliding surfaces of
the rotor and stator in the 8-port valve, which may cause leaks in addition to the following issues.
Decrease in the repeatability of sample measurement.
Bubbles appear in the syringe when drawing in diluent.
Some sample is sent to an unrelated port when discharging the sample in the syringe to the drain port.
If any of these issues can be visually confirmed, replace the rotor and stator according to the
procedure described below.
The sample applies hydraulic pressure to port number 2 in the 8-port valve. Stop the supply of sample to
the water sampler before disconnecting any tubing.
Prepare a suitable container to catch any accumulated liquid that flows out of the tubing and dispose of it
appropriately.
Visually check the suspended solids sampling unit externally as to weather sample has accumulated in
the unit's homogenizer.
If sample has accumulated, removing the tubing from port number 2 on the 8-port valve will cause this
sample to flow out. Prepare a suitable container to catch the accumulated sample and dispose of it
appropriately.
1 Remove the syringe.
"Replacing the Syringe" P.134
150 TOC-4200
7.7 Replacement
2 Stop the supply of sample and remove the tubing of the 8-port valve.
3 Remove the screws and the 8-port valve cover.
Screws
8-port valve cover
4 Use a hexagonal wrench to remove the three screws.
Use a
hexagonal
wrench to
remove these
7
Rotor drive screws Front side
component
Top view
8-port valve
main unit
5 Pull out the rotor drive component.
The rotor (milky white ceramic) may be attached to the rotor holder on the underside of the rotor
drive component when the rotor drive component is pulled out. In this case, make sure not to drop
the rotor.
6 Pull the rotor out of the 8-port valve.

This step is not necessary if the rotor came out in step 5. If rotor is firmly stuck to the stator due to the
liquid film on the sliding section, do not apply excessive force and proceed to step 7 instead.
The mating face of the rotor and stator is a flat surface processed to a high degree of accuracy. Be
careful not to damage the mating face.
TOC-4200 151
7 Maintenance
7 Fit the key wrench into the corresponding key wrench holes, rotate it in an anti-
clockwise direction, and then remove the stator locking screw.
Key wrench
Stator locking screw
Key wrench holes
Seat
Stator
8-port valve main unit
Packing
Top view Transparent side view
8 Tighten the syringe removed in step 1 until it reaches the top end of the barrel of the 8-
port valve main unit.
The stator (milky white ceramic) rises about 1 mm.
9 Pinch the stator together with the PTFE packing on the underside of the stator, then
remove and replace them both.
If the rotor was not removed in step 6, pull it out with the stator.
10 Install a new stator in the 8-port valve.
Align the two pins located at the bottom inside the 8-port valve with the holes on the underside of
the stator. Also insert a seat (colorless transparent plastic) onto the upper periphery of the stator.
11 Attach the stator locking screw.
12 Attach a new rotor to the rotor holder on the underside of the rotor drive component.
Insert the rotor so that the two pins on the inside of the rotor holder are aligned with the holes on the
upper surface of the rotor.
Rotor holder periphery
Rotor holder
Slot on the
underside of the
rotor (sliding Rotor
surface)
Rotor drive
component
152 TOC-4200
7.7 Replacement
13 Reattach the rotor drive component to its original position on the 8-port valve.
14 Attach the 8-port valve cover and fasten the screws.
15 Reattach the syringe to its original position.
TOC-4200 153
7 Maintenance
7.7.8 Chemiluminescence Detector (When Provided as an Option)

CAUTION
When removing the reactor, do NOT undo anything other than the prescribed
reactor screws.
The removal of other parts may result in damage to the reactor.
Always stop the instrument before performing maintenance on the

cause the drive parts to suddenly move, resulting in personal injury.
Components in the sample for measurement may adhere to the light receiving window on the
Inspect the component contamination and packing of the window at least once a year.
1 Disconnect the tubing.
Packing
Reactor Detector
Reactor
Detector
Tubing
Chemiluminescence Chemiluminescence
2 Remove the four screws and the reactor.

Only remove the reactor screws indicated in the figure below.
Reactor screws
154 TOC-4200
7.7 Replacement
3 Remove the packing.

If the packing is dirty or cracked, replace it.
4 Check for component contamination on the detector window.

Lightly wipe with a dry cloth to remove any contaminants.
5 Insert the packing with the flat side against the window of the detector, squeezing it
between the window and the reactor, and then evenly tighten the four screws.
6 Reconnect the tubing in its original position.
Finally, recheck that the tubing is connected properly and the screws are tight enough.
7.7.9 Ozone Generator

The ozone generator may leak ozone after a certain operation time (8000 hours) is exceeded. The
operation time of the ozone generator is recorded on the instrument. The instrument screen will
display a message prompting replacement when the replacement period is reached. Immediately
replace the ozone generator when this message is displayed.
Replacement of the ozone generator must be carried out by an authorized Shimadzu service engineer
or someone who has been properly trained in the procedure. Contact your Shimadzu representative to
7
request replacement.
Note that because the ozone generator only operates when necessary, the operation time of the ozone
generator cannot be determined from the instrument operation time.
TOC-4200 155
7 Maintenance
7.8 Additional Maintenance Procedures

7.8.1 Ensuring Proper 8-Port Valve Operation on Instrument Restart
In order to allow the 8-port valve of the syringe pump type sample injector to operate smoothly after
the instrument has been stopped for an extended period of time (more than about one week),
discharge all sample from the tubing before stopping the instrument. Perform the following procedure
if the rotor and stator in the 8-port valve are stuck and the 8-port valve does not rotate upon
instrument restart even after discharging all sample from the tubing.
"3.2.2 Shutdown" P.12
CAUTION
Do NOT allow your fingers to become caught in parts of the instrument when the
8-port valve rotates.
This task requires the application of force for the initial rotation, which may lead to
personal injury.
1 Turn OFF the power switch.
Hole for rotation
2 Insert a hexagonal wrench (2.5 nominal), or a metal rod that fits a 3 mm hole, into the
hole for rotation and then turn the 8-port valve (the valve can be rotated either left or
right).
3 After turning the 8-port valve a few times, turn ON power to the instrument and check
the operation of the 8-port valve.
156 TOC-4200
7.8.2 Cleaning the Flanged Tubing for Sparging

This instrument performs aeration inside the syringe to remove IC from the sample. As the aeration
process generates bubbles, clogging may occur inside the flanged tubing near the connection with the
syringe when the instrument is used over an extended period of time.
If the flow of bubbles becomes weak, clean the flanged tubing for sparging according to the
procedure described below.
1 Remove the relay connector and the connection piece that attaches the flanged tubing
to the syringe.
2 Clean the inside of the flanged tubing by inserting a 0.2 to 0.3 mm piece of wire.
3 Reattach the flanged tubing in its original position after cleaning is complete.
Connection piece
Relay connector 7
Sparge gas
0.2 to 0.3 wire

Flanged tubing
TOC-4200 157
7 Maintenance
7.8.3 Supplying the Electronic Dehumidifier Drain Pot with Water
1 Remove the rubber cap from the electronic dehumidifier drain pot.
Electronic dehumidifier
(When provided as an option)
Electronic dehumidifier
Drain pot
2 Fill the drain pot with pure water up to the drain discharge tube.
3 Reattach the rubber cap in its original position.
Check that the end of the drain tube from the electronic dehumidifier is located at the bottom of
the drain pot.
Make sure there are no kinks along the drain tube that prevent drain discharge.
158 TOC-4200
When the IC or IC-POC Measurement Option Is Provided
1 Attach the provided guide.
2 Fill the drain pot with pure water from the end of the guide up to the drain discharge
tube using a wash bottle or similar device.
Guide
Side view
3 Remove the guide.
TOC-4200 159
7 Maintenance
7.8.4 Supplying the Humidifier with Water
1 Fill the humidifier with pure water to the upper marker via the supply port on the side of
the humidifier container.
Use pure water with minimal TC components when performing high sensitivity measurement.
2 Place the humidifier on the pallet.

When provided as an option, secure the humidifier in the position shown in the figure below using the
fastening band.
Humidifier
(When provided as an option)
Humidifier
Pallet
3 Connect the PTFE tubes.

Connect the reducing union on the end of the PTFE tube labeled "L" to the longer glass tube on the
humidifier, and connect the tubing of the reducing union on the end of the PTFE tube labeled "S" to
the shorter glass tube.
Neither glass tube must be in water.
160 TOC-4200
7.8.5 Filling the Printer and Recorder with Chart Paper (When Provided
as an Option)
Filling the Printer with Chart Paper
1 Feed the shaft through the hole in the center of the chart paper.
2 Press the lever in the direction indicated by the arrow and open the front door towards
you.
Lever
Front door
3 Place the chart paper with the shaft fed through it onto the chart holder.
7
Shaft
Chart paper
Chart holder
4 Feed the chart paper through to the roller side and pull the paper out about 250 mm.
Roller
About 250 mm
TOC-4200 161
7 Maintenance
5 Close the front door.
6 Press the position marked "PUSH" until you hear the door click into place.
Press here
7 Turn ON power to the instrument.
8 Press the FEED key.

Check that the paper feeds properly.
If printing is executed without refilling the chart paper, printing occurs immediately after the chart
paper is refilled.
9 Place the end of the chart paper in the catch tray.
162 TOC-4200
Filling the Recorder with Chart Paper
1 Pull the chart holder out towards you and prepare the chart paper before inserting it
into the chart recess.
Insert the chart paper so that the side for printing is facing up when the paper is pulled out.
2 Lower the chart clamp towards you and pull out the chart paper.
3 Align the sprocket holes on each side of the chart paper with the chart delivery pins on
the drum.
4 Pull out two to three folds of chart paper and fold them into the chart receptacle tray.
5 Return the chart clamp and chart holder to their original positions.
TOC-4200 163
7 Maintenance
7.8.6 Cleaning the Sampling Unit (Option)

Multi-stream suspended solids sampling unit
Select a stream using the water sampling unit external to the instrument and then inject the sample of
the selected stream into the multi-stream suspended solids sampling unit.
Sampling Unit Operation and Sample Sequence
Stream selection using the water sampling unit
Removal of large suspended solids using the stainless

mesh in the sampling unit
Trituration of suspended solids remaining in the sample

homogenizing container and sample homogenization
Sample extraction and measurement
Discharge of sample remaining in the sample

homogenizing container via the drain valve
Washing of the sample homogenizing container with

wash water
Automatic washing of the water sampling tube for the water sampling unit and the stainless mesh
after sample extraction and discharge helps to prevent these components from becoming clogged.
However, clogging may occur when a significant amount of suspended solids are present in a sample
or a sample contains suspended solids that readily adhere to instrument components. In this case,
disassemble and clean the water sampling unit and sampling unit.
1 Remove and disconnect the screws and connectors on the water sampling unit and
the sampling unit.
2 Remove any clogging with a brush or similar tool.
3 Reattach the screws and connectors to their original positions on the water sampling
unit and the sampling unit.
164 TOC-4200
Single Stream Suspended Solids Sampling Unit

Only a single stream is employed when using the single stream suspended solids sampling unit.
The necessary sample flow rate drops to about 3 L/min because the water sampling mechanism in the
single stream suspended solids sampling unit employs an overflow system.
Single Stream Suspended Solids Sampling Unit
Operation and Sample Sequence
Injection of sample from the water sampling unit
Mixing and homogenization in the sample

homogenizer
Sample extraction and measurement
Sampling unit
1 Release the clamp and pull out the sample homogenizer.

7
Mixing motor
Valve
Clamp Wash nozzle
Strainer
Sampling plate
Sample homogenizer
Pinch valve
2 Remove any contaminants adhered to the strainer, sampling plate, and sample
homogenizer using a brush or similar tool.
3 Return the sample homogenizer to its original position and tighten the clamp.
TOC-4200 165
7 Maintenance
Backwash Strainer Sample Sampling Unit

Only a single stream is employed when using the backwash strainer sample sampling unit.
Sample flows through the backwash strainer sample sampling unit by overflowing up from the
sample preparation vessel.
The sample water sampler in the unit is moderated with pressurized air when sample is not being
extracted. In addition, intermittent bubbling through the strainer helps to prevent the strainer from
clogging.
The sample water sampler returns to atmospheric pressure when sample is to be extracted. When this
happens, the sample flows up through the strainer into the sample water sampler. The necessary
sample flow rate drops to about 1 to 3 L/min because of the overflow system is employed by the
water sampling mechanism.
1 Remove the two thumbscrews from the lid and pull out the sample water sampler.
Water sampling tube
Antimicrobial Thumbscrews
(Option)
Packing
Sample water sampler

Sample preparation vessel
Strainer
2 Remove any contaminants adhered to the sample water sampler and the sample
preparation vessel using a brush or similar tool.
3 Remove the strainer and remove any adhered contaminants using a brush, ultrasound
cleaning, or similar method.
4 Reattach the components to their original positions.
166 TOC-4200
7.8.7 Cleaning the Wash Water Pressure Reducing Valve (Option)

Clean the wash water pressure reducing valve every six months (when the optional multi-stream
suspended solids sampling unit, single stream suspended solids sampling unit or multi-stream sample
switching unit is installed).
How to Clean the Strainer
1 Close the water supply valve.
2 Turn the cover to the left to remove it.

Prepare a suitable container to catch any remaining water that flows out of the tubing.
Spring
Cleanout
plug
Check valve
7
Strainer
Cover
Bar
3 Wash the strainer with water.
4 Set the spring and the check valve in the cover and tighten the cover.
5 Open the water supply valve, open the water plug, and check that water flows out.
6 Ensure that there is no water leak from the strainer.
TOC-4200 167
7 Maintenance
How to Drain Water
1 Close the water supply valve.
2 Turn the cleanout plug to the left by hand and push up the bar to drain water remaining
in the tubing and the pressure reducing valve.
3 When water has been drained, tighten the cleanout plug.

Keep the water supply valve closed and the bar set in the pushup position.
168 TOC-4200
8 8 Troubleshooting
This chapter explains the corrective measures to take when error messages and alarms are generated.
8
8.1 Problem Indication Methods
The instrument uses the following methods to indicate that a problem has occurred.
8
Displaying error messages on the LCD screen
8
"LCD Screen Display" P.169
"Deactivating Instrument and Measurement Value Alarms" P.170 8
"8.2 Error Messages" P.171
Lighting or flashing of alarm LED lights
8
Instrument alarms: Lit
Fatal errors: Flashing 8
Measurement value alarms: Lit
Buzzer 8
Values outside the setting range are
entered or a prohibited key is pressed: Short beep twice 8
Instrument alarm or data cleared: Long beep once
Fatal errors: Long continuous beep 8
LCD Screen Display 8
The following screens are displayed when the instrument encounters a
problem.
8
8
8
[Fatal Error] screen [Inst. Alarm] screen

8
Fatal error: Press [OK] to stop the instrument and the buzzer.
Instrument alarm: Press [OK] to return to the previous screen.
8
"8.2 Error Messages" P.171 8
"Deactivating Instrument and Measurement Value Alarms" P.170
TOC-4200 169
8 Troubleshooting
Deactivating Instrument and Measurement Value Alarms
1 Press [OK] in the [Inst. Alarm] screen.
Proceed from step 2 when a [Measurement Value Alarm] occurs.
2 Press (error occurred) at the top right of the screen.

Error occurred
The [Alarm] screen is displayed.
3 Deactivate the alarm.
Alarm Alarm
information information
Display
selection
button Display
selection
[Instrument Alarm] screen [Measurement Value Alarm] screen button
Name Description
Alarm information Displays a list of alarm information.
Display selection button Display data selection: Change the display between the [Instrument
Alarm] and [Measurement Value Alarm] screens.
[Clear] Deactivate the selected alarm.
[Clear All] Deactivate all alarms.
4 Press [OK].
The display returns to the previous screen.
170 TOC-4200
8.2 Error Messages
8.2 Error Messages

This section describes the error messages, causes and corrective measures for each fatal error,
instrument alarm, and measurement value alarm.
Fatal Error Messages

If a fatal error is displayed, stop the instrument and contact your Shimadzu service representative.
Error Message Cause Printed Output

Fatal error "INTERNAL MEMORY" has A problem occurred in the internal INTERNAL MEMORY
occurred. memory.
Contact your Shimadzu representative.
Fatal error "CARRIER FLOW LINE" has A problem occurred in the carrier gas CARRIER FLOW LINE
occurred. stream.
Fatal error "SPARGE FLOW LINE" has A problem occurred in the sparge gas SPARGE FLOW LINE
occurred. stream.
Fatal error "PRESSURE SENSOR *" has A problem occurred in pressure sensor PRESSURE SENSOR *
occurred. 1 number *.1 1

Fatal error "FURNACE OVERHEAT" The electric furnace overheated. FURNACE
has occurred.
OVERHEAT
8
Fatal error "FURNACE TEMP" has The temperature of the electric FURNACE TEMP
occurred. furnace does not rise.
Fatal error "FURNACE FAN" has The fan for the electric furnace has FUARNCE FAN
occurred. stopped.
Fatal error "FURNACE POWER UNIT" A problem occurred with the power FURNACE POWER
has occurred. supply of the electric furnace. UNIT
Fatal error "FURNACE POWER A problem occurred with the power FURNACE POWER
RELAY" has occurred. supply of the electric furnace when RELAY
Contact your Shimadzu representative. turning the power OFF.
Fatal error "DEHUM TEMP" has A problem occurred in electronic DEHUM TEMP
occurred. dehumidifier temperature control.
Fatal error "DEHUM FAN" has occurred. The fan for the electronic DEHUM FAN
Contact your Shimadzu representative. dehumidifier has stopped.
Fatal error "OPTIONAL DEHUM" has A problem occurred with the optional OPTION DEHUM
occurred. electronic dehumidifier.
TOC-4200 171
8 Troubleshooting

Fatal error "SYRINGE ZERO DETECT" Zero point detection failed. SYRINGE ZERO
has occurred. DETECT
Fatal error "INITIAL CALIB" has An initial calibration error occurred. INITIAL CALIB
occurred. (Gradient less than "0".)
Verify the standard solutions.
Fatal error "SYRINGE" has occurred. A problem occurred during syringe SYRINGE
Contact your Shimadzu representative. operation.
Fatal error "8PORT VALVE" has A problem occurred during 8-port 8PORT VALVE
occurred. valve operation.
Fatal error "STD SELECTOR" has A problem occurred during standard STD SELECTOR
occurred. solution 8-port valve operation.
Fatal error "SLIDER" has occurred. A problem occurred during slider SLIDER
Contact your Shimadzu representative. operation.
Fatal error "TOC DETECTOR TEMP" A problem occurred in TOC detector TOC DETECTOR
has occurred. temperature control. TEMP
Fatal error "TOC DETECTOR MOTOR" The TOC detector motor has stopped. TOC DETECTOR
has occurred. MOTOR
Fatal error "TOC DETECTOR A problem occurred with the internal TOC DETECTOR
MEMORY" has occurred. memory of the TOC detector. MEMORY
Fatal error "TOC DET A problem occurred with the TOC DET
UNCONNECTED" has occurred. connection to the TOC detector. UNCONNECTED
Fatal error "TN DETECTOR TEMP" has A problem occurred in TN detector TN DETECTOR TEMP
occurred. temperature control.
Fatal error "TN DETECTOR MEMORY" A problem occurred with the internal TN DETECTOR
has occurred. memory of the TN detector. MEMORY
Fatal error "TN DETECTOR FAN" has The TN detector fan has stopped. TN DETECTOR FAN
occurred.
Fatal error "TN DET UNCONNECTED" A problem occurred with the TN DET
has occurred. connection of the TN detector. UNCONNECTED
Fatal error "OZONE PRESS SENSOR" A problem occurred with the pressure OZONE PRESS
has occurred. sensor for the ozone stream. SENSOR
172 TOC-4200
8.2 Error Messages

Fatal error "TERMINAL UNCONNECT" A problem occurred with the terminal TERMINAL
has occurred. board connection. UNCONNECT
Fatal error "SAMPLER MOTOR" has A problem occurred with the motor of SAMPLER MOTOR
occurred. the single stream suspended solids
Contact your Shimadzu representative. sampling unit.
1) : The corresponding pressure sensor number is displayed.
Instrument Alarm Messages
Error Message Cause Corrective Measures Printed Output
Short standard solution #*.1 - Refill standard STD# *RUNOUT 1

Refill the standard solution #* solution *.1
container.
Short dilution water. Refill the - Refill the diluent. WATER RUNOUT
dilution water container.
Short acid. Refill the Acid - Refill the acid for IC ACID RUNOUT
container. removal.
Low carrier gas pressure. Verify - Check the supply LOW CAR GAS
that the carrier gas is supplied status of the carrier PRESS
properly.
Short carrier gas. Resupply -
gas.
Refill the carrier gas. CARRIER GAS
8
carrier gas. RUNOUT
The catalyst regeneration has - Perform catalyst CAT REGEN
been cancelled due to insufficient regeneration after the CANCELLED
furnace temperature. temperature of the
electric furnace has
risen high enough.
The data could not be written to A problem occurred Check the condition of STORAGE DEVICE
the storage device. with the USB flash the USB flash ERR
memory. memory.
"PRINTER ERROR" has - Check the condition of PRINTER ERROR
occurred. the printer and resolve
the cause of the
problem.
Chart paper has run out. Restock - Refill the printer with PRINTER PAPER OUT
chart paper. paper.
TOC-4200 173
8 Troubleshooting
"8PORT VALVE RETRY" has Three retry operations There is a problem 8PORT VALVE
occurred. were performed with the operation of RETRY
intermittently on the the 8-port valve.
8-port valve during a This problem requires
single measurement. immediate inspection.
Contact your
Shimadzu
representative.
The ambient temperature is out The ambient Make sure that the ROOM TEMP ERR
of the operating range. temperature of the ambient temperature is
instrument is outside within the guaranteed
the guaranteed performance range.
performance range.
The furnace switch is OFF. - Turn the electric FURNACE SW OFF
Switch the furnace ON. furnace switch ON.
The CO2 Absorber * has reached - Replace the CO2 REPLACE CO2 ABS*
its validity date. Replace CO2 absorber. 2
Absorber *.2
The CO2 Absorber for POC has - Replace the CO2 REPLACE CO2 ABS
reached its validity date. Replace absorber for POC POC
CO2 Absorber for POC. measurement.
The syringe plunger tip has - Replace the plunger REPLACE PLUNGER
reached its validity date. Replace tip on the syringe. TIP
plunger tip.
The catalyst has reached its - Wash or replace the REPLACE CATALYST
validity date. Wash or replace catalyst.
catalyst.
The 8-port valve rotor has - Replace the 8-port REPLACE 8PV
reached its validity date. Replace valve rotor. ROTOR
8-port valve rotor.
The standard selector rotor has - Replace the standard REPL STD SEL
reached its validity date. Replace selector rotor. ROTOR
Std. Selector valve rotor.
The ozone generator has reached - Replace the ozone REPLACE OZONE
its validity date. generator. GEN
The sampler air pump has - Replace the air pump REPLACE AIR PUMP
reached its validity date. for the backwash
strainer sample
sampling unit (with
pump).
The sampler mixing motor has - Replace the mixing REPLACE MIX
reached its validity date. motor. MOTOR
The sampler oil seal has reached - Replace the oil seal on REPLACE OIL SEAL
its validity date. Replace oil seal. the sampling unit.
174 TOC-4200
8.2 Error Messages
Low battery. Needed to be The service life of the Replace the battery. EXCHANGE
exchanged. battery has been BATTERY
exceeded.
1) : The corresponding standard solution number is displayed.

2) : The corresponding CO2 absorber number is displayed.
Measurement Value Alarm Messages

The calibration has failed. The gradient was less than "0". CALIBRATION
Check the standard solutions. FAILURE
The calibration curve was not renewed. The conditions for updating the CALIB UNRENEWED
Did not meet the renewal criteria. calibration curve were not satisfied.
S* #### 1st Upper Limit 1, 2 The alarm value was exceeded. S#* #### HIGH 1
S* #### 2nd Upper Limit 1, 2 The alarm value was exceeded. S#* #### EXT HIGH 1
S* #### 1st Lower Limit 1, 2 The alarm value was underrun. S#* #### LOW 1
S* #### 2nd Lower Limit 1, 2 The alarm value was underrun. S#* #### EXT LOW 1
8
1) : The corresponding stream (1 to 6) is displayed.
2) ####: Indicates the TOC, TOC conversion value, TN, TN conversion value, TOC conversion value
load, TN load, and TOC removal rate.
TOC-4200 175
8 Troubleshooting
8.3 Responding to Problems
CAUTION
Stop using the instrument immediately if operation is problematic or unusual
noises are heard and contact your Shimadzu service representative.
Problem occurs
Is there a message displayed on the screen?

Are the LEDs lit or flashing?
Is an alarm sounding?

"8.4 Corrective Measures for Malfunctions" P.177
Has the problem been resolved?
Yes No
Contact your Shimadzu service

No more action is required.
representative.
176 TOC-4200
8.4 Corrective Measures for Malfunctions

This section describes some simple inspections that can be performed when a malfunction occurs.
If the cause of the problem remains unknown or problem symptoms do not improve even after
performing inspection and corrective measures according to the procedure below, contact your
Shimadzu service representative.
Improper Baseline Position for the TOC Detector (NDIR)
The carrier gas is flowing properly to the The carrier gas is leaking.
measurement cell. No Fix the leak.
Yes
The electronic humidifier is at the prescribed The temperature setting for the electronic
temperature. No dehumidifier is defective.
Yes representative.

representative.
8
Improper Baseline Position for the Chemiluminescence Detector
Source gas is being supplied. Check the gas source (compressor or the
(250 to 300 kPa) No remaining pressure in the gas cylinder).
Yes
The source pressure of the carrier gas is at Turn the carrier gas source pressure
200 kPa. No regulating valve to adjust it to 200 kPa.
Yes
Light is leaking into the detector from the Contact your Shimadzu service
reactor gas discharge tube, ozone supply No representative.
port, or sample injection port.
Yes
Connect the tubing correctly.
TOC-4200 177
8 Troubleshooting
Unstable Baseline for the TOC Detector (NDIR)
Yes
Yes
Determine the location of the carrier gas leak

The carrier gas is leaking. Yes and fix it.
No
Interfering substances have accumulated.

The catalyst has been replaced.
No Replace the catalyst.
Yes
The CO2 absorber for carrier gas purification The effectiveness of the CO2 absorber is
has been used for more than two months. Yes inadequate.
Replace the CO2 absorber.
No
There are any external factors such as There are effects from external factors.
vibrations, ambient temperature, or power Yes Eliminate any external factors.
supply voltage that may contribute to
instability.
No
The TOC detector is malfunctioning.

representative.
178 TOC-4200
Unstable Baseline for the Chemiluminescence Detector
Yes
Yes
Light is leaking into the detector from the Contact your Shimadzu service
reactor gas discharge tube, ozone supply Yes representative.
port, or sample injection port.
No
The reactor temperature is controlled The reactor temperature control function is

properly. No defective.
(65 C on the monitor screen) Contact your Shimadzu service
representative.
Yes
There are effects from external factors.

8
There are any external factors such as
vibrations, ambient temperature, or power Yes Eliminate any external factors.
supply voltage that may contribute to
instability.
No
The chemiluminescence detector is

malfunctioning.
representative.
TOC-4200 179
8 Troubleshooting
Low Sample Measurement Repeatability
An "H" mark is displayed in the remarks The peak value exceeds the range.
field.1 Yes Change to an appropriate measurement
range.
No
A "T" mark is displayed in the remarks field.2 Yes

Check the carrier gas supply.
No
Standard solution preparation is incorrect.

The standard solution is prepared correctly.
No Prepare the standard solution again.
Yes
The sample is being injected from the The injecting condition from the injection tube
injection tube properly. No is not good.
Inspect the injection tube.
Yes
The airtightness of the plunger has

There are bubbles in the sample in the
Yes decreased.
syringe.
Replace the plunger tip.
No If the repeatability is low after the plunger tip
has been replaced, the airtightness of the 8-
port valve has decreased.
representative.
The water level in the drain container is

The carrier gas is leaking from the drain
Yes insufficient.
container.3
Fill the container up to the regular water level
No with water.
Regenerate the catalyst.

The catalyst has been regenerated. If the repeatability is low after catalyst
No
regeneration, the catalyst has deteriorated.
Yes Replace the catalyst.
"7.2.3 Washing and Replacing Catalyst and
the Combustion Tube" P.121
Catalyst regeneration is incomplete.

Regenerate the catalyst again.
If the repeatability is low after catalyst
regeneration, the catalyst has deteriorated.
Replace the catalyst.
"7.2.3 Washing and Replacing Catalyst and
the Combustion Tube" P.121
1) The "H" mark is displayed when a peak value exceeds the full scale of the current range.
2) The "T" mark is displayed when peak processing does not finish within the allotted time limit.
3) Bubbles that appear at approximately the same time as sample injection are not a problem. All other
occurrences of carrier gas leakage are considered abnormal.
180 TOC-4200
Measurement Values Display Zero
Inspect the sample delivery pump.

Sample is flowing.
No Inspect the sample delivery tube.
Inspect the suspended solids sampling unit.
Yes
Tubing is clogged. Yes Fix the clogged tubing.
No
Tubing is disconnected. Yes Connect the tubing.
No
The syringe is loose. Yes Tighten the syringe.
No
The carrier gas is flowing.

No
Check the gas supply source.
8
Yes
The TOC detector is malfunctioning.

representative.
TOC-4200 181
8 Troubleshooting
182 TOC-4200
9 9 Installation
9.1 Installation Environment 9

WARNING 9
Do NOT install the instrument at a site where fire is prohibited.
The instrument contains parts that become extremely hot. In addition, be aware that fire
may break out due to inflammable substances generated from samples that contain large
9
amounts of volatile organic matter.
Always install fire extinguishers nearby as a safety precaution. 9
CAUTION
9
Do NOT use the instrument in hazardous areas.
The construction of the instrument is not explosion-proof.
9
Do NOT install the instrument near equipment that generates strong magnetic
fields, electric fields, or high frequency waves.
9
Add a noise filter to power supply lines that suffer from excessive noise.
9
Uphold the following installation site conditions when installing the instrument to ensure correct and
safe use.
A site sheltered from direct exposure to wind and rain 9
A site free from vibration and shocks where the instrument can be installed horizontally
A site free from corrosive gases, dust, and humidity
A site free from sudden changes in temperature and shielded from direct sunlight
9
An indoor site with good ventilation
If installing at a site with poor ventilation, install ventilating ducts or ventilation equipment. 9
A site near water and evacuation outlets
A site with a stable power supply and safe grounding point
A site that may sustain lightning strikes requires the installation of a lightning arrester and other necessary 9
equipment. Contact your Shimadzu service representative to request installation.
9
9
9
9
TOC-4200 183
9 Installation
9.2 Connecting and Grounding the Power Supply
WARNING
Only connect a suitable power supply to the instrument.
Using an incompatible power supply voltage may result in fire, electric shock, or
malfunction.
Ground the power supply appropriately. (Class 3 grounding, grounding

resistance: less than 100 )
Improper grounding may cause electric shocks. Grounding is also important to secure
stable instrument operation.
CAUTION
Do NOT use objects such as water pipes, gas pipes, or lightning arresters for
grounding purposes.
Using such objects for grounding may cause accidents, instrument damage or
malfunction, and electric shocks.
Connect the instrument to a power outlet with ample electrical capacity. Inadequate electrical
capacity will cause power failures and voltage drops that affect the instrument and any other
equipment sharing the same power supply. Note that an unstable voltage may interfere with high
sensitivity measurements.
The power supply voltage and frequency specifications of the instrument are listed in the table below.
Power Supply Voltage Frequency Capacity

100 to 240 VAC (allowable range: 90 to 264 VAC) 50/60 Hz 6 A or greater
Grounding is also critically important from a safety standpoint and for the protection of logic circuits
and microprocessors inside the instrument against interference from external noise. For this reason,
implement class 3 grounding (grounding resistance: less than 100 ).
Use thermal breakers instead of fuses on the power supply.
The instrument's power switch will automatically turn off if an overcurrent occurs. If the power switch
turns off repeatedly, investigate the cause of the overcurrent and take appropriate action to resolve the
problem.
184 TOC-4200
9.3 Tubing Connections

9.3.1 Drain Tubing
CAUTION
Do NOT touch or spill any waste liquid discharged from the drain tubing.
Waste liquid from the drain tubing may contain corrosive substances including acids and
direct contact with the skin could cause personal injury.
The drain tubing of the syringe pump type sample injector, sliding sample injector, and electronic
dehumidifier are consolidated into a single drain tube inside the instrument. This tubing is connected
to the drain discharge port on the lower left side of the instrument. Connect a flexible tube with an
8 mm internal diameter to the drain discharge port.
Lower left side of the instrument
DRAIN OUT EXHAUST GAS INLET
Drain
discharge port
A mere difference in height allows left over sample and wash water to be discharged. If resistance in a
stream connected to the drain tubing is high, proper discharge of these waste liquids will be prevented
and may lead to leakage inside the instrument. Always make sure that the external drain tubing is lower
9
than the drain discharge port.
Avoid collecting waste liquid in a plastic tank container when performing consecutive online
measurements.
TOC-4200 185
9 Installation
9.3.2 Gas Line

Gas Supply
Connect the gas line to the gas supply port to supply pressurized air or oxygen as the carrier gas and
sparging gas (ozone air gas supply).
Lower left side of the instrument
DRAIN OUT EXHAUST GAS INLET
Gas discharge Gas supply

port port
Item Description
Gas type Pressurized air or oxygen
Must not contain dust, oil mist, or water droplets.
Pressure and required volume 250 to 300 kPa (20 kPa)
Line connection type Rc 1/4
Due to limitations in the effectiveness of the gas purifier (oxidation of combustion catalyst/absorption
method for carbon dioxide), supply pressurized air and oxygen that satisfies the following conditions.
If using a compressor to supply air, use an oil-less compressor.
Install an air filter to the pressurized air supply line to prevent the introduction of contaminants such as
dust, oil mist, or water droplets.
For compressor use in particular, install the air filter capable of drain separation and discharge close to the
gas supply port.
Do not use pressurized air from the gas purifier in installation environments that are exposed to volatile
gases, including organic solvents and gasoline, or high concentrations of exhaust emissions from vehicles
or diesel engines.
An excessive concentration of organic gas may prevent the gas purifier from completely removing
contaminants. In this case, use a filter to remove unwanted organic particles and gases.
Install a pressure regulating valve on the pressurized air supply line, if necessary.
186 TOC-4200
Gas Discharge (When the Relevant Options Are Provided)
CAUTION
Release all discharged gas either outside or into an exhaust pit.
Release discharge gas below atmospheric pressure in order to prevent backpressure.
This instrument features a built-in ozone generator. Ozone and NOx gas produced by the ozone
generator are eliminated using the ozone treatment unit and NOx absorber before the remaining gas is
discharged.
If the effectiveness of the ozone treatment unit and NOx absorber decreases, ozone and NOx gas may
remain in the gas to be discharged. For this reason, connect a flexible tube with an 8 mm internal
diameter to the gas discharge port and position the tube so that discharge gas is released either outside
or into an exhaust pit.
9.3.3 Sample Streams (When the Relevant Options Are Provided)

The types of screws for the sample supply port and discharge port are listed in the table below.
Screws, Tubing Type and Sample

Option Type Connection Screws, Tubing Type
on the Instrument Side
Sample stream kit Supply port/discharge port: Sample supply port/discharge port:
Internal parallel thread PS1/2 (JIS B- External taper thread PT1/2
0203 Taper Pipe Threads)
Suspended solids stream
switching unit
Sample supply port/discharge port: 13
nominal diameter, 28 mm external
Sample supply port: Connect a 13 mm
nominal diameter polyvinyl chloride
9
diameter (polyvinyl chloride tube) tube to the port and connect a suitable
flexible tube to the polyvinyl chloride
tube.
Discharge port: Connect a suitable
flexible tube directly to the port.
Prepare a plastic tube for connecting the sample stream to the water sampling unit.
TOC-4200 187
9 Installation
188 TOC-4200
10 10 Technical Information
10.1 Measurement Principles 10

This instrument measures the amount of carbon in water by applying the "combustion oxidation -
infrared detection technique" principle that is widely employed in TOC measurement methods.
The addition of the TN option enables measurement of the amount of nitrogen in water by applying
10
the "thermal decomposition - chemiluminescence technique" principle.
10
Carbon in water can be classified in the following manner.
10
Total Carbon: TC Inorganic Carbon: IC
Carbon in the form of component elements of inorganic compounds such
as carbon dioxide, carbonate ions, and bicarbonate ions
10
Purgeable Organic Carbon:
POC 10
Components that are made volatile
Total Organic Carbon: TOC and are lost when sparging is
Carbon that binds with oxygen and performed
10
hydrogen to form organic
Non-Purgeable Organic
compounds
Carbon: NPOC 10
Components that are made volatile
yet are not lost when sparging is
performed
10
TC and TOC can be determined using the following formula from this classification. 10
TC = TOC + IC
TOC = TC IC, or TOC = POC + NPOC (when configuring measurement conditions, the former is notated
10
as "TOC (TC IC)", and the latter as "TOC (POC + NPOC)").
TN, or "Total Nitrogen", refers to the total amount of nitrogen contained as organic and inorganic nitrogen
in water.
10
10
10
10
10
TOC-4200 189
10.1.1 Types of Measurement Methods

The following three types of TOC measurement can be performed with this instrument.
NPOC measurement: TOC measurement that utilizes an acidification/sparging method
TOC (TC IC) measurement: TOC measurement in which the amount of IC is subtracted from TC (when
the IC option is provided)
TOC (POC + NPOC) measurement: TOC measurement in which the amount of POC is added to NPOC
(when provided as an option)
NPOC Measurement
Normally, the NPOC measurement method, which is both simple and quick, should be used. Use one
of the other methods when the sample contains POC that cannot be ignored or the sample has a
disposition that produces bubbles when sparging is performed.
TOC (TC - IC) Measurement

During sparging in NPOC measurement, part of the sample may bubble and flow out of the syringe.
As TOC components are concentrated in these bubbles, this may cause the TOC of the sample
remaining in the syringe to decrease. Moreover, acidification may cause coagulation and
sedimentation of the sample. In these cases, use TOC (TC - IC) measurement to determine the
amount of TOC by subtracting the amount of IC from TC.
Note that TOC measurement errors may become large because TOC (TC - IC) measurement includes
TC measurement errors and IC measurement errors in the final TOC value when the amount of IC is
greater than the amount of TOC. This method should be used with samples that contain more TOC
than IC.
The detection rate tends to be low when performing TC measurement on a sample that contains IC in
excess of 10 mg/L with catalyst for TOC/TN measurement or 5 mgC/L with TC high sensitivity catalyst for
TOC measurement. In this case, use the NPOC measurement method instead.
"Catalyst for TOC Measurement" P.114

"Catalyst for TOC/TN Measurement (When the TN Option Is Provided)" P.116
TOC (POC + NPOC) Measurement

Apply this method to samples that contain less than 30 mgC/L of IC when a maximum sample
volume of 3 mL is used in POC measurement (when diluting, the IC concentration of the sample after
dilution must be less than 30 mgC/L).
Note that the absorption of carbon dioxide produced by samples that contain large amounts of IC
when performing TOC (POC + NPOC) measurement may shorten the service life of the CO2
absorber.
190 TOC-4200
10.1 Measurement Principles
Peak Shape
TOC measurements can produce different peak shapes and peak heights even if the TOC
concentration value obtained through a number of measurements is the same.
The combustion time differs according to the properties of the components contained in the sample
injected onto the catalyst. The reason why peak shape and peak height can change is due to the
different volumes of carbon dioxide produced from varying combustion times between samples that
are easily vaporized and those that are not.
Organic substances that are easy to vaporize are those that vaporize together with water when the
aqueous solution that contains them is heated to a superheated vapor (e.g. ethanol).
Organic substances that are difficult to vaporize are crystalline organic substances that remain as solid
material after the aqueous solution that contains them evaporates (e.g. glucose).
Easily vaporized organic substances readily become gaseous in the combustion tube and thus
decompose into carbon dioxide in a comparatively short amount of time due to their reaction with the
catalyst. The measurement peaks of easily vaporized organic substances feature a high peak and a
sharp shape. The measurement peak may separate into a number of shapes when a sample contains a
mixture of organic substances that are both easy and difficult to vaporize.
Because this instrument determines concentration by measuring the entire area of peaks generated
from carbon dioxide, peak shape has no bearing on the measurement results.
10
TOC-4200 191
10.1.2 Sample Types and Handling During Measurement

Measuring Samples that Contain Suspended Solids
As sample injection during measurement employs a PTFE tube with a 0.5 mm internal diameter,
suspended solids that are unable to pass through the PTFE tube cannot be measured. Even if
suspended solids pass through the PTFE tube, the repeatability of measurement values will decrease
unless solids in the sample are extracted uniformly by the micro syringe.
As a means to measure samples that contain suspended solids, Shimadzu offers an optional suspended
solids stream switching unit (high speed homogenizer) that employs a homogenizer, which crushes
and makes the size of suspended solids uniform.
As the suspended solids stream switching unit, water sampling unit, and homogenizer also employ
PTFE tubes with a 0.5 mm internal diameter, not all suspended solids can be processed. Moreover,
some suspended solids cannot be made uniform with the suspended solids stream switching unit due
to their inherent properties. While sludge-like substances are easily made uniform, fibrous materials
may prove more difficult.
Measuring Samples that Contain Acids, Alkalis, and Salts

Acids, alkalis, and salts contained in samples affect measurement values, corrode the measurement
cell of the TOC detector, and also affect the service life of the combustion tube and catalyst.
If the baseline of the TOC detector frequently drifts towards the positive end and repeated optical
zero adjustment is required, this may indicate that the inside surface of the TOC detector is corroding.
In this case, stop measurement and take the appropriate corrective measures.
The type of acid and salt, TOC, and TN concentration will increase the probability of these effects if
samples contain more than 1000 mg/L of acids or alkali salts. Always dilute samples as much as
possible to reduce the concentration of acids, alkalis, and salts. The instrument is equipped with an
automatic dilution function that should be set to less than 1000 mg/L.
"8 Troubleshooting" P.169
Performing TC Measurement on Samples that Contain Acids and Salts

Chlorine-based acids (including bromic acids) and salts contained in samples produce chlorine (Cl2)
that corrodes the inside surface of the TOC detector. As chemical compounds that easily decompose
with heat, including hydrochloric acid, hypochlorous acid, ammonium chloride, calcium chloride,
and magnesium chloride, produce large amounts of chorine, the instrument is equipped with a
halogen scrubber for chlorine removal.
Positioned at the outlet of the combustion tube, the halogen scrubber absorbs and removes hydrogen
chloride and other gaseous and misty components that are generated in addition to chlorine. Samples
should always be diluted because the removal of these compounds cannot be performed sufficiently if
their concentrations are too high.
While inorganic acids, such as sulfuric acid and nitric acid, and salts contained in samples have less
of an effect than chlorine-based compounds, these substance produce components that interfere with
and corrode the TOC detector. Always dilute the sample as the halogen scrubber is not effective at
removing these substances.
192 TOC-4200
Performing TC Measurement on Alkaline Samples

Alkaline samples are suited to NPOC measurement.
Performing TC measurement on alkaline samples rapidly reduces sensitivity and repeatability and
accelerates the deterioration of the catalyst and combustion tube. Moreover, alkaline samples absorb
carbon dioxide, which may lead to higher IC values.
When performing NPOC measurement, the addition of acid is required for sample acidification (and
alkaline samples require significantly more acid than normal). Check the pH of the sample after acid
addition and adjust the volume of acid to be added in order to reach a pH of 2 to 3.
Accumulation of Salts
Repeated measurements of samples that contain salts causes a buildup of salts in the combustion tube
and clogs the catalyst, which in turn increases the air resistance experienced by the carrier gas.
Perform maintenance on the combustion tube if the repeatability of measurement values decreases.
Clogging of the catalyst can be deduced from an increase in air resistance that produces the noise of
gas escaping when the sliding sample injection inlet moves, as well as significant fluctuations in the
carrier gas flow.
Using the Dilution Function

This instrument is equipped with a dilution function. The dilution function extracts, mixes, and
dilutes the sample with diluent according to the dilution factor when sample is extracted into the
syringe by the syringe pump type sample injector.
Dilution is not only for when the TOC or TN concentration in a sample exceeds the measurement
range, but it also has a lengthening effect on the service life of the catalyst and combustion tube by
lowering the concentration of salt, acid, and alkalis in the sample. However, if dilution results in a
concentration of TOC and TN in the sample that is too low, this can significantly impact the TOC in
the diluted solution.
While it depends on factors such as measurement accuracy and the water quality of the diluent used
(including TOC, TN concentration, stability), samples can be measured as long as they contain TOC
10
and TN concentrations greater than 30 mg/L after dilution (note that a change in TOC and TN
concentration of 0.5 mg/L will only affect measurement values by less than 2 %).
Moreover, when performing NPOC measurements on samples with high polymers that coagulate
when acidified and adhere to the plunger tip of the micro syringe, adding sodium hydroxide to the
diluent to obtain a weak alkaline can help to mitigate adherence to the plunger tip. However, do not
use the dilution function when adding sodium hydroxide to the diluent. Injecting alkaline samples
into the combustion tube reduces measurement repeatability and has an adverse effect on the
combustion tube and catalyst.
TOC-4200 193
10.1.3 TC (Total Carbon) Measurement Principle

The following sequence describes the method for measuring TC (total carbon) in samples.
Sample injection
(syringe)
Sample heated to 680 C, undergoes combustion and The sample is injected into the combustion tube from
decomposition, which generates CO2 the syringe pump type sample injector and the TC in
(combustion tube)
the sample undergoes combustion and decomposition,
Carrier gas which generates carbon dioxide.
Cooling, dehumidifying The carrier gas, which carries the fired material from
(electronic dehumidifier) the combustion tube, is cooled, dehumidified, and then
passed through the halogen scrubber and into the TOC
Carrier gas
detector.
Detection of CO2 concentration Carbon dioxide is detected in the TOC detector.
(TOC detector)
Peak area measurement The signal from the TOC detector (analog signal)
(data processor) forms the peak shape and the data processor measures
the peak area.
The area under the peak is proportional to the TC
concentration of the sample.
Determining a relational expression (calibration curve
expression) for TC concentration and peak area using
TC standard solution in advance enables measurement
of the TC concentration in the sample.
194 TOC-4200
10.1.4 NPOC (Non-Purgeable Organic Carbon) Measurement Principle

The following sequence describes the method for removing IC (inorganic carbon) from samples and
measuring the NPOC (non-purgeable organic carbon).
Extraction of sample and acid for IC removal Acid for IC removal is mixed with the sample in the
(syringe) syringe to obtain acidification (pH 2 to 3). Next, the
sparge gas is supplied.
Sparging The IC in the sample is converted to carbon dioxide

(syringe) and removed.1
Sample heated to 680 C, undergoes combustion, The sample subjected to IC removal is injected into the
which generates CO2 combustion tube from the syringe pump type sample
(combustion tube)
injector and the TC in the sample undergoes
Carrier gas combustion, which generates carbon dioxide.
passed through the halogen scrubber and into the TOC
Carrier gas
detector.
(TOC detector)
the peak area.
The area under the peak is proportional to the TC
expression) for TC concentration and peak area using
TC standard solution in advance enables measurement 10
of the TC concentration in the sample.
1) Sparging to remove IC may also remove POC (purgeable organic carbon) at the same time. In order to
differentiate the TOC obtained at this point from the TOC determined using the formula TOC = TC IC, it is
referred to here as NPOC.
The NPOC measurement method is the same as the TOC measurement method described by official
measurement methods for TOC measurement (such as ASTM), which involve acidification and sparging (IC
removal).
TOC-4200 195
10.1.5 TN (Total Nitrogen) Measurement Principle

The following sequence describes the method for measuring TN (total nitrogen) in samples.
Sample injection
(syringe)
Sample
Sample heated to 720 C, undergoes combustion and The sample is injected into the combustion tube from
TN decomposition, which generates NO the syringe pump type sample injector and the TN in
(combustion tube)
the sample undergoes decomposition, which generates
Carrier gas nitrogen monoxide.
Cooling, dehumidifying The carrier gas, which carries nitrogen monoxide from
passed through the halogen scrubber and into the TN
Carrier gas
detector.
Detection of NO concentration Nitrogen monoxide is detected in the TN detector.
(TN detector)
Peak area measurement The signal from the TN detector (analog signal) forms
(data processor) the peak shape and the data processor measures the
peak area.
The area under the peak is proportional to the TN
expression) for TN concentration and peak area using
TN standard solution in advance enables measurement
of the TN concentration in the sample.
In TN measurement, the combined state of nitrogen in samples have a significant effect on the TN detection
rate. Generally, while the detection rate for nitrogen contained in nitrates, nitrogen contained in nitrites,
nitrogen contained in ammonia, and organic nitrogen is virtually 100 %, the detection rate for hydrazines,
pyrazolones, and azide compounds may drop to between 60 and 10 %.
196 TOC-4200
10.1.6 POC (Purgeable Organic Carbon) Measurement Principle (When

the IC/POC Option is Provided)
The following sequence describes the method for measuring POC, which is made volatile from the
sample during sparging when performing NPOC measurement.
(syringe) syringe to obtain acidification (pH 2 to 3). Next, the
sparge gas is supplied.
POC extraction, generation of CO2 from IC, sparging Sparging causes POC extraction from the sample and
(syringe) IC in the sample to turn into carbon dioxide.
Carrier gas
Removal of IC from the sample The carbon dioxide generated from the IC in the
(CO2 absorber) sample is removed by passing it through the CO2
absorber.
Carrier gas
POC combustion and CO2 generation POC in the carrier gas is combusted in the POC
(POC combustion tube) combustion tube and turns into carbon dioxide.
Carrier gas
(electronic dehumidifier) the POC combustion tube, is cooled, dehumidified, and
then passed through the halogen scrubber and into the
Carrier gas
TOC detector.
(TOC detector)
the peak area.
10
The area under the peak is proportional to the POC
expression) for POC concentration and peak area using
POC standard solution in advance enables
measurement of the POC concentration in the sample.
Note that there is no clear definition of POC.

The volatilization of POC and degree of volatilization during sparging differs depending on the type of
organic components, the temperature when sparging is performed, and the efficiency of the sparge gas
with the gas-liquid contact.
POC measurement involves measuring the POC that becomes volatile during sparging in NPOC
measurement. POC volatilization is not determined by the boiling point of components.
TOC-4200 197
As organic components present in the sample are the target of POC measurement, the amount of volatile
matter generated during sparging that comprises purgeable organic matter, which is highly soluble in
water, is not significant. Only a small percentage of the volume that is present in samples such as
methanol becomes volatile.
In order to remove the carbon dioxide gas generated together with POC components when the sample
undergoes sparging, connect a CO2 absorber filled with lithium hydroxide. This will result in low values
being indicated for POC components (such as ester) that are easily trapped by the CO2 absorber.
The POC measurement results do not indicate absolute values for purgeable organic carbon. They
represent the measurement results for the conditions under which the instrument was used.
10.1.7 IC (Inorganic Carbon) Measurement Principle (When the IC Option

is Provided)
The following sequence describes the method for measuring IC (inorganic carbon) in samples.
IC measurement targets carbon contained in carbonates, carbon contained in hydrogen carbonates, and
dissolved carbon dioxide.
(syringe) syringe to obtain acidification (pH 2 to 3).
Carrier gas
Sparging and CO2 generation from IC Sparging causes IC in the sample to turn into carbon
(syringe) dioxide.
Carrier gas
Cooling, dehumidifying The carrier gas used in sparging is cooled,

(electronic dehumidifier) dehumidified, and then passed through the halogen
Carrier gas
scrubber and into the TOC detector.

(TOC detector)
the peak area.
The area under the peak is proportional to the IC
expression) for IC concentration and peak area using
IC standard solution in advance enables measurement
of the IC concentration in the sample.
198 TOC-4200
10.2 Measurement Operations

Measurement operations are the same for both sample measurement and standard solution
measurement (calibration).
Read through this section while referring to the corresponding stream diagrams.
Stream diagrams: "10.2.5 Stream Diagrams" P.202
10.2.1 Sample Measurement Method

The sample measurement method differs according to the type of measurement to be performed. A
summary of measurement operations are listed in the table below.
Measurement Type Measurement Operation

TC, TN1 Sample is directly injected into the combustion tube and TOC and TN
measurement is performed in the respective detector.
NPOC Acid is added to the sample.
Sparging is performed in the syringe to remove IC and then the sample is
injected into the combustion tube.
IC1 Acid is added to the sample.
Sparging is performed in the syringe to separate IC from the sample.
The separated IC is directly injected into the TOC detector from the syringe
and measured.
POC1 Sparging is performed in the syringe.
After removing only IC from the sparge gas, the gas is injected into the POC
combustion tube.
POC is separated into carbon dioxide and measured in the TOC detector.
TOC (TC - IC)1 TC measurement is performed first followed by IC measurement.
A TOC measurement value is calculated from each set of measurement
results. 10
TOC (POC + NPOC)1 POC measurement is performed first followed by NPOC measurement.
A TOC measurement value is calculated
from each set of measurement results.
*1) Options are required to measure TN, IC, and POC.
TOC-4200 199
10.2.2 Carrier Gas Purification

The following sequence describes the carrier gas purification process performed in the instrument.
The instrument is equipped with a carrier gas purification function because the amount of carbon
components in the carrier gas used is required to be extremely small.
Carrier gas inflow

(L-shaped combustion tube)
Combustion of organic impurities and CO2 generation Inorganic impurities contained in the carrier gas are
(L-shaped combustion tube) combusted in the L-shaped combustion tube and turned
into carbon dioxide.
CO2 removal The CO2 absorber for carrier gas purification removes
(CO2 absorber) carbon dioxide from the carrier gas.
Clean carrier gas ready for supply The carrier gas from which impurities have been
(combustion tube) removed is supplied to the combustion tube.
10.2.3 Sample Extraction

The following sequence describes the sample extraction process performed by the instrument.
Stream selection Select the stream to use when the optional sampling
(sampling unit, when provided as an option) unit is installed.
Sample extraction The sample is extracted from the water sampling unit
(syringe) into the syringe.
(This is performed via the sampling unit when using
the suspended solids stream switching unit.)
The extraction volume is 3 mL.
Diluent extraction When diluting the sample, diluent is extracted so that

(syringe) the total volume of sample and diluent is 3 mL.
Dilution and mixing

(syringe)
In calibration operations, standard solution is extracted from the standard solution bottle inside the
instrument instead of extracting sample.
200 TOC-4200
10.2.4 Preprocessing (Sample Dilution, Acidification, and Sparging)

The following sequence describes the sample dilution, acidification, and sparging processes
performed by the instrument.
Dilution Measurement NPOC Measurement

Stream selection Stream selection
(sampling unit, when provided as an option) (sampling unit, when provided as an option)
Sample and diluent extraction Sample extraction

(syringe) (syringe)
Sample and diluent mixing Diluent extraction

(syringe) (syringe)
Sparging Extraction of acid for IC removal

(syringe) (syringe)
When diluting the sample in normal measurement,
sparge gas is supplied to the syringe after the sample
and diluent have been drawn into the syringe.
Sample and diluent mixing and sparging
(syringe)
In NPOC measurement, acid for IC removal is drawn
into the syringe after the sample and diluent have been
drawn into the syringe. Next, sparge gas is supplied to
the syringe and the sample and diluent undergo mixing
and sparging.
10
TOC-4200 201
10.2.5 Stream Diagrams

Standard Specification
Sliding sample
injector
202 TOC-4200
IC Option Installed
Sliding sample
injector

10
TOC-4200 203
IC POC Option Installed
Sliding sample
injector
204 TOC-4200
TN Option Installed
Sliding sample
injector
10
TOC-4200 205
TN/IC Option Installed
Sliding sample
injector
206 TOC-4200
TN/IC POC Option Installed
Sliding sample
injector
10
TOC-4200 207
10.2.6 Peak Area Measurement

Measurement value
Baseline
Peak start Peak end
Time
The data processor automatically detects the start and end of the peak sent from the TOC detector and
determines the peak area. The peak start is detected where the gradient of the peak is higher than the
preset value and the peak end is detected where the gradient is lower than the preset value.
A large sample injection volume in TC measurement and NPOC measurement may produce two
overlapping peaks or two separate peaks in close proximity. In this situation, the data processor only
detects the end of the latter peak and then adds the entire area of the two peaks. Moreover, if a peak is
generated when the baseline is fluctuating, the correct peak area is determined after applying
appropriate corrections to the baseline.
10.2.7 Washing after Measurement Is Complete

Set [Flow Line Wash] to [ON] in "Measurement Operation Settings" to wash the streams after
measurement is complete. As stream washing is performed after every measurement (sample
injection), the minimum measurement cycle is longer than when [Flow Line Wash] is set to [OFF].
In the same manner as for washing the sample injection tube prior to sample injection, diluent and
sparge gas are sent down the sample extraction tube to wash the sample injection tube.
"Measurement Operation Settings" P.46
208 TOC-4200
10.3 Calibration Curves

10.3.1 Calibration Curves
The output signals from the TOC detector during TC, IC, NPOC, or POC measurement are linearized
regardless of the measurement range.
This means that the relationship between concentration and the output values is virtually linear, even
for TC combustion and IC reaction components. As a result, single-point calibration curves only
consisting of span points or dual-point calibration curves consisting of a zero point and a span point
are used.
The output signals in the concentration range from the chemiluminescence gas analyzer in TN
measurement are linearized. In this case, single-point calibration curves only consisting of a single
span point or dual-point calibration curves consisting of a zero point and a span point are used.
Up to six types of calibration curves can be registered for each measurement type (TC, NPOC, IC,
POC, and TN, where IC, POC, TN can be registered when the corresponding option is installed).
Single-point calibration curves are used for IC calibration curves or TC calibration curves of comparatively
high concentration (exceeding about 100 mg/L) because they either pass through the origin or near the
origin.
A dual-point calibration curve should be used when the concentration of TC or TN in the water used to
prepare the standard solution cannot be ignored with respect to the concentration of the standard solution
(for standard solution of about 10 mg/L or less).
Shifting to the Origin (Zero Shift)

Shifting the calibration curve to the origin is employed for dual-point calibration curves when
creating a calibration curve for which the concentration of TC or TN in the water used is corrected
(for a standard solution of about 10 mg/L or less, when the concentration of TC or TN in the water
used to prepare the standard solution cannot be ignored with respect to the concentration of the
standard solution).
Example:
10
The creation of a dual-point calibration curve after preparing a standard solution with 10 mg/L of TC
(actually 10 + mg/L), using water that contains mg/L of TC, produces the calibration curve
shown by the solid line (a dual-point calibration curve that does not pass through the origin).
Peak area
TC concentration (mg/L)
TOC-4200 209
Using this calibration curve will result in sample measurement values that are always mg/L lower
than normal. Shifting the calibration curve so that it passes through the origin, as shown by the dotted
line, corrects the displacement of the calibration curve due to TC in the water used to prepare the
standard solution.
If the instrument produces a system blank, shifting the calibration curve to the origin results in
measurement values only increased to the extent of the system blank value. Note that errors caused by
TC or TN in zero water (dilution water) are far larger than those caused by system blanks. The mere
application of corrections for TC or TN contained in zero water (dilution water) allows the
acquisition of acceptable measurement values from a practical standpoint.
Sparging During Standard Solution Measurement

Standard solutions with TC concentrations so low as to be affected by the amount of dissolved carbon
dioxide in the standard solution should be sparged with carrier gas prior to measurement to remove
any dissolved carbon dioxide. Sparging eliminates the dissolved carbon dioxide thereby preventing it
from affecting the concentration of the standard solution.
"Creating and Editing Calibration Curves" P.70

The concentration of carbon dioxide in the water used for standard solution preparation is affected by
factors such as the water purification method, storage conditions, and concentration of carbon dioxide
in the immediate atmosphere. Even if the initial concentration of carbon dioxide in the water is low,
exposure to the atmosphere during the standard solution preparation process may cause an increase in
dissolved carbon dioxide.
Consider the concentration of the standard solution used and any impurities in the water as TOC
concentration before performing sparging.
Any system blanks produced by the instrument during sparging are corrected on the calibration curve.
However, note that measurement results may only decrease to the extent of the TOC concentration
contained in the water as impurities.
Do not sparge IC standard solutions as sparging decreases IC concentration.
The table below indicates the different amounts of carbon dioxide that dissolve into water from the
atmosphere. The content of carbon dioxide (CO2) in the table can be converted to IC using the
following formula.
CO2 (mg/L) 0.27 = IC (mg/L)
Carbon Dioxide Content of Distilled Water in Equilibrium with the Atmosphere (mg/L)
Temperature
(C)
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
Atmospheric
CO2 (vol%)
0.030 1.00 0.83 0.79 0.59 0.51 0.44 0.38
0.033 1.10 0.91 0.76 0.65 0.56 0.48 0.42
0.044 1.47 1.22 1.02 0.87 0.74 0.64 0.56
210 TOC-4200
10.3.2 Multi-Point Calibration Curves

Multi-point calibration curves for the evaluation of calibration curves can be created with up to a
maximum of five calibration curve points. Multi-point calibration curves consisting of more than
three points can be created as a point-to-point curve or a regression line using the least squares
method. A correlation coefficient is displayed for regression curves created using the least squares
method.
10
TOC-4200 211
10.4 Quantitative Calculation

The measurement value for the sample indicates the concentration quantitatively calculated from the
measured peak area by applying the calibration curve created in advance.
Repeating the measurement more than twice calculates the mean value (MN), standard deviation
(SD), and coefficient of variance (CV), and displays them on screen. The standard deviation and
coefficient of variance are used to check repeatability.
10.4.1 Load Calculation

The input of flow rate signals allows the instrument to calculate the corresponding load.
The instrument outputs load per hour for hourly report output and load per day for daily report output.
Load Calculation Formulae

The various formulae used to calculate load are shown in the table below.
1 Hour Type 1 Minute Type

Flow rate sampling cycle 1 minute 1 minute
Concentration sampling 1 hour 1 minute
cycle
1-hour average flow rate n n
1 1
( Q H ) [m3/h] Q H = ---
n Qi Q H = ---
n Qi
i=1 i=1
1-hour load average n

L H = C H Q H 1000
( L H ) [kg/h] 1
L H = ---
n ( C i Qi 1000 )
i=1
1-hour average
CH = Ci LH
concentration ( C H ) C H = -------- 1000
[mg/L] QH
1-day total flow rate N N

( Q D ) [m3/Day]
QD =
QH i
QD =
QH i
i=1 i=1
1-day total load ( L D ) N N

[kg/Day] LD =
LH i
LD =
LH i
i=1 i=1
1-day average
LD LD
concentration ( C D ) C D = -------- 1000 C D = -------- 1000
[mg/L]
QD QD
212 TOC-4200
10.4 Quantitative Calculation
Explanation of Notation
Ci : Conversion value at the time of sampling
n : Number of valid data in the 1-minute sampling values (on an hourly basis)
Qi : Flow rate at the time of sampling
N : Number of valid data in the 1-hour load average (on a daily basis)
Handling Missing Data in the Daily Report Summary

Data is considered missing under the following conditions and a missing mark is output (to the screen
or printer) for the corresponding hourly report.
Combinations of Missing Mark

Missing Output Concentration Load Flow Rate
Measurement Value-Related
Measurement stopped N N -
Calibration in progress C C -
Maintenance in progress T T -
Carrier gas pressure G G -
decrease
No data M M -
Flow Meter-Related
Flow meter maintenance - T T
in progress
Flow meter abnormal, - B B
current less than 4 mA
Flow meter abnormal, - U U
current greater than 20 mA
No data - M M
10
Data in the following circumstances is also handled as missing.

Hourly reports during a power failure or when the instrument is turned OFF
When online measurement is not being conducted
When starting online measurement with [Data Reset] set to [ON]
Hourly reports prior to starting online measurement
Missing data is not included when calculating the 1-day total load.
If the amount of valid data is less than the amount of data for the effective time, the data for that time is
processed as missing.
For details, see "Load Calculation" P.40.
TOC-4200 213
10.4.2 EPA Calculation

The EPA mode is a function for calculating and determining the TOC removal rate stipulated by EPA
regulations (Part IV - Environmental Protection Agency / 40 CFR parts 9, 141 and 142, 1998). This
function can be used when there are more than two available measurement streams.
TOC Removal Rate Calculation Formula

The method used to calculate the TOC removal rate is shown below.
REM % = 100 (------------------------------------------

TOC1 TOC2 )
-
TOC1
TOC1: TOC concentration of stream 1 (inflow water)

TOC2: TOC concentration of stream 2 (supply water)
214 TOC-4200
10.5 Measurement Conditions
10.5 Measurement Conditions

10.5.1 Automatic Setting
Setting the concentration of the standard solution during calibration curve creation displays the
optimal measurement conditions for the measurement.
"Creating and Editing Calibration Curves" P.70
The automatic setting of measurement conditions is performed under the following conditions.
When the combination of detection sensitivity and injection volume ensures that the peak height in within
the range of 70 to 90% F.S. (or 50 to 95% depending on circumstances).
When using an injection volume as small as possible to maintain optimal repeatability.
The reason for using an injection volume as small as possible is to extend the service life of the
catalyst and combustion tube.
If the sample injection status deteriorates due to an obstruction in the sample injector, the effect on
measurement values becomes greater with smaller injection volumes. Changing the automatic setting
conditions and increasing the injection volume can lower sensitivity. When changing the automatic
setting conditions, make sure that the ratio between injection volume and range (injection volume/
range) is the same as the value in the automatic settings. Changing the set value may cause the
instrument to fail to satisfy the specified measurement accuracy.
When setting two standard solution concentrations to create a dual-point calibration curve, the
measurement conditions are automatically set according to the higher of the two concentrations.
Similar to TC standard solution that uses N-propyl alcohol, the automatic setting function configures
settings based on blank values when comparatively sharp peaks are produced. While peak height may
be lower than the range stated above when using potassium hydrogen phthalate, this does not
adversely affect measurement.
10
10.5.2 Automatic Change

When [Auto Re-meas.] is set to [ON] in the online or offline measurement conditions, the instrument
automatically updates the injection volume and dilution factor if the measurement value peak exceeds
130 % of the calibration curve full scale and then performs measurement again.
"5.2.1 Configuring Online Measurement Conditions and Starting Measurement" P.18

The ratio used for automatically changing the dilution factor is calculated automatically according to
the degree that the peak exceeds the full scale.
The ratio for the dilution factor includes an error of a few percentage points. Notably, the magnitude of
the error increases with the change ratio.
The automatic change function cannot enlarge small peaks.
TOC-4200 215
10.6 External Input/Output Signals

The signals used to communicate with external equipment include contact output, contact input,
analog output, and serial input/output (RS-485 and the optional RS-232C) signals.
With the exception of RS-232C input/output, signal communication with external equipment is
performed via the terminals that reside under the terminal cover.
RS-232C input/output requires the optional RS-232C set (part number: S638-66228) and
communication is performed via the RS-232C connector on the right side of the instrument.
RS-485 and RS-232C cannot be used at the same time.
Item Description
Terminal size M3.5 (terminal numbers 1 to 144), M4 (terminal numbers 201 to 209)
Wiring material 1.25 sq mm or AWG #18 max.
used
Signal cable ports 30 at 3 locations
RS-232C connector
(option)
Terminals
Terminal
cover
Signal cable ports
Terminal 3 1, 2
(option)
Terminal 2 1, 2
(option)
Terminal 1 1
Terminal Layout
1) Terminal 1 is equipped as standard and terminals 2 and 3 are options.

2) Terminal 2 must be installed in order to use terminal 3.
216 TOC-4200
10.6.1 Contact Input

The instrument can be controlled with input signals from external equipment via the contact input.
The function of each input terminal is described below.
The input status can be checked visually because each input terminal has a corresponding LED.
Signal Input
Item Details Remarks
Input type "A" contact (no voltage) A short circuit between the contacts is judged as input
input and the LED lights up.
Use contacts for input with a contact rating of more than
24 VDC and 10 mA.
Signal type Pulse or level Depends on the input items.
Terminal 1
Terminal Terminal Signal
Name Details
Name Number Type
DI01 Remote start 27 Pulse Starts measurement of stream 1. Measurement
(stream 1) 31*1 (COM) stops automatically once stream 1
measurement is complete.
DI02 Pause measurement 28 Level Stream 1 is not measured while input is
(stream 1) 32*1 (COM) detected.
DI03 Remote calibration 29 Pulse Calibrates the calibration curve used in online
31*1 (COM) measurement.
DI04 Remote start 30 Level Level: Starts online measurement according
(schedule) 32*1 (COM) or to the configured schedule while input is
pulse detected. Online measurement stops if input is
no longer detected at the timing of the next
measurement.
Pulse: Starts schedule operation when input is
detected. The input of "DI05: Remote stop"
stops the measurement.
10
DI05 Remote stop 33 Pulse Used to stop measurement started with the
(schedule) 37*1 (COM) remote start using pulse input.
DI06 Alarm resetting 34 Pulse Deactivates the alarm.
38*1 (COM) Alarms that can be deactivated using this
terminal are listed below.
Instrument alarm
2nd upper limit alarm
1st upper limit alarm
1st lower limit alarm
2nd lower limit alarm
DI07 Reserved 35 - This terminal cannot be used.
37*1 (COM) (Cannot be used even as a vacant terminal.)
DI08 Reserved 36 -
38*1 (COM)
1) Terminal numbers 31, 32, 37, and 38 are shorted inside the instrument and therefore can be used as shared
terminals.
TOC-4200 217
Terminal 2
Name Details
Name Number Type
DI09 Flow meter 69 Level The input for when the flow meter for stream
maintenance in 73*2 (COM) 1 is undergoing maintenance.
progress (stream 1)*1 The load and flow rate are regarded as
missing data in the hourly load calculation if
input is sustained for more than a certain time.
1) Flow rate input (option) is required.

2) Terminal numbers 73, 74, 79, and 80 are shorted inside the instrument and therefore can be used as shared
terminals.
218 TOC-4200
Terminal 3
Name Details
Name Number Type
DI20 Remote start 136 Level Starts measurement of stream 6. Measurement
DI21 Pause measurement 139 Pulse Stream 6 is not measured while input is
DI22 Reserved 140 - This terminal cannot be used.
144*1 (COM) (Cannot be used even as a vacant terminal.)
DI23 Reserved 141 -
143*1 (COM)
DI24 Reserved 142 -
144*1 (COM)
1) Terminal numbers 137, 138, 143, and 144 are shorted inside the instrument and therefore can be used as
shared terminals.
10
TOC-4200 219
Contact Input Timing Chart
Remote Input (Level)
Sample
measurement start
Measurement
(Broken line indicates
non-measurement)
Automatic calibration
Control sample
measurement
Catalyst regeneration
Remote Input (Pulse)
Stream 1 measurement start
Start of automatic calibration
Stream 1 measurement
Remote Input (Pulse: When Remote Start/Stop Are Used)
Schedule measurement execution
Measurement start
Measurement stop
Measurement
(Broken line indicates
non-measurement)
Control sample
measurement
Catalyst regeneration
220 TOC-4200
10.6.2 Contact Output

Information regarding the operational state of the instrument and any generated alarms can be output
via contact output.
"Contact Output" P.101

On a standard specification instrument, the 10 contact outputs comprising DO01 to DO10 can be used
for output. Installing the optional terminal 3 expansion allows up to a maximum of 36 outputs
(terminal 3 expansion requires that terminal 2 is installed).
Information for output, described in "Assignable Output Items" P.223, can be assigned to any output
terminal. However, note that the DO01 (power supply shut off) and DO02 (CPU error) outputs are
fixed and cannot be changed.
The "normally open" or "normally closed" states can be selected depending on the connections to
DO01 and DO02.
As the factory setting for the outputs other than DO01 and DO02 is "normally open", the contacts
close when an event occurs. Contact your Shimadzu service representative if you wish to change the
setting of these outputs to "normally closed" (contacts open when an event occurs).
The output status can be checked visually because each output terminal has a corresponding LED.
The LEDs for terminals DO03 to DO33 light up when the contacts are closed. For details on
terminals DO01 and DO02, see "Output Items (Fixed Assignments)" P.222.
Contact Rating
Terminal Name Contact Rating Output Type Remarks
DO01, DO02 Within 250 VAC, 1.5 A Select either "normally For an inductive load, cos = 0.4,
Within 30 VDC, 1.5 A open" or "normally L/R = 7 ms
(Non-inductive load) closed", depending on the
connection terminal
DO03 to DO33 Within 250 VAC, 2 A "Normally open"
Within 30 VDC, 2 A
(Non-inductive load)
10
TOC-4200 221
Output Items (Fixed Assignments)

Terminal Terminal
Name Details
Name Number
DO01 Power supply 5 (NC) Output occurs when the power supply is turned OFF.
shut off 6 (COM) The corresponding LED lights up when the power supply is ON
7 (NO) and turns off when the power supply is OFF (the LED cannot be
controlled via on screen operation).
Normally closed for a 5 (NC) -6 (COM) connection
Normally open for a 7 (NO) -6 (COM) connection
DO02 CPU error*1 8 (NO) Output occurs when the instrument encounters a program error.
9 (COM) The corresponding LED is normally off. The LED lights up red
10 (NC) when a program error occurs (the LED cannot be controlled via
on screen operation).
Normally open for an 8 (NO) -9 (COM) connection
Normally closed for a 10 (NC) -9 (COM) connection
1) According to the factory settings, the CPU is automatically reset when a CPU error occurs and a "CPU error
alarm" is not output. The instrument resets automatically and returns to the measurement operation.
Set the CPU error alarm to be output by changing the position of a switch located on the main board that holds
the CPU (change SW4 to the CPUER position and change to the RESET position for the factory setting).
When a CPU error alarm is set to be output, the measurement operation is not restored after the alarm is
output.
For details on changing this setting, contact your Shimadzu service representative.
Assignable Terminal Names and Terminal Numbers

Terminal 1 Terminal 3 (Option)
Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal
Name Number Name Number Name Number
DO03 *1 11, 12 DO11 81, 82 DO24 107, 108
DO04 *1 13, 14 DO12 83, 84 DO25 109, 110
DO05 *1 15, 16 DO13 85, 86 DO26 111, 112
DO06 17, 18 DO14 87, 88 DO27 113, 114
DO07 19, 20 DO15 89, 90 DO28 115, 116
DO08 21, 22 DO16 91, 92 DO29 117, 118
DO09 23, 24 DO17 93, 94 DO30 119, 120
DO10 25, 26 DO18 95, 96 DO31 121, 122
DO19 97, 98 DO32 123, 124
DO20 99, 100 DO33 125, 126
DO21 101, 102 DO34 127, 128
DO22 103, 104 DO35 129, 130
DO23 105, 106 DO36 131, 132
1) The factory settings for terminals DO03 to DO05 are as follows: Change their assignments as necessary.
DO03 "Maintenance in progress"
DO04 "Fatal error"
DO05 "Instrument alarm"
222 TOC-4200
Assignable Output Items
Output related to instrument errors
Name Description
Fatal error Indicates that a fatal error has occurred.
This output is assigned to DO04 in the factory settings.
Instrument alarm Indicates that an instrument alarm has occurred.
This output is assigned to DO05 in the factory settings.
Output related to operation status
Name Description
Measuring the sample Indicates that a sample measurement operation is in progress. The input of
remote signals cannot be received while these contacts are output.
Calibrating Indicates that a calibration measurement operation is in progress. The input of
Regenerating catalyst Indicates that a catalyst regeneration operation is in progress. The input of
Pausing Indicates that the instrument has paused as set in the schedule.
Measuring the control sample Indicates that a control sample measurement operation is in progress. The
input of remote signals cannot be received while these contacts are output.
Measuring the stat sample Indicates that a stat sample measurement operation is in progress. The input
of remote signals cannot be received while these contacts are output.
Maintenance in progress Indicates that maintenance is in progress. A signal is output when the
MAINTENANCE switch on the right side of the instrument main unit is
turned ON.
Pausing measurement A signal is output while the contact input is "pause in measurement (streams
1 to 6)".
Ready
Measuring online
Indicates that the instrument is in the ready state.
Indicates that the instrument is executing the online measurement schedule.
10
Measurement possible Indicates that the instrument is in the state in which measurement can start.
When operating the instrument remotely, the start signal is sent when this
contact is output.
Measurement stream Indicates the stream undergoing measurement. Each individual stream from 1
identification signal to 6 can be set.
TOC-4200 223
Output related to the upper/lower limits of measurement values

The settings in the table below can be made with respect to each concentration, load and EPA value.
In addition, the concentration can be set for streams 1 to 6 and the load can be set for streams 1 to 3.
Name Description
2nd upper limit Indicates that a 2nd upper limit alarm is being output.
1st upper limit Indicates that a 1st upper limit alarm is being output.
1st lower limit Indicates that a 1st lower limit alarm is being output.
2nd lower limit Indicates that a 2nd lower limit alarm is being output.
Analog-related output
These items are output in conjunction with analog values for transmission output and recorder output.
Analog output indicates the state of the instrument when output.
"Contact Output Timing Chart" P.226
Name Description
Measuring the sample under Indicates that the measurement results of the sample undergoing
analog synchronization measurement are being output.
Calibrating under analog Indicates that calibration is in progress.
synchronization
Regenerating catalyst under Indicates that catalyst regeneration is in progress.
analog synchronization
Pausing under analog Indicates that measurement is paused.
synchronization
Measuring the control sample Indicates that control sample measurement is in progress.
under analog synchronization
Measuring the stat sample Indicates that stat sample measurement is in progress.
under analog synchronization
Stream identification under Indicates that the measurement results of the corresponding stream (1 to 6)
analog synchronization are being output. Each individual stream from 1 to 6 can be set.
224 TOC-4200
Output related to analog output timing
Name Description
Concentration output trigger Output occurs for three seconds when the analog output for concentration is
updated. This output occurs regardless of stream. If stream identification is
required, combine this trigger with stream identification under analog
synchronization (streams 1 to 6).
Load output trigger Output occurs for three seconds when the analog output for load is updated.
(concentration) This output occurs regardless of stream. If stream identification is required,
combine this trigger with stream identification under analog synchronization
(streams 1 to 3).
EPA output trigger Output occurs for three seconds when the analog output for EPA is updated.
10
TOC-4200 225
Contact Output Timing Chart
Online Measurement
Stream 1 Stream 1 Stream 1 Stream 1

sample sample sample sample Stat
measurement measurement measurement measurement measurement
Stream 2 Stream 2 Stream 2
sample sample Catalyst sample
Online start measurement measurement regeneration measurement
Calibration
Stream 1 analog output
Stream 2 analog output
Measuring sample
Measurement stream 1
identification signal
Measurement stream 2
identification signal
Calibrating
Regenerating catalyst
Measuring the stat sample
Measuring the control sample
Pausing
Measuring sample under

data synchronization
Analog output
stream 1 identification signal
Analog output
stream 2 identification signal
Calibrating under data

synchronization
Regenerating catalyst under
Measuring stat sample under

Measuring the control sample

under data synchronization
Pausing under data synchronization

Online in progress
Analog output trigger

(concentration)
226 TOC-4200
Stream 1 Stream 1 Stream 1

Stat sample sample sample Online stops
measurement measurement measurement measurement
Stream 2 Stream 2 Stream 2 Stream 2
sample Control sample sample sample sample
measurement measurement measurement measurement measurement
Pausing
10
TOC-4200 227
10.6.3 Transmission Output

Each type of measurement value can be output as an analog signal.
On a standard specification instrument, the lines AO01 and AO02 can be used for transmission
output. Installing the optional terminal 2 expansion and optional analog output port allows up to a
maximum of 12 outputs lines.
Terminal 2 (option) and analog output boards (option) can be added to the instrument at any time.
Output type: DC 4 to 20 mA, insulated output

500 load resistance max.
Output items: "Analog Output Settings" P.39
Terminal Names and Terminal Numbers

Required Option
Terminal Signal Ground
Terminal Name Number of Analog
Number Terminal Terminal 2
Output Boards Required
AO01 1 (-), 2 (+) 201 - -
AO02 3 (-), 4 (+)
AO03 41 (-), 42 (+) 203
AO04 43 (-), 44 (+)
AO05 45 (-), 46 (+) 204 1
AO06 47 (-), 48 (+)
AO07 49 (-), 50 (+) 205 2
AO08 51 (-), 52 (+)
AO09 53 (-), 54 (+) 206 3
AO10 55 (-), 56 (+)
AO11 57 (-), 58 (+) 207 4
AO12 59 (-), 60 (+)
228 TOC-4200
10.6.4 Transmission Input (When the Relevant Options are Provided)

Transmission input allows the input of flow rate values from the flow meter for TOC and TN load
calculation.
Flow meter signals can be input for a maximum of three streams.
Terminal 2 (option) and analog input board (option) are required to use the flow rate input function.
Terminal 2 (option) and analog input board (option) can be added to the instrument at any time.
Input type: DC 4 to 20 mA, insulated input (note that input between channels is not insulated)
100 load resistance
Due to the lack of insulation between channels, insulate the output of each flow meter when using
multiple flow rate inputs.
If only using a single channel, the flow meter output can be either insulated or not.
Terminal
Name Terminal Number Remarks
Name
AI01 First stream flow rate 61 (+) 64 (-) 1 -
input 68 (-) 1
AI02 Second stream flow 62 (+) -
rate input
AI03 Third stream flow rate 63 (+) -
input
(Reserved) - 65 - These terminals cannot be used.
(Reserved) - 66 - (Cannot be used even as a vacant
terminal.)
(Reserved) - 67 -
1) Terminal numbers 64 and 68 are shorted inside the instrument. Use one of these terminals as a negative ()
terminal.
10
TOC-4200 229
10.6.5 Serial Input/Output

RS-485

Perform connections while paying attention to the positive (+) and negative () signal wires. Incorrect
connections will prevent communications from occurring properly.
Signal Name Terminal Number Remarks

+ 40 -
39 -
SG 202 Signal ground
1 to 1 Connection
Instrument External equipment
Bus Connection
Bus line
Instrument
Turn ON the instrument's terminator if the bus line does not have its own terminator.
The factory setting for the terminator is ON.
The terminator can be turned ON or OFF using the "RS485termination" (SW1) switch on the terminal
board.
230 TOC-4200
RS-232C (When Provided as an Option)

The signals for the D-sub 9 pin male connector located on the right side of the instrument are as
follows.

1
Transmission Connector Pin

Signal Name Notation
Direction1 Number
Signal ground or common return SG 5
Send data (Trans out) XOUT o 3
Receive data (Receive in) RIN i 2
Request to send RTS i 7
Clear to send CTS o 8
1) o: Instrument to external equipment, i: External equipment to instrument
Connections
Instrument External equipment
D-sub 9 pin male D-sub 9 pin female
10
TOC-4200 231
10.7 Data Storage on USB Flash Memory

10.7.1 Folder Configuration
The configured measurement conditions and log information are saved to USB flash memory in the
following folder configuration.
Default Folder and

Data Folder Configuration and Folder Name
Folder Name
Online COND(user specified filename).dat 5 -
measurement
conditions
TOC conversion COD(user specified filename).COD 1, 5 -
formula list
System settings SYSTEM(user specified filename).dat 5 -
Log data Online LOG(user specified Folder name: ONLINE
measurement filename)(stream number)
report 2, 3 (year/month).CSV
Load measurement LOG(user specified Folder name: LOAD
report 2, 3 filename)(stream number)
(year/month).CSV
EPA TOC removal LOG(user specified Folder name: EPA
rate measurement filename)(year/month).CSV
report 2
Calibration log 4 LOGCALIB####.CSV Folder name: ####
Control sample LOG(user specified filename).CSV Filename: CONTROL
measurement
report
Fatal error log LOG(user specified filename).CSV Filename: ERROR
Instrument alarm LOG(user specified filename).CSV Filename: WARNING
log
Measurement LOG(user specified filename).CSV Filename: MEAS_ALM
value alarm log
Power failure log LOG(user specified filename).CSV Filename: POW_DOWN
Measurement LOG(user specified folder)(stream Filename: PAUSE
pause log number).CSV
Room temperature LOG(user specified filename).CSV Filename: ROOMTEMP
log
Maintenance log LOG(user specified filename).CSV Filename: MAINT
1) Filenames must be within eight alphanumeric characters.

2) Stream numbers are denoted as "1..." "5...".
3) When automatic saving is performed in units of months, the filename for January 2010 becomes
"201001.CSV".
4) #### indicates the calibration curve type (TC1, NPOC5).
5) This is a specially designed file format and the file contents cannot be viewed.
232 TOC-4200
Back up important data before using USB flash memory.

Only USB flash memory in FAT format (FAT16/FAT32) is compatible. USB flash memory in other
formats cannot be used.
USB flash memory with cryptographic functions cannot be used.
Contact your Shimadzu representative about the USB flash memory devices that have been verified.
10.7.2 Units of File Storage

The units of storage for log files are listed below.
Log Type Target Unit Remarks
Online measurement report Currently selected stream Monthly Folder specification
Load measurement report Currently selected stream Monthly Folder specification
EPA, TOC removal rate All logs Monthly Folder specification
measurement report
Calibration report Currently selected calibration curve Batch Filename specification
information (type and number)
Control sample measurement All logs Batch Filename specification
report
Fatal error report All logs Batch Filename specification
Instrument alarm report All logs Batch Filename specification
Measurement value alarm All logs Batch Filename specification
report
Power failure report All logs Batch Filename specification
Pausing in measurement All logs Batch Folder specification
Room temperature report All logs Batch Filename specification 10
Maintenance report All logs Batch Filename specification
TOC-4200 233
10.7.3 Example of CSV Format Output

Output Items Example Output
Online Log Report (Online) Title
measurement S#1 Stream number
Date,Time,TOC(mg/L),COD(mg/L),Remark,TN(mg/L),NH3(mg/L),Remark
report
APR-28-2010,19:00,12.34,123.4,,12.34,123.4,
APR-28-2010,20:00,12.34,123.4,,12.34,123.4,
APR-28-2010,21:00,12.34,123.4,,12.34,123.4,
Date: Date of measurement
Time: Time of measurement
TOC (mg/L): TOC concentration
COD (mg/L): TOC conversion value
Remark: Remarks concerning TOC
TN (mg/L): TN concentration
NH3 (mg/L): TN conversion value
Remark: Remarks concerning TN
Load measurement Log Report (Load) Title
report S#1 Stream number
Date,Time,COD(mg/L),Remark,COD-L(kg/h),TN(mg/L),Remark,TN-L(kg/h),Flow(m3/h)
APR-01-2010,23:00,12.34,,12.34,12.34,,12.34,1
Date: Date of hourly report
Time: Time of hourly report
COD (mg/L): TOC conversion value
Remark: Remarks concerning TOC
COD-L (kg/h): TOC load
TN (mg/L): TN concentration
Remark: Remarks concerning TN
TN-L (kg/h): TN load
Flow (m3/h): Hourly average flow rate
EPA TOC removal Log Report (EPA) Title
rate measurement Date,Time,REM(%),TOC1(mg/L),TOC2(mg/L),Result
APR-01-2010,00:00,12.34,12,34,12,34,Fail
report
REM (%): TOC removal rate
TOC1 (mg/L): TOC concentration of stream 1
TOC2 (mg/L): TN concentration of stream 1
Result: Judgment result
Empty: Success
Fail: Failed
Calibration report Log Report (Calibration) Title
Example: Single- TYPE,NPOC#2 Calibration curve number
,,SPAN,,,,, Point
point calibration
Date,Time,Area,SD,CV,Drift(1ST),Drift(Prev.),Result
curve JUL-30-2010,21:40,1029,6.745,0.66,+0.00,+0.00,RANGE OVER
Date: Date of calibration
Time: Time of calibration
Area: Average area value
SD: Standard deviation
CV: Coefficient of variation (%)
Drift (1ST): Amount of variation (%) from the initial calibration value
Drift (Prev): Amount of variation (%) from the previous calibration value
Result: Result of calibration
Empty: Normal
FAIL: Calibration failed
RANGE OVER: Not updated as update condition range exceeded
234 TOC-4200

Control sample Log Report (Control Sample) Title
measurement ,,TOC,TN,Result Column items
Date,Time,Conc.(mg/L),Conc.(mg/L),
report
APR-01-2010,00:00,12.34,12.34,Recalibration
Example: NPOC/
TN
TOC Conc. (mg/L): TOC concentration
conversion: Conc. (mg/L): TN concentration
OFF Result: Judgment result
TN conversion: Empty: Success
OFF Recalibration: Recalibration
Fatal error report Log Report (Fatal Error) Title
Date,Time,Content
APR-28-2010,12:34,8PORT VALVE
APR-28-2010,12:35,8PORT VALVE
Date: Date of error
Time: Time of error
Content: Information on error
Instrument alarm Log Report (Instrument Alarm) Title
report Date,Time,Content
APR-28-2010,12:34,ACID RUNOUT
APR-28-2010,12:35,ACID RUNOUT
Date: Date of alarm
Time: Time of alarm
Content: Information on alarm
Measurement Log Report (Meas. Value Alarm) Title
value alarm report Date,Time,Content
APR-28-2010,12:34,S#1 TOC HIGH
APR-28-2010,12:35,S#3 #### EXT HIGH
(####: registered conversion name)
Date: Date of alarm
Time: Time of alarm
Content: Information on alarm
Power outage Log Report (Power Outage) Title
report Occured,,Recovered
APR-01-2010,00:00,APR-01-2010,01:00 10
Occurred: Time of outage
Recovered: Time of recovery
Measurement Log Report (Meas. Skip) Title
pause log Occured,,Recovered
APR-01-2010,00:00,APR-01-2010,01:00
Occurred: Time of pause
Room temperature Log Report (Room Temperature)
report Occured,,Recovered,,Temperature
APR-01-2010,00:00,APR-01-2010,01:00,41.2
Occurred: Time of occurrence
Temperature: Temperature
Maintenance Log Report (Maintenance)
report Started,,Finished
APR-01-2010,00:00,APR-01-2010,01:00
Started: Maintenance start time
Finished: Maintenance end time
TOC-4200 235

Offline Offline Measurement Title
measurement/stat Date,APR-28-2010,00:00 Date and time of measurement
Sample ID,1 Sample ID
sample
Sample Name,SAMPLE-001 Sample name
measurement TC Measurement type
results #,,Area,Remark,Conc.(mg/L),INJ,DL
1,,12.34,,12.34,100,10
2,,12.34,,12.34,100,10
MN,,12.34,,12.34 Mean value
SD,,12.34,,12.34 Standard deviation
CV,,12.34 Coefficient of variation
IC
#,,Area,Remark,Conc.(mg/L),INJ,DL
1,,12.34,,12.34,100,10
2,,12.34,,12.34,100,10
MN,,12.34,,12.34
SD,,12.34,,12.34
CV,,12.34
TOC,12.34,mg/L TOC value (for TC - IC, POC + NPOC)
COD,12.34,mg/L TOC conversion value
TN
#,,Area,Remark,Conc.(mg/L),INJ,DL
1,,12.34,,12.34,100,10
2,E,12.34,,12.34,100,10
MN,,12.34,,12.34
SD,,12.34,,12.34
CV,,12.34
NH3,12.34,mg/L TN conversion value
Area: Area value
Remark: Remarks
Conc.: Concentration
INJ: Injection volume
DL: Dilution factor
MN: Mean value
CV: Coefficient of variation
E: Exception
236 TOC-4200
10.8 Printing (Option)

This option enables the printing of configured measurement conditions and log information.
"Loading, Saving, and Printing Measurement Conditions" P.51

"Deleting and Printing Calibration Curves" P.74
"Printing" P.87
Printing Terms
Term Description Term Description

S#* Stream number RMK Remarks
C#*, TC#*, Calibration curve number **G** Reason for missing data
IC#*, POC#*,
TN#*,
"Handling Missing Data in the Daily
NPOC#*
Report Summary" P.213
#### Conversion formula name INJ Injection volume
DL Dilution factor SP Sparging time
ZS Zero shift PT Point number
B# Port number STD Standard solution concentration
ORG Stock solution concentration RP Number of injections
MX Maximum number MN Mean value
CV CV reference for measurement SD SD reference for measurement
conditions conditions
Coefficient of variation for Standard deviation for measurement
measurement results results
#### Conversion formula name Area Area value
Acid
N
Acid addition volume
New1
R^2
F
Coefficient of determination
Calibration error (not updated)1
10
U Updated normally1 R Update conditions outside of range (not
updated)1
1) The calibration result in the calibration log.
TOC-4200 237
Printing Example
Printed Item Example of Printing

Power switch OFF/ON Power OFF APR-26-2010 12:34 Date and time that power turned OFF
Power ON APR-26-2010 13:00 Date and time that power turned ON
Online start Online Start APR-26-2010 12:34
Online measurement results Time Report APR-26-2010 Title

Time (mg/L) (mg/L) RMK
19:00 S#1 NPOC 12.34 COD 12.34 XXXXX
19:00 S#1 TN 12.34 NH3 12.34 XXXXX
S#?: Measurement stream
NPOC/TN: Measurement type and concentration
COD/NH3: Conversion name and conversion value
RMK: Remarks
Online measurement daily report Daily Report APR-26-2010 Title
S#1 COD Max:1.012 Min:.6042 Ave:.8081
S#1 TN Max:1.012 Min:.6042 Ave:.8081
S#1 TOC Max:1.012 Min:.6042 Ave:.8081
S#2 COD Max:1.012 Min:.6042 Ave:.8081
S#2 TN Max:1.012 Min:.6042 Ave:.8081
S#2 TOC Max:1.012 Min:.6042 Ave:.8081
COD/TN/TOC: Measurement type and conversion name
Max: Maximum value
Min: Minimum value
Ave: Average value
Load hourly report Time Report APR-26-2010 Title
Time Conc. Load Flow RMK
(mg/L) (kg/h) (m3/h)
19:00 S#1 COD 6.042 0.0 0.00 R
19:00 S#1 TN 7.933 0.0 0.00
19:00 S#1 TOC -9.553 ------- -----
Conc.: Hourly average concentration
Load: Hourly load average
Flow: Hourly average flow rate
RMK: Remarks
Load daily report Daily Report APR-26-2010 Title
Conc. Load Rate Flow Rate
(mg/L) (kg/D) (m3/D)
S#1 COD 1.234 5.678 22/24 9.123 24/24
S#1 TN 1.234 5.678 22/24 9.123 24/24
(22/24, 22/24: "Handling Missing Data in the Daily Report Summary"
P.213)
Conc.: Daily average concentration
Load: Daily load
Rate: Effective rate (load)
Flow: Daily flow rate
Rate: Effective rate (flow rate)
EPA TOC removal rate EPA Measure Start APR-26-2010 12:34 Title
measurement start CaCO3:90.0 Interval:1440min
CaCO3: Alkali level
Interval: Calculation interval
238 TOC-4200

EPA TOC removal rate Time Report APR-26-2010 Title
measurement results Time REM% TOC1 TOC2 Result
(mg/L) (mg/L)
12:05 1.234 5.678 9.123 Fail
REM%: TOC removal rate
TOC1: TOC concentration of stream 1
Fail: Failed
Empty:Success
10
TOC-4200 239

Offline measurement results Offline Measurement APR-26-2010 12:34 Title
Measurement type: TOC Sample ID:001 Sample Name:Sample-001 Sample ID and sample
TN option: Installed name
TC Measurement type
# Area RMK Conc. INJ DL
(mg/L) (uL)
1 E 1.234 0.123 100 20
2 1.234 0.123 100 20
3 1.234 0.123 100 20
----------------------------------------
MN 1.111 2.222
SD 5.555 6.666
CV 2.34%
Peak Profile
IC
(mg/L) (uL)
1 E 1.234 0.123 100 20
2 1.234 0.123 100 20
3 1.234 0.123 100 20
----------------------------------------
MN 1.111 2.222
SD 5.555 6.666
CV 12.34%
TOC: 123.4 mg/L TOC value (for TC - IC or POC + NPOC)
COD: 123.4 mg/L Conversion value (when conversion is turned
on)
Peak Profile
TN
(mg/L) (uL)
1 E 1.234 0.123 100 20
2 1.234 0.123 100 20
3 1.234 0.123 100 20
--------------------------------------------------------------------
MN 1.111 2.222
SD 5.555 6.666
CV 12.34%
NH3: 123.4 mg/L Conversion value (when conversion is turned
on)
#: Number of injections
E: Exception
Area: Area value
RMK: Remarks
DL: Dilution factor
MN: Mean value
240 TOC-4200

Calibration result Calibration APR-26-2010 15:00 Title
C#:NPOC#6
SPAN:5.000(mg/L) [100.0(mg/L)]
INJ: 23(uL) DL:12
Acid: 123(uL) SP:123(sec)
# Area RMK
1 E 12.34 R
2 12.34
3 12.34
-----------------------
MN 12.34
SD 1.234
CV 12.34%
Peak Profile
SPAN: Point (ZERO, PT-?, SPAN)

5.000 (mg/L): Concentration of standard solution
[100.0 (mg/L)]: Concentration of stock solution
DL: Dilution factor
Acid: Acid addition volume
SP: Sparging time
E: Exception
Area: Area value
RMK: Remarks
MN: Mean value
10
TOC-4200 241

Control sample measurement Control Sample APR-26-2010 12:34 Title
results TC Measurement type
(mg/L) (uL)
1 E 1.234 0.123 100 20
2 1.234 0.123 100 20
3 1.234 0.123 100 20
----------------------------------------
MN 1.111 2.222
SD 5.555 6.666
CV 12.34%
Peak Profile
IC
(mg/L) (uL)
1 E 1.234 0.123 100 20
2 1.234 0.123 100 20
3 1.234 0.123 100 20
----------------------------------------
MN 1.111 2.222
SD 5.555 6.666
CV 12.34%
TOC: 123.4 mg/L TOC value (for TC - IC or POC + NPOC)
Peak Profile
TN
(mg/L) (uL)
1 E 1.234 0.123 100 20
2 1.234 0.123 100 20
3 1.234 0.123 100 20
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
MN 1.111 2.222
SD 5.555 6.666
CV 12.34%
Peak Profile
RESULT:RECALIBRATION
E: Exception
Area: Area value
RMK: Remarks
DL: Dilution factor
MN: Mean value
RESULT: Judgment result
SUCCESS: Success
RECALIBRATION: Recalibration
242 TOC-4200

Errors/alarms ERROR SYRINGE APR-01 12:34
WARNING S#1 COD HIGH APR-25 12:35
ERROR TOC DET UNCONNECTED APR-25 12:37
ERROR/WARNING: Types
ERROR: Fatal error
WARNING: Alarm
SYRINGE: Error or alarm details
APR-01 12:34: Date and time of occurrence

Calibration data Calibration Data APR-28-2010 12:34 Title
C#:IC#1 Calibration curve number
Calibration curve graph
Span Conc.: 123.4(0.123) Span concentration (stock solution

concentration)
Injection Volume: 123(uL) Injection volume
Dilution Factor: 12 Dilution factor
Acid Volume: 123(uL) Acid addition volume
[Data] Calibration curve data
Y = -1.000 + 1.234X
STD ORG Area SD CV
ZERO 123.4 (0.123) 12345 0.123 0.012
PT-2 123.4 (0.123) 12345 0.123 0.012
SPAN 123.4 (0.123) 12345 0.123 0.012
Zero Shift: OFF Zero shift
R^2: 0.9999999 Coefficient of determination
STD: Concentration of standard solution
ORG: Concentration of stock solution
Area: Area value
Calibration curve conditions Calibration Table DEC-12-2010
C#:NPOC#1
10:00
10
INJ:1234uL, DL:12, SP:123sec, ZS:ON
PT B# STD ORG RP MX SD CV
Z 1 1.234 1.234 12 12 1.234 1.234
2 2 1.234 1.234 12 12 1.234 1.234
3 3 1.234 1.234 12 12 1.234 1.234
4 4 1.234 1.234 12 12 1.234 1.234
S 5 1.234 1.234 12 12 1.234 1.234
C#: Calibration curve number
DL: Dilution factor
SP: Sparging time
ZS: Zero shift
PT: Point number
B#: Port number
STD: Concentration of standard solution
ORG: Concentration of stock solution
RP: Number of measurements
MX: Maximum number of measurements
SD: SD reference
CV: CV reference
TOC-4200 243

Online measurement report Log Report (Online) Title
APR-28-2010 Date of measurement
Time (mg/L) (mg/L) RMK
19:00 S#1 NPOC 12.34 COD 12.34 XXXXX
19:00 S#1 TN 12.34 NH3 12.34 XXXXX
NPOC/TN: Measurement type and concentration
COD/NH3: Conversion name and conversion value
RMK: Remarks
Load measurement report Log Report (Load) Title
APR-08-2010 Date of measurement
Time Conc. Load Flow RMK
(mg/L) (kg/h) (m3/h)
19:00 S#1 COD 6.042 0.0 0.00 R
19:00 S#1 TN 7.933 0.0 0.00
Conc.: Hourly average concentration
Load: Hourly load average
Flow: Hourly average flow rate
RMK: Remarks
EPA TOC removal rate Log Report (EPA) Title
measurement report APR-28-2010 Date of measurement
Time REM% TOC1 TOC2 Result
(mg/L) (mg/L)
13:00 1.234 5.678 9.123
14:00 1.234 0.123 0.123 Fail
15:00 1.234 0.123 0.123
REM%: TOC removal rate
Fail: Failed
Empty: Success
244 TOC-4200

Calibration report Log Report (Calibration) Title
C#:IC#5 Calibration curve number
APR-28-2010 12:00 Date and time of measurement
MN 1ST Prev. SD CV R
ZERO 12345 12.3 2.22 0.123 0.012 F
PT-2 12345 12.3 2.22 0.123 0.012
PT-3 12345 12.3 2.22 0.123 0.012
PT-4 12345 12.3 2.22 0.123 0.012
SPAN 12345 12.3 2.22 0.123 0.012
APR-28-2010 18:00
ZERO 12345 12.3 2.22 0.123 0.012 F
PT-2 12345 12.3 2.22 0.123 0.012
PT-3 12345 12.3 2.22 0.123 0.012
PT-4 12345 12.3 2.22 0.123 0.012
SPAN 12345 12.3 2.22 0.123 0.012
PT-?: Point number
MN: Mean area value
1ST: Drift amount from the initial calibration result
Prev.: Drift amount from the previous calibration result
R: Result
Empty:Updated normally
F: Calibration failed
R: Not updated because update condition range is
exceeded
Control sample measurement Log Report (Control Sample) Title
report (mg/L) (mg/L) R
APR-28 10:00 TOC 12.34 TN 12.34 R
APR-28 10:00: Date and time of measurement
TOC: TOC measurement type
(mg/L): TOC measurement concentration
TN: TN measurement type
(mg/L): TN measurement concentration
R: Judgment result
Empty: Success 10
R: Retry calibration
Fatal error report Log Report (Fatal Error) Title
APR-25 12:34 TOC DET UNCONNECTED
APR-26 12:34 SYRINGE
APR-27 12:34 8PORT VALVE
TOC DET UNCONNECTED: Details
Instrument alarm report Log Report (Instrument Alarm) Title
APR-25 12:34 LOW CAR GAS PRESS
APR-26 12:34 REPL STD SEL ROTOR
LOW CAR GAS PRESS: Details
Measurement value alarm report Log Report (Meas. Value Alarm) Title
APR-25 12:34 CALIB UNRENEWED
APR-26 12:34 S#3 #### LOW
APR-27 12:34 S#5 ####-L HIGH
(S#?: stream number, ####: conversion formula name)
CALIB UNRENEWED: Details
TOC-4200 245

Power outage report Log Report (Power Outage) Title
Occured Recovered
APR-25-2010 12:34 APR-25-2010 12:35
APR-25-2010 12:50 APR-25-2010 12:51
Measurement pause log Log Report (Meas. Skip) Title
S#1 Stream number
Occured Recovered
APR-25-2010 12:34 APR-25-2010 12:35
APR-25-2010 12:50 APR-25-2010 12:51
Room temperature report Log Report (Room Temperature)
Occured Recovered Temp
APR-25-2010 12:34 APR-25-2010 12:35 40.1
APR-25-2010 12:50 41.0
Temp: Temperature
Maintenance report Log Report (Maintenance)
Started Finished
APR-25-2010 12:34 APR-25-2010 12:35
APR-25-2010 12:50 APR-25-2010 12:51
Started: Start time
Finished: End time
Online measurement condition MEASURE TABLE MMM-DD-YYYY HH:MM Title
printout S#1 Stream number
TYPE: TOC(POC+NPOC) Measurement type
DISP. TYPE: TOC Display type
SAMPLING: COMBI. Measurement mode
CONVERSION Conversion formula
TOC: COD = -12.34 + 12.34X
TN : ABCD = -12.34 + 12.34X
[ POC] [NPOC] [ TN]
CALIB.NO POC#1 NPOC#2 TN#6 Calibration curve
number
RANGE 20000 20000 20000 Range
INJ(uL) 4500 4500 ----- Injection volume
DL 50 ----- ----- Dilution factor
ACID(uL) 999 ----- ----- Acid addition
volume
SP(sec) 999 ----- ----- Sparging time
MEAS. TIMES 15 ----- ----- Number of
measurements
MAX TIMES 15 ----- ----- Maximum
number of
measurements
SD 10000.0 10000.0 0000.0 SD reference
CV 100.0 100.0 100.0 CV reference
S#2
S#3
S#4
246 TOC-4200
10.9 Product Specifications

TOC-4200
Item Description
Measurement TC, NPOC
items When options are installed: IC, TOC (= TC IC, = NPOC + POC), TN
Measurement 680 C combustion catalytic oxidation - NDIR detection method
principle
Measurement 0 to 5 mgC/L f.s. to 0 to 1,000 mgC/L f.s. (maximum of 0 to 20,000 mgC/L f.s. using the
range dilution function)
Repeatability Within 2 % f.s. 1
Span stability Within 2 % f.s. per day (temperature variation within 5 C) 1
Zero stability Within 2 % f.s. per day (temperature variation within 5 C) 1
Measurement Minimum of 4 minutes (NPOC, residual IC under 2 %) 2
cycle
Sample injection Syringe pump/sliding injection port
method
IC removal Acidification and sparging inside the syringe
method
Sample dilution Dilution inside the syringe, dilution factor of 2 to 50 parts
function Dilution accuracy: Within 2 % (2 to 20 parts), and within 5 % (21 to 50 parts)
Automatic Automatic calibration using standard solution (diluent is used as the zero standard
calibration solution for the zero calibration solution)
function With the relevant option is provided: A maximum of eight bottles of standard solution
can be used; automatic calibration of multi-point calibration curves up to five calibration
curve points is possible.
Stream switching Streams 1 to 6 can be switched (with the relevant option)
function
Display, operation Color LCD with touchscreen
10
Conversion Conversion into different measures using primary expressions (conversion formula must
function be determined beforehand)
Load calculation Load calculation using an analog input board (option)
function Analog input insulated (not insulated between channels), load resistance: 100
EPA TOC TOC removal rate calculation according to the United States EPA regulations (Part IV 40
removal rate CFR Part 9, 141 and 142, 1998) (when a 2- or more-stream switching option is provided)
calculation
function
Data storage Capable of storing 20,000 previous entries of online measurement data (equivalent to
function more than one year's worth for a 30 minute measurement cycle). Data can be displayed
as a trend graph.
Data storage Measurement conditions and measurement value data can be stored on USB flash
device memory
(USB1.1 or 2.0 USB memory, FAT16 or FAT32, without cryptographic function)
Recorder 100 mm recording width, 6-dot recorder (when provided as an option)
TOC-4200 247
Item Description
Printer Thermal printer, 40 characters per line, 110 mm chart width (when provided as an
option)
Analog output 4 to 20 mADC or 0 to 16 mADC switching available (two insulated outputs)
With the relevant option provided: Maximum of 12 possible outputs
Load resistance: 500 max.
Contact output Alarm signals
signal Fatal error, instrument alarm, power supply shutoff, CPU error, concentration error (1st
upper limit, 1st lower limit, 2nd upper limit, 2nd lower limit), measurement paused
Event signals
Maintenance in progress, measurement possible, operating online, measuring sample,
calibrating, regenerating catalyst, measuring control sample, measuring stat sample,
pausing, analog output trigger, analog output stream identification signal, measurement
stream identification signal, sampling pump control output
(Contact rating: 30 VDC at 2 A, 250 VAC at 2 A, non-inductive load)
Contact input Start calibration, stop measurement, start online measurement, deactivate alarm, start
measurement on streams 1 to 6, pause measurement (output side contact capacity:
24 VDC, 10 mA min.)
Communication RS-485, RS-232C (option), Modbus support
function Measurement data and warnings can be viewed on the Web browser via network when
the Web monitor unit set (option) is used.
Carrier gas Pressurized air, high purity air, oxygen (cannot perform TN measurement)
Supply pressure: 250 to 300 kPa
When the relevant option is provided: High purity nitrogen (cannot perform TN
measurement)
Power supply 100 to 240 VAC 10 %, 10A, 50/60 Hz
Ambient Within 1 to 40 C
temperature
Construction Indoor wall mounting (optional stand available)
External Approx. (W) 550 (D) 384 (H) 1,240 mm (excluding projections)
dimensions
Mass Approx. 70 kg
1) When the automatic setting function is used

2) When the sample is potassium hydrogen phthalate and preliminary sampling is performed for next
measurement
248 TOC-4200
IC measurement option
Item Description
Measurement IC (inorganic carbon)
item
Measurement Sparging / CO2 removal / non-dispersive infrared gas detection (NDIR) method
principle
Measurement 0 to 100 mgC/Lf.s. (maximum of 5,000 mgC/Lf.s. using the dilution function)
range
Repeatability Within 2 % f.s.
IC-POC measurement option1

Item Description
Measurement POC (purgeable organic carbon)
item
Measurement Sparging / CO2 removal / 680 C combustion oxidation / non-dispersive infrared gas
principle detection (NDIR) method
CO2 removal Absorption and removal with lithium hydroxide crystals
method
Measurement 0 to 50 mgC/Lf.s. (maximum of 2,500 mgC/Lf.s. using the dilution function)
range
1) IC (inorganic carbon) can also be measured. IC measurement performance is the same as that of IC
measurement option.
TN option
Item
Measurement TN (total nitrogen)
Description
10
item
Measurement 720 C thermal decomposition / chemiluminescence detection
principle
Measurement 0 to 1 mgN/Lf.s. -- 0 to 200 mgN/Lf.s. (maximum of 0 - 10,000 mgN/Lf.s. using the
range dilution function)
Repeatability 4 mgN/Lf.s. or below: Within 4 % f.s.
Over 4 mgN/Lf.s.: Within 2 % f.s.
Measurement Minimum of 4 minutes1
cycle
1) When the sample is ammonium sulfate and preliminary sampling is performed for next measurement
TOC-4200 249
N2 carrier gas kit

Item Description
item When the relveant option is provided: IC, POC, TOC (= TC - IC, = NPOC + POC)
* TN cannot be measured
Measurement 0 to 1,000 mgC/Lf.s. (maximum of 20,000 mgC/L using the dilution function)
range
Supply gas High purity nitrogen gas (CO, CO2, HC: 1 ppm max. respectively)
High sensitivity measurement option

Item Description
item * IC, POC, TN cannot be measured
Measurement 0 to 1 mgC/Lf.s.
range
Supply gas High purity air
N2 carrier gas high sensitivity measurement option

Item Description
item * IC, POC, TN cannot be measured
Measurement 0 to 1 mgC/Lf.s.
range
Supply gas High purity nitrogen gas (CO, CO2, HC: 1 ppm max. respectively)
Combustion tube kit for high salinity samples1, 2, 3

Item Description
Measurement TC, NPOC: 0 to 20,000 mgC/L (over 1,000 mgC/L: dilution measurement)
concentration TN: 0 to 500 mgN/L (over 10 mgN/L: dilution measurement)
range
Repeatability TC, NPOC: Within 3 %
TN: 4 mgN/Lf.s. or below: Within 4 %f.s.
Over 4 mgN/Lf.s.: Within 2 %f.s.
1) Standard salt concentration in the sample: Approx. 3 % (not a guaranteed value)

2) When measuring sea water with 40 L injection, measurement is possible about 2,500 times (not a
guaranteed value).
3) Be sure to use sulfuric acid for acidification. Acidification by sulfuric acid is needed also at TN measurement.
250 TOC-4200
10.10 External Dimensions Diagram
10.10External Dimensions Diagram
41.5
1240
10
550 163 384
TOC-4200 251
10.11Accessories
10.11.1Standard Accessories
Without
Power
Part Name Part Number Quantity Remarks
Code Model
Quantity
Platinum catalyst ST-type, 33 g S638-60116 1 1 -
Combustion tube, case included S638-41323 1 1 -
L-shaped combustion tube, case included S638-42013 1 1 -
Quartz wool (1 g included) S630-00557 1 1 -
Ceramic fiber S638-60074 20 g 20 g -
Platinum mesh, 2 pieces S630-00105-01 1 1 -
B-type halogen scrubber mesh S631-60069 4 4 1 already
installed
Container, 10 L (for diluent) S638-52446 1 1 -
Syringe, 5 mL S638-59231 1 1 -
Screw, M36 (SUS) S020-46534 1 1 -
Nut, M12 (SUS) S023-04074 4 4 -
TOC-4200 USER'S MANUAL (this manual) S638-94581 1 1 -
Container, 2 L (for acid) 638-52444-11 1 1 -
Container, 500 mL (for standard solution) 638-52552-01 1 1 -
Syringe stop holder 638-36007-01 1 1 -
8-port valve cover 631-11948 1 1 -
Plate for bottles 638-14695 1 1 -
Pallet 038-00314-01 1 1 -
Pallet (for standard solution and acid) 638-14696 1 1 -
Power cord 2.4 M (CE) 071-60814-02 1 0 -
Power cord 2 M (UL) 071-60827-03 1 0 -
Bolt, M1230 (SUS) 022-07228 4 4 -
Spring washer, M12 (SUS) 023-77085 4 4 -
Hexagonal wrench 1.5 086-03824-01 1 1 -
(for 8-port valve maintenance)
Hexagonal wrench 2.5 086-03824-03 1 1 -
Hexagonal wrench 3 638-92319-10 1 1 -
Key wrench (for 8-port valve maintenance) 638-92319-39 1 1 -
252 TOC-4200
10.11 Accessories
10.11.2Optional Parts
Sampling Unit (Alternatives)
Part Name Part Number Remarks

Multi-stream suspended solids S638-93191-01 to Sampling unit for measuring samples that
sampling unit 06 contain large amounts of suspended solids
Allows switching between a maximum of 6
streams
Multi-stream suspended solids S638-93191-11 to Sampling unit for measuring samples that
sampling unit LF 16 contain large amounts of suspended solids
Allows switching between a maximum of 6
streams
For low sample flow rates about 1 to 2 L/min
Single stream suspended solids S638-93186 Sampling unit for measuring samples that
sampling unit contain large amounts of suspended solids
Single stream only
Backwash strainer sampling unit S638-41507-21 Sampling unit with an air backwash strainer
(with pump) function
Use the internal pump to provide air for
backwashing
Float switch for sample runout detection not
equipped
Antimicrobial provided
Backwash strainer sampling unit S638-41507-22 Sampling unit with an air backwash strainer
(without pump) function
Use the carrier gas source to provide air for
backwashing
equipped
Backwash strainer sampling unit F
(with pump)
S638-41507-23 Sampling unit with an air backwash strainer
function
10
backwashing
Float switch for sample runout detection
equipped
Backwash strainer sampling unit F S638-41507-24 Sampling unit with an air backwash strainer
backwashing
equipped
TOC-4200 253

Backwash strainer sampling unit E S638-41507-25 Sampling unit with an air backwash strainer
backwashing
equipped
Antimicrobial not provided
Backwash strainer sampling unit E S638-41507-26 Sampling unit with an air backwash strainer
backwashing
equipped
Backwash strainer sampling unit EF S638-41507-27 Sampling unit with an air backwash strainer
backwashing
equipped
Backwash strainer sampling unit EF S638-41507-28 Sampling unit with an air backwash strainer
backwashing
equipped
Multi-stream sample switching unit S638-93193-01 to Allows switching between a maximum of 6
06 streams
For comparatively clean samples
Sample stream kit S638-41582-01, For stream 1 and stream 2
-02 For comparatively clean samples
Sample stream additional kit S638-41582-03 Additional kit used to change the kit for stream
1 into stream 2
254 TOC-4200
10.11 Accessories
External Input/Output
Optional terminal 2 kit S638-79078 Kit for terminal 2 expansion
2 built-in analog output lines
Optional terminal 3 kit S638-79079 Kit for terminal 3 expansion
Optional terminal 23 kit S638-79080 For terminal 23 expansion
Analog output board S638-79084 Adds 2 analog output lines per set and is
required for output of 5 or more lines
Maximum of 4 sets (12 outputs) can be added
Requires the PCB retaining fitting (terminal)
and terminal 2
Analog input board S638-79083 For flow rate signal input (3 lines)
Requires the PCB retaining fitting (terminal)
and terminals 2 and 3
Data converter kit S638-79077 Additional programming is required to use the
protocol conversion function
Requires the PCB retaining fitting (main) and
RS-232C kit
PCB retaining fitting, terminal S638-84218 Required to expand the analog input/output
boards
PCB retaining fitting, main S638-84217 Required to expand boards other than the
analog input/output boards
RS-232C kit S638-66228 D-sub 9 pin (male)
Web monitor unit set S638-79077-01 Kit required to use the Web monitoring
function
Requires the PCB retaining fitting (main)
Recorder (Alternatives)
Part Name Part Number Remarks 10
Printer kit S638-54066 Kit that includes a printer and printer I/F board
Recorder kit S638-54065 6-dot recorder kit
Recorder kit, without recorder S638-54065-01 Required when a recorder is prepared
separately and installed in the instrument
[Recorders available]
Mount panel cut-out: 138 mm138 mm
Dimensions
From the mount panel:
Front: 46 mm max.
Rear: 270 mm max. (incl. wiring)
Input: 0-1 V f.s.
TOC-4200 255
Measurement System
TN option S638-92308 0-200 mgN/L (without dilution)
0-10000 mgN/L (with dilution)
Repeatability:
4 mgN/Lf.s. or below: Within 4 % f.s.
Over 4 mgN/Lf.s.: Within 2 % f.s.
Combustion tube kit for high salinity S638-93176-04 -
samples
IC measurement option S638-57156-01 IC specification
IC-POC measurement option S638-57156-02 0-100 mgC/L (without dilution)
0-5000 mgC/L (with dilution)
Repeatability: 2 % f.s.
POC specification
0-50 mgC/L (without dilution)
0-2500 mgC/L (with dilution)
Repeatability: 2 % f.s.
High sensitivity measurement option S638-42111-01 TOC measurement possible for a range of 0 to
1 mgC/L
Carrier gas source: high purity air
N2 carrier gas kit S638-41574 Required to use a nitrogen gas cylinder as the
carrier gas source
N2 carrier gas high sensitivity S638-42111-02 TOC measurement possible for a range of 0 to
measurement option 1 and through to 100 mgC/L
Carrier gas source: high purity nitrogen
Standard solution switching kit 8 S638-57177 Required to perform automatic calibration
using 3 or more bottles of standard solution
Standard solution switching kit 2 S638-57176 Allows automatic calibration using a maximum
of 2 bottles of standard solution
Others
Automatic diluent supply kit S638-57171 A valve kit that purifies tap water for use as
diluent and supplies it to the instrument
Diluent purification kit S638-58166-01 Kit for purifying tap water into diluent and
combined with the automatic diluent supply kit
Cannot be used to dilute and measure TOC
Automatic pure water supply kit S638-57172 A valve kit for the direct supply of pure water
Stand kit S638-10308 A stand kit to allow freestanding
Purge kit S638-40252 Tubing kit required to purge inside the panel
using clean air
Power terminal block kit S638-68162 -
Regulator, AW30-02BG-N S040-82112-43 Regulator with filter for air
Regulator tubing kit S638-42064 Tubing kit for attaching the regulator and
AW30-02BG-N
Air duct kit S638-41204 Kit consisting of joints and tubing for the air
source and main unit
256 TOC-4200
10.11 Accessories
10.11.3Additional Functions Available with Options

TN, IC Measurement and IC-POC Measurement Options
A standard specification instrument can measure TC and NPOC. The following measurement can
also be performed by adding the TN option, IC measurement option, and IC-POC measurement
option.
Part Name Measurement Type

TN option TC, NPOC, TN, TC/TN, NPOC/TN
IC measurement option TC, NPOC, IC, TOC (TC-IC)
IC measurement option, TN option TC, NPOC, IC, TN, TOC (TC-IC), TC/TN, NPOC/TN, TOC (TC-
IC)/TN
IC-POC measurement option TC, NPOC, IC, POC, TOC (TC-IC), TOC (POC+NPOC)
IC-POC measurement option, TN TC, NPOC, IC, POC, TN, TOC (TC-IC), TOC (POC+NPOC), TC/
measurement option TN, NPOC/TN, TOC (TC-IC)/TN, TOC (POC+NPOC)/TN
The table below lists the measurement types and their corresponding specific types.
Measurement Type Specific Type

TC TC
NPOC NPOC
IC IC
POC POC
TN TN
TOC (TC-IC) TC, IC
TOC (POC+NPOC) POC, NPOC
TC/TN TC, TN 10
NPOC/TN NPOC, TN
TOC (TC-IC)/TN TC, IC, TN
TOC (POC+NPOC)/TN POC, NPOC, TN
TOC-4200 257
Recorder Kit
This is the recorder kit that is incorporated into the instrument. This kit can be provided with or
without the recorder.
Part Name Recordable Items

Recorder kit (with recorder) 6 items
Recorder kit (without recorder) -
Printer Kit
This kit includes a printer and connecting cable that are incorporated into the instrument. The kit
enables printing of results and logs from online measurement. The printer uses the thermal method of
printing.
258 TOC-4200
10.12 Consumable Parts
10.12Consumable Parts
The table below lists consumable parts in addition to parts with a comparatively short service life.
Replace these parts when the replacement period draws near. The replacement period should only be
used as a guide. The replacement period will vary depending on usage and the condition of samples.
Catalyst, Combustion Tube

Replacement
Period
TC high sensitivity catalyst S630-00996 For replacement of TC high 3 to 6 months
sensitivity catalyst
Combustion tube (case included) S638-41323 - 6 months to 1
year
Platinum catalyst ST-type, 33 g S638-60116 Combustion tube 3 to 6 months
L-shaped combustion tube (for 1 year
carrier gas purification)
L-shaped combustion tube (for 1 year
POC measurement)
Quartz wool S630-00557 For the combustion tube, L-shaped At catalyst
combustion tube, 1 g included replacement
Ceramic fiber S638-60074 For TN/TOC measurement At catalyst
replacement
O-rings
Replacement
Period
O-ring 4DP10A S036-11209-84 5 pcs. At catalyst
replacement
O-ring 4DP20 S036-11219-84 5 pcs. At combustion
tube
10
replacement
O-ring PTFE S638-15025 - At catalyst
replacement
Syringe-related Parts
Replacement
Period
Plunger tip, for 5 mL S638-59231-01 - 3 months
TOC-4200 259
Chemicals
Replacement
Period
Lithium hydroxide S638-60110-22 For POC measurement and the 1 month
CO2 absorber, 250 g
Potassium hydrogen phthalate S630-00635-02 For TC standard solution, 500 g
Potassium nitrate S017-40533-02 For TN standard solution, 500 g
Sodium carbonate S630-00962 For IC standard solution (option),
500 g
Sodium hydrogen carbonate S630-00963 For IC standard solution (option),
500 g
Prepared hydrochloric acid S638-60209 1.2 N hydrochloric solution
(diluted with 10 parts) for IC
removal, 2 L
CO2 absorber S630-00999 For carrier gas purification 2 months
For purging the optical system 1 year
For sparging 6 months
For NOx gas absorption 2 months
(spent chemical reused in carrier
gas purification)
For purging the short-cell 4 months
(option)
Stainless mesh for absorption S631-60069 For the B-type halogen scrubber 6 months
Halogen scrubber S630-00992 Standard (for cell protection) When 3/4 of
the scrubber
has changed
color
TN Option-related Parts
Replacement
Period
Ozonizer ASSY S638-71162-01 For maintenance of the ozone 1 to 5 years
generator
Ozone treatment unit catalyst S638-65232 300 g 6 months
Viton tube kit S638-42015 For the chemiluminescence 6 months
detector exhaust
Polypropylene packing material S630-00325 120 g 6 months
Packing S631-43578 For maintenance of the 1 year
chemiluminescence detector
260 TOC-4200
10.12 Consumable Parts
Electrical Parts, Others

Printer chart paper S630-08913-01 10 rolls
Recorder chart paper EM001 S080-82564-51 For the recorder, 0 to 100 scale markings, 15 reams
Ink pad S080-82564-55 For the recorder (6-dot)
Consumable Parts Set

Consumable parts set, TOC-4200 S638-92310-01 Consumable parts for one year under a typical usage
condition
See "Parts included in the consumable parts set" for
details.
Consumable parts set, S638-92310-02 For use when the TN option is provided
TOC-4200TN Consumable parts for one year under a typical usage
condition
See "Parts included in the consumable parts set" for
details.
Parts included in the consumable parts set

Quantity
Part Name Part Number Consumable Parts Set Consumable Parts Set
TOC-4200 TOC-4200TN
Combustion tube (case included) S638-41323 1 1
Platinum catalyst ST-type, 33 g S638-60116 2 2
Platinum mesh, 2 pieces S630-00105-01 1 1
O-ring 4DP10A, 5 pcs. S036-11209-84 1 1
O-ring PTFE S638-15025 2 2
O-ring 4DP20, 5 pcs. S036-11219-84 1 1 10
Plunger tip, for 5 mL S638-59231-01 4 4
Halogen scrubber S630-00992 3 3
Ozone treatment unit catalyst S638-65232 - 2
Viton tube kit S638-42015 - 1
Packing S631-43578 - 1
TOC-4200 261
10.13Maintenance Parts
SA Parts
Tubing
Replacement
Period
Flanged tubing S638-41337-03 For online/offline measurement, 1 year
500 mm
Flanged tubing, 1.6 0.5 400 S638-41269-04 Tube for sample injection 1 year
Flanged tubing, 1.6 1.0 50 S638-41337-08 For sparging 1 year
Others
Replacement
Period
Insulator S631-73155 For the electric furnace
L-shaped combustion tube (case S638-42013 - Upon
included) breakage
Rotor for the 8-port valve S631-56032 For 8-port valve maintenance Upon
breakage
Stator for the 8-port valve S631-56033 For 8-port valve maintenance Upon
breakage
Syringe, for 5 mL S638-59231 - Upon
breakage
Sampling Unit
Single Stream Suspended Solids

Packing, preparation vessel S631-44038 -
Strainer S631-58114 -
Oil seal ASSY S638-20106 -
Backwash strainer
Strainer ASSY S638-58185 -
262 TOC-4200
10.14 Material Safety Data Sheets
10.14Material Safety Data Sheets

10.14.1Hydrochloric Acid (HCl)
Shimadzu Scientific Instruments, Inc. Revised Date: 2008/06/12
7102 Riverwood Drive Columbia, MD 21046
Tel: 1(800) 477-1227
SECTION I IDENTIFICATION OF THE SUBSTANCE OR MIXTURE
PRODUCT IDENTIFIER : Hydrochloric Acid
SECTION II HAZARDS IDENTIFICATION
GHS CLASSIFICATION : Skin corrosion/irritation: Category 1A
Serious eye damage/eye irritation: Category 1
Acute toxicity-Oral: Category 4
Acute toxicity-Inhalation: Category 1
Sensitization-Respiratory: Category 1
Specific target organ systemic toxicity Single exposure: Category 1
Specific target organ systemic toxicity Repeated exposure: Category 1
Hazardous to the aquatic environment -Acute hazard: Category 1
HAZARD SYMBOL :
DANGER
HAZARD STATEMENTS : Causes severe skin burns and eye damage
Causes serious eye damage
Harmful if swallowed
Fatal if inhaled
May cause allergy or asthma symptoms or breathing difficulties if inhaled.
Causes damage to organs
Causes damage to organs through prolonged or repeated exposure
Very toxic to aquatic life
PRECAUTIONARY STATEMENTS : <Prevention>
Avoid breathing dust/fume/gas/mist/vapours/spray.
Avoid release to the environment if this is not the intended use.
Do not eat, drink or smoke when using this product.
In case of inadequate ventilation wear respiratory protection as specified by the manufacturer/supplier or the competent authority.
Use only outdoors or in a well-ventilated area.
Wash thoroughly after handling.
Wear protective gloves and eye/face protection as specified by the manufacturer/supplier or the competent authority.
Wear respiratory protection as specified by the manufacturer/supplier or the competent authority.
<Resoponse>
Collect spillage.
Get medical attention/advice if you feel unwell.
10
If experiencing respiratory symptoms call a POISON CENTER or doctor/physician.
IF exposed: Call a POISON CENTER or doctor/physician.
IF IN EYES: Rinse cautiously with water for several minutes. Remove contact lenses, if present and easy to do. Continue rinsing.
IF INHALED: Remove victim to fresh air and keep at rest in a position comfortable for breathing.
IF ON SKIN (or hair): Remove/Take off immediately all contaminated clothing. Rinse skin with water/shower.
IF SWALLOWED: Rinse mouth. Do NOT induce vomiting.
IF SWALLOWED: Call a POISON CENTER or doctor/physician if you feel unwell.
Rinse mouth.
Specific treatment is urgent (see ... on this label) .. reference to supplemental first aid instruction if immediate administration of
antidote is required.
Wash contaminated clothing before reuse.
<Storage>
Store container tightly closed in well-ventilated place -if product is as volatile as to generate hazardous atmosphere.
Store locked up.
<Disposal>
Dispose of contents/container to a located point (in accordance with local/regional/national/international regulation).
TOC-4200 263
SECTION III COMPOSITION/INFORMATION ON INGREDIENTS

CHEMILCAL IDENTITY : Hydrochloric acid (36 %)
SYNONYMS : Muriatic acid
FORMULA : HCl
MOLECULAR WEIGHT : 36.46
CAS NUMBER : 7647-01-0
TSCA INVENTORY : Listed
EINECS No. : 231-595-7
EC INDEX NUMBER : 017-002-00-2
SECTION IV FIRST AID MEASURES
GENERAL ADVICE : Wash off immediately with soap and plenty of water. In the case of respirable dust and/or fumes, use self-contained breathing
apparatus and dust impervious protective suit. Use personal protective equipment.
INHALATION : Move victim to fresh air. If breathing is difficult, give oxygen. If breathing has stopped, administer artificial respiration. Maintain
normal body temperature with a blanket. If irritation persists, transport to a hospital immediately.
SKIN CONTACT : Remove contaminated clothes and shoes, rinse skin with plenty of water or shower. Use soap to help assure removal. If irritation
persists, transport to a hospital immediately.
EYE CONTACT : Remove any contact lenses at once. Flush eyes well with flooding amounts of running water for at least 15 minutes. Assure adequate
flushing by separating the eyelids with sterile fingers. If irritation persists, transport to a hospital immediately.
INGESTION : Rinse mouth, give plenty of water to dilute the substance. Never give anything by mouth to an unconscious person. Transport to a
hospital immediately.
SECTION V FIRE FIGHTING MEASURES
EXTINGUISHING MEDIA : Carbon dioxide, dry chemical powder, foam, water
FIRE & EXPLOSION HAZARDS : Toxic and irritating fumes or smoke may be emitted. Explosive hydrogen gas is released upon contact with common metals.
SPECIAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT FOR FIREFIGHTERS :
Firemen should wear normal protective equipment (full bunker gear) and positive-pressure self-contained breathing apparatus.
SECTION VI ACCIDENTAL RELEASE MEASURES
PERSONAL PRECAUTIONS : Remove ignition sources and ventilate the area. In case of insufficient ventilation, wear suitable respiratory equipment. Avoid contact
with skin and eyes.
ENVIRONMENTAL PRECAUTIONS :
Prevent spills from entering sewers, watercourses or low areas.
METHODS FOR CLEANING UP : Do not touch spilled material without suitable protection (See section 8). Take up spilled material with ashes or other incombustible
absorbents and dilute it with plenty of water and neutralize with soda ash. After material is completely picked up, wash the spill site
with soap and water and ventilate the area. Put all wastes in a plastic bag for disposal and seal it tightly. Remove, clean, or dispose of
contaminated clothing.
SECTION VII HANDLING AND STORAGE
PRECAUTION FOR SAFE HANDLING :
Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothing. Avoid prolonged or repeated exposure. Handle material with suitable protection.
CONDITIONS FOR SAFE STORAGE :
Store away from sunlight in well-ventilated dry place at room temperature. Keep container tightly closed.
INCOMPATIBILITIES : Strong oxidizers, alkalis, amines, metals
SECTION VIII EXPOSURE CONTROLS/PERSONAL PROTECTION
ENGINEERING MEASURES : Use exhaust ventilation to keep airborne concentrations below exposure limits. Use only with adequate ventilation.
VENTILATION : Local Exhaust ; Necessary, Mechanical (General) ; Necessary
Special; Closed system is recommended.
INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION MEASURES ;
Respiratory protection : NIOSH/MSHA or European Standard EN149 approved respirator
Hand protection : Impervious gloves
Eye protection : Safety glasses (goggles)
Skin protection : Protective clothing
CONTROL PARAMETER : as Hydrogen chloride
OSHA Final Limits : Ceiling = 5 ppm, 7 mg/m3; STEL = 2 ppm
ACGIH TLV(s) : Ceiling = 5 ppm, 7.5 mg/m3
SECTION IX PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL PROPERTIES
APPEARANCE : Colorless clear liquid
ODOUR : Irritating odor
pH : Not available
FREEZING POINT : -46.2 C = -51.2 F (31.24 %)
INITIAL BOILING POINT : 108.58 C = 227.44 F
FLASH POINT : Not available
FLAMMABILITY (solid, gas) :-----
EXPLOSIVE LIMITS : Not available
VAPOR PRESSURE : Not available
VAPOR DENSITY : 1.3 (air = 1)
RELATIVE DENSITY : 1.180 (35.39 %)
SOLUBILITY IN ; WATER : Miscible
ETHANOL, ETHL ETHER : Miscible
PARTITION COEFFICIENT : 0.25
DECOMPOSITION TEMPERATURE : Not available
264 TOC-4200
SECTION X STABILITY AND REACTIVITY

CHEMICAL STABILITY : Will not occur.
CONDITIONS TO AVOID : Sunlight, heat
INCOMPATIBILE MATERIALS : Strong oxidizers, alkalis, amines, metals
HAZARDOUS DECOMPOSITION PRODUCTS :
Hydrogen chloride gas may be formed.
SECTION XI TOXICOLOGICAL INFORMATION
as Hydrogen chloride;
ACUTE TOXICITY (oral/dermal/inhalation) :
LDLo (orl,woman): 420 L/kg (JJTOEX 9,351,1996)
LC50 (ihl,rat): 7004 mg/m3/30M (VCVN5* -, 383, 1989)
TCLo (ihl,human): 50 mg/m3 (VCVN5* -, 383, 1989)
SKIN CORROSION/IRRITATION : Skin; human; 4 %/24H; Mild (BJDEAZ 68,192,1988)
EYE DAMAGE/EYE IRRITATION : Eye; rabbit, rinsed; 5 mg/30S; Mild (TXCYAC 23,281,1982)
RESPIRATORY OR SKIN SENSITIZATION :
Not available
GERM CELL MUTAGENICITY : Cytogenetic analysis; hamster; ovary; 8 mmol/L (MUREAV 225,55,1989)
DNA repair; E.coli; 25 g/well (ENMUDM 3, 429, 1981)
TOXIC TO REPRODUCTION : TCLo (ihl,rat): 450 mg/m3/1H (female 1D pre): Effects on Embryo or Fetus - fetotoxicity (AKGIAO 53 (6), 69,1977)
STOST-SINGLE EXPOSURE : Not available
STOST-REPEATED EXPOSURE : Not available
ASPIRATION TOXICITY : Not available
CARCINOGENICITY : Not available
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ; NTP : Not listed
IARC : Not Classifiable as to Carcinogenicity to Humans (Group 3)
OSHA : Not listed
ACGIH : Not listed
EPA GENETOX PROGRAM 1988, Negative: Cell transform.-SA7/SHE
SECTION XII ECOLOGICAL INFORMATION
ECOTOXICITY : LC50 (starfish): 100 to 330 ppm (as Hydrogen chloride)
PERSISTENCE AND DEGRADABILITY :
Not available
BIOACCUMULATION POTENTIAL : Not available
MOBILITY IN SOIL : Not available
OTHER ADVERSE EFFECTS : WGK; 1
SECTION XIII DISPOSAL CONSIDERATION (INCLUDING CONTAINER)
Cautiously add to a large stirred excess of water. Adjusting the pH to neutral, separate any insoluble solids or liquids and package them
for hazardous-waste disposal. Flush the aqueous solutions down the drain with plenty of water. Any disposal practice must be in
compliance with country, local, state, and federal laws and regulations (contact country, local or state environmental agency for
specific rules).
SECTION XIV TRANSPORT INFORMATION
IATA : UN NUMBER : UN1789
UN PROPER SHIPPING NAME : Hydrochloric acid
CLASS or DIVISION : Corrosives. (Class 8)
PACKING GROUP : PG II
MARINE POLLUTANT : Yes
10
DOT (Department of Transportation) : IDENTIFICATION NUMBER : UN1789
PROPER SHIPPING NAME : Hydrochloric acid
HAZARD CLASS : Corrosive material (Class 8)
SECTION XV REGULATORY INFORMATION
US REGULATIONS ; CAA/112 1990 Amend., CAA/122(r) Acci. Release Pre. Subst., CERCLA Haz. Subst., DOT Haz. Mat., DOT Haz. Sub. and Rep.
Quant., Mass. Subst. List , New Jers. RTK Haz. Subst. List , Penn. Haz. Subst. List
EPA : CERCLA RQ= 5000 lb
EPCRA TPQ= Not listed
EPA FIFRA 1998 STATUS OF PESTICIDES: Red Completed
OSHA : TQ= Not listed
SECTION XVI OTHER INFORMATION INCLUDING INFORMATION ON PREPARATION AND REVISION OF THE
SDS
No specific notes
The above information is believed to be correct to be the best of our knowledge and information but does not purport to be all inclusive and shall be used only as a guide. This
product is intended to be used by expert persons having chemical knowledge and skill, at their own discretion and risk and Wako shall not be held liable for any damage
resulting from handling or from contact with the above material.
TOC-4200 265
10.14.2CO2 Absorber, Ca(OH)2, KOH, NaOH: Soda Lime

Shimadzu Scientific Instruments, Inc. Revised Date: 2010/03/19
Tel: 1(800) 477-1227
SECTION I IDENTIFICATION OF THE SUBSTANCE OR MIXTURE
PRODUCT IDENTIFIER : Soda Lime
SECTION II HAZARDS IDENTIFICATION
GHS CLASSIFICATION : Skin corrosion/irritation: Category 1B
HAZARD SYMBOL :
DANGER
HAZARD STATEMENTS : Causes severe skin burns and eye damage
PRECAUTIONARY STATEMENTS : <Prevention>
Wear protective gloves and eye/face protection.
Wash thoroughly after handling.
Do not breathe dust
<Response>
IF ON SKIN (or hair): Remove/Take off immediately all contaminated clothing. Rinse skin with water/shower.
IF IN EYES: Rinse cautiously with water for several minutes. Remove contact lenses, if present and easy to do. Continue rinsing.
IF SWALLOWED: Rinse mouth. Do NOT induce vomiting.
IF INHALED: Remove victim to fresh air and keep at rest in a position comfortable for breathing.
Immediately call a POISON CENTRE or doctor/physician.
Wash contaminated clothing before reuse.
Specific measures (see MSDS).
<Storage>
Store locked up.
<Disposal>
Dispose of contents/container to a located point.
EU CLASSIFICATION: according to Directive 67/548/EEC.
SYMBOL : C
R-phrase : R34 Causes burns.
S-phrase : S26 In case of contact with eyes, rinse immediately with plenty of water and seek medical advice.
S36/37/39 Wear suitable protective clothing, gloves and eye/face protection.
S45 In case of accident or if you feel unwell, seek medical advice immediately.
SECTION III COMPOSITION/INFORMATION ON INGREDIENTS
CHEMILCAL IDENTITY : Soda lime
FORMULA : -----
MOLECULAR WEIGHT : -----
CAS NUMBER : 8006-28-8
TSCA INVENTORY : Not listed (See Section 15)
EINECS No. : Not listed
EC INDEX NUMBER : Not listed
SECTION IV FIRST AID MEASURES
GENERAL ADVICE : Wash off immediately with soap and plenty of water. In the case of respirable dust and/or fumes, use self-contained breathing
apparatus and dust impervious protective suit. Use personal protective equipment.
INHALATION : Move victim to fresh air. If breathing is difficult, give oxygen. If breathing has stopped, administer artificial respiration. Maintain
normal body temperature with a blanket. If irritation persists, transport to a hospital immediately.
SKIN CONTACT : Remove contaminated clothes and shoes, rinse skin with plenty of water or shower. Use soap to help assure removal. If irritation
persists, transport to a hospital immediately.
EYE CONTACT : Remove any contact lenses at once. Flush eyes well with flooding amounts of running water for at least 15 minutes. Assure adequate
flushing by separating the eyelids with sterile fingers. If irritation persists, transport to a hospital immediately.
INGESTION : Rinse mouth, give plenty of water to dilute the substance. Do not induce vomiting. Never give anything by mouth to an unconscious
person. Transport to a hospital immediately.
SECTION V FIRE FIGHTING MEASURES
EXTINGUISHING MEDIA : Not combustible. Use extinguisnig media appropriate to the surrounding fire.
FIRE & EXPLOSION HAZARDS : Toxic and irritating dust, fumes or smoke may be emitted.
SPECIAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT FOR FIREFIGHTERS :
Firemen should wear normal protective equipment (full bunker gear) and positive-pressure self-contained breathing apparatus.
SECTION VI ACCIDENTAL RELEASE MEASURES
PERSONAL PRECAUTIONS : Remove ignition sources and ventilate the area. In case of insufficient ventilation, wear suitable respiratory equipment. Avoid raising
dust and avoid contact with skin and eyes.
ENVIRONMENTAL PRECAUTIONS : Prevent spills from entering sewers, watercourses or low areas.
METHODS FOR CLEANING UP : Do not touch spilled material without suitable protection (See section 8). After material is completely picked up, wash the spill site
with soap and water and ventilate the area. Put all wastes in a plastic bag for disposal and seal it tightly. Remove, clean, or dispose of
contaminated clothing.
266 TOC-4200
SECTION VII HANDLING AND STORAGE

PRECAUTION FOR SAFE HANDLING :
Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothing. Avoid prolonged or repeated exposure. Handle material with suitable protection.
This material is hygroscopic.
CONDITIONS FOR SAFE STORAGE :
Store away from sunlight in well-ventilated dry place at room temperature. Keep container tightly closed.
INCOMPATIBILITIES : Strong acids
SECTION VIII EXPOSURE CONTROLS/PERSONAL PROTECTION
ENGINEERING MEASURES : Use exhaust ventilation to keep airborne concentrations below exposure limits. Use only with adequate ventilation.
VENTILATION : Local Exhaust ; Necessary, Mechanical (General) ; Necessary
Special; Closed system is recommended.
INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION MEASURES ;
Respiratory protection : NIOSH/MSHA approved respirator
Hand protection : Impervious gloves
Eye protection : Safety glasses (goggles)
Skin protection : Protective clothing
CONTROL PARAMETER : OSHA Final Limits : None established
ACGIH TLV(s) : None established
SECTION IX PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL PROPERTIES
APPEARANCE : White - slightly brown, shot
ODOUR : Odorless
pH : Not available
MELTING POINT : Not available
INITIAL BOILING POINT : Not available
FLASH POINT : Not available
FLAMMABILITY (solid, gas) : Not available
EXPLOSIVE LIMITS : Not available
VAPOR PRESSURE : Not available
SPECIFIC GRAVITY : 2.1
SOLUBILITY IN ; WATER : Practically insoluble
PARTITION COEFFICIENT : Not available
DECOMPOSITION TEMPERATURE : Not available
SECTION X STABILITY AND REACTIVITY
CHEMICAL STABILITY : Stable under recommended storage conditions.
CONDITIONS TO AVOID : Sunlight, heat, moisture
INCOMPATIBILE MATERIALS : Strong acids
HAZARDOUS DECOMPOSITION PRODUCTS :
Not available
SECTION XI TOXICOLOGICAL INFORMATION
ACUTE TOXICITY (oral/dermal/inhalation) :
Not available
TOXICITY DATA : Harmful if inhaled and ingested.
SKIN CORROSION/IRRITATION : May be harmful if absorbed through skin. Causese skin burns.
EYE DAMAGE/EYE IRRITATION : Causes burns.
RESPIRATORY OR SKIN SENSITIZATION :
Not available
GERM CELL MUTAGENICITY :
TOXIC TO REPRODUCTION :
Not available
Not available 10
STOST-SINGLE EXPOSURE : Not available
STOST-REPEATED EXPOSURE : Not available
ASPIRATION TOXICITY : Not available
CARCINOGENICITY : Not available
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ; NTP : Not listed
IARC : Not listed
OSHA : Not listed
ACGIH : Not listed
SECTION XII ECOLOGICAL INFORMATION
ECOTOXICITY : Not available
PERSISTENCE AND DEGRADABILITY :
Not available
BIOACCUMULATION POTENTIAL : Not available
MOBILITY IN SOIL : Not available
OTHER ADVERSE EFFECTS : Not available
SECTION XIII DISPOSAL CONSIDERATION (INCLUDING CONTAINER)
Cautiously add to a large stirred excess of water. Adjusting the pH to neutral, separate any insoluble solids or liquids and package them
for hazardous-waste disposal. Flush the aqueous solutions down the drain with plenty of water.
Any disposal practice must be in compliance with country, local, state, and federal laws and regulations (contact country, local or state
environmental agency for specific rules).
After contents are completely removed, dispose of its container in accordance with local/regional/national/international regulation.
TOC-4200 267
SECTION XIV TRANSPORT INFORMATION

IATA : UN NUMBER : UN3262
UN PROPER SHIPPING NAME : Corrosive solid, basic, inorganic, n.o.s. (Soda lime)
CLASS or DIVISION : Corrosives. (Class 8)
PACKING GROUP : PG III
MARINE POLLUTANT : No
DOT (Department of Transportation) : IDENTIFICATION NUMBER : UN3262
PROPER SHIPPING NAME : Corrosive solid, basic, inorganic, n.o.s.
HAZARD CLASS : Corrosive material (Class 8)
SECTION XV REGULATORY INFORMATION
US REGULATIONS ; New Jers. RTK Haz. Subst. List
EPA : CERCLA RQ= Not listed
EPCRA TPQ= Not listed
OSHA : TQ= Not listed
NFPA : HR= health-2, flam.-0, react.-1
HMIS : HR= health-2, flam.-0, react.-1
TSCA : Use of this product must be restricted to research or analysis for the development of a product in accordance with the Act.
SECTION XVI OTHER INFORMATION INCLUDING INFORMATION ON PREPARATION AND REVISION OF THE
SDS
No specific notes
The above information is believed to be correct to be the best of our knowledge and information but does not purport to be all inclusive and shall be used only as a guide. This
product is intended to be used by expert persons having chemical knowledge and skill, at their own discretion and risk and Wako shall not be held liable for any damage
resulting from handling or from contact with the above material.
268 TOC-4200
10.14.3Ceramic Fiber
Shimadzu Scientific Instruments, Inc. Revised Date: 2005/04
Tel: 1(800) 477-1227
SECTION I PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION
Refractory ceramic fiber
Alternative names: Polycrystalline alumino-silicate fiber, ceramic fiber
Trade Name: FIBERMAX
Product: Bulk fiber
Chemical composition: Al2O3 72-97, SiO2 3-28
SECTION II HAZARDOUS INGREDIENTS / IDENTITY INFORMATION
INGREDIENT % HAZARD DATA TLV-TWA REMARK S
Alumina Ceramic Fiber 100 0.2 f/cm3 Counting fibers;
[CAS# 675106-31-7] [Notice of Intended Changes on ACGIH] Longer 5 m
Diameter about 3 m Diameter < 3 m
Length/Diameter 3
Hazard Data Source: ACGIH Threshold Limit Values for 2002

SECTION III PHYSICAL/CHEMICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Boiling Point: No data Solubility in Water: N/A
Melting Point: No data Appearance: White, loose wool
Evaporation Rate: N/A Odor: No odor-
Density (kg/m3): - Service Temperature (C): 1,300 - 1,700
SECTION IV FIRE AND EXPLOSION HAZARD DATA
Flash Point (Method used): This product is not flammable. Special Fire and Fighting Procedures: None
Explosion Point (Method used): N/A Unusual Fire and Explosion Hazards: None
Extinguishing Media: N/A
SECTION V REACTIVITY DATA
Stability: Stable Hazardous Decomposition or By-products: None
Incompatibility (Materials to avoid): None Conditions to Avoid: None
SECTION VI HEALTH HAZARD DATA
Acute Hazard: Skin Contact: May cause irritation.
Eye Contact: May cause irritation, inflammation and rash.
Chronic Hazard: Repeated, prolonged or excessive inhalation of fiber may cause respiratory disease.
At this time there are no known published reports demonstrating negative health outcomes of workers exposed to ceramic fiber.
Other Precautions on Health Hazard:
1. Perform periodic medical examination by X-ray of the lung function of the workers who handle this product.
2. Perform periodic monitoring of individual exposure of workers who handle this product to check if exposure level is in compliance with TLV.
3. Record details of operation and arrange training/education of workers.
4. Workers should wash hand and rinse mouth after use.
Emergency and First Aid Procedures:
Inhalation: First aid procedure is not necessary for respiratory tract. May cause cough, phlegm, etc., in case continue to inhale more than
acceptable level as described below. Get medical attention in such case.
Ingestion: Ingestion is unlikely. If ingested, drink sufficient water and vomit and get medical attention.
Skin Contact: Flush with water or slightly warm water and wash with soap. Get medical attention if pain and inflammation.
Eye Contact: Flush eyes with water for a least 15 minutes. Abrasive action may cause damage to the outer surface of the eye. Get medical
attention if irritating.
Carcinogenicity (Refractory Ceramic Fiber):
10
NTP: B2 - Reasonably anticipated to be a carcinogen
IARC Monographs: 2B - Possibly carcinogenic to humans
EU: 2 - Probably carcinogenic to humans
Data of Experiments of Refractory Ceramic Fiber on Animals:
Result of experiments depends on kinds of experimental animals, volume/size distribution/process of exposure etc. of fiber dosed to experimental
animals and therefore a number of experiments are necessary.
1. There is a report that increase of lung tumor has been observed in rats exposed to the inhalation of 8.4 mg/m3 of Alumina Silicate Ceramic Fiber
(RCF) into lung for twelve months.
2. There is a report that pleural sarcoma has been frequently observed in rats exposed to the dose of ceramic fiber into pleural cavity, especially be
diameter less than 0.25 mm and length more than 8 m (8 m exclusive).
3. There is a report that pleural interstitial fibrosis has been observed in 3 rats out of 36 rats exposed to one dose of 20 mg RCF into pleura.
4. There is a report that one % of interstitial fibrosis has been observed in hamsters exposed to the inhalation of 12 mg/m3 RCF with 1.8 mm for 24
months (6 hours per day, 5 days per week) not in rats.
Also there is a report that peritoneal interstitial fibrous has been observed in hamsters and rats exposed to one dose of same 25 mg/m3 into
pleural cavity.
5. There is a report that tumor has been observed in 2.6-14.5% of rats exposed to the inhalation of RCF 3-30 mg/m3 with kaolin as raw materials
for 24 months (6 hours per day, 5 days per week).
TOC-4200 269
SECTION VII PRECAUTION FOR SAFE HANDLING AND USE

Step to be taken in case material is released or spilled:
Use vacuum suction with HEPA filters to clean up spilled material suppressing generations of airborne dust. Wear air purifying respirator or mask
when clean up.
Precaution on waste disposal:
Disposal of this waste material must be by plastic bag with minimum 0.05mm thickness to prevent generations of airborne dust.
The transportation, storage, treatment and disposal of this waste material must be conducted in compliance with all applicable local regulations.
Precaution on transportation:
Avoid generations of airborne dust by breakage of package during transportation. Repair broken part of package by adhesive tape and also arrange
new packing in case of breakage.
Refer "Step to be taken in case material is released or spilled" in this MSDS for treatment of spilled material.
SECTION VIII CONTROL MEASURES

Suppressive procedure: Restrict and separate areas where this product is used.
Close up tight and/or install/provide proper general and/or local ventilation at the places where dust concentrations exceeds TLV. Inspect regularly
such ventilation to maintain initial functions.
Respiratory Protection (Specify Type):
Respiratory protection must be selected/used according to airborne concentrations as described below.
Respiratory protection must be checked for fitness to face and also arranged proper maintenance on filter in case use Half-Face air purifying
respirator.
Concentration (8-hours TWA) Minimum Acceptable Respirator Type
0.1- 1 f/cm3 Disposable dust respirator.
1- 5 f/cm3 Half-Face, air-purifying respirator equipped with high-efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filter cartridges.
5-25 f/cm3 Full-Face, air purifying respirator with high-efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filter cartridges or powered air-
purifying respirator equipped with HEPA filter cartridges.
Greater than 25f/cm 3 Full-Face, positive pressure supplied air respirator.
Eye Protection: Wear proper eye protection such as chemical goggles, safety glasses with side seal.
Other Protective Clothing or Equipment:
Wear gloves and long-sleeve work clothes to prevent skin irritation as necessary. Remove materials from area of contact of clothes by vacuum suction
with HEPA filter or adhesive tape avoiding generations of airborne dust.
Recommended workers who may be sensitive to a fiber not to engage in handling this product.
SECTION IX SPECIAL PRECAUTIONS
Avoid smoking at the workplace.
Preparations containing RCF should not be sprayed.
This product does not contain crystalline silica. However product which has been in service at elevated temperatures (greater than 1,000 C) may undergo partial conversion to
cristobalite, a form of crystalline silica. Cristobalite is classified as a GROUP 1 by IARC and by definition the agent of GROUP 1 is carcinogenic to humans. So special
caution must be taken.
The information provided on this Material Safety Data Sheet is based on ACGIH Threshold Limit Values 2002 as of the date of issuance of the sheets. The purchaser shall
follow the up-to-date rules and also your local rules, laws, regulations, etc.
Obey up-to-date local rules, laws, regulations, etc.
NOTICE: The information presented herein is based on data considered to be accurate as of date of preparation of this Material Safety Data Sheet. However, no
warranty or representation, express or implied, is made as to the accuracy or completeness of the foregoing data and safety information, nor is any
authorization given or implied to practice any patented invention without a license. In addition, no responsibility can be assumed by vendor for any
damage or injury resulting from abnormal use, from any failure to adhere to recommended practices, or from any hazards inherent in the nature of the
product.
270 TOC-4200
Check Sheet for Periodic Replacement Parts

Making a copy of this check sheet will facilitate the management of replacements at the relevant
times.
Part Number Part Name Period Next Replacement Period

Chemicals
S630-00999 CO2 absorber 2 months / / /
(for carrier gas purification)
S630-00999 CO2 absorber 1 year / / /
(for purging the optical system) 3 months (when
the TN option
is provided.)
S630-00999 CO2 absorber (for sparging) 6 months / / /
S630-00999 CO2 absorber 4 months / / /
(for purging the short-cell, option)
S630-00999 CO2 absorber (for NOx gas absorption) 2 months / / /
(reuse of spent carrier gas purification
absorber)
S630-00992 Standard halogen scrubber When 3/4 of the / / /
(for cell protection) scrubber has
changed color
Catalyst, Combustion Tube
S638-60116 Platinum catalyst (for the combustion tube) 3 to 6 months / / /
S638-60116 Platinum catalyst (for carrier gas 1 year / / /
purification)
S638-60116 Platinum catalyst (for POC measurement) 1 year / / /
S630-0096 TC high sensitivity catalyst 3 to 6 months / / /
S638-41323 Combustion tube (case included) 6 months to 1 / / /
year
S631-41564 L-shaped combustion tube (case included) Upon breakage / / /
TN Option-related Parts
S638-71162-01 Ozonizer ASSY (for maintenance of the
ozone generator)
1 to 5 years / / /
10
S638-65232 Ozone treatment catalyst (300 g included) 6 months / / /
S638-42015 Viton tube kit (for the chemiluminescence 6 months / / /
detector exhaust)
S630-00325 Polypropylene packing material 6 months / / /
(100 g included)
S631-43578 Packing (for maintenance of the 1 year / / /
chemiluminescence detector)
Syringe-related Parts
S638-59231-01 Plunger tip (for 5 mL) 3 months / / /
O-ring
S036-11209-84 O-ring, 4DP10A (5 pcs.) At catalyst / / /
replacement
S036-11219-84 O-ring, 4DP20 (5 pcs.) At combustion / / /
tube
replacement
S638-15025 O-ring, PTFE At catalyst / / /
replacement
TOC-4200 271
Part Number Part Name Period Next Replacement Period

Electrical Parts, Others
S630-08913-01 Printer chart paper (10 rolls included) - / / /
S080-82564-51 Recorder chart paper (15 packs included) - / / /
S080-82564-55 Ink pad (6 dot) - / / /
/ / /
/ / /
/ / /
/ / /
272 TOC-4200
Index
Numerics Standard catalyst ......................................... 15

TC high sensitivity catalyst........... 15, 115, 121
1st lower limit alarm .....................................42, 224 Catalyst combustion method ................................. 1
1st upper limit alarm.....................................42, 224 Catalyst for the ozone treatment unit ................ 148
2nd lower limit alarm ....................................42, 224 Catalyst regeneration .......................................... 24
2nd upper limit alarm....................................42, 224 Ceramic fiber..................................................... 116
8-port valve ....................................................4, 156 Chemiluminescence detector............ 154, 177, 179
CO2 absorber ................................................ 4, 144
A CO2 absorber for carrier gas purification ... 144
CO2 absorber for NOx absorber ........ 144, 187
Alarm CO2 absorber for
Alarm resetting....................................170, 217 POC measurement ............................ 144, 145
Fatal error .............................81, 104, 169, 171 CO2 absorber for
Instrument alarm ...................81, 104, 169, 173 purging the optical system ......................... 144
Measurement value alarm ............81, 169, 175 CO2 absorber for short-cell purge .............. 144
Alarm value CO2 absorber for sparging ......................... 144
1st lower limit alarm ..............................42, 224 Combustion tube ............................................... 113
1st upper limit alarm..............................42, 224 L-shaped combustion................................. 123
2nd lower limit alarm .............................42, 224 POC combustion tube ................................ 126
2nd upper limit alarm ............................42, 224 Combustion tube kit for high salinity samples ... 256
Analog input board .....................................229, 255 Concentration of the standard solution ............. 215
Analog output board...........................................255 Contact input ..................................................... 217
Analog-related output.........................................224 Contact output................................................... 221
Auto Re-meas. .......................................21, 53, 215 Control Sample Measurement ............................ 45
Automatic calibration function ............................247 Control sample measurement reports ................. 84
Automatic diluent supply kit................................256 Conversion formula list........................................ 96
Automatic pure water supply kit .........................256
D
B
Data converter kit .............................................. 255
Backwash strainer sample sampling unit .......6, 166 Diluent ....................................................... 129, 130
Baseline .....................................................177, 192 Zero water (dilution water) ................. 130, 140
Blank values.......................................113, 114, 215 Diluent purification kit ........................................ 256
B-type halogen scrubber ........................4, 110, 149 Dilute hydrochloric acid ............................. 130, 131
B-type halogen scrubber mesh ..........................252 Dilution factor .................................................... 193
Dilution function................................................. 193
C Drain pot............................................................ 158
Cal. Curve ............................................................22

Calibration curve ............................67, 82, 209, 215 E
Carrier Gas...........................................................50 Electric furnace ............................................... 4, 12
Carrier gas .........................................................186 Electronic dehumidifier.................................. 4, 158
Carrier gas purification tube ...............................123 Emergency Stop.................................................. 14
Catalyst ..............................................................113 EPA calculation ................................................. 214
Platinum catalyst.........................116, 123, 126 EPA mode ........................................................... 58
TOC-4200 273
Index
EPA output trigger............................................. 225 TC (total carbon) ........................................ 194

External input/output signals ............................. 216 TN (total nitrogen) ...................................... 196
Contact input.............................................. 217 TOC (POC + NPOC) measurement ........... 190
Contact output............................................ 221 TOC (TC - IC) measurement...................... 190
Serial input/output ...................................... 230 Measurement value alarm................... 81, 169, 175
Transmission input..................................... 229 Micro syringe ............................................. 192, 193
Transmission output................................... 228 Missing ........................................................ 41, 213
Multi-stream sample switching unit ............... 5, 254
F Multi-stream suspended solids
sampling unit ......................................... 5, 164, 253
Fatal error.................................... 81, 104, 169, 171
Furnace ............................................................... 50
N
G NPOC ................................................................ 189
NPOC measurement ......................................... 190
Glass CO2 absorber container .......................... 146
O
H
Offline measurement conditions.................... 53, 66
Halogen scrubber.......................................... 4, 149
Online measurement conditions.................... 18, 63
B-type halogen scrubber................ 4, 110, 149
Ozone generator ............................................... 155
Humidifier .............................................. 4, 110, 160
Ozone treatment unit......................................... 147
I
P
IC....................................................................... 189
Password protection............................................ 94
IC-POC measurement options .......................... 257
Peak area .................................................. 208, 212
Inj. Vol. .......................................................... 22, 71
Peak shape ....................................................... 191
Instrument alarm ......................... 81, 104, 169, 173
Platinum catalyst ............................... 116, 123, 126
Plunger .............................................................. 137
L Plunger tip ......................................................... 136
Load calculation ................................................ 212 POC .................................................................. 189
Load calculation measurement mode ................. 57 POC combustion tube ....................................... 126
L-shaped combustion........................................ 123 Potassium hydrogen phthalate.......................... 215
Potassium nitrate .............................................. 130
Power cord ........................................................ 252
M Power terminal block kit .................................... 256
Meas. Skip .......................................................... 81 Pressure adjustment knob .................................... 4
Measurement conditions ................................... 215 Purge kit ............................................................ 256
Offline measurement conditions ............ 53, 66
Online measurement conditions ............ 18, 63
Measurement cycle ..................................... 24, 247 Q
Measurement items........................................... 247 Quartz wool ............................................... 118, 123
Measurement pause signals ............................. 105
Measurement principles .................................... 189
IC (inorganic carbon) ................................. 198
R
NPOC (non-purgeable organic carbon) ..... 195 Reagent grade sodium hydrogen carbonate ..... 131
NPOC measurement.................................. 190 Regenerating catalyst ....................................... 140
POC (purgeable organic carbon) ............... 197 Remark.............................................. 57, 59, 75, 79
274 TOC-4200
Index
Remote calibration .............................................217 T

Remote start.......................................................217
TC ..................................................................... 189
Remote stop.......................................................217
TC high sensitivity catalyst .................. 15, 115, 121
Repeatability ......................................150, 193, 247
TOC................................................................... 189
Rotor for 8-port valve .........................................150
TOC (POC + NPOC) measurement .................. 190
TOC (TC - IC) measurement............................. 190
S TOC detector............................................. 177, 178
Sample dilution function .....................................247 Total Nitrogen.................................................... 189
Sample ID ............................................................53 Transmission input ............................................ 229
Sample preparation vessel.................................166 Transmission output.......................................... 228
Sample stream additional kit ..............................254
Sample stream kit ..............................................254 U
Sampling unit ...............................................48, 164
Backwash strainer sample USB flash memory ............................................ 232
sampling unit...........................................6, 166
Multi-stream sample switching unit .........5, 254 V
Multi-stream suspended solids
sampling unit...................................5, 164, 253 Valve Self Maint. Int. ........................................... 95
Single stream suspended solids
sampling unit...........................................6, 253
Serial input/output ..............................................230
Z
Shft Org................................................................45 Zero shift ........................................................... 209
Single stream sampling unit ...................................6 Zero water (dilution water) ........................ 130, 140
Single stream suspended solids
sampling unit ..................................................6, 253
Sliding sample injector ...............................150, 185
Sodium carbonate ..............................................131
Sparge Gas ..........................................................99
Sparge time....................................................23, 71
Sparging gas ......................................................186
Stand kit .............................................................256
Standard catalyst .................................................15
Standard measurement mode..............................55
Standard Solution.................................................71
Standard solution ...............130, 131, 132, 133, 141
Standard solution concentration...........................73
Standard solution measurement ................199, 210
Stator for 8-port valve.........................................150
Sticking.........................................................95, 156
Suspended solids stream switching unit ....187, 192
Syringe .........................................................47, 134
Syringe pump type
sample injector ...............................4, 150, 156, 185
TOC-4200 275
Index
276 TOC-4200
DOC023.97.80077
pH Combination Analog Sensors

09/2010, Edition 2
User Manual
Manuel de lutilisateur
Manual del usuario
Manual do utilizador

G

English ..................................................................................................................................................................................................3
Franais .............................................................................................................................................................................................18
Espaol ..............................................................................................................................................................................................34
Portugus ..........................................................................................................................................................................................50
......................................................................................................................................................................................................66
.................................................................................................................................................................................................80
......................................................................................................................................................................................................95
.......................................................................................................................................................................................................109
2
Specifications DANGER
Specifications are subject to change without notice. Indicates a potentially or imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will
result in death or serious injury.
Table 1 Sensor specifications
WARNING
Specification Details
Indicates a potentially or imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided,
Operating temperature 0 to 105 C (32 to 221 F) could result in death or serious injury.
Sensor cable 4.6 m (15 ft) CAUTION

Dimensions (length/ Convertible: 150 mm (5.9 in.)/33 mm (1.3 in.), -in. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that may result in minor or moderate
diameter) NPT; Insertion: 150 mm (5.9 in.)/22 mm (0.875 in.); injury.
Sanitary: 187 mm (7.4 in.)/22 mm (0.875 in.)
NOTICE
Components Corrosion-resistant materials, fully-submersible
Indicates a situation which, if not avoided, may cause damage to the instrument.
Immersion depth/pressure Maximum 107 m (350 ft)/1050 kPa (100 psi) Information that requires special emphasis.
Pressure limit 6.9 bar at 100 C (100 psi at 212 F) Precautionary labels
Maximum flow rate 2 m/s (6.6 ft/s) Read all labels and tags attached to the instrument. Personal injury or
damage to the instrument could occur if not observed. A symbol on the
instrument is referenced in the manual with a precautionary statement.
General Information
This symbol, if noted on the instrument, references the instruction
In no event will the manufacturer be liable for direct, indirect, special,
manual for operation and/or safety information.
incidental or consequential damages resulting from any defect or omission
in this manual. The manufacturer reserves the right to make changes in
this manual and the products it describes at any time, without notice or
This symbol, when noted on a product enclosure or barrier, indicates
obligation. Revised editions are found on the manufacturers website. that a risk of electrical shock and/or electrocution exists.
Safety information
Please read this entire manual before unpacking, setting up or operating
this equipment. Pay attention to all danger and caution statements. Failure
to do so could result in serious injury to the operator or damage to the
equipment.
Make sure that the protection provided by this equipment is not impaired,
do not use or install this equipment in any manner other than that specified
in this manual.
Use of hazard information
English 3
Delicate internal electronic components can be damaged by static Figure 1 Sensor styles
electricity, resulting in degraded performance or eventual failure.
Electrical equipment marked with this symbol may not be disposed of

in European public disposal systems after 12 August of 2005. In
conformity with European local and national regulations (EU Directive
2002/98/EC), European electrical equipment users must now return old
or end-of-life equipment to the Producer for disposal at no charge to
the user.
Note: For return for recycling, please contact the equipment producer or supplier
for instructions on how to return end-of-life equipment, producer-supplied electrical
accessories, and all auxillary items for proper disposal.
Product overview
This sensor is designed to work with a controller for data collection and
operation. Multiple controllers can be used with this sensor. This document
assumes sensor installation and use with an sc200 controller. To use the
sensor with other controllers, refer to the user manual for the controller
that is used.
The sensor is available in different styles. Refer to Figure 1.
1 Convertible, flat electrodefor a 3 Insertionallows removal without

pipe tee or an open vessel stopping the process flow
2 Convertible, dome electrodefor a 4 Sanitaryfor install in a 2-inch
pipe tee or an open vessel sanitary tee
Installation
WARNING
Personal injury hazard. Only qualified personnel should conduct the tasks
described in this section of the manual.
4 English
Mounting For examples of sensors in different applications, refer to Figure 2. The
sensor must be calibrated before use. Refer to Calibrate the sensor
WARNING on page 9.
Personal injury hazard. Always consider the temperature and pressure rating of
the mounting hardware that is used to install the sensor. The hardware material
usually limits the temperature and pressure rating of the system.
Figure 2 Mounting examples
1 Sanitary mount 3 Flow-through mount

2 End of pipe immersion 4 Ball valve insertion
English 5
Connect the sensor to the module Table 2 pH and ORP combination sensor wiring
WARNING Connector Pin no. Signal Sensor wire 6-plug

sensors
Potential Electrocution Hazard. Always disconnect power to the
8-pin (J5) 1 Reference Metal braid Metal braid
instrument when making electrical connections.
2 Inner shield Blue Yellow
WARNING 3
Electrocution Hazard. High voltage wiring for the controller is conducted behind the
high voltage barrier in the controller enclosure. The barrier must remain in place 4
except when installing modules, or when a qualified installation technician is wiring
5
for power, relays or analog and network cards.
6 Temp + Red Green
NOTICE
7 Temp /Circuit White White
Potential Instrument Damage. Delicate internal electronic components low
can be damaged by static electricity, resulting in degraded performance
or eventual failure. 8
To install the module and connect the sensor, refer to the illustrated steps 2-pin (J4) 1 Active Clear Clear
and Table 2.
2
Note: Some combination sensors do not have wires for temperature measurement.
If the metal braid of a combination sensor is tinned, cut off the tinned area. If the combination sensor does not have a blue wire (or yellow wire for 6-plug
Note: If the sensor cable is not long enough to reach the controller, an interconnect sensors) for solution ground, install a jumper wire between pins 1 and 2 on the 8-
cable and junction box are required to extend the distance. pin (J5) connector.
6 English
1 2
3 4
English 7
5 6
7 8
8 English
Operation Option Description
Guidelines for operation DISPLAY For pH sensors onlychanges the number of decimal
FORMAT places that are shown on the measure screen to XX.XX
CAUTION (default) or XX.X
Personal injury hazard. The glass bulb or shank on the sensor can break. Handle TEMP UNITS Sets the temperature units to C (default) or F
the sensor carefully to prevent injury.
TEMP pH sensorssets the temperature element for automatic
Remove the protective cap before the sensor is put into the process. ELEMENT temperature compensation to PT100, PT1000 (default) or
NTC300. If no element is used, the type can be set to manual
When the sensor is removed from the process for >1 hour, fill the and a value for temperature compensation can be entered
protective cap with pH 4 buffer (recommended) or tap water and put the (manual default: 25 C). ORP sensorstemperature
cap on the sensor. Repeat every 24 weeks for extended storage. compensation is not used. A temperature element can be
connected to measure temperature.
User navigation
FILTER Sets a time constant to increase signal stability. The time
Refer to the controller documentation for keypad description and constant calculates the average value during a specified time
navigation information. 0 (no effect, default) to 60 seconds (average of signal
value for 60 seconds). The filter increases the time for the
Configure the sensor sensor signal to respond to actual changes in the process.
Use the Configure menu to enter identification information for the sensor
PURE H2O For pH sensors onlyadds a temperature-dependent
and to change options for data handling and storage. The following COMP correction to the measured pH value for pure water with
procedure can be used to configure pH or ORP sensors. additivesNone (default), Ammonia, Morpholine or User
defined. For process temperatures above 50 C, the
1. Push the MENU key and select Sensor Setup, [Select Sensor], correction at 50 C is used. For user-defined applications, a
Configure. linear slope (default: 0 pH/C) can be entered.
2. Use the arrow keys to select an option and push ENTER. To enter LOG SETUP Sets the time interval for data storage in the data log5, 30
numbers, characters or punctuation, push and hold the UP or DOWN seconds, 1, 2, 5, 10, 15 (default), 30, 60 minutes.
arrow keys. Push the RIGHT arrow key to advance to the next space.
RESET Sets the configuration menu to the default settings. All
Option Description DEFAULTS sensor information is lost.
EDIT NAME Changes the name that corresponds to the sensor on the top
of the measure screen. The name is limited to 10 characters Calibrate the sensor
in any combination of letters, numbers, spaces or
punctuation. About sensor calibration
Calibration adjusts the sensor reading to match the value of one or more
SENSOR S/N Allows the user to enter the serial number of the sensor,
limited to 16 characters in any combination of letters, reference solutions. The sensor characteristics slowly shift over time and
numbers, spaces or punctuation. cause the sensor to lose accuracy. The sensor must be calibrated regularly
to maintain accuracy. The calibration frequency varies with the application
and is best determined by experience.
English 9
A temperature element is used to provide pH readings that are 4. Select the type of calibration:
automatically adjusted to 25 C for temperature changes that affect the
active and reference electrode. This adjustment can be manually set by Option Description
the customer if the process temperature is constant. 2 point buffer Use 2 buffers for calibration, for example pH 7 and pH 4
During calibration, data is not sent to the datalog. Thus, the datalog can (recommended method). The buffers must be from the buffer
have areas where the data is intermittent. set that is specified in the Cal Options menu (refer to Change
calibration options on page 12).
pH calibration procedure 1 point buffer Use 1 buffer for calibration, for example pH 7. The buffer must
Sensors can be calibrated with 1 or 2 reference solutions (1-point or 2- be from the buffer set that is specified in the Cal Options menu.
point calibration). Standard buffers are automatically recognized. Make
2 point Use 2 samples or buffers of known pH value for calibration.
sure that the correct buffer set is used (refer to Change calibration
sample Determine the pH value of samples with a different instrument.
options on page 12).
1 point Use 1 sample or buffer for calibration. Determine the pH value
1. Put the sensor in the first reference solution. Make sure that the sensor sample of samples with a different instrument.
portion of the probe is fully immersed in the liquid (Figure 3).
5. If the passcode is enabled in the security menu for the controller, enter
Figure 3 Sensor in reference solution the passcode.
6. Select the option for the output signal during calibration:
Option Description
Active The instrument sends the current measured output value during the
calibration procedure.
Hold The sensor output value is held at the current measured value
during the calibration procedure.
Transfer A preset output value is sent during calibration. Refer to the

controller user manual to change the preset value.
7. With the sensor in the first reference solution, push ENTER.

The measured value is shown.
2. Wait for the sensor and solution temperature to equalize. This can take 8. Wait for the value to stabilize and push ENTER.
30 minutes or more if the temperature difference between the process Note: The screen may advance to the next step automatically.
and reference solution is significant. 9. If the reference solution is a sample, measure the pH value with a
3. Push the MENU key and select Sensor Setup, [Select Sensor], secondary verification instrument. Use the arrow keys to enter the
Calibrate. measured value and push ENTER.
Note: If a pH buffer not listed the Cal Options menu is used, refer to the buffer
bottle to find the pH value that corresponds to the temperature of the buffer.
10 English
10. For a 2-point calibration, measure the second reference solution (or ORP calibration procedure
sample): Sensors can be calibrated with an ORP reference solution or with the
process sample.
a. Remove the sensor from the first solution and rinse with clean
water. 1. Put the sensor in the reference solution. Make sure that the sensor
b. Put the sensor in the next reference solution and push ENTER. portion of the probe is fully immersed in the solution (Figure 4).
c. Wait for the value to stabilize. Push ENTER.
Note: The screen may advance to the next step automatically. Figure 4 Sensor in reference solution
d. If the reference solution is a sample, measure the pH value with a
secondary verification instrument. Use the arrow keys to enter the
measured value and push ENTER.
11. Review the calibration result:
Passedthe sensor is calibrated and ready to measure samples.

The slope and/or offset values are shown.
Failedthe calibration slope or offset is outside of accepted limits.

Repeat the calibration with fresh reference solutions. Refer to
Maintenance on page 13 and Troubleshooting on page 14 for
more information.
12. If the calibration passed, push ENTER to continue.
13. If the option for operator ID is set to Yes in the Calibration Options 2. Push the MENU key and select Sensor Setup, [Select Sensor],
menu, enter an operator ID. Refer to Change calibration options Calibrate.
on page 12. 3. Push ENTER to select 1 Point Sample calibration.
14. On the New Sensor screen, select whether the sensor is new: 4. If the passcode is enabled in the security menu for the controller, enter
the passcode.
Option Description
5. Select the option for the output signal during calibration:
Yes The sensor was not calibrated previously with this controller. The
days of operation and previous calibration curves for the sensor are Option Description
reset.
Active The instrument sends the current measured output value during the
No The sensor was calibrated previously with this controller. calibration procedure.
15. Return the sensor to the process and push ENTER. Hold The sensor output value is held at the current measured value
during the calibration procedure.
The output signal returns to the active state and the measured sample
value is shown on the measure screen. Transfer A preset output value is sent during calibration. Refer to the
Note: If the output mode is set to hold or transfer, select the delay time when the controller user manual to change the preset value.
outputs return to the active state.
6. With the sensor in the reference solution or sample, push ENTER.
The measured value is shown.
English 11
7. Wait for the value to stabilize and push ENTER. 1. Put the sensor in a container of water that is at a known temperature.
Note: The screen may advance to the next step automatically. Measure the temperature of the water with an accurate thermometer
or independent instrument.
8. If the process sample is used for calibration, measure the ORP value
with a secondary verification instrument. Use the arrow keys to enter 2. Push the MENU key and select Sensor Setup, [Select Sensor],
the value and push ENTER. Calibrate.
9. Review the calibration result: 3. Select 1 PT Temp Cal and push ENTER.
4. Wait for the value to stabilize and push ENTER.
Passedthe sensor is calibrated and ready to measure samples.
The slope and/or offset values are shown. 5. Enter the exact value and push ENTER.
6. Return the sensor to the process and push ENTER.
Failedthe calibration slope or offset is outside of accepted limits.
Repeat the calibration with fresh reference solutions. Refer to Exit calibration procedure
Maintenance on page 13 and Troubleshooting on page 14 for If the BACK key is pushed during a calibration, the user can exit the
more information. calibration.
10. If the calibration passed, push ENTER to continue.
11. If the option for operator ID is set to Yes in the Calibration Options 1. Push the BACK key during a calibration. Three options are shown:
menu, enter an operator ID. Refer to Change calibration options
Option Description
on page 12.
12. On the New Sensor screen, select whether the sensor is new: QUIT CAL Stop the calibration. A new calibration must start from the
beginning.
Option Description BACK TO CAL Return to the calibration.
Yes The sensor was not calibrated previously with this controller. The LEAVE CAL Exit the calibration temporarily. Access to other menus is
days of operation and previous calibration curves for the sensor are allowed. A calibration for a second sensor (if present) can be
reset. started. To return to the calibration, push the MENU key and
No The sensor was calibrated previously with this controller. select Sensor Setup, [Select Sensor].
13. Return the sensor to the process and push ENTER. 2. Use the arrow keys to select one of the options and push ENTER.
The output signal returns to the active state and the measured sample
value is shown on the measure screen. Change calibration options
Note: If the output mode is set to hold or transfer, select the delay time when the The user can set a reminder or include an operator ID with calibration data
outputs return to the active state. from the CAL OPTIONS menu.
Temperature calibration 1. Push the MENU key and select Sensor Setup, [Select Sensor],
The instrument is calibrated at the factory for accurate temperature Calibrate, Cal Options.
measurement. The temperature can be calibrated to increase accuracy.
12 English
2. Use the arrow keys to select an option and push ENTER. Impedance measurements
To increase the reliability of the pH measurement system, the controller
Option Description
determines the impedance of the glass electrodes. This measurement is
SELECT For pH sensors onlychanges the set of buffer solutions taken every minute. During diagnostics, the pH measurement reading will
BUFFER that are recognized for calibration to pH 4.00, 7.00, 10.00 be on hold for five seconds. If an error message appears, refer to Error
(default set) or DIN 19267 (pH 1.09, 4.65, 6.79, 9.23, 12.75) list on page 15 for more details.
Note: Other buffers can be used if the 1 point sample or 2
point sample option is selected during calibration. To enable/disable the sensor impedance measurement:
CAL Sets a reminder for the next calibration in days, months or 1. Push the MENU key and select Sensor Setup.
REMINDER yearsOff (default), 1 day, 7, 30, 60, or 90 days, 6 or 9
months, 1 or 2 years 2. Select Diag/test and push ENTER.
3. Select Imped Status and push ENTER.
OP ID on CAL Includes an operator ID with calibration dataYes or No
(default). The ID is entered during the calibration. 4. Select Enable/Disable and push ENTER.
Reset calibration options Modbus registers

The calibration options can be reset to the factory default options. A list of Modbus registers is available for network communication. Refer
to www.hach.com or www.hach-lange.com for more information.
1. Push the MENU key and select Sensor Setup, [Select Sensor],
Calibrate, Reset Default Cal. Maintenance
2. If the passcode is enabled in the security menu for the controller, enter
the passcode. WARNING
3. Push ENTER. The Reset Cal? screen is shown. Personal injury hazard. Only qualified personnel should conduct the tasks
described in this section of the manual.
4. Push ENTER. All calibration options are set to the default values.
5. If the option for operator ID is set to Yes in the Calibration Options Maintenance schedule
menu, enter an operator ID. Refer to Change calibration options The maintenance schedule shows minimum times for regular
on page 12. maintenance tasks. Perform maintenance tasks more frequently for
6. On the New Sensor screen, select whether the sensor is new: applications that cause electrode fouling.
Option Description Maintenance task 90 days

Yes The sensor was not calibrated previously with this controller. The Clean the sensor X
days of operation and previous calibration curves for the sensor are
reset. Inspect sensor for damage X
No The sensor was calibrated previously with this controller. Calibrate sensor Set by regulatory agencies or
experience
7. Push the BACK key to return to the measure screen.
English 13
Clean the sensor Test the pH sensor
WARNING Pre-requisites: Two pH buffers and a multimeter.
If a calibration fails, first complete the maintenance procedures in
Chemical hazard. Always wear personal safety protection in accordance with the
Maintenance on page 13.
Material Safety Data Sheet for the chemical that is used.
WARNING 1. Put the sensor in a pH 7 buffer solution and wait for the temperature
of the sensor and buffer to reach room temperature.
Personal injury hazard. Removal of a sensor from a pressurized vessel can be
dangerous. Reduce the process pressure to below 10 psi before removal. If this is 2. Disconnect the red (or green for 6-plug sensors) and white wires from
not possible, use extreme caution. Refer to the documentation supplied with the the module.
mounting hardware for more information. 3. Measure the resistance between the red (or green for 6-plug sensors)
Pre-requisite: Prepare a mild soap solution with a non-abrasive and white wires to verify the operation of the temperature element. The
dishwashing detergent that does not contain lanolin. Lanolin leaves a film resistance should be between 1090 and 1105 ohms at approximately
on the electrode surface that can degrade the sensor performance. 25 C.
If the temperature element is good, reconnect the wires to the module.
Examine the sensor periodically for debris and deposits. Clean the sensor
when there is a buildup of deposits or when performance has degraded. 4. Push the MENU key and select Sensor Setup, [Select Sensor], Diag/
Test, Sensor Signals. The reading should be between 50 and + 50
1. Use a clean, soft cloth to remove loose debris from the end of the mV.
sensor. Rinse the sensor with clean, warm water. 5. Rinse the sensor with water and put it in a pH 4 or pH 10 buffer solution.
2. Soak the sensor for 2 to 3 minutes in a soap solution. Wait for the temperature of the sensor and buffer to reach room
temperature.
3. Use a soft bristle brush to scrub the entire measuring end of the sensor.
6. Compare the mV reading in the pH 4 or 10 buffer to the reading in the
4. If debris remains, soak the measuring end of the sensor in a dilute acid pH 7 buffer. The reading should differ by approximately 160 mV.
solution such as < 5% HCl for a maximum of 5 minutes. If the difference is less than 160 mV, call technical support.
5. Rinse the sensor with water and then return to the soap solution for 2
to 3 minutes. Sensor diagnostic and test menu
6. Rinse the sensor with clean water. The sensor diagnostic and test menu shows current and historical
Note: Sensors with antimony electrodes for HF applications may require information about the instrument. Refer to Table 3. To access the sensor
additional cleaning. Contact technical support. diagnostic and test menu, push the MENU key and select Sensor Setup,
[Select Sensor], DIAG/TEST.
Always calibrate the sensor after maintenance procedures. Table 3 Sensor DIAG/TEST menu
Troubleshooting Option Description
Intermittent data MODULE INFORMATION Shows the version and the serial number for the
sensor module.
During calibration, data is not sent to the datalog. Thus, the datalog can
have areas where the data is intermittent. SENSOR INFORMATION Shows the name and serial number that was entered
by the user.
14 English
Table 3 Sensor DIAG/TEST menu (continued) Table 4 Error list for pH and ORP sensors (continued)
Option Description Error Description Resolution
CAL DAYS Shows the number of days since the last calibration. SLOPE TOO The slope is > 62 (pH)/1.3 Repeat the calibration with a
HIGH (ORP) fresh buffer or sample, or
CAL HISTORY Shows a list of and details for each calibration. replace the sensor.
RESET CAL HISTORY Resets the calibration history for the sensor (requires SLOPE TOO The slope is < 50 (pH)/0.7 Clean the sensor, then repeat
service-level passcode). All previous calibration data LOW (ORP) the calibration, or replace the
is lost. sensor.
SENSOR SIGNALS Shows the current reading in mV. TEMP TOO The measured temperature Make sure that the correct
HIGH is >130 C temperature element is
SENSOR DAYS Shows the number of days that the sensor has been selected.
in operation. TEMP TOO The measured temperature
LOW is < 10 C
RESET SENSOR DAYS Resets the number of days that the sensor has been
in operation. ADC FAILURE The analog to digital Power off and power on the
conversion failed controller. Call technical
support.
Error list
Errors may occur for various reasons. The reading on the measurement SAME BUFFER The buffers for 2 point buffer Complete the steps in Test the
screen flashes. All outputs are held when specified in the controller menu. calibration have the same pH sensor on page 14.
value
To show the sensor errors, press the MENU key and select Sensor Diag,
[Select Sensor], Error List. A list of possible errors is shown in Table 4. SENSOR The sensor is missing or Examine the wiring and
MISSING disconnected connections for the sensor and
Table 4 Error list for pH and ORP sensors for the module.
Error Description Resolution TEMP The temperature sensor is Examine the wiring for the
PH TOO HIGH The measured pH is > 14 Calibrate or replace the sensor. MISSING missing temperature sensor. Make sure
that the correct temperature
ORP TOO The measured ORP value is element is selected.
HIGH > 2100 mV
GLASS IMP The glass bulb is broken or Replace the sensor. Call
PH TOO LOW The measured pH is < 0 Calibrate or replace the sensor. LOW reached end of life technical support.
ORP TOO LOW The measured ORP value is

< 2100 mV Warning list for sensors
A warning does not affect the operation of menus, relays and outputs. A
OFFSET TOO The offset is > 9 (pH) or 200 Follow the maintenance
HIGH mV (ORP) procedures for the sensor and warning icon flashes and a message is shown on the bottom of the
then repeat the calibration, or measurement screen. To show the sensor warnings, press the MENU key
OFFSET TOO The offset is < 5 (pH) or 200 replace the sensor. and select Sensor Diag, [Select Sensor], Warning List. A list of possible
LOW mV (ORP) warnings is shown in Table 5.
English 15
Table 5 Warning list for pH and ORP analog sensors Event list for sensors
Warning Description Resolution The event list shows current activities such as configuration changes,
alarms, warning conditions, etc. To show the events, press the MENU key
PH TOO HIGH The measured pH is > 13 Calibrate or replace the and select Sensor Diag, [Select Sensor], Event List. A list of possible
sensor. events is shown in Table 6. Previous events are recorded in the event log,
ORP TOO HIGH The measured ORP value is
> 2100 mV
which can be downloaded from the controller.
Table 6 Event list for pH and ORP sensors
PH TOO LOW The measured pH is < 1 Calibrate or replace the
sensor. Event Description
ORP TOO LOW The measured ORP value is
< 2100 mV CAL READY The sensor is ready for calibration
OFFSET TOO HIGH The offset is > 8 (pH) or 200 Follow the maintenance CAL OK The current calibration is good
mV (ORP) procedures for the sensor
and then repeat the TIME EXPIRED The stabilization time during calibration expired
OFFSET TOO LOW The offset is < 6 (pH) or 200 calibration.
mV (ORP) NO BUFFER No buffer is detected
SLOPE TOO HIGH The slope is > 60 (pH)/1.3 Repeat the calibration with SLOPE HIGH The calibration slope is above the upper limit
(ORP) a fresh buffer or sample.
SLOPE LOW The calibration slope is below the lower limit
SLOPE TOO LOW The slope is < 54 (pH)/0.7 Clean the sensor, then
(ORP) repeat the calibration. OFFSET HIGH The calibration offset value for the sensor is above
the upper limit
TEMP TOO HIGH The measured temperature is Make sure the right
>100 C temperature element is OFFSET LOW The calibration offset value for the sensor is below
used. the lower limit
TEMP TOO LOW The measured temperature is
< 0 C PTS CLOSE The calibration points are too similar in value for a 2-
point calibration
CAL OVERDUE The Cal Reminder time has Calibrate the sensor.
expired CAL FAIL The calibration failed
REPLACE SENSOR The sensor has been in Replace the sensor. CAL HIGH The calibration value is above the upper limit
operation > 365 days
UNSTABLE The reading during calibration was unstable
NOT CALIBRATED The sensor has not been Calibrate the sensor.
calibrated CHANGE IN CONFIG float The configuration was changedfloating point type
FLASH FAILURE External flash memory failed Contact technical support. CHANGE IN CONFIG text The configuration was changedtext type
CAL IN PROGRESS A calibration was started but Return to calibration. CHANGE IN CONFIG int The configuration was changedinteger value type
not completed
RESET CONFIG The configuration was reset to the default options
POWER ON EVENT The power was turned on
16 English
Table 6 Event list for pH and ORP sensors (continued)
Event Description
ADC FAILURE The ADC conversion failed (hardware failure)
FLASH ERASE The flash memory was erased
TEMPERATURE The recorded temperature is too high or too low
1PT MANUAL START Start of 1-point sample calibration
1PT AUTO START Start of 1-point buffer calibration for pH
2PT MANUAL START Start of 2-point sample calibration for pH
2PT AUTO START Start of 2-point buffer calibration for pH
1PT MANUAL END End of 1-point sample calibration
1PT AUTO END End of 1-point buffer calibration for pH
2PT MANUAL END End of 2-point sample calibration for pH
2PT AUTO END End of 2-point buffer calibration for pH
Replacement parts and accessories

Note: Product and Article numbers may vary for some selling regions. Contact the
appropriate distributor or refer to the company website for contact information.
Description Quantity Item no.
Buffer Solution, pH 4 500 mL 2283449
ORP Reference Solution, 200 mV 500 mL 25M2A1001-115
ORP Reference Solution, 600 mV 500 mL 25M2A1002-115
English 17
Caractristiques techniques Assurez-vous que la protection fournie avec cet appareil ne soit pas
compromise, n'utilisez pas ou n'installez pas cet appareil d'une autre faon
Les caractristiques techniques peuvent tre modifies sans pravis. que celle dcrite dans ce manuel.
Tableau 1 Caractristiques techniques des capteurs Interprtation des indications de risques
Caractristiques Dtails
DANGER
Tempratures de 0 105 C (32 221 F) Indique une situation de danger potentiel ou imminent qui, si elle n'est pas vite,
fonctionnement peut entraner la mort ou des blessures graves.
Cble du capteur 4,6 m (15 pi)
AVERTISSEMENT
Dimensions (longueur/ Convertible : 150 mm (5,9 po)/33 mm (1,3 po), Indique une situation potentiellement ou immdiatement dangereuse qui, si elle
diamtre) po NPT ; Insertion : 150 mm (5,9 po)/22 mm nest pas vite, peut entraner des blessures graves, voire mortelles.
(0,875 po); Sanitaire : 187 mm (7,4 po)/22 mm
(0,875 po) ATTENTION
Composants Matriaux rsistant la corrosion, totalement Indique une situation potentiellement dangereuse qui peut entraner des blessures
immergeable mineures ou modres.
Profondeur/pression Maximum 107 m (350 pi)/1050 kPa (100 psi) AVIS
d'immersion
Indique une situation qui, si elle n'est pas vite, peut provoquer des dommages
Limite de pression 6,9 bars 100 C (100 psi 212 F) l'appareil. Informations ncessitant une mise en avant particulire.
Dbit maximal 2 m/s (6,6 pi/s) tiquettes de mise en garde
Lire toutes les informations et toutes les tiquettes apposs sur lappareil.
Gnralits Des personnes peuvent se blesser et le matriel peut tre endommag si
ces instructions ne sont pas respectes. Un symbole sur l'instrument est
En aucun cas le constructeur ne saurait tre responsable des dommages dsign dans le manuel avec une instruction de mise en garde.
directs, indirects, spciaux, accessoires ou conscutifs rsultant d'un
dfaut ou d'une omission dans ce manuel. Le constructeur se rserve le Lorsque ce symbole est prsent sur linstrument, reportez-vous au
droit d'apporter des modifications ce manuel et aux produits dcrits manuel dinstructions pour obtenir des informations relatives au
tout moment, sans avertissement ni obligation. Les ditions rvises se fonctionnement et/ou la scurit.
trouvent sur le site Internet du fabricant.
Consignes de scurit Si ce symbole se trouve sur lemballage d'un produit ou une barrire,
il indique la prsence dun danger de choc lectrique et/ou
Veuillez lire l'ensemble du manuel avant le dballage, la configuration ou dlectrocution.
la mise en fonctionnement de cet appareil. Respectez toutes les
dclarations de prudence et d'attention. Le non-respect de cette
procdure peut conduire des blessures graves de l'oprateur ou des
dgts sur le matriel.
18 Franais
Les composants lectroniques internes de l'appareil sont fragiles et Figure 1 Types de capteur
peuvent tre endommags par l'lectricit statique, qui risque d'altrer
ses performances et son fonctionnement.
Lquipement lectrique portant ce symbole ne peut tre mis au rebut

dans les systmes de mise au rebut publics europens aprs le 12 aot
2005. Conformment aux rglements nationaux et europens
(Directive 2002/98/EC), les appareils lectriques doivent, depuis le 12
aot 2005, ne pas tre mis au rebut dans les dcharges traditionnelles,
mais tre, la fin de leur service, renvoys par les utilisateurs
europens au fabricant, qui se chargera de les liminer ses frais.
Remarque : Pour le retour des fins de recyclage, veuillez contactez le fabricant
ou le fournisseur d'quipement pour obtenir les instructions sur la faon de
renvoyer l'quipement us, les accessoires lectriques fournis par le fabricant, et
tous les articles auxiliaires pour mise au rebut approprie.
Aperu gnral du produit

Ce capteur est conu pour fonctionner avec un contrleur assurant la
collecte de donnes et le fonctionnement. Il est possible d'utiliser plusieurs
contrleurs avec ce capteur. Ce document suppose une installation et une
utilisation du capteur avec un contrleur sc200. Pour utiliser le capteur
avec d'autres contrleurs, consulter le manuel d'utilisateur du contrleur
utilis.
Le capteur est disponible en diffrents types. Voir Figure 1.
1 Convertible, lectrode plane pour 3 Insertion autorise la dpose sans

un t de canalisation ou un rcipient arrter le dbit de processus
ouvert
2 Convertible, lectrode dme pour 4 Sanitaire pour installation dans un
un t de canalisation ou un rcipient t sanitaire de 2 pouces
ouvert
Installation
AVERTISSEMENT
Risque de blessures. Les oprations dcrites dans cette section du manuel ne
doivent tre effectues que par du personnel qualifi.
Franais 19
Installation Pour des exemples de capteurs dans diffrentes applications, consulter
Figure 2. Le capteur doit tre talonn avant usage. Rfrez-vous
AVERTISSEMENT talonnage du capteur la page 25.
Risque de blessures. Toujours prendre en compte les valeurs nominales de
pression et de temprature de la visserie de montage utilise pour installer le
capteur. Le matriau de la visserie limite le plus souvent les valeurs nominales de
pression et de temprature du systme.
Figure 2 Exemples de montage
1 Montage sanitaire 3 Montage en plein dbit

2 Immersion en extrmit de canalisation 4 Insertion de vanne bille
20 Franais
Branchement du capteur au module Tableau 2 Cblage de capteur combin pH et REDOX
AVERTISSEMENT Connecteur N de Signal Fil de capteur Capteurs 6

broche broches
Risque potentiel d'lectrocution. Toujours couper l'alimentation de
8 broches (J5) 1 Rfrence Tresse Tresse
l'appareil pendant les connexions lectriques.
mtallique mtallique
2 cran interne Bleu Jaune

AVERTISSEMENT
Risque d'lectrocution. Le cblage haute tension du contrleur est effectu 3
derrire l'cran de protection haute tension du botier du contrleur. L'cran de
protection doit rester en place, sauf lors de l'installation de modules ou l'installation 4
par un technicien qualifi du cblage d'alimentation, de relais, ou de cartes
5
analogiques et rseau.
6 Temp + Rouge Vert
AVIS
7 Temp / Blanc Blanc
Dgt potentiel sur l'instrument. Les composants lectroniques
circuit bas
internes de l'appareil sont fragiles et peuvent tre endommags par
l'lectricit statique, qui risque d'altrer ses performances et son 8
fonctionnement.
2 broches (J4) 1 Mesure Transparent Transparent
Pour mettre en place le module et brancher le capteur, consultez les
oprations illustres et Tableau 2. 2
Remarque : Certains capteurs combins n'ont pas de fil pour la mesure de Si le capteur combin ne possde pas de cble bleu (ou de cble jaune sur les
temprature. Si la tresse mtallique d'un capteur combin est tame, coupez la capteurs 6 broches) pour la masse liquide, installez un cble volant entre les
partie tame. broches 1 et 2 du connecteur 8 broches (J5).
Remarque : Si le cble du capteur n'est pas suffisamment long pour atteindre le
contrleur, un cble d'interconnexion et une bote de drivation sont indispensables
pour le rallonger.
Franais 21
1 2
3 4
22 Franais
5 6
7 8
Franais 23
Fonctionnement Options Descriptions
Rgles de fonctionnement N/S CAPTEUR Permet l'utilisateur d'entrer le numro de srie du

capteur, limit 16 caractres avec toutes
ATTENTION combinaisons de lettres, chiffres, espaces ou
ponctuations.
Risque de blessures. L'ampoule de verre ou le corps du capteur peut se briser.
Manipuler le capteur avec prcaution pour viter les blessures. FORMAT AFFICH. Pour les capteurs de pH seulement change le
nombre de dcimales affiches sur l'cran de mesure
Dposer le capuchon de protection avant de mettre le capteur dans le XX.XX (par dfaut) ou XX.X
fluide de processus.
UNIT. TEMPER. Rgle les units de temprature en C (par dfaut) ou
Quand le capteur est sorti du fluide de processus pendant > 1 heure, F
remplir le capuchon de protection de tampon pH 4 (recommand) ou
d'eau du robinet et reposer le capuchon sur le capteur. Rpter toutes TEMP ELEMENT Capteurs de pH dfinit la compensation
les 2 4 semaines en cas de stockage prolong. automatique de l'lment de temprature sur PT100,
PT1000 (par dfaut) ou NTC300. Si aucun lment
n'est utilis, le type peut tre dfini comme manuel et
Navigation utilisateur
une valeur de compensation de temprature peut tre
Consultez la documentation du transmetteur pour une description du saisie (manuel par dfaut : 25 C). Capteurs REDOX
clavier et des informations de navigation. la compensation en temprature n'est pas utilise.
Il est possible de connecter un lment de temprature
Configuration du capteur pour mesurer la temprature.
Utiliser le menu Configurer pour entrer les informations d'identification du FILTRE Dfinit une constante de temps pour augmenter la
capteur et modifier les options de gestion et stockage de donnes. La stabilit du signal. La constante de temps calcule la
procdure ci-dessous peut tre utilise pour configurer les capteurs de pH valeur moyenne pendant une dure spcifie 0
ou REDOX. (aucun effet, par dfaut) 60 secondes (moyenne de
la valeur du signal sur 60 secondes). Le filtre
1. Appuyer sur la touche MENU et slectionner Progr capteur, augmente le temps de rponse du signal du capteur
[Slectionner le capteur], Configurer. aux variations effectives du processus.
2. Utiliser les touches flches pour slectionner une option et appuyer COMP H2O PURE Pour les capteurs de pH seulement ajoute une
sur ENTER. Pour entrer des nombres, lettres ou ponctuations, correction dpendant de la temprature la valeur de
maintenir enfonces les touches flches HAUT ou BAS. Appuyer sur pH mesure pour de l'eau pure avec des additifs
Aucun (par dfaut), Ammoniaque, Morpholine ou
la touche flche DROITE pour avancer l'espace suivant. Dfini par l'utilisateur. Pour les tempratures de
processus au-dessus de 50 C, c'est la correction 50
Options Descriptions
C qui est utilise. Pour les applications dfinies par
EDITER NOM Modifie le nom correspondant au capteur en haut de l'utilisateur, il est possible de dfinir une pente linaire
l'cran de mesure. Le nom est limit 10 caractres (par dfaut : 0 pH/C).
avec une combinaison quelconque de lettres, chiffres,
espaces ou ponctuation.
24 Franais
Options Descriptions Figure 3 Capteur dans la solution de rfrence
LOG SETUP Dfinit l'intervalle de stockage des donnes dans le
(PARAMTRAGE journal 5, 30 secondes, 1, 2, 5, 10, 15 (par dfaut),
DU JOURNAL) 30, 60 minutes.
RTABLIR Rtablit le menu de configuration aux paramtres par

DFAUTS dfaut. Toutes les informations de capteur sont
perdues.
talonnage du capteur
propos de l'talonnage de capteur

L'talonnage rgle la valeur lue par le capteur pour la faire correspondre
la valeur d'une ou plusieurs solutions de rfrence. Les caractristiques
du capteur drivent lentement au cours du temps et peuvent entraner une 2. Attendre l'galisation des tempratures du capteur et de la solution.
inexactitude du capteur. Le capteur doit tre talonn rgulirement pour Ceci peut prendre 30 minutes ou plus si la diffrence de temprature
conserver son exactitude. La frquence d'talonnage dpend de entre la solution de processus et celle de rfrence est importante.
l'application et le mieux est de la dterminer par l'exprience.
3. Appuyer sur la touche MENU et slectionner Progr capteur,
Un lment de temprature permet de fournir des valeurs de pH ajustes [Slectionner le capteur], talonner.
automatiquement 25 C en fonction des variations de temprature
pouvant affecter l'lectrode active et celle de rfrence. Ce rglage peut 4. Slectionnez le type d'talonnage.
tre fait manuellement par le client si la temprature de processus est Options Descriptions
constante.
Tampon 2 points Utilisez 2 tampons pour l'talonnage, par exemple pH 7 et
Pendant l'talonnage, les donnes ne sont pas envoyes dans le journal.
pH 4 (mthode recommande). Les tampons doivent
Le journal de donnes peut donc comporter des zones o les donnes provenir d'un jeu de tampons indiqu dans le menu
sont intermittentes. Options tal (voir Modification des options d'talonnage
la page 28).
Procdure d'talonnage de pH
Tampon 1 point Utilisez 1 tampon pour l'talonnage, par exemple pH 7. Le
Les capteurs peuvent tre talonns avec 1 ou 2 solutions de rfrence
tampon doit provenir d'un jeu de tampons indiqu dans le
(talonnage en 1 point ou en 2 points). Les tampons standard sont menu Options tal.
reconnus automatiquement. Assurez-vous d'utiliser le jeu de tampons
correct (consulter Modification des options d'talonnage la page 28). chantillon 2 Utiliser 2 chantillons ou tampons de valeur de pH connue
points pour l'talonnage. Dterminez la valeur de pH des
1. Placer le capteur dans la premire solution de rfrence. S'assurer chantillons avec un autre instrument.
que la partie capteur de la sonde est totalement immerge dans le chantillon 1 Utiliser 1 chantillon ou tampon pour l'talonnage.
liquide (Figure 3). point Dterminez la valeur de pH des chantillons avec un autre
instrument.
Franais 25
5. Si le mot de passe est activ dans le menu de scurit du transmetteur, 11. Consultez le rsultat d'talonnage :
entrez le mot de passe.
Russi le capteur est talonn et prt mesurer des chantillons.
6. Slectionnez l'option de sortie du signal pendant l'talonnage : Les valeurs de pente et/ou de dcalage sont indiques.
Echec la pente ou le dcalage d'talonnage est en dehors des
Actif L'instrument envoie la valeur de sortie mesure pendant la limites acceptes. Rpter l'talonnage avec des solutions de
procdure d'talonnage. rfrence neuves. Consulter Maintenance la page 29 et
Dpannage la page 30 pour plus d'informations.
Maintien La valeur de sortie du capteur est maintenue la valeur en cours
mesure pendant la procdure d'talonnage. 12. En cas de russite de l'talonnage, appuyez sur ENTER pour
continuer.
Transfert Une valeur de sortie prdfinie est envoye pendant l'talonnage.
Consultez le manuel d'utilisation du transmetteur pour changer la 13. Si l'option de l'ID oprateur est dfinie sur Yes (Oui) dans le menu
valeur prdfinie. Options tal, entrez un ID d'oprateur. Rfrez-vous Modification
des options d'talonnage la page 28.
7. Avec le capteur dans la premire solution de rfrence, appuyer sur
14. Sur l'cran Nouveau capteur, indiquez si le capteur est neuf :
ENTER.
La valeur mesure apparat. Options Descriptions
8. Attendre que la valeur se stabilise et appuyer sur ENTER.
Oui Le capteur n'a pas t talonn prcdemment avec ce contrleur.
Remarque : L'cran peut passer automatiquement l'tape suivante. Le nombre de jours de fonctionnement et les courbes d'talonnage
9. Si la solution de rfrence est un chantillon, mesurer la valeur de pH prcdentes pour le capteur sont remis zro.
avec un deuxime instrument de vrification. Utilisez les touches Non Le capteur a t talonn prcdemment avec ce contrleur.
flches pour entrer la valeur mesure et appuyez sur ENTER.
Remarque : En cas d'utilisation d'un tampon de pH non indiqu dans le menu 15. Ramenez le capteur dans le fluide de processus et appuyez sur
Options tal, consulter le flacon du tampon pour connatre la valeur de pH ENTER.
correspondant la temprature du tampon. Le signal de sortie revient dans l'tat actif et la valeur d'chantillon
10. Pour un talonnage en 2 points, mesurer la deuxime solution de mesure apparat sur l'cran de mesure.
Remarque : Si le mode de sortie est sur maintien ou transfert, slectionnez la
rfrence (ou chantillon) :
temporisation lors du retour des sorties l'tat actif.
a. Sortir le capteur de la premire solution et le rincer l'eau propre.
b. Placer le capteur dans la solution de rfrence suivante et appuyer Procdure d'talonnage REDOX
sur ENTER. Les capteurs peuvent tre talonns avec une solution de rfrence
REDOX ou avec l'chantillon de processus.
c. Attendez la stabilisation de la valeur. Appuyer sur ENTER.
Remarque : L'cran peut passer automatiquement l'tape suivante. 1. Placer le capteur dans la solution de rfrence. S'assurer que la partie
d. Si la solution de rfrence est un chantillon, mesurer la valeur de capteur de la sonde est totalement immerge dans la solution
pH avec un deuxime instrument de vrification. Utilisez les (Figure 4).
touches flches pour entrer la valeur mesure et appuyez sur
ENTER.
26 Franais
Figure 4 Capteur dans la solution de rfrence 8. Si l'chantillon de processus est utilis pour l'talonnage, mesurer la
valeur de potentiel REDOX avec un instrument de vrification
secondaire. Utiliser les touches flches pour entrer la valeur et
appuyer sur ENTER.
9. Consultez le rsultat d'talonnage :
Russi le capteur est talonn et prt mesurer des chantillons.

Les valeurs de pente et/ou de dcalage sont indiques.
Echec la pente ou le dcalage d'talonnage est en dehors des

limites acceptes. Rpter l'talonnage avec des solutions de
rfrence neuves. Consulter Maintenance la page 29 et
Dpannage la page 30 pour plus d'informations.
10. En cas de russite de l'talonnage, appuyez sur ENTER pour
continuer.
[Slectionner le capteur], talonner. 11. Si l'option de l'ID oprateur est dfinie sur Yes (Oui) dans le menu
Options tal, entrez un ID d'oprateur. Rfrez-vous Modification
3. Appuyer sur ENTER pour slectionner l'talonnage d'chantillon en 1
des options d'talonnage la page 28.
point.
12. Sur l'cran Nouveau capteur, indiquez si le capteur est neuf :
4. Si le mot de passe est activ dans le menu de scurit du transmetteur,
entrez le mot de passe. Options Descriptions
5. Slectionnez l'option de sortie du signal pendant l'talonnage :
Oui Le capteur n'a pas t talonn prcdemment avec ce contrleur.
Options Descriptions Le nombre de jours de fonctionnement et les courbes d'talonnage
prcdentes pour le capteur sont remis zro.
Actif L'instrument envoie la valeur de sortie mesure pendant la
procdure d'talonnage. Non Le capteur a t talonn prcdemment avec ce contrleur.
Maintien La valeur de sortie du capteur est maintenue la valeur en cours 13. Ramenez le capteur dans le fluide de processus et appuyez sur
mesure pendant la procdure d'talonnage. ENTER.
Le signal de sortie revient dans l'tat actif et la valeur d'chantillon
Transfert Une valeur de sortie prdfinie est envoye pendant l'talonnage. mesure apparat sur l'cran de mesure.
Consultez le manuel d'utilisation du transmetteur pour changer la Remarque : Si le mode de sortie est sur maintien ou transfert, slectionnez la
valeur prdfinie. temporisation lors du retour des sorties l'tat actif.
6. Avec le capteur dans la solution de rfrence ou l'chantillon, appuyer
sur ENTER. Etalonnage en temprature
La valeur mesure apparat. L'instrument est talonn en usine pour une mesure de temprature
prcise. La temprature peut tre talonne pour augmenter la prcision.
7. Attendre que la valeur se stabilise et appuyer sur ENTER.
Remarque : L'cran peut passer automatiquement l'tape suivante.
Franais 27
1. Placer le capteur dans un rcipient d'eau de temprature connue. 1. Appuyer sur la touche MENU et slectionner Prog capteur,
Mesurer la temprateur de l'eau avec un thermomtre ou un [Slectionner le capteur], Etalonner, Options ta.
instrument indpendant prcis. 2. Utiliser les touches flches pour slectionner une option et appuyer
2. Appuyer sur la touche MENU et slectionner Progr capteur, sur ENTER.
[Slectionner le capteur], talonner.
3. Slectionner tal Temp 1 PT et appuyer sur ENTER.
4. Attendre que la valeur se stabilise et appuyer sur ENTER. SELECT Pour les capteurs de pH seulement modifier le jeu de
BUFFER solutions tampon reconnues pour l'talonnage pH 4,00,
5. Entrer la valeur exacte et appuyer sur ENTER. (slection du 7,00, 10,00 (jeu par dfaut) ou DIN 19267 (pH 1,09, 4,65,
6. Ramenez le capteur dans le fluide de processus et appuyez sur tampon) 6,79, 9,23, 12,75)
Remarque : Il est possible d'utiliser d'autres tampons si
ENTER.
l'option d'chantillon 1 point ou d'chantillon 2 points est
slectionne pendant l'talonnage.
Sortie de la procdure d'talonnage
En cas d'appui sur la touche BACK pendant un talonnage, l'utilisateur RAPPEL TAL Dfinit un rappel pour le prochain talonnage en jours mois
peut quitter l'talonnage. ou annes Aucun (par dfaut), 1 jour, 7, 30, 60, ou 90
jours, 6 ou 9 mois, 1 ou 2 ans
1. Appuyez sur la touche BACK pendant un talonnage. Trois options ID OP sur ETA Inclut un ID d'oprateur avec les donnes d'talonnage
apparaissent : Oui ou Non (par dfaut). L'identifiant est saisi pendant
l'talonnage.
QUI. TAL Arrte l'talonnage. Un nouvel talonnage devra repartir du Rinitialisation des options d'talonnage
dbut. Il est possible de rinitialiser les options d'talonnage aux valeurs par
dfaut d'usine.
RETOUR Revient l'talonnage.
ETALON.
QUI. ETAL Quitte temporairement l'talonnage. L'accs aux autres [Slectionner le capteur], Etalonner, Rtablir tal dfaut.
menus est autoris. Il est possible de dmarrer un
talonnage pour un deuxime capteur (le cas chant). 2. Si le mot de passe est activ dans le menu de scurit du transmetteur,
Pour revenir l'talonnage, appuyez sur la touche entrez le mot de passe.
MENU et slectionnez Progr capteur, [Slectionner le 3. Appuyer sur ENTER. L'cran Rtablir tal? apparat.
capteur].
4. Appuyer sur ENTER. Toutes les options d'talonnage sont ramenes
2. Utilisez les touches flches pour slectionner une des options et leurs valeurs par dfaut.
appuyez sur ENTER. 5. Si l'option de l'ID oprateur est dfinie sur Yes (Oui) dans le menu
Options tal, entrez un ID d'oprateur. Rfrez-vous Modification
Modification des options d'talonnage des options d'talonnage la page 28.
L'utilisateur peut dfinir un rappel ou inclure un ID d'oprateur avec les
donnes d'talonnage depuis le menu OPTIONS ETA.
28 Franais
6. Sur l'cran Nouveau capteur, indiquez si le capteur est neuf : Maintenance
Options Descriptions AVERTISSEMENT
Oui Le capteur n'a pas t talonn prcdemment avec ce contrleur. Risque de blessures. Les oprations dcrites dans cette section du manuel ne
Le nombre de jours de fonctionnement et les courbes d'talonnage doivent tre effectues que par du personnel qualifi.
prcdentes pour le capteur sont remis zro.
chancier de maintenance
Non Le capteur a t talonn prcdemment avec ce contrleur.
Le programme d'entretien indique les dures minimales des oprations
7. Appuyer sur la touche BACK pour revenir l'cran de mesure. d'entretien. Effectuer les oprations d'entretien plus frquemment avec
des applications entranant une contamination de l'lectrode.
Mesures d'impdance
Afin d'amliorer la fiabilit du systme de mesure du pH, le transmetteur Tche de maintenance 90 jours
dtermine l'impdance des lectrodes de verre. Cette mesure est Nettoyage du capteur X
effectue toutes les minutes. Durant le diagnostic, la mesure du pH est en
mode de maintien pendant cinq secondes. Si un message d'erreur Recherche de dgts sur le capteur X
apparat, reportez-vous Liste derreurs la page 31 pour de plus
talonnage du capteur Dfini par les organismes notifis ou par
amples dtails. l'exprience
Pour activer/dsactiver la mesure de l'impdance du capteur :
1. Appuyez sur la touche MENU, puis slectionnez Sensor Setup Nettoyage du capteur
(Configuration capteur). AVERTISSEMENT
2. Slectionnez Diag/test (Diagnostic/test) et appuyez sur ENTER Danger chimique. Toujours porter des quipements de protection individuelle
(Entre). selon les recommandations de la fiche technique de scurit du matriau
3. Slectionnez Imped Status (Etat impd.) et appuyez sur ENTER correspondant au produit chimique utilis.
(Entre).
AVERTISSEMENT
4. Slectionnez Enable/Disable (Activer/Dsactiver) et appuyez sur
ENTER (Entre). Risque de blessures. Le retrait d'un capteur d'une enceinte pressurise peut tre
dangereux. Rduisez la pression moins de 10 bars avant de procder au retrait.
Si cela n'est pas possible, faites trs attention. Reportez-vous la documentation
Registres Modbus fournie avec le matriel de montage pour plus d'informations.
Une liste de registres Modbus est disponible pour la communication
Prrequis : Prparer une solution savonneuse douce avec un dtergent
rseau. Consulter www.hach.com ou www.hach-lange.com pour plus
pour vaisselle non abrasif ne contenant pas de lanoline. La lanoline laisse
d'informations.
un film sur la surface de l'lectrode qui peut dgrader les performances
du capteur.
Contrler rgulirement le capteur pour y dtecter les dbris et dpts.
Nettoyer le capteur en cas d'accumulation de dpts ou de dgradation
des performances.
Franais 29
1. Utiliser un chiffon doux et propre pour liminer les dbris faciles temprature. La rsistance doit tre entre comprise entre 1090 et 1105
dcoller de l'extrmit du capteur. Rincer le capteur l'eau propre et ohms environ 25 C.
tide. Si l'lment de temprature est bon, rebrancher les fils sur le module.
2. Laisser tremper le capteur 2 3 minutes dans une solution de savon. 4. Appuyer sur la touche MENU et slectionner Progr capteur,
3. Utiliser une brosse poils doux pour frotter la totalit de l'extrmit de [Slectionner le capteur], Diag/Test, Signaux capteur. La valeur lue
mesure du capteur. . doit tre comprise entre 50 et +50 mV.
4. S'il reste des dbris, laisser tremper l'extrmit du capteur dans une 5. Rincer le capteur l'eau et le placer dans une solution tampon de pH
solution d'acide dilu telle que <5% HCl pendant 5 minutes au 4 ou pH 10. Attendre que le capteur et le tampon atteignent la
maximum. temprature ambiante.
5. Rincer le capteur l'eau puis le ramener dans la solution de savon 6. Comparer les valeurs en mV lues dans le tampon pH 4 ou pH 10 la
pendant 2 3 minutes. valeur lue dans le tampon pH 7. La valeur lue doit tre diffrente
d'environ 160 mV.
6. Rincer le capteur leau propre. Si la diffrence est infrieure 160 mV, appeler le support technique.
Remarque : Les capteurs avec lectrodes d'antimoine pour application HF
peuvent imposer un nettoyage supplmentaire. Contactez lassistance Menu de diagnostic et test du capteur
technique.
Le menu de diagnostic et test du capteur affiche des informations actuelles
Toujours talonner le capteur aprs les procdures de maintenance. et historiques sur l'instrument. Rfrez-vous Tableau 3. Pour accder
au menu de diagnostic et test du capteur, appuyer sur la touche MENU et
slectionner Progr. capteur, [Slectionner le capteur], DIAG/TEST.
Dpannage
Tableau 3 Menu DIAG/TEST du capteur
Donnes intermittentes
Pendant l'talonnage, les donnes ne sont pas envoyes dans le journal.
Le journal de donnes peut donc comporter des zones o les donnes INFORMATIONS MODULE Affiche le nom et le numro de srie du module
sont intermittentes. capteur.
Test du capteur de pH INFORMATIONS Affiche le nom et le numro de srie saisis par

CAPTEUR l'utilisateur.
Prrequis : Deux tampons de pH et un multimtre.
En cas d'chec d'talonnage, commencer par effectuer les oprations JOURS TAL Affiche le nombre de jours depuis le dernier
d'entretien dcrites dans Maintenance la page 29. talonnage.
HISTORIQUE CAL Affiche une liste et des dtails de chaque

1. Placer le capteur dans une solution tampon de pH 7 et attendre que le talonnage.
capteur et le tampon atteignent la temprature ambiante.
2. Dbrancher les fils rouge (ou vert pour les capteurs 6 broches) et SUPPR HISTORIQUE Supprime l'historique d'talonnage du capteur
TAL (impose un mot de passe de niveau service). Toutes
blanc du module.
les donnes d'talonnage prcdentes sont
3. Mesurer la rsistance entre les fils rouge (ou vert pour les capteurs perdues.
6 broches) et blanc pour vrifier le fonctionnement de l'lment de
SIGNAUX CAPTEUR Affiche la valeur lue actuelle en mV.
30 Franais
Tableau 3 Menu DIAG/TEST du capteur (suite) Tableau 4 Liste des erreurs pour les capteurs de pH et REDOX (suite)
Options Descriptions Erreur Descriptions Rsolution
JOURS CAPTEUR Affiche le nombre de jours de fonctionnement du PENTE TROP La pente est < 50 (pH)/0,7 Nettoyer le capteur, rpter
capteur. BASSE (ORP) l'talonnage ou remplacer le
capteur.
RINIT JOURS CAPTEUR Remet zro le nombre de jours de fonctionnement
du capteur. TEMP TROP La temprature mesure est S'assurer que l'lment de
HAUTE > 130 C temprature slectionn est
correct.
Liste derreurs TEMP TROP La temprature mesure est
BASSE < 10 C
Des erreurs peuvent survenir pour diverses raisons. La valeur de mesure
lue l'cran clignote. Toutes les sorties sont maintenues quand c'est DFAUT ADC La conversion analogique- teindre et rallumer le
spcifi dans le menu du contrleur. Pour afficher les erreurs du capteur, numrique a chou contrleur. Appelez
appuyer sur la touche MENU puis slectionner Diagn. capteur, l'assistance technique.
[Slectionner le capteur], Liste erreurs. Une liste des erreurs possibles
MME TAMPON Les tampons pour Procder comme indiqu
apparat dans Tableau 4.
l'talonnage par tampon en dans Test du capteur de pH
Tableau 4 Liste des erreurs pour les capteurs de pH et REDOX 2 points ont la mme valeur la page 30.
Erreur Descriptions Rsolution CAPTEUR Le capteur est manquant ou Contrlez le cblage et les
MANQUANT dbranch connexions du capteur et du
PH TROP HAUT Le pH mesur est > 14 talonner ou remplacer le module.
capteur.
ORP TROP HAUT La valeur de potentiel TEMP Le capteur de temprature Contrler le cblage du
REDOX mesure est > 2100 MANQUANTE est manquant capteur de temprature.
mV S'assurer que l'lment de
temprature slectionn est
PH TROP BAS Le pH mesur est < 0 talonner ou remplacer le correct.
capteur.
ORP TROP BAS La valeur de potentiel GLASS IMP LOW L'ampoule de verre est Remplacez le capteur.
REDOX mesure est < (IMP VERRE BAS) casse ou en fin de vie Appelez l'assistance
2100 mV technique.
DCALAGE TROP Le dcalage est > 9 (pH) ou Suivre les procdures
HAUT 200 mV (ORP) d'entretien pour le capteur Liste d'avertissements des capteurs
puis rpter l'talonnage, ou
DCALAGE TROP Le dcalage est < 5 (pH) ou remplacer le capteur. Un avertissement n'affecte pas le fonctionnement des menus, relais et
BAS 200 mV (ORP) sorties. Une icne d'avertissement clignote et un message apparat en bas
de l'cran de mesure. Pour afficher les avertissements de capteur,
PENTE TROP La pente est > 62 (pH)/1,3 Rpter l'talonnage avec appuyer sur la touche MENU puis slectionner Diagn. capteur,
HAUTE (ORP) un tampon ou un chantillon
neuf, ou remplacer le
[Slectionner le capteur], Liste avertis. Une liste d'avertissements
capteur. possibles apparat dans Tableau 5.
Franais 31
Tableau 5 Liste d'avertissements pour les capteurs analogiques de Tableau 5 Liste d'avertissements pour les capteurs analogiques de
pH et REDOX pH et REDOX (suite)
Avertissement Descriptions Rsolution Avertissement Descriptions Rsolution
PH TROP HAUT Le pH mesur est > 13 talonner ou remplacer CHEC FLASH Panne de la mmoire flash Contactez lassistance
le capteur. externe technique.
ORP TROP HAUT La valeur de potentiel REDOX
mesure est > 2100 mV TAL EN COURS Un talonnage a t Revenir l'talonnage.
commenc mais n'a pas t
PH TROP BAS Le pH mesur est < 1 talonner ou remplacer achev
le capteur.
ORP TROP BAS La valeur de potentiel REDOX
mesure est < 2100 mV Liste d'vnements pour les capteurs
DCALAGE TROP Le dcalage est > 8 (pH) ou Suivre les procdures La liste d'vnements affiche les activits en cours telles que modification
HAUT 200 mV (ORP) d'entretien pour le de configuration, alarmes, avertissements, etc. Pour afficher les
capteur puis rpter vnements, appuyer sur la touche MENU puis slectionner Diagn.
DCALAGE TROP Le dcalage est < 6 (pH) ou l'talonnage. capteur, [Slectionner le capteur], Liste d'vnements. Une liste des
BAS 200 mV (ORP)
vnements possibles apparat dans Tableau 6. Les vnements
PENTE TROP HAUTE La pente est > 60 (pH)/1,3 Rpter l'talonnage prcdents sont enregistrs dans le journal d'vnements, qui peut tre
(ORP) avec un tampon ou un tlcharg depuis le contrleur.
chantillon neuf.
Tableau 6 Liste d'vnements pour les capteurs de pH et REDOX
PENTE TROP BASSE La pente est < 54 (pH)/0,7 Nettoyer le capteur, puis
(ORP) rpter l'talonnage. Evnement Descriptions
TEMP TROP HAUTE La temprature mesure est > S'assurer que l'lment ETAL PRT Le capteur est prt pour l'talonnage.
100 C de temprature utilis est
ETA OK L'talonnage en cours est correct
correct.
TEMP TROP BASSE La temprature mesure est <
TEMPS COUL Le temps de stabilisation pendant l'talonnage est
0 C
coul
RETARD TAL Le dlai de rappel Etalonnez le capteur.
PAS TAMP Aucun tampon n'est dtect
d'talonnage est coul
PENTE HAUTE La pente d'talonnage est au-dessus de la limite
REMPL. CAPTEUR Le capteur a fonctionn > 365 Remplacez le capteur.
suprieure
jours
PENTE BASSE La pente d'talonnage est en dessous de la limite
NON TALONN Le capteur n'a pas t Etalonnez le capteur.
infrieure
talonn.
DCALAGE HAUT La valeur de dcalage d'talonnage du capteur est
au-dessus de la limite suprieure.
DCALAGE BAS La valeur de dcalage d'talonnage du capteur est

en dessous de la limite infrieure.
32 Franais
Tableau 6 Liste d'vnements pour les capteurs de pH et REDOX Tableau 6 Liste d'vnements pour les capteurs de pH et REDOX
(suite) (suite)
Evnement Descriptions Evnement Descriptions
PTS FERMS Les points d'talonnage sont trop comparables en FIN AUTO 1PT Fin d'un talonnage de pH de tampon en 1 point
valeur pour un talonnage en 2 points
FIN MANUEL 2PT Fin d'un talonnage de pH d'chantillon en 2 points
CHEC TAL L'talonnage a chou
FIN AUTO 2PT Fin d'un talonnage de pH de tampon en 2 points
TAL HAUT La valeur d'talonnage est au-dessus de la limite
suprieure
Pices et accessoires de rechange
INSTABLE La valeur lue pendant l'talonnage tait instable
Remarque : Les numros de rfrence de produit et d'article peuvent dpendre des
MODIF CONFIG FLOTTANT La configuration a t modifie type en virgule rgions de commercialisation. Prenez contact avec le distributeur appropri ou
flottante consultez le site web de la socit pour connatre les personnes contacter.
MODIF CONFIG TEXTE La configuration a t modifie type texte
Descriptions Quantit Article No.
MODIF CONFIG ENTIER La configuration a t modifie valeur de type
entier Solution tampon, pH 4 500 ml 2283449
VAL DFAUT La configuration a t rinitialise aux options par Solution tampon, pH 7 500 ml 2283549
dfaut
Solution tampon, pH 10 500 ml 2283649
INFO ALIMENTAT L'alimentation a t active
Solution de rfrence REDOX, 200 mV 500 ml 25M2A1001-115
DFAUT ADC La conversion analogique-numrique a chou
(panne matrielle) Solution de rfrence REDOX, 600 mV 500 ml 25M2A1002-115
FLASH ERASE La mmoire a t efface
TEMPRATURE La temprature enregistre est trop haute ou trop

basse
DBUT MANUEL 1PT Dpart d'un talonnage d'chantillon 1 point
DBUT AUTO 1PT Dpart d'un talonnage de pH de tampon en 1

point
DBUT MANUEL 2PT Dpart d'un talonnage de pH d'chantillon en 2

points
DBUT AUTO 2PT Dpart d'un talonnage de pH de tampon en 2

points
FIN MANUEL 1PT Fin d'un talonnage d'chantillon en 1 point
Franais 33
Especificaciones Utilizacin de la informacin sobre riesgos
Las especificaciones estn sujetas a cambios sin previo aviso. PELIGRO
Tabla 1 Especificaciones del sensor Indica una situacin potencial o de riesgo inminente que, de no evitarse, provocar
la muerte o lesiones graves.
Especificacin Detalles
Temperatura de 0 a 105 C (32 a 221 F)

ADVERTENCIA
funcionamiento Indica una situacin potencial o inminentemente peligrosa que, de no evitarse,
podra provocar la muerte o lesiones graves.
Cable del sensor 4.6 m (15 pies)
Dimensiones (largo/dimetro) Convertible: 150 mm (5.9 pulg.)/33 mm (1.3 pulg.),

PRECAUCIN
-pulg. NPT; Insercin: 150 mm (5.9 pulg.)/22 mm Indica una situacin potencialmente peligrosa que podra causar un accidente o
(0.875 pulg.); Sanitario: 187 mm (7.4 pulg.)/22 mm dao menor.
(0.875 pulg.)
AVISO
Componentes Materiales resistentes a la corrosin, totalmente
sumergibles Indica una situacin que, si no se evita, puede provocar daos al instrumento.
Informacin que requiere nfasis especial.
Profundidad/presin de Mximo 107 m (350 pies)/1050 kPa (100 psi)
inmersin Etiquetas de precaucin
Lmite de presin 6.9 bar a 100 C (100 psi a 212 F) Lea todas las etiquetas y rtulos adheridos al instrumento. En caso
contrario, podran producirse heridas personales o daos en el
Medida mxima del caudal 2 m/s (6.6 pies/s) instrumento. Cada smbolo en el instrumento se indica en el manual con
una explicacin de advertencia.
Informacin general Este smbolo (en caso de estar colocado en el equipo) refiere a las
En ningn caso el fabricante ser responsable de ningn dao directo, instrucciones de operacin o bien la informacin de seguridad.
indirecto, especial, accidental o resultante de un defecto u omisin en este
manual. El fabricante se reserva el derecho a modificar este manual y los
productos que describen en cualquier momento, sin aviso ni obligacin. Este smbolo, cuando est en la caja o barrera de un producto, indica
Las ediciones revisadas se encuentran en el sitio Web del fabricante. que hay riesgo de descarga elctrica o electrocucin.
Informacin de seguridad
Lea todo el manual antes de desembalar, instalar o trabajar con este
equipo. Ponga atencin a todas las advertencias y avisos de peligro. El
no hacerlo puede provocar heridas graves al usuario o daos al equipo.
Para garantizar que no disminuya la proteccin que ofrece este producto,
no use o instale el equipo de manera diferente a la especificada en este
manual.
34 Espaol
Los delicados componentes electrnicos internos pueden sufrir daos Figura 1 Estilos de sensores
debido a la electricidad esttica, lo que acarrea una disminucin del
rendimiento del instrumento y posibles fallas.
El equipo elctrico marcado con este smbolo no se podr desechar

por medio de los sistemas europeos pblicos de eliminacin despus
del 12 de agosto de 2005. En cumplimiento de las reglamentaciones
nacionales y locales (directiva europea 2002/98/CE), los usuarios de
equipos elctricos deben devolver los equipos viejos o los que han
alcanzado el trmino de su vida til al fabricante para su eliminacin
gratuita.
Nota: Para devolver los equipos para reciclaje, comunquese con el fabricante o
distribuidor para obtener instrucciones acerca de cmo devolver equipos que han
alcanzado el trmino de su vida til, accesorios elctricos suministrados por el
fabricante y todo elemento auxiliar, para su eliminacin.
Generalidades del producto

Este sensor est diseado para trabajar con un controlador para la
recoleccin de datos y operacin. Con este sensor se pueden utilizar
varios controladores. Este documento da por sentado que el sensor tiene
instalado y utiliza un controlador sc200. Para utilizar el sensor con otros
controladores, consulte el manual del usuario del controlador que est
utilizando.
El sensor se encuentra disponible en estilos diferentes. Consulte la
Figura 1.
1 Electrodo plano, convertible: para un 3 De insercin: permite ser sacado sin
conector en T de tubos o un detener el flujo del proceso
recipiente abierto
2 Electrodo abovedado, convertible: 4 Sanitario: para ser instalado en un
para un conector en T de tubos o un conector en T sanitario de 2"
recipiente abierto
Instalacin
ADVERTENCIA
Peligro de lesin personal. Las tareas descritas en esta seccin del manual deben
ser realizadas slo por personal cualificado.
Espaol 35
Montaje Para ejemplos de sensores en diferentes aplicaciones, consulte la
Figura 2. Es necesario calibrar el sensor antes de utilizarlo. Consulte la
ADVERTENCIA Calibrar el sensor en la pgina 41.
Peligro de lesin personal. Tenga siempre en cuenta el ndice de temperatura y
presin del hardware de montaje utilizado para instalar el sensor. El material del
hardware generalmente limitan la temperatura y la presin del sistema.
Figura 2 Ejemplos de montaje
1 Montaje sanitario 3 Montaje de flujo directo

2 Extremo de la inmersin del tubo 4 Insercin de vlvula esfrica
36 Espaol
Conecte el sensor al mdulo Tabla 2 Cableado de sensor de combinacin de pH y ORP
ADVERTENCIA Conector Nro. de Seal Cable del Sensores de 6

pin sensor clavijas
Posible peligro de electrocucin. Desconecte siempre el suministro
8 pines (J5) 1 Referencia Trenzado Trenzado
elctrico al instrumento antes de realizar conexiones elctricas.
metlico metlico
2 Blindaje Azul Amarillo

ADVERTENCIA interno
Peligro de electrocucin. El cableado de alto voltaje para el controlador se realiza
detrs de la barrera de alto voltaje en la carcasa del controlador. La barrera debe 3
permanecer en su lugar excepto durante la instalacin de mdulos o cuando un
tcnico de instalacin cualificado est realizando el cableado de alimentacin, 4
rels o tarjetas anlogas y de redes.
5
AVISO 6 Temp + Rojo Verde
Dao potencial al instrumento. Los delicados componentes
7 Temp / Blanco Blanco
electrnicos internos pueden sufrir daos debido a la electricidad
Circuito bajo
esttica, lo que acarrea una disminucin del rendimiento del
instrumento y posibles fallas. 8
Para instalar el mdulo y conectar el sensor, consulte los pasos ilustrados 2 pines (J4) 1 Activo Transparente Transparente
y Tabla 2.
2
Nota: Algunos sensores de combinacin no tienen cables para la medicin de
temperatura. Si el trenzado metlico de un sensor de combinacin est estaada, Si el sensor de combinacin no tiene cable azul (o cable amarillo en el caso de
corte el rea estaada sensores de 6 clavijas) para solucin de tierra, instale un cable de puente entre
Nota: Si el cable del sensor no es lo suficientemente largo como para llegar al los pines 1 y 2 del conector de 8 pines (J5).
controlador, se necesita un cable de interconexin y una caja de conexin para
extender la distancia. .
Espaol 37
1 2
3 4
38 Espaol
5 6
7 8
Espaol 39
Operacin Opcin Descripcin
Lineamientos para el manejo N Permite al usuario ingresar el nmero de serie del sensor,
SECUENCIAL limitado a 16 caracteres en cualquier combinacin de
PRECAUCIN DEL SENSOR letras, nmeros, espacios o signos de puntuacin.
Peligro de lesin personal. La bombilla o extremo de vidrio del sensor se puede FORMATO DE Para los sensores de pH solamente: cambia la cantidad de
romper. Manipule el sensor con cuidado para evitar lesiones. PANTALLA posiciones decimales que se pueden ver en la pantalla de
medicin de XX,XX (configuracin predeterminada) o
Saque la tapa protectora del sensor antes de ponerlo en XX,X
funcionamiento.
UNIDADES DE Configura las unidades de temperatura en C
Cuando saque el sensor del proceso por ms de 1 hora, llene la tapa TEMP (configuracin predeterminada) o F.
protectora con un buffer de pH 4 (recomendado) o agua de canilla y
colquela. Repita cada 2-4 semanas cuando el sensor quede ELEMENTO Sensores de pH: configura el elemento de temperatura
almacenado por mucho tiempo. TEMP para la compensacin automtica de la temperatura en
PT100, PT1000 (configuracin predeterminada) o
NTC300. En caso de no utilizar ningn elemento, el tipo se
Desplazamiento del usuario
puede configurar en manual y se puede ingresar un valor
Consulte la documentacin del controlador para ver la descripcin del para la compensacin de la temperatura (configuracin
teclado e informacin sobre cmo desplazarse. predeterminada manual: 25 C). Sensores ORP: la
compensacin de la temperatura no se utiliza. Se puede
Configuracin del sensor conectar un elemento de temperatura para medir la
Utilice el men Configurar para ingresar la informacin de identificacin temperatura.
del sensor y para cambiar las opciones para el manejo y almacenamiento FILTRO Configura una constante de tiempo para incrementar la
de datos. Se puede utilizar el siguiente procedimiento para configurar los estabilidad de la seal. La constante de tiempo calcula el
sensores de pH u ORP. valor promedio durante un tiempo determinado: desde 0
(sin efecto, configuracin predeterminada) hasta 60
1. Pulse la tecla MENU y seleccione Configuracin del sensor, segundos (promedio de valor de la seal para 60
[seleccione el sensor], Configurar. segundos). El filtro incrementa el tiempo de la seal del
sensor para responder a los cambios reales del proceso.
2. Utilice las teclas de desplazamiento del cursor para seleccionar una
opcin y pulse ENTER. Para introducir nmeros, caracteres o signos COMP H2O Para sensores de pH solamente: agrega una correccin
de puntuacin, pulse y mantenga presionada la tecla con la flecha PURA dependiente de la temperatura al valor de pH medido para
el agua pura con aditivos: ninguna (configuracin
hacia ARRIBA o hacia ABAJO. Pulse la tecla DERECHA para predeterminada), amonaco, morfolina o definido por el
avanzar al siguiente espacio. usuario. Para temperaturas de proceso por encima de los
50 C, se utiliza la correccin en 50 C. Para las
Opcin Descripcin aplicaciones definidas por el usuario, se puede ingresar
EDITAR Cambia el nombre que corresponde al sensor en la parte una pendiente lineal (configuracin predeterminada: 0 pH/
NOMBRE superior de la pantalla de medicin. El nombre puede C).
contener hasta 10 caracteres en cualquier combinacin de
letras, nmeros, espacios o signos de puntuacin.
40 Espaol
Opcin Descripcin Figura 3 Sensor en solucin de referencia
CONFIG Configura el intervalo de tiempo para el almacenamiento
REGISTRO de datos en el registro de datos: 5, 30 segundos, 1, 2, 5,
10, 15 (configuracin predeterminada), 30, 60 minutos.
REST CONFIG Configura el men de configuracin a los valores

PREDET predeterminados. Se perder toda la informacin del
sensor.
Calibrar el sensor
Acerca de la calibracin del sensor

La calibracin regula la lectura del sensor para coincidir con el valor de
una o ms soluciones de referencia. Las caractersticas del sensor
cambian lentamente con el tiempo y hacen que pierdan precisin. El 2. Espere que la temperatura del sensor y la de la solucin sean
sensor se debe calibrar peridicamente para mantener la precisin. La uniformes. Esto puede demorar 30 minutos o ms si la diferencia de
frecuencia de calibracin vara con la aplicacin y la mejor manera de temperatura entre la solucin del proceso y la solucin de referencia
determinarla es mediante la experiencia. es significativa.
Se utiliza un elemento de temperatura para suministrar lecturas de pH 3. Pulse la tecla MENU y seleccione Configuracin del sensor,
reguladas automticamente en 25 C para los cambios de temperatura [seleccione el sensor], Calibrar.
que afectan el electrodo activo y el de referencia. Si la temperatura del
proceso es constante, este ajuste lo puede hacer el cliente de forma 4. Seleccione el tipo de calibracin:
manual. Opcin Descripcin
Durante la calibracin, los datos no se envan al registro de datos. De este
Buffer de 2 Utilice 2 buffer para la calibracin, por ej., pH 7 y pH 4
modo, el registro de datos puede tener reas en las que los datos sean
puntos (mtodo recomendado). Los buffer deben provenir del
intermitentes. conjunto de buffer especificado en el men Opciones de
calibracin (consulte Cambio de las opciones de
Procedimiento de calibracin de pH calibracin en la pgina 44).
Los sensores se pueden calibrar con 1 o 2 soluciones de referencia
Buffer de 1 Utilice 1 buffer para la calibracin, por ej., pH 7. Los buffer
(calibracin de 1 punto o de 2 puntos). Las soluciones buffer estndar se
punto deben provenir del conjunto de buffer especificado en el
reconocen automticamente. Asegrese de que se emplea el conjunto de men Opciones de calibracin.
tampn correcto (consulte la Cambio de las opciones de calibracin
en la pgina 44). Muestra de 2 Utilice 2 muestras o buffer con valor pH conocido para la
puntos calibracin. Determine el pH de las muestras con otro
1. Coloque el sensor en la primer solucin de referencia. Asegrese de instrumento.
que la parte de la sonda que tiene el sensor quede completamente Muestra de 1 Utilice 1 muestra o buffer para la calibracin. Determine el
inmersa en el lquido (Figura 3). punto pH de las muestras con otro instrumento.
Espaol 41
5. En caso de que la contrasea est habilitada en el men de seguridad 11. Revise el resultado de la calibracin:
del controlador, introdzcala.
Aprobado: el sensor est calibrado y listo para medir muestras.
6. Seleccione la opcin de la seal de salida durante la calibracin: Aparecen los resultados de la pendiente y/o el offset.
Opcin Descripcin
No aprobado: la pendiente o el offset se encuentran fuera de los
Activa Durante el proceso de calibracin el instrumento enva el lmites aceptados. Vuelva a realizar la calibracin con soluciones
valor de medicin actual de salida. de referencia nuevas. Consulte Mantenimiento en la pgina 45 y
Solucin de problemas en la pgina 46 para obtener ms
Retenido Durante el proceso de calibracin el valor de salida del sensor
informacin.
se mantiene en el valor de medicin actual.
12. Si la calibracin fue aprobada, pulse ENTER para continuar.
Transferencia Durante la calibracin se enva un valor de salida
predeterminado. Consulte el manual del usuario del 13. En caso que la opcin para la identificacin del operador est
controlador para cambiar el valor predeterminado. configurada en S en el men Opciones de calibracin, ingrese un
identificador. Consulte la Cambio de las opciones de calibracin
7. Con el sensor en la primer solucin de referencia, pulse ENTER. en la pgina 44.
Aparecer el valor de la medicin.
14. En la pantalla Sensor nuevo, seleccione si el sensor es nuevo o no:
8. Espere que el valor se estabilice y pulse ENTER.
Nota: Posiblemente la pantalla avance automticamente al prximo paso. Opcin Descripcin
9. Si la solucin de referencia es una muestra, mida el pH con un S El sensor no fue calibrado anteriormente con este controlador. Los
instrumento de verificacin auxiliar. Utilice las teclas de das de funcionamiento y las curvas de calibraciones anteriores del
desplazamiento del cursor para ingresar la medicin y pulse ENTER. sensor estn restablecidas.
Nota: En caso de utilizar un buffer de pH que no se encuentra en la lista del No El sensor fue calibrado anteriormente con este controlador.
men Opciones de calibracin, consulte la botella del buffer para averiguar el
valor de pH que corresponde a su temperatura. 15. Vuelva el sensor al proceso y pulse ENTER.
10. Para una calibracin de 2 puntos, mida la segunda solucin de Se vuelve a activar la seal de salida y en la pantalla de medicin
referencia (o muestra): aparece el valor de medicin de la muestra.
Nota: En caso que la modalidad de salida est configurada en Retenido o
a. Saque el sensor de la primer solucin y enjuague con agua limpia. Transferencia, seleccione el tiempo de demora cuando las salidas se vuelven a
activar.
b. Coloque el sensor en la siguiente solucin de referencia y pulse
ENTER.
Procedimiento de calibracin para ORP
c. Espere a que el valor se estabilice. Pulse ENTER. Los sensores se pueden calibrar con una solucin de referencia ORP o
Nota: Posiblemente la pantalla avance automticamente al prximo paso. con la muestra del proceso.
d. Si la solucin de referencia es una muestra, mida el pH con un
instrumento de verificacin auxiliar. Utilice las teclas de 1. Coloque el sensor en la solucin de referencia. Asegrese de que la
desplazamiento del cursor para ingresar la medicin y pulse parte de la sonda que tiene el sensor quede completamente inmersa
ENTER. en la solucin (Figura 4).
42 Espaol
Figura 4 Sensor en solucin de referencia teclas de desplazamiento del cursor para ingresar el valor y pulse
ENTER.
9. Revise el resultado de la calibracin:
Aprobado: el sensor est calibrado y listo para medir muestras.
Aparecen los resultados de la pendiente y/o el offset.
No aprobado: la pendiente o el offset se encuentran fuera de los

lmites aceptados. Vuelva a realizar la calibracin con soluciones
de referencia nuevas. Consulte Mantenimiento en la pgina 45 y
Solucin de problemas en la pgina 46 para obtener ms
informacin.
10. Si la calibracin fue aprobada, pulse ENTER para continuar.
11. En caso que la opcin para la identificacin del operador est
2. Pulse la tecla MENU y seleccione Configuracin del sensor, configurada en S en el men Opciones de calibracin, ingrese un
[seleccione el sensor], Calibrar. identificador. Consulte la Cambio de las opciones de calibracin
en la pgina 44.
3. Pulse ENTER para seleccionar Calibracin de la muestra de 1 punto.
12. En la pantalla Sensor nuevo, seleccione si el sensor es nuevo o no:
4. En caso de que la contrasea est habilitada en el men de seguridad
del controlador, introdzcala. Opcin Descripcin
5. Seleccione la opcin de la seal de salida durante la calibracin:
S El sensor no fue calibrado anteriormente con este controlador. Los
Opcin Descripcin das de funcionamiento y las curvas de calibraciones anteriores del
sensor estn restablecidas.
Activa Durante el proceso de calibracin el instrumento enva el
valor de medicin actual de salida. No El sensor fue calibrado anteriormente con este controlador.
Retenido Durante el proceso de calibracin el valor de salida del sensor 13. Vuelva el sensor al proceso y pulse ENTER.
se mantiene en el valor de medicin actual. Se vuelve a activar la seal de salida y en la pantalla de medicin
aparece el valor de medicin de la muestra.
Transferencia Durante la calibracin se enva un valor de salida Nota: En caso que la modalidad de salida est configurada en Retenido o
predeterminado. Consulte el manual del usuario del Transferencia, seleccione el tiempo de demora cuando las salidas se vuelven a
controlador para cambiar el valor predeterminado. activar.
6. Con el sensor en la solucin de referencia o muestra, pulse ENTER.
Aparecer el valor de la medicin. Calibracin de la temperatura
El instrumento viene calibrado de fbrica para medir la temperatura de
7. Espere que el valor se estabilice y pulse ENTER. forma precisa. Se puede calibrar la temperatura para aumentar la
Nota: Posiblemente la pantalla avance automticamente al prximo paso. precisin.
8. Si la muestra del proceso se utiliza para realizar la calibracin, mida
el valor de ORP con un instrumento de verificacin auxiliar. Utilice las
Espaol 43
1. Coloque el sensor en un recipiente con agua a una determinada 2. Utilice las teclas de desplazamiento del cursor para seleccionar una
temperatura. Mida la temperatura del agua con un termmetro de opcin y pulse ENTER.
precisin o un instrumento independiente.
Opcin Descripcin
2. Pulse la tecla MENU y seleccione Configuracin del sensor,
[seleccione el sensor], Calibrar. SELECCIONE Para sensores de pH solamente: cambia la
BUFFER configuracin de las soluciones buffer reconocidas
3. Seleccione Cal Temp 1 PT y pulse ENTER.
para calibracin de pH 4, 7, 10 (configuracin
4. Espere que el valor se estabilice y pulse ENTER. predeterminada) o DIN 19267 (pH 1,09, 4,65, 6,79,
9,23, 12,75)
5. Introduzca el valor exacto y pulse ENTER.
Nota: Se pueden utilizar otros buffer si durante la
6. Vuelva el sensor al proceso y pulse ENTER. calibracin se selecciona la opcin de muestra de 1
punto o de 2 puntos.
Salida del procedimiento de calibracin RECORDATORIO DE Establece un recordatorio para la prxima calibracin
El usuario puede salir de la calibracin pulsando la tecla ATRS. CAL en das, meses o aos: apagado (configuracin
predeterminada), 1 da, 7, 30, 60 o 90 das, 6 o 9
1. Pulse la tecla ATRS durante una calibracin. Aparecern tres meses, 1 o 2 aos
opciones:
ID DE OP de CAL Incluye una identificacin del operador con los datos
Opcin Descripcin de calibracin: S o No (configuracin
predeterminada). La identificacin se ingresa durante
SUSPENDER CAL Detiene el proceso de calibracin. Se deber comenzar la calibracin.
con una nueva calibracin desde el principio.
VOLVER A CAL Vuelve al proceso de calibracin. Restablecimiento de las opciones de calibracin

Las opciones de calibracin se pueden restablecer a las opciones
ABANDONAR CAL Sale del proceso de calibracin provisoriamente. Se predeterminadas de fbrica.
permite el acceso a otros mens. Se puede iniciar la
calibracin de un segundo sensor (en caso que lo
hubiera). Para volver al proceso de calibracin, pulse la 1. Pulse la tecla MENU y seleccione Configuracin del sensor,
tecla MENUy seleccione Configuracin del sensor, [seleccione el sensor], Calibrar, Restablecer calibracin
[seleccione el sensor]. predeterminada.
2. En caso de que la contrasea est habilitada en el men de seguridad
2. Utilice las teclas de desplazamiento del cursor para seleccionar una
del controlador, introdzcala.
de las opciones y pulse ENTER.
3. Pulse ENTER. Aparece la pantalla Restablecer cal?
Cambio de las opciones de calibracin 4. Pulse ENTER. Todas las opciones de calibracin se configuran a los
El usuario puede configurar un recordatorio o incluir un identificador de valores predeterminados.
operador con los datos de la calibracin en el men OPCIONES DE CAL. 5. En caso que la opcin para la identificacin del operador est
configurada en S en el men Opciones de calibracin, ingrese un
1. Pulse la tecla MENU y seleccione Configuracin del sensor, identificador. Consulte la Cambio de las opciones de calibracin
[seleccione el sensor], Calibrar, Opciones de cal. en la pgina 44.
44 Espaol
6. En la pantalla Sensor nuevo, seleccione si el sensor es nuevo o no: Cronograma de mantenimiento
Opcin Descripcin El cronograma de mantenimiento muestra los tiempos mnimos para
realizar las tareas de mantenimiento. En las aplicaciones donde el
S El sensor no fue calibrado anteriormente con este controlador. Los electrodo se ensucia, realice las tareas de mantenimiento con mayor
das de funcionamiento y las curvas de calibraciones anteriores del frecuencia.
sensor estn restablecidas.
No El sensor fue calibrado anteriormente con este controlador. Tarea de mantenimiento 90 das
7. Pulse la tecla ATRS para volver a la pantalla de medicin. Limpieza del sensor X
Inspeccin del sensor en busca de X

Mediciones de impedancia daos
Para aumentar la fiabilidad del sistema de medicin de pH, el controlador Calibracin del sensor Establecido por los organismos
determina la impedancia de los electrodos de vidrio. La medicin se toma reguladores o por la experiencia
cada minuto. Durante el diagnstico, la lectura de la medicin de pH
quedar en espera durante cinco segundos. Si aparece un mensaje de
error, consulte Lista de errores en la pgina 47 para obtener informacin Limpieza del sensor
detallada.
ADVERTENCIA
Para activar/desactivar la medicin de impedancia del sensor:
Peligro qumico. Siempre use proteccin personal de acuerdo a la Hoja de datos
sobre la seguridad de los materiales para el qumico utilizado.
1. Pulse la tecla MEN y seleccione Configuracin del sensor.
2. Seleccione Diag./prueba y pulse INTRO. ADVERTENCIA
3. Seleccione Estado de impedancia y pulse INTRO. Peligro de lesin personal. Extraer un sensor de un recipiente presurizado puede
4. Seleccione Activar/desactivar y pulse INTRO. ser peligroso. Reduzca la presin del proceso a menos de 10 psi antes de la
extraccin. Si esto no es posible, tome todas las precauciones al hacerlo. Para
obtener ms informacin, consulte la documentacin suministrada con el
Registros de Modbus hardware de montaje.
Est disponible una lista de registros Modbus para comunicacin en red. Requisito previo: Prepare una solucin de jabn suave con un
Consulte www.hach.com o www.hach-lange.com para obtener ms detergente no abrasivo que no contenga lanolina. La lanolina deja una
informacin. pelcula sobre la superficie del electrodo que puede degradar el
rendimiento del sensor.
Mantenimiento
Revise peridicamente el sensor en busca de residuos y sedimentos.
ADVERTENCIA Limpie del sensor cuando haya sedimentos acumulados o cuando el
rendimiento haya disminuido.
Peligro de lesin personal. Las tareas descritas en esta seccin del manual deben
ser realizadas slo por personal cualificado.
1. Saque los residuos sueltos del extremo del sensor con un pao limpio
de tela suave. Enjuague el sensor con agua limpia y tibia.
Espaol 45
2. Ponga en remojo el sensor durante 2 3 minutos en una solucin elemento de temperatura. La resistencia debe ser de entre 1090 y
jabonosa. 1105 ohmios a aproximadamente 25 C.
3. Cepille todo el extremo medidor del sensor con un cepillo de cerdas Si el elemento de temperatura est bien, vuelva a conectar los cables
suaves. al mdulo.
4. Si los residuos no salen, sumerja el extremo medidor del sensor en 4. Pulse la tecla MENU y seleccione Configuracin del sensor,
una solucin cida diluida como, por ejemplo, < 5% HCl durante 5 [seleccione el sensor], Diag/Prueba, Seales del sensor. La lectura
minutos como mximo. debe encontrarse entre los -50 y +50 mV.
5. Enjuague el sensor con agua y luego vulvalo a colocar en la solucin 5. Enjuague el sensor con agua y colquelo en una solucin buffer de
jabonosa durante 2 a 3 minutos. pH 4 o pH 10. Espere a que la temperatura del sensor y la del buffer
alcancen la temperatura ambiente.
6. Enjuague el sensor con agua limpia.
6. Compare la lectura de mV del buffer de pH 4 o 10 con la lectura del
Nota: Es posible que los sensores con electrodos de antimonio para
buffer de pH 7. La lectura debe tener una diferencia de
aplicaciones HF necesiten una mejor limpieza. Pngase en contacto con la
asistencia tcnica. aproximadamente 160 mV.
En caso que la diferencia sea menor a 160 mV, pngase en contacto
Siempre calibre el sensor luego de realizar procedimientos de con la asistencia tcnica.
mantenimiento.
Men de prueba y diagnstico del sensor
Solucin de problemas El men de prueba y diagnstico del sensor muestra la informacin actual
e histrica del instrumento. Consulte la Tabla 3. Para acceder a este
Datos intermitentes men, pulse la tecla MENU y seleccione Configuracin del sensor,
Durante la calibracin, los datos no se envan al registro de datos. De este [seleccione el sensor], DIAG/PRUEBA.
modo, el registro de datos puede tener reas en las que los datos sean Tabla 3 Men DIAG/PRUEBA del sensor
intermitentes.
Opcin Descripcin
Prueba del sensor de pH
INF MODULO Muestra la versin y el nmero de serie del mdulo del
Requisitos previos: Dos buffer de pH y un multmetro. sensor.
En caso que una calibracin no salga bien, primero realice los
procedimientos de mantenimiento de la seccin Mantenimiento INF SENSOR Muestra el nombre y el nmero de serie ingresados por
en la pgina 45. el usuario.
DIAS DESDE CAL Muestra la cantidad de das desde la ltima calibracin.

1. Coloque el sensor en una solucin buffer de pH 7 y espere que la
temperatura del mismo y la temperatura del buffer alcancen la HISTORIAL DE CAL Muestra una lista y los detalles de cada una de las
temperatura ambiente. calibraciones.
2. Desconecte del mdulo el cable rojo (o el verde en los sensores de 6 REST HISTORIAL DE Restablece el historial de calibracin del sensor
clavijas de conexin) y el blanco. CAL (requiere contrasea de nivel de servicio). Se perdern
todos los datos de las calibraciones anteriores.
3. Mida la resistencia entre el cable rojo (o el verde en los sensores de
6 clavijas de conexin) y el blanco para verificar el funcionamiento del
46 Espaol
Tabla 3 Men DIAG/PRUEBA del sensor (contina) Tabla 4 Lista de errores de los sensores de pH y ORP (contina)
Opcin Descripcin Error Descripcin Solucin
SEALES DEL Muestra las lecturas actuales en mV. PENDIENTE MUY La pendiente es < 50 (pH) / Limpie el sensor, luego repita la
SENSOR BAJA 0,7 (ORP) calibracin o cambie el sensor.
DAS SENSOR Muestra la cantidad de das en que estuvo funcionando TEMP MUY ALTA La medicin de la Asegrese de haber
el sensor. temperatura es > 130 C seleccionado el elemento de
temperatura apropiado.
REST DAS SENSOR Restablece la cantidad de das en que estuvo TEMP MUY BAJA La medicin de la
funcionando el sensor. temperatura es < -10 C
FALLA DE CAD Fall la conversin Apague y vuelva a encender el

Lista de errores analgico a digital controlador. Pngase en
contacto con la asistencia
Los errores se pueden producir por varias razones. La lectura en la
tcnica.
pantalla de medicin aparece y desaparece. Se mantienen todas las
salidas cuando se especifican en el men del controlador. Para ver los MISMO BUFFER Los buffer de calibracin de Complete los pasos de la
errores del sensor, pulse la tecla MENU y seleccione Diag del sensor, 2 puntos tienen el mismo Prueba del sensor de pH
[seleccione el sensor], Lista de errores. En la Tabla 4 aparece una lista valor en la pgina 46.
de posibles errores.
FALTA SENSOR El sensor no est instalado Controle el cableado y las
Tabla 4 Lista de errores de los sensores de pH y ORP o est desconectado conexiones del sensor y del
mdulo.
Error Descripcin Solucin
FALTA TEMP No se detecta un sensor de Ccontrole el cableado del
PH MUY ALTO La medicin del pH es > 14 Calibre o cambie el sensor. temperatura sensor de temperatura.
Asegrese de haber
ORP MUY ALTO La medicin del ORP es > seleccionado el elemento de
2100 mV temperatura apropiado.
PH MUY BAJO La medicin del pH es < 0 Calibre o cambie el sensor. IMP BOMB BAJA La bombilla de vidrio se ha Cambie el sensor. Pngase en
roto o fundido contacto con la asistencia
ORP MUY BAJO La medicin del ORP es < tcnica.
-2100 mV
OFFSET MUY El offset es > 9 (pH) o 200 Siga los procedimientos de Lista de advertencias de los sensores
ALTO mV (ORP) mantenimiento del sensor y
luego repita la calibracin o Una advertencia no afecta el funcionamiento de los mens, rels y salidas.
OFFSET MUY El offset es < 5 (pH) o -200 cmbielo. En la parte inferior de la pantalla de medicin empieza a parpadear un
BAJO mV (ORP) icono de advertencia y aparece un mensaje. Para ver las advertencias del
PENDIENTE MUY La pendiente es > 62 (pH) / Repita la calibracin con una sensor, pulse la tecla MENU y seleccione Diag del sensor, [seleccione el
ALTA 1,3 (ORP) muestra o un buffer fresco o sensor], Lista de advertencias. En la Tabla 5 aparece una lista de posibles
cambie el sensor. advertencias.
Espaol 47
Tabla 5 Lista de advertencias de los sensores de pH y ORP Lista de eventos de los sensores
Advertencia Descripcin Solucin La lista de eventos muestra las actividades que se estn realizando en el
momento como, por ejemplo, cambios en la configuracin, alarmas,
PH MUY ALTO La medicin del pH es > 13 Calibre o cambie el sensor. estados de las advertencias, etc. Para ver los eventos, pulse la tecla
MENU y seleccione Diag del sensor, [seleccione el sensor], Lista de
ORP MUY ALTO La medicin del ORP es >
2100 mV
eventos. En la Tabla 6 aparece una lista de posibles eventos. Los eventos
previos se registran en el registro de eventos, el cual se puede descargar
PH MUY BAJO La medicin del pH es < 1 Calibre o cambie el sensor. del controlador.
ORP MUY BAJO La medicin del ORP es < Tabla 6 Lista de eventos de los sensores de pH y ORP
-2100 mV
Evento Descripcin
OFFSET MUY El offset es > 8 (pH) o 200 mV Siga los procedimientos de
ALTO (ORP) mantenimiento del sensor y CAL LISTA El sensor est listo para la calibracin
vuelva a realizar la
OFFSET MUY El offset es < 6 (pH) o -200 mV calibracin. CAL OK La calibracin actual es correcta
BAJO (ORP)
TIEMPO EXP Expir el tiempo de estabilizacin durante la
PENDIENTE MUY La pendiente es > 60 (pH) / Vuelva a realizar la calibracin
ALTA 1,3 (ORP) calibracin con un buffer
NO BUFFER No se detecta ningn buffer
nuevo o una muestra nueva.
PENDIENTE ALTA La pendiente de calibracin se encuentra por
PENDIENTE MUY La pendiente es < 54 (pH) / Limpie del sensor y vuelva a
encima del lmite superior
BAJA 0,7 (ORP) realizar la calibracin.
PENDIENTE BAJA La pendiente de calibracin se encuentra por
TEMP MUY ALTA La medicin de la Asegrese de utilizar el
debajo del lmite inferior
temperatura es > 100 C elemento de temperatura
apropiado. OFFSET ALTO El valor de offset de la calibracin del sensor se
TEMP MUY BAJA La medicin de la
encuentra por encima del lmite superior
temperatura es < 0 C
OFFSET BAJO El valor de offset de la calibracin del sensor se
TIEMPO DE CAL Ha expirado el tiempo del Calibre el sensor.
encuentra por debajo del lmite inferior
EXCEDIDO recordatorio de calibracin
PTS PXMOS Los puntos de la calibracin tienen un valor muy
CAMBIAR El sensor ha estado en Cambie el sensor.
similar a una calibracin de 2 puntos
SENSOR funcionamiento ms de 365
das CAL FALLIDA Fall la calibracin
SIN CALIBRAR El sensor no ha sido calibrado Calibre el sensor. CAL ALTA El valor de la calibracin se encuentra por encima
del lmite superior
FALLA DE MEM Falla de la memoria flash Pngase en contacto con la
FLASH externa asistencia tcnica. INESTABLE Lectura inestable durante la calibracin
CAL EN MARCHA La calibracin no ha Vuelva al proceso de CAMBIO EN CONFIG Cambio de configuracin: tipo puntos flotantes
terminado calibracin. flotante
48 Espaol
Tabla 6 Lista de eventos de los sensores de pH y ORP (contina)
Descripcin Cantidad Artculo N
Evento Descripcin
Solucin buffer, pH 4 500 ml 2283449
CAMBIO EN CONFIG texto Cambio de configuracin: tipo texto
CAMBIO EN CONFIG entero Cambio de configuracin: tipo valores enteros
REST CONFIG La configuracin se restableci a las opciones
predeterminadas Solucin de referencia para ORP, 200
500 ml 25M2A1001-115
mV
EVENTO ENCENDIDO Se encendi el suministro de energa
Solucin de referencia para ORP, 600
500 ml 25M2A1002-115
FALLA DE CAD Fall la conversin de anlogo a digital (falla del mV
hardware)
BORRAR FLASH Se borr la memoria flash
TEMPERATURA La temperatura registrada es muy alta o muy baja
INICIO 1 PTO MANUAL Inicio de la calibracin de la muestra de 1 punto
INICIO 1 PUNTO AUTO Inicio de la calibracin del buffer de 1 punto para

pH
INICIO 2 PTOS MANUAL Inicio de la calibracin de la muestra de 2 puntos

para pH
INICIO 2 PUNTOS AUTO Inicio de la calibracin del buffer de 2 puntos para

pH
FIN 1 PTO MANUAL Fin de la calibracin de la muestra de 1 punto
FIN 1 PTO AUTO Fin de la calibracin del buffer de 1 punto para pH
FIN 2 PTOS MANUAL Fin de la calibracin de la muestra de 2 puntos para

pH
FIN 2 PTOS AUTO Fin de la calibracin del buffer de 2 puntos para pH
Piezas de repuesto y accesorios

Nota: Los nmeros de producto y artculo pueden variar para algunas regiones de
venta. Comunquese con el distribuidor correspondiente o visite el sitio Web de la
compaa para obtener la informacin de contacto.
Espaol 49
Especificaes Uso de informaes de risco
As especificaes esto sujeitas a alteraes sem aviso prvio. PERIGO
Tabela 1 Especificaes do sensor Indica uma situao potencial ou iminentemente perigosa que, se no for evitada,
resultar em morte ou leso grave.
Especificao Detalhes
Temperatura de operao 0 a 105 C (32 a 221 F)

ADVERTNCIA
Indica uma situao potencialmente perigosa que, se no for evitada, pode
Cabo do sensor 4.6 m (15 ps) resultar em morte ou ferimento grave.
Dimenses (altura/dimetro) Conversvel: 150 mm (5.9 pol.)/33 mm (1.3 pol.),
pol. NPT; Insero: 150 mm (5.9 pol.)/22 mm
CUIDADO
(0.875 pol.); Sanitrio: 187 mm (7.4 pol.)/22 mm Indica uma situao potencialmente perigosa que pode resultar em ferimento leve
(0.875 pol.) a moderado.
Componentes Materiais resistentes corroso, totalmente AVISO

submersvel
Indica uma situao que, se no evitada, pode causar danos ao instrumento.
Profundidade/presso de Mxima de 107 m (350 ps)/1050 kPa (100 psi) Informaes que necessitam de uma nfase especial.
imerso
Etiquetas de precauo
Limite de presso 6.9 bar a 100 C (100 psi a 212 F)
Leia todas as etiquetas e os rtulos fixados no instrumento. Caso no
Taxa de fluxo mxima 2 m/s (6.6 ps/s) sejam observadas, podem ocorrer leses pessoais ou danos ao
instrumento. Um smbolo no instrumento referenciado no manual com
uma instruo de precauo.
Informaes gerais
Em hiptese alguma o fabricante ser responsvel por danos diretos, Este smbolo, se observado no instrumento, diz respeito ao manual de
instrues para operao e/ou a informaes de segurana.
indiretos, especiais, incidentais ou consequenciais resultantes de
qualquer defeito ou omisso neste manual. O fabricante reserva-se o
direito de fazer alteraes neste manual e nos produtos aqui descritos a
qualquer momento, sem aviso ou obrigao. As edies revisadas podem Este smbolo, quando estiver anotado na carcaa ou barreira de um
produto, indicar que existe o risco de choque eltrico e/ou
ser encontradas no stio do fabricante na Web. eletrocusso.
Informaes de segurana
Leia todo o manual antes de tirar da embalagem, montar ou operar esse
equipamento. Preste ateno a todas as declaraes de perigo e cuidado.
Caso contrrio, o operador poder sofrer ferimentos graves ou o
equipamento poder ser danificado.
Certifique-se de que a proteo oferecida para este equipamento no seja
afetada, no use nem instale este equipamento de nenhuma outra forma
alm da especificada neste manual.
50 Portugus
Componentes eletrnicos internos delicados podem ser danificados Figura 1 Estilos de sensor
devido eletricidade esttica, resultando em degradao do
desempenho ou em uma eventual falha.
Os equipamentos eltricos marcados com este smbolo no podem

ser descartados em sistemas de descarte (lixo) pblicos europeus
aps 12 de agosto de 2005. Em conformidade com as normas locais
e nacionais europias (Diretiva da UE 2002/98/EC), os usurios dos
equipamentos eltricos na Europa devem agora devolver os
equipamentos antigos ou no final da vida til para o fabricante para fins
de descarte, sem custo algum ao usurio.
Observao: Para devoluo para reciclagem, entre em contato com o fabricante
do equipamento ou fornecedor para obter instrues sobre como devolver
equipamentos usados, acessrios eltricos fornecidos pelo fabricante e itens
auxiliares para descarte adequado.
Viso geral do produto

Este sensor foi projetado para funcionar com um controlador para
operao e coleo de dados. Podem ser usados controladores mltiplos
com este sensor. Este documento assume a instalao do sensor e o uso
com um controlador sc200. Para usar o sensor com outros controladores,
consulte o manual do usurio para saber o controlador que usado.
O sensor est disponvel em estilos diferentes. Consulte a Figura 1.
1 Eltrodo convertvel, planopara 3 Inseropermite a remoo sem

um tubo em T ou um recipiente parar o fluxo do processo
2 Eltrodo convertvel, de cpula 4 Sanitriopara instalao em um
para um tubo em T ou um recipiente sanitrio em T de 2 polegadas
Instalao
ADVERTNCIA
Risco de leso corporal. Somente pessoal qualificado deve realizar as tarefas
descritas nesta seo do manual.
Portugus 51
Montagem Para obter exemplos de sensores em aplicaes diferentes, consulte
Figura 2. O sensor precisa ser calibrado antes de ser usado. Consulte a
ADVERTNCIA Calibrar o sensor na pgina 57.
Risco de leso corporal. Considere sempre o valor da temperatura e presso do
hardware de montagem que usado para instalar o sensor. O material do
hardware limita, geralmente, os valores da temperatura e da presso do sistema.
Figura 2 Exemplos de montagem
1 Montagem sanitria 3 Montagem atravs de fluxo

2 Fim da imerso do cano 4 Insero da vlvula de esfera
52 Portugus
Conecte o sensor ao mdulo Tabela 2 Fiao do sensor combinado de pH e ORP
ADVERTNCIA Conector N do Sinal Fio do sensor Sensores de 6

pino plugues
Perigo potencial de eletrocuo. Sempre desconecte a fora do
8 pinos (J5) 1 Referncia Trana metlica Trana metlica
instrumento quando fizer as conexes eltricas.
2 Blindagem Azul Amarelo
interna
ADVERTNCIA
Risco de eletrocuo. Os fios de alta voltagem para o controlador so conduzidos 3
por trs da barreira de alta voltagem no compartimento do controlador. A barreira
deve permanecer encaixada exceto na instalao de mdulos ou quando um 4
tcnico de instalao qualificado estiver instalando fiao de energia, alarmes,
5
sadas ou rels.
6 Temp + Vermelho Verde
AVISO
7 Temp / Branco Branco
Dano potencial do instrumento. Componentes eletrnicos internos
Circuito baixo
delicados podem ser danificados devido eletricidade esttica,
podendo resultar em degradao do desempenho ou em uma eventual 8
falha.
2 pinos (J4) 1 Ativo Transparente Transparente
Para instalar o mdulo e conectar o sensor, consulte as etapas ilustradas
e Tabela 2. 2
Observao: Alguns sensores combinados no tm fios para a medio de Se o sensor de combinao no possuir um fio azul (ou amarelo para sensores
temperatura. Se a malha metlica de um sensor combinado estiver estanhada, corte de 6 plugues) para aterramento de soluo, instale um fio jumper entre os pinos
a rea estanhada. 1 e 2 no conector de 8 pinos (J5).
Observao: Se o cabo do sensor no for longo o suficiente para chegar ao
controlador, um cabo de interconexo e uma caixa da juno so necessrios para
aumentar o comprimento.
Portugus 53
1 2
3 4
54 Portugus
5 6
7 8
Portugus 55
Operao Opo Descrio
Diretrizes para operao SENSOR S/N Permite que o usurio digite o nmero serial do
(Nmero serial do sensor, limitado a 16 caracteres com qualquer
CUIDADO sensor) combinao de letras, nmeros, espaos ou
pontuao.
Risco de leso corporal. A haste ou a bolha de vidro no sensor podem quebrar.
Manuseie o sensor cuidadosamente para evitar danos. DISPLAY FORMAT Somente para sensores pHaltera o nmero de
(Formato de casas decimais que so mostradas na tela de
Remova a tampa de proteo antes do sensor ser colocado a funcionar. exibio) medio para XX.XX (padro) ou XX.X
Quando o sensor for removido do processo para >1 hora, encha a TEMP UNITS Define as unidades de temperatura para C (padro)
tampa de proteo com soluo tampo de pH 4 (recomendado) ou (Unidades de ou F
gua da torneia, e coloque a tampa no sensor. Repita a cada 24 temperatura)
semanas para um armazenamento estendido.
TEMP ELEMENT Sensores pHdefinem o elemento da temperatura
Navegao do usurio (Elemento da para compensao de temperatura automtica para
temperatura) PT100, PT1000 (padro) ou NTC300. Se no usado
Consulte a documentao do controlador para obter uma descrio do nenhum elemento. o tipo pode ser definido para
teclado e informaes de navegao. manual e um valor para a compensao da
temperatura pode ser digitado (padro manual: 25
Configurar o sensor C). Sensores ORPa compensao da temperatura
Use o menu Configure (Configurar) para digitar as informaes de no usada. Um elemento da temperatura pode ser
identificao do sensor, e para alterar as opes de armazenamento e conectado na temperatura medida.
manuseio dos dados. O procedimento a seguir pode ser usado para FILTER (FILTRO) Define uma constante de tempo para incrementar a
configurar os sensores pH ou ORP. estabilidade do sinal. A constante de tempo calcula o
valor mdio durante o tempo especificado0
1. Pressione a tecla MENU e selecione Sensor Setup (Configurao do (nenhum efeito, padro) para 60 segundos (mdia do
sensor), [Select Sensor] (Selecionar sensor), Configure (Configurar). valor do sinal para 60 segundos). O filtro incrementa
o tempo de resposta do sinal do sensor para
2. Use as teclas de seta para selecionar uma opo e pressione responder s alteraes atuais no processo.
ENTER. Para digitar nmeros, caracteres ou pontuao, pressione
sem soltar as teclas de seta Para cima ou Para baixo. Pressione a PURE H2O COMP Somente para sensores pHadiciona uma correo
tecla de seta Para a direita para avanar para o espao seguinte. (Compensao de dependente da temperatura no valor de pH medido
gua pura) para gua pura com aditivosNenhuma (padro),
Opo Descrio Amnia, Morfolina ou Definida pelo usurio. Para
temperaturas de processo maiores que 50 C, usada
EDIT NAME (Editar Altera o nome que corresponde ao sensor no topo da a correo a 50 C. Para aplicaes definidas pelo
nome) tela de medio. O nome limitado a 10 caracteres usurio, pode ser digitada uma inclinao linear
com qualquer combinao de letras, nmeros, (padro: 0 pH/C).
espaos ou pontuao.
56 Portugus
Opo Descrio Figura 3 Sensor na soluo de referncia
LOG SETUP Define o intervalo de tempo para armazenamento de
(Configurao do dados no registros dos dados5, 30 segundos, 1, 2,
registrador) 5, 10, 15 (padro), 30, 60 minutos.
RESET DEFAULTS Restaura o menu de configurao para os valores

(Restaurar padres) padro. Todas as informaes do sensor sero
perdidas.
Calibrar o sensor
Acerca da calibrao do sensor

A calibrao ajusta a leitura do sensor para corresponder ao valor de uma
ou mais solues de referncia. As caractersticas do sensor se alteram
lentamente com o passar do tempo e provocam perda de preciso do 2. Aguarde que a temperatura do sensor e da soluo igualem. Isso pode
sensor. O sensor precisa ser calibrado regularmente para a preciso ser demorar at 30 minutos, ou mais, se a diferena da temperatura entre
mantida. A frequncia da calibrao varia com a aplicao e deve ser a soluo de referncia e o processo for significativa.
determinada pela experincia.
3. Pressione a tecla MENU e selecione Sensor Setup (Configurao do
Um elemento de temperatura usado para fornecer leituras de pH que sensor), [Select Sensor] (Selecionar sensor), Calibrate (Calibrar).
so ajustadas automaticamente para 25 C para alteraes da
temperatura, que afetam o eltrodo de referncia e ativo. Este ajuste pode 4. Selecione o tipo da calibrao:
ser definido manualmente pelo cliente se a temperatura do processo for Opo Descrio
constante.
Soluo Use 2 solues tampo para calibrao; por exemplo: pH
Durante a calibragem, os dados no so enviados para o registro de
tampo de 2 7 e pH 4 (mtodo recomendado). As solues tampo
dados. Dessa forma, o registro de dados pode ter reas nas quais os pontos precisam ser dos mesmos valores selecionados no menu
dados so intermitentes. Cal Options (Opes de calibrao) (consulte Alterar as
opes da calibragem na pgina 60).
Procedimento de calibrao de pH
Soluo Use uma soluo tampo para calibrao (pH 7, por
Os sensores podem ser calibrados com 1 ou 2 solues de referncia
tampo de 1 exemplo). A soluo tampo precisa ser da soluo
(calibragem de 1 ponto ou 2 pontos). As solues tampo padro so ponto tampo definida que especificada no menu Cal Options
reconhecidas automaticamente. Certifique-se de que o conjunto tampo (Opes da calibragem).
correto seja usado (consulte Alterar as opes da calibragem
na pgina 60). Amostra de 2 Use 2 amostras ou solues tampo de valor pH conhecido
pontos para calibragem. Determine o valor pH das amostras com
um instrumento diferente.
1. Coloque o sensor na primeira soluo de referncia. Certifique-se de
que a parte do sensor da sonda esteja totalmente imerso no lquido Amostra de 1 Use 1 amostra ou soluo tampo para calibragem.
(Figura 3). ponto Determine o valor pH das amostras com um instrumento
diferente.
Portugus 57
5. Digite a senha, caso esta opo esteja habilitada no menu de 11. Revise o resultado da calibrao:
segurana do controlador.
Passou - o sensor est calibrado e preparado para medir amostras.
6. Selecione a opo para o sinal de sada durante a calibrao: Os valores da inclinao (slope) e/ou deslocamento (offset) so
Opo Descrio mostrados.
Ativo O instrumento envia para a sada o valor medido atual durante o Falhou - a inclinao (slope) ou deslocamento (offset) da calibrao
procedimento de calibrao. est fora dos limites aceitos. Repita a calibrao com novas
solues de referncia. Consulte Manuteno na pgina 61 e
Espera O valor de sada mantido no valor medido no incio do processo
Soluo de problemas na pgina 62 para mais informaes.
de calibrao.
12. Se a calibrao passou, pressione ENTER para continuar.
Transferir Um valor de sada pr-definido enviado para a sada durante a
calibrao. Consulte o manual do usurio par alterar o valor pr- 13. Digite a ID do operador, caso esta opo esteja configurada para Yes
-definido (Sim) no menu Calibration Options (Opes de calibrao). Consulte
a seo Alterar as opes da calibragem na pgina 60.
7. Com o sensor na primeira soluo de referncia, pressione ENTER.
14. Na tela New Sensor (Novo sensor), selecione se o sensor novo:
O valor medido mostrado.
8. Aguarde que o valor estabilize e pressione ENTER. Opo Descrio
Observao: A tela pode avanar para a etapa seguinte automaticamente. Sim O sensor no foi calibrado previamente com este controlador. Os dias
9. Se a soluo de referncia uma amostra, mea o valor do pH com de operao e das curvas de calibrao anteriores para o sensor so
um instrumento de verificao secundrio. Use as teclas de seta para redefinidos.
inserir o valor medido e pressione ENTER. No O sensor foi calibrado previamente com este controlador.
Observao: Se uma soluo tampo de pH no listada no menu Cal Options
(Opes de calibragem) for usada, consulte o recipiente da soluo tampo para 15. Retorne o sensor ao processo e pressione ENTER.
encontrar o valor de pH que corresponde temperatura da soluo tampo. O sinal de sada retorna ao estado ativo e o valor da amostra medida
10. Para uma calibragem de 2 pontos, mea a segunda soluo de mostrado na tela de medio.
Observao: Se o modo de sada est definido para a espera ou transferncia,
referncia (ou amostra):
selecione o tempo de atraso para quando as sadas retornaro ao estado ativo.
a. Retire o sensor da primeira soluo e enxge com gua limpa.
b. Coloque o sensor na soluo de referncia seguinte e pressione Procedimento da calibragem ORP
ENTER. Os sensores podem ser calibrados com uma soluo de referncia ORP
ou com uma amostra de processo.
c. Aguarde at que o valor estabilize. Pressione ENTER.
Observao: A tela pode avanar para a etapa seguinte automaticamente. 1. Coloque o sensor na soluo de referncia. Certifique-se de que a
d. Se a soluo de referncia uma amostra, mea o valor do pH parte do sensor da sonda esteja totalmente imerso na soluo
com um instrumento de verificao secundrio. Use as teclas de (Figura 4).
seta para digitar o valor medido e pressione ENTER.
58 Portugus
Figura 4 Sensor na soluo de referncia 8. Se a amostra de processo for usada para calibragem, mea o valor de
ORP com um instrumento de verificao secundrio. Use as teclas de
seta para digitar o valor e pressione ENTER.
9. Revise o resultado da calibrao:
Passou - o sensor est calibrado e preparado para medir amostras.

Os valores da inclinao (slope) e/ou deslocamento (offset) so
mostrados.
Falhou - a inclinao (slope) ou deslocamento (offset) da calibrao

est fora dos limites aceitos. Repita a calibrao com novas
solues de referncia. Consulte Manuteno na pgina 61 e
Soluo de problemas na pgina 62 para mais informaes.
10. Se a calibrao passou, pressione ENTER para continuar.
2. Pressione a tecla MENU e selecione Sensor Setup (Configurao do 11. Digite a ID do operador, caso esta opo esteja configurada para Yes
sensor), [Select Sensor] (Selecionar sensor), Calibrate (Calibrar). (Sim) no menu Calibration Options (Opes de calibrao). Consulte
a seo Alterar as opes da calibragem na pgina 60.
3. Pressione ENTER para selecionar calibragem de amostra de 1 ponto.
12. Na tela New Sensor (Novo sensor), selecione se o sensor novo:
4. Digite a senha, caso esta opo esteja habilitada no menu de
segurana do controlador. Opo Descrio
5. Selecione a opo para o sinal de sada durante a calibrao:
Sim O sensor no foi calibrado previamente com este controlador. Os dias
Opo Descrio de operao e das curvas de calibrao anteriores para o sensor so
redefinidos.
Ativo O instrumento envia para a sada o valor medido atual durante o
procedimento de calibrao. No O sensor foi calibrado previamente com este controlador.
Espera O valor de sada mantido no valor medido no incio do processo 13. Retorne o sensor ao processo e pressione ENTER.
de calibrao. O sinal de sada retorna ao estado ativo e o valor da amostra medida
mostrado na tela de medio.
Transferir Um valor de sada pr-definido enviado para a sada durante a Observao: Se o modo de sada est definido para a espera ou transferncia,
calibrao. Consulte o manual do usurio par alterar o valor pr- selecione o tempo de atraso para quando as sadas retornaro ao estado ativo.
-definido
6. Com o sensor na soluo de referncia ou amostra, pressione Calibrao de temperatura

ENTER. O instrumento calibrado na fbrica para garantir medidas precisas de
O valor medido mostrado. temperatura. A temperatura pode ser calibrada para melhorar a preciso.
7. Aguarde que o valor estabilize e pressione ENTER. 1. Coloque o sensor em um recipiente com gua em cuja temperatura
Observao: A tela pode avanar para a etapa seguinte automaticamente. seja conhecida. Mea a temperatura da gua com um termmetro
preciso ou instrumento independente.
Portugus 59
2. Pressione a tecla MENU e selecione Sensor Setup (Configurao do 2. Use as teclas de seta para selecionar uma opo e pressione
sensor), [Select Sensor] (Selecionar sensor), Calibrate (Calibrar). ENTER.
3. Selecione 1 PT Temp Cal (Calibrao de temperatura em 1 ponto) e
Opo Descrio
pressione ENTER.
4. Aguarde que o valor estabilize e pressione ENTER. SELECT BUFFER Somente para sensores pHaltera o conjunto das
(Selecionar solues tampo que so reconhecidas para
5. Digite o valor exato e pressione ENTER. soluo tampo): calibragem para pH 4.00, 7.00, 10.00 (definio padro)
6. Retorne o sensor ao processo e pressione ENTER. ou DIN 19267 (pH 1.09, 4.65, 6.79, 9.23, 12.75)
Observao: Podem ser usadas outras solues
tampo se a opo da amostra do ponto 1 ou da
Sair do procedimento de calibrao amostra do ponto 2 for selecionada durante a
Se a tecla BACK (Voltar) for pressionada durante a calibrao, o usurio calibragem.
pode sair da calibrao.
CAL REMINDER Define um lembrete para a calibragem seguinte em
(Lembrete da dias, meses ou anosDesligado (padro), 1 dia, 7, 30,
1. Pressione a tecla BACK (Voltar) durante a calibrao. So exibidas
calibragem) 60 ou 90 dias, 6 ou 9 meses, 1 ou 2 anos
trs opes:
OP ID on CAL (ID Inclui uma ID de operador com dados da calibragem
Opo Descrio de opo na Sim ou No (padro). A ID digitada durante a
calibragem) calibragem.
QUIT CAL (Sair da Interrompe a calibrao. Uma nova calibrao
calibrao) precisa ser reiniciada.
Redefinir as opes de calibrao
BACK TO CAL (Voltar Retornar calibrao.
As opes de calibrao podem ser redefinidas para as opes padro
calibrao)
de fbrica.
LEAVE CAL (Deixar a Sair temporariamente da calibrao. O acesso a
calibragem) outros menus permitido. Uma calibrao para um 1. Pressione a tecla MENU e selecione Sensor Setup (Configurao do
segundo sensor (se presente) pode ser iniciada. sensor), [Select Sensor] (Selecionar sensor), Calibrate (Calibrar),
Para retornar calibrao, pressione a tecla Reset Default Cal (Redefinir calibrao padro).
MENU e selecione Sensor Setup (Configurao do
sensor), [Select Sensor] (Selecionar sensor). 2. Digite a senha, caso esta opo esteja habilitada no menu de
segurana do controlador.
2. Use as teclas de seta para selecionar uma das opes e pressione
3. Pressione ENTER. A tela Reset Cal? (Redefinir calibrao?)
ENTER.
mostrada.
Alterar as opes da calibragem 4. Pressione ENTER. Todas as opes de calibrao sero redefinidas
O usurio de definir um lembrete ou incluir uma ID de operador com dados para os valores padro.
da calibragem a partir do menu CAL OPTIONS (Opes da calibragem). 5. Digite a ID do operador, caso esta opo esteja configurada para Yes
(Sim) no menu Calibration Options (Opes de calibrao). Consulte
1. Pressione a tecla MENU e selecione Sensor Setup (Configurao do a seo Alterar as opes da calibragem na pgina 60.
sensor), [Select Sensor] (Selecionar sensor), Calibrate (Calibar), Cal
Options (Opes da calibragem).
60 Portugus
6. Na tela New Sensor (Novo sensor), selecione se o sensor novo: Rotinade manuteno
Opo Descrio O programa de manuteno mostra os tempos mnimos para as tarefas
de manuteno regulares. Efetue as tarefas de manuteno com mais
Sim O sensor no foi calibrado previamente com este controlador. Os dias freqncia para aplicaes que causam sujeira no eltrodo.
de operao e das curvas de calibrao anteriores para o sensor so
redefinidos. Tarefa de manuteno 90 dias
No O sensor foi calibrado previamente com este controlador. Limpar o sensor X
7. Pressione a tecla BACK (Voltar) para retornar tela de medio. Verificar se h danos no sensor X
Medies de impedncia Calibre o sensor Definido pela experincia ou agncias

de regulamentao
Para aumentar a confiabilidade do sistema de medio de pH, o
controlador determina a impedncia dos eletrodos de vidro. Essa medio
realizada a cada minuto. Durante o diagnstico, a leitura de medio de Limpar o sensor
pH permanecer em espera durante 5 segundos. Se uma mensagem de
erro for exibida, consulte Lista de erros na pgina 63 para obter mais ADVERTNCIA
detalhes. Risco qumico. Use sempre proteo de segurana pessoal de acordo com a folha
de dados de segurana do material do produto qumico em uso.
Ativar/desativar a medio de impedncia do sensor:
1. Pressione a tecla MENU e selecione Sensor Setup (Configurao do

ADVERTNCIA
sensor). Risco de leso corporal. A remoo do sensor de um compartimento pressurizado
pode ser perigosa. Reduza a presso do processo para menos de 10 psi antes da
2. Selecione Diag/test (Diagnstico/teste) e pressioneENTER. remoo. Se isso no for possvel, tenha muito cuidado. Consulte a documentao
3. Selecione Imped Status (Status de impedncia) e pressione ENTER. fornecida com o hardware de montagem para obter mais informaes.
4. Selecione Enable/Disable (Ativar/Desativar) e pressioneENTER. Pr-requisito: Prepare uma soluo de limpeza suave com um
detergente no abrasivo para lavar loia que no contenha lanolina. A
Registradores Modbus lanolina deixa uma pelcula na superfcie do eltrodo que pode degradar
Uma lista de registradores Modbus est disponvel para comunicao em o desempenho do sensor.
rede. Visite www.hach.com ou www.hach-lange.com para obter mais Examine periodicamente o sensor para ver se tem detritos ou materiais
informaes. depositados. Limpe o sensor quando existirem depsitos acumulados, ou
quando o desempenho estiver degradado.
Manuteno
1. Use um pano limpo e macio para remover os detritos soltos da
ADVERTNCIA extremidade do sensor. Enxge o sensor com gua limpa e morna.
Risco de leso corporal. Somente pessoal qualificado deve realizar as tarefas 2. Mergulhe o sensor por 2 a 3 minutos em uma soluo de limpeza.
descritas nesta seo do manual. 3. Use uma escova macia para escovar toda a extremidade de medio
do sensor.
Portugus 61
4. Se existirem detritos restantes, mergulhe a extremidade da medio 5. Enxge o sensor com gua e o coloque em uma soluo tampo de
do sensor em uma soluo de cido diludo, como < 5% HCl durante pH 4 ou pH 10. Aguarde que a temperatura do sensor e da soluo
um mximo de 5 minutos. tampo atinjam a temperatura da sala.
5. Enxge o sensor com gua e, ento, o coloque de novo na soluo 6. Compare a leitura de mV na soluo tampo de pH 4 ou 10 com a
de limpeza durante 2 a 3 minutos. leitura na soluo tampo de pH 7. A leitura deve diferir em,
6. Enxge o sensor com gua limpa. aproximadamente, 160 mV.
Se a diferena for menor que 160 mV, contate o suporte tcnico.
Observao: Os sensores com eltrodos de antimnio para aplicaes HF
podem requerer limpeza adicional. Contate o suporte tcnico.
Menu de teste e diagnstico do sensor
Calibre sempre o sensor aps os procedimentos de manuteno. O menu de teste e diagnstico do sensor mostra as informaes atuais e
histricas sobre o instrumento. Consulte a Tabela 3. Para acessar o menu
Soluo de problemas de teste e diagnstico do sensor, pressione a tecla MENU e selecione
Sensor Setup (Configurao do sensor), [Select Sensor] (Selecionar
Dados intermitentes sensor), DIAG/TEST.
Durante a calibragem, os dados no so enviados para o registro de Tabela 3 Menu Sensor DIAG/TEST (Diag/test do sensor)
dados. Dessa forma, o registro de dados pode ter reas nas quais os
dados so intermitentes. Opo Descrio
Testar o sensor de pH MODULE INFORMATION Mostra a verso e o nmero serial do mdulo

(Informaes do mdulo) do sensor.
Pr-requisitos: Duas solues tampo de pH e um multmetro.
Se uma calibragem falhar, complete primeiro os procedimentos de SENSOR INFORMATION Mostra o nome e o nmero serial que foram
manuteno em Manuteno na pgina 61. (Informaes do sensor) digitados pelo usurio.
CAL DAYS (Dias da calibragem) Mostra o nmero de dias desde a ltima

1. Coloque o sensor em uma soluo tampo de pH 7 e aguarde que a calibragem.
temperatura do sensor e da soluo tampo atingem a temperatura
da sala. CAL HISTORY (Histrico da Mostra uma lista e os detalhes de cada
calibragem) calibragem.
2. Desconecte os fios vermelho (ou verde para sensores de 6 plugues)
e branco do mdulo. RESET CAL HISTORY Redefine o histrico da calibragem para o
(Redefinir histrico da sensor (requer cdigo do nvel de servio).
3. Mea a resistncia entre os fios vermelho (ou verde para sensores de calibragem) Todos os dados de calibragem anteriores so
6 plugues) e branco para verificar a operao do elemento da perdidos.
temperatura. A resistncia deve ser entre 1090 e 1105 ohms, a
aproximadamente 25 C. SENSOR SIGNALS (Sinais do Mostra a leitura atual em mV.
Se o elemento da temperatura estiver OK, reconecte os fios no sensor)
mdulo. SENSOR DAYS (Dias do sensor) Mostra o nmero de dias que o sensor esteve
4. Pressione a tecla MENU e selecione Sensor Setup (Configurao do em funcionamento.
sensor), [Select Sensor] (Selecionar sensor), Diag/Test, Sensor
RESET SENSOR DAYS Redefine o nmero de dias que o sensor
Signals (Sinais do sensor). A leitura deve ser entre 50 e + 50 mV.
(Redefinir dias do sensor) esteve em funcionamento.
62 Portugus
Lista de erros Tabela 4 Lista de erros para sensores pH e ORP (continuao)
Podem ocorrer erros por vrias razes. A leitura na tela de medio pisca. Erro Descrio Resoluo
Todas as sadas esto retidas quando especificadas no menu do
controlador. Para mostrar os erros do sensor, pressione a tecla MENU e TEMP TOO HIGH A temperatura medida > Certifique-se de que o
selecione Sensor Diag (Diagnsticos do sensor), [Select Sensor] (Temperatura alta 130 C elemento de temperatura
(Selecionar sensor), Error List (Lista de erros). Uma lista dos erros demais) correto esteja selecionado.
possveis mostrada na Tabela 4. TEMP TOO LOW A temperatura medida
Tabela 4 Lista de erros para sensores pH e ORP (Temperatura baixa <10 C
demais)
Erro Descrio Resoluo
ADC FAILURE (Falha A converso de analgica Desligue e ligue o
PH TOO HIGH (pH alto O pH medido > 14 Calibre ou substitua o do ADC) para digital falhou controlador. Contate o
demais) sensor. suporte tcnico.
ORP TOO HIGH (ORP O valor de ORP medido SAME BUFFER As solues tampo para Complete as etapas em
alto demais) > 2100 mV (Mesma soluo calibragem da soluo Testar o sensor de pH
tampo) tampo de 2 pontos na pgina 62.
PH TOO LOW (pH O pH medido < 0 Calibre ou substitua o possuem o mesmo valor
baixo demais) sensor.
SENSOR MISSING O sensor est faltando ou Examine a fiao e as
ORP TOO LOW (ORP O valor de ORP medido (Sensor ausente) desconectado conexes do sensor e do
baixo demais) < 2100 mV mdulo.
OFFSET TOO HIGH O deslocamento > 9 Siga os procedimentos de TEMP MISSING O sensor de temperatura Examine a fiao do sensor
(Deslocamento alto (pH) ou 200 mV (ORP) manuteno para o sensor (Temperatura ausente) est faltando de temperatura. Certifique-
demais) e, ento, repita a calibragem -se de que o elemento de
ou substitua o sensor. temperatura correto esteja
OFFSET TOO LOW O deslocamento < 5 selecionado.
(Deslocamento baixo (pH) ou 200 mV (ORP)
demais) Vidro com baixa A lmpada est quebrada Substituir o sensor. Contate
impedncia ou alcanou o fim de vida o suporte tcnico.
SLOPE TOO HIGH A inclinao > 62 (pH)/ Repita a calibragem com til
(Inclinao alta 1,3 (ORP) uma amostra ou soluo
demais) tampo nova, ou substitua o
sensor. Lista de avisos para sensores
SLOPE TOO LOW A inclinao < 50 (pH)/ Limpe o sensor e, ento, Um aviso no afeta a operao dos menus, rels e sadas. Um cone de
(Inclinao baixa 0,7 (ORP) repita a calibragem ou aviso pisca e uma mensagem mostrada no fundo da tela de medio.
demais) substitua o sensor. Para mostrar os avisos so sensor, pressione a tecla MENU e selecione
Sensor Diag (Diagnsticos do sensor), [Select Sensor] (Selecionar
sensor), Warning List (Lista de avisos). Uma lista dos avisos possveis
mostrada em Tabela 5.
Portugus 63
Tabela 5 Lista de avisos para sensores analgicos pH e ORP Tabela 5 Lista de avisos para sensores analgicos pH e ORP
(continuao)
Advertncia Descrio Resoluo
Advertncia Descrio Resoluo
PH TOO HIGH (pH alto O pH medido > 13 Calibre ou substitua o
demais) sensor. NOT CALIBRATED O sensor no foi calibrado Calibre o sensor.
(No calibrado)
ORP TOO HIGH (ORP O valor de ORP medido
alto demais) > 2100 mV FLASH FAILURE Memria flash externa Contate o suporte
(FALHA NA MEMRIA falhou tcnico.
PH TOO LOW (pH baixo O pH medido < 1 Calibre ou substitua o FLASH)
demais) sensor.
CAL IN PROGRESS Uma calibragem foi Retornar calibragem.
ORP TOO LOW (ORP O valor de ORP medido (Calibragem em iniciada mas no
baixo demais) < 2100 mV execuo) completada
OFFSET TOO HIGH O deslocamento > 8 (pH) Siga os procedimentos de
(Deslocamento alto ou 200 mV (ORP) manuteno para o Lista de eventos para sensores
demais) sensor e, ento, repita a
calibragem. A lista de eventos mostra as atividades atuais como alteraes da
OFFSET TOO LOW O deslocamento < 6 (pH) configurao, alarmes, condies de aviso, etc. Para mostrar os eventos,
(Deslocamento baixo ou 200 mV (ORP) pressione a tecla MENU e selecione Sensor Diag (Diagnsticos do
demais) sensor), [Select Sensor] (Selecionar sensor), Event List (Lista de
SLOPE TOO HIGH A inclinao > 60 (pH)/ Repita a calibragem com eventos). Uma lista dos eventos possveis mostrada na Tabela 6. Os
(Inclinao alta demais) 1,3 (ORP) uma nova soluo eventos anteriores so gravados no registro de eventos, que pode ser
tampo ou amostra. descarregado a partir do controlador.
SLOPE TOO LOW A inclinao < 54 (pH)/ Limpe o sensor e, ento, Tabela 6 Lista de eventos para sensores pH e ORP
(Inclinao baixa 0,7 (ORP) repita a calibragem.
demais) Evento Descrio
TEMP TOO HIGH A temperatura medida > Certifique-se de que o CAL READY (Calibrao O sensor est preparado para calibrao
(Temperatura alta 100 C elemento de temperatura preparada)
demais) correto usado.
CAL OK (Calibrao OK) A calibrao atual est OK
TEMP TOO LOW A temperatura medida <
TIME EXPIRED (Tempo expirado) O tempo de estabilizao durante a
(Temperatura baixa 0 C
calibrao expirou
demais)
NO BUFFER (Nenhuma soluo No foi detectada nenhuma soluo
CAL OVERDUE O tempo do Cal Reminder Calibre o sensor.
tampo) tampo
(Calibrao expirada) (Lembrete da calibrao)
expirou SLOPE HIGH (Inclinao alta) A inclinao da calibragem maior que o
limite superior
REPLACE SENSOR O sensor esteve em Substitua o sensor.
(Substituir sensor) funcionamento mais de SLOPE LOW (Inclinao baixa) A inclinao da calibragem menor que o
365 dias limite inferior
64 Portugus
Tabela 6 Lista de eventos para sensores pH e ORP (continuao) Tabela 6 Lista de eventos para sensores pH e ORP (continuao)
Evento Descrio Evento Descrio
OFFSET HIGH (Deslocamento alto) O valor do deslocamento da calibragem 1PT AUTO START (Incio Incio da calibragem da soluo tampo de
para o sensor maior que o limite superior automtico de 1 ponto) 1 ponto para pH
OFFSET LOW (Deslocamento O valor do deslocamento da calibragem 2PT MANUAL START (Incio Incio da calibragem da amostra de 2
baixo) para o sensor menor que o limite inferior manual de 2 pontos) pontos para pH
PTS CLOSE (Pontos prximos) Os pontos da calibragem so demasiado 2PT AUTO START (Incio Incio da calibragem da soluo tampo de
semelhantes no valor para uma calibragem automtico de 2 pontos) 2 pontos para pH
de 2 pontos
1PT MANUAL END (Fim manual de Fim da calibragem da amostra de 1 ponto
CAL FAIL (Calibrao com falha) A calibrao falhou 1 ponto)
CAL HIGH (Calibragem alta) O valor da calibrao maior que o limite 1PT AUTO END (Fim automtico de Fim da calibragem da soluo tampo de 1
superior 1 ponto) ponto para pH
UNSTABLE (Instvel) A leitura durante a calibrao estava 2PT MANUAL END (Fim manual de Fim da calibragem da amostra de 2 pontos
instvel 2 pontos) para pH
CHANGE IN CONFIG (Alterao na A configurao foi alteradatipo de ponto 2PT AUTO END (Fim automtico de Fim da calibragem da soluo tampo de 2
configurao), flutuante flutuante 2 pontos) pontos para pH
CHANGE IN CONFIG (Alterao na A configurao foi alteradatipo de texto

configurao), texto Peas e acessrios de reposio
CHANGE IN CONFIG (Alterao na A configurao foi alteradatipo de valor Observao: Os cdigos dos produtos podem variar para algumas regies. Entre
configurao), inteiro inteiro em contato com o distribuidor apropriado ou consulte o website da empresa para
obter informaes de contato.
RESET CONFIG (Redefinir A configurao foi redefinida para as
configurao) opes padro
Descrio Quantidade N de item
POWER ON EVENT (Evento de A energia foi ligada
ligao) Soluo tampo, pH 4 500 mL 2283449
ADC FAILURE (Falha do ADC) A converso do ADC falhou (falha do Soluo tampo, pH 7 500 mL 2283549
hardware)
Soluo tampo, pH 10 500 mL 2283649
FLASH ERASE (Flash apagada) A memria flash foi apagada
Soluo de referncia ORP, 200 mV 500 mL 25M2A1001-115
TEMPERATURE (Temperatura) A temperatura gravada alta demais ou
baixa demais Soluo de referncia ORP, 600 mV 500 mL 25M2A1002-115
1PT MANUAL START (Incio Incio da calibragem da amostra de 1 ponto

manual de 1 ponto)
Portugus 65

0 105 C32 221 F

4.6 m (15 ft)
/ 150 mm (5.9 in.)/33 mm (1.3 in.)-in. NPT

150 mm (5.9 in.)/22 mm (0.875 in.)187
mm (7.4 in.)/22 mm (0.875 in.)

/
/ / 107 m (350 ft)/1050 kPa (100 psi)
100 C 6.9 bar 212 F 100 psi)
2 m/s (6.6 ft/s)
2005 8 12
2002/98/
EC

sc200

1
66
1

2
72
1 3

2 4 2

67
2
1 3
2 4
68
2 pH ORP
6

2 (J4) 1 ACTIVE

2
2
6
8 (J5) 1 2

2 pH ORP
6
8 (J5) 1
6 TEMP
+
7 Temp /
Circuit low

69
1 2
3 4
70
5 6
7 8
71

TEMP ELEMENT pH PT100

PT1000 NTC300
25
CORP

60 60
0
1 pH4

2 4 PURE H2O COMP pH
pH
50 C 50 C
0 pH/
C
LOG SETUP
5 30 1
Configure 2 5 10 15 30
pH ORP 60
RESET
1. MENU Sensor Setup
[Select Sensor DEFAULTS
]Configure
2. ENTER

EDIT NAME
10
SENSOR S/N

16 pH
25 C
DISPLAY pH
FORMAT XX.XX XX.X

TEMP UNITS
C
F

72
pH
1 2 1 2
2 point sample
2 2 pH
75 pH
1 point sample
1 1
1. pH
3
5.
3 6.
Active
Hold

Transfer

7. ENTER

8. ENTER

2. 9. pH
30 ENTER
[Select Sensor pH Cal Options
pH
]Calibrate
10. 2
4.
a.

b. ENTER
2 point buffer
2 2 pH 7 pH 4 c. ENTER.
Cal Options
75
d. pH
1 point buffer
1 1 pH 7Cal ENTER
Options
73
11. 2. MENU Sensor Setup [Select Sensor
]Calibrate
/
3. ENTER 1 Point Sample1
4.
76 76 5.
12. ENTER

13. Calibration Options ID Yes
ID 75 Active
14. New Sensor Hold

Transfer

Yes
6. ENTER
No
7. ENTER
15. ENTER

8. ORP
ENTER
ORP 9.
ORP
/
1.
4
76 76
4 10. ENTER
ID 75
12. New Sensor
Yes

No
13. ENTER

74
2. ENTER

SELECT BUFFER pH pH 4.007.0010.00
DIN 19267pH 1.094.656.799.23
1. 12.75
1 point sample1
2 point sample2
[Select Sensor

]Calibrate
3. 1 PT Temp Cal1 ENTER CAL REMINDER

1 7 30 60 90 6 9
4. ENTER 1 2
5. ENTER OP ID on CAL
ID Yes No
6. ENTER ID ID

BACK
1. BACK 1. MENU Sensor Setup [Select Sensor

]CalibrateReset Default Cal

QUIT CAL
2.
BACK TO CAL 3. ENTER.Reset Cal??

4. ENTER.
LEAVE CAL
MENU ID 75
Sensor Setup[Select Sensor
] 6. New Sensor
2. ENTER
Yes

CAL OPTIONS
ID
No
7. BACK
[Select Sensor
]CalibrateCal Options
75

pH
pH 10 psi
77
/


2. Diag/test/ ENTER
3. Imped Status
ENTER
4. Enable/Disable/ ENTER 1.

Modbus 2. 2 3
Modbus www.hach.com 3.
www.hach-lange.com 4. < 5% HCl
5
5. 2 3
6.
HF

90

X
X pH
pH
76
1. pH 7

(Material Safety Data 2. 6
Sheet)
76
3. 6
25 C 1090
1105 MENU
Sensor Diag[Select Sensor]Error
[Select Sensor List 4
]Diag/Test/Sensor Signals
50 +50 mV 4 pH ORP
5. pH 4 pH 10

PH TOO HIGH
PH PH 14
6. pH 4 10 mV pH 7
160 mV
160 mV ORP TOO HIGH ORP
ORP 2100 mV
PH TOO LOW
PH PH 0
3
MENU Sensor Setup ORP TOO LOW
ORP ORP
[Select Sensor
]DIAG/TEST
/ 2100 mV
3 / OFFSET TOO HIGH 9 (pH)
200 mV (ORP)

OFFSET TOO LOW 5 (pH)
MODULE INFORMATION

200 mV (ORP)
SLOPE TOO HIGH 62 (pH)/1.3

SENSOR INFORMATION

(ORP)
SLOPE TOO LOW

50 (pH)/0.7
CAL DAYS
(ORP)
CAL HISTORY

TEMP TOO HIGH
130 C
RESET CAL HISTORY

TEMP TOO LOW
10 C
SENSOR SIGNALS
mV
SENSOR DAYS ADC FAILUREA/D

RESET SENSOR DAYS

SAME BUFFER
2 pH 76

77
4 pH ORP 5 pH ORP

SENSOR MISSING TEMP TOO HIGH

100 C

TEMP TOO LOW
0 C
TEMP MISSING

CAL OVERDUE
GLASS IMP LOW

REPLACE SENSOR
365
IMP
NOT CALIBRATED

FLASH FAILURE

MENU Sensor CAL IN PROGRESS

Diag[Select Sensor
]Warning List

5
5 pH ORP

MENU Sensor Diag
[Select Sensor

PH TOO HIGH
PH PH 13 ]Event List
6

ORP TOO HIGH
ORP ORP
2100 mV 6 pH ORP
PH TOO LOW
PH PH 1
ORP TOO LOW

ORP ORP CAL READY
2100 mV
CAL OK

OFFSET TOO HIGH
8 (pH)
200 mV (ORP) TIME EXPIRED

OFFSET TOO LOW

6 (pH) NO BUFFER

200 mV (ORP)
SLOPE HIGH

SLOPE TOO HIGH
60 (pH)/1.3
SLOPE LOW

(ORP)
OFFSET HIGH

SLOPE TOO LOW
54 (pH)/0.7
(ORP) OFFSET LOW

78
6 pH ORP

pH 4 500 mL 2283449
PTS CLOSE
2
pH 7 500 mL 2283549
CAL FAIL

pH 10 500 mL 2283649
CAL HIGH
ORP 200 mV 500 mL 25M2A1001-115
UNSTABLE
ORP 600 mV 500 mL 25M2A1002-115
CHANGE IN CONFIG float

CHANGE IN CONFIG text

CHANGE IN CONFIG int

RESET CONFIG

POWER ON EVENT

ADC FAILUREA/D A/D
FLASH ERASE
TEMPERATURE
1PT MANUAL START

1 1
1PT AUTO START

1 pH 1
2PT MANUAL START

2 pH 2
2PT AUTO START

2 pH 2
1PT MANUAL END1 1
1PT AUTO END

1 pH 1
2PT MANUAL END2 pH 2
2PT AUTO END

2 pH 2
79

1

0 105 C(32 221 F)

4.6 m(15 )

(/) : 150 mm(5.9 )/33 mm (1.3 )
NPT; :150 mm(5.9 )/22 mm(0.875 );
:187 mm(7.4 )/22 mm(0.875 )

/ 107 m(350)/1050 kPa(100 psi)

100C 6.9 bar( 212 F 100 psi)

2 m/s(6.6 /s)
Web

2005
8 12
EU 2002/98/EC

:

80

sc200

1

1
2

86
1 -T 3 -

2 -T 4 -2T

81
2
1 3
2 4
82
2 pHORP
6

2(J4) 1
2
2
: (6
) 8 (J5) 1 2

:
2 pHORP
6

8(J5) 1
6 +
7 -/
83
1 2
3 4
84
5 6
7 8
85

pH-PT100PT1000()
NTC300

(: 25)ORP-

1pH4 FILTER()

() -0()60(60
24 )

PURE H2O COMP( pH-pH
H2O ) -()
50
50

pH ORP (: 0 pH/)

LOG SETUP(
1. MENU[] -5301251015()
3060
2. ENTER RESET DEFAULTS(
UPDOWN )

EDIT NAME()

10 1

SENSOR S/N(S/N)

16

DISPLAYFORMAT( pH- 25
) XX.XX()XX.X pH
TEMP UNITS() ()F
86
4.
2 2 (: pH 7 pH 4 ())
pH [Cal Options ()]
(
12(12) 89 )
( 89) 1 1 (: pH 7)

1.
( 3) 2 pH2
pH
3
1 1 pH

5.

6.

2.
30 7. ENTER
3. MENU[]
8. ENTER
:
9. 2pH
[ENTER ()]
: pH
pH
10. 22()
87
a. 1. ( 4)
b. ENTER
c. [ENTER ()]
: 4
d. 2pH
[ENTER ()]
11. :
Passed ()-

Failed ()-

90
91
12. [ENTER ()]
13. [Calibration Options ()] ID 2. MENU[]
[Yes ()] ID
89
3. ENTER1
14. [New Sensor ()] 4.

5.

Yes

No
15. [ENTER ()]

:
6. ENTER

ORP 7. ENTER
ORP :
8. 2ORP
ENTER
88
9. : 5. ENTER
6. [ENTER ()]
Passed ()-

Failed ()- BACK

90 1. BACK3:
91

10. [ENTER ()]
QUIT CAL(
11. [Calibration Options ()] ID
)
[Yes ()] ID
89 BACK TO
CAL(
)
12. [New Sensor ()]
LEAVE CAL(
) 2()
MENU
[]
Yes
2. 1ENTER
No

13. [ENTER ()]
ID

: 1. MENU[]

2. ENTER
1. pH-pH 4.00
7.0010.00()DIN 19267(pH 1.094.65

6.799.2312.75)
2. MENU[] : 1 2

3. 1 PT Temp Cal(1)ENTER
4. ENTER
89
92

-( /:
)73060906912
1. [MENU ()] [Sensor Setup ()]
ID-(
)ID
ID 2. [Diag/test (/)] [ENTER ()]
3. [Imped Status ()] [ENTER ()]

4. [Enable/Disable (/)] [ENTER ()]

1. MENU[]
Modbus
2. Modbus
www.hach.com www.hach-lange.com
3. [ENTER ()] [Reset Cal?]
4. [ENTER ()]

5. [Calibration Options ()] ID
[Yes ()] ID

89

6. [New Sensor ()]

Yes 90

X
No
X
7. BACK

pH
pH
5
90
pH
: 2pH
90

1. pH 7

10 psi 2. (6)

3. (6)
: 25C
1090 1105

4. MENU[]/
50 mV+50 mV

1. 5. pH 4pH 10

2. 23 6. pH 410mVpH 7
3. 160 mV
160 mV
4. < 5% HCl
5

5. 23 3
6. MENU[
: HF ]/

3 /

91
3 / 4 pHORP

OFFSET TOO >

HIGH( 9(pH)200
CAL HISTORY() ) mV(ORP)
RESET CAL HISTORY( ( OFFSET TOO <
) ) LOW( 5(pH)200
) mV(ORP)
SENSOR SIGNALS( mV SLOPE TOO > 62(pH)/
) HIGH( 1.3(ORP)
)
SENSOR DAYS(
) SLOPE TOO < 50(pH)/
LOW( 0.7(ORP)
)
TEMP TOO HIGH > 130

()
TEMP TOO LOW ( < -10

)
MENU
[] ADC FAILURE( -
4 )

4 pHORP
SAME BUFFER( 2 pH 91
)
PH TOO HIGH(PH pH > 14 SENSOR
) MISSING(
)
ORP TOO ORP >
HIGH(ORP 2100 mV TEMP MISSING(
) )

PH TOO LOW(PH pH < 0
) GLASS IMP LOW (

ORP TOO ORP <
)
LOW(ORP -2100 mV
)
92
5 pHORP

MENU[ REPLACE SENSOR( 365

] 5 )
NOT CALIBRATED()
5 pHORP
FLASH FAILURE(
)
PH TOO HIGH(PH pH > 13
) CAL IN PROGRESS(
)
ORP TOO HIGH(ORP ORP > 2100
) mV

PH TOO LOW(PH pH < 1
)
MENU
ORP TOO LOW(ORP ORP < -2100 []
) mV 6

OFFSET TOO HIGH( > 8(pH)
) 200 mV(ORP)> 6 pHORP

OFFSET TOO LOW( < 6(pH)
) 200 mV(ORP)
CAL READY()
SLOPE TOO HIGH( > 60(pH)/
) 1.3(ORP) CAL OK()

TIME EXPIRED()
SLOPE TOO LOW( < 54(pH)/
) 0.7(ORP) NO BUFFER()
TEMP TOO HIGH( > 100 SLOPE HIGH()

) SLOPE LOW()

TEMP TOO LOW( < 0 OFFSET HIGH()
)
CAL OVERDUE( OFFSET LOW()
)
93
6 pHORP 6 pHORP

PTS CLOSE(PTS) 2 2PT MANUAL END(2) pH2
CAL FAIL() 2PT AUTO END(2) pH2
CAL HIGH()

UNSTABLE()
:
CHANGE IN CONFIG float( -
) Web
CHANGE IN CONFIG float( -
)
CHANGE IN CONFIG int( ) - pH 4 500 mL 2283449

RESET CONFIG() pH 7 500 mL 2283549

pH 10 500 mL 2283649
POWER ON EVENT()
ORP200 mV 500 mL 25M2A1001-115
ADC FAILURE() ADC(
) ORP600 mV 500 mL 25M2A1002-115
FLASH ERASE(
)
TEMPERATURE()

1PT MANUAL START(1) 1
1PT AUTO START(1) pH1
2PT MANUAL START(2) pH2
2PT AUTO START(2) pH2
1PT MANUAL END(1) 1
1PT AUTO END(1) pH1
94

.
.
1

0 ~ 105 C(32 ~ 221 F) .
4.6 m(15 ft)

(/) : 150 mm(5.9 )/33 mm(1.3 ), - NPT,
: 150 mm(5.9 )/22 mm(0.875 ), : 187 mm(7.4 .
)/22 mm(0.875 )

,
.
/ 107 m(350 ft)/1050 kPa(100 psi) .
100 C 6.9 bar(212 F 100 psi)

2 m/s(6.6 ft/s) .
.
.

.
,
, ,
.
.
. .

. .
.

.

95
1
.
2005 8 12
. (EU
2002/98/EC)
.
:
,
.

. .
sc200
.
.
. 1 .
1 3

2 4 2

. .
96
2 .
. 101
.
.
.
.
1 3
2 4
97
2 pH ORP combination
6-
8-(J5) 1
.
. 2
3

. 4
,
5

. 6 +
7 /

.
. 8
2-(J4) 1
2
2
.
: combination . combination ( 6- )
. 8-(J5) 1 2 .
:
.
98
1 2
3 4
99
5 6
7 8
100

pH PT100,
PT1000() NTC300 .

( : 25 C).
. . ORP .
. .
. .
1 , pH 4 () . 0( ,
) ~ 60(60 )
. 2~4
. .
H2O pH pH
. (),
. , 50 C
, 50 C .
(: 0 pH/C)
ID .
. pH ORP
.
. 5, 30 , 1, 2, 5, 10, 15(), 30, 60
1. MENU , [ ], . RESET .
2. ENTER . , DEFAULTS( .
)

. .

.
, , 10
. .
. .
S/N , ,
16 .

.
pH 25 C
XX.XX() XX.X .
pH .
C() F . .
.
.
101
pH 5. .
1 2 (1 2 ) 6. .
. .
( 104 ).
1. . .
( 3). .
.
3 .
7. ENTER .
.
8. ENTER .
: .
9. , pH .
ENTER .
: pH ,
pH .
10. 2 , ( ) .
a. .
2. . b. ENTER .
30 . c. . ENTER() .
3. MENU , [ ], . : .
d. , pH .
4. .
ENTER .
11. .
2 2(: pH 7 pH 4) ( ). - .
(
/ .
104 ).
1 1(: pH 7) . - .
. .
105 105 .
2 pH 2 .
pH . 12. ENTER .
13. ID ID
1 1 . pH
. . 104 .
102
14. . 5. .
. .
.
.
.
.
15. ENTER . .

6. ENTER .
.
: .
. 7. ENTER .
: .
ORP
8. , ORP
ORP .
. ENTER .
1. . 9. .
( 4).
- .
4 / .
- .
.
105 105 .
10. ENTER .
11. ID ID
. 104 .
12. .
.
.
2. MENU , [ ], . .
3. ENTER 1 . 13. ENTER .
4. .
.
:
.
103
2. ENTER .
.
.
pH pH 4.00,
1. . 7.00, 10.00( ) DIN 19267(pH 1.09, 4.65, 6.79, 9.23,
. 12.75) .
2. MENU , [ ], . : 1 2
.
3. 1 ENTER .
, ((
4. ENTER . ), 1 , 7, 30, 60 90, 6 9, 1 2 ).
5. ENTER .
ID ( (
6. ENTER . )). ID .
ID

BACK .
.
1. BACK . .
1. MENU , [ ], ,

.
. . 2. .
. 3. ENTER() . ? .

4. ENTER() .
. .
. ( ) .
5. ID ID
MENU , [ ]
. . 104 .
6. .
2. ENTER .

.
CAL OPTIONS .
ID .
.
1. MENU , [ ], ,
. 7. BACK .
104

pH
. . pH

5 . ,
106 . .
/ .
. .
1. MENU .
10 psi .
2. / ENTER . .
.
3. ENTER .
4. / ENTER . :
.
Modbus .
Modbus . .
www.hach.com www.hach-lange.com . .
1.
. .
2. 2~3 .
. . 3.
.

4. < 5% HCl
. 5 .
5. 2~3 .
.
6. .
90 : HF
. .
X
X .

.

.
.
105
pH 3 / ()
: pH .
105
. mV .
.
1. pH 7
. .
2. ( 6- )
.
3. ( 6- ) .
. 25 C 1090 . .
~ 1105 ohm . MENU , [ ],
. . 4 .
4. MENU , [ ], /, 4 pH ORP
. -50 ~ +50 mV .

5. pH 4 pH 10 .
. PH pH 14 .
6. pH 4 10 mV pH 7 . .
160 mV . ORP ORP 2100
160 mV . mV .
PH pH 0 .
.
.
3 . MENU ORP ORP -2100
, [ ], / . mV .
3 / 9(pH) 200
mV(ORP) .
.
5(pH)
. 200 mV(ORP)
.
.
62(pH)/
. 1.3(ORP) . .
. 50(pH)/
( ). 0.7(ORP) . .
.
106
4 pH ORP () 5 pH ORP ()

130 C 8(pH) 200

. . mV(ORP) .
.
10 C 6(pH) 200
. mV(ORP) .
ADC - . 60(pH)/1.3(ORP)
. . . .
2 pH 106 54(pH)/0.7(ORP)
. . . .
100 C
. . . .
. . 0 C .

.
.
GLASS IMP . .
LOW . .
365 .
.

. .
,
. .
MENU , [ ], . .
. 5 .
.
5 pH ORP .

PH pH 13 .
, , .
.
ORP ORP 2100 mV MENU , [ ],
. . 6 .

PH pH 1. .
.
ORP ORP -2100 mV
.
107
6 pH ORP 6 pH ORP ()

. 2 pH 2
. 1 1
. 1 pH 1
. 2 pH 2
. 2 pH 2
.

.
: .
. .
PTS 2 .

.
, pH 4 500 mL 2283449
.
, pH 7 500 mL 2283549
.
, pH 10 500 mL 2283649
- .
ORP , 200 mV 500 mL 25M2A1001-115
- .
ORP , 600 mV 500 mL 25M2A1002-115
- .
ADC ADC ( ).
1 1
1 pH 1
2 pH 2
108

0 105 C (32 221 F)

4.6 . (15 )
(/) : 150 . (5.9 )/33 . (1.3 ), NPT;

: 150 . (5.9 )/22 . (0.875 ):
187 . (7.4 )/22 . (0.875 )

/ 107 . (350 )/1050 kPa (100 psi)

6.9 100 C (100 psi 212 F)
2 m/s (6.6 ft/s)

/

109
1

12 2005
(EU Directive 2002/98/EC)

:

sc200
1 - 3 -

2 - 4 -
2
110
2
115

1 3
2 4
111
2 pH ORP
6
8 (J5) 1
2
4
5

6 +
7 -/

8
2 (J4) 1
2 2
:
( 6 )
, 1 2 8 (J5)
:
112
1 2
3 4
113
5 6
7 8
114

pH-
PT100, PT1000 () NTC300
(:
ORP-

-0 ( ) 60 (
60 )

> 1 pH pH- pH
4 () 2-4 - ()
50 C 50 C
(: 0 pH/
C)
-5, 30 1, 2, 5, 10, 15
() 30, 60

pH ORP

1. MENU []
2. ENTER

10

16 pH 25 C

pH-
XX.XX () XX.X
C () F
115
pH
1 2 ( 1 2 )
2 2 pH pH
(
118)
1 1 pH

1.
( 3) 5.
6. :
3

7. ENTER

8. ENTER
:
9. pH
2. 30 ENTER
: pH pH
3. []
4. : 10. 2 ():
a.
b. ENTER
2 2 pH 7 pH 4 ( c. ENTER
) (
118) :
d. pH
1 1 pH 7
ENTER
116
11. : 4
- /

-
119
120
12. ENTER
13. ID ID
118
14. :

2. []
3. ENTER 1
4.
15. ENTER 5. :

:

ORP
ORP
1. 6. ENTER
( 4)
7. ENTER
:
8. ORP
ENTER
117
9. :
- /

1. :
-
119
120
10. ENTER
11. ID ID
118
12. : ()
[]

2. ENTER

ID
13. ENTER

1. []
: 2. ENTER

pH-
pH 4.00, 7.00, 10.00 () DIN 19267 (pH
1.09, 4.65, 6.79, 9.23, 12.75)
: 1 2
1.
- (
2. [] ) 1 7, 30, 60 90 6 9 1 2
3. 1 PT Temp Cal ENTER ID ID - () ID

4. ENTER
5. ENTER

6. ENTER
118
1. []
2.
3. ENTER
4. ENTER
5. ID ID
118
6. :

90
X

X
7.

pH

pH 5
120
(MSDS)
/:
1. MENU
2. / ENTER 10
3. ENTER psi
4. / ENTER
Modbus :

Modbus www.hach.com
www.hach-lange.com

1.
119
2. 2 3
3.
4. < %% HCI 3 [
5 ] /
5. 2 3
3 /
6.
: HF

()

pH mV
: pH
119
1. pH 7

2. ( 6 )
3. ( 6 )
1090 1105 []
25 C 4

4. [] / 4 pH ORP
-50 + 50 mV

5. pH 4 pH 10
pH pH > 14
6. mV pH 4 pH 10 pH 7 ORP ORP > 2100 mV
160 mV
160 mV
120
4 pH ORP ()

pH pH < 0 [] 5
ORP ORP < 5 pH ORP
-2100 mV

> 9 (pH) 200
mV (ORP) pH pH > 13
< 5 (pH) ORP ORP > 2100 mV
-200 mV (ORP)
pH pH < 1
> 62 (pH)/1.3
(ORP) ORP ORP < -2100 mV
< 50 (pH)/0.7 > 8 (pH) 200 mV
(ORP) (ORP)
> 130C < 6 (pH) -200 mV
(ORP)
< -10C
> 60 (pH)/1.3 (ORP)
ADC

< 54 (pH)/0.7 (ORP)
pH
2 120
> 100 C

< 0 C

> 365
GLASS IMP LOW

121
6 pH ORP ()

[]
6 -

6 pH ORP
ADC ADC ()
1 1
1 1 pH
2 2
2 2 pH
1 1
2 1 1 pH
2 2 pH
2 2 pH

- :

122

pH 4 500 . 2283449
pH 7 500 . 2283549
pH 10 500 . 2283649
ORP 200 mV 500 . 25M2A1001-115
ORP 600 mV 500 . 25M2A1002-115
123
www.hach.com
Hach Company, 2010. All rights reserved. Printed in the U.S.A.
DOC023.97.80047
sc200 Conductivity Module

04/2014, Edition 3
User Manual
Manuel d'utilisation
Manual del usuario
Manual do Usurio

English .............................................................................................................................. 3
Franais ...........................................................................................................................9
Espaol ..........................................................................................................................15
Portugus ......................................................................................................................21
.................................................................................................................................27
.............................................................................................................................33
.................................................................................................................................39
....................................................................................................................................45
2
Specifications
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Table 1 Contacting conductivity
Measuring range Cell constant 0.05: 0100 S/cm
Cell constant 0.1: 0200 S/cm
Cell constant 0.5: 01000 S/cm
Cell constant 1: 02000 S/cm
Cell constant 5: 010,000 S/cm
Cell constant 10: 0200,000 S/cm
Response time 0.5 seconds
Repeatability/precision (020 S/cm) 0.1/0.1 S/cm
Precision (20200,000 S/cm) 0.5% of reading
Maximum cable length 91 m (300 ft)
Warranty 1 year; 2 years (EU)
Table 2 Inductive conductivity

Linearity 1.5 mS/cm: 1% of reading; < 1.5 mS/cm: 15 S/cm
Measuring range 02000 mS/cm
Response time 0.5 seconds
Precision1 > 500 S/cm: 0.5% of reading; < 500 S/cm: 5 S/cm
Maximum cable length 200 to 2000 S/cm: 61 m (200 ft); 2000 to 2,000,000 S/cm: 91 m (300 ft)
Warranty 1 year; 2 years (EU)

1 Radio frequency fields inthe 700800 MHz range can cause inaccurate results.
General information
In no event will the manufacturer be liable for direct, indirect, special, incidental or consequential
damages resulting from any defect or omission in this manual. The manufacturer reserves the right to
make changes in this manual and the products it describes at any time, without notice or obligation.
Revised editions are found on the manufacturers website.
Safety information
NOTICE
The manufacturer is not responsible for any damages due to misapplication or misuse of this product including,
without limitation, direct, incidental and consequential damages, and disclaims such damages to the full extent
permitted under applicable law. The user is solely responsible to identify critical application risks and install
appropriate mechanisms to protect processes during a possible equipment malfunction.
Please read this entire manual before unpacking, setting up or operating this equipment. Pay
attention to all danger and caution statements. Failure to do so could result in serious injury to the
operator or damage to the equipment.
English 3
Make sure that the protection provided by this equipment is not impaired. Do not use or install this
equipment in any manner other than that specified in this manual.
Use of hazard information
DANGER
Indicates a potentially or imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
Indicates a potentially or imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious
injury.
CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that may result in minor or moderate injury.
NOTICE
Indicates a situation which, if not avoided, may cause damage to the instrument. Information that requires special
emphasis.
Precautionary labels
Read all labels and tags attached to the instrument. Personal injury or damage to the instrument
could occur if not observed. A symbol on the instrument is referenced in the manual with a
precautionary statement.
This symbol, if noted on the instrument, references the instruction manual for operation and/or safety
information.
This symbol indicates that a risk of electrical shock and/or electrocution exists.
This symbol indicates the presence of devices sensitive to Electro-static Discharge (ESD) and
indicates that care must be taken to prevent damage with the equipment.
Electrical equipment marked with this symbol may not be disposed of in European public disposal
systems after 12 August of 2005. In conformity with European local and national regulations (EU
Directive 2002/96/EC), European electrical equipment users must now return old or end-of-life
equipment to the Producer for disposal at no charge to the user.
Product overview
The module, when installed in an sc200 controller, allows an analog sensor to connect to the
controller. For calibration and operation of the sensor, refer to the sensor user manual for use with
the sc200 controller.
Modbus registers
A list of Modbus registers is available for network communication. Refer to www.hach.com or
www.hach-lange.com for more information.
4 English
Installation
WARNING
Multiple hazards. Only qualified personnel must conduct the tasks described in this section of the
document.
Connect the sensor to the module

WARNING
Potential Electrocution Hazard. Always disconnect power to the instrument when making electrical
connections.
WARNING
Electrocution Hazard. High voltage wiring for the controller is conducted behind the high voltage barrier in the
controller enclosure. The barrier must remain in place except when installing modules, or when a qualified
installation technician is wiring for power, relays or analog and network cards.
NOTICE
Potential Instrument Damage. Delicate internal electronic components can be damaged by static
electricity, resulting in degraded performance or eventual failure.
Make sure that the routing of the sensor cable prevents exposure to high electromagnetic fields (e.g.,
transmitters, motors and switching equipment). Exposure to these fields can cause inaccurate
results.
To install the module and connect the sensor, refer to the illustrated steps that follow and the wiring
table (Table 3 and Table 4).
Be sure to connect all sensor ground/shield wires to the controller enclosure grounding screws.
Note: If the sensor cable is not long enough to reach the controller, an interconnect cable and junction box are
required to extend the distance.
Table 3 Conductivity sensor wiring
Terminal Description Sensor
83xx that uses 83xx that uses 3400 series GLI 3700 series GLI
Z08319=A=1115 Z08319=A=00xx
1 Inner electrode Black White (yellow Black Green

connector)
2 Signal ground/Temp Yellow
3 Inner shield Clear
4 Shield Black
7 Temp White Black Blue
9 Shield Transparent and White (2x) (orange Clear

transparent (foil) connector)
10 Temp Blue Blue White Red
English 5
Table 3 Conductivity sensor wiring (continued)
83xx that uses 83xx that uses 3400 series GLI 3700 series GLI
Z08319=A=1115 Z08319=A=00xx
11 Outer electrode/Receive Red Red Red White

high
12 Receive low Blue
Notes: Connect the clear

wire with the black
band to the
controller housing.
Table 4 Conductivity sensor wiring

Crison 5395 and Crison 5390 and 5399 with LZY082

5396 with AS9 cable MP5 cable
1 Inner electrode Outer stranded wire Gray and red Copper (red connector)
(copper)
2 Signal ground/Temp
3 Inner shield Shield
7 Temp White and brown Green and gray
9 Shield
10 Temp Pink and yellow Pink
11 Outer electrode/Receive high Transparent (core) Green and blue White
12 Receive low
Notes: The brown wire is not

used.
6 English
English 7
8 English
Caractristiques
Les caractristiques techniques peuvent tre modifies sans pravis.
Tableau 1 Conductivit de contact
Caractristique Dtails
Plage de mesures Constante de cellule 0.05 : 0100 S/cm
Constante de cellule 0.1 : 0200 S/cm
Constante de cellule 0.5 : 01000 S/cm
Constante de cellule 1 : 02000 S/cm
Constante de cellule 5 : 010,000 S/cm
Constante de cellule 10 : 0200,000 S/cm
Temps de rponse 0.5 seconde
Rptabilit/prcision (020 S/cm) 0,1/0,1 S/cm
Prcision (20200,000 S/cm) 0,5 % de la mesure
Longueur de cble maximum 91 m (300 ft)
Garantie 1 an, 2 ans (UE)
Tableau 2 Conductivit inductive

Caractristique Dtails
Linarit 1,5 mS/cm : 1% de la valeur affiche ; < 1,5 mS/cm : 15 S/cm
Plage de mesures 02000 mS/cm
Temps de rponse 0.5 seconde
Prcision1 > 500 S/cm : 0,5 % de la valeur affiche ; < 500 S/cm : 5 S/cm
Longueur de cble maximum 200 2000 S/cm : 61 m (200 pi) ; 2000 2 000 000 S/cm : 91 m (300 pi)
Garantie 1 an, 2 ans (UE)

1 Les champs de radiofrquence sur une plage de 700 800 MHz peuvent entraner des rsultats inexacts.
Gnralits
En aucun cas le constructeur ne saurait tre responsable des dommages directs, indirects, spciaux,
accessoires ou conscutifs rsultant d'un dfaut ou d'une omission dans ce manuel. Le constructeur
se rserve le droit d'apporter des modifications ce manuel et aux produits dcrits tout moment,
sans avertissement ni obligation. Les ditions rvises se trouvent sur le site Internet du fabricant.
Consignes de scurit
AVIS
Le fabricant dcline toute responsabilit quant aux dgts lis une application ou un usage inappropris de ce
produit, y compris, sans toutefois s'y limiter, des dommages directs ou indirects, ainsi que des dommages
conscutifs, et rejette toute responsabilit quant ces dommages dans la mesure o la loi applicable le permet.
L'utilisateur est seul responsable de la vrification des risques d'application critiques et de la mise en place de
mcanismes de protection des processus en cas de dfaillance de l'quipement.
Veuillez lire l'ensemble du manuel avant le dballage, la configuration ou la mise en fonctionnement

de cet appareil. Respectez toutes les dclarations de prudence et d'attention. Le non-respect de
cette procdure peut conduire des blessures graves de l'oprateur ou des dgts sur le matriel.
Franais 9
Assurez-vous que la protection fournie avec cet appareil n'est pas dfaillante. N'utilisez ni n'installez
cet appareil d'une faon diffrente de celle dcrite dans ce manuel.
Interprtation des indications de risques
DANGER
Indique une situation de danger potentiel ou imminent qui, si elle n'est pas vite, entrane des blessures graves,
voire mortelles.
AVERTISSEMENT
Indique une situation de danger potentiel ou imminent qui, si elle n'est pas vite, peut entraner des blessures
graves, voire mortelles.
ATTENTION
Indique une situation de danger potentiel qui peut entraner des blessures mineures ou lgres.
AVIS
Indique une situation qui, si elle n'est pas vite, peut occasionner l'endommagement du matriel. Informations
ncessitant une attention particulire.
Etiquettes de mise en garde

Lisez toutes les tiquettes et tous les repres apposs sur linstrument. Des personnes peuvent se
blesser et le matriel peut tre endommag si ces instructions ne sont pas respectes. Un symbole
sur l'appareil est dsign dans le manuel avec une instruction de mise en garde.
Si l'appareil comporte ce symbole, reportez-vous au manuel d'utilisation pour consulter les

informations de fonctionnement et de scurit.
Ce symbole indique qu'il existe un risque de choc lectrique et/ou d'lectrocution.
Ce symbole indique la prsence d'appareils sensibles aux dcharges lectrostatiques et indique que
des prcautions doivent tre prises afin d'viter d'endommager l'quipement.
En Europe, depuis le 12 aot 2005, les appareils lectriques comportant ce symbole ne doivent pas
tre jets avec les autres dchets. Conformment la rglementation nationale et europenne
(Directive 2002/96/CE), les appareils lectriques doivent dsormais tre, la fin de leur service,
renvoys par les utilisateurs au fabricant, qui se chargera de les liminer ses frais.
Prsentation du produit
Le module, quand il est install dans un contrleur sc200, permet le branchement d'un capteur
analogique au contrleur. Pour l'talonnage et le fonctionnement du capteur, consultez le manuel
d'utilisateur du capteur avec le contrleur sc200.
Registres Modbus
Une liste de registres Modbus est disponible pour la communication rseau. Consulter
www.hach.com ou www.hach-lange.com pour plus d'informations.
10 Franais
Installation
AVERTISSEMENT
Dangers multiples. Seul le personnel qualifi doit effectuer les tches dtailles dans cette section du
document.
Branchement du capteur au module

AVERTISSEMENT
Risque potentiel d'lectrocution Coupez systmatiquement l'alimentation de l'appareil lors de
branchements lectriques.
AVERTISSEMENT
Risque d'lectrocution Le cblage haute tension du transmetteur est effectu derrire l'cran de protection
haute tension du botier du transmetteur. L'cran de protection doit rester en place, sauf lors de l'installation de
modules ou l'installation par un technicien qualifi du cblage d'alimentation, de relais ou de cartes analogiques
et rseau.
AVIS
Dgt potentiel sur l'appareil Les composants lectroniques internes de l'appareil peuvent tre
endommags par l'lectricit statique, qui risque d'altrer ses performances et son fonctionnement.
Assurez-vous que le trac du cble du capteur vite l'exposition des champs lectromagntiques
importants (ex. : metteurs, moteurs et quipement de commutation). Une exposition ces champs
peut entraner des rsultats inexacts.
Pour mettre en place le module et brancher le capteur, consultez les tapes illustres et le tableau
de cblage (Tableau 3 et Tableau 4).
Veillez bien raccorder tous les cbles blinds/de masse du capteur aux vis de mise la masse du
botier du transmetteur.
Remarque : Si le cble du capteur n'est pas suffisamment long pour atteindre le contrleur, un cble
d'interconnexion et une bote de drivation sont indispensables pour le rallonger.
Tableau 3 Cblage du capteur de conductivit
Borne Description Capteur
83xx utilisant 83xx utilisant GLI srie 3400 GLI srie 3700
Z08319=A=1115 Z08319=A=00xx
1 Electrode interne Noir Blanc (connecteur Noir Vert

jaune)
2 Masse de signal/Temp Jaune
3 Ecran interne Transparent
4 Blindage Noir
7 Temp Blanc Noir Bleu
9 Blindage Transparent et Blanc (2x) (connecteur Transparent

transparent (film) orange)
10 Temp Bleu Bleu Blanc Rouge
Franais 11
Tableau 3 Cblage du capteur de conductivit (suite)
83xx utilisant 83xx utilisant GLI srie 3400 GLI srie 3700
Z08319=A=1115 Z08319=A=00xx
11 Electrode Rouge Rouge Rouge Blanc

externe/Rception haut
12 Rception bas Bleu
Remarques : Connectez le cble

transparent avec la
bande noire au botier
du transmetteur.
Tableau 4 Cblage du capteur de conductivit

Crison 5395 et 5396 avec Crison 5390 et 5399 avec LZY082

cble AS9 cble MP5
1 Electrode interne Conducteur externe Gris et rouge Cuivre (connecteur rouge)

(cuivre)
2 Masse de signal/Temp
3 Ecran interne Blindage
7 Temp Blanc et marron Vert et gris
9 Blindage
10 Temp Rose et jaune Rose
11 Electrode externe/Rception Transparent (me) Vert et bleu Blanc

haut
12 Rception bas
Remarques : Le cble marron n'est pas

utilis.
12 Franais
Franais 13
14 Franais
Especificaciones
Las especificaciones estn sujetas a cambios sin previo aviso.
Tabla 1 Conductividad por contacto
Rango de medicin Constante de la celda 0.05: 0100 S/cm
Constante de la celda 0.1: 0-200 S/cm
Constante de la celda 0.5: 01000 S/cm
Constante de la celda 1: 0-2000 S/cm
Constante de la celda 5: 0-10.000 S/cm
Constante de la celda 10: 0-200.000 S/cm
Tiempo de respuesta 0,5 segundos
Repetibilidad/precisin (0-20 S/cm) 0.1/0.1 S/cm
Precisin (20-200,000 S/cm) 0,5% de la lectura
Largo mximo del cable 91 m (300 pies)
Garanta 1 ao; 2 aos (UE)
Tabla 2 Conductividad inductiva

Linealidad 1.5 mS/cm: 1% de la lectura; < 1.5 mS/cm: 15 S/cm
Rango de medicin 02000 mS/cm
Tiempo de respuesta 0,5 segundos
Precisin1 > 500 S/cm: 0.5% de lectura; < 500 S/cm: 5 S/cm
Largo mximo del cable 200 a 2000 S/cm: 61 m (200 pies); 2000 a 2,000,000 S/cm: 91 m (300 pies)
Garanta 1 ao; 2 aos (UE)

1 Los campos de radiofrecuencia en el rango de 700800 MHz pueden provocar resultados imprecisos.
Informacin general
En ningn caso el fabricante ser responsable de ningn dao directo, indirecto, especial, accidental
o resultante de un defecto u omisin en este manual. El fabricante se reserva el derecho a modificar
este manual y los productos que describen en cualquier momento, sin aviso ni obligacin. Las
ediciones revisadas se encuentran en la pgina web del fabricante.
Informacin de seguridad
AVISO
El fabricante no es responsable de ningn dao debido a un mal uso de este producto incluyendo, sin limitacin,
daos directos, fortuitos o circunstanciales y reclamaciones sobre los daos que no estn recogidos en la
legislacin vigente. El usuario es el responsable de la identificacin de los riesgos crticos y de tener los
mecanismos adecuados de proteccin de los procesos en caso de un posible mal funcionamiento del equipo.
Lea todo el manual antes de desembalar, instalar o trabajar con este equipo. Ponga atencin a
todas las advertencias y avisos de peligro. El no hacerlo puede provocar heridas graves al usuario o
daos al equipo.
Espaol 15
Asegrese de que la proteccin proporcionada por el equipo no est daada. No utilice ni instale
este equipo de manera distinta a lo especificado en este manual.
Uso de la informacin sobre riesgos
PELIGRO
Indica una situacin potencial o de riesgo inminente que, de no evitarse, provocar la muerte o lesiones graves.
ADVERTENCIA
Indica una situacin potencial o inminentemente peligrosa que, de no evitarse, podra provocar la muerte o
lesiones graves.
PRECAUCIN
Indica una situacin potencialmente peligrosa que podra provocar una lesin menor o moderada.
AVISO
Indica una situacin que, si no se evita, puede provocar daos en el instrumento. Informacin que requiere
especial nfasis.
Etiquetas de precaucin
Lea todas las etiquetas y rtulos adheridos al instrumento. En caso contrario, podran producirse
heridas personales o daos en el instrumento. Cada smbolo que aparezca en el instrumento se
comentar en el manual con una indicacin de precaucin.
Este smbolo (en caso de estar colocado en el equipo) hace referencia a las instrucciones de uso o a
la informacin de seguridad del manual.
Este smbolo indica que hay riesgo de descarga elctrica y/o electrocucin.
Este smbolo indica la presencia de dispositivos susceptibles a descargas electrostticas. Asimismo,

indica que se debe tener cuidado para evitar que el equipo sufra dao.
El equipo elctrico marcado con este smbolo no se podr desechar por medio de los sistemas
europeos pblicos de eliminacin despus del 12 de agosto de 2005. De acuerdo con las
regulaciones locales y nacionales europeas (Directiva UE 2002/96/EC), ahora los usuarios de
equipos elctricos en Europa deben devolver los equipos viejos o que hayan alcanzado el trmino de
su vida til al fabricante para su eliminacin sin cargo para el usuario.
Descripcin general del producto

El mdulo, cuando se instala en un controlador sc200, admite un sensor anlogo para conectar al
controlador. Para la calibracin y operacin del sensor, consulte el manual del usuario del sensor
para su uso con el controlador sc200.
Registros de Modbus
Est disponible una lista de registros Modbus para comunicacin en red. Consulte www.hach.com o
www.hach-lange.com para obtener ms informacin.
16 Espaol
Instalacin
ADVERTENCIA
Peligros diversos. Slo el personal cualificado debe realizar las tareas descritas en esta seccin del
documento.
Conecte el sensor al mdulo

ADVERTENCIA
Posible peligro de electrocucin. Desconecte siempre el instrumento del suministro elctrico antes de
realizar conexiones elctricas.
ADVERTENCIA
Peligro de electrocucin. El cableado de alto voltaje para el controlador se realiza detrs de la barrera de alto
voltaje en la carcasa del controlador. La barrera debe permanecer en su lugar excepto durante la instalacin de
mdulos o cuando un tcnico de instalacin cualificado est realizando el cableado de alimentacin, de los rels
o de las tarjetas analgicas y de red.
AVISO
Dao potencial al instrumento. Los delicados componentes electrnicos internos pueden sufrir daos
debido a la electricidad esttica, lo que acarrea una disminucin del rendimiento del instrumento y
posibles fallos.
Asegrese de que el cable del sensor est conectado de forma que se evite la exposicin a campos
con elevada carga electromagntica (p. ej., transmisores, motores y equipos de conmutacin). La
exposicin a estos campos pueden provocar resultados imprecisos.
Para instalar el mdulo y conectar el sensor, consulte los siguientes pasos ilustrados y la tabla de
cableado (Tabla 3 y Tabla 4).
Asegrese de conectar todos los cables de blindaje/tierra a los tornillos de tierra de la carcasa del
controlador.
Nota: Si el cable del sensor no es lo suficientemente largo como para llegar al controlador, se necesita un cable de
interconexin y una caja de conexin para extender la distancia.
Tabla 3 Cableado del sensor de conductividad
Terminal Descripcin Sensor
83xx que utiliza 83xx que utiliza 3400 serie GLI 3700 serie GLI
Z08319=A=1115 Z08319=A=00xx
1 Electrodo interno Negro Blanco (conector Negro Verde

amarillo)
2 Temp/puesta a tierra de Amarillo

la seal
3 Blindaje interno Borrar
4 Blindaje Negro
7 Temp Blanco Negro Azul
9 Blindaje Transparente y Blanco (2x) (conector Borrar

transparente (aluminio) naranja)
Espaol 17
Tabla 3 Cableado del sensor de conductividad (contina)
83xx que utiliza 83xx que utiliza 3400 serie GLI 3700 serie GLI
Z08319=A=1115 Z08319=A=00xx
10 Temp Azul Azul Blanco Rojo
11 Electrodo Rojo Rojo Rojo Blanco

externo/recepcin alta
12 Recepcin baja Azul
Notas: Conecte el cable

transparente con la
banda negra a la
carcasa del
controlador.
Tabla 4 Cableado del sensor de conductividad

Crison 5395 y 5396 con Crison 5390 y 5399 con LZY082

cable AS9 cable MP5
1 Electrodo interno Cable trenzado externo Gris y rojo Cobre (conector rojo)
(cobre)
2 Temp/puesta a tierra de la seal
3 Blindaje interno Blindaje
7 Temp Blanco y marrn Verde y gris
9 Blindaje
10 Temp Rosa y amarillo Rosa
11 Electrodo externo/recepcin alta Transparente (ncleo) Verde y azul Blanco
12 Recepcin baja
Notas: El cable marrn no se

utiliza.
18 Espaol
Espaol 19
20 Espaol
Especificaes
As especificaes esto sujeitas a alteraes sem aviso prvio.
Tabela 1 Condutividade de contato
Faixa de medio Clula de condutividade com constante 0.05: 0100 S/cm
Clula de condutividade com constante 0.1: 0200 S/cm
Clula de condutividade com constante 0.5: 01000 S/cm
Clula de condutividade com constante 1: 02000 S/cm
Clula de condutividade com constante 5: 010,000 S/cm
Clula de condutividade com constante 10: 0200,000 S/cm
Tempo de resposta 0.5 segundos
Repetitividade/preciso (020 S/cm) 0.1/0.1 S/cm
Preciso (20200000 S/cm) 0.5% da leitura
Comprimento mximo do cabo 91 m (300 ps)
Garantia 1 ano; 2 anos (UE)
Tabela 2 Condutividade indutiva

Linearidade 1.5 mS/cm: 1% da leitura; < 1.5 mS/cm: 15 S/cm
Faixa de medio 02000 mS/cm
Tempo de resposta 0.5 segundos
Preciso1 > 500 S/cm: 0.5% da leitura; < 500 S/cm: 5 S/cm
Comprimento mximo do cabo 200 a 2000 S/cm: 61 m (200 ps); 2000 a 2000000 S/cm: 91 m (300 ps)
Garantia 1 ano; 2 anos (UE)

1 Campos de frequncia de rdio na faixa de 700800 MHz podem causar impreciso nos resultados.
Informaes gerais
Em hiptese alguma o fabricante ser responsvel por danos diretos, indiretos, especiais,
incidentais ou consequenciais resultantes de qualquer defeito ou omisso neste manual. O
fabricante reserva-se o direito de fazer alteraes neste manual e nos produtos aqui descritos a
qualquer momento, sem aviso ou obrigao. As edies revisadas podem ser encontradas no site
do fabricante.
Informaes de segurana
AVISO
O fabricante no responsvel por quaisquer danos devido ao uso ou aplicao incorreta deste produto,
incluindo, sem limitao, danos diretos, acidentais ou consequenciais, e se isenta desses danos extenso total
permitida pela lei aplicvel. O usurio unicamente responsvel por identificar riscos crticos de aplicao e por
instalar os mecanismos apropriados para proteger os processos durante um possvel mau funcionamento do
equipamento.
Portugus 21
Leia todo o manual antes de tirar da embalagem, montar ou operar esse equipamento. Preste
ateno a todas as declaraes de perigo e cuidado. Caso contrrio, o operador poder sofrer
ferimentos graves ou o equipamento poder ser danificado.
Certifique-se de que a proteo oferecida por este equipamento no seja afetada. No use nem
instale este equipamento de nenhuma outra forma alm da especificada neste manual.
Uso de informaes de risco
PERIGO
Indica uma situao potencial ou iminentemente perigosa que, se no for evitada, resultar em morte ou leso
grave.
ADVERTNCIA
Indica uma situao potencialmente perigosa que, se no for evitada, pode resultar em morte ou ferimento grave.
CUIDADO
Indica uma situao potencialmente perigosa que pode resultar em ferimento leve a moderado.
AVISO
Indica uma situao que, se no evitada, pode causar danos ao instrumento. Informaes que necessitam de
uma nfase especial.
Avisos de precauo
Leia todas as etiquetas e rtulos fixados no instrumento. Caso no sejam observadas, podem
ocorrer leses pessoais ou danos ao instrumento. Um smbolo no instrumento tem sua referncia no
manual com uma medida preventiva.
Este smbolo, se observado no instrumento, diz respeito ao manual de instrues para operao e/ou
informaes de segurana.
Este smbolo indica que existe um risco de choque eltrico ou de eletrocuo.
Este smbolo identifica a presena de dispositivos sensveis a Descargas eletrostticas (ESD) e

indica que deve-se tomar cuidado para evitar dano ao equipamento.
Os equipamentos eltricos marcados com este smbolo no podem ser descartados em sistemas de
descarte (lixo) pblicos europeus aps 12 de agosto de 2005. Em conformidade com as
regulamentaes nacionais e locais europias (Diretiva UE 2002/96/EC), os usurios de
equipamentos eltricos devem devolver seus equipamentos usados para o fabricante para descarte,
sem nus para o usurio.
Viso geral do produto

O mdulo, quando instalado em um controlador sc200, permite que um sensor analgico seja
conectado ao controlador. Para calibrao e operao do sensor, consulte o manual do usurio do
sensor com relao ao uso com o controlador sc200.
Registradores Modbus
Uma lista de registradores Modbus est disponvel para comunicao em rede. Visite
www.hach.com ou www.hach-lange.com para obter mais informaes.
22 Portugus
Instalao
ADVERTNCIA
Vrios perigos. Somente pessoal qualificado deve realizar as tarefas descritas nesta seo do manual.
Conecte o sensor ao mdulo

ADVERTNCIA
Perigo potencial de eletrocusso. Desconecte sempre a energia do instrumento quando efetuar as
conexes eltricas.
ADVERTNCIA
Risco de eletrocusso. Os fios de alta voltagem para o controlador so conduzidos por trs da barreira de alta
voltagem no compartimento do controlador. A barreira deve permanecer encaixada exceto na instalao de
mdulos ou quando um tcnico de instalao qualificado estiver instalando fiao de energia, alarmes, sadas ou
rels.
AVISO
Dano potencial do instrumento. Componentes eletrnicos internos delicados podem ser danificados
devido eletricidade esttica, podendo resultar em degradao do desempenho ou em uma eventual
falha.
Certifique-se de que o direcionamento do cabo do sensor no fique exposto a altos campos

eletromagnticos (por exemplo, transmissores, motores e equipamento de comutao). A exposio
a esses campos pode causar impreciso nos resultados.
Para instalar o mdulo e conectar o sensor, consulte as etapas ilustradas a seguir e a tabela de
fiao aplicvel (Tabela 3 e Tabela 4).
Conecte todos os fios de blindagem/aterramento do sensor aos parafusos de aterramento da
carcaa do controlador.
Observao: Se o cabo do sensor no for longo o suficiente para chegar ao controlador, um cabo de interconexo
e uma caixa da juno so necessrios para aumentar o comprimento.
Tabela 3 Fiao do sensor de condutividade
Terminal Descrio Sensor
83xx que usa 83xx que usa GLI da srie 3400 GLI da srie 3700
Z08319=A=1115 Z08319=A=00xx
1 Eltrodo interno Preto Branco (conector Preto Verde

amarelo)
2 Sinal terra/Temp Amarelo
3 Blindagem interna Transparente
4 Blindagem Preto
7 Temp Branco Preto Azul
9 Blindagem Transparente e Branca (2x) (conector Transparente

transparente (metlica) laranja)
10 Temp Azul Azul Branco Vermelho
Portugus 23
Tabela 3 Fiao do sensor de condutividade (continuao)
83xx que usa 83xx que usa GLI da srie 3400 GLI da srie 3700
Z08319=A=1115 Z08319=A=00xx
11 Eltrodo Vermelho Vermelho Vermelho Branco

externo/Alta
recepo
12 Baixa recepo Azul
Observaes: Conecte o fio limpo

com a faixa preta
carcaa do
controlador.
Tabela 4 Fiao do sensor de condutividade

Crison 5395 e 5396 com Crison 5390 e 5399 com LZY082

cabo AS9 cabo MP5
1 Eltrodo interno Fio externo flexvel (cobre) Cinza e vermelho Cobre (conector vermelho)
2 Sinal terra/Temp
3 Blindagem interna Blindagem
7 Temp Branco e marrom Verde e cinza
9 Blindagem
10 Temp Rosa e amarelo Rosa
11 Eltrodo externo/Alta Transparente (ncleo) Verde e azul Branco

recepo
12 Baixa recepo
Observaes: O fio marrom no usado.
24 Portugus
Portugus 25
26 Portugus

0.050100 S/cm
0.10200 S/cm
0.501000 S/cm
102000 S/cm
5010,000 S/cm
100200,000 S/cm
0.5
/ (020 S/cm) 0.1/0.1 S/cm
(20200,000 S/cm) 0.5%
91 m (300 ft)
1 2 (EU)
1.5 mS/cm1%< 1.5 mS/cm15 S/cm
02000 mS/cm
0.5
1 > 500 S/cm0.5%< 500 S/cm5 S/cm
200 2000 S/cm61 m (200 ft)2000 2,000,000 S/cm91 m (300 ft)
1 2 (EU)
1
700 - 800 MHz
27

ESD
2005 8 12
2002/96/EC

sc200
sc200
Modbus
Modbus www.hach.com www.hach-lange.com
28

3 4
/

3

Z08319=A=1115 83xx Z08319=A=00xx 83xx 3400 GLI 3700 GLI
2 /
9 (2x)
10
11 /
12
AS9 Crison 5395 5396 MP5 Crison 5390 5399 LZY082
2 /
29
4

AS9 Crison 5395 5396 MP5 Crison 5390 5399 LZY082
10
11 /
12
30
31
32

0.05:0100 S/cm
0.1: 0 200 S/cm
0.5:01000 S/cm
1:02000 S/cm
5:010,000 S/cm
10:0200,000 S/cm
0.5
/(020 S/cm) 0.1/0.1 S/cm
(20200,000 S/cm) 0.5%
91 m(300 )
1 2 ()
1.5 mS/cm:1%; < 1.5 mS/cm:15 S/cm
02000 mS/cm
0.5
1 > 500 S/cm:0.5%; < 500 S/cm:5 S/cm
2002000 S/cm:61 m(200 );20002,000,000 S/cm:91 m(300 )
1 2 ()
1
700800 MHz
Web
33

(ESD)

2005 8 12
(EU 2002/96/EC)

sc200
sc200
Modbus
Modbus www.hach.com
www.hach-lange.com
34

()
( 3 4)
/
:
Z08319=A=1115 Z08319=A=00xx 3400 GLI 3700

83xx 83xx GLI
1 ()
2 /
9 () (2x) (
)
10
11 /
35
3

Z08319=A=1115 Z08319=A=00xx 3400 GLI 3700

83xx 83xx GLI
12
Crison 5395 5396 (AS9 Crison 5390 5399 (MP5 LZY082

) )
1 () ()
2 /
10
11 / ()
12
36
37
38

.
1

0.05: 0-100 S/cm
0.1: 0-200 S/cm
0.5: 0-1000 S/cm
1: 0-2000 S/cm
5: 0-10,000 S/cm
10: 0-200,000 S/cm
0.5
/(020 S/cm) 0.1/0.1 S/cm
(20200,000 S/cm) 0.5%
91 m (300 ft)
1 , 2 (EU)
1.5 mS/cm: 1%, < 1.5 mS/cm: 15 S/cm
02000 mS/cm
0.5
1 > 500 S/cm: 0.5%, < 500 S/cm: 5 S/cm
200-2,000 S/cm: 61 m(200 ft), 2,000-2,000,000 S/cm: 91 m(300 ft)
1 , 2 (EU)
1
700-800MHz .

, , ,
.
.
.

,
, .
.
.
.
.
39

.

.

. .

.
. .
/ .
(ESD)
.
2005 8 12
. (EU 2002/96/EC)
.

sc200 .
sc200 .
Modbus
Modbus . www.hach.com
www.hach-lange.com .
. .
40

. .

. ,
,
.

.
.
(: , )
. .
( 3
4).
/ .
:
.
3

Z08319=A=1115 Z08319=A=00xx 3400 GLI 3700 GLI

83xx 83xx
1 ( )
2 /
9 () (2x)( )
10
11 /

12
:

.
41
4

AS9 Crison MP5 Crison 5390 LZY082

5395 5396 5399
1 () ( )
2 /
10
11 / ()
12
: .
42
43
44

1

: 0.05: 0-100 S/cm
: 0.1: 0-200 S/cm
: 0.5: 0-1000 S/cm
: 1: 0-2000 S/cm
: 5: 0-10,000 S/cm
: 10: 0-200,000 S/cm
0.5
/ (0-20 S/cm) 0.1/0.1 S/cm
(20-200,000 S/cm) 0.5%
91 . (300 )
1 2 (EU)
2

1.5 mS/cm: 1% ; < 1.5 mS/cm: 15 S/cm
02000 mS/cm
0.5
1 > 500 S/cm: 0.5% ; < 500 S/cm: 5 S/cm
200 2000 S/cm: 61 . (200 ); 2000 2,000,000 S/cm: 91 . (300 )
1 2 (EU)
1
700800 MHz
45

(ESD)

12
2005 (EU Directive 2002/96/EC)

sc200
sc200
46
MODBUS
Modbus www.hach.com www.hach-lange.com
(
(Switching Equipment))
( 3 4)
/
:
3
Sensor
83xx Z08319=A=1115 83xx Z08319=A=00xx 3400 series GLI 3700 series GLI
1 ()
2 /
4
5
9 (foil) (2x) ()
10
47
3 ()
Sensor
83xx Z08319=A=1115 83xx Z08319=A=00xx 3400 series GLI 3700 series GLI
11 /
12
4
Sensor
Crison 5395 5396 AS9 Crison 5390 5399 MP5 LZY082
1 () ()
2 /
10
11 / (core)
12
48
49
50
HACH COMPANY World Headquarters HACH LANGE GMBH HACH LANGE Srl
P.O. Box 389, Loveland, CO 80539-0389 U.S.A. Willsttterstrae 11 6, route de Compois
Tel. (970) 669-3050 D-40549 Dsseldorf, Germany 1222 Vsenaz
(800) 227-4224 (U.S.A. only) Tel. +49 (0) 2 11 52 88-320 SWITZERLAND
Fax (970) 669-2932 Fax +49 (0) 2 11 52 88-210 Tel. +41 22 594 6400
orders@hach.com info@hach-lange.de Fax +41 22 594 6499
www.hach.com www.hach-lange.de
Hach Company/Hach Lange GmbH, 2010, 2012, 2014.

All rights reserved. Printed in U.S.A.
DOC023.54.03232
SOLITAX sc
User Manual
12/2009, Edition 4A
HACH Company, 20062009. All rights reserved. Printed in Germany.

Table of Contents
Section 1 Specifications......................................................................................................................................... 5
Section 2 General Information ............................................................................................................................... 7

2.1 Safety Information ............................................................................................................................................... 7
2.1.1 Use of Hazard Information......................................................................................................................... 7
2.1.2 Precautionary Labels................................................................................................................................. 7
2.2 Sensor Overview................................................................................................................................................. 8
2.3 Measuring Principle ............................................................................................................................................ 8
2.4 Handling .............................................................................................................................................................. 8
Section 3 Installation .............................................................................................................................................. 9

3.1 Unpacking the Instrument ................................................................................................................................... 9
3.1.1 Function Check.......................................................................................................................................... 9
3.2 Sensor Installation............................................................................................................................................. 10
3.3 Pipe Installation..................................................................................................................................................11
3.4 Connecting sensor cable .................................................................................................................................. 13
Section 4 Operations ............................................................................................................................................ 15

4.1 Use of an sc controller ...................................................................................................................................... 15
4.2 Sensor Setup .................................................................................................................................................... 15
4.3 Sensor Data Logging ........................................................................................................................................ 15
4.4 Sensor Diagnostics Menu for pH and ORP ...................................................................................................... 15
4.5 Sensor Setup Menu .......................................................................................................................................... 15
4.6 Calibration ......................................................................................................................................................... 16
4.6.1 Setting the Outmode................................................................................................................................ 17
4.6.2 Calibration for Turbidity............................................................................................................................ 17
4.6.2.1 Calculating the Factor .................................................................................................................... 17
4.6.3 Calibration for Suspended Solids ............................................................................................................ 18
4.6.3.1 For Single Point (Factor) Calibration.............................................................................................. 18
4.6.3.2 Multi-point Calibration .................................................................................................................... 18
Section 5 Maintenance ......................................................................................................................................... 19

5.1 Maintenance Schedule ..................................................................................................................................... 19
5.2 Cleaning the Sensor Measuring Windows ........................................................................................................ 19
5.3 Replacing the Wiper.......................................................................................................................................... 20
Section 6 Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................................... 21

6.1 Error Codes....................................................................................................................................................... 21
6.2 Warnings ........................................................................................................................................................... 21
Section 7 Replacement Parts and Accessories .............................................................................................. 23

7.1 Immersion Sensors ........................................................................................................................................... 23
7.2 Insertion Sensors .............................................................................................................................................. 23
7.3 Replacement Parts............................................................................................................................................ 23
Section 8 Contact Information ............................................................................................................................ 25
Section 9 Limited warranty .................................................................................................................................. 27
Appendix A Modbus Register Information ........................................................................................................ 29
3
Table of Contents
4
Section 1 Specifications
Infrared Duo scattered light technique for color-independent turbidity measurement

Measuring Technique
Turbidity in accordance with DIN EN 27027 / TS equivalent DIN 38414
t-line turbidity: 0.0014000 FNU/NTU
Measuring Range ts-line, inline turbidity: 0.0014000 FNU/NTU; TSS content: 0.001 mg/L50 g/L
hs-line, highline turbidity: 0.0014000 FNU/NTU; TSS content: 0.001 mg/L500 g/L TSS
Reproducibility Turbidity < 1 %, Total Suspended Solids (TSS) < 3 %
Turbidity up to 1000 FNU/NTU:
Measuring Accuracy without calibration < 5 % of the measured value 0.01 FNU/NTU
with calibration < 1 % of the measured value 0.01 FNU/NTU
Technique variation
1 % in accordance with DIN 38402
coefficient
Response Time 1 s < T90 < 300 s (adjustable)
Calibration Zero point permanently set from the factory, gradient once for the TS content
Cable Length 10 m (33 ft), max. 100 m (328 ft) with extension cable
Ambient Temperature 0 to +40 C (32 to 104 F)

Stainless steel: 6 bar or 60 m (87 psi)
Pressure Range
PVC: 1 bar or 10 m (14,5 psi)
Flow Velocity Max. 3 m/s (the presence of air bubbles affects the measurement)
Optics carrier and sleeve: stainless steel 1.4571 or PVC black
Wiper shaft: stainless steel 1.4104
Wiper arm: stainless steel 1.4581
Wiper rubber: silicone rubber (standard) Optional: Viton1 (LZX578)
Windows and light guide: quartz glass
Materials O-rings (optics carrier, wiper, windows): NBR (acrylonitrile butadiene rubber)
Housing seals: NBR 70
Sensor connecting cable (hard-wired): 1 cable pair AWG 22 / 12 V DC twisted, 1 cable pair AWG
24 / data twisted, common cable screen, Semoflex (PUR)
Sensor connection plug (hard-wired): type M12 enclosure rating IP 67
Threaded cable fitting: stainless steel 1.4305
Inspection interval On request 1/year service contract with guarantee extension to 5 years
Tank probe: D x L 60 mm x 200 mm (2 x 8 in.)
Probe for pipe installation: D x L 60 mm x 315 mm (2 x 12.4 in.)
Dimensions
(Pipe installation fitting: DN 65 / PN 16 DIN 2633; < 5 bar (73 psi); for pipes from DN 80)
Distance sensor - wall (floor): TS > 10 cm (4 in.), turbidity > 50 cm (20 in.)
Tank probe: approx. 1.8 kg (63 oz) (t-line: approx. 0.6 kg (21 oz))
Probe for pipe installation: approx. 2.4 kg (85 oz)
Weight
Pipe installation fitting: approx. 2.7 kg (95 oz) (without probe)
Pipe installation safety fitting:approx. 18 kg (40 lb) (without probe)
User Maintenance 1 h / month, typical
Certifications CE
1 Viton is a registered trademark of E.I. DuPont de Nemours + Co.
5
Specifications
Figure 1 Sensor Dimensions
1. SOLITAX sc models t-line, ts-line, and hs-line for immersion in open tanks
2. SOLITAX sc models inline and highline sensors for insertion in pipes
6
Section 2 General Information
2.1 Safety Information

Please read this entire manual before unpacking, setting up, or operating this equipment.
Pay attention to all danger and caution statements. Failure to do so could result in serious
injury to the operator or damage to the equipment.
Make sure that the protection provided by this equipment is not impaired, do not use or
install this equipment in any manner other than that specified in this manual.
2.1.1 Use of Hazard Information
DANGER
Indicates a potentially or imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will
result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that may result in minor or moderate
injury.
Important Note: Information that requires special emphasis.

Note: Information that supplements points in the main text.
2.1.2 Precautionary Labels

Read all labels and tags attached to the instrument. Personal injury or damage to the
instrument could occur if not observed
This symbol, if noted on the instrument, references the instruction manual for operation and/or safety information.
Electrical equipment marked with this symbol may not be disposed of in European public disposal systems after 12
August of 2005. In conformity with European local and national regulations (EU Directive 2002/96/EC), European
electrical equipment users must now return old or end-of life equipment to the Producer for disposal at no charge to
the user.
Note: For return for recycling, please contact the equipment producer or supplier for instructions on how to return
end-of-life equipment, producer-supplied electrical accessories, and all auxiliary items for proper disposal.
7
General Information
2.2 Sensor Overview

Note: All sensors are also available without wipers for special applications.
t-line: 0.0014000 FNU/NTU

High-resolution turbidity probe made of plastic for the outlets of sewage treatment plants
and bodies of water.
ts-line: 0.0014000 FNU/NTU; 0.001 mg/L50.0 g/L

High-precision turbidity and solids probe made of stainless steel or plastic for
color-independent measurement of fine turbidities and sludges.
hs-line: 0.0014000 FNU/NTU; 0.001 mg/L500.0 g/L

High-precision turbidity and solids probe made of stainless steel or plastic for
color-independent measurement of highly concentrated sludges.
inline: 0.0014000 FNU/NTU; 0.001 mg/L50.0 g/L

High-precision pipe installation probe for turbidity and solids made of stainless steel for
color-independent measurement of fine turbidities and sludges.
highline: 0.0014000 FNU/NTU; 0.001 mg/L500.0 g/L

High-precision pipe installation probe for turbidity and suspended solids made of stainless
steel for color-independent measurement of highly concentrated sludges.
Figure 2 Solitax sc Sensors
2.3 Measuring Principle

The measuring principle is based on a combined infrared absorption scattered light
technique that measures the lowest turbidity values in accordance with DIN EN 27027 just
as precisely and continuously as high sludge content. Using this method, the light
scattered sideways by the turbidity particles is measured over an angle of 90.
2.4 Handling
The sensor contains high-quality optical and electronic assemblies. Make sure the sensor
is not subjected to any hard mechanical knocks. There are no customer-serviceable items
inside the sensor.
8
Section 3 Installation
DANGER
Only qualified personnel should conduct the tasks described in this section of the
manual.
3.1 Unpacking the Instrument

Figure 3 Items Supplied with SensorI
1 2 3 4
al
Manu
ment
Instru
Fac
tory T
est
Cer
tific
ate
1. SOLITAX sc Sensor 3. Factory Test Certificate

2. User Manual 4. Wiper Set (for 5 changes) LZX050
3.1.1 Function Check

After unpacking, both components should be checked for any transport damage and a
short function check performed prior to installation.
To perform a function check, connect the sensor to the display unit and power the unit.
Shortly after the unit is plugged in, the display is activated and the instrument switches to
the measurement display. Measured values taken in air is meaningless.
If no messages appear in the lower part of the display, the function check is
then complete.
9
Installation
3.2 Sensor Installation

Figure 4 on page 10 illustrates the installation overview for Solitax sc Models t-line, ts-line,
and hs-line for immersion in open tanks.
The maximum distance from the mounting surface to the sensor without the use of an
extension tube is 1.5 m (4.9 ft). When that distance exceeds 1.5 m (4.9 ft), one of the
following extension tubes is required and can be ordered separately:
1.0 m (3.28 ft) extension pipe LZY413
1.8 m (5.90 ft) extension pipe LZY414
To ensure a suitable measuring position, install the probe to the following conditions:
The probe optical window must have a ground clearance of at least 30 cm (11.8 in.).
Install the probe with the optical window facing (downstream) in the direction of the
flow to minimize the risk of fouling.
Avoid installation sites where air bubbles are inconsistent. If this not possible, try
moving the probe slightly or adjusting its alignment to minimize the bubble effect.
Protect the probe against the oncoming flow of large objects, such as branches or ice
and against flow surges.
Avoid installing the probe with the optical window facing into direct light or facing a
highly-reflective surface.
Figure 4 Sensor Installation Overview
10
Installation
3.3 Pipe Installation

Install the sensor in an up-flow pipe section for best results. Do not mount the sensor
in a down-flow pipe section.
Mounting in a horizontal pipe section is acceptable if the sensor is fully immersed at all
times. Usually, mounting 90 degrees from the top of the pipe guarantees full
immersion. Do not mount on the top or bottom of a horizontal pipe section.
Install the sensor in a pipe that is equal to or greater than 4 inches in diameter.
Install the sensor at least 1.5 m (5 ft.) or three times the pipe diameter (whichever is
greater) downstream of pumps, valves, or pipe elbows.
Install the sensor on the discharge side of a pump, if possible, with a dilution or flush
valve installed on the suction side of the pump.
If the sensor is to be used to measure sludge with significant amounts of debris, install
it after a sludge grinding pump or after a pump with a grinding/comminuting unit in
front of it.
Install the sensor within 7.8 m (25 ft.) of the controller with the standard probe cable.
Optional cable extensions can be added for a maximum combined distance of
100 meters (330 ft.).
If the flange cannot be welded to the pipe due to incompatibility of materials between
the stud and the pipe, it is recommended that a stainless steel pipe section be
fabricated. Weld the flange onto the stainless steel pipe section and attach the
stainless steel section as a segment of the process pipe.
11
Installation
Figure 5 Proper Positioning for Insertion into Pipe
Direction of Flow
12
Installation
3.4 Connecting sensor cable
CAUTION
Always lay cables and hoses so they do not pose a trip hazard and are not bent.
1. Unscrew the protective cap on the controller socket and retain it.
2. Pay attention to the guide in the plug and push the plug into the socket.
3. Tighten the nuts.
Connector cables are available in various lengths (refer to Section 7 Replacement Parts
and Accessories on page 23). Maximum overall cable length: 50 m (165 ft).
Figure 6 Connection of the sensor plug to the controller
Figure 7 Sensor connector pin assignment
1 2
4 3
Number Description Cable colour (Standard-Cable)

1 +12 VDC brown
2 Ground black
3 Data (+) blue
4 Data () white
5 Screen Screen (grey)
6 Notch
13
Installation
14
Section 4 Operations
4.1 Use of an sc controller

Before using the sensor in combination with an sc controller, refer to the controller user
manual for navigation information.
4.2 Sensor Setup

When a sensor is initially installed, the serial number of the sensor will be displayed as the
sensor name. To change the sensor name refer to the following instructions:
1. Select Main Menu.
2. From the Main Menu, select SENSOR SETUP and confirm.
3. Highlight the appropriate sensor if more than one sensor is attached and confirm.
4. Select CONFIGURE and confirm.
5. Select EDIT NAME and edit the name. Confirm or cancel to return to the Sensor
Setup menu.
4.3 Sensor Data Logging

A data memory and event memory per sensor are available via the sc controller. While
measured data are saved in the data memory at stipulated intervals, the event memory
collects numerous events such as configuration changes, alarms and warning conditions.
Both the data memory and the event memory can be read out in CSV format. For
information on how you can download the data, please see the controller manual.
4.4 Sensor Diagnostics Menu for pH and ORP

SELECT SENSOR (if more than one sensor is attached)
STATUS
ERROR LIST See section 6.1 on page 21.
WARNING LIST See section 6.2 on page 21..
4.5 Sensor Setup Menu

SELECT SENSOR (if more than one sensor is attached)
WIPE
Initiates a wiping action on the sensor window.
CALIBRATE
Select the behavior of the outputs during calibration for zero point setting (Hold, Active, Transfer,
Selection). Hold maintains the last reading prior to going into the menu. Active transmits the
SET OUTMODE
current level readings, corrected with previous calibration data until new data is entered. Set
Transfer transmits the value designated during the system setup
SENSOR MEASURE Displays the current, uncorrected measured value.
Select the calibration type and follow the calibration steps for 2 point, 3 point, 4 point, and 5 point
CONFIGURE
calibration.
FACTOR/2 POINTS/
3 POINTS/4 POINTS/ Display depends on the selection in configuration.
5 POINTS
SET CAL DEFAULT Return the instrument to the default calibration settings.
15
Operations
4.5 Sensor Setup Menu (continued)

CONFIGURE
EDIT NAME Enter up to a 10-digit name in any combination of symbols and alpha or numeric characters.
This setting configures the Solitax to measure turbidity or suspended solids. The Solitax cannot
simultaneously measure both. Choose TRB for turbidity measurements, or TS for suspended
SET PARAMETER
solids measurement. This selection determines which units may be selected in the Meas Units
menu.
Choose from the displayed units. TRB (FNU, EBC, TE/F, NTU); TS (mg/L, g/L, ppm, %)
Default: FNU
If TRB was selected in set parameter, select NTU (commonly used in the U.S.), FNU, EBC, or
MEAS UNITS TE/F. If TS was selected, choose mg/L, g/L, ppm, or %. Press enter to choose the selection. If
the units selected result in a reading that exceeds 4 digits, the display will only show dashes.
For example, if mg/L were selected, and the measurement was 10,500 mg/L, the display will
show dashes until the reading drops to 9999 or lower.
Select the cleaning interval (1, 5, 15 or 30 minutes; 1, 4, or 12 hours; 1, 3, 7 days)
Default: 12 hours
CLEAN INTERVAL This is the interval between wiper cleaning of the sensor window. It is recommended to start with
a setting of 30 minutes. This time may be adjusted according to the application. If readings
continue to be accurate, try a longer interval. If not, shorten the interval.
This is a damping function. While the Solitax takes readings continually, it will average them
together over the period of the response time. Once the response time has elapsed, the
RESPONSE TIME
displayed reading, 4-20 outputs, and alarm status are updated. (0 to 300 seconds)
Default: 3 seconds
This is the datalog interval, with options from 115 minutes. Values logged are the average of
the all readings during the previous logging interval. The controller will hold approximately
LOGGER INTERVAL
360 days of readings for one sensor at 15 minute intervals, or 24 days at 1 minute intervals (and
proportional in between). Default:10 minutes
SET DEFAULTS Resets all user-editable options to the factory-defaults.
TEST/MAIN
Displays the sensor type, entered name of the sensor (Default: sensor serial number), the sensor
PROBE INFO
serial number, the software version number, and the sensor driver version number.
Select Profile Counter to display the number of wipes made (from 20000 backwards). Select
PROFILE
Reset Config to manually reset the profile counter.
COUNTER Shows the number of hours or cycles left for operating hours, test/maint, gasket, and the motor.
WIPEInitiates the wiping action of the wiper.
SIGNALSdisplays the signal outputs for the device.
TEST/MAIN OUTPUT MODESelect the behavior of the instrument outputs (Hold, Active, Transfer,
Selection)
DEFAULT SETUPResets all user-editable options to the factory defaults.
4.6 Calibration
There are two calibration techniques; depending on whether turbidity or suspended solid
is required (refer to section 4.6.2 or section 4.6.3 on page 18). Before calibration,
determine the behavior of the 420 outputs and alarm relays while the user is in the
CALIBRATE menu (refer to section 4.6.1).
16
Operations
4.6.1 Setting the Outmode

1. From the Main Menu, select SENSOR SETUP and press confirm.
2. Select the appropriate sensor if more than one is attached and confirm.
3. Select CALIBRATE and press confirm.
4. Select SET OUTMODE. Select the available Out Mode (Active, Hold, Transfer) and
confirm.
4.6.2 Calibration for Turbidity

Turbidity calibration requires the use of a Turbidity Standard Solution. The manufacturer
recommends the 800 NTU Turbidity Standard Solution (part of the calibration kit No.
57330-00). A zero-point calibration using deionized water is also recommended.
4. Select SENSOR MEASURE and confirm.
5. Place the sensor in the calibration cylinder with deionized water, mounting it with the
supplied clamp. The tip of the probe should be approximately 1-inch below the surface
of the water. Record the reading from the sensor measure display.
6. Select OFFSET. Multiply the reading obtained in step 5 and enter the value.
7. Select SENSOR MEASURE.
8. Rinse the outside of the StablCal 800 NTU standard with water to remove any dust
or debris adhering to the surface of the bottle. Gently invert both StablCal standard
bottles a minimum of 50 times. Remove the lid and seal from each bottle. Slowly (to
avoid creating bubbles) pour the contents of the bottles into the calibration cylinder.
Immediately place the tip of the probe into the positioning bracket in the calibration
cylinder. The tip of the probe should be approximately 1-inch below the surface
standard. Allow the reading to become stable on the SENSOR MEASURE screen.
Record the value (measured value). Calculate the factor. Refer to section 4.6.2.1.
9. Select FACTOR to display the corrected measurement.
4.6.2.1 Calculating the Factor
800 NTU Standard

New Factor =
measured value
For example, if a sample measures 750 NTU using the sensor and the standard is
800 NTU, the new factor would be calculated as follows:
800 NTU
New Factor = = 1.07
750 NTU
17
Operations
4.6.3 Calibration for Suspended Solids

Suspended solids calibration requires calibration to the actual sample. This optimizes the
compensation for the particle size and shape typical at a measuring site. It is best
performed by mounting the sensor as usual for normal measurement, and then grab
samples collected and evaluated by laboratory methods. While a single point calibration is
usually sufficient to provide accuracy, the SOLITAX does offer the ability to calibrate with
up to 5 calibration points.
5. Select the number of points desired for calibration (the unit with linearly interpolate
values between calibration points). Select Factor for a single point calibration.
6. Mount the sensor as is during normal operation. Alternatively, place the sensor in the
calibration cylinder (or a container with dark, non-reflective walls) 2 inches of
clearance from the probe face with the probe face submerged by 1 inch or more.
7. Select SENSOR MEASURE and record the reading.
8. Immediately take a grab sample. Determine the total suspended solids using a
gravimetric method such as Method 2540 D in Standards Methods for the
Examination of Water and WasteWater.
9. Calculate the new factor. Refer to section 4.6.3.1 for single point (Factor) calibration.
Refer section 4.6.3.2 on page 18 for multiple point calibrations.
10. Select FACTOR and press confirm. The corrected measurement should be displayed.
4.6.3.1 For Single Point (Factor) Calibration

Calculate the new factor:
Determined gravimetric value

New Factor =
measured value
For example, if a sample measures 2.3 g/L using the SS sensor and the gravimetric value
was 2.0 g/L, the new factor would be calculated as follows:
2.0 g/L
New Factor = = 0.87
2.3 g/L
4.6.3.2 Multi-point Calibration

1. Repeat steps 68 in section 4.6.3 on page 18 at different times to obtain different
measurements.
2. From the CONFIGURE menu, select the appropriate calibration point menu.
3. Enter the pairs of values for each reading, the target value being the laboratory
determined value, and the actual value being the reading that the SOLITAX produced
in step 5. The pairs should be entered in order from lowest values to highest.
18
Section 5 Maintenance
DANGER
Only qualified personnel should conduct the tasks described in this section of the
manual.
Proper maintenance of the measuring windows in the sensor is critical for accurate
measurements. The measuring windows should be checked monthly for soiling and the
wiper checked for wear.
Important Note: The seals must be replaced every 2 years by the Service Department. If
the seals are not changed regularly, water may enter the probe head and seriously
damage the instrument.
5.1 Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Task Duration

Visual inspection monthly
monthly
Check calibration
(depending on the ambient conditions)
Inspection six months (counter)
Seal change every 2 years (counter)
Change wiper and reset counter as per counter (20000 cycles)
5.2 Cleaning the Sensor Measuring Windows
CAUTION
Always were
Safety glasses,
Gloves and
Overal
handling hydrochloric acid and observe safety regulations.
The measuring windows are made of quartz glass. If necessary, they can be cleaned with
a cleaning agent and a cloth.
19
Maintenance
5.3 Replacing the Wiper

The life of the wiper is dependent on the number of cleaning actions performed and the
type of deposits to be removed. The life of the wiper varies. The wipers supplied with the
instrument should last for approximately one year.
3. Select TEST/MAINT and press confirm.
4. Select PROFILE and confirm. Change the wiper, see section 5.3 on page 20.
5. Select RESET CONFIG and confirm.
6. Select MAN. RESET ARE YOU SURE? and confirm.
Figure 8 Wiper Replacement
1 2 4
1. Wiper arm 3. Wiper

2. M4 hex socket head bolt 4. Wiper axle
20
Section 6 Troubleshooting
6.1 Error Codes

In the case of an error, the indication of the measured value flashes on the display and all
the contacts and current outputs allocated to this sensor are placed on hold. The following
conditions will result in flashing measured values:
Data transmission between controller and sensor interrupted
On the Main menu open the SENSOR DIAG menu using ENTER and determine the
cause of the fault.
Table 1 Error Messages
Error Displayed Cause Solution
Open the TEST/MAINT menu and trigger the WIPE function, if the
POS. UNKNOWN Wiper position unknown
problem persists contact the manufacturer's customer service
LED FAULTY Faulty LED Contact customer service
Remove the sensor immediately and store in a dry place, contact
MOIST Moisture value > 10
customer service
CAL. DATA Factory calibration data lost Contact customer service
6.2 Warnings
A warning results in a flashing warning icon on the right of the display, all menus, contacts
and outputs remain unaffected and continue to work normally. On the Main menu open the
SENSOR DIAG menu using ENTER and determine the cause of the warning.
A warning may be used to trigger a relay and users can set warning levels to define the
severity of the warning.
Table 2 Warnings
Warning Displayed Cause Solution
WARNING Cause Action
REPLACE WIPER Counter elapsed Replace wiper, reset counter
TEST/MAINT Counter elapsed Contact customer service
GASKET Counter elapsed Contact customer service
21
Troubleshooting
22
Section 7 Replacement Parts and Accessories
7.1 Immersion Sensors1

Description Catalog Number
Turbidity, t-line sc, PVC with wiper (0.001 to 4000 NTU) LXV423.99.10000
Turbidity, t-line sc, PVC without wiper (0.001 to 4000 NTU) LXV423.99.12000
Turbidity and Suspended Solids, ts-line sc,
LXV423.99.10100
PVC with wiper (0.001 to 4000 NTU, 0.001 mg/L to 50 g/L)
Turbidity and Suspended Solids, ts-line sc,
LXV423.99.12100
PVC without wiper (0.001 to 4000 NTU, 0.001 mg/L to 50 g/L)
Turbidity and Suspended Solids, ts-line sc, stainless steel with wiper
LXV423.99.00100
(0.001 to 4000 NTU, 0.001 mg/L to 50 g/L)
Turbidity and Suspended Solids, ts-line sc, stainless steel without wiper
LXV423.99.02100
(0.001 to 4000 NTU, 0.001 mg/L to 50 g/L)
Turbidity and Suspended Solids, hs-line sc, PVC with wiper
LXV423.99.10200
(0.001 to 4000 NTU, 0.001 mg/L to 500 g/L)
Turbidity and Suspended Solids, hs-line sc, PVC without wiper
LXV423.99.12200
(0.001 to 4000 NTU, 0.001 mg/L to 500 g/L)
Turbidity and Suspended Solids, hs-line sc, stainless steel with wiper
LXV423.99.00200
(0.001 to 4000 NTU, 0.001 mg/L to 500 g/L)
Turbidity and Suspended Solids, hs-line sc, stainless steel without wiper
LXV423.99.02200
(0.001 to 4000 NTU, 0.001 mg/L to 500 g/L)
1 All sensors come with the sensor, replacement wipers, and manual.
7.2 Insertion Sensors1

Turbidity and Suspended Solids, inline sc, stainless steel with wiper
LXV424.99.00100
(0.001 to 4000 NTU, 0.001 mg/L to 50 g/L)
Turbidity and Suspended Solids, inline sc, stainless steel without wiper
LXV424.99.02100
(0.001 to 4000 NTU, 0.001 mg/L to 50 g/L)
Turbidity and Suspended Solids, highline sc, stainless steel with wiper
LXV424.99.00200
(0.001 to 4000 NTU, 0.001 mg/L to 500 g/L)
Turbidity and Suspended Solids, highline sc, stainless steel without wiper
LXV424.99.02200
(0.001 to 4000 NTU, 0.001 mg/L to 500 g/L)
1 All sensors come with the sensor, replacement wipers, and manual.
7.3 Replacement Parts

Set of wipers (for 5 changes) made of silicone for normal applications LZX050
Set of wipers (for 5 changes) made of Viton for e. g. media containing oil LZX578
SOLITAX sc User Manual, english DOC023.54.03232
Extension cable, 5 m (16.4 ft) LZX848
Extension cable, 10 m (33 ft) LZX849
23
Replacement Parts and Accessories
7.3 Replacement Parts (continued)

Extension pipe, 1,0 m (3.28 ft) LZY413
Extension pipe, 1,8 m (5.90 ft) LZY414
Installation kit, fixed-point (for t-line, ts-line, and hs-line immersion sensors) LZX414.00.10000
Consisting of:
Base ATS010
Mounting plate HPL061
Holding clamp (2) LZX200
Assembly pipe 2 m BRO075
HS small parts set LZX416
Installation kit with straight adapter LZX414.00.20000
Kit, screws and seals for sensor adapters LZX417
Miscellaneous hardware for probe installation kit LZX416
Second fastening point, includes: bracket, sensor pipe stand, sensor pipe stand bracket, screws,
LZX456
and grommet)
Sensor fixed-point mounting kit: Sensor pipe bracket ATS010
Sensor pipe stand bracket LZX200
L-bracket ATS011
Adapter, Sensor 90 elbow AHA034
Ball valve for insertion probes without adapting flange LZX337
Welded flange made of C-steel for the pipe installation fitting LZX703
Welded flange made of stainless steel for pipe installation safety fitting LZX660
24
Section 8 Contact Information
HACH Company Repair Service in the Repair Service in Canada: Repair Service in
World Headquarters United States: Hach Sales & Service Latin America, the
P.O. Box 389 HACH Company Canada Ltd. Caribbean, the Far East,
Loveland, Colorado Ames Service 1313 Border Street, Unit 34 Indian Subcontinent, Africa,
80539-0389 U.S.A. 100 Dayton Avenue Winnipeg, Manitoba Europe, or the Middle East:
Tel (800) 227-HACH Ames, Iowa 50010 R3H 0X4 Hach Company World
(800) -227-4224 Tel (800) 227-4224 Tel (800) 665-7635 Headquarters,
(U.S.A. only) (U.S.A. only) (Canada only) P.O. Box 389
Fax (970) 669-2932 Fax (515) 232-3835 Tel (204) 632-5598 Loveland, Colorado,
orders@hach.com Fax (204) 694-5134 80539-0389 U.S.A.
www.hach.com canada@hach.com Tel +001 (970) 669-3050
Fax +001 (970) 669-2932
intl@hach.com
HACH LANGE GMBH HACH LANGE LTD HACH LANGE LTD HACH LANGE GMBH
Willsttterstrae 11 Pacific Way Unit 1, Chestnut Road Htteldorferstr. 299/Top 6
D-40549 Dsseldorf Salford Western Industrial Estate A-1140 Wien
Tel. +49 (0)2 11 52 88-320 GB-Manchester, M50 1DL IRL-Dublin 12 Tel. +43 (0)1 9 12 16 92
Fax +49 (0)2 11 52 88-210 Tel. +44 (0)161 872 14 87 Tel. +353(0)1 46 02 5 22 Fax +43 (0)1 9 12 16 92-99
info@hach-lange.de Fax +44 (0)161 848 73 24 Fax +353(0)1 4 50 93 37 info@hach-lange.at
www.hach-lange.de info@hach-lange.co.uk info@hach-lange.ie www.hach-lange.at
www.hach-lange.co.uk www.hach-lange.ie
HACH LANGE HACH LANGE FRANCE HACH LANGE SA DR. LANGE NEDERLAND
Rorschacherstrasse 30 a S.A.S. Motstraat 54 B.V.
CH-9424 Rheineck 8, mail Barthlmy Thimonnier B-2800 Mechelen Laan van Westroijen 2a
Tel. +41 (0)71 886 91 11 Lognes Tl. +32 (0)15 42 35 00 NL-4003 AZ Tiel
Fax +41 (0)71 886 91 66 F-77437 Marne-La-Valle Fax +32 (0)15 41 61 20 Tel. +31(0)344 63 11 30
info@hach-lange.ch cedex 2 info@hach-lange.be Fax +31(0)344 63 11 50
www.hach-lange.ch Tl. +33 (0)8 20 20 14 14 www.hach-lange.be info@hach-lange.nl
Fax +33 (0)1 69 67 34 99 www.hach-lange.nl
info@hach-lange.fr
www.hach-lange.fr
HACH LANGE APS HACH LANGE AB HACH LANGE S.R.L. HACH LANGE S.L.U.
kandevej 21 Vinthundsvgen 159A Via Riccione, 14 Edif. Arteaga Centrum
DK-2700 Brnshj SE-128 62 Skndal I-20156 Milano C/Larrauri, 1C- 2 Pl.
Tel. +45 36 77 29 11 Tel. +46 (0)8 7 98 05 00 Tel. +39 02 39 23 14-1 E-48160 Derio/Vizcaya
Fax +45 36 77 49 11 Fax +46 (0)8 7 98 05 30 Fax +39 02 39 23 14-39 Tel. +34 94 657 33 88
info@hach-lange.dk info@hach-lange.se info@hach-lange.it Fax +34 94 657 33 97
www.hach-lange.dk www.hach-lange.se www.hach-lange.it info@hach-lange.es
www.hach-lange.es
HACH LANGE LDA HACH LANGE SP.ZO.O. HACH LANGE S.R.O. HACH LANGE S.R.O.
Av. do Forte n8 ul. Opolska 143 a Leansk 2a/1176 Roncka 21
Fraco M PL-52-013 Wrocaw CZ-141 00 Praha 4 SK-831 07 Bratislava
P-2790-072 Carnaxide Tel. +48 (0)71 342 10-83 Tel. +420 272 12 45 45 Vajnory
Tel. +351 214 253 420 Fax +48 (0)71 342 10-79 Fax +420 272 12 45 46 Tel. +421 (0)2 4820 9091
Fax +351 214 253 429 info@hach-lange.pl info@hach-lange.cz Fax +421 (0)2 4820 9093
info@hach-lange.pt www.hach-lange.pl www.hach-lange.cz info@hach-lange.sk
www.hach-lange.pt www.hach-lange.sk
HACH LANGE KFT. HACH LANGE S.R.L. HACH LANGE HACH LANGE SU
Vrskereszt utca. 8-10. Str. Cminului nr. 3 8, Kr. Sarafov str. ANALZ SSTEMLER
H-1222 Budapest XXII. ker. Sector 2 BG-1164 Sofia LTD.T.
Tel. +36 (06)1 225 7783 RO-021741 Bucureti Tel. +359 (0)2 963 44 54 Hilal Mah. 75. Sokak
Fax +36 (06)1 225 7784 Tel. +40 (0) 21 205 30 03 Fax +359 (0)2 866 15 26 Arman Plaza No: 9/A
info@hach-lange.hu Fax +40 (0) 21 205 30 17 info@hach-lange.bg TR-06550 ankaya/ANKARA
www.hach-lange.hu info@hach-lange.ro www.hach-lange.bg Tel. +90 (0)312 440 98 98
www.hach-lange.ro Fax +90 (0)312 442 11 01
bilgi@hach-lange.com.tr
www.hach-lange.com.tr
25
Contact Information
HACH LANGE D.O.O. CH LANGE E... HACH LANGE E.P.E. HACH LANGE D.O.O.
Fajfarjeva 15 27 27, Avlidos str Ivana Severa bb
SI-1230 Domale GR-115 27 GR-115 27 Athens 42 000 Varadin
Tel. +386 (0)59 051 000 . +30 210 7777038 Tel. +30 210 7777038 Tel. +385 (0) 42 305 086
Fax +386 (0)59 051 010 Fax +30 210 7777976 Fax +30 210 7777976 Fax +385 (0) 42 305 087
info@hach-lange.si info@hach-lange.gr info@hach-lange.gr info@hach-lange.hr
www.hach-lange.si www.hach-lange.gr www.hach-lange.gr www.hach-lange.hr
HACH LANGE MAROC

SARLAU
Villa 14 Rue 2 Casa
Plaisance
Quartier Racine Extension
MA-Casablanca 20000
Tl. +212 (0)522 97 95 75
Fax +212 (0)522 36 89 34
info-maroc@hach-lange.com
www.hach-lange.ma
26
Section 9 Limited warranty
Hach Company warrants its products to the original purchaser against any defects that are
due to faulty material or workmanship for a period of one year from date of shipment
unless otherwise noted in the product manual.
In the event that a defect is discovered during the warranty period, Hach Company agrees
that, at its option, it will repair or replace the defective product or refund the purchase price
excluding original shipping and handling charges. Any product repaired or replaced under
this warranty will be warranted only for the remainder of the original product warranty
period.
This warranty does not apply to consumable products such as chemical reagents; or
consumable components of a product, such as, but not limited to, lamps and tubing.
Contact Hach Company or your distributor to initiate warranty support. Products may not
be returned without authorization from Hach Company.
Limitations
This warranty does not cover:
Damage caused by acts of God, natural disaster, labor unrest, acts of war (declared or
undeclared), terrorism, civil strife or acts of any governmental jurisdiction
Damage caused by misuse, neglect, accident or improper application or installation
Damage caused by any repair or attempted repair not authorized by Hach Company
Any product not used in accordance with the instructions furnished by Hach Company
Freight charges to return merchandise to Hach Company
Freight charges on expedited or express shipment of warranted parts or product
Travel fees associated with on-site warranty repair
This warranty contains the sole express warranty made by Hach Company in connection
with its products. All implied warranties, including without limitation, the warranties of
merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are expressly disclaimed.
Some states within the United States do not allow the disclaimer of implied warranties and
if this is true in your state the above limitation may not apply to you. This warranty gives
you specific rights, and you may also have other rights that vary from state to state.
This warranty constitutes the final, complete, and exclusive statement of warranty terms
and no person is authorized to make any other warranties or representations on behalf of
Hach Company.
Limitation of Remedies
The remedies of repair, replacement or refund of purchase price as stated above are the
exclusive remedies for the breach of this warranty. On the basis of strict liability or under
any other legal theory, in no event shall Hach Company be liable for any incidental or
consequential damages of any kind for breach of warranty or negligence.
27
Limited warranty
28
Appendix A Modbus Register Information
Table 3 Sensor Modbus Registers

Group Name Tag Name Register Data Type# Length R/W Description
Measurements TurbidityFNU 40001 Float 2 R Turbidity FNU
Measurements TurbidityEBC 40003 Float 2 R Turbidity EBC
Measurements SolidsMGL 40005 Float 2 R Solids mg/L
Measurements SolidsGL 40007 Float 2 R Solids g/L
Measurements SolidsPR 40009 Float 2 R Solids %
Reserved 40011 Unsigned Integer 1 R Reserved
Base Parameter 40012 Unsigned Integer 1 R/W Parameter
Base UnitTRB 40013 Unsigned Integer 1 R/W Unit Turbidity
Base UnitTS 40014 Unsigned Integer 1 R/W Units Solids
Calibration OffsetTRB 40015 Float 2 R/W Turbdity Offset
Calibration FactorTRB 40017 Float 2 R/W Turbidity Factor
Calibration FactorTS 40019 Float 2 R/W Solids Factor
Data Wiperstate 40021 Unsigned Integer 1 R/W Wiper register
Setup ResponseInterval 40022 Unsigned Integer 1 R/W Response time
Setup CleaningInterval 40023 Unsigned Integer 1 R/W Wiper interval
Setup LogInterval 40024 Unsigned Integer 1 R/W Logger interval
Setup Outputmodekal 40025 Unsigned Integer 1 R/W Output when calibrate
Setup Outputmodesrv 40026 Unsigned Integer 1 R/W Output when service
Setup Location 40027 String 8 R/W Edited name
Setup ProfilCounter 40035 Unsigned Integer 1 R/W Profi counter
Data SerienNummer 40036 String 6 R Serial number
Date of manufacturing
Calibration DateUserCal 40042 Date 2 R
calibration
Calibration DateUserCalTURB 40044 Date 2 R Date of calibration turbidity
Calibration DateUserCalSOLID 40046 Date 2 R Date of calibration solid
Data VersionAppl 40048 Float 2 R Version application
Data VersionBoot 40050 Float 2 R Version Bootlader
Data VersionStruct 40052 Unsigned Integer 1 R Version structure probedriver
Data VersionContent 40053 Unsigned Integer 1 R Version register probedriver
Data VersionFirmware 40054 Unsigned Integer 1 R Version firmware probedriver
Data FormatMinFNU 40055 Float 2 R Minimum turbidity FNU
Data FormatMaxFNU 40057 Float 2 R Maximum turbidity FNU
Data FormatMinEBC 40059 Float 2 R Minimum turbidity EBC
Data FormatMaxEBC 40061 Float 2 R Maximum turbidity EBC
Data FormatMinGL 40063 Float 2 R Minimum solids g/L
Data FormatMaxGL 40065 Float 2 R Maximum solids g/L
Data FormatMinMGL 40067 Float 2 R Minimum solids mg/L
Data FormatMaxMGL 40069 Float 2 R Maximum mg/L
Data FormatMinPR 40071 Float 2 R Minimum solids %
Data FormatMaxPR 40073 Float 2 R Maximum solids %
Data SignalsLED 40075 Unsigned Integer 1 R Signal LED
Data SignalsMoist 40076 Unsigned Integer 1 R Signal moist
29
Modbus Register Information
30
DOC023.53.90161
FP 360 sc
User Manual
01/2010, Edition 1
HACH Company, 2010. All rights reserved. Printed in Germany

Table of Contents
Section 1 Specifications ........................................................................................................................ 5

1.1 Dimensions ........................................................................................................................................ 6
Section 2 General information............................................................................................................... 7
2.1 Safety information............................................................................................................................... 7
2.1.1 Use of hazard information.......................................................................................................... 7
2.1.2 Precautionary labels .................................................................................................................. 7
2.2 Product overview ................................................................................................................................ 8
2.3 Measuring principle............................................................................................................................. 8
2.4 Product components........................................................................................................................... 8
2.4.1 FP 360 sc sensor ...................................................................................................................... 9
2.5 Function test ....................................................................................................................................... 9
Section 3 Installation ............................................................................................................................ 11
3.1 Connect sensor cable ....................................................................................................................... 11
3.2 Installation options ............................................................................................................................ 13
3.2.1 Installation with the chain mount kit ......................................................................................... 13
3.2.2 Installation of chain mount kit for sensors with cleaning unit ................................................... 13
3.2.2.1 Install the cleaning unit hose........................................................................................... 13
3.2.3 Installation with flow cell........................................................................................................... 15
Section 4 Operation.............................................................................................................................. 17
4.1 User interface and navigation ........................................................................................................... 17
4.2 Sensor setup..................................................................................................................................... 17
4.3 Sensor data logger ........................................................................................................................... 17
4.4 Menu structure.................................................................................................................................. 18
4.4.1 SENSOR STATUS................................................................................................................... 18
4.4.2 SENSOR SETUP..................................................................................................................... 18
4.5 Calibration......................................................................................................................................... 20
4.5.1 Factory calibration.................................................................................................................... 20
4.5.2 Process calibration/adjustment ................................................................................................ 20
4.5.2.1 Determination of factors and adjustment of slope........................................................... 20
4.5.2.2 Multi-point calibration ...................................................................................................... 21
4.5.3 Check the zero point ................................................................................................................ 21
4.5.4 Adjustment of slope and zero point; multi-point calibration...................................................... 21
4.5.4.1 Adjust the slope (FACTOR) ............................................................................................ 21
4.5.4.2 Adjust the zero point (OFFSET)...................................................................................... 22
4.5.4.3 Multi-point calibration (2 to 5-point calibration) ............................................................... 22
Section 5 Maintenance ......................................................................................................................... 23
5.1 Maintenance schedule...................................................................................................................... 23
5.2 Maintenance for the connectors on the sensor................................................................................. 23
5.3 Cleaning the measurement windows................................................................................................ 24
3
Table of Contents
Section 6 Troubleshooting ...................................................................................................................25

6.1 Error messages .................................................................................................................................25
6.2 Warnings ...........................................................................................................................................25
6.3 Replacement parts ............................................................................................................................25
Section 7 Replacement parts and accessories ..............................................................................27
7.1 Sensor options ..................................................................................................................................27
7.2 Replacement parts ............................................................................................................................27
7.3 Accessories .......................................................................................................................................27
Section 8 Contact information ............................................................................................................29
Section 9 Limited warranty...................................................................................................................31
Appendix A Modbus register ..............................................................................................................33
Index .......................................................................................................................................................35
4
Section 1 Specifications
Measurement
UV fluorescent measurement process for polycyclic aromatic
Hydrocarbons (PAH)
Measurement method
Excitation wavelength: 254 nm
Emission (measurement) wavelength: 360 nm
0 to 50 ppb and 0 to 500 ppb in relation to PAH calibration standard,
Low measurement range corresponding to 0.1 to 1.5 ppm and 0.1 to 15 ppm of oil calibration
standard
Measuring range
0 to 500 ppb and 0 to 5000 ppb in relation to PAH calibration standard,
High measurement range corresponding to 0.1 to 15 ppm and 0.1 to 150 ppm of oil calibration
standard
Display units ppb, ppm, g/L, mg/L
Reproducibility 2.5% of measurement value at a constant temperature

5% of measurement value 2% from measurement range limit
Measurement accuracy
at a constant temperature
Limit of detection 1.2 ppb (PAH)
Response time 10 s (T90)

Factory calibration with UV fluorescence calibration standard, custom
Calibration
adaptation possible
Sensor software
Software version From 1.14
Equipment properties
Measurement sensor Stainless steel version 2.8 kg, titanium version 1.8 kg
Weight
Flow cell Approximately 0.6 kg, including installation board approximately 2.0 kg
Sensor Max. 30 bar

Pressure range
Flow cell Max. 1 bar
68 mm x 306 mm (2.68 in. x 12.05 in.)
(without plugs or suspension pin)
Measurement sensor
68 mm x 399 mm (2.68 in. x 15.71 in.) (including suspension pin)
( length)
68 mm x 413 mm (2.68 in. x 16.26 in.)
Dimensions (with additional cleaning option)
98 mm x 98 mm x 150 mm (3.86 in. x 3.86 in. x 5.91 in.) (without
Flow cell (L W D) fittings),
installation board: 600 x 300 x 10 mm (23.62 in. x 11.81 in. x 0.39 in.)
Housing: stainless steel 1.4571 or titanium
Optic bracket: POM
Housing bolts: stainless steel 1.4571
Measurement sensor
Measurement window: synthetic quartz glass (Suprasil)
Gaskets (housing): Viton
Materials Gaskets (measurement window): NBR (Nitrile Butadiene Rubber)
Housing: POM
Installation board: PVC
Flow cell
Gaskets: NBR (Nitrile Butadiene Rubber)
Fittings: nickel-plated brass
Shackle Stainless steel 1.4301
5
Specifications
Environment considerations
Sample temperature 1 to 40 C (34 to 104 F)

5 to +45 C (23 to 113 F)
Measurement sensor wetted by at least half from the measuring
Ambient temperature
medium:
25 to +55 C (-13 to 131 F)
Sensor distance - wall/ground min. 100 mm (3.94 in.) (recommended)
Miscellaneous
Cable length 1.5 or 10 m, extension cable up to total maximum length of 40 m
Connection Sensor side 8-pin, type of protection IP68, PUR

information Controller side M12, type of protection IP67
Inspection interval Every 2 years

Clean the measurement window, if necessary. Intervals are dependent
Maintenance requirements
on the measuring medium.
Compliance CE
Warranty 1 year
1.1 Dimensions
Figure 1 Sensor without and with cleaning unit

1 Sensor without cleaning unit 2 Sensor with cleaning unit
6
Section 2 General information
2.1 Safety information

Please read this entire manual before unpacking, setting up or operating this equipment.
Pay attention to all danger and caution statements. Failure to do so could result in serious
injury to the operator or damage to the equipment.
Make sure that the protection provided by this equipment is not impaired, do not use or
install this equipment in any manner other than that specified in this manual.
2.1.1 Use of hazard information
DANGER
Indicates a potentially or imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death
or serious injury.
WA R N I N G
Indicates a potentially or imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in
death or serious injury.
CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that may result in minor or moderate injury.
NOTICE
Indicates a situation which, if not avoided, may cause damage to the instrument. Information that
requires special emphasis.
Note: Information that supplements points in the main text.
2.1.2 Precautionary labels

Read all labels and tags attached to the instrument. Personal injury or damage to the
instrument could occur if not observed. A symbol on the instrument is referenced in the
manual with a precautionary statement.
This is the safety alert symbol. Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol to avoid potential injury. If on the
instrument, refer to the instruction manual for operation or safety information.
This symbol shows that a UV lamp is used in the equipment.
Electrical equipment marked with this symbol may not be disposed of in European domestic or public disposal
systems after 12 August 2005. In conformity with European local and national regulations (EU Directive
2002/96/EC), European electrical equipment users must now return old or end-of life equipment to the manufacturer
for disposal at no charge to the user.
Note: For return for recycling, please contact the equipment producer or supplier for instructions on how to return
end-oflife equipment, producer-supplied electrical accessories, and all auxiliary items for proper disposal.
7
General information
2.2 Product overview
DANGER
This product is not suitable for use in potentially explosive atmospheres.
WA R N I N G
The UV rays from the flash bulb are harmful to eyes and skin. Do not look directly through the
measurement window during operation under any circumstances. Remove the measurement
sensor from operation before carrying out any maintenance or installation work.
The FP 360 sc sensor is a UV fluorimeter used to continuously measure the concentration

of PAH (polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons) in water. The measurement values can be
converted to reflect the total oil content for mineral oils using lab data.
The sensor may need to be installed with additional accessories depending on its area of
application.
Area of application Installation with Sensor variants

Open channels, shafts, tanks (solid
Chain mount kit Sensor with or without cleaning unit
matter max. 200 mg/L)
Measurement media without solid
matter with continuous, low sample Flow cell Sensor without cleaning unit
throughput
Do not apply the sensor to any hard mechanical effects.
2.3 Measuring principle

The measuring principle is based on the fluorescent properties of PAHs. After excitation
caused by UV rays, PAHs emit light with longer wavelengths after a short time delay. The
intensity of this light is measured. This measuring principle is considerably more sensitive
than absorption and scattered light measurement. It is possible to detect even the slightest
trace of PAH contamination in water. PAHs are integral parts of most mineral oil products
and are a very specific indicator of oil contamination in water bodies and process water.
2.4 Product components

Each sensor is supplied with
a connector cable with safety sleeve,
a shackle,
a basic user manual and
a CD.
The sensor is available in a variety of types (refer to section 7.1 on page 27). Refer to
Figure 2 to make sure that all components have been received. If any of these items are
missing or damaged, contact the manufacturer or a sales representative immediately.
8
General information
2.4.1 FP 360 sc sensor
Figure 2 FP 360 sc sensor

1 FP 360 sc measurement sensor 5 6 mm fitting for cleaning unit (depending on model)
2 Basic user manual with CD 6 Safety sleeve
3 Measurement window 7 Connector cable
4 Sensor with cleaning unit (depending on model) 8 Shackle
2.5 Function test
CAUTION
Before power is applied, refer to the controller operation instructions.
After the components are removed from the package, do a function test.
1. Connect the connector cable to the sensor (8-pin polarized connector) and an
appropriate sc controller (5-pin polarized connector) (refer to section 3.1 on page 11).
2. Apply power to the sc controller. The display is activated and the sensor goes to
measurement mode.
The sensor ticks quietly and regularly.
9
General information
3. Cover the sensor measurement window with a sheet of white paper (do not use
recycled paper).
4. Vary the distance between the measurement window and the paper.
The measurement value on the display will change accordingly.
Note: In air, the measurement value displayed is not exactly zero due to reflections on the window
surface (refer to section 4.5.3 on page 21).
10
Section 3 Installation
DANGER
Personal injury hazard. Only qualified personnel should conduct the tasks described in this section
of the manual.
NOTICE
If the sensor is not fully inserted, sun protection is recommended in high ambient temperatures
and intense solar radiation to protect against thermal and UV effects.
3.1 Connect sensor cable
CAUTION
Always put the cables and hoses in a position that does not bend or cause a trip hazard.
CAUTION
Before power is applied, refer to the controller operation instructions.
1. Connect the polarized socket on the connector cable to the sensor plug (8-pin plug)
(refer to Figure 3 step 1).
2. Push the safety sleeve on the plug (step 2).
3. Hand-tighten the safety sleeve in position (step 3).
Figure 3 Connect the sensor cable to the sensor
4. Remove the protective cap on the controller socket and keep it to seal the connector
opening in case the sensor must be removed.
5. Connect the sensor to the controller using the keyed quick-connect fitting.
Hand-tighten (refer to Figure 4).
Note: Connector cables are available in various lengths (refer to section 7.2 on page 27). Maximum
overall cable length is 40 m (131,23 ft).
11
Installation
Figure 4 Connect the sensor to the controller
1 2
4 3
Figure 5 Pin configuration

Number Description Standard cable, cable color
1 +12 VDC brown
2 Ground black
3 Data (+) blue
4 Data () white
5 Screen Screen (gray)
6 Guide
12
Installation
3.2 Installation options

The sensor may need to be installed with additional optional accessories depending on
the area of application (refer to section 7.3 on page 27).
Note: Refer to the documentation supplied with the accessories for detailed installation instructions.
3.2.1 Installation with the chain mount kit

The FP 360 sc sensor is installed with the chain mount kit in open channels, shafts and
tanks.
Figure 6 FP 360 sc measurement sensor with chain mount kit
3.2.2 Installation of chain mount kit for sensors with cleaning unit
3.2.2.1 Install the cleaning unit hose

Note: An air hose is required, to operate the sensor with the optional cleaning unit. An oil-free
compressed air (6 bar) and a solenoid valve or the HOAB compressed air cleaning system is also
required (refer to section 7.3 on page 27).
With the HOAB compressed air cleaning system, replace the end of the hose connection
that is connected to the compressed air on the underside of the instrument with the
straight 6 mm fitting (refer to Figure 2 on page 9, item 5) supplied with the probe.
13
Installation
Figure 7 Install the cleaning unit hose
Figure 8 FP 360 sc measurement sensor with cleaning unit and chain mount kit
14
Installation
3.2.3 Installation with flow cell

The FP 360 sc sensor with flow cell is installed for samples free of solids and particulates
and limited sample flows.
Figure 9 Installation with flow cell
15
Installation
16
Section 4 Operation
4.1 User interface and navigation

The sensor can be used with sc controllers from sc100. Refer to the controller
documentation for keypad description and navigation information.
4.2 Sensor setup

When the sensor is connected for the first time, the sensor serial number is displayed as
the name of the sensor. To change the sensor name:
1. Open the MAIN MENU.
2. Select SENSOR SETUP and confirm.
3. Select the corresponding sensor and confirm.
5. Select EDIT NAME and confirm.
6. Edit the name and confirm to return to the SENSOR SETUP menu.
Complete sensor configuration in the same manner, with the following menu options
selected:
SET PARAMETER
SELECT UNITS
AVERAGE
LOG SETUP
GAIN VALUE
4.3 Sensor data logger

There is a data log and event log available for each sensor.
In the data log, the measurement data are stored at preset intervals; the event log stores
events such as configuration changes, alarm messages and warning messages. Both logs
can be exported to CSV format (refer to the controller manual).
17
Operation
4.4 Menu structure
4.4.1 SENSOR STATUS

SELECT SENSOR (if there is more than one sensor)
ERROR LIST Possible error messages: SENSOR ERROR

Possible warning messages: TEST/MAINT, BULB CHANGE, LAST CONFIGUR, TARGET
WARNING LIST
VALUE
Note: Refer to Section 6 on page 25 for a list of all possible error and warning messages
together with a description of all necessary countermeasures to be taken.
4.4.2 SENSOR SETUP

CALIBRATE
SET OUTMODE Behavior of the outputs during calibration and zero point adjustment
HOLD
ACTIVE
SET TRANSFER
SENSOR MEASURE Current, uncorrected measurement value
FACTOR: 0.1 to 100
CONFIGURE
OFFSET: 1000 to +1000
FACTOR
OFFSET
2 POINT
3 POINT
4 POINT
5 POINT
Is shown when FACTOR has been selected under CONFIGURE.
FACTOR
Refer to section 4.5 on page 20 for detailed information.
Is shown when OFFSET has been selected under CONFIGURE.
OFFSET
Is shown when 2 POINT has been selected under CONFIGURE.
2 POINT
3 POINT
4 POINT
5 POINT
SET CAL DEFLT Security query, reset to (FACTOR=1, OFFSET=0)
18
Operation
4.4.2 SENSOR SETUP (Continued)

CONFIGURE
Name can include up to 16 characters,
EDIT NAME
DEFAULT CONFIG: sensor serial number
PAH: Measurement value related to PAH calibration standard
SET PARAMETER OIL: Measurement value related to oil calibration standard
DEFAULT CONFIG: PAH
ppb, ppm, g/L, mg/L,
SELECT UNITS
DEFAULT CONFIG: ppb
1 to 300 s,
AVERAGE
DEFAULT CONFIG: 3 s
5 s, 30 s, 1 min, 2 min, 3 min, 4 min, 5 min, 6 min, 10 min, 15 min, 30 min,
LOG SETUP
DEFAULT CONFIG: 10 min
Range 0 to 500 ppb: AUTO, 0.01 to 50, 0.01 to 500,
GAIN VALUE Range 0 to 5000 ppb: AUTO, 0.01 to 500, 0.01 to 5000
DEFAULT CONFIG: AUTO
Security query,
SET DEFAULTS
reset to preset configuration for all menu options listed above.
DIAG/TEST
PROBE INFO
SENSOR NAME Device name
EDIT NAME
SERIAL NUMBER Device serial number
RANGE 0 to 500 or 0 to 5000
MODEL NUMBER Item no. Sensor
CODE VERSION Sensor software
COUNTER
OPERATING HOURS Operating hours counter
MAINTENANCE Counter counting down days
BULB CHANGE Counter counting down days
TEST/MAINT
SET OUTMODE Equipment output behavior in the SERVICE menu
HOLD
ACTIVE
SET TRANSFER
SIGNALS
LAMP CURR Flash lamp intensity
DIAG/TEST Zero point and slope check with external standards
REDADING OFFSET
CUBE CAL
Password-protected access for the service
19
Operation
4.5 Calibration
4.5.1 Factory calibration
The calibration curve zero point and slope are preset. Retrospective calibration of these
basic settings is generally not required outside of the inspection intervals.
Do regular zero point checks to make sure that impurities or faults are being detected
(refer to section 4.5.3 on page 21).
If the zero signal increases due to the measuring medium components or the installation
conditions, you can compensate for this influence via an offset correction. Carry out a lab
analysis of the sample to do this. If there is no PAH/oil contamination in the measuring
medium, enter the measurement value shown by the device as the offset (refer to section
4.5.4.2 on page 22).
4.5.2 Process calibration/adjustment

The sensor is pre-calibrated with various concentrations of a special calibration standard
in ultra-pure water. These ideal measurement conditions rarely occur in reality. The
measurement values shown are qualitative trend indicators if no adjustment is made to the
on-site measurement conditions.
If you require quantitatively correct measurement values, either a slope adjustment or a
multi-point calibration needs to be carried out. Both of these operations must be carried
out on site using lab analysis data. Basic prerequisites for quantitative measurements are
precise knowledge about the oil type in occurrence and constant measurement conditions,
e.g. in cool water in a heat exchanger. If several oils are present in varying quantities, it is
generally not possible to carry out a quantitative measurement.
If the measurement conditions change, you must check the accuracy of the results again
through lab analyses and make any adjustments where necessary.
The measurement conditions can change in terms of
Composition of PAH or oil impurities
Distribution of impurities in water
Temp
Measuring medium composition
Measurement sensor and measurement window
4.5.2.1 Determination of factors and adjustment of slope

To adjust the slope:
1. At the sensor installation site, draw a lab sample of the measuring medium and
promptly analyze the sample for PAH and oil content.
2. Make a note of the measurement value shown on the controller at the time of the
sample being taken. Make sure the correct unit is shown for the measurement value,
e.g. as ppm oil.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 several times.
4. Use the sample value and the value shown on the controller at the time of sampling
to calculate a factor.
5. Find an average value from the factors.
20
Operation
6. Enter the factor as the slope (refer to section 4.5.4.1 on page 21).
Example for engine oil Example for naphthalene

Lab value: 4.0 ppm oil Lab value: 420 ppb PAH
Measurement value shown1: 2.4 ppm oil Measurement value shown1: 120 ppb PAH
Calculated factor: 1.67 Calculated factor: 3.5
1 At the time of sampling
It is advisable to adjust the slope if the following conditions apply:

If the measuring sample is PAH-/oil free, the measurement value must almost be zero.
The factors calculated from the lab values must enable a sensible average value to be
derived.
If these conditions do not apply, do a multi-point calibration.
Note: If both the zero point and the slope must be changed, use a 2-point calibration (refer to
section 4.5.4.3 on page 22).
4.5.2.2 Multi-point calibration

In the event of a multi-point calibration, enter the lab value as the target value and the
value shown as the actual value. Make sure that all values are entered in the same unit,
e.g. oil in ppm. (refer to section 4.5.4.3 on page 22).
4.5.3 Check the zero point

Medium: ultra-pure water
Target value: < 1 ppb. Clean the window in the event of deviations.
Use a glass container (not plastic) large enough to enable the measurement to be taken
with an 8 to 10 cm distance between the measurement window and the base (e.g. a
1000 mL glass beaker). Place a black, non-reflective underlay under the container and
switch off artificial lights during the measurement process.
Note: In air, the measurement value displayed is not exactly zero due to reflections on the window
surface. This is standard sensor behavior and not an indicator of malfunction.
Note: Always use ultra-pure water. Distilled water and demineralized water are not suitable as these
can contain organic compounds.
4.5.4 Adjustment of slope and zero point; multi-point calibration
4.5.4.1 Adjust the slope (FACTOR)

4. Select CALIBRATE and confirm.
6. Select FACTOR and confirm.
7. Enter the calculated factor and confirm.
8. Go back to the MAIN MENU or the Measurement mode display.
21
Operation
4.5.4.2 Adjust the zero point (OFFSET)

6. Press OFFSET and confirm.
7. Enter the required offset and confirm.
4.5.4.3 Multi-point calibration (2 to 5-point calibration)

Note: Multi-point calibration means that the pairs must be input in ascending order.
6. Select the type of calibration, e.g. 2 POINT and confirm.
7. Select 1PAIR and confirm.
8. Edit the TARGET VALUE and confirm.
9. Edit the ACTUAL VALUE and confirm.
10. Repeat the process for 2PAIR and confirm.
22
Section 5 Maintenance
The inside of the sensor is maintenance-free.
The cleanliness of the measurement window in the sensor head has an impact on the
accuracy of measurements. Check the measurement window at regular intervals to make
sure it is clean. The required frequency of these checks is dependent on the measuring
medium. Also do a check in the event of unusually high measurement values and clean
the measurement window if necessary (refer to section 5.3 on page 24).
For sensors with a cleaning unit, adjust the frequency of cleaning to the measurement
conditions. The inspection interval must be shortened to reflect any increase in solid
matter.
NOTICE
Individual components of the suspension device (shackle and chain of the chain mount kit) are
made of stainless steel and may corrode.
5.1 Maintenance schedule
Interval Maintenance task1
Visual inspection Application-dependent Check for contamination and corrosion.

System inspection Every 2 years Check plugs and flash bulb.
Calibration check Every 2 years Check calibration
1 When operated according to factory settings and appropriate use
Contact the manufacturer's service department every 2 years to arrange sensor

inspection, testing, calibration and seal replacement. The flash bulb is also replaced every
4 years.
5.2 Maintenance for the connectors on the sensor

The 8-pin connector on the sensor is designed for constant usage under water. The
connector is lubricated with high-performance grease at the factory and does not require
any additional maintenance from the recommended sensor inspection cycles.
To maintain the performance of the connectors:
Protect the neoprene components of the connector against high temperatures and
intense solar radiation. If this cannot be avoided, moisten the dried out neoprene
components with clean, clear water. Subsequently, loosen the connector.
The pins must always be lightly lubricated. Only apply a very thin film of lubricant.
Recommended lubricants are Loctite 8021 as a spray or Molykote 44 Medium.
The lubricant must not come into contact with the measurement window.
Rinse out grains of sand and solid matter from the cable socket.
To loosen the connector, unscrew the safety sleeve and pull out the plug longitudinally.
Avoid flexing the plug and pulling on the cable.
Do not loosen the connector at ambient temperatures below 0 C. Heat the neoprene
components carefully to temperatures above 0 C and then loosen the connector.
Avoid kinks or tight bend in the cables.
23
Maintenance
5.3 Cleaning the measurement windows
CAUTION
Cleaning agents can be hazardous to health.
Wear protective equipment and avoid direct contact with cleaning fluids.
NOTICE
Other cleaning agents can damage the material. Damage caused by cleaning carried out
incorrectly is not covered by the warranty.
1. Rinse the sensor with fresh water until all attached solid matter has been removed.
2. Use pure acetone and a soft, clean cloth (e.g. camera lens cleaning paper) to
carefully remove the deposits on the measurement window. Avoid sharp objects on
the measurement window surface.
3. Rinse the residue from the cleaning agent with fresh water.
24
Section 6 Troubleshooting
6.1 Error messages

Possible sensor errors displayed by the sc controller.
Displayed errors Definition Resolution

SENSOR ERROR Electronic defect Call manufacturer customer service
6.2 Warnings
Possible sensor warning messages displayed by the sc controller.
Displayed warnings Definition Resolution

DIAG/TEST Counter expired Call manufacturer customer service
BULB CHANGE Counter expired Call manufacturer customer service
Changed configuration was
LAST CONFIGUR Send configuration again
not accepted
With multi-point calibration,
TARGET VALUE values not entered in Enter calibration values in ascending order
ascending order
6.3 Replacement parts
Designation Quantity Service life

Flash bulb 1 4 years
O-Rings 4 2 years
25
Troubleshooting
26
Section 7 Replacement parts and accessories
7.1 Sensor options

Description Cat. no.
Range 0 to 50/500 ppb, stainless steel housing, cable length 10 m without cleaning unit LXV441.99.11102
Range 0 to 50/500 ppb, stainless steel housing, cable length 10 m with cleaning unit and fittings
LXV441.99.11202
(not in connection with flow cell)
Range 0 to 50/500 ppb, stainless steel housing, cable length 1.5 m without cleaning unit LXV441.99.11302
Range 0 to 50/500 ppb, titanium housing, cable length 10 m without cleaning unit LXV441.99.12102
Range 0 to 50/500 ppb, titanium housing, cable length 10 m with cleaning unit and fittings (not
LXV441.99.12202
in connection with flow cell)
Range 0 to 50/500 ppb, titanium housing, cable length 1.5 m without cleaning unit LXV441.99.12302
Range 0 to 500/5000 ppb, stainless steel housing, cable length 10 m without cleaning unit LXV441.99.21102
Range 0 to 500/5000 ppb, stainless steel housing, cable length 10 m with cleaning unit and
LXV441.99.21202
fittings (not in connection with flow cell)
Range 0 to 500/5000 ppb, stainless steel housing, cable length 1.5 m without cleaning unit LXV441.99.21302
Range 0 to 500/5000 ppb, titanium housing, cable length 10 m without cleaning unit LXV441.99.22102
Range 0 to 500/5000 ppb, titanium housing, cable length 10 m with cleaning unit and fittings
LXV441.99.22202
(not in connection with flow cell)
Range 0 to 500/5000 ppb, titanium housing, cable length 1.5 m without cleaning unit LXV441.99.22302
7.2 Replacement parts

Connector cable 1.5 m LZY623
Connector cable 10 m LZY624
Shackle, stainless steel 1.4301 LZY668
Gasket and screw set for flow cell LZY625
Fitting set for flow cell LZY626
Pressure ring and angle bracket for flow cell LZY674
Chain mount kit instructions DOC273.99.90164
Flow cell instructions DOC273.99.90165
7.3 Accessories
Extension cable (5 m/16.40 ft) LZX848
Flow cell on prefabricated wall including gasket set LZY669
V4A chain mount kit LZX914.99.11110
HOAB compressed air cleaning system, 115 V, HACH version 6860000
Hose for air and measuring medium 5 m, 6/4 mm external/internal diameter LZY619
Hose for measuring medium 5 m, 8/6 mm external/internal diameter LZY672
27
Replacement parts and accessories
7.3 Accessories (table continued)

Hose for measuring medium 10 m, 8/6 mm external/internal diameter LZY673
28
Section 8 Contact information
HACH Company Repair Service in the Repair Service in Canada: Repair Service in
World Headquarters United States: Hach Sales & Service Latin America, the
P.O. Box 389 HACH Company Canada Ltd. Caribbean, the Far East,
Loveland, Colorado Ames Service 1313 Border Street, Unit 34 Indian Subcontinent, Africa,
80539-0389 U.S.A. 100 Dayton Avenue Winnipeg, Manitoba Europe, or the Middle East:
Tel (800) 227-HACH Ames, Iowa 50010 R3H 0X4 Hach Company World
(800) -227-4224 Tel (800) 227-4224 Tel (800) 665-7635 Headquarters,
(U.S.A. only) (U.S.A. only) (Canada only) P.O. Box 389
Fax (970) 669-2932 Fax (515) 232-3835 Tel (204) 632-5598 Loveland, Colorado,
orders@hach.com Fax (204) 694-5134 80539-0389 U.S.A.
www.hach.com canada@hach.com Tel +001 (970) 669-3050
Fax +001 (970) 669-2932
intl@hach.com
HACH LANGE GMBH HACH LANGE LTD HACH LANGE LTD HACH LANGE GMBH
Willsttterstrae 11 Pacific Way Unit 1, Chestnut Road Htteldorferstr. 299/Top 6
D-40549 Dsseldorf Salford Western Industrial Estate A-1140 Wien
Tel. +49 (0)2 11 52 88-320 GB-Manchester, M50 1DL IRL-Dublin 12 Tel. +43 (0)1 9 12 16 92
Fax +49 (0)2 11 52 88-210 Tel. +44 (0)161 872 14 87 Tel. +353(0)1 46 02 5 22 Fax +43 (0)1 9 12 16 92-99
info@hach-lange.de Fax +44 (0)161 848 73 24 Fax +353(0)1 4 50 93 37 info@hach-lange.at
www.hach-lange.de info@hach-lange.co.uk info@hach-lange.ie www.hach-lange.at
www.hach-lange.co.uk www.hach-lange.ie
HACH LANGE HACH LANGE FRANCE HACH LANGE SA DR. LANGE NEDERLAND
Rorschacherstrasse 30 a S.A.S. Motstraat 54 B.V.
CH-9424 Rheineck 8, mail Barthlmy Thimonnier B-2800 Mechelen Laan van Westroijen 2a
Tel. +41 (0)71 886 91 11 Lognes Tl. +32 (0)15 42 35 00 NL-4003 AZ Tiel
Fax +41 (0)71 886 91 66 F-77437 Marne-La-Valle Fax +32 (0)15 41 61 20 Tel. +31(0)344 63 11 30
info@hach-lange.ch cedex 2 info@hach-lange.be Fax +31(0)344 63 11 50
www.hach-lange.ch Tl. +33 (0)8 20 20 14 14 www.hach-lange.be info@hach-lange.nl
Fax +33 (0)1 69 67 34 99 www.hach-lange.nl
info@hach-lange.fr
www.hach-lange.fr
HACH LANGE APS HACH LANGE AB HACH LANGE S.R.L. HACH LANGE S.L.U.
kandevej 21 Vinthundsvgen 159A Via Riccione, 14 Edif. Arteaga Centrum
DK-2700 Brnshj SE-128 62 Skndal I-20156 Milano C/Larrauri, 1C- 2 Pl.
Tel. +45 36 77 29 11 Tel. +46 (0)8 7 98 05 00 Tel. +39 02 39 23 14-1 E-48160 Derio/Vizcaya
Fax +45 36 77 49 11 Fax +46 (0)8 7 98 05 30 Fax +39 02 39 23 14-39 Tel. +34 94 657 33 88
info@hach-lange.dk info@hach-lange.se info@hach-lange.it Fax +34 94 657 33 97
www.hach-lange.dk www.hach-lange.se www.hach-lange.it info@hach-lange.es
www.hach-lange.es
HACH LANGE LDA HACH LANGE SP.ZO.O. HACH LANGE S.R.O. HACH LANGE S.R.O.
Av. do Forte n8 ul. Opolska 143 a Leansk 2a/1176 Roncka 21
Fraco M PL-52-013 Wrocaw CZ-141 00 Praha 4 SK-831 07 Bratislava
P-2790-072 Carnaxide Tel. +48 (0)71 342 10-83 Tel. +420 272 12 45 45 Vajnory
Tel. +351 214 253 420 Fax +48 (0)71 342 10-79 Fax +420 272 12 45 46 Tel. +421 (0)2 4820 9091
Fax +351 214 253 429 info@hach-lange.pl info@hach-lange.cz Fax +421 (0)2 4820 9093
info@hach-lange.pt www.hach-lange.pl www.hach-lange.cz info@hach-lange.sk
www.hach-lange.pt www.hach-lange.sk
HACH LANGE KFT. HACH LANGE S.R.L. HACH LANGE HACH LANGE SU
Vrskereszt utca. 8-10. Str. Cminului nr. 3 8, Kr. Sarafov str. ANALZ SSTEMLER
H-1222 Budapest XXII. ker. Sector 2 BG-1164 Sofia LTD.T.
Tel. +36 (06)1 225 7783 RO-021741 Bucureti Tel. +359 (0)2 963 44 54 Hilal Mah. 75. Sokak
Fax +36 (06)1 225 7784 Tel. +40 (0) 21 205 30 03 Fax +359 (0)2 866 15 26 Arman Plaza No: 9/A
info@hach-lange.hu Fax +40 (0) 21 205 30 17 info@hach-lange.bg TR-06550 ankaya/ANKARA
www.hach-lange.hu info@hach-lange.ro www.hach-lange.bg Tel. +90 (0)312 440 98 98
www.hach-lange.ro Fax +90 (0)312 442 11 01
bilgi@hach-lange.com.tr
www.hach-lange.com.tr
29
Contact information
HACH LANGE D.O.O. CH LANGE E... HACH LANGE E.P.E. HACH LANGE D.O.O.
Fajfarjeva 15 27 27, Avlidos str Ivana Severa bb
SI-1230 Domale GR-115 27 GR-115 27 Athens 42 000 Varadin
Tel. +386 (0)59 051 000 . +30 210 7777038 Tel. +30 210 7777038 Tel. +385 (0) 42 305 086
Fax +386 (0)59 051 010 Fax +30 210 7777976 Fax +30 210 7777976 Fax +385 (0) 42 305 087
info@hach-lange.si info@hach-lange.gr info@hach-lange.gr info@hach-lange.hr
www.hach-lange.si www.hach-lange.gr www.hach-lange.gr www.hach-lange.hr
HACH LANGE MAROC

SARLAU
Villa 14 Rue 2 Casa
Plaisance
Quartier Racine Extension
MA-Casablanca 20000
Tl. +212 (0)522 97 95 75
Fax +212 (0)522 36 89 34
info-maroc@hach-lange.com
www.hach-lange.ma
30
Section 9 Limited warranty
Hach Company warrants its products to the original purchaser against any defects that are
due to faulty material or workmanship for a period of one year from date of shipment
unless otherwise noted in the product manual.
In the event that a defect is discovered during the warranty period, Hach Company agrees
that, at its option, it will repair or replace the defective product or refund the purchase price
excluding original shipping and handling charges. Any product repaired or replaced under
this warranty will be warranted only for the remainder of the original product warranty
period.
This warranty does not apply to consumable products such as chemical reagents; or
consumable components of a product, such as, but not limited to, lamps and tubing.
Contact Hach Company or your distributor to initiate warranty support. Products may not
be returned without authorization from Hach Company.
Limitations
This warranty does not cover:
Damage caused by acts of God, natural disaster, labor unrest, acts of war (declared or
undeclared), terrorism, civil strife or acts of any governmental jurisdiction
Damage caused by misuse, neglect, accident or improper application or installation
Damage caused by any repair or attempted repair not authorized by Hach Company
Any product not used in accordance with the instructions furnished by Hach Company
Freight charges to return merchandise to Hach Company
Freight charges on expedited or express shipment of warranted parts or product
Travel fees associated with on-site warranty repair
This warranty contains the sole express warranty made by Hach Company in connection
with its products. All implied warranties, including without limitation, the warranties of
merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are expressly disclaimed.
Some states within the United States do not allow the disclaimer of implied warranties and
if this is true in your state the above limitation may not apply to you. This warranty gives
you specific rights, and you may also have other rights that vary from state to state.
This warranty constitutes the final, complete, and exclusive statement of warranty terms
and no person is authorized to make any other warranties or representations on behalf of
Hach Company.
Limitation of Remedies
The remedies of repair, replacement or refund of purchase price as stated above are the
exclusive remedies for the breach of this warranty. On the basis of strict liability or under
any other legal theory, in no event shall Hach Company be liable for any incidental or
consequential damages of any kind for breach of warranty or negligence.
31
Limited warranty
32
Appendix A Modbus register
Table 1 Sensor Modbus registers

Register# Data type Length R/W Description
40001 Unsigned integer 1 R Reserved
40002 Float 2 R Measurement value as PAH, unit PPB
40004 Float 2 R Measurement value as PAH, unit PPM
40006 Float 2 R Measurement value as OIL, unit PPB
40008 Float 2 R Measurement value as OIL, unit PPM
40016 String 6 R Serial number
40022 String 8 R/W Name of location
40030 Unsigned integer 1 R/W Choose the parameter, 47=PAH, 48=OIL
Measurement units
40031 Unsigned integer 1 R/W
38=ppb, 39= g/L, 2=ppm, 0=mg/L
40040 Float 2 R/W Offset for calibration
40042 Float 2 R/W Factor for calibration
40050 Unsigned integer 1 R/W Logging interval from 5 sec to 1800 sec
40051 Unsigned integer 1 R/W Measuring interval from 1 sec to 300 sec
Amplification for the low/high range probe,
0=AUTO,
40052 Unsigned integer 1 R/W
1= 0.01 to 50/500 PPB,
2= 0.01 to 500/5000 PPB
40055 Unsigned integer 1 R/W Set output mode for calibration
40056 Unsigned integer 1 R/W Set output mode for service
40057 Float 2 R Version of application file
40059 Float 2 R The entry is for the application file
40061 Float 2 R Version of the probe
40063 Unsigned integer 1 R The entry is for the device driver file
Days left until exchanging lamp,
40066 Integer 1 R
negative values show that exchange is overdue
Days left until maintenance,
40067 Integer 1 R
negative values show that service is overdue
40068 Unsigned integer 2 R Operating hours of analyzer
33
Modbus register
34
Index
A Measurement accuracy .............................................. 5

Areas of application ................................................... 8 Measuring method ..................................................... 5
Measuring principle .................................................... 8
C Measuring range ........................................................ 5
Calibration .................................................................. 5 Modbus register ....................................................... 33
Chain mount kit ........................................................ 13
P
D Precautionary labels ................................................... 7
Data logger .............................................................. 17 Pressure range ........................................................... 5
Dimensions ................................................................ 6 Product contents ........................................................ 8
E R
Error messages ........................................................ 25 Reproducibility ............................................................ 5
Response time ........................................................... 5
F
S
Flow cell ................................................................... 15
Function test .............................................................. 9 Safety information ...................................................... 7
Safety sleeve ............................................................ 11
I Specifications ............................................................. 5
Inspection interval ...................................................... 6 System configuration ................................................ 17
M W
Maintenance schedule ............................................. 23 Warnings .................................................................. 25
Wearing parts ........................................................... 25
35
Index
36
Technical Information
Proline Prosonic Flow 91W

Ultrasonic Flow Measuring System
Flowrate measurement for standard applications with
drinking water and process water
Applications Features and benefits

The sensors are perfectly suited for the non-contact The Prosonic Flow ultrasonic clamp-on system allows
measurement of pure or slightly contaminated liquids, accurate and cost-effective flow measurement from
regardless of the pressure or electrical conductivity. outside the pipe and without the need to interrupt the
process. The flow measurement is bidirectional and
Suitable for pipe diameters in the range
causes no pressure loss.
DN 15 to 2000 (" to 80")
Can be used with all metal and plastic pipes lined or Easy, safe and menu-guided sensor mounting ensures
unlined precise measuring results
Ideal solution for applications with water, e.g. drinking Long-term system integrity thanks to robust sensor
water, industrial water, saltwater, deionized water, and industrial mounting kit design
cooling water and heating water Automatic frequency scan for optimized installation
Perfectly suitable for and maximum measuring performance
subsequent mounting IP 68 for pipes under water
flow monitoring Remote configuration using Endress+Hauser's
improving measuring points FieldCare software
TI00105D/06/EN/13.11
71136725
Table of contents
Function and system design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Human interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Measuring principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Display elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Measuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Sensor selection and arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Remote operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Language group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Measured variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Certificates and approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Measuring range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 CE mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Operable flow range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 C-Tick mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Ex approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Other standards and guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Output signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Signal on alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Ordering information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Low flow cutoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Galvanic isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Device-specific accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Device-specific accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Communication-specific accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Measuring unit electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Service-specific accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Connecting the connecting cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Supply voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Cable entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Cable-specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Registered trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Power supply failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Potential equalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Performance characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Reference operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Maximum measured error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Repeatability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Operating conditions: installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Installation instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Inlet and outlet runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Connection cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Operating conditions: environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Ambient temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Storage temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Shock and vibration resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Operating conditions: process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Medium temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Medium pressure range (nominal pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Pressure loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Energy Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Mechanical construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Design, dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2 Endress+Hauser
Function and system design

Measuring principle The measuring system operates on the principle of transit time difference. In this measurement method,
acoustic (ultrasonic) signals are transmitted between two sensors. The signals are sent in both directions,
i.e. the sensor in question works as both a sound transmitter and a sound receiver.
As the propagation velocity of the waves is less when the waves travel against the direction of flow than along
the direction of flow, a transit time difference occurs. This transit time difference is directly proportional to the
flow velocity.
a
Q b
tb
ta
A0013117
Principle of the transit time difference measurement method

Q=vA
a Sensor
b Sensor
Q Volume flow
v Flow velocity (v & t )
t Transit time difference (t = ta tb)
A Pipe cross-sectional area
The measuring system calculates the volume flow of the fluid from the measured transit time difference and
the pipe cross-sectional area. In addition to measuring the transit time difference, the system simultaneously
measures the sound velocity of the fluid. This additional measured variable can be used to distinguish different
fluids or as a measure of product quality.
The measuring device can be configured onsite to suit the specific application using Quick Setup menus.
Endress+Hauser 3
Measuring The measuring system consists of one transmitter and two sensors. Different versions are available depending
on the specific requirements.
The transmitter is used both to control the sensors and to prepare, process and evaluate the measuring signals,
and to convert the signals to a desired output variable.
The sensors work as sound transmitters and sound receivers. Depending on the application and version, the
sensors can be arranged for measurement via one or two traverses 5.
Transmitter
Prosonic Flow 91 W Field Housing
Es
c
A0006022
Prosonic Flow W Prosonic Flow W

DN 15 to 65 (" to 2") DN 50 to 4000 (2" to 160")
A0013475
A0011484
Mounting accessories
The requisite mounting distances must be determined for the sensors. Information on the fluid, the pipe
material used and the exact pipe dimensions is needed to determine these values. The values for the sound
velocity of the following fluids, pipe materials and lining materials are stored in the transmitter:
Fluid Pipe material Lining
Water Glycol Carbon steel PVDF Mortar

Sea water Kerosene Ductile Iron PA Rubber
Distilled water Milk Stainless steel PP Tar Epoxy
Ammonia Methanol Alloy C PTFE
Alcohol Toluene PVC Glass pyrex
Benzene Lube oil PE
Bromide Fuel Oil LDPE
Ethanol Petrol HDPE
4 Endress+Hauser
Sensor selection and The sensors can be arranged in two ways:

arrangement Mounting arrangement for measurement via one traverse:
the sensors are located on opposite sides of the pipe.
Mounting arrangement for measurement via two traverses:
the sensors are located on the same side of the pipe.
1 2
A0005728
Sensor mounting arrangement (top view)

1 Mounting arrangement for measurement via one traverse
2 Mounting arrangement for measurement via two traverses
Recommendations
The number of traverses required depends on the sensor type, the nominal diameter and the thickness of the
pipe wall. We recommend the following types of mounting:
Sensor Type Nominal Diameter Sensor Frequency Sensor ID Type of Mounting 1)
DN 15 to 65 (" to 2 ") 6 MHz W-CL-6F 2 traverses 3)
DN 80 (3") 2 MHz W-CL-2F 2 traverses

W-CL-2F
DN 100 to 300 (4" to 12") 2 MHz (or 1 MHz) 2 traverses 2)
W-CL-1F
Prosonic Flow W
W-CL-1F
DN 300 to 600 (12" to 24") 1 MHz (or 2 MHz) 2 traverses 2)
W-CL-2F
W-CL-1F
DN 650 to 2000 (26" to 80") 1 MHz (or 0.5 MHz) 1 traverse 2)
W-CL-05F
1) The installation of clamp-on sensors is principally recommended in the 2 traverse type installation. This type of
installation allows the easiest and most comfortable type of mounting. However, in certain applications a 1 traverse
installation may be preferred:
Certain plastic pipes with wall thickness > 4 mm (0.16 in)

Lined pipes
Applications with fluids with high acoustic damping
2)
0.5 MHz sensors are also recommended for applications with composite material pipes such as GRP and may be
recommended for certain lined pipes, pipes with wall thickness >10 mm (0.4 in), or applications with media with
high acoustic damping. In addition, for these applications we principally recommend mounting the W sensors in
a 1 traverse configuration.
3)
6 MHz sensors are recommended for applications where flow velocity is < 10 m/s (32.8 Hz/s)
Endress+Hauser 5
Input
Measured variable Flow velocity (differential delay proportional to flow velocity)
Measuring range Typically v = 0 to 15 m/s (0 to 50 ft/s) at the specified measuring accuracy
Operable flow range Over 150 : 1
Output
Output signal Current output:
Galvanically isolated
Full scale value adjustable
Temperature coefficient: typ. 2 A/C, resolution: 1.5 A
Active: 4 to 20 mA, RL < 700 (for HART: RL 250 )
Pulse/status output:
Galvanically isolated
Open collector
30 V DC / 250 mA
Passive
Can be configured as:
Pulse output: pulse value and pulse polarity can be selected, max. pulse width adjustable (5 to 2000 ms),
pulse frequency max. 100 Hz
Status output: for example, can be configured for error messages, empty pipe detection, flow recognition,
limit value
Signal on alarm Current output failsafe mode selectable.

Pulse/frequency output failsafe mode selectable
Load See Output signal
Low flow cutoff Switching point for the low flow freely selectable.
Galvanic isolation All circuits for inputs, outputs, and power supply are galvanically isolated from each other.
6 Endress+Hauser
Power supply
Measuring unit electrical
connection
e b
e b e b
f c
a
g d
i
24 25 26 27 1 2
h + + L1 N
(L+) (L-)
a0005838
Connecting the transmitter (Aluminium-Fieldhousing).

cable cross-section: max. 2.5 mm(AWG 13)
a Cover
b Cable for power supply: 85 to 260 V AC, 20 to 55 V AC, 16 to 62 V DC
c Terminal for power supply:
d Terminal for power supply: Nr. 12 (terminal assignment)
e Signal cable
f Ground terminal fr signal cable
g Terminal connector for signal cable: Nr. 2427 (terminal assignment)
h Service connector
i Ground terminal for potential matching
Terminal assignment Prosonic Flow 91W
Order variant Terminal No. (inputs/outputs)
24 (+)/25 () 26 (+)/27 () 1 (L1/L+) /2 (N/L)
Fixed communication boards (fixed assignment)
91***-***********A Pulse output HART current output Power supply
Functional values see "Output signal" see "supply voltage"
Endress+Hauser 7
Connecting the connecting Connection sensor cable in the electronics compartment

cable
a b
A0015907
a, b Sensor connection cable

c Cable gland holder
d Cable gland
Supply voltage Transmitter

85 to 260 V AC, 45 to 65 Hz
20 to 55 V AC, 45 to 65 Hz
16 to 62 V DC
Sensor
Powered by the transmitter
Cable entry Power supply and signal cables (inputs/outputs)

Cable entry M20 1.5 (8 to 12 mm; 0.31 to 0.47 in)
Cable gland for cables, 6 to 12 mm ( 0.24" to 0.47")
Thread for cable entries " NPT, G "
Connection cable (sensor /transmitter)
Cable glands for one multicore connection cable (1 8 mm) per cable entry
Cable gland M20 1.5
Connection cable (sensor /transmitter)
Cable glands for two single core connection cable (2 4 mm) per cable entry
Cable gland M20 1.5
The Prosonic Flow W DN 15 to 65 ( to 2") is grounded via the cable gland.
a0016008
Cable gland for one multicore connection cable (1 8 mm /0.31 in) per cable entry
8 Endress+Hauser
A0008152
Cable gland for two connection cables (2 Q 4 mm/0.16") per cable entry
Cable-specification Only use the connection cable supplied by Endress+Hauser. Different versions of the connecting cables are
available 21.
Prosonic Flow
Cable material:
Prosonic Flow 91W (DN 50 to 4000/ 2" to 160") PVC (standard) or optional PTFE
Prosonic Flow 91W (DN 15 to 65 / " to 2") TPE-V
Cable length:
For use in a non hazardous zone: 5 to 60 m (16.4 to 196.8 ft)
! Note!
To ensure correct measuring results, route the connection cable well clear of electrical machines and switching
elements.
power consumption 85 to 250 V AC: <12 VA (incl. measuring sensor)

20 to 28 V AC: <7 VA (incl. measuring sensor)
11 to 40 V DC: <5 W (incl. measuring sensor)
Power supply failure Lasting min. 1 power cycle

HistoROM/T-DAT save measuring system data if the power supply fails
Potential equalization For potential equalization, no special measures are necessary.
Endress+Hauser 9
Performance characteristics
Reference operating Fluid temperature: +28 C 2 K
conditions Ambient temperature: +22 C 2 K
Warm-up period: 30 minutes
Installation:
Sensor and transmitter grounded.
The measuring sensors are mounted correctly.
Maximum measured error Measured error

The measured error depends on a number of factors. A distinction is made between the measured error of the
device (Prosonic Flow 91 = 0.5 % of the measured value) and an additional installation-specific measured error
(typically 1.5 % of the measured value) that is independent of the device.
The installation-specific measured error depends on the installation conditions on site, such as the nominal
diameter, wall thickness, real pipe geometry, fluid etc. The sum of the two measured errors is the measured
error at the measuring point.
%
3.5
c
2.0
0.5
a
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 m/s
A0011347
Example of the measured error in a pipe with a nominal diameter DN > 200 (8")
a Measured error of the device (0.5 % o.r. 3 mm/s
b Measured error due to installation conditions (typically 1.5 % o.r.)
c Measured error at the measuring point: 0.5 % o.r. 3 mm/s + 1.5 % o.r. = 2 % o.r. 3 mm/s.
Measured error at the measuring point

The measured error at the measuring point is made up of the measured error of the device
(0.5 % o.r.) and the measured error resulting from the installation conditions on site.
Given a flow velocity > 0.3 m/s (1 ft/s) and a Reynolds number > 10000, the following are typical error limits:
Nominal Installation-specific Error limits at the measuring point

Device error limits +
diameter error limits (typical) (typical)
DN 15 (") 0.5 % o.r. 5 mm/s + 2.5 % o.r. 3 % o.r. 5 mm/s
DN 25 to 200 0.5 % o.r. 7.5 mm/s + 1.5 % o.r. 2 % o.r. 7.5 mm/s
> DN 200 0.5 % o.r. 3 mm/s + 1.5 % o.r. 2 % o.r. 3 mm/s
o.r. = of reading
Measurement Report
If required, the device can be supplied with a measurement report. To certify the performance of the device,
a measurement is performed under reference conditions. Here, the sensors are mounted on a pipe with a
nominal diameter of DN 100 (4").
The measurement report guarantees the following error limits of the device
(at a flow velocity > 0.3 m/s (1 ft/s) and a Reynolds number > 10000):
Nominal diameter Guaranteed error limits of the device Guaranted error limits of the device
Prosonic Flow W DN 15 ("), DN 25 (1"), DN 40 (1"), DN 50 (2") 0.5 % o.r. 5 mm/s
Prosonic Flow W DN 100 (4") 0.5 % o.r. 7.5 mm/s
o.r. = of reading
Repeatability Max. 0.3 % for flow velocity > 0.3 m/s (1 ft/s)
10 Endress+Hauser
Operating conditions: installation

Installation instructions Mounting location
Correct flow measurement is possible only if the pipe is full. It is preferable to install the sensors in a riser.
! Note!
Entrained air or gas bubbles in the measuring tube can result in an increase in measuring errors.
For this reason, avoid the following mounting locations:
Highest point of a pipeline. Risk of air accumulating.
Directly upstream of a free pipe outlet in a vertical pipe. Risk of partial pipe filling.
A0001103
Orientation
Vertical
Recommended orientation with upward direction of flow (View A). With this orientation, entrained solids will
sink and gases will rise away from the sensor when the fluid is stagnant. The piping can be completely drained
and protected against solids buildup.
Horizontal
In the recommended installation range in a horizontal installation position (View B), gas and air collections at
the pipe cover and problematic deposits at the bottom of the pipe have a smaller influence on measurement.
A C C
B
a0001105
A Vertical
B Horizontal
C Recommended installation range max. 120
Endress+Hauser 11
Inlet and outlet runs If possible, install the sensor well clear of assemblies such as valves, T-pieces, elbows, etc. If several flow
obstructions are installed, the longest inlet or outlet run must be considered. Compliance with the following
requirements for the inlet and outlet runs is recommended to ensure measuring accuracy.
15 x DN 3 x DN
20 x DN
1
20 x DN
2
3 15 x DN
A0013079
Inlet and outlet runs (top view)

1 Valve (2/3 open)
2 Pump
3 Two pipe bends in different directions
Connection cable Route the cable well clear of electrical machines and switching elements
Cable specification 8
Operating conditions: environment
Ambient temperature range Transmitter

25 to +60 C (13 to +140 F)
At ambient temperatures below 20 C (4 F) the readability of the display may be impaired.
Install the transmitter at a shady location. Avoid direct sunlight, particularly in warm climatic regions.
Sensor Prosonic Flow W

20 to +80 C (4 to +176 F)
Optional: 0 to +130 C (32 to +265 F)
It is permitted to insulate the sensors mounted on the pipe.
Connecting cable (sensor/transmitter)

Standard (TPE-V): 20 to +80 C (4 to 175 F) (multi core, sensor DN 15 to 65 / " to 2")
Standard (PVC): 20 to +70 C (4 to 158 F) (single core, sensor DN 504000 /2" to 160")
Optional (PTFE): 40 to +170 C (40 to 338 F) (single core, sensor DN 504000 /2" to 160")
It is permitted to insulate the sensors mounted on the pipes.
Mount the transmitter in a shady location and avoid direct sunlight, particulary in warm climatic regions.
! Note!

Can be used with the version for 0130 C /-32256 F.
Storage temperature The storage temperature corresponds to the operating temperature range of the measuring transmitter and the
appropriate measuring sensors and the corresponding sensor cable (see above).
12 Endress+Hauser
Degree of protection Transmitter

IP 67 (NEMA 4X)
Sensors
IP 67 (NEMA 4X)
Optional: IP 68 (NEMA 6P)
Shock and vibration resistance according to IEC 68-2-6
Operating conditions: process
Medium temperature range 20 to +80 C (4 to +176 F)

Optional: 0 to +130 C (32 to +265 F)
Medium pressure range Perfect measurement requires that the static fluid pressure is higher than vapor pressure, to avoid outgasing.
(nominal pressure)
Pressure loss There is no pressure loss.
Energy Measurement The Prosonic Flow 91W Ultrasonic is well suited for making or retrofitting energy measurement for hot or
chilled water systems - often used in conjunction with Endress+Hauser Flow and Energy Manager
RMC621/RMS621.
The quantity of heat is calculated from the process variable for flow and the differential from the feed and return
temperature. Energy Manager can also determine the quantity of heat in water flow from process variable flow
and a single temperature measurement.
Installation of delta heat measurement
Temperature measurement takes place via two separate sensors which are directly connected to the
Endress+Hauser Energy Manager. (Temperature sensors and Energy Manager supplied separately).
The Prosonic Flow 91W can be installed on either the hot or cold side of the heat exchanger.
T2
Q
Esc
- + E
T1
A0013111
Layout for delta heat measurement of hot or chilled water system
Endress+Hauser 13
Mechanical construction
Design, dimensions Dimensions field housing
~150 (~5.9) 190 (7.48) 129 (5.1)
113 (4.45) 178 (7.0)
8.6 (M8) (0.34)
50 (1.97) 150 (5.9)
200 (7.87)
Esc
- + E
52 (2.0)
= =
80 (3.15)
100 (3.94)
mm (inch)
A0006063-ae
Dimensions pipe mounting
A B
190 (7.48) &185 (&3.34)
172.5 (6.79)
Esc Esc
- + E - + E
80
(3.15)
mm (inch)
a0005819
14 Endress+Hauser
Prosonic Flow W sensor (DN 15 to 65 / " to 2")
A C
D
E
F
A0011502
Mounting arrangement for measurement via one traverse
Dimensions in SI units
A B C D E F
72 331 39 28 233 450
All dimensions in [mm]
Dimensions in US units
A B C D E F
2.83 13.03 1.54 1.10 .17 17.72
All dimensions in [inch]
Endress+Hauser 15
Prosonic Flow W sensor (DN50 to 2000 / 2" to 80")
G
H
E
C
A
B I D
A0011401
Mounting arrangement for measurement via two traverse
A B C D E F
56 62 145 111 58 Max. 872
G H
Depends on the measuring point conditions (pipe, fluid etc.).
Dimension "H" can be determined:
Pipe outer diameter
by the transmitter prior to the mounting (Quick Setup or FieldCare)
when specifying the flowmeter (online (Applicator)
A B C D E F
2.20 2.44 5.71 4.37 2.28 Max. 34.3
G H
Pipe outer diameter
16 Endress+Hauser
Prosonic Flow W sensor (DN50 to 2000 / 2" to 80")
E
C
A
B H D
A0011155
Mounting arrangement for measurement via one traverse
A B C D E F
56 62 145 111 58 Max. 872
G H
Pipe outer diameter
A B C D E F
2.20 2.44 5.71 4.37 2.28 Max. 34.3
G H
Pipe outer diameter
Endress+Hauser 17
Weight Transmitter housing: 2.4 kg (5.2 lb)

Flowrate measuring sensors W (clamp-on) incl. mounting rail and tensioning bands: 2.8 kg (6.2 lb)
Materials Transmitter
Wall-mounted housing: powder-coated die-cast aluminum
Sensor
Sensor holder: stainless steel 1.4308/CF-8
Sensor housing: stainless steel 1.4301/304
Strapping bands/bracket: stainless steel 1.4301/304
Sensor contact surfaces: chemically stable plastic
Connecting cable (sensor/transmitter)

PVC/TPE-V connecting cable
Cable sheath: PVC/TPE-V
Cable connector: nickeled brass 2.0401/C38500
Human interface
Display elements Liquid crystal display: illuminated, two lines each with 16 characters
Custom configuration for presenting different measured values and status variables
1 totalizer
Operating elements Local operation via three operating keys (S, O, F)
Remote operation Operation via HART protocol and FieldCare
Language group English, German, Spanish, Italian, French
18 Endress+Hauser
Certificates and approvals

CE mark The measuring system is in conformity with the statutory requirements of the EC Directives.
Endress+Hauser confirms successful testing of the device by affixing to it the CE mark.
C-Tick mark The measuring system is in conformity with the EMC requirements of the Australian Communications and
Media Authority (ACMA).
Ex approval Information about currently available Ex versions (FM, CSA) can be supplied by your Endress+Hauser Sales
Center on request. All explosion protection data are given in a separate documentation which is available upon
request.
Other standards and EN 60529

guidelines Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code)
EN 61010-1
Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement, control and laboratory use
IEC/EN 61326
"Emission in accordance with Class A requirements".
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC requirements).
ANSI/ISA-S82.01
Safety Standard for Electrical and Electronic Test, Measuring, Controlling and Related
Equipment - General Requirements. Pollution Degree 2, Installation Category II.
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 1010.1-92
Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for Measurement and Control and Laboratory Use.
Pollution degree 2
NAMUR NE 21
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) of industrial process and laboratory control equipment.
NAMUR NE 43
Standardization of the signal level for the breakdown information of digital transmitters with analog output
signal.
NAMUR NE 53
Software of field devices and signal-processing devices with digital electronics.
Ordering information
The Endress+Hauser service organization can provide detailed ordering information and information on the
order codes on request.
Endress+Hauser 19
Accessories
Various accessories, which can be ordered separately from Endress+Hauser, are available for the transmitter
and the sensor. The Endress+Hauser service organization can provide detailed information on the order codes
on request.
Device-specific accessories Accessory Description Order code
Sensor W DN 15 to 65, 20 to +80 C (" to 2 ", 4 to +176 F), 5.0 MHz

(DN 15 to 65, (" to 2") IP 67 / NEMA 4X DK9WS - 1*
Clamp-on version IP 68 / NEMA 6P DK9WS - 3*
DN 15 to 65, 0 to +130 C (" to 2 ", +32 to +266 F), 5.0 MHz

IP 67 / NEMA 4X DK9WS - 2*
IP 68 / NEMA 6P DK9WS - 4*
Sensor W DN 50 to 300, 20 to +80 C (2" to 12", 4 to +176 F), 2.0 MHz

(DN 50 to 4000, (2" to 157") IP 67 / NEMA 4X DK9WS - B*
Clamp-on version IP 68 / NEMA 6P DK9WS - N*
DN 100 to 4000, 20 to +80 C (4" to 160", 4 to +176 F), 1.0 MHz

IP 67 / NEMA 4X DK9WS - A*
IP 68 / NEMA 6P DK9WS - M*
DN 100 to 4000, 0 to +130 C (4" to 160", +32 to +266 F), 1.0 MHz
IP 67 / NEMA 4X DK9WS - P*
DN 50 to 300, 0 to +130 C (2" to 12", +32 to +266 F), 2.0 MHz

IP 67 / NEMA 4X DK9WS - S*
DN 100 to 4000, 20 to +80 C (4" to 160", 4 to +176 F), 0.5 MHz
IP 67 / NEMA 4X DK9WS - R*
IP 68 / NEMA 6P DK9WS - T*
Device-specific accessories Accessory Description Order code
Mounting kit for Mounting kit for wall-mount housing. DK9WM - C

aluminum field housing
Sensor holder set Prosonic Flow W (DN 15 to 65, " to 2")
DK9SH - 1
Sensor holder, clamp-on version
Prosonic Flow W (DN 50 to 4000, 2" to 160")
Sensor holder, fixed retaining nut, clamp-on version DK9SH - A
Sensor holder, detachable retaining nut, clamp on version DK9SH - B
Clamp-on installation set Sensor fastening for Prosonic Flow W
(DN 15 to 65, " to 2 ")

U-Bolt DN15-32 ( to 1 ") DK9IC - 11*
Strapping bands DN 40 to 65 (1 to 2 ") DK9IC - 21*
(DN 50 to 4000, 2" to 160")

Without sensor fastening DK9IC - A*
Strapping bands DN 50 to 200 (2" to 8") DK9IC - B*
Strapping bands DN 200 to 600 (8" to 24") DK9IC - C*
Strapping bands DN 600 to 2000 (24" to 80") DK9IC - D*
Strapping bands DN 2000 to 4000 (80" to 160") DK9IC - E*
Without mounting tools DK9IC - *1

Spacing ruler DN 50 to 200 (2" to 8") DK9IC - *2
Spacing ruler DN 200 to 600 (8" to 24") DK9IC - *3
Fastener, 1 Traverse DN 50 to 4000 (2" to 160") DK9IC - *6
20 Endress+Hauser
Accessory Description Order code
Conduit adapter for Prosonic Flow W (DN 15 to 65, " to 2 ")

connecting cable Conduit adapter incl. cable entry M20 1,5 DK9CB - AA1
Conduit adapter incl. cable entry " NPT DK9CB - AA2
Conduit adapter incl. cable entry G " DK9CB - AA3
Prosonic Flow W (DN 50 to 4000, 2" to 160")
DK9CB - AB1
Conduit adapter incl. cable entry M20 1,5
DK9CB - AB2
Conduit adapter incl. cable entry " NPT
Conduit adapter incl. cable entry G " DK9CB - AB3
Connecting cable For sensor DN 15 to 65, " to 2 "

5 m (16 ft) sensor cable, TPE-V, 20 to +70 C (4 to 158 F) DK9SS - AAA
10 m (33 ft) sensor cable, TPE-V, 20 to +70 C (4 to 158 F) DK9SS - AAB
15 m (49 ft) sensor cable, TPE-V, 20 to +70 C (4 to 158 F) DK9SS - AAC
30 m (98 ft) sensor cable, TPE-V, 20 to +70 C (4 to 158 F) DK9SS - AAD
For sensor DN 50 to 4000, 2" to 160"

5 m (16 ft) sensor cable, PVC, 20 to +70 C (4 to 158 F) DK9SS - ABA
10 m (33 ft) sensor cable, PVC, 20 to +70 C (4 to 158 F) DK9SS - ABB
15 m (49 ft) sensor cable, PVC, 20 to +70 C (4 to 158 F) DK9SS - ABC
30 m (98 ft) sensor cable, PVC, 20 to +70 C (4 to 158 F) DK9SS - ABD
60 m (197 ft) sensor cable, PVC, 20 to +70 C (4 to 158 F) DK9SS - ABJ
Acoustic coupling fluid Coupling fluid 0 to 170 C (+32 to 338 F), Standard DK9CM - 2
Adhesive coupling fluid 40 to +80 C (40 to 176 F) DK9CM - 3
Water-soluble coupling fluid 20 to +80 C (4 to 176 F) DK9CM - 4
Coupling fluid DDU 19, 20 to +60 C (4 to 140 F) DK9CM - 6
Coupling fluid 40 to +100 C (40 to 212 F), Standard, DK9CM - 7
type MBG2000
Communication-specific Accessory Description Order code

accessories
HART Communicator Handheld terminal for remote configuration and for obtaining SFX100 *******
Field Xpert SFX 100 measured values via the HART current output (4 to 20 mA).
Contact your Endress+Hauser representative for more
information.
Fieldgate FXA320 Gateway for remote interrogation of HART sensors and actuators FXA320 - *****
via Web browser:
2-channel analog input (4 to 20 mA)
4 binary inputs with event counter function and frequency
measurement
Communication via modem, Ethernet or GSM
Visualization via Internet/Intranet in the Web browser and/or
WAP cellular phone
Limit value monitoring with alarm signaling via e-mail or SMS
Synchronized time stamping of all measured values.
Fieldgate FXA520 Gateway for remote interrogation of HART sensors and actuators FXA520 - ****
via Web browser:
Web server for remote monitoring of up to 30 measuring points
Intrinsically safe version [EEx ia]IIC for applications in
hazardous areas
Communication via modem, Ethernet or GSM
Visualization via Internet/Intranet in the Web browser and/or
WAP cellular phone
Limit value monitoring with alarm signaling via e-mail or SMS
Synchronized time stamping of all measured values
Remote diagnosis and remote configuration of
connected HART devices
FXA195 The Commubox FXA195 connects intrinsically safe Smart FXA195 *

transmitters with HART protocol to the USB port of a personal
computer. This makes the remote operation of the transmitters
possible with the aid of configuration programs (e.g. FieldCare).
Power is supplied to the Commubox by means of the USB port
Endress+Hauser 21
Service-specific accessories Accessory Description Order code
Applicator Software for selecting and planning flowmeters. DXA80 - *

The Applicator can be downloaded from the Internet or
ordered on CD-ROM for installation on a local PC.
information.
Fieldcheck Tester/simulator for testing flowmeters in the field. 50098801

When used in conjunction with the "FieldCare" software
package, test results can be imported into a database, printed
out and used for official certification.
information.
FieldCare FieldCare is Endress+Hauser's FDT-based plant asset See the product page on the
management tool. It can configure all intelligent field units Endress+Hauser Web site:
in your system and helps you manage them. www.endress.com
By using the status information, it is also a simple but
effective way of checking their status and condition.
FXA291 Service interface from the measuring device to the PC for FXA291 *
operation via FieldCare.
Memograph M graphic The Memograph M graphic display recorder provides RSG40-************

display recorder information on all the relevant process variables. Measured
values are recorded correctly, limit values are monitored and
measuring points analyzed. The data are stored in the 256
MB internal memory and also on a DSD card or USB stick.
Memograph M boasts a modular design, intuitive operation
and a comprehensive security concept. The ReadWin 2000
PC software is part of the standard package and is used for
configuring, visualizing and archiving the data captured.
The mathematics channels which are optionally available
enable continuous monitoring of specific power
consumption, boiler efficiency and other parameters which
are important for efficient energy management.
22 Endress+Hauser
Documentation
Flow measurement (FA005D/06)
Operating Instructions for Prosonic Flow 91 (BA100D/06)
Supplementary documentation on Ex-ratings: FM, CSA
Registered trademarks
HART
Registered trademark of HART Communication Foundation, Austin, USA
HistoROM, T-DAT, FieldCare, Field Xpert, Fieldcheck
Registered or registration-pending trademarks of Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG, Reinach, CH
Endress+Hauser 23
Instruments International
Endress+Hauser
Instruments International AG
Kaegenstrasse 2
4153 Reinach
Switzerland
Tel.+41 61 715 81 00
Fax+41 61 715 25 00
www.endress.com
info@ii.endress.com
TI00105D/06/EN/13.11
71136725
FM+SGML6.0 ProMoDo
Description of Instrument Functions
Prosonic S FMU90
Ultrasonic Transmitter
6
8
BA290F/00/EN/07.09
71098302
Valid as of software version
V02.01.00
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
1 Notes on use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 8.3 The "language" submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
8.4 The "password/reset" submenu" . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
1.1 Theory of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.2 First setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
9 The "system information" menu . . . . 140
2 The "level" menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 9.1 The "device information" submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
9.2 The "in/output info" submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
2.1 The "basic setup" submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
9.3 The "trend display" submenu (for HART instruments
2.2 The "extended calibration" submenu . . . . . . . . . . . 33
only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
2.3 The "simulation" submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
9.4 The "min/max values" submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
9.5 The "envelope curve" submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
3 The "flow" menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 9.6 The "error list" submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
3.1 The "flow N" submenu (N = 1 or 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 9.7 The "diagnsotics" submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
3.2 The "backwater" submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
3.3 The "flow counter" submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 10 The "display" menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
10.1 "display" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
4 The "safety settings" menu . . . . . . . . 65 10.2 "display format" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
4.1 "output on alarm" (only for HART instruments) . . . 65 10.3 "back to home" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
4.2 "output echo loss" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
4.3 "delay echo loss" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 11 The "sensor management" menu . . . 154
4.4 "safety distance" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 11.1 The "sensor management" submenu . . . . . . . . . . . 154
4.5 "in safety distance" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 11.2 The "external temperature sensor" submenu . . . . . 159
4.6 "reaction high temperature" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 11.3 The "external digin" submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
4.7 "defective temperature sensor" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
4.8 "relay delay" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
12 Operating menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
5 The "relays/controls" menu . . . . . . . 71 12.1 "Level" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
12.2 "Flow" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
5.1 The "relay configuration" submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
12.3 "Safety settings" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
5.2 The "pump control N" submenu - standard
12.4 "Relay/Controls" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
(N = 1 or 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
12.5 "Output/calculations" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (HART) 176
5.3 The "pump control N" submenu - enhanced
12.6 "Output/calculations" (Profibus DP) . . . . . . . . . . . 177
(N = 1 or 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
12.7 "Device properties" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
5.4 The "rake control" submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
12.8 "System information" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
5.5 The "relay simulation" submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
12.9 "Display" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
12.10 "Sensor management" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
6 The "output/calculations" menu (for
HART instruments) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 13 Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
6.1 The "allocation/calculations" submenu . . . . . . . . 126 13.1 Pre-programmed flow curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
6.2 The "extended calibration" submenu . . . . . . . . . . 127 13.2 The formula for flow calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
6.3 "HART settings" submenu 13.3 System error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
(only for current output 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 13.4 Default block configuration (HART) . . . . . . . . . . . 205
6.4 "Simulation" submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 13.5 Default block configuration (Profibus DP) . . . . . . . 209

Profibus DP instruments) . . . . . . . . . 133
7.1 "analog input" (AI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
7.2 "digital input" (DI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
7.3 "Profibus DP" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
8 The "device properties" menu. . . . . 136

8.1 The "operating parameters" submenu . . . . . . . . . . 136
8.2 The "tag marking" submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
3
Notes on use
1 Notes on use
1.1 Theory of operation
1.1.1 Display and operating elements
FMU90
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
1
2 (g)
3
(f)
4
L00-FMU90xxx-07-00-00-xx-002
(a): name of the parameter; (b): value of the parameter, including unit; (c): display symbols; (d): softkey symbol; (e): LED
indicating the operating state; (f): LEDs indicating the switching states of the relays; (g): keys
4
Notes on use
Display symbols
Symbol Meaning
Operating mode of the instrument
User
User parameters can be edited. Service parameters are locked.
Diagnosis
The service interface is connected.
Service
User and service parameters can be edited.
Locked
All parameters are locked.
Locking state of the currently displayed parameter
Display parameter
The parameter can not be edited in the current operating mode of the instrument.
Editable parameter
The parameter can be edited.
Scroll symbols
Scroll list available

Indicates that the list contains more parameters than can be represented on the display. By pressing
V or W repeatedly, all parameters of the list can be accessed.
Navigation in the envelope curve display
Move left
Move right
Zoom in
Zoom out
LEDs
LED indicating the operating state (pos. (e) in the figure)

green normal measuring mode; no error detected
Warning:
red (flashing) An error is detected but the measurement continues. Reliability of the measured value is no longer
ensured.
Alarm:
red An error is detected. The measurement is interrupted. The measured value assumes the value
specified by the user (parameter "output on alarm").
off supply voltage missing
LEDs for the relays (pos. (f) in the figure)
yellow The relay is activated.
off The relay is de-activated (idle state).
5
Notes on use
Keys (softkey operation)

The function of the keys depends on the current position within the operating menu (softkey func-
tionality). The key functions are indicated by softkey symbols in the bottom line of the display.
Symbol Meaning
Move downwards
Moves the marking bar downwards within a selection list.
Move upwards
Moves the marking bar upwards within a selection list.
Enter
Opens the marked submenu, the marked parameter set or the marked parameter
Confirms the edited parameter value
Previous parameter set

Reopens the previous parameter set within the submenu.
Next parameter set

Opens the next parameter set within the submenu.
Confirm selection
Selects the option of a selection list which is currently marked by the bar.
Increase value
Increases the active digit of an alphanumeric parameter.
Decrease value
Decreases the active digit of an alphanumeric parameter
Error list
Opens the list of all errors which are currently detected.
If a warning is present, this symbol flashes.
If an alarm is present, the symbol is displayed continuously.
Change Display
Change to the next page of measured values (only available if more than one pages of measured
values have been defined; see "display" menu)
Info
Opens the Shortcut Menu, which contains the most important information about the current state
of the instrument
Menu
Opens the Main Menu, which contains all parameters of the Prosonic S
General key combinations

The following key combinations do not depend on the menu position:
Key combination Meaning
Escape
While editing a parameter: Exit the editing mode without accepting the changes.
Within the navigation: Move upwards to the previous layer of the menu.
Increase contrast
Increases the contrast of the display module.
Decrease contrast
Decreases the contrast of the display module.
6
Notes on use
Key combination Meaning
Locking
Locks the instrument against parameter changes.
The instrument can only be unlocked again by the keys.
1.1.2 The operating menu
Structure of the menu

The parameters of the Prosonic S are organized in an operating menu (consisting of a main menu
and several submenus). Parameters which are related to each other are comprised in a common
parameter set. To simplify the navigation within the menu, a five-digit position code is displayed
with each parameter set.
A B C
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-en-037
Identification of the parameter sets; A: submenu; B: number of the associated input or output; C: number of the parameter
set within the submenu
The first digit (A) specifies the submenu1):

L: "level"
F: "flow"
A: "safety settings"
R: "relay/controls"
O: "output/calculations"
D: "device properties", "calibr. display" and "sensor management"
I: "system information"
S: "service" (only available if the service password has been entered)
Diagrams of the submenus can be found in the chapter "Operating menu".
The second digit (B) is used if the parameter set occurs several times within the Prosonic S (e.g.
for different inputs or outputs).
Example:
O1201: "allocation current" for output 1
O2201: "allocation current" for output 2
If the parameter set occurs only once wihtin the Prosonic S, "X" is indicated at this position.
The last three digits (C) specify the individual parameter sets within the submenu.
1) Depending on the instrument version, the installation environment and the selected operating mode, some of the submenus may not be present.
7
Notes on use
Parameter types
Display parameters
Parameters for which the symbol is dis-
played in the left bottom corner of the display
module, are either locked or display-only para-
meters.
L00-FMU90xxx-07-00-00-en-041
Editable parameters
Parameters, for which the symbol is dis-
played in the left bottom corner of the display
module, can be entered for editing by pressing
.
The editing procedure depends on the type of
parameter:
when entering a selection parameter, the
associated selection list appears (see below:
L00-FMU90xxx-07-00-00-en-044
"Editing a parameter with selection list").
when entering a numerical or alphanume-
rical parameter, the text and number editor
appears (see below: "Entering numbers and
characters").
8
level 1
67.60 %
Menu
CX001
main menu
level LX001
flow level
safety settings L1002
level (LVL) 1
ralay/controls level 1
... L1003 L1004 L1004 L1005
... basic setup Return
LVL1 sensor sel. LVL1 appl. para LVL1 appl. para LVL1 empty cal.
extended calibr.
simulation input: sensor 1 tank shape: dome tank shape: bypass 5.00 m
Main Menu sensor sel.: autom. medium proper: liq. medium proper: liq.
Navigation within the menu (Example)
detected: FDU91 proc. cond.: stand. proc. cond.:stand.
Parameter Set
Submenus (here: with 3 parameters) L1004 L1004
LVL1 appl. para LVL1 appl. para
tank shape: dome tank shape: bypass
medium proper: liq. medium proper: liq.
proc. cond.: stand. proc. cond.: stand.
=
L100A L100A
tank shape tank shape
dome ceiling dome ceiling
horizontal cyl. horizontal cyl.
bypass bypass
stilling well stilling well
Editing a
parameter with
selection list
Notes on use
9
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-en-050
Notes on use
Entering the menu

The navigation always starts from the main screen (measured value display2)). From there, the fol-
lowing menus can be opened by the keys:
FMU90
shortcut menu main menu

daily counter* level
tag marking flow
1
envelope curve 2 ...
3
language 4
...
device information 5
password/reset
* for flow measurements only
actual error
Warning 01802
Alarm 01502
...
...
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-yy-038
shortcut menu
The shortcut menu is accessed via the "Info" key. It allows quick access to device information:
daily counter (for flow measurements)
tag marking
envelope curve: used to check the signal quality
language: sets the display language
device information: serial number, versions of software and hardware
password/reset: used to enter the password or reset code
All parameters of the shortcut menu are contained in the main menu as well.
main menu
The main menu is accessed via the "Menu" key. It contains all parameters of the Prosonic S. It
is divided into submenus. Some of the submenus consist of further submenus. Which submenus
are actually present, depends on the instrument version and the installation environment.
An overview of all submenus and parameters is given in the chapter "Operating menu".
actual error
If the self-monitoring of the Prosonic S detects an error, the softkey symbol appears
above the middle key.
If the softkey symbol flashes, only "warnings" are present.
If the softkey symbol is displayed permanently, at least one "alarm" is present.
After pressing the key, a list of all currently present errors appears.
2) Note: Depending on the configuration, the appearance of the measured value display may be differemt from the example in the figure.
10
Notes on use
Selecting a submenu
main menu 1. In the main menu, press W or V until the

required submenu is marked by the bar.
! Note!
The symbols indicate that the
selection list contains more items than can be
1. displayed on the module. Press W or V several
times, to mark one of the hidden items.
2. Press , in order to enter the marked

submenu.
2.
device properties
submenu
3. If the submenu contains further submenus,

continue until you reach the level of the
parameter sets. This level is reached if the
softkey symbols U and T appear.
3.
distance unit
parameter set
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-yy-039
! Note!
If necessary, you can return to the previous level of the menu by pressing .
11
Notes on use
Selecting a parameter
By pressing U or T you can switch between the parameter sets of the current submenu. For each
parameter set the values of all its parameters are displayed. In order to change one of the values,
proceed as follows:
1. Press U or T, until you have reached the

required parameter set.
1. 1.
2. Press , in order to enter the parameter set.
2.
3. Select the required parameter by pressing

W or V.
(This step is not required if the set contains
3.
only one parameter.)
4. Press , in order to enter the editing mode

of the parameter.
The editing method depends on the type of
4.
parameter (selection list, numeric or
alphanumeric parameter). For details refer
to the following sections.
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-en-040
! Note!
If necessary, you can exit the parameter and parameter set by pressing .
12
Notes on use
Editing a parameter with selection list
1. Press W or V, until the required option is

marked by the bar (in the example: "turb.
surface").
1.
! Note!
The symbols indicate that the
selection list contains more items than can
be displayed on the module. Press W or V
several times, to mark one of the hidden
items.
2. Press , in order to select the marked

option. It is then stored in the instrument.
2.
3. Press the left and middle keys

simultaneously in order to quit the
parameter.
The software key symbols U and T
3.
reappear and you can switch to the next
parameter set.
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-en-041
! Note!
By pressing before you can quit the parameter without accepting your changes.
13
Notes on use
Entering numbers and characters

When you select a numeric parameter ("empty
calibration", "full calibration" etc.) or an alpha-
numeric parameter ("device marking" etc.), the
editor for numbers and text strings appears.
Enter the desired value in the following way:
1. The cursor is at the first digit. Press S or O

1. until this digit has the required value.
2. Press in order to confirm the value and to

jump to the next digit.
2.
3. Repeat the procedure for all relevant digits.

3.
4. If all relevant digits have been entered:

Press S or O, until appears at the cursor.
4.
5. Press to store the complete value in the

device.
5.
6. Press the left and middle keys simultane-

ously in order to quit the parameter.
6.
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-yy-042
14
Notes on use
Special editing functions

Within the editor for alphanumeric characters, pressing S or O does not only lead to numbers and
characters but also to the following symbols for special editing functions. They simplify the editing
procedure.
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-yy-043
Enter: The number left of the cursor is transferred to the instrument.
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-yy-044
Escape: The editor is closed. The parameter maintains its former value. The same behavior can be achieved by pressing
the left and the middle key simultaneously ( ).
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-yy-045
Next digit: The cursor moves on to the next digit.
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-yy-046
Previous digit: The cursor moves back to the previous digit.
15
Notes on use
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-yy-047
Delete: The current digit and all digits to its right are deleted.
Return to the measured value display

By pressing the left and middle keys
FMU90
simultaneously you can return
from a parameter to the parameter set
from the parameter set to the submenu
from the submenu to the main menu
1
2
from the main menu to the measured value
3
4
display
5
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-en-048
16
Notes on use
1.2 First setup

! Note!
This chapter describes the commissioning of the Prosonic S via the display and operating module.
Commissioning via ToF Tool, FieldCare or the HART handheld terminal DXR375 is similar. For
further instructions refer to the ToF Tool Operating Instructions, the FieldCare Online Help or the
Operating Instructions supplied with the DXR375.
After switching on the power supply for the first time, the instrument asks for a number of operating
parameters:
1. Select the display language.
a. Press or to move the marking bar to the

desired language.
b. Press to confirm your selection.
L00-FMU90xxx-07-00-00-yy-027
2. Select the unit for distance measurements.
L00-FMU90xxx-07-00-00-en-028
3. Select the temperature unit.
L00-FMU90xxx-07-00-00-en-029
4. Select the operating mode.

! Note!
The available options depend on the instrument
version and the installation environment.
L00-FMU90xxx-07-00-00-en-030
5. For level measurements:

Select the control functions, which you are going
to use.
L00-FMU90xxx-07-00-00-en-031
! Note!
By pressing you can return to the previous parameter (e.g. in order to correct the value).
All these parameters can also be changed at a later point of time in the "device properties/operating
parameters" and "device properties/language" parameter sets.
17
The "level" menu
2 The "level" menu
level LX001 "level" selection list

level (LVL) 1 Use this list to select the level channel you are going to configure.
level (LVL) 2
2.1 The "basic setup" submenu
2.1.1 "LVL N sensor selection" (N = 1 or 2)
LVL1 sensor sel. L1003

input:
sensor selection:
detected:
"input"
Use this parameter to assign a sensor to the channel.
Selection:
no sensor
sensor 1
sensor 2 (only for 2-channel instruments)
"sensor selection"
Use this parameter to specify the type of the connected ultrasonic sensor.
! Note!
For the sensors FDU9x the option "automatic" is recommended (default setting). With this setting
the Prosonic S recognizes the type of sensor automatically.
For the sensors FDU8x the type has to be assigned explicitly. The automatic sensor recognition
does not work for these sensors.
" Caution!
After exchanging a sensor, observe the following:
The automatic sensor recognition is also active after a sensor has been exchanged3). The Prosonic S
recognizes the type of the new sensor automatically and changes the "detected" parameter if
required. The measurement continues without a break.
Nevertheless, in order to ensure perfect measurement, the following checks are required:
Check the "empty calibration" and "full calibration" parameters. Adjust these values if
required. Take into account the blocking distance of the new sensor.
Go to the "distance correction" parameter set and check the displayed distance. If required,
perform a new interference echo suppression.
"detected" (only available for "sensor selection" = "automatic")

Indicates the type of the automatically detected sensor.
3) if the new sensor is of the type FDU9x
18
The "level" menu
2.1.2 "LVL N application parameters" (N = 1 or 2)
LVL1 appl. para. L1004
tank shape:
medium property:
process cond.:
"tank shape"
Use this parameter to specify the tank shape of your application.
Selection:
dome ceiling horizontal cyl
bypass stilling well

(ultrasonic guide pipe)
no ceiling sphere flat ceiling

e.g. dumps, open levels
chanels, weirs
L00-FMU90xxx-14-00-00-de-001
"medium property"
Use this parameter to specify the type of medium.
Selection:
liquid
paste like
solid < 4 mm
solid > 4 mm
unknown
! Note!
If the medium does not fit into one of the groups, select "unknown".
19
The "level" menu
"process conditions"
Use this parameter to specify the process conditions of your application. The filters of the signal
evaluation are automatically adjusted to the selected conditions.
"process conditions" for the following situations Example filter settings
standard liquid for all fluid applications which do The filters and output damping are set
not fit in any of the following to average values.
groups
calm surface Storage tanks with immersion The averaging filters and output
tube or bottom filling damping are set to large values.
-> stable measured value
-> accurate measurement
-> slow reaction time
turbulent surface Storage/accumulation tanks with Special filters for stabilizing the input
uneven surface due to free filling, signal are activated.
mixing nozzles or small bottom -> stable measured value
stirrers -> medium reaction time
additional agitator Moving surfaces (possibly with Special filters for stabilizing the input
vortex formation) due to agitators signal are set to large values.
-> stable measured value
-> medium reaction time
fast change Rapid level change, particularly in The averaging filters are set to small
small tanks values.
-> rapid reaction time
-> possibly unstable measured value
standard solid For all bulk solid applications The filter and output damping are set
which do not fit in any of the to average values.
following groups.
solid dusty Dusty bulk solids The averaging filters are set to detect
even relatively weak signals.
conveyor belt Bulk solids with rapid level change The averaging filters are set to small
values.
-> rapid reaction time
-> possibly unstable measured value
test: no filter For service and diagnosis only All filters are switched off.
20
The "level" menu
2.1.3 "LVL N empty calibration" (N = 1 or 2)
LVL1 empty cal. L1005

empty E: 0,00 m
"empty E"
Use this parameter to specify the empty distance E, i.e. the
distance between the sensor membrane and the minimum level
(zero point).
Default: max. measuring range of the respective sensor
E
Range of values: depending on sensor type
0/4 mA
" Caution!
0% The zero point should not be deeper than the point at which the
ultrasonic wave impinges on the tank bottom
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-yy-007
21
The "level" menu
2.1.4 "LVL N full calibration" (N = 1 or 2)
LVL1 full calib. L1006

full F: 0,00 m
block.dist. BD:
"full F"
Use this parameter to specify the span F, i.e. the distance from the
minimum level to the maximum level.
BD 20 mA
100% Default setting: depending on sensor type
Range of values: depending on sensor type
E F blocking distance BD: depending on sensor type (see table)
" Caution!
0/4 mA The maximum level may not project into the blocking distance:
0%
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-yy-008
Fmax = E - BD
"blocking distance"
Indicates the blocking distance of the respective sensor. The blocking distance is measured from the
sensor membrane.
Type of sensor blocking distance (BD) maximum measuring

distance1)
FDU90 0.07 m 3 m (for liquids)
FDU91/FDU91F 0.3 m 10 m (for liquids)

FDU95 - *1*** (low temperature version) 0.7 m 45 m (for solids)
FDU95 - *2*** (high temperature version) 0.9 m 45 m (for solids)
FDU96 1.6 m 70 m (for solids)
FDU81/81F 0.5 m 10 m (for liquids)
FDU83 1m 25 m (for liquids)
1) valid for optimum process conditions
22
The "level" menu
2.1.5 "LVL N unit" (N = 1 or 2)
LVL 1 unit L1007
unit level:
level 1:
distance:
"unit level"
Use this parameter to select the level unit.
If no linearization is performed, the level is displayed in this unit.
Selection:
m
ft
inch
mm
% (Default)
" Caution!
After a change of the level unit, the switching points of the limit and pump control relays have to
be checked and to be adjusted if required.
"level N" (N = 1 or 2)
Displays the currently measured level F (from the zero point to the product surface) in the selected
unit.
F
0/4 mA
0%
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-yy-021
"distance"
Displays the currently measured distance D (from the sensor membrane to the product surface) in
the distance unit. If the display value does not match the real distance, an interference echo
suppression must be performed prior to linearization.
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-yy-022
23
The "level" menu
! Note!
The distance unit is defined during the first setup of the instrument. If required, it can be changed
in the "device properties/operating params" menu.
2.1.6 "LVL N linearisation" (N = 1 or 2)
LVL 1 linearisat. L1008 ! Note!

type: Number and type of the parameters in this set depend on the
mode: selected linearization type.
Only the parameters "type" and "mode" are always present.
The "linearization" is used to convert the level into other quantities. Especially, it can calculate the
volume or mass within a vessel of arbitrary shape. The Prosonic S provides different linearization
modes for the most common types of vessels. Additionally, a linearization table for arbitrarily shaped
vessels can be entered.
"type"
Use this parameter to select the type of linearisation.
Selection:
none
In this linearization type the measured level is not converted but displayed in the selected level
unit (see above, "unit level").
linear
In this linearization type the displayed value is proportional to the measured level.
20 100%
mA
0/4 0% kg, m3, ft3,

mA (a)
The following additional parameter have to be specified:

the unit for the linearized value, e.g. kg, m3, ft3, ... ("customer unit")
the maximum capacity (a) of the vessel, measured in the customer unit ("maximum scale").
24
The "level" menu
horizontal cylinder4)
sphere
In these linearization types the measured level is convertet to the volume in a horizontal cylinder
or a spherical tank.
20 100%
mA

(D)
0/4 kg, m3, ft3,

mA 0% (a)
The following additional parameters have to be specified:
the unit of the linearized value, e.g. kg, m3, ft3, ... ("customer unit")
the diameter (D) of the tank ("diameter")
the maximum capacity (a) of the tank, measured in the customer unit ("maximum scale").
angled bottom (A)

pyramid bottom (B)
conical bottom (B)
In these linearisation modes the measured level is converted to the volume in the respective type
of vessel.
A B
20 100%
mA
H
0/4 0% = kg,m3, ft3, ...
mA (a)

the unit for the linearized value, e.g. kg, m3, ft3, ... ("customer unit")
the intermediate height H according to the diagram ("intermediate height")
the maximum capacity (a) of the tank, measured in the customer unit ("maximum scale").
4) This option is only valid for horizontal cylinders without dome ceiling. For tanks with dome ceiling ToF Tool or FieldCare can be used to calculate a linearisation
table and to upload it into the instrument.
25
The "level" menu
table
In this linearization mode the measured value is calculated from a linearization table. The table
may consist of up to 32 pairs of values (level - volume). The table must be monotonically
increasing or decreasing.
20 100%
mA
0/4 0% = kg,m3,
mA ft3, ...

the unit of the linearized value, e.g. kg, m3, ft3, ... ("customer unit")
the linearization table ("edit")
26
The "level" menu
"customer unit"
Use this parameter to select the desired unit for the linearized values (e.g. kg, m3, ft3, ...). This unit
is only indicated on the display. It does not cause a conversion of the measured value.
! Note!
After selecting the option "customer specific", the parameter "customized text" appears. An arbitrary
string (consisting of up to 5 alphanumeric characters) can be entered into this parameter.
"maximum scale"
Use this parameter to specify the maximum content of the vessel in the customer unit.
"diameter"
Use this parameter to specify the diamter of the horizontal cylinder or the spherical tank
respectively.
"intermediate height"
Use this parameter to specify the intermediate height of the vessel.
"mode"
Use this parameter to specify if the measurement
refers to the "level" (A) or to the "ullage" (B).
20 100%
mA
0/4
mA 0%
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-yy-015
27
The "level" menu
"edit"
Use this parameter to enter, change or read a linearization table. There are the following options:
read:
The table editor is opened. The existing table can be read but not changed.
manual:
The table editor is opened. Table values can be entered and changed.
semi-automatic:
The table editor is opened. The level is automatically read by the Prosonic S. The measured value
(volume, weight or flow) must be entered by the user.
delete:
The linearization table is deleted.
The table editor
No. Level Value No. Level Value
1 0,0000 0,0000 1 0,0000 0,0000

2 0,0000 0,0000 2 0,0000 0,0000
3 0,0000 0,0000 3 0,0000 0,0000
0,0000 0,0000 0,0000 0,0000
: go to next row : navigate within the table

: go to previous row : (for "Level" und "Value)
: open marked row open marked number
for editing for editing
: (for "No.")
open row editor
Return to the previous Row function

step by this
key combination. - Delete row
- Insert row (before current row)
- Move row Query: new position
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-de-006
"status table"
Use this parameter to enable or disable the linearization table.
Selection:
enabled
The table is used.
disabled
The table is not used. The measured value is transferred to the output without linearization.
28
The "level" menu
2.1.7 Interference echo suppression: Basic principles

The "check value" and "distance mapping" parameters are used to configure the interference
echo suppression of the Prosonic S.
The following picture shows the operating principle of the interference echo suppression:
1 2 3
(a) (a) (b) (a) (b)
(c)
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-yy-017
1: The envelope curve (a) contains the level echo and an interference echo. Without interference echo suppression, the
interference echo is evaluated.
2: The interference echo suppression generates the mapping curve (b). This curve suppresses all echos within the range
of mapping (c).
3: From now on, only those echos are evaluated, which are higher than the mapping curve. The interference echo is below
the mapping curve and is therefore ignored.
! Note!
In order to include all interference echos, the interference echo suppression should be performed
with the level as low as possible. If during commissioning the vessel can not be sufficiently emptied,
it is advisable to repeat the interference echo suppression at a later point of time (as soon as the level
reaches nearly 0%).
29
The "level" menu
2.1.8 "LVL N check value" (N = 1 or 2)
LVL1 check value L100B

act. distance 1:
check distance:
L100B
LVL1 dist. corr.
act. distance: D
display
?
Ddisplay = D
D
check distance: Ddisplay > D

Ddisplay < D
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-de-016
"actual distance N" (N = 1 or 2)

Displays the currently measured distance Ddisplay.
"check distance"
Use this parameter to state if the displayed distance Ddisplay matches the real distance D (measured
by a rule for example). Based on your selection, the Prosonic S automatically proposes a suitable
range of mapping.
You have got the following options:
distance = ok
Choose this option if the displayed value Ddisplay matches the real distance D.
After selecting this option, the Prosonic S changes to the "LVL N distance mapping" parameter
set. The preset range of mapping is identical to D. That means: all interference echos above the
current product surface will be suppressed by the mapping curve.
distance too small
Choose this option if the displayed value Ddisplay is smaller than the real distance D.
In this case the currently evaluated echo is an interference echo.
After selecting this option, the Prosonic S changes to the "LVL N distance mapping" parameter
set. The preset range of mapping is slightly larger than Ddisplay. Therefore, the currently evaluated
interference echo is suppressed by the mapping curve.
If after the mapping Ddisplay is still too small, repeat the mapping until Ddisplay matches the real
distance D.
distance too big
Choose this option if the displayed value Ddisplay exceeds the real distance D.
This error is not caused by interference echos. Therefore, no interference echo suppression is
performed and the Prosonic S returns to the "level 1(2)" submenu. Check the calibration
parameters, especially the "empty calibration" and the "application parameters".
distance unknown
Choose this option if you do not know the real distance D.
In this case, an interference echo suppression can not be performed and the Prosonic S returns to
the "level 1(2)" submenu.
manual
Choose this option if you want to define the range of mapping manually.
30
The "level" menu
The Prosonic S changes to the "LVL N distance mapping" function, where you can define the
required range of mapping.
2.1.9 "LVL N distance mapping" (N = 1 or 2)
LVL1 dist.map. L100B
act. distance 1:
range of mapping:
start mapping:
status:
"actual distance N" (N = 1 or 2)

Displays the currently measured distance between the sensor membrane and the product surface.
Compare this value to the real distance in order to find out if currently an interference echo is
evaluated.
"range of mapping"
Use this parameter to specify the range of the mapping curve. Normally, a suitable value has already
been entered automatically. Nevertheless, you can change this value if required.
"start mapping"
Select "yes" in this parameter in order to start the mapping. When the mapping is finished, the state
is automatically changed to "enable map".
The "LVL N state" parameter set appears, in which the currently mesaured level and distance are
displayed. Compare the displayed distance to the real distance in order to decide if a further mapping
is necessary.
If yes: Press the left-arrow key () in order to return to the "LVL N dist. map" parameter set.
If no: Press the right-arrow key (), in order to return to the "level (LVL) N" submenu.
"status"
see below, "LVL N State" parameter set
31
The "level" menu
2.1.10 "LVL N state" (N = 1 or 2)
LVL1 state L100C

level 1:
act. distance 1:
status:
Displays the currently measured level.
"act. distance N" (N = 1 or 2)

Dispalys the currently measured distance.
"status"
Use this parameter to define the status of the interference echo suppression.
enable map
Choose this option in order activate the interference echo suppression. The mapping is then used
for signal evaluation.
disable map
Choose this option in order to deactivate the interference echo suppression. The mapping is then
no longer used for signal evaluation but it can be reactivated if required.
delete map
Choose this option in order to delete the mapping. It can not be reactivated again and the
instrument uses the preprogrammed default mapping.
32
The "level" menu
2.2 The "extended calibration" submenu
2.2.1 "LVL N distance mapping" (N = 1 or 2)

Is identical to the "LVL N distance mapping" parameter set in the "basic setup" submenu, see above.
2.2.2 "LVL N check value" (N = 1 or 2)
LVL1 check value L1017
correction:
"correction"
This parameter can be used to shift the measured distance (between the sensor membrane and the
product surface) by a constant value. The distance entered into this parameter is added to the
measured distance.
2.2.3 "LVL N correction" (N = 1 or 2)
LVL1 correction L1018
offset:
"offset"
This parameter can be used to shift the measured level by a constant value. The level entered into
this parameter is added to the measured level.
! Note!
The level correction is applied before the linearisation.
2.2.4 "LVL N blocking distance" (N = 1 or 2)
LVL1 block. dist. L1019 .
blocking distance:
"blocking distance"
Indicates the blocking distance of the respective sensor.
33
The "level" menu
2.2.5 "LVL N limitation" (N = 1 or 2)
LVL1 limitation L1019

limitation:
upper limit:
lower limit:
"limitation"
Use this parameter to specify if the measured value has a lower and/or upper limit.
Selection:
off
low limit
high limit
low/high limit
"upper limit"
Defines the upper limit for the measured value.
(only available for the options "high limit" and "low/high limit")
"lower limit"
Defines the lower limit for the measured value.
(only available for the options "low limit" and "low/high limit")
20mA
100%
(a)
(2)
(b)
(b)
(1)
(a)
0/4mA
0%
t
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-yy-019
(1): lower limit; (2): upper limit

(a): limitation switched off; (b): limitation switched on
34
The "level" menu
2.2.6 "LVL N external input 1"

"LVL N external input 2"
(N = 1 or 2)
LVL1 ext. input1 L1020
input 1:
function:
! Note!
These parameters are only available for instruments with external limit switches
(FMU90-********B***).
These parameters are used to allocate up to 2 external limit switches to the level channel (e.g. one
minimum safety and one maximum safety switch). If one of these switches gives a signal, the level
assumes a specified value irrespective of the current echo signal.
"input N" (N = 1 or 2)
This parameter allocates an external limit switch to the level channel.
Selection:
disabled (default)
no switch allocated
ext. digin 1
external limit switch at the terminals 71, 72, 73
ext. digin 2
ext. digin 3
ext. digin 4
"function"
This parameter determines which value the level assumes if the limit switch sends a signal.
Selection:
off (default)
no influence on the level value
Min (0%)
If the limit switch sends a signal, a level value of 0% is generated.
Max (100%)
If the limit switch sends a signal, a level value of 100% is generated.
hold
If the limit switch sends a signal, the level is held on its current value.
customer secific
If the limit switch sends a signal, the level assumes the value as defined by the customer in the
"value" parameter.
"value"
This parameter is only available for "function" = "customer specific".
It determines which value the level assumes if the limit switch sends a signal.
35
The "level" menu
2.3 The "simulation" submenu
2.3.1 "LVL N simulation" (N = 1 or 2)
LVL1 Simulation L1022 The parameters of this set are used to simulate a level or a measured

simulation: value in order to check the linearisation, the signal output and the
(sim. level value:) connected switching units.
(sim. vol. value:)
"simulation"
Use this parameter to select the simulation
mode:
sim off.
This is the normal mode used for
measurement. No simulation is performed in
this mode.
sim. level
D After selection of this mode, the "sim. level
A 0/4...20
value" parameter appears, where you can
mA
specify a level value (1). The display and the
output signal assume values according to this
(1) (2) level.
Use this mode to check the linearisation.
sim. volume
After selection of this mode, the "siml vol.
value" parameter appears, where you can
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-yy-020
specify a volume value (2). The output
(1): simulation of level; (2): simulation of volume
assumes a value according to this volume.
Use this mode to check the signal output and
the connected switching units.
! Note!
An error mesage is generated as long as one of
the modes "sim. level" or "sim. volume" is
active.
"sim. level value"

This parameter is available for a level simulation. It is used to specify the desired level value. The
display and the output signal assume values according to this level.
"sim. vol. value"

This parameter is available for a volume simulation (more general: a simulation of the linearized
value). It is used to specify the desired volume (or linearized value). The output signal assumes a
value according to this volume.
36
The "flow" menu
3 The "flow" menu

The "flow" submenu is used for the calibration of
flow measurements (1 or 2 channels)
back water alarm
flow counters
The structure of the submenu depends on the selected operating mode5):
operating modes operating mode

level+flow flow+backwater
flow
main menu main menu

flow flow
flow flow
flow flow flow1+backwater flow1+backwater
flow 1 flow
flow 2 backwater
flow counter flow counter
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-en-076
Always start by calibrating the first flow channel ("flow 1" submenu).
Thereafter, you can calibrate the following as required:

the second flow channel ("flow 2" submenu)
the backwater detection ("backwater" submenu)
the flow counters ("flow counter" submenu)
3.1 The "flow N" submenu (N = 1 or 2)
flow 1 F1002

basic setup
extended calibr.
simulation
! Note!
The "flow 2" submenu is only available for instruments with 2 sensor inputs. It is identical to the
"flow 1 " submenu.
5) The operating mode is selected during the first setup. Nevertheless, it can be changed at any time if required ("device properties" menu, "operating params"
submenu, "operating mode" parameter set).
37
The "flow" menu
3.1.1 The "basic setup" submenu
"flow N sensor selection" (N = 1 or 2)
flow1 sensor sel. F1003

input:
sensor selection:
detected:
"input"
Use this parameter to allocate a sensor to the channel.
Selection
no sensor
sensor 1
sensor 2 (for instruments with 2 sensor inputs)
average level6)
"sensor selection"
! Note!
For the sensors FDU9x, the option "automatic" is recommended (default setting). With this
setting the Prosonic S recognizes the type of sensor automatically.
For the sensors FDU8x, the type has to be assigned explicitly. The automatic sensor recognition
" Caution!
The automatic sensor recognition is also active if a sensor has been exchanged7). The Prosonic S
recognizes the type of the new sensor automatically and changes the "detected" parameter to fit the
new sensor. The measurement continues without break.
Check the "empty calibration" parameter. Adjust this value if required. Take into account the
blocking distance of the new sensor.
Go to the "flow N check value" parameter set and check the displayed distance. If required,

"flow N linearization" (N = 1 or 2)
flow 1 linearizat F1004 ! Note!

type: The selected linearization type determines which parameters are
flow unit: present.
Only the parameters "type" and "flow unit" are always present.
6) This option is only available if two level measurements have been calibrated. This is only possible for the "leve+flow" operating mode and a two channel instru-
ment.
7) if the sensor is of the type FDU9x.
38
The "flow" menu
The "linearization" parameter set is used to calculate the flow from the measured level. The
Prosonic S provides the following linearization types:
pre-programmed flow curves for commonly used flumes and weirs
a freely editable linearization table (up to 32 points)
a flow formula Q = C(h + h) with freely selectable parameters
" Caution!
Flow measurement always requires a linearization.
"type"
Use this parameter to select the type of linearization.
Selection:
none
No flow linearization is performed.
! Note!
If this option has been selected, nor further parameters are available. A flow measurement is only
possible with one of the other options.
flume/weir
In this type, the linearization is performed according to a preprogrammed linearization curve. The
type of curve is selected in the "curve" parameter. Additionally, the "flow unit" has to be
specified. The "max. flow" parameter displays the max. flow of the respective flume or weir. If
required, this value can be adjusted (as well as the "width" of the weir).
table
In this type, a linearization table consisting of up to 32 pairs of values "level - flow" is used.
Additionally, the "flow unit" has to be specified. To enter and activate the table use the "edit"
and "status table" parameters.
formula
In this type, the linearization is performed according to the formula
Q = C(h + h).
The "alpha", "beta", "gamma" and "C" parameters appear, which are used to specify the
details of the curve. Additionally, the "flow unit" and the "max. flow" of the weir or flume
have to be specified.
"flow unit"
Use this parameter to select the desired flow unit.
! Note!
After a change of the flow unit, the switching points of the limit relays have to be checked and
adjusted if required.
"curve"
This parameter is available for the "flume/weir" linearization type.
It is used to select the type of flume or weir. After the selection, a second list appears with differnt
sizes of the flume or weir8). When you have confirmed your selection, the Prosonic S returns to the
"linearization" function.
"width"
This parameter appears for the curves "rectangular weir", "NFX" and "trapezoidal weir". It is
used to specify the width of the respective weir.
"edit"
This parameter is used to enter or to view the linearization table. You have got the following options:
8) Tables of the flume and weir parameters can be found in the Appendix.
39
The "flow" menu
read:
The table editor appears. An existing table can be viewed but not changed.
manual:
The table editor appears. Table values can be entered and changed.
delete:
The linearization table is deleted.
The table editor
No. Level Value No. Level Value
1 0,0000 0,0000 1 0,0000 0,0000

2 0,0000 0,0000 2 0,0000 0,0000
3 0,0000 0,0000 3 0,0000 0,0000
0,0000 0,0000 0,0000 0,0000
: go to next row : navigate within the table

: go to previous row : (for "Level" und "Value)
: open marked row open marked number
for editing for editing
: (for "No.")
open row editor
Return to the previous Row function

step by this
key combination. - Delete row
- Insert row (before current row)
- Move row Query: new position
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-de-006
"status"
Use this parameter to specify if the linearization table is to be used or not.
Selection:
enabled
The table is used.
disabled
The table is not used. A flow value is not calculated.
"alpha", "beta", "gamma" and "C"

These parameters are available for the "formula" linearization type.
They are used to specify the parameters of the flow formula:
Q = C(h + h)
"max flow"
This parameter is available for the linearization types "flume/weir" and "formula".
It is used to specify the maximum flow of the respective weir or flume.
For each of the preprogrammed curves, a default value is preset. However, this value can be
adjusted, e.g. if the weir/flume is applied for lower flows.
The maximum flow corresponds to an output current of 20 mA.
40
The "flow" menu
"flow N empty calibration" (N = 1 or 2)
flow 1 empty cal. F1010

empty E: 0,00 m
blocking dist.
"empty E"
Use this parameter to enter the empty distance E, i.e. the distance between the sensor membrane
and the zero point of the flume or weir.
For flumes, the zero point is the bottom of the flume at the narrowest position:
FDU 91
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-yy-027
Example: Khafagi-Venturi flume

E: empty distance; D: measured distance; L: level
For weirs, the zero point is the lowest point of the weir crest:
FDU 91
D
E
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-yy-028
Example: Triangular weir

E: empty distance; D: measured distance; L: level
"blocking distance"
Indicates the blocking distance of the respective sensor. The blocking distance is measured from the
sensor membrane. The maximum level may not project into the blocking distance.
Type of sensor blocking distance (BD) maximum measuring dis-

tance1)

41
The "flow" menu
Type of sensor blocking distance (BD) maximum measuring dis-

tance1)
FDU95 - *1*** (low temperature version) 0.7 m 45 m (for solids)
FDU95 - *2*** (high temperature version) 0.9 m 45 m (for solids)
FDU80/FDU80F 0. m 5 m (for liquids)

FDU81/81F 0.5 m 10 m (for liquids)
FDU83 1m 25 m (for liquids)
1) valid for optimum process conditions
"flow N" (N = 1 or 2)
flow 1 F1005

flow 1:
level:
sensor:
"flow N" (N = 1 or 2)
Displays the currently measured flow Q.
If the displayed value does not match the real flow, it is recommended to check the linearisation.
"level"
Displays the currently measured level L.
If the displayed value does not match the real level, it is recommended to check the empty
calibration.
"sensor"
Displays the currently measured distance D between the sensor membrane and the liquid surface.
If the displayed value does not match the real distance, it is recommended to perform an
interference echo suppression.
42
The "flow" menu
Interference echo suppressio: Basic principles

The "flow N check value" and "flow N mapping" parameter sets are used to configure the inter-
ference echo suppression of the Prosonic S.
The following picture shows the operating principle of the interference echo suppression:
(a) (a) (b) (a) (b)
(c)
1 2 3
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-yy-030
1: The envelope curve (a) contains the level echo and an interference echo. Without interference echo suppression, the
interference echo is evaluated.
2: The interference echo suppression generates the mapping curve (b). This curve contains all echos which are located
within the range of mapping (c).
3: From now on, only those echos are evaluated, which are higher than the mapping curve. The interference echo is igno-
red because it is lower than the mapping curve.
! Note!
In order to include all interference echos, the interference echo suppression should be performed
with the level as low as possible. If during the commissioning the channel can not be sufficiently
emptied, it is advisable to repeat the interference echo suppression at a later point of time (as soon
as the level reaches nearly 0%).
"flow N check value" (N = 1 or 2)
flow 1 check value F1006
distance:
check distance:
L0000
flow 1 check value
distance: Ddisplay
?
Ddisplay = D D
Ddisplay < D
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-de-031
43
The "flow" menu
"distance"
"check distance"
Use this parameter to state if the displayed distance Ddisplay matches the real distance D. Based on
your selection, the Prosonic S automatically proposes a suitable range of mapping.
distance = ok
Choose this option if the displayed value matches the real distance.
After selecting this option, the "flow N mapping" parameter set appears. The preset range of
mapping is equal to D. That means: all interference echos which are above the current product
surface will be mapped out in the interference echo suppression.
distance too small
Choose this option if the displayed value is smaller than the real distance D.
In this case, the currently evaluated echo is an interference echo.
After selecting this option, the "flow N mapping" parameter set appears. The preset range of
mapping is slightly larger than Ddisplay. Therefore, the currently evaluated interference echo will
be mapped out by the interference echo suppression.
distance too big
Choose this option if the displayed value Ddisplay is larger than the real distance D.
performed and the Prosonic S returns to the "flow N" parameter set. Check the calibration
parameters, especially the "empty calibration".
distance unknown
In this case, an interference echo supression can not be performed and the Prosonic S returns to
the "flow N" parameter set.
manual
The "flow N mapping" parameter set appears, where you can define the required range of
mapping.
"flow N mapping" (N = 1 or 2)
flow 1 mapping F1008

sensor:
range of mapping:
start mapping:
status:
"sensor"
Displays the currently measured distance between the sensor membrane and the water surface.
evaluated.
"range of mapping"
"start mapping"
Select "yes" in this parameter in order to start the mapping. When the mapping is finished, the state
is automatically changed to "enable map".
44
The "flow" menu
The "flow N state" parameter set appears, in which the currently measured level, distance and
flow are displayed. Compare the displayed distance to the real distance in order to decide if a further
mapping is necessary.
If yes: Press the left-arrow key () in order to return to the "flow N mapping" parameter set.
If no: Press the right key () in order to return to the "flow N" submenu.
"status"
see below ("flow N status")
"flow N state" (N = 1 or 2)"
LVL1 state L100C
level:
sensor:
flow N:
status:
"level"
Displays the currently measured level.
"sensor"
Dispalys the currently measured distance between the sensor membrane and the liquid surface.
"flow N" (N = 1 or 2)
Displays the currently measured flow.
"status"
enable map
disable map
delete map
45
The "flow" menu
3.1.2 The "extended calibration" submenu
"flow N mapping" (N = 1 or 2)
flow 1 mapping F1010

sensor:
range of mapping:
start mapping:
status:
Is identical to the "flow N mapping" parameter set in the "basic setup" submenu, see page 44.
"flow N low cut off" (N = 1 or 2)
flow1 low cut off F1011

low flow cut off:
flow 1:
"low flow cut off"

Use this function to enter a lower limit for the flow (percentage of the "maximum flow"). If the flow
falls below this cut off limit, it is not taken into account for the flow counters (which are paramet-
rized in the "flow counter" submenu, see below).
"flow N" (N = 1 or 2)
"flow N distance correction"
flow 1 dist. corr. F1012

correction:
flow1:
"correction"
This parameter can be used to shift the measured distance (from the sensor membrane to the water
surface) by a constant value. The distance entered into this parameter is added to the measured dis-
tance.
"flow N" (N = 1 or 2)
Displays the currently measured flow in order to show the influence of the distance correction on
the flow.
46
The "flow" menu
"flow N level correction" (N = 1 or 2)
flow 1 level corr. F1013
offset:
flow 1:
"offset"
This parameter can be used to shift the level by a constant value. The level entered into this para-
meter is added to the measured level.
"flow N" (N = 1 or 2)
Displays the currently measured flow in order to show the influence of the level correction on the
flow.
"flow N blocking distance" (N = 1 or 2)
flow 1 block. dist. F1015
blocking dist.:
"blocking distance"
Displays the blocking distance of the connected sensor.
"flow N limitation" (N = 1 or 2)
flow 1 limitation F1014
limitation:
upper limit:
lower limit:
"limitation"
Use this parameter to specify if the measured value has a lower and/or upper limit.
Selection:
off
low limit
high limit
low/high limit
"upper limit"
Defines the upper limit for the measured value.
47
The "flow" menu
"lower limit"
Defines the lower limit for the measured value.
20mA
100%
(a)
(2)
(b)
(b)
(1)
(a)
0/4mA
0%
t
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-yy-019

48
The "flow" menu
"flow N external input 1"

"flow N external input 2"
(N = 1 or 2)
flow1 ext. input1 L1020
input 1:
function:
! Note!
(FMU90-********B***).
These parameters are used to allocate up to 2 external limit switches to the flow channel (e.g. one
minimum safety and one maximum safety switch). If one of these switches gives a signal, the flow
assumes a specified value irrespective of the current echo signal.
This parameter allocates an external limit switch to the flow channel.
Selection:
disabled (default)
no switch allocated
ext. digin 1
ext. digin 2
ext. digin 3
ext. digin 4
"function"
This parameter determines which value the flow assumes if the limit switch sends a signal.
Selection:
off (default)
no influence on the flow value
Min (0%)
If the limit switch sends a signal, a flow value of 0% is generated.
Max (100%)
If the limit switch sends a signal, the maximum flow value of the respective flume or weir is
generated.
hold
If the limit switch sends a signal, the flow is held on its current value.
customer secific
If the limit switch sends a signal, the flow assumes the value as defined by the customer in the
"value" parameter.
"value"
It determines which value the flow assumes if the limit switch sends a signal.
49
The "flow" menu
3.1.3 The "simulation" submenu
"flow N simulation" (N = 1 or 2)
flow 1 simulation F1020 The parameters of this set are used to simulate a level or a flow in

simulation: order to check the linearisation, the signal output and the connected
(sim. level value:) switching units.
(sim. flow value:)
"simulation"
D
A 0/4...20
mA
(1) (2)
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-yy-032
Use this parameter to select the simulation mode:

sim. off
This is the normal mode used for measurement. No simulation is performed in this mode.
sim. level
After selection of this mode, the "sim. level value" parameter appears, where you can specify a
level value (1). The display and the output signal assume values according to this level.
Use this mode to check the linearization.
flow
After selection of this mode, the "sim. flow value" parameter appears, where you can specify a
flow value (2). The output signal assumes a value according to this flow.
Use this mode to check the signal output and the connected switching units.
! Note!
An error message is generated as long as one of the modes "sim. level" or "flow" is active.
"sim. level value"

This parameter is available for a level simulation. It is used ot specify the desired level value. The
display and the output signal assume values according to this level.
"sim. flow value"

This parameter is available for a flow simulation. It is used to specify the desired flow value. The
output signal assumes a value according to this flow.
50
The "flow" menu
3.2 The "backwater" submenu
3.2.1 Basics
The flow measurement can be impaired by backwater on the downstream side or by dirt within the
flume. The backwater and dirt detection function can detect these errors and ensure that the
Prosonic S reacts appropriately.
Two sensors are required for backwater and dirt detection. The first sensor is mounted above the
upstream water, the second above the downstream water. The Prosonic S evaluates the ratio of the
downstream level h2 and the upstream level h1.
Backwater detection
Backwater is detected if the ratio h2/h1 exceeds a critical value (typically 0,8 for Venturi flumes).
In this case, the flow is continuously reduced to 0. An alarm relay can be configured which indicates
the backwater alarm.
Dirt detection
Dirt within the flume is detected if the ratio h2/h1 falls below a critical value (typically 0,1). An
alarm relay can be configured which indicates the dirt alarm.
Q
Prosonic S
(a)
h1
(b)
h2
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-yy-033
(a): Upstream sensor;(b): Downstream sensor
! Note!
The ultrasonic sensor for the measurement of the downstream water level should be installed at a
sufficient distance from the discharge of the flume. The measuring point must be selected in such a
way that the surface of the water is calmed down and the level is not influenced by the flume
anymore.
3.2.2 The "basic setup" submenu
"backwater sensor selection"
backw. sensor sel. F1304
input:
sensor selection:
detected:
51
The "flow" menu
"input"
Use this parameter to allocate the downstream sensor to the channel.
The available options depend on the instrument version and the connected sensors.
"sensor selection"
! Note!
For the sensors FDU9x, the option "automatic" is recommended (default setting). With this
setting the Prosonic S recognizes the type of sensor automatically.
For the sensors FDU8x, the type has to be assigned explicitly. The automatic sensor recognition
" Caution!
The automatic sensor recognition is also active if a sensor has been exchanged9). The Prosonic S
recognizes the type of the new sensor automatically and changes the "detected" parameter to fit the
new sensor. The measurement continues without break.
Check the "backwater empty calibration". Adjust this value if required. Take into account the
blocking distance of the new sensor.
Go to the "backwater check value" parameter and check the displayed distance. If required,

"backwater empty calibration"
backw. empty cal. F1305

empty E:
blocking dist.:
"empty E"
Use this parameter to enter the empty distance for the downstream sensor.
"blocking distance"
Displays the blocking distance BD of the downstream sensor.
9) if the sensor is of the type FDU9x.
52
The "flow" menu
"backwater detection"
backw. detection F1305

ratio B:
"ratio B"
Use this parameter to specify the upper limit for the ratio h2/h1.
If during the measurement the ratio exceeds this limit, the backwater alarm becomes active, i.e.:
the warning W 00 692 appears
the backwater alarm relay is de-energized10)
if the backwater level continues to rise, the flow (indicated on the display and registered by the
counters) is continuously reduced to 0.
h1 h1
h2
h2
h2/h1 < B h2/h1 > B
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-yy-035
! Note!
The default setting is B = 0,8.
This is the optimum value for Venturi flumes. To ensure reliable measurement it should not be
exceeded.
"dirt detection"
dirt detection F1306

ratio D:
"ratio D"
Use this parameter to specify the lower limit for the ratio h2/h1.
If during the measurement the ratio falls below this level, the dirt alarm becomes active, i.e.
the warning W 00 693 appears
the dirt alarm relay is de-energized11).
10) In the "relay/controls" menu, one of the relays can be defined to be the backwater alarm relay.
11) In the "relay/controls" menu, one of the relays can be defined to be the dirt alarm relay
53
The "flow" menu
h1 h1
h2 h2
h2/h1 > D h2/h1 < D

L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-yy-036
"backwater"
backwater F1307

act. backw. level:
act. flow level:
actual ratio:
flow 1:
The following is displayed in this parameter set:

the current backwater level h2 (downstream level)
the current flow level h1 (upstream level)
the current ratio h2/h1
the current flow Q
Use these values to check the flow calibration as well as the calibration of the backwater and dirt
detection.
"backwater check value"
backw check value F1308

distance:
check distance:
L0000
flow 1 check value
distance: Ddisplay
?
Ddisplay = D D
Ddisplay < D
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-de-031
"distance"
"check distance"
Use this parameter to state if the displayed distance Ddisplay matches the real distance D. Based on
your selection, the Prosonic S automatically proposes a suitable range of mapping.
54
The "flow" menu

distance = ok
Choose this option if the displayed value matches the real distance.
After selecting this option, the "backwater mapping" parameter set appears. The preset range
of mapping is equal to D. That means: all interference echos which are above the current product
surface will be mapped out in the interference echo suppression.
distance too small
Choose this option if the displayed value is smaller than the real distance D.
In this case, the currently evaluated echo is an interference echo.
After selecting this option, the "backwater mapping" parameter set appears. The preset range
of mapping is slightly larger than Ddisplay. Therefore, the currently evaluated interference echo will
be mapped out by the interference echo suppression.
distance too big
Choose this option if the displayed value Ddisplay is larger than the real distance D.
performed and the Prosonic S returns to the "backwater" parameter set. Check the calibration
parameters, especially the "empty calibration".
distance unknown
In this case, an interference echo supression can not be performed and the Prosonic S returns to
the "backwater" parameter set.
manual
The "backwater mapping" parameter set appears, where you can define the required range of
mapping.
"backwater mapping"
backw. mapping F1309
sens. va. backw.:

range of mapping:
start mapping:
status:
"sensor value backwater"

Displays the currently measured distance between the sensor membrane and the water surface.
evaluated.
"range of mapping"
"start mapping"
Select "yes" in this parameter in order to start the mapping. When the mapping is finished, the
status is automatically changed to "enable map".
The "backwater status" parameter set appears, in which the currently measured level, distance and
flow are displayed. Compare the displayed distance to the real distance in order to decide if a further
mapping is necessary.
If yes: Press the left-arrow key () in order to return to the "backwater mapping" parameter set.
If no: Press the right-arrow key () in order to return to the "backwater" submenu.
"status"
see below ("backwater status" parameter set).
55
The "flow" menu
"backwater status"
backw. status F130A

act. backw. level:
distance:
flow 1:
status:
"actual backwater level"

Displays the currently measured level of the backwater sensor.
"distance"
Displays the currently measured distance between the backwater sensor membrane and the liquid
surface.
"flow 1"
"status"
enable map
disable map
delete map
56
The "flow" menu
3.2.3 The "extended calibration" submenu
"backwater mapping"
backw. status F1500
sens. val. backw.:

range of mapping:
start mapping:
status:
Is identical to the "backwater mapping" parameter set in the "basic setup" submenu, see above.
"backwater distance correction"
backw dist. corr. F1501
sensor offset:
"sensor offset"
This parameter can be used to shift the measured distance (from the sensor membrane to the water
surface) by a constant value. The distance entered into this parameter is added to the measured
distance.
"backwater correction"
backw. correction F1502
offset:
"offset"
This parameter can be used to shift the measured downwater level by a constant value. The level
entered into this parameter is added to the measured downwater level.
"backwater blocking distance"
backw. block.dist. F1504
blocking dist.:
"blocking distance"
Displays the blocking distance of the connected sensor.
57
The "flow" menu
"backwater limitation"
backw limitation F1503

limitation:
upper limit:
lower limit:
"limitation"
Use this parameter to specify if the measured downstream level has a lower and/or upper limit.
Selection:
off
low limit
high limit
low/high limit
"upper limit"
Defines the upper limit for the downstream level.
"lower limit"
Defines the lower limit for the downstream level.
20mA
100%
(a)
(2)
(b)
(b)
(1)
(a)
0/4mA
0%
t
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-yy-019

58
The "flow" menu
"backwater external input 1"

"backwater external input 2"
backw.ext. input1 L1020
input 1:
function:
! Note!
(FMU90-********B***).
These parameters are used to allocate up to 2 external limit switches to the backwater channel (e.g.
one minimum safety and one maximum safety switch). If one of these switches gives a signal, the
backwater level assumes a specified value irrespective of the current echo signal.
This parameter allocates an external limit switch to the backwater channel.
Selection:
disabled (default)
no switch allocated
ext. digin 1
ext. digin 2
ext. digin 3
ext. digin 4
"function"
This parameter determines which value the backwater level assumes if the limit switch sends a
signal.
Selection:
off (default)
no influence on the backwater level
Min (0%)
If the limit switch sends a signal, a backwater level value of 0% is generated.
Max (100%)
If the limit switch sends a signal, the maximum backwater level is generated.
hold
If the limit switch sends a signal, the backwater level is held on its current value.
customer secific
If the limit switch sends a signal, the backwater level assumes the value as defined by the
customer in the "value" parameter.
"value"
It determines which value the backwater level assumes if the limit switch sends a signal.
59
The "flow" menu
3.2.4 The "simulation" submenu
"backwater simulation"
backw simulation F1600 The parameters of this set are used to simulate a downstream water

simulation: level in order to check the parametrisation of the backwater and dirt
(sim. level value:) detection.
"simulation"
Use this parameter to select the simulation mode:
sim. off
This is the normal mode used for measurement. No simulation is performed in this mode.
sim. level
After selection of this mode, the "sim. level value" parameter appears, where you can specify a
level value. The backwater and dirt detection generate a ratio h2/h1 according to this level.
! Note!
An error message is generated as long as the "sim. level" mode is active.
"sim. level value"

This parameter is available for a level simulation. It is used ot specify the desired level value.
60
The "flow" menu
3.3 The "flow counter" submenu
flow counter F1100

totaliser
daily counter
In this submenu, select which type of counter you are going to parametrize.
Selection:
totaliser (not resettable)
daily counter (resettable)
A selection of up to three totalisers or daily counters appears12). Select the totaliser or daily counter
you are going to parametrize.
totaliser FX201

totaliser 1
totaliser 2
totaliser 3
daily counter FX101

daily conter 1
daily conter 2
daily conter 3
12) The number of totalisers and daily conters depends on the instrument version and the installation environment.
61
The "flow" menu
3.3.1 "totalizer N/daily counter N"

(N = 1 -3)
totalizer 1 F1202

allocation:
counting unit:
"allocation"
Use this parameter to allocate a flow to the counter.
Selection:
none (default)
flow 1, Q1
flow 2, Q2 (for 2-channel instruments only)
average flow, (Q1 + Q2)/2, (for 2-channel instruments only)
flow 1-2, Q1 - Q2, (for 2-channel instruments only)
flow 2-1, Q2 - Q1, (for 2-channel instruments only)
flow 1+2, Q1 + Q2, (for 2-channel instruments only)
"counting unit"
Use this parameter to select the unit for the flow volume.
Selection:
m3
l
hl
igal
usgal
barrels
inch3
ft3
USmgal
Ml
62
The "flow" menu

(N = 1 - 3)
totalizer 1 F1203
value:
overflow:
"value"
Displays the current flow volume.
"overflow"
Whenever the counter passes the overflow, this parameter is incremented by 1. The total flow
volume thus is:
Vtotal = overflow x 107 + value
"reset" (only for the daily counters)

Use this parameter to reset the counter to "0".
Selection:
no (default)
"value" and "overflow" retain their values.
yes
"value" und "overflow" are reset to "0".

(N = 1 - 3)
totalizer 1 F1204
error handling:
"error handling"
Use this parameter to define the reaction of the Prosonic S in the case of an error.
Selection:
stop
The Prosonic S stops counting.
hold
The Prosonic S continues counting. It uses the flow value which was present at the moment the
error occured.
actual value
The Prosonic S continues counting. It uses the current flow value (although its reliability is no
longer ensured).
63
The "flow" menu
3.3.4 "daily counter N"

(N = 1 - 3)
daily counter 1 F1105

external reset:
externl start:
! Note!
This parameter set is only available in instruments with external limit switches
(FMU90-********B***).
"external reset"
This parameter allocates one of the external switch inputs to the counter by which it can be reset.
Selection:
disabled
ext. digin 1
...
ext. digin 4
"external start"
This parameter allocates one of the external switch inputs to the counter by which it can be started.
Selection:
disabled
ext. digin 1
...
ext. digin 4
64
The "safety settings" menu
4 The "safety settings" menu
main menu CX001
safety settings
relay/controls
output/calculat
device properties
4.1 "output on alarm" (only for HART instruments)
output on alarm AX101
output 1:
output value 1:
output 2:
output value 2:
4.1.1 "output N" (N = 1 or 2) (only for HART instruments)

Defines the output current in the case of an alarm.
Selection:
min (3.6 mA)
max (22 mA) (Default)
user specific (as defined in the "output value N" parameter)
hold (the last value is held)
[mA] [mA]
22 22
B
3.6 3.6
t t
[mA] [mA]
22 22
D
C
E
3.6 3.6
t t
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-yy-069
A: min.; B: max.; C: user specific; D: hold; E: output value
4.1.2 "oputput value N" (N = 1 or 2) (only for HART instruments)

Defines the output current in the case of an alarm.
(only available for "output N" = "user specific")
range of values: 3.6 ... 22 mA
65
4.2 "output echo loss"
outp. echo loss AX102

level 1:
level 2:
! Note!
The parameter set "output echo loss" (AX102) is valid only for level measurements. For flow
measurements there is an additional parameter set with a different code: "output echo loss"
(AX112).
The parameters of both sets are described in this section.
4.2.1 "level N" or "flow N" (N = 1 or 2)

Defines the output value in the case of an echo loss.
Selection:
hold (Default)
The current value is held.
ramp %/min
After the time defined in "delay echo loss" (see below), the output value is continuously shifted
towards 0% (for a negative ramp) or towards 100% (for a positive ramp). The ramp must be
specified as a percentage of the measuring range per minute ("ramp level N" parameter).
! Note!
This option is not available for flow measurements.
[mA]
22
B
A
C
3.6
t
min
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-yy-070
A: delay echo loss; B: ramp (positive); C: ramp (negative)
customer specific
After the time defined in "delay echo loss" (see below), the output assumes the value which has
been defined in the "value level N" or "value flow N" parameter.
alarm
After the time defined in "delay echo loss" (see below), the instrument generates an alarm. The
output assumes the value defined in "output on alarm" (see above).
4.2.2 "ramp level N" (N = 1 or 2)

(only available for the option "ramp %/min")
Use this parameter to specify the ramp (percentage of the measuring range per minute).
66
4.2.3 "value level N" or "value flow N" (N = 1 or 2)

(only available for the option "customer specific")
Use this parameter to specify the output value in the case of an echo loss.
4.3 "delay echo loss"
delay echo loss AX103
delay sensor 1:
delay sensor 2:
4.3.1 "delay sensor N" (N = 1 or 2)

Use this parameter to define the delay time for echo loss.
After an echo loss, the instrument waits for the time specified in this parameter before generating
an alarm. Thus the measurement is not interrupted by short-time interferences.
4.4 "safety distance"
safety distance AX104
saf.dist. sen 1:
saf.dist. sen 2:
4.4.1 "safety distance sensor N" (N = 1 or 2)

Use this parameter to specify a safety distance
for the sensor.
The safety distance is located immediately
below the blocking distance. If the level projects
into the safety distance, an alarm is generated.
(BD)
Default: 0 m
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-yy-071
BD: blocking distance (depending on the type of sensor);

A: safety distance
67
Application example FMU90

The safety distance can be used to detect
flooding if a FDU90 sensor with flooding + E
protection tube is applied. In this case the safety

distance must be chosen in a way that it ends
slightly below the lower edge of the flooding
protection tube: FDU90 1
SD = min. 4 cm
In order to indicate the flooding, a diagnostic
BD
relay can be parametrized with the allocation
"safety distance channel 1/2" (see section
5.1.8).
SD
L00-FDU90xxx-05-00-00-xx-001
1: A detected flooding can generate an alarm and can be

indicated via a relay
BD: Blocking distance = 7cm(2.8")
SD: safety distance to be defined: 4cm /1.6")
4.5 "in safety distance"
in safety dist. AX105

in saf. dist. s 1:
in saf. dist. s 2:
4.5.1 "in safety distance sensor N" (N = 1 or 2)

Defines the reaction of the instrument if the level is in the safety distance.
Selection:
warning (default)
A warning (A01651 or A02651) is generated but the instrument continues to measure.
If the level drops out of the safety distance, the warning disappears.
alarm
The instrument enters the defined alarm state ("output on alarm"). Additionally, an error message
(A01651 or A02651) is generated. If the level drops out of the safety distance, the alarm
disappears and the instrument continues to measure.
self holding
The instrument enters the defined alarm state ("output on alarm"). Additionally, an error message
(A01651 or A02651) is generated.
If the level drops out of the safety distance, the alarm remains active. The measurement is
continued only after a reset of the self holding.
68
[mA] [mA]
22 110% 22 110%
SD SD
E01651 E01651
E02651 E02651
3.6 -10% 3.6 -10%

t t
A B
[mA] RESET
22 110%
E01651
E02651
3.6 -10%
t
C
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-yy-072
A: alarm; B: warning; C: self holding
4.5.2 "reset sensor N" (N = 1 or 2)

(only available for the option "self holding")
This parameter is used to reset the alarm in the case of a self holding.
Selection:
no (default)
The alarm is not reset.
yes
The alarm is reset. The measurement is resumed.
4.6 "reaction high temperature"
react. high temp AX107
overtemp sen 1:
max. temp. Sen. 1:
overtemp sen 2:
max. temp. Sen. 2:
4.6.1 "overtemperature sensor N" (N = 1 or 2)

Defines how the instrument reacts if the maximum temperature of the sensor is exceeded.
Selection:
warning (default)
If the maximum temperature is exceeded, an error message (A01661 or A02661) is generated
but the measurement is continued.
alarm
If the maximum sensor temperture is exceeded, the output assumes a defined value ("output on
alarm", see above). Additionally an error meassage (A01661 or A02661) is generated.
4.6.2 "maximum temperature sensor N" (N = 1 or 2)

Displays the maximum temperature of the respective sensor.
69
4.7 "defective temperature sensor"
def. temp. sensor AX018

def. temp. sens 1
def. temp. sens 2
4.7.1 "defective temperature sensor N" (N = 1 or 2)

Defines how the instrument reacts in the case of a defective temperature sensor.
Selection:
warning
If the temperature sensor is defective, an error message (A01661 or A02661) is generated but the
measurement is continued.
alarm (default)
If the temperature sensor is defective, the output assumes a defined value ("output on alarm", see
above). Additionally an error meassage (A01661 or A02661) is generated.
4.8 "relay delay"
relay delay AX109

startdelay relay:
4.8.1 "startdelay relay"

Use this function to define a start delay for the relays of the Prosonic S. When the supply voltage is
switched on, the relays do not switch immediately but one after another with the specified delay
time in between. This helps to avoid overloads of the power supply system.
Default: 1 s
70
The "relays/controls" menu
5 The "relays/controls" menu
5.1 The "relay configuration" submenu
5.1.1 "relay allocation"
relay allocation RX101
relay 1
relay 2
relay 3
relay 4
Use this parameter to select the relay you are going to configure.
Selection:
All relays of the instrument version at hand
! Note!
If a function has already been allocated to one of the relays, the name of this function is displayed
next to the relay number.
5.1.2 "relay 1...6"

(relay function)
relay 2 R1103
function:
After selecting a relay, the "relay N" (N = 1 ... 6) parameter set appears, which is used to configure
the relay.
To configure the relay, proceed according to the following steps:
1. Select the "function" parameter. The "select function" screen appears.
2. Select one of the following functions:
a. limit
After selecting this option, a further selection list appears. Select the measuring value to
which the limit relay is to be allocated.
Continue by sections 5.1.3 and 5.1.11.
b. time pulse (only for flow measurements)
(outputs a short pulses at regular time intervals)
After selecting this option, a further selection list appears. Select the option "time pulse".
c. counting pulse (only for flow measurements)
(outputs a short pulse after a defined flow volume)
After selecting this option, a further selection list appears. Select the measuring value to
which the pulses refer.
Continue by sections 5.1.5, 5.1.6 and 5.1.11.
d. alarm/diagnostics
71
After selecting this option, a further selection list appears. Select the alarm to which the
relay is allocated.
Selection:
alarm relay
the relay is energized if an "alarm" type error is detected.
diagnostics
a specific state of the instrument (e.g. loss of echo) can be allocated to the relay. The relay
becomes energized as soon as this state occurs.
backwater alarm
The relay is energized if a backwater alarm is active.
This option is only available if the operating mode is "flow+backwater"13).
dirt alarm
The relay is energized if a dirt alarm is active.
This option is only available if the operating mode is "flow+backwater"13.
e. fieldbus (DO relay)14) (for Profibus DP instruments only)
After selecting this option, a further selection list appears. Select the DO block to which the
relay is to be connected.
No additional parametrization is required.
f. none
The relay is not used.
3. Now, the instrument switches back to the "relay N" (N= 1 ... 6) parameter set. Depending
on your selections, further parameters are now available which you can use to complete the
configuration. Details are described in the following sections.
5.1.3 "relay N" (N = 1 - 6)

(Parametrization of a limit relay)
relay 2 R2101

function: limit
limit type:
switch on point:
switch off point:
"Limit type"
Use this parameter to define the type of limit.
Selection:
standard
For this limit type, a switch on point and a switch off point have to be defined. The switching
behaviour depends on the relative position of these switching points.
a. switch on point > switch off point

The relay is energized if the measured value rises above the switch on point.
The relay is de-energized if the measured value falls below the switch off point.
b. switch on point < switch off point
The relay is energized if the measured value falls below the switch on point.
The relay is de-energized if the measured value rises above the switch off point.
13) The operating mode is set during the first setup of the instrument. It can be changed by "device properties/operating parameters/operating mode".
14) A fieldbus relay (DO relay) switches according to a binary value (e.g. from a SPS) which is connected to the DO block of the instrument.
72
m, ft, m3/h, ft3/s, C, m/min, ft/min, 3 3

m, ft, m /h, ft /s, C, m/min, ft/min,
A B
B A
t t
C C
D D
t t
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-yy-061
A: switch on point; B: switch off point; C: relay energized; D: relay de-energized
tendency/speed
This limit type is similar to the "standard" type. The only difference is that variations with time of
the measured value are examined instead of the measured value itself. Therefore, the unit for the
switching points is "measuring value unit per minute".
inband
For this limit type, an upper and a lower switching point have to be defined.
The relay is energized if the measured value is between the two switching points.
The relay is de-energized if the measured value is above the upper or below the lower switching
point.
Additionally, a hysteresis can be defined, which affects both switching points.
out of band
For this limit type, an upper and a lower switching point have to be defined.
The relay is energized if the measured value is above the upper or below the lower switching
point.
The relay is de-energized if the measured value is between the two switching points.
Additionally, a hysteresis can be defined, which affects both switching points.
73
3 3 3 3
m, ft, m /h, ft /s, C, m/min, ft/min, m, ft, m /h, ft /s, C, m/min, ft/min,
A A
E E
E E
B B
t t
C C
D D
t t
1 2
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-hfsdjhfjkdfkfhkf00-yy-062
1: "inband" limit relay; 2: "out of band" limit relay

A: upper switching point; B: lower switching point; C: relay energized; D: relay de-energized; E: hysteresis
"switch on point" and "switch off point"

(for the "standard" limit type)
Define the switching points in these parameters.
They have the same unit as the measured value.
" Caution!
After a change of the "unit level" or "flow unit" the switching points have to be checked and adjusted
if required.
"switch on /min" and "switch off /min"

(for the "tendency/speed" limit type)
Their unit is the measured value unit per minute.
" Caution!
if required.
"upper switching point" and "lower switching point"

(for the "inband" and "out of band" limit types)
They have the same unit as the measured value.
" Caution!
if required.
"hysteresis"
(for the "inband" and "out of band" limit types)
Define the hysteresis in this parameter. It has the same unit as the measured value.
The hysteresis affects the upper and the lower swtiching point.
74
5.1.4 relay N (N = 1 - 6)
(Parametrization of a time pulse relay)
(only for instrument versions with flow functionality:
FMU90 - *2********** and FMU90 - *4**********)
relay 2 R2103
function: time pulse

pulse width:
pulse time:
"pulse width" and "pulse time"

Use these parameters to specify the time interval
between two pulses (pulse time) and the C
duration of each pulse (pulse width).
pulse time D
unit: min t
default: 1 min B
range of values: 1 to 65000 min
A
pulse width
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-yy-063
unit: ms
A: pulse time; B: pulse width;
default: 200 ms
C: relay energized; D: relay de-energized
range of values: 200 to 60000 ms
5.1.5 "relay N" (N = 1 - 6)

(Parametrization of a counting pulse relay)
relay 2 R2103
function: pulse flow 1

counter unit:
pulse value:
pulse width:
"counter unit"
Use this parameter to select the unit for the flow volume.
Selection:
l (default)
hl
Ml
m3
dm3
cm3
ft3
inch3
us gal
us mgal
i gal
barrels
75
"pulse value"
Use this parameter to specify the flow volume after which a pulse is generated.
Default: 100 m3
"pulse width"
Use this parameter to specify the width of each pulse.
Default:
HART: 200 ms
Profibus DP: 1000 ms
Range of values:
200 to 60000 ms
! Note!
If a relay is used in a Profibus DP instrument to transmit the pulses, the pulse width can be reduced.
If the DI block is used, 1000 ms is the smallest possible value.
5.1.6 "relay N " (N = 1 - 6)

(Display of the counting value)
relay 2 R2105

pulse counter:
overflow x 107:
reset counter:
start counter:
"pulse counter"
Displays the number of pulses which have been generated since the last overflow.
"overflow"
Displays, how many times the pulse counter has already passed the overflow.
! Note!
The total flow volume is:
Vtotal = (overflow x 107+ pulse counter) x pulse value
"reset counter"
Use this parameter to reset the counter.
Selection:
no (default)
"pulse counter" and "overflow" retain their values.
yes
"pulse counter" and "overflow" are reset to "0".
76
m3/h, ft3/s,
D
t
B
m3, ft3,
E
F
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-yy-064
A: flow; B: pulse width; C: relay energized; D: relay de-energized; E: pulse value; F: pulse counter
77
"start counter" and "stop counter"

You can use these parameters to exclude very small and very large flows from being counted.
If the flow is below "start counter" or above "stop counter" no pulses are generated. Both values are
to be specified as a percentage of the maximum flow (Qmax).
Default of "start counter": 0%
Default of "stop counter": 100%
100%
0% t
D
t
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-yy-065
A: start counter; B: stop counter; C: relay energized; D: relay de-energized
5.1.7 "relay N" (N = 1 ...6)

(Parametrization of an alarm relay)
relay 2 R2103

function: alarm
For an alarm relay, no additional parameters are required. Press "" in order to proceed to the next
parameter set.
78
5.1.8 "relay N" (N = 1 - 6)

(Parametrization of a diagnostic relay)
relay 2 R2103
function: diagnostics
allocation 1:
allocation 2:
"allocation 1/2"
A specific instrument state or event can be allocated to each of these parameters. The relay is de-
energized as soon as one of these states or events occurs.
Selection:
echoloss sensor 1/2/1+2
defective temperature sensor1/2
defective external temperature sensor
Accumulated alarm: defective temperature sensor
overtemp. sensor 1/2
Accumulated Alarm: overtemp.
safety distance channel 1/2
Accumulated Alarm: safety distance
5.1.9 "relay N" (N = 1 ...6)

(Parametrization of a backwater alarm relay)
relay 2 R2103
function: backwat. alarm
For a backwater alarm relay, no additional parameters are required. Press "" in order to proceed
to the next parameter set.
5.1.10 "relay N" (N = 1 ...6)

(Parametrization of a dirt alarm relay)
relay 2 R2103
function: dirt alarm
For a dirt alarm relay, no additional parameters are required. Press "" in order to proceed to the
next parameter set.
79
5.1.11 "relay N (N = 1 - 6)"

(Relay behavior)
relay X RX104

switch delay:
invert:
error handling:
"switch delay" (only available for limit relays)

Use this parameter to specify the switch delay (in seconds).
The relay does not switch immediately after the switch-on point has been exceeded but only after
the specified delay.
The measured value must exceed the switch-on point during the entire delay time.
"invert"
Use this parameter to specify if the switching direction of the relay is to be inverted.
Selection:
no (default)
The switching direction of the relay is not inverted. The relay switches as described in the above
sections.
yes
The switching direction of the relay is inverted. The states "energized" and "de-energized" are
interchanged.
"error handling" (not available for alarm and diagnostic relays)

Use this parameter to specify the reaction of the relay in the case of an error.
Selection:
actual value
The relay switches according the the currently measured value (although its reliability is not
ensured).
hold (default)
Limit relay: The current switching state of the relay is maintained.
Counting pulse relay: The counter uses the flow value which was present when the error
occurred.
switch on
(only available for limit relays)
The relay is energized.
switch off
(only available for limit relays)
The relay is de-energized.
stop
(only available for counting pulse and time pulse relays)
No pulses are generated as long as the error is present.
80
5.2 The "pump control N" submenu - standard

(N = 1 or 2)
! Note!
Depending on the order code of the instrument, different functionalities can be configured for the
pump control. The order code of the instrument can be found on the nameplate and in the operating
menu at "system information/device information".
This chapter is only valid for instruments with standard pump control
(FMU90-*1********** and FMU90-*2**********).
For the enhanced pump control see chapter 5.3

(FMU90-*3********** and FMU90-*4**********).
! Note!
The "pump control N" submenus are only present if "pump control" has been selected in "device
properties/operating parameters/controls".
5.2.1 Basic principles
Switch points
The pump control is used to start or stop pumps depending on the measured level. To do this, a
switch-on point and a switch-off point is defined for each pump. Additionally, a relay is assigned to
the pump and the switching is performed by this relay.
Two cases can be distinguished for the swichting behaviour of this relay:
a. Switch-on point > Switch-off point
The pump is switched on if the level rises above the switch-on point (A). It is switched off if
the level drops below the switch-off point (B).
Example: Emptying of a flood control reservoir.
D
t
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-yy-051
A: switch-on point; B: switch-off point; C: pump on; D: pump off
b. Switch-on point < Switch-off point

The pump is switched on if the level drops below the switch-on point (A). It is switched off if
the level rises above the switch-off point (B).
Example: Filling of a storage vessel
81
D
t
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-yy-052
Operating mode
The Prosonic S can control several pumps simultaneously - depending on the number of relays (s.
feature 70 of the product structure). If two or more pumps are applied for one level channel, you
can choose between two different operating modes:
a. Non-alternating pump control
In this mode, each pump is switched according to the switching points allocated to it.
b. Alternating pump control
In this mode, the switching points are not allocated to the individual pumps. Instead, the relays
are switched in a way that ensures uniform usage of all pumps. This is achieved by the
following rules:
1. If the level rises above one of the switch-on points, that relay switches on, which at that
moment has been switched off the longest time. This is not necessarily the relay to which
the switch-on point belongs.
2. If the level drops below one of the switch-off points, that relay switches off, which at that
moment has been switched on the longest time. This is not necessarily the relay to which
the switch-off point belongs.
However, there are two restrictions to these rules:
3. Rising of the level above a switch-on point effects switching on of a relay only if the
corresponding switch-off point has been reached before.
4. Dropping of the level below a switch-off points effects switching-off of a relay only if the
corresponding switch-on point has been reached before.
! Note!
If two pumps in the same range are to operate alternately, their switch-on and switch-off points
are identical. This switching response can be achieved by assigning switch points to the second
relay which can never be reached.
Example
In the switching range between 60% and 40%, two pumps should be operated alternately, i.e.
when pump 1 in running, pump 2 is switched off and vice versa. These relays are programmed
as follows:
Relay 1: switch-on point: 60%; switch-off point: 40%
Relay 2: switch-on point: e.g. 160%; switch-off point: e.g. 120%.
82
P1 P2 P3
A
A B
A B
P1 P2 P3
B
t
C
P1
D
1 P2
D
C
P3
D
C
P1
D
C
2 P2
D
C
P3
D
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-yy-053
1: Alternating pump control; that pump is switched on (switched off), which has been switched off (switched on) the
longest time.
2: Non-alternating pump control; each switching point is allocated to a different pump.
A: switch-on point of the pump; B: switch-off point of the pump; C: pump on; D: pump off;
Limit control versus pump rate control

If several pumps are connected, you can choose between limit control (as described above) and
pump rate control.
Limit control
If limit control has been selected, the relays are switched according to the swichting points as
described above.
Pump rate control

If pump rate control has been selected, there is only one switch-on point and one switch-off point,
which are valid for all relays. Additionally, a desired pump rate has to be specified.
If the level rises above (or falls below) the switch-on point, initially only one pump is switched on.
If the desired pump rate has not been achieved after the selected hook-up interval, an additional
pump is switched on. Similarly, further pumps are switched on in intervals until the desired pump
rate has been achieved.
83
However, if the level is already near to the switch-off point (distance < switch-on barrier), no
further pumps are swtiched on, even if the pump rate has not yet been achieved.
min
F
P1 P2 P3 B
min
P1
0 t
G
P1+P2
P1 P2 P3
D
t
E
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-yy-054
A: switch-on point; B: switch-off point; C: pump on; D: pump off; E: hook-up interval; F: switch-on barrier
G: pump rate
! Note!
If both the alternating pump control and the pump rate contral are active, the pumps are alternately
used as first pump.
84
5.2.2 Overview
Parametrization of a pump control (type: limit control)
Step Parameter set or submenu Parameter Remarks see section
1 "relay/controls" menu Select "pump control1" or "pump control 2".
2 pump control N reference Select the level according to which the pumps are controlled. 5.2.3
(N = 1 or 2)
number of pumps Select the number of pumps.
Note: A relay must be available for each of the pumps.
3 pump control N function Select "limit control". 5.2.4

(N = 1 or 2)
4 pump control N Select a pump. 5.2.5

(N = 1 or 2) (Each pump must be configured individually.)
5 pump M control N switch on point Define the switch on point for this pump. 5.2.6
(M = 1 - 6)
switch off point Define the switch off point for this pump.
(N = 1 or 2)
switch on delay Define the switch on delay for this pump.
alternate Select if the pump is to take part in the alternating pump control (Default:
no).
crust reduction Define the inaccuracy of the switching points (to reduce crust formation).
6 pump M control N backlash interval Define the backlash interval 5.2.7

(M = 1 - 6)
backlash time Define the backlash time
(N = 1 or 2)
error handling Define the error handling
7 relay allocation Allocate a relay to the pump. 5.2.8

Note: By default, relay 1 is configured as alarm relay.
8 relay N function Select "pump M/control N" 5.2.9

(N = 1 - 6)
invert Select if the switching signal is inverted (default: no)
9 pump control N Select the next pump and continue with step 5 until all pumps have been
configured.
If all pumps are configured: Press to return to the "relay/controls" menu.
85
Parametrization of a pump control (type: pump rate control)
1 "relay/controls" submenu Select "pump control 1" or "pump control 2".
2 pump control N refernece Select the level according to which the pumps are controlled. 5.2.3
(N = 1 or 2)
number of pumps Select the number of pumps.
Note: A relay must be available for each of the pumps.
3 pump control N function Select "rate control" 5.2.4

(N = 1 or 2)
4 pump control N switch on point Define the switch on point. 5.2.10

(N = 1 or 2)
switch off point Define the switch off point.
min. pumprate/min Define the minimum pump rate.
crust reduction Define the inaccuracy for the switching points (to reduce crust formation).
switch on border Define the switch on border.
hook up interval Define the hook-up interval.
alternate Select if an alternating pump control is to be performed.
5 pump control N Select a pump. 5.2.5

(N = 1 or 2) (The following parameters must be configured for each pump individually.)
6 pump M control N switch on delay Define the switch on delay. 5.2.11

(M = 1 - 6)
backlash interval Define the backlash interval.
(N = 1 or 2)
backlash time Define the backlash time.
error handling Define the error handling.
7 relay allocation Allocate a relay to the pump. 5.2.8

8 relay N function Select "pump M/control N". 5.2.9

(N = 1 - 6)
invert Select if the switching signal is inverted (default: no).
configured.
5.2.3 "pump control N" (N = 1 or 2)
pump control R1300

reference:
number of pumps:
"reference"
Defines the level channel to which the pump control refers.
Selection:
none (default)
level 1
level 2 (for instrument versions with 2 level inputs)
"number of pumps"
Defines the number of pumps participating in the pump control. At the end of the configuration
procedure a relay must be allocated to each of the pumps ("relay allocation" parameter set).
86
Range of values : 1 ... 6 (depending on the number of relays)

Default: 1
pump control R1301
function:
"function"
Determines the type of pump control.
Selection:
limit control (Default)
Each pump has its own switch-on point and switch-off point
rate control
There is only one switch-on point and one switch-off point for all pumps. If the switch-on point
has been exceeded, several pumps are switched on in intervals until the defined pumprate is
obtained. For details refer to the chapter "Limit control and rate control".
pump control R1302
pump 1:
(pump 2:)
(pump 3:)
(pump 4:)
Determines, to which pump the following specifications refer.

Selection
depending on the selected "number of pumps"
5.2.6 "pump M/control N" (M = 1 - 6; N = 1 or 2)

(Part 1: Switching points for limit control)
pump 1/control 1 R1303
switch on point:
switch off point:
switch on delay:
crust reduction:
"switch on point"
Specifies the switch-on point of the respective pump. Use the selected level unit.
" Caution!
After a change of the "unit level" the switch on point has to be checked and adjusted if required.
"switch off point"

Specifies the switch-off point of the respective pump. Use the selected level unit.
87
" Caution!
After a change of the "unit level" the switch off point has to be checked and adjusted if required.
"switch-on delay"
Specifies the switch-on delay of the respective pump (in seconds).
When the level has risen above the switch-on point, the relay does not switch immediately but only
after the specified switch-on delay. Assign different delays to the individual pumps in order to avoid
simultaneous switching-on of several pumps (which could cause an overload of the power supply
system).
E
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-yy-055
A: switch-on point; B: switch-off point; C: pump on; D: pump off; E: switch-on delay
"alternate"
Specifies if the pump should be included in the alternating pump control.
Selection
no (default)
The pump is not included in the alternating pump control. Instead, it switches according to its
own switch points.
yes
The pump is included in the alternating pump control.
"crust reduction"
Specifies a range of inaccuracy (percentage of the measuring range) for the switching points of the
pump. If this value is larger than "0", the switching points are not exactly constant. Instead, they
vary within the specified range of inaccuracy.
This helps to avoid crust formation, which often occurs at fixed switching points.
88
A
E
B
E
t
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-yy-056
A: switch-on point; B: switch-off point; C: pump on; D: pump off; E: inaccuracy ("crust reduction")
5.2.7 "pump M/control N" (M = 1 - 6, N = 1 or 2)

(Part 2: Switching behavior for limit control)
pumpM/controlN RN304
backl. interval:
backlash time:
error handling:
"backlash interval" and "backlash time"

Use these parameters if, you want to empty a vessel beyond the switch-off point in regular intervals.
The "backlash interval" determines after which time this extended pumping will occur.
The "backlash time" determines how long this additional pumping lasts.
89
E F
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-yy-057

E: backlash interval; F: backlash time
"error handling"
This parameter defines the reaction of the relay in the case of an error.
Selection:
hold (default)
The current switching state of the relay is held.
switch on
The relay is energized (i.e. the pump is switched on).
switch off
The relay is de-energized (i.e. the pump is switched off).
actual value
The relay switches according to the current measuring value (although its reliability is not
ensured).
relay allocation RN305

relay 1
relay 2
relay 3
relay 4
Allocates a relay to the pump.

Selection:
90
5.2.9 "relay N" (N = 1 - 6)
relay N RN306
function:
invert:
"function"
Allocates the desired function to the relay.
Selection:
none (default)
pump M/control N
"invert"
Determines if the switching behavior of the relay is inverted.
Selection:
no (default)
The switching behavior of the relay is not inverted. The relay is energized if the pump should be
switched on.
yes
The switching behavior of the relay is inverted. The relay is energized if the pump should be
switched off.

(Switching points for rate control)
pump control R13A3
switch on point:
switch off point:
min pump rate:
alternate:
"switch on point"
Specifies the switch-on point. Use the selected level unit.
" Caution!
After a change of the "unit level", the switch on point has to be checked and adjusted if required.
"switch off point"

Specifies the switch-off point. Use the selected level unit.
" Caution!
After a change of the "unit level", the switch off point has to be checked and adjusted if required.
"min pump rate"

Specifies the desired minimum pump rate (for details see section "limit control and rate control").
! Note!
If the vessel is to be emptied, a negative pump rate has to specified.
91
"crust reduction" subfunction

Specifies a range of inaccuracy (percentage of the measuring range) for the switching points. If this
value is larger then "0", the switching points are not exactly constant. Instead, they vary within the
specified range of inaccuracy.
A
E
B
E
t
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-yy-056
A: switch-on point; B: switch-off point; C: pump onD: pump off; E: inaccuracy ("crust reduction")
"switch on border"
Specifies the switch-on border for the rate control (for details see section "limit control and rate
control").
"hook up interval"
Specifies the time interval between the switching-on of the different pumps (for details see section
"limit control and rate control").
"alternate"
Determines if an alternating pump control is to be performed.
92
5.2.11 "pump M/control N (M = 1 - 6, N = 1 or 2)

(Switching behavior for rate control)
pump control RN304
switch-on delay:
backlash interval:
backlash time:
error handling:
"switch-on delay"
see page 88

see page 89
"error handling"
see page 90
93
5.3 The "pump control N" submenu - enhanced

(N = 1 or 2)
! Note!
Depending on the order code of the instrument, different functionalities can be configured for the
pump control. The order code of the instrument can be found on the nameplate and in the operating
menu at "system information/device information".
This chapter is only valid for instruments with enhanced pump control
(FMU90-*3********** and FMU90-*4**********).
For the standard pump control see chapter 5.2

(FMU90-*1********** and FMU90-*2**********).
! Note!
The "pump control N" submenus are only present if "pump control" has been selected in "device
5.3.1 Basic principles

The pump control is used to start or stop pumps depending on the measured level. Up to two pump
controls can be defined. One or more pumps can be allocated to each pump control. The pumps are
switched on and off by the relays of the Prosonic S.
The switching behavior depends on:
the selected "function"
the selected type of "load control" (only relevant for alternating pump control)
Functions "limit simple" and "limit parallel"

For these functions, a switch-on point and a switch-off point is defined for each pump. The
switching behaviour depends on the relative position of these two switching points:
a. Switch-on point > Switch-off point ("Emptying")
The pump is switched on if the level rises above the switch-on point (A). It is switched off if
the level drops below the switch-off point (B).
b. Switch-on point < Switch-off point ("Filling")
The pump is switched on if the level drops below the switch-on point (A). It is switched off if
the level rises above the switch-off point (B).
1 2
L L
A B
B A
t t
C C
D D
t t
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-yy-052
1: "Emptying" (switch-on point > switch-off point); 2: "Filling" (switch-on point < switch-off point)
94
! Note!
If several pumps are allocated to a pump control, the switching direction of all these pumps must
be the same. Mixing of "filling" and "emptying" is not allowed.
The difference between "limit simple" and "limit parallel" relates to the control of more than one
pump:
limit simple (A)
With this function, only one pump can be running at a time. Before a pump is switched on, the
previously running pump is switched off automatically. Details depend on the relative position of
the switching points, especially on the fact if the switching ranges of different pumps are
overlapping. (Refer to the example in the diagram below).
limit parallel (B)
With this function, several pumps can be switched on at the same time.
Example ("Emptying" with three pumps)
L 1 L 2
P1on P1on
P1off P2on
P2on
P2off P3on
P3on
P3off P3off,P2off, P1off
t t
on on
P1 P1
off off
t t
on on
A P2 P2
off off
t t
on on
P3 P3
off off
t t
on on
P1 P1
off
t t
on on
B P2 P2
off
t t
on on
P3 P3
off
t t
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-yy-107
A: "limit simple"; B: "limit parallel"

1: Separated switching ranges; 2: Overlapping switching ranges;
P1on, P2on, P3on: switch-on points for the pumps P1, P2 and P3
P1off, P2off, P3off: switch-off points for the pumps P1, P2 and P3
95
Function "pump rate control"

If pump rate control has been selected, there is only one switch-on point and one switch-off point,
which are valid for all relays. Additionally, a desired pump rate has to be specified.
If the level rises above (or falls below) the switch-on point, initially only one pump is switched on.
If the desired pump rate has not been achieved after the selected hook-up interval, an additional
pump is switched on. Similarly, further pumps are switched on in intervals until the desired pump
rate has been achieved.
However, if the level is already near to the switch-off point (distance < switch-on barrier), no
further pumps are swtiched on, even if the pump rate has not yet been achieved.
min
F
P1 P2 P3 B
min
P1
0 t
G
P1+P2
P1 P2 P3
D
t
E
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-yy-054
A: switch-on point; B: switch-off point; C: pump on; D: pump off; E: hook-up interval; F: switch-on barrier
G: pump rate
Alternating pump control

Optionally, a number of pumps can be allocated to the alternating pump control. In this mode, the
switching points are no longer allocated to the individual pumps. Instead, a desired degree of use
must be defined for each pump (e.g. equal usage of all pumps).
If the level rises above (or falls below) the switch-on point and a pump has to be switched on, the
Prosonic S selects the pump according to an algorithm which ensures that in the course of time the
desired degrees of use are obtained for all pumps.
The same is valid for the switching-off of pumps.
! Note!
For the limit control (simple or parallel) it can be defined for each pump individually if it is to take
part in the alternating pump control.
For pump rate control, it is only possible to allocate all pumps or no pump to the alternating pump
control.
96
5.3.2 Basic setup
Overview: Parametrization of a limit control (simple/parallel)
Step Parameter set or submenu Parameter Remarks see page
1 "relay/controls" menu 1. Select "pump control1" or "pump control 2".

2. Select "basic setup".
2 pump control N reference Select the level according to which the pumps are controlled. 99
(N = 1 or 2)
number of pumps Select the number of pumps. 99
Note: A relay must be available for each pump.
standby pump1) Define, if one of the pumps is to be a standby pump. 99
reset Restarts an existing pump control; is not used during the parametrization. 99
3 pump control N function Select "rate control". 100

(N = 1 or 2)
load control Select the type of load control (only relevant for alternating pump control) 100
4 pump control N Select a pump.

(N = 1 or 2) (Each pump must be configured individually.)
5 pump M control N switch on point Define the switch on point for this pump. 101
(M = 1 - 6)
switch off point Define the switch off point for this pump. 101
(N = 1 or 2)
switch on delay Define the switch on delay for this pump. 101
alternate Select if the pump is to take part in the alternating pump control (Default: 102
no).
degree of use Define the desired degree of use (percentage) for this pump; 102
(only relevant for alternating pump control)
max. use time Define the maximum use time for this pump 102
(only relevant for alternating pump control with "load control" =
"starts+time")
crust reduction Define the inaccuracy of the switching points (to reduce crust formation). 102
6 pump M control N backlash interval Define the backlash interval. 103

(M = 1 - 6)
backlash time Define the backlash time. 103
(N = 1 or 2)
error handling Define the error handling. 103
7 pump M control N pump feedback Select the digital input used for pump feedback. 104
(M = 1 - 6)
feedback delay Define the time interval in which a feedback is required. 104
(N = 1 or 2)
feedback meaning Define the meaning of the pump feedback. 104
8 relay allocation Allocate a relay to the pump.

9 relay N function Select "pump M/control N" 105

(N = 1 - 6)
invert Select if the switching signal is inverted (default: no) 105
configured.
1) only for instruments with external limit switches; the stand-by pump always is the last of the M pumps.
97
Overview: Parametrization of a pump rate control
1 "relay/controls" submenu Select "pump control 1" or "pump control 2".
2 pump control N reference Select the level according to which the pumps are controlled. 99
(N = 1 or 2)
number of pumps Select the number of pumps. 99
Note: A relay must be available for each pump.
standby pump1) Define, if one of the pumps is to be a standby pump. 99
reset Restarts an existing pump control; is not used during the parametrization. 99
3 pump control N function Select "rate control". 100

(N = 1 or 2)
load control Select the type of load control (only relevant for alternating pump control) 100
4 pump control N switch on point Define the switch on point. 106
(N = 1 or 2)
switch off point Define the switch off point. 106
min. pumprate/min Define the minimum pump rate. 106
crust reduction Define the inaccuracy for the switching points (to reduce crust formation). 106
switch on border Define the switch on border. 107
hook up interval Define the hook-up interval. 107
alternate Select if an alternating pump control is to be performed. 107
5 pump control N Select a pump.

(N = 1 or 2) (The following parameters must be configured for each pump individually.)
6 pumpe M control N switch on delay Define the switch on delay. 101

(M = 1 - 6)
degree of use Define the desired degree of use (percentage) for this pump; 102
(N = 1 or 2)
(only relevant for alternating pump control)
max. use time Define the maximum use time for this pump 102
(only relevant for alternating pump control with "load control" =
"starts+time")
7 pump M control N backlash interval Define the backlash interval. 103

(M = 1 - 6)
backlash time Define the backlash time. 103
(N = 1 or 2)
error handling Define the error handling. 103
8 pump M control N pump feedback Select the digital input used for pump feedback. 104
(M = 1 - 6)
feedback delay Define the time interval in which a feedback is required. 104
(N = 1 or 2)
feedback meaning Define the meaning of the pump feedback. 104
9 relay allocation Allocate a relay to the pump.

10 relay N function Select "pump M/control N". 105

(N = 1 - 6)
invert Select if the switching signal is inverted (default: no). 105
configured.
1) only for instruments with external limit switches; the stand-by pump always is the last of the M pumps.
98
"pump control N" (N = 1 or 2)
pump control R1401
reference:
number of pumps:
standby pump:
reset:
"reference"
Defines the level channel to which the pump control refers.
Selection:
none (default)
level 1
level 2 (for instrument versions with 2 level inputs)
"number of pumps"
Defines the number of pumps participating in the pump control. At the end of the configuration
procedure a relay must be allocated to each of the pumps ("relay allocation" parameter set).
Range of values : 1 ... 6 (depending on the number of relays)
Default: 1
"standby pump"
(only for instruments with external limit switches)
Determines if one of the pumps is a standby pump.
Selection:
no (default)
There is no standby pump.
yes
The last of the pumps is a standby pump. It can not be configured individually. If a failure of one
of the other pumps is reported to the Prosonic S, the standby pump substitutes for this pump.
Example:
number of pumps: 5
standby pump: yes
=> pump control for pumps 1 to 4; pump 5 is the standby pump
"reset"
This parameter is used to restart the pump control (e.g. after a failed pump has been repaired).
! Note!
The reset has the same effect as a disconnection of the supply voltage. It does not influence the
parametrization of the pump control.
Selection:
no (default)
The pump control is not reset.
yes
The pump control is reset.
99
pump control R1402

function:
load control:
"function"
Determines the type of pump control.
Selection:
limit parallel (Default)
Each pump has its own switch-on point and switch-off point. Several pumps can be running at
the same time.
limit simple
Each pump has its own switch-on point and switch-off point. Only one pump can be running at
a time.
rate control
There is only one switch-on point and one switch-off point for all pumps. If the switch-on point
has been exceeded, several pumps are switched on in intervals until the defined pumprate is
obtained. For details refer to the chapter "Limit control and rate control".
"load control"
Determines, how the load of the pumps is measured for the alternating pump control.
Selection:
in order
If a pump is to be switched on, the Prosonic S selects the pump which currently has been idle
longer than any other pump.
If a pump is to be switched off, the Prosonic S selects the pump which currently has been
running longer than any other pump.
time of use
The total running time is considered for each pump.
starts (default)
The number of starts is considered for each pump, irrespective of the time the pump has been
running after each start.
starts+time
Identical to the option "starts".
Additionally, a maximum use time is defined for each pump. After it has been running for this
time, a pump is automatically replaced by another pump.
pump control R1302

pump 1:
(pump 2:)
(pump 3:)
(pump 4:)
Determines, to which pump the following specifications refer.

Selection
depending on the selected "number of pumps"
100
"pump M/control N" (M = 1 - 6; N = 1 or 2)

(Part 1: Switching points for limit control)
pump 1/control 1 R1303
switch on point:
switch off point:
switch on delay:
crust reduction:
"switch on point"
Specifies the switch-on point of the respective pump. Use the selected level unit.
" Caution!
After a change of the "unit level" the switch-on point has to be checked and adjusted if required.
"switch off point"

Specifies the switch-off point of the respective pump. Use the selected level unit.
" Caution!
After a change of the "unit level" the switch-off point has to be checked and adjusted if required.
"switch-on delay"
Specifies the switch-on delay of the respective pump (in seconds).
When the level has risen above the switch-on point, the relay does not switch immediately but only
after the specified switch-on delay. Assign different delays to the individual pumps in order to avoid
simultaneous switching-on of several pumps (which could cause an overload of the power supply
system).
E
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-yy-055
A: switch-on point; B: switch-off point; C: pump on; D: pump off; E: switch-on delay
101
"alternate"
Specifies if the pump should be included in the alternating pump control.
Selection
no (default)
The pump is not included in the alternating pump control. Instead, it switches according to its
own switch points.
yes
The pump is included in the alternating pump control.
"degree of use"
(for "load control" = "time of use" or "starts")
Defines the desired degree of use (percentage) of this pump for an alternating pump control. The
degree of use is only obtained, if the pump has been allocated to the alternating pump control.
! Note!
The total degree of use of all pumps participating in the alternating pump control should be 100%.
"maximum use time"

(for "load control" = "starts+time)
Defines the maximum use time for this pump which is valid for the alternating pump control and
for "laod control" = "starts+time". After it has been running for this time, the pump is automatically
replaced by another pump.
"crust reduction"
Specifies a range of inaccuracy (percentage of the measuring range) for the switching points of the
pump. If this value is larger than "0", the switching points are not exactly constant. Instead, they
vary within the specified range of inaccuracy.
A
E
B
E
t
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-yy-056
A: switch-on point; B: switch-off point; C: pump on; D: pump off; E: inaccuracy ("crust reduction")
102
"pump M/control N" (M = 1 - 6, N = 1 or 2)

(Part 2: Switching behavior for limit control)
pumpM/controlN RN304
backl. interval:
backlash time:
error handling:

Use these parameters if you want to empty a vessel beyond the switch-off point in regular intervals.
The "backlash interval" determines after which time this extended pumping will occur.
The "backlash time" determines how long this additional pumping lasts.
E F
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-yy-057

E: backlash interval; F: backlash time
"error handling"
This parameter defines the reaction of the relay in the case of an error.
Selection:
hold (default)
switch on
The relay is energized (i.e. the pump is switched on).
switch off
The relay is de-energized (i.e. the pump is switched off).
actual value
ensured).
103
"pump M/control N" (M = 1 - 6, N = 1 or 2)

(Part 3: Parametrization of the associated switch inputs)
pumpM/control N R1406

pump feedback:
feedback delay:
feedback meaning:
! Note!
This parameter exists only for intruments with external limit switches.
"pump feedback"
Defines which digital input is used for pump feedback.
Selection:
disabled (default)
no feedback
ext. digin 1
terminals 71, 72, 73
ext. digin 2
ext. digin 3
ext. digin 4
"feedback delay"
Defines in which time interval after a pump start a feedback is required.
Feedback messages after this time are ignored.
Default: 30 s
! Note!
When setting the feedback delay, the startdelay of the relay (which is defined in the safety settings
menu) has to be taken into account. Depending on the number of connected pumps the feedback
delay must be at least "number of pumps x startdelay relay".
"feedback meaning"
Defines the meaning of the feedback signal.
Selection:
pump start (default)
The feedback signals the start of the pump.
If no feedback is given within the feedback delay, the standby pump is started (if one has been
defined).
pump failure
The feedback signals a failure of the pump. If a standby pump has been defined it is used to replace
the failed pump.
" Caution!
If the connected pumps are shut down as a consequence of an error message, it is advisable for
security reasons to switch off the control unit Prosonic S as well.
104
"relay allocation"
relay allocation RN305
relay 1
relay 2
relay 3
relay 4
Allocates a relay to the pump.

Selection:
"relay N" (N = 1 - 6)
relay N RN306
function:
invert:
"function"
Selection:
none (default)
pump M/control N
! Note!
If a standby pump has been parametrized: The standby pump is always the last of the pumps.
Therefore, during the relay allocation the last pump must be selected in the "function" parameter.
Example:
number of pumps: 5
stand by pump: yes
=> for the standby pump: "function" = pump 5/control N
"invert"
Selection:
no (default)
The switching behavior of the relay is not inverted. The relay is energized if the pump should be
switched on.
yes
The switching behavior of the relay is inverted. The relay is energized if the pump should be
switched off.
105

(Switching points for rate control)
pump control R13A3

switch on point:
switch off point:
min pump rate:
alternate:
"switch on point"
Specifies the switch-on point. Use the selected level unit.
" Caution!
After a change of the "unit level", the switch on point has to be checked and adjusted if required.
"switch off point"

Specifies the switch-off point. Use the selected level unit.
" Caution!
After a change of the "unit level", the switch off point has to be checked and adjusted if required.
"min pump rate"

Specifies the desired minimum pump rate (for details see section "limit control and rate control").
! Note!
If the vessel is to be emptied, a negative pump rate has to specified.
"crust reduction" subfunction

Specifies a range of inaccuracy (percentage of the measuring range) for the switching points. If this
value is larger then "0", the switching points are not exactly constant. Instead, they vary within the
specified range of inaccuracy.
A
E
B
E
t
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-yy-056
A: switch-on point; B: switch-off point; C: pump onD: pump off; E: inaccuracy ("crust reduction")
106
"switch on border"
Specifies the switch-on border for the rate control (for details see section "limit control and rate
control").
"hook up interval"
Specifies the time interval between the switching-on of the different pumps (for details see section
"limit control and rate control").
"alternate"
Determines if an alternating pump control is to be performed.
107
5.3.3 The "storm function" submenu

The storm function is used to avoid unnecessary running of the pump if the plant is flooded for a
short time (e.g. in the case of strong rainfall).
"storm function N" ( N = 1 or 2)
storm function 1 R13A3

storm function:
switch on point:
switch off point:
storm time:
"storm function"
Use this parameter to switch the storm function on and off.
Selection:
off (default)
on
"switch on point"
Defines the switch on point for the storm function. If the level rises above this value, the storm
function becomes active, i.e. all pumps are switched off.
Default: 95%
! Note!
Storm detection is not indicated by an alarm.
"switch off point"

Defines the switch off point for the storm function. If the level falls below this value, the storm
function is deactivated, i.e. the normal pump control becomes valid again.
Default: 90%
! Note!
The switch off point must always be lower than the switch on point. It must be ensured that the
switch off point is reached without the pumps (e.g. by an outlet).
"storm time"
Defines the maximum duration of a storm.
If the storm function has been activate for this time, it is automatically deactivated, even if the level
has not fallen below the switch off point or has risen above the switch on point a second time.
Default: 60 min
108
5.3.4 The "function test" submenu

The function test is used to avoid incrustations which may occur if pumps are switched off for a long
time. If a pump has not been running for a defined time (max downtime), it is automatically
switched on for a short time (max test time).
! Note!
The function test affects all pumps, even the standby pump.
"function test N" ( N = 1 or 2)
function test 1 R1602
function test:
max downtime:
switch on point:
switch off point:
"function test"
Use this parameter to switch the automatic function test on and off.
Selection:
off (default)
on
"max. downtime" und "max. test time"

These parameters define when and how long a pump is switched on for the function test:
If a pump has not been running for the "max. downtime", it is switched on (even if momentarily
other pumps are running).
It is automatically switched off after the "max test time".
Default:
max. downtime: 0h
max. test time: 60 s
"switch on point" and"switch off point"

These parameters define a condition for the function test. A pump is only switched on for the
function test, if these conditions are met. Details depend on the relative position of the switching
points:
switch on point > switch off point ("Emptying")
The function test is only performed if the level is above the switch on point.
If the level falls below the switch off point, the function test is terminated, even if the "maximum
test time" has not yet elapsed.
switch on point < switch off point ("Filling")
The function test is only performed if the level is below the switch on point.
If the level rises above the switch off point, the function test is terminated, even if the "maximum
test time" has not yet elapsed.
Default:
switch on point: 20%
switch off point: 10%
109
5.3.5 The "flush control" submenu

The flush control is used to switch a pump on for a number of cycles (flush cycles) for a defined time
(flush time). This switching-on takes place within the defined number of pump cycles. The figure
below shows an example with 5 pump cycles and 2 flush cycles. The last two of the five pump cycles
are used for flushing.
A pump cycle always starts with the first pump being switched on and ends if all pumps are switched
off again.
C D
B 1 2
A 1 2 3 4 5 1
t
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-yy-109
A: 5 pump cycles; B: 2 flush cycles; C: flush delay; D: flush time
"flush control N" ( N = 1 or 2)
flush control 1 R1603

flush control:
pump cycles:
flush cycles:
flush time:
"flush control"
Use this parameter to switch the flush control on and off.
Selection:
off (default)
on
"pump cycles"
Defines the number of pump cycles after which the flush cycles are started.
Default: 0
"flush cycles"
Defines the number of flush cycles within the number of pump cycles.
Default: 0
! Note!
The number of flush cycles must be eqal or less than the number of pump cycles.
"flush time"
Defines, how long the flush relay is switched on.
Default: 0 s
"flush delay"
Defines the interval between the start of the pump cycle and the start of the flush relay.
Default: 0 s
110
"relay allocation"
relay 1
relay 2
relay 3
relay 4
Defines which relay is the flush relay.

Selection:
All relays of the instrument version at hand.
"relay N" (N = 1 - 6)
relay N RN605
function:
invert:
"function"
Selection:
none (default)
flush control N
"invert"
Selection:
no (default)
The switching behavior of the relay is not inverted. The relay is energized in the flush cycles.
yes
The switching behavior of the relay is inverted. The relay is de-energized in the flush cycles.
111
5.3.6 The "tariff control" submenu
! Note!
The tariff control is only available for instruments with external limit switches
(FMU90-********B***).
The tariff control allows to define two different switch-on and switch-off points for each pump. An
external switch determines which of these switching points are currently valid. By connecting a
time switch to the Prosonic S this allows to use low priced tariff times preferentially for pumping.
"tariff control N" (N = 1 or 2)
tariff control 1 R1607

tariff control:
tariff input:
"tariff control"
Determines if a tariff control is to be performed.
Selection:
no (default)
yes
"tariff input"
Allocates one of the switch inputs to the tariff control.
Selection:
disabled
ext. digin 1 (terminals 71, 72, 73)
"tariff control N" (N = 1 or 2)

(pump selection)
tariff control 1 R1608

pump 1:
pump 2:
...
Select the pump for which you are going to configure the tariff control from this list.
112
"tariff ctrl N pump M" (N = 1 or 2, M = 1 - 6)
tariff ctr. 1 p1 R1608
switch on point:
switch on point:
switch off point:
switch off point:
"switch on point"
Displays the switch on point which is valid as long as no signal is present at the tariff switch input.
(Is equal to the switch-on point defined in the basic setup.)
"switch on point tariff"

Defines the switch of point which is valid if a signal is present at the tariff switch input.
"switch off point"

Displays the switch off point which is valid as long as no signal is present at the tariff switch input.
(Is equal to the switch-off point defined in the basic setup.)
"switch off point tariff

Defines the switch off point which is valid if a signal is present at the tariff switch input.
! Note!
By selecting appropriate tariff switch points preferential pumping during the low-price tariff times
can be achieved.
Example for emptying:
The switch points for tariff control are considerably below those of the basic setup. This results in a
preferred pumping and emptying of the vessel during the low-price tariff time. During the high price
tariff time on the other hand, as much water as possible is buffered in the vessel.
113
5.3.7 The "pump data" submenu

The most important operating data of the pumps can be displayed in this submenu.
"pump data N" (N = 1 or 2)

(pump selection)
pump data 1 R1610

pump 1:
pump 2:
...
Select a pump from this list. The operating data of this pump will be displayed in the following
parameter set.
"pump data N" (N = 1 or 2)
pump data 1 p 1 R1611

operating hours:
reset operating hours:
total op. hours:
number of starts:
! Note!
All pump data displayed in this parameter set are affected by a reset of the Prosonic S.
"operating hours"
Indicates how long the pump has been running since the last reset.
"reset operating hours"

Resets the "operating hours" to 0.
Selection:
no
"operating hours" keeps its value.
yes
"operating hours" is reset to 0.
"total operating hours"

Indicates the total time the pump has been running since commissioning. This value can not be
reset.
"number of starts"
Indicates the number of times the pump has been started.
"starts per hour"

Indicates the average number of starts per hour.
"backlash starts"
Indicates the number of times the backlash time has been active for this pump.
114
reset backlash starts

Resets the number of backlash starts to 0.
Selection:
no
"backlash starts" keeps its value.
yes
"backlash starts" is reset to 0.
last run time

Indicates how long the pump has been running since the last switch-on.
115
5.3.8 The "operating hours alarm" submenu

A maximum run time can be defined for each pump. The operating hours alarm becomes active as
soon as this run time is exceeded.
"operating hours alarm N" (N = 1 or 2)
op.hours alarm1 R1612

op.hours alarm:
alarm delay:
"operating hours alarm"

Use this parameter to switch the operating hours control on and off.
Selection:
off (default)
on
"alarm delay"
Defines the delay for the operating hours alarm. This delay is the same for all pumps.
Default: 0s.
"operating hours alarm N" (N = 1 or 2)

(pump selection)
op.hours alarm 1 R1613

pump 1:
pump 2:
...
Select the pump for which you are going to configure the operating hours alarm.
"operating hours N pump M" (N = 1 or 2, M = 1 - 6)
op.hours alarm1 p1 R1613

operating hours:
max. op. hours:
"operating hours"
Indicates how long the pump has been running since the last reset.
"maximum operating hours"

Defines the maximum running time of the pump. The operating hours alarm becomes active as soon
as "operating hours" exceeds this value.
Default: 10000 h
116
! Note!
The alarm is deactivated by a reset of the operating hours in the "pump data" submenu (e.g. after
the maintenance of the pump has been completed).
"relay allocation"
relay 1
relay 2
relay 3
relay 4
Defines a relay which is associated with the operating hours alarm.

Selection:
! Note!
The relay is not allocated to a specific pump. It only indicates that the operating hours alarm is active
for one of the pumps. At the same time an error message is generated which states the number of
the affected pump.
"relay N" (N = 1 - 6)
relay N RN615
function:
invert:
"function"
Selection:
none (default)
Operating hours alarm N (N = 1 or 2)
"invert"
Selection:
no (default)
The switching behavior of the relay is not inverted. The relay is de-energized if an operating hours
alarm is active.
yes
The switching behavior of the relay is inverted. The relay is energized if an operating hours alarm
is active.
117
5.3.9 The "pump alarm" submenu
! Note!
This submenu is only available for instruments with external switches
(FMU90-********B***).
The pump alarm is used to indicate a pump failure by one of the relays. This is only possible if a
pump monitoring system is connected to one of the switch inputs and if "pump feedback" has been
parametrized in the "basic setup" submenu.
"pump alarm N" (N = 1 or 2)
pump alarm1 R1617

pump alarm:
waiting time:
"pump alarm"
Use this parameter to switch the pump alarm function on and off.
Selection:
off (default)
on
"waiting time"
Defines the waiting time for the pump alarm. It is the same for all pumps.
Default: 0s.
"relay allocation"

relay 1
relay 2
relay 3
relay 4
Defines which relay is used to indictate a pump alarm.

Selection:
! Note!
The relay is not allocated to a specific pump. It only indicates that one of the pumps has generated
an alarm. At the same time an error message is generated which states the number of the affected
pump.
118
5.4 The "rake control" submenu

! Note!
The "rake control" submenus is only present if "rake control" has been selected in "device
5.4.1 Basics
In order to detect clogging of a rake, the Prosonic S measures the upstream level L1 and the
downstream level L2. Rake clogging causes L2 to become much lower than L1. Therefore, the rake
control function evaluates either the difference L1 - L2 or the ratio L2/L1.
L1
L2
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-yy-058
Rake clogging is indicated by a relay, which can be used, for example, to trigger a rake cleaning
device.
5.4.2 Overview
1 "relay/controls" menu Select "rake control"

2 rake control upstream water Select the upstream water level signal (L1) 5.4.3
downstream water Select the downstream water level signal (L2)
function Select the criterion for rake clogging:

difference: L1 - L2
ratio: L2/L1
3 rake control switch on point Define the switch on point 5.4.4
switch off point Define the switch off point

4 rake control switch delay Define the switch delay. 5.4.5
error handling Define the error handling
5 relay allocation Select the relay for rake control 5.4.6
6 relay N function Select "rake control" 5.4.7

(N = 1 - 6)
invert Select if the switching delay is to be inverted (default: no)
! Note!
In the "output/calculations" and "calibrate display" menus it is possible to define that the difference
L1-L2 or the ratio L2/L1 is displayed by the analog output and/or the display.
119
5.4.3 "rake control"

(Part 1: Allocation)
rake control R1200

upstream water:
downstream water:
function:
"upstream water"
Specifies, which signal refers to the upstream level.
Selection:
level 1 (default)
level 2
"downstream water"
Specifies, which signal refers to the downstream level.
Selection:
level 1
level 2 (default)
"function"
Used to select the criterion for the detection of rake clogging.
Selection:
difference (default)
Rake clogging is indicated if the difference L1 - L2 exceeds a critical value.
ratio
Rake clogging is indicated if the ratio L2/L1 falls below a critical value.

(Part 2: Switching points)
rake control R1201

switch on point:
switch off point:
"switch on point" and "switch off point"

Used to specify the limit values for detection of rake clogging. The meaning of these limit values
depends on the selected function.
" Caution!
After a change of the "unit level" the switching points have to be checked an adjusted if required.
function = "difference"
In this case, the switch on and switch off points have to be specified in the level unit. The switch
on point must be larger than the switch off point.
The rake control relay is energized if the difference L1 - L2 rises above the switch on point. It is de-
energized if the difference falls below the switch off point.
120
L1
L2
L1 - L2
D
t
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-yy-059
A: switch on point; B: switch off point;

C: relay energized (i.e. rake cleaning on); D: relay de-energized (i.e. rake cleaning off)
121
function = "ratio"
In this case, the switch on and switch off points are numbers between 0 and 1. The switch on point
must be smaller than the switch off point.
The rake control relay is energized if the ratio L2/L1 falls below the switch on point. It is de-
energized if the ratio rises above the switch off point.
L1
L2
L2/L1
D
t
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-yy-060
A: switch on point; B: switch off point;

C: relay energized (i.e. rake cleaning on); D: relay de-energized (i.e. rake cleaning off)

(Part 3: Switching parameters)
rake control R1202

switch delay:
error handling:
"switch delay"
Specifies the switch delay for the rake control.
The relay does not switch immediately after the switch on point has been exceeded but only after
the specified switch delay. This is to prevent that random fluctuations of L1 or L2 activate the rake
cleaning unnecessarily.
"error handling"
Specifies the behavior of the rake control relay in case of an error.
122
Selection:
actual value (default)
ensured).
hold
switch on
The relay is energized.
switch off
The relay is de-energized.
relay 1
relay 2
relay 3
relay 4
Allocates a relay to the rake control function.

Selection:
5.4.7 "relay N" (N = 1 ... 6)
relay 2 R2306
function:
invert:
"function" parameter
The relay function is defined by this parameter.
Selection:
none (default)
rake control
"invert" parameter
In this parameter, specify if the switching behaviour of the relay is to be inverted.
Selection:
no (default)
The switching behaviour of the relay is not inverted. The relay is energized if the rake cleaning
should be active.
yes
The switching behaviour of the relay is inverted. The relay is energized if the rake cleaning should
be inactive.
123
5.5 The "relay simulation" submenu
5.5.1 "relay simulation"
relay simulation RX120 In this list, select the relay you are going to simulate.

relay 1
relay 2
relay 3
relay 4
5.5.2 "relay N" (N = 1 - 6)
relay 2 R2106

simulation:
simulation value:
"simulation"
Used to switch the simulation on and off.
Selection:
on (default)
off
"simulation value"
(only available if the simulation is switched on)
Use this parameter to define the switching state of the relay.
Selection:
switch off (default)
switch on
124
The "output/calculations" menu (for HART instruments)
6 The "output/calculations" menu (for HART

instruments)
main menu CX001
output/calculat
device properties
system informat.
The "output/calculations" menu can be used to

configure calculations such as averaging and subtraction
configure the current outputs and the HART interface.
After entering the "output/calculations" menu, a selection screen appears in which you must choose
the output you are going to configure.
output/calculat OX001
current output 1
(current output 2)
After this selection, additional submenus appear, which can be used to configure the output:
current output 1 O1302
allocat./calculat
extended calibr.
HART settings
simulation
125
6.1 The "allocation/calculations" submenu
6.1.1 "allocation current N " (N = 1 or 2)
allocat. curr. 1 O1201

output:
output current:
"output"
Allocates a measured or calculated value to the current output.
Selection:
The available options depend on the instrument version, the connected sensors and the instrument
configuration. The following measured and calculated values may occur:
level 1
level 2
flow 1
flow 2
average level: (level1 + level2)/2
level 1-2
level 2-1
level 1+2
average flow
flow 1-2
flow 2-1
flow 1+2
backwater ratio
downstream/upstream
rake control ratio
downstream/upstream
"output current"
Displays the output current (mA).
126
6.2 The "extended calibration" submenu
6.2.1 "mode current N" (N = 1 or 2)
mode current 1 OX202
current span:
output damping:
4mA threshold:
curr. turn down:
"current span"
Used to select the current span to which the measuring range is mapped.
Selection:
4-20 mA (default)
The measuring range (0%-100%) is mapped to the current range 4-20 mA.
0-20 mA
The measuring range (0%-100%) is mapped to the current range 0-20 mA.
fixed current HART
A fixed current is output. The value can be defined in the "mA value" parameter. The measured
value is transmitted by the HART signal.
[mA] [mA] [mA]

20 20 20
4
3.6
0 0
-10 0 100 [%, ...] 0 100 [%...] 0 100 [%...]
A B C
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-yy-066
A: current span = 4-20 mA; B: current span = 0-20 mA; C: current span = fixed current HART;
D: mA value
"mA value" (only available for "current span" = "fixed current HART")
Specifies the value of the fixed current.
range of values: 3,6 - 22 mA
default: 4 mA
127
"output damping"
Specifies the output damping by which changes of the measured value are attenuated.
After a surge in the level it takes 5 x until the new measured value is reached.
range of values: in preparation
default: 0 s
L
1
5xt t
L00-FMG60xxx-05-00-00-xx-012
1: measured value; 2: output current
"4 mA threshold" (only available for "current span" = "4-20mA")

Used to switch on the 4mA threshold. The 4-mA threshold makes sure that the current never falls
below 4 mA, even if the measured value is negative.
Selection:
off (default)
The threshold is switched off. Currents less than 4 mA may occur.
on
The threshold is switched on. The current never falls below 4 mA.
[mA] [mA]
20 20
A B
4 4
3.6 3.6
MIN 0 100 [%, ...] MIN 0 100 [%, ...]

L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-yy-067
A: 4mA threshold off; B: 4mA threshold on
128
"current turn down" (not present for "current span" = "fixed current HART")
Used to map only a part of the measuring range to the current output. The selected part is enlarged
by this mapping.
"turn down 0/4 mA" (only for "current turn down" = "on")
Specifies the measured value for which the current is 0 or 4 mA (depending on the selected current
span).
"turn down 20 mA" (only for "current turn down" = "on")

Specifies the measured value for which the current is 20 mA.
[mA]
20
0 A B 100 [%, ...]

L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-yy-068
A: turn down 4mA ; B: turn down 20 mA
129
6.3 "HART settings" submenu

(only for current output 1)
6.3.1 "HART settings"
HART settings O1203

HART address:
no. of preambles:
short TAG HART:
"HART address"
Defines the communication address for the instrument.
Range of values:
for standard operation: 0 (default)
for multidrop operation: 1 - 15
! Note!
In multidrop operation, the ouptput current is 4 mA by default. However, it can be adjusted in the
"mA value" parameter of the "mode current" parameter set (see above).
"no. of preambles"
Specifies the number of preambles for the HART protocol. For lines with communication problems
a slight increase of this value is recommended.
"short TAG HART"

in preparation
130
6.3.2 "additional HART value 2/3/4"
add. HART value2 O2205
measured value 2:
output 2:
output damping:
Use these parameter sets to configure the additional values transmitted by the HART protocol:
measured value 2
measured value 3
measured value 4
The parameters are the same for all three measured values.
! Note!
"measured value 1" is identical to the main value, which is linked to current output 1.
"measured value 2/3/4"

Specifies which measured value is transmitted.
Selection:
The selection depends on the instrument version, the connected sensors and the configuration. The
following options may occur:
none (default)
level 1/2
flow 1/2
average level
level 1-2 / 2-1 / 1+2
rake control ratio
backwater ratio
temperature external sensor
temperature sensor 1/2
counter 1/2/3
totalizer 1/2/3
average flow
flow 1-2 / 2-1 / 1+2
distance sensor 1/2
! Note!
If "temperature sensor 1/2" is selected, it always refers to the temperature which has been assigned
to the repsective sensor in "sensor management/FDU sensor N". Possible temperatures are:
sensor temperature
average of sensor temperature and temperature of an external temperature sensor
temperature of an external temperature sensor
"output damping 2/3/4"

Specifies the output damping by which a change of the measured value is attenuated.
After a surge of the measured value it takes 5 x till the HART value has adopted the new value.
range of values: in preparation
default: 0 s
131
L
1
5xt t
L00-FMG60xxx-05-00-00-xx-012
1: measured value; 2: HART output value
6.4 "Simulation" submenu
6.4.1 "simulation"
simulation O1204

simulation:
simulation value:
"simulation"
Used to switch on the simulation of the current.
Selection:
off (default)
No simulation is performed. The instrument is in the measuring mode.
on
The instrument is in the simulation mode. No measured value is transmitted to the output.
Instead, the current output assumes the value specified in the "simulation value" subfunction.
"simulation value" (only for "simulation" = "on")

Specifies the value of the simulated output current (in mA).
132
The "output/calculations" menu (for Profibus DP instruments)

Profibus DP instruments)
main menu CX001
output calculat.
device properties
system information
The "output/calculations" menu is used to configure the Analog Input blocks (AI) and the Digital
Input blocks (DI). These blocks transfer analog or digital values to a SPS.
7.1 "analog input" (AI)
output/calculat. 01000
analog input
digital input
Profibus DP
7.1.1 "output/calculations"
output calculat. 0XA01
analog input 1
analog input 2
analog input 3
analog input 4
Use this list to select the AI block you are going to configure.
7.1.2 "analog input N" (N = 1 - 10)
analog input 1 01A02
measured value 1:
value:
status:
"measured value N" (N = 1 - 10)

Use this parameter to select the measured or calculated variable which is transferred by the AI block.
"value"
Displays the current value of the measured or calculated variable.
"status"
Displays the status which is transferred with the measured value.
133
7.2 "digital input" (DI)

analog input
digital input
Profibus DP
7.2.1 "output calculations"
output/calculat. 0XB01

digital input 1
digital input 2
digital input 3
digital input 4
Use this list to select the DI block you are going to configure.
7.2.2 "digital input N" (N = 1 - 10)
digital input 1 O1B03

allocation:
value:
status:
"allocation"
Use this parameter to select a switching state. Occurrence of this state will be indicated by the DI
block.
Selection
relay
The DI block is connected to one of the relays of the instrument. After selection of this option,
the "relay" function appears, where you can select one of the relays.
pump control N (N = 1 or 2)
is only available if a pump control has been configured. After selection of this option, an additional
selection list appears which is used to allocate the DI block to one of the pump relays.
rake control
is only available if a rake control has been configured. After selection of this option, an additional
selection list appears, which is used to allocate the DI block to the rake control relay.
none
No value is transferred via the DI block.
"value"
Displays the current switching state of the selected relay.
"status"
Displays the status which is transferred with the binary value.
134
7.3 "Profibus DP"
analog input
digital input
Profibus DP
This submenu is used to configure the general properties of the Profibus DP interface.
7.3.1 "Profibus DP"
Profibus DP O1C01
profile version:
instrument addr.:
ident number:
"profile version"
Displays the version of the Profibus profiles used.
"instrument address"
Displays the instrument address.
! Note!
There are two options for setting the instrument address:
by the DIP switches in the terminal compartment
by a configuration tool (e.g. FieldCare)
"ident number"
Defines the ident number of the instrument.
Selection:
profile
The ident number of the profibus profiles is used.
manufacturer (default)
The ident number of the instrument specific GSD files is used.
135
The "device properties" menu
8 The "device properties" menu
8.1 The "operating parameters" submenu
8.1.1 "distance unit"
distance unit D1101

distance unit:
Defines the distance unit.

Selection:
m (default)
ft
mm
inch
8.1.2 "temperature unit"
temperature unit D110B

temperature unit:
Defines the temperature unit.

Selection:
C (default)
F
8.1.3 "operating mode"
operating mode D110C

operating mode:
Use this parameter to select the operating mode. The available selection depends on the instrument
version.
Selection:
level
level + flow15)
flow15
flow + backwater15,16)
15) only for instruments with flow measurement software (FMU90 - *2********** and FMU90-*4**********)
16) only for instruments with 2 sensor inputs
136
8.1.4 "controls"
controls D110D
controls:
(only available for the "level" and "level + flow" operating modes)
Use this parameter to specify which controls the Prosonic S is to perform.
Selection:
no (default)
pump control
rake control
8.2 The "tag marking" submenu
8.2.1 "tag marking"
tag marking D1102
output 1:
output 2:
device marking:
"output N" (N = 1 or 2) (only for HART instruments)

Use these parameters to define a tag (designation) for the current output. The tag may consist of up
to 16 alphanumeric characters.
"device marking"
Use this parameter to define a tag (designation) for the entire instrument. The tag may consist of up
to 16 alphanumeric characters.
137
8.3 The "language" submenu
8.3.1 "language"
language D1103

langauge:
Defines the language for the display module. The feature "language" of the procduct structure deter-
mines which languages are available:
"language" = 1:
Deutsch
English
Nederlands
Franais
Espaol
Italiano
Nederlands
Portuguese
"language" = 2:
English
Russian
Polish
Czech
"language" = 3:
English
Chinese
Japanese
Korean
Thai
Bahasa (Indonesia, Malaysia)
138
8.4 The "password/reset" submenu"
8.4.1 "password/reset"
password/reset D1104
reset:
code:
status:
"reset"
Enter the reset code into this parameter in order to reset all parameters to their default values.
Reset Code
HART: 333
Profibus DP: 33333
! Note!
The default values of all parameters are printed in bold in the menu diagrams at the end of this
document.
The linearisation type is set to "none". However, the linearisation table (if present) is not deleted.
If required, it can be reactivated at a later point of time
"code"
This parameter is used to lock the instrument against unauthorized or unintentional changes.
Enter a number other than the release code in order to lock the instrument. Parameters can no
longer be changed.
Enter the release code in order to unlock the instrument. Parameters can be changed again.
Release code
HART: 100
Profibus DP: 2457
"status"
Displays the current locking state of the instrument. The following states may occur:
unlocked
All parameters (except of service parameters) can be changed.
code locked
The instrument has been locked via the operating menu. It can be unlocked by entering the
release code into the "code" parameter.
key locked
The key has been locked by a key combination. It can only be unlocked by pressing all three keys
simultaneously.
switch locked
The instrument has been locked by the switch in the terminal compartment. It can only be
unlocked by this switch.
139
The "system information" menu
9 The "system information" menu
9.1 The "device information" submenu
9.1.1 "device family"
device family IX101

device family:
"device family"
Displays the device family.
9.1.2 "device name"
device IX102

device name:
"device name"
Displays the device name.
9.1.3 "order code"
order code IX103

order code:
"order code"
Displays the order code of the instrument.
9.1.4 "serial number"
serial no. IX105

serial no.:
140
"serial no."
Displays the serial number of the instrument.
9.1.5 "software version"
software version IX106
software version:
"software version"
Displays the software version of the instrument.
9.1.6 "device version"
dev. version IX107
dev. rev.:
"dev. rev."
Displays the device revision.
9.1.7 "DD version"
DD version IX108
DD version:
"DD version"
Displays the DD version which is required to operate the instrument by the ToF Tool.
141
9.2 The "in/output info" submenu17)
9.2.1 "level (LVL) N" (N = 1 or 2)
level (LVL) 1 IX107

input:
sensor selection:
detected:
"input"
Indicates, which sensor input is connected to the level channel.
"sensor selection"
Displays the type of the connected sensor. For the sensors FDU9x, "automatic" is displayed, as these
sensors are automatically detected by the transmitter (They have not to be spedified by the user.)
"detected"
(only for "sensor selection" = automatic")
Displays the type of the automatically detected sensor.
9.2.2 "flow N" (N = 1 or 2)
flow 1 IX109

input:
sensor selection:
detected:
"input"
Indicates, which sensor input is connected to the flow channel.
"sensor selection"
Displays the type of the connected sensor. For the sensors FDU9x, "automatic" is displayed, as these
sensors are automatically detected by the transmitter (They have not to be spedified by the user.)
"detected"
(only for "sensor selection" = automatic")
Displays the type of the automatically detected sensor.
17) This submenu can be accessed only by the display module (not by an operating software).
142
9.2.3 "current output N" (N = 1 or 2) (for HART instruments only)
current output 1 IX10A
output:
"output"
Displays the present value of the output current.
9.2.4 "relay N" (N = 1 ... 6)
relay 1 IX10B
function:
"function"
Indicates, which function has been allocated to the relay.
143
9.3 The "trend display" submenu18) (for HART

instruments only)
Use this submenu to plot the temporal change of an output value.
9.3.1 "trend display" (for HART instruments only)
trend display IX10E From this list, select the output you are going to plot.

trend output 1:
trend output 2:
9.3.2 "trend output N" (N = 1 or 2) (for HART instruments only)
trend output 1 IX10F

time interval:
"time interval"
Use this parameter to specify the time interval for the plot.
9.3.3 "trend output N" (N = 1 or 2) (for HART instruments only)
trend output 1 IX10G A plot of the trend is shown on this screen.

In order to exit the display, press the left and middle key
simultaneously (ESC).
18) This submenu can be accessed only by the display module (not by an operating software).
144
9.4 The "min/max values" submenu

Use this submenu to display the minimum and maximum values a certain parameter has reached
during the measurement (drag indicator functionality).
(4)
(1)
(3) x
(2)
(2)
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-yy-074
(1): max value; (2): min value; (3): measured value; (4): reset
9.4.1 "min/max values"
min/max values IX300 From this list, select a quantity (level, flow or temperature) for the
level display of the min/max values.

flow
temperature
9.4.2 "level", "flow" or "temperature"
level IX301 From this list, select the level, flow or temperture channel for the
level (LVL) 1 display of the min/max values.

level (LVL) 2
145
9.4.3 "level (LVL) N", "flow N" or "temperaturs sen. N"

(N = 1 or 2)
level (LVL) 1 IX302

max. value:
min. value:
reset:
"max. value"
Displays the maximum value which has been reached by the selected parameter.
"min. value"
Displays the minimum value which has been reached by the selected parameter.
"reset"
Use this parameter to reset the min and max drag indicators.
Selection:
keep (default)
The drag indicators are not reset.
erase
The minimum and maximum values are reset, i.e. they assume the current value of the respective
parameter.
reset min.
The minimum value is reset, i.e. it assumes the current value of the respective parameter. The
maximum value is not reset.
reset max.
The maximum value is reset, i.e. it assumes the current value of the respective parameter. The
minimum value is not reset.
! Note!
The min/max values of the sensor temperature can only be reset by the Endress+Hauser service.
The min/max values of the temperature always refer to the internal temperature probe of the
ultrasonic sensors FDU8x/FDU9x.
146
9.5 The "envelope curve" submenu

This submenu can be used to display the envelope curve of the connected sensor on the display
module.
9.5.1 "envelope curve"
envelope curve IX126 In this list, select a sensor for the envelope curve display.
en. curve sen. 1

en. curve sen. 2
9.5.2 "Plot settings"

(Part 1: curve selection)
Plot settings IX127
Envelope curve
Env.curve+FAC
Env.curve+cust.map
In this list, select which curves are to be displayed.

Selection:
Envelop curve (default)
Env. curve + FAC
Envelope curve + customer map
9.5.3 "Plot settings"

(Part 2: single curve <-> cyclic change)
Plot settings IX128
single curve
cyclic
In this list, select the type of plotting.

Selection:
single curve (default)
The envelope curve is plotted once.
cyclic
The envelope curve display is updated in regular intervals.
! Note!
If the cyclical envelope curve display is still active on the display, the measured value is updated at
a slower cycle time. We therefore advise you to exit the envelope curve display after optimising the
measuring point.
147
9.5.4 "envelope curve"
envelope curve IX128 The envelope curve is displayed in this screen.

In order to exit the display, press the left and middle key
simultaneously (ESC).
9.6 The "error list" submenu
9.6.1 "error list"
error list E1000 From this list, select if the currently active errors or the previous

actual error errors are to be displayed.
last error
9.6.2 "actual error"
actual error E1002

1:
2:
3:
4:
A list of the currently active errors is displayed in this screen. Select an error to get an error
description. By pressing the left and middle key simultaneously you can return from the error
description to the error list.
9.6.3 "last error"
last error E1003

1:
2:
3:
4:
A list of the previously rectifed errors is displayed in this screen. Select an error to get an error
description. By pressing the left and middle key simultaneously you can return from the error
description to the error list.
148
9.7 The "diagnsotics" submenu
9.7.1 "operating hours"
operating hours E1403
operating hours:
"operating hours"
Indicates, how long the instrument has been in operation.
9.7.2 "actual distance"
actual distance E1404
act. distance 1:
act. distance 2:
"act. distance N" (N = 1 or 2)

Displays the currently measured distance (between the sensor membrane and the product surface).
9.7.3 "actual measured value"
act. mes. value E1405
level 1:
flow 1:
level 2:
flow 2:
Displays the currently measured level or (if a linearisation has been performed) the currently
measured volume of the respective channel.
"flow N" (N = 1 or 2)
Displays the currently measured flow of the respective channel.
149
9.7.4 "application parameter"
appl. parameter E1405

sensor 1:
sensor 2:
"sensor N" (N = 1 or 2)
Indicates if a setting which depends on the application parameters ("tank shape", "medium
property", "process condition") has been changed after the setting of the application parameters in
the service menu.
9.7.5 "echo quality sensor"
echo quality sen. E1406

echo quality 1:
echo quality 2:
"echo quality N" (N = 1 or 2)

Displays the echo quality of the respective sensor.
The echo quality is the distance (in dB) between the level echo and the Floating Average Curve
(FAC).
150
The "display" menu
10 The "display" menu
10.1 "display"
calibr. display DX202
type:
time:
value 1:
cust. text 1:
"type"
Use this parameter to select the format of the measured value display.
Selection:
1x value+bargraph (default for instruments with 1 current output)
2x value+bargraph (default for instruments with 2 current outputs)
value max. size

Up to two values are displayed alternately using the entire display:
alter 3x2 values

Up to 6 values can be displayed on three alternating pages. Each pages contains two values.
151
The "display" menu
"time"
This parameter is used for the options "value max. size" and "alter 3x2 values". It specifies the time
after which the next page appears.
! Note!
To change to the next page immediately, press .
"value 1" ... "value 6"

Use these parameters to allocate a measured or calculated value to each of the display values. The
selection depends on the instrument version and installation environment.
! Note!
If "temp. sensor 1/2" is selected, depending on the setting in "sensor management/FDU sensor N"
one of the following is displayed:
the sensor temperature
the average of the sensor temperature and the temperature of the external temperature probe
the temperature of the external temperature probe
"cust. text 1" ... "cust. text 6"

These parameters can be used to allocate a text string to each of the display values. This text is
displayed together with the value if "customized text" (in the "display format" parameter set) has
been set to "yes".
10.2 "display format"
display format DX201

format:
no. of decimals:
sep. character:
customized text:
"format"
Use this parameter to select the display format for numbers.
Selection:
decimal (Default)
ft-in-1/16"
"no. of decimals"
Use this parameter to select the number of decimals for the representation of numbers.
Selection:
x
x.x
x.xx (Default)
x.xxx
"sep. character"
Use this parameter to select the separation character for the representation of decimal numbers.
Selection:
point (.) (Default)
comma (,)
"customized text"
152
The "display" menu
Determines if "text 1" to "text 6" from the "calibration display" parameter set are displayed.
Selection:
no (Default)
yes
10.3 "back to home"
back to home DX200
back to home:
"back to home"
Use this parameter to specify the return time. If no entry is made during the specified time, the
display returns to the measured value display.
Range of values: 3 ... 9999 s
Default: 100 s
153
The "sensor management" menu
11 The "sensor management" menu
11.1 The "sensor management" submenu
input DX019

FDU sensor 1:
(FDU sensor 2:)
Upon entering this menu, a selection list appears, from which you can select a sensor for
parametrization.
11.1.1 "US sensor N" (N = 1 or 2)

(sensor settings)
US sensor 1 D1106

sensor operation:
sensor priority:
detected:
sensor selection:
"sensor operation"
This parameter is used to switch the sensor on and off.
Selection:
on (default)
The sensor is switched on.
hold
The sensor is switched off. The last measured value is held.
off
The sensor is switched off. No measured value is transmitted.
On the display, connected values are set to "-----------".
154
"sensor priority" (only for 2-channel instruments)

This parameter is used to define the sensor priority. A sensor with high priority sends pulses more
often than a sensor with low priority.
Example
(S1) (S2)
S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 A:
priority sensor 1: 1
S1 S2 priority sensor 2: 1
A
1 1 both sensors send the same
number of pulses
t
S1 S1 S1 S2 S1 S1 S1 S2 S1 B:
priority sensor 1: 1
S1 S2
B priority sensor 2: 3
1 3
Sensor 1 sends three pusles.
Then, sensor 2 send one pulse.
t
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-yy-073
"detected" (only available for automatic sensor detection)

"sensor selection"
! Note!
For the sensors FDU9x the option "automatic" is recommended (default setting). With this setting
the Prosonic S recognizes the type of sensor automatically.
For the sensors FDU8x the type has to be assigned explicitly. The automatic sensor recognition
" Caution!
The automatic sensor recognition is also active after a sensor has been exchanged19). The Prosonic S
recognizes the type of the new sensor automatically and changes the "detected" parameter if
required. The measurement continues without a break.
Check the "empty calibration" and "full calibration" parameters. Adjust these values if
required. Take into account the blocking distance of the new sensor.
Go to the "distance correction" parameter set and check the displayed distance. If required,
19) if the new sensor is of the type FDU9x
155
"detection window"
Is used to switch the detection window on and off and to reset an existing detection window.
If this function is switched on, a window is defined surrounding the current level echo (typical
width: 1 to 2.5 m; depending on the application parameters).
The window always moves togehter with a rising or falling echo.
Echos beyond the limits of the window are ignored for a certain time.
! Note!
This parameter is set automatically according to the application parameters.
Selection:
off
on
reset
After selection of this option, the current window is reset, the level echo is looked for in the
complete measuring range and a new window is defined surrounding the current level echo.
156
11.1.2 "US sensor N" (N = 1 or 2)

(allocation of external inputs)
US sensor 1 D1107
temp. measurement:
ext. sens. ctrl.:
input:
distance:
! Note!
This submenu is only available for instruments with external inputs
(FMU90-********B***).
"temperature measurement"
Defines which temperature sensor is used for time-of-flight correction.
Selection:
US sensor (default)
The integrated temperature probe of the ultrasonic sensor is used.
external temperature
The external temperature probe is used (terminals 83 - 85).
average US sens/ext.
The average temperature of the integrated and the external probe is used.
"external sensor control"

Determines if (and how) the sensor is controlled by an external switch.
Selection:
off (default)
The sensor is not controlled by an external switch.
hold
If the external switch sends a signal, the current measured value is held.
value
If the external switch sends a signal, the distance assumes an user defined value (see the
"distance" parameter).
! Note!
This parameter can be used to influence the measuring function of the instrument by an external
signal, e.g. in order to synchronize the measurement with very slow agitators.
! Note!
If additionally a level limitation has been defined, the upper and lower limits are defined by this
limitation even if the external input gives a signal.
The external sensor control is disabled if one of the following functions has been configured:
"level (LVL) N/extended calibration/LVL N ext. input M" (N,M = 1 or 2)
"flow N/extended calibration/flow N ext. input M" (N,M = 1 or 2)
"backwater/extended calibration/backwater ext. input M" (M = 1 or 2)
"input"
Determines which external switch input is used for the sensor control.
Selection:
disabled (default)
157
"distance" (only for "external sensor control" = "value")

Defines the distance value if an signal is active at the external switch input.
158
11.2 The "external temperature sensor" submenu

! Note!
This submenu is only available for instruments with external temperature input
(FMU90-********B***).
11.2.1 "external temperature sensor"

(parametrization)
ext.temp. sensor D1020
sensor type:
temperature unit:
"sensor type"
Defines the type of the connected sensor.
Selection:
no sensor (default)
FMT131
PT100
"temperature unit"
Displays the temperature unit.
! Note!
The temperature unit can be changed in "device properties/operating parameters/temperature
unit".

(index pointer)
ext.temp. sensor D1021
max. value:
min. value:
actual value:
reset:
"max. value"
Displays the highest temperature which has been reached until now.
"min. value"
Displays the lowest temperature which has been reached until now.
"actual value"
Displays the currently measured temperature.
159
"reset"
Is used to reset the index pointers for the external temperature sensor.
Selection:
keep (default)
The index pointers are not reset.
delete
Both index pointers are reset to the current temperature.
reset min.
"min. value" is reset to the current temperature.
"max. value" keeps its value.
reset max.
"max. value" is reset to the current temperature.
"min. value" keeps its value.

(error handling)
ext.tem. sensor D1022

error handling:
value at warning:
"error handling"
Determines the reaction of the Prosonic S in the case of a failure of the external temperature sensor.
Selection:
alarm (default)
An error message is generated.
The output signal assumes a defined value ("output on alarm" in the "safety settings" menu).
warning
An error message is generated, but the measurement continues.
The signal evaluation algorithm uses the temperature as defined in "value at warning".
"value at warning"
Defines the temperature which is used for signal evaluation in the case of a failure of the
temperature sensor (only valid for "error handling" = "warning").
160
11.3 The "external digin" submenu
external digin DX019
external digin 1:
external digin 2:
external digin 3:
external digin 4:
! Note!
This submenu is only available for instruments with external switches
(FMU90-********B***).
After entering this submenu, select the external switch input you are going to configure.
11.3.1 "external digin N" (N = 1 - 4)
external digin 1 D1025
invert:
value:
"invert"
Determines if the switching behavior of the input (open - closed) is inverted.
Selection:
no (default)
The Prosonic S detects a closed switch (from 0 to 1).
yes
The Prosonic S detects an open switch (from 1 to 0).
! Note!
The switching states can be realized in the following way:
0: voltage 8V at the input, or + and not interconnected
1: voltage 16 V at the input, or + and interconnected
"value"
Indicates the current switching state of the external input ("0" or "1").
161
Operating menu
12 Operating menu
12.1 "Level"
main menu
LX001 ESC ESC ESC ESC ESC
level
level

L1002
level (LVL) 1
level (LVL) 1
level (LVL) 2 L1003 L1004 L1005 L1006
basic setup
LVL1 sensor sel. LVL1 appl. para. LVL1 empty cal. LVL1 full calib.
input: tank shape: empty E: full F:
sensor 1 dome ceiling Default: dependent Default: dependent
sensor selection: horizontal cyl. on sensor on sensor
automatic ... blocking dist.:
FDU91 medium property:
liquid
detected: paste like

process cond.:
standard liq.
calm surface

L1002
level (LVL) 1
L1016 L1017 L1018 L1020
extended calibr. LVL1 dist. map. LVL1 block. dist.
LVL1 check value LVL1 correction
act. distance 1 correction: offset: blocking dist.:
range of mapping default 0 mm default 0 mm
start mapping
status
equal to L100B,
see above
L1002 L1022
level 1 LVL 1 simulation
simulation simulation:
sim. off
sim.level
sim. volume
sim. level value:
sim. vol. value:
L00-FMU90xxx-19-01-01-en-106
! Note!
The menu diagrams contain all submenus which may occur in the Prosonic S. Which of these
submenus actually are present depends on the instrument version, the installation environment and
the parametrization.
162
Operating menu
ESC ESC ESC ESC ESC
L1007 L1008 L100B

LVL1 unit LVL1 linearisat. LVL 1 check value
unit level: type: customer unit: act. distance:
% (default) % check distance:
m none l - dist. too big
- dist. unknown
mode: L100B
level 1: - distance = ok
level LVL1 dist. map.
distance: - dist. too small
ullage - manual act. distance:
customer unit range of mapping:
L100C
linear max. scale start mapping:
yes LVL1 state
mode status:
level 1:
customer unit act. distance:
horizontal cyl. diameter
sphere status:
max. scale
mode
customer unit
pyramid bottom
intermed. height
conical bottom
max. scale
angled bottom
mode
customer unit
L100D
table edit
edit
status table
mode - read
- manual table editor
- semi-automatic
- delete
L1019 L1020* L1021*

LVL1 limitation LVL1 ext. input 1 LVL1 ext. input 2
limitation: input 1: input 2:
off disabled disabled
low limit ext. digin 1 ext. digin 1
high limit ... ...
low/high limit ext. digin 4 ext. digin 4
upper limit: function: function:
lower limit: off off
Min (0%) Min (0%)
Max (100%) Max (100%)
hold hold
customer spec. customer spec.
(value:) (value:)
*only for instruments *only for instruments
with external with external
limit switches limit switches
L00-FMU90xxx-19-01-02-en-106
163
Operating menu
12.2 "Flow"
main menu
F0000 F0001
flow
flow flow

flow flow 1
flow 2
F1002
flow 1
F1003
basic setup
flow1 sensor sel.
input:
sensor selection:
detected:
F1002
flow 1
F1010 F1011 F1012 F1013
extended calibr. flow1 level corr.
flow1 mapping flow1 low cut off flow1 dist. corr.
sensor: low flow cut off: correction: offset:
range of mapping: flow1: flow1: flow1:
start mapping:
status:
F1002
flow 1
simulation
F0000
flow
F1302
flow1+backwater
flow1+backwater
flow
backwater
F1303
backwater
F1304 F1305
basic setup
backw.sensor sel. backw. empty cal.
input: empty E:
sensor selection: blocking dist.:
detected:
F1303
backwater
F1500 F1501 F1502 F1504
extended calibr. backw correction backw. block.dist.
backwater mapping backw dist. corr.
sens.val.backw.: sensor offset: offset: blocking dist:
range of mapping:
start mapping:
status:
F1303
backwater
simulation
F0000
flow
F1100
flow counter
flow counter
FX101
totalizer
daily counter 1
F1102 F1103 F1104
daily counter daily counter 1 daily counter 1
daily counter 1 daily counter 1
daily counter 2
daily counter 3 allocation: value: error handling:
none overflow:
counting unit: (reset:)*
*not available for
totalizers
L00-FMU90xxx-19-02-01-en-106
164
Operating menu
F1004 F1010 F1005 F1006

flow1 linearizat. flow1 empty cal. flow1 flow1 check value
type: empty E: flow1. distance:
flow unit: level: check distance:
(curve:) sensor: - dist. too big
(width:) - dist. unknown
(edit:) - distance = ok F1008
(status table:) - dist. too small flow1 mapping
(alpha:) - manual sensor:
(beta:) range of mapping:
(gamma:) start mapping:
(C:) status:
(max. flow:)
F1015 F1014 F1015* F1016*

flow1 block. dist. flow1 limitation flow1 ext. input 1 flow1 ext. input 2
blocking dist.: limitation: input 1: input 2:
lower limit: disabled disabled
upper limit: ext. digin 1 ext. digin 1
... ...
ext. digin 4 ext. digin 4
function: function:
off off
Min (0%) Min (0%)
Max (100%) Max (100%)
hold hold
(value:) (value:)
F1305 F1306 F1307 F1308

backw detection dirt detection backwater backw check value
ratio B: ratio D: act. backw.level: dist. unknown
act. flow level: dist. too big
actual ratio: F1309
flow1: distance = o.k. backwater mapping
dist. too small
manual sens. va. backw.:
range of mapping:
start mapping:
status:
F1503 F1504* F1505*
backw limitation backw. ext. input 1 backw. ext. input 2
limitation: input 1: input 2:
lower limit: disabled disabled
upper limit: ext. digin 1 ext. digin 1
... ...
ext. digin 4 ext. digin 4
function: function:
off off
Min (0%) Min (0%)
Max (100%) Max (100%)
hold hold
(value:) (value:)
F1105*
daily counter 1
external reset:
- disabled
- ext. digin 1
...
- ext. digin 4
external start:
*not available for
totalizers; only for
instruments with
external limit switches
L00-FMU90xxx-19-02-02-en-106
165
Operating menu
12.3 "Safety settings"
ESC ESC ESC

main menu
AX101* AX102 AX103 AX104
safety settings
output on alarm outp. echo loss delay echo loss safety distance

output 1: level 1: delay sensor 1 saf. dist. sen 1
min. hold Default: 30s Default: 0,0 m
max. ramp %/min ramp level1: (delay sensor 2) (saf. dist. sen 2)
hold customer spec. value level1:
user specific output value 1 alarm
(output 2:) (level 2:)
*only for HART
L00-FMU90xxx-19-03-01-en-106
166
Operating menu
ESC ESC ESC ESC

AX105 AX107 AX108 A0000
in safety dist. react. high temp def. temp. sensor relay delay
in saf.dist. s 1 overtemp. sen 1 def. temp.sens 1: startdelay relay
warning warning warning Default: 5s
self holding alarm alarm
alarm (max.temp. Sen. 1:) (def.temp. sens 2:)
(reset sensor 1:) (overtemp. sen 2:)
(in saf. dist. s 2:) (max.temp. Sen. 2:)
(reset sensor 2:)
L00-FMU90xxx-19-03-02-en-106
167
Operating menu
12.4 "Relay/Controls"
12.4.1 Pump control - standard

(FMU90-*1********** und FMU90-*2**********)
main menu ESC

R1001
relay/controls
relay/controls

R1300 R1301 R1302
pump control 1
pump control 1 pump control 1 pump control 1
(pump control 2)
reference: pump 1 R1303
function:
pump 2 pump 1 control 1
none limit control
level 1 switch on point:
(level 2) default: 60%
number of pumps: switch off point:
Default: 1 default: 40%
switch on delay:
default: 0 s
alternate:
no
yes
crust reduction:
Default: 0 %
R1301 R13A3 R13A2

pump control 1 pump control 1 pump control 1
function: switch on point: pump 1
rate control default: 60% (pump 2)
switch off point:
default: 40%
min.pumprate/min:
default: 0 %
hook up interval:
Default: 0 s
switch on border
Default: 0%
crust reduction
default: 0%
alternate:
no
L00-FMU90xxx-19-04-01-en-106
168
Operating menu
ESC
R1304 RX305
pump 1 control 1 relay allocation ESC
backl. interval: relay 1:
R1306
default: 0 h relay 2:
relay 2
backlash time:
default: 0 s function:
error handling: none
hold pump 1 control 1
switch on
switch off invert
actual value no
yes
ESC
R13A3 RX3A5
pump1 control1 relay allocation
switch on delay: 0s relay 1
R23A6
backl. interval: 0h relay 2
relay 2
backlash time: 0s ...
error handling: function:
actual value none
hold invert:
switch on no
switch off
L00-FMU90xxx-19-04-02-en-106
169
Operating menu
12.4.2 Pump control - enhanced: Basic setup

(FMU90-*3********** and FMU90-*4**********)
main menu
R1001
relay/controls
relay/controls

pump control 1 R1400
(pump control 2) pump control 1
R1401 R1402
basic setup pump control 1 pump control 1 ESC
reference: function:
none limit parallel R1403
level 1 limit simple pump control 1
(level 2) load control: R1404
pump 1
number of pumps: in order pumnp 1 control 1
pump 2
default: 1 time of use switch on point:
standby pump: starts default: 20%
no starts+time switch off point:
yes default: 10%
reset: switch on delay:
default: 0 s
alternate:
no
yes
(degree of use:)
default: 50%
(max. use time:)
default: 0 min
crust reduction:
default: 0%
R1402
pump control 1
function:
R1504 R1505
rate control
pump control 1 pump control 1
load control:
in order switch on point: pump 1
time of use default: 20% (pump 2)
starts switch off point:
starts+time default: 10%
min. pumprate/min:
default: 0 %/min
hook up interval:
default: 0 s
switch on border:
default: 0%
alternate:
no
crust reduction:
default: 0%
L00-FMU90xxx-19-16-01-en-106
170
Operating menu
ESC
R1405 R1406* RX407

pump 1 control 1 pump 1 control 1 relay allocation ESC
backl. interval: pump feedback: relay 1:
R2408
default: 0 h disabled relay 2:
relay 2
backlash time: ext. digin 1
default: 0 s ... function:
error handling: ext. digin 4 keine
hold feedback delay: pump 1 control 1
switch on default: 30 s
switch off feedback meaning: invert
actual value pump start no
pump failure yes
*only for instruments
with external
limit switches
ESC
R1505 R1506 R1507* RX508

pump 1 control 1 pump 1 control 1 pump 1 control 1 relay allocation ESC
switch on delay: backl. interval: pump feedback: relay 1
default: 0 s default: 0 h disabled relay 2 R2509
(degree of use:) backlash time: ext. digin 1 relay 2
default: 50% default: 0 s ... function:
(max. use time:) error handling: ext. digin 4 invert:
default: 0 min actual value feedback delay:
hold default: 30 s
switch on feedback meaning:
switch off pump start
pump failure
with external
limit switches
L00-FMU90xxx-19-16-02-en-106
171
Operating menu
12.4.3 Pump control - enhanced: additional functions

(FMU90*3********** and FMU90-*4**********)
R1400
pump control 1
R1601
storm function storm function 1
storm function:
off
on
switch on point: 95%
storm time: 60 min
R1400
pump control 1
R1602
function test function test 1
function test:
off
on
max downtime: 0 h
max. test time: 60 s
swtich on point: 20%
R1400
pump control 1
R1603 RX604
flush control flush control 1 relay allocation
flush control: relay 1 R2605
off relay 2 relay 2
on ... R2605
pump cycles: 0 function:
invert: function
flush cycles: 0
flush time: 0 s ... - none
flush delay: 0 s - flush ctrl 1
R1400
pump control 1
R1607 R1608
tariff control tariff control 1 tariff control 1
(only for instruments R1619
with external tariff control: pump 1 tariff ctrl 1 p1
limit switches) no pump 2
yes ... switch on point:20%
tariff input: switch on point:20%
disabled switch off point:10%
ext. digin 1 switch off point:10%
...
ext. digin 4
R1400
pump control 1
R1610
pump data pump data 1
R1611
pump 1 pump data 1 p1
pump 2
... operating hours:
reset op. hours:
total op. hours:
number of starts:
starts per hour:
backlash starts:
reset backlstart:
lasat run time:
R1400
pump control 1 1
R1612 R1613
op. hours alarm op. hours alarm 1 op. hours alarm 1
pump 1 R1613 RX614
op. hours alarm
pump 2 op. hours alarm1 p1 relay allocation
off
on ... operating hours: relay 1 R2615
alarm delay: 0 s max. op. hours relay 2 relay 2
default: 10000 h ... R2615
function:
invert: function
... - none
- op. hour alarm 1
R1400
pump control 1
R1617 RX618
pump alarm pump alarm 1 relay allocation
(only for instruments
with external pump alarm relays 1 R2619
limit switches) off relay 2 relay 2
on ... R2619
waiting time: 0 s function:
invert: function
... - none
- pump alarm 2
L00-FMU90xxx-19-17-01-en-106
172
Operating menu
173
Operating menu
12.4.4 Rake control/Relay configuration/Simulation
R1001
relay/controls
rake control R1200 R1201 R1202 RX203
rake control rake control rake control relay allocation ESC
upstream water: switch on point: switch delay: relay 1:
R2204
none default: 20% / 0.8 default: 0 s relay 2:
relay allocation
level 1 switch off point: error handling:
level 2 default: 10% / 0.9 actual value function:
downstream water: hold none
none switch on rake control
level 1 switch off
level 2 invert
function: no
difference yes
ratio
R0000
relay/controls
relay configurat. RX101
relay allocation
relay 1:
R2103
relay 2:
relay 2
R2107
function:
select function
+ additional params, R2018
depend. on function limit
function
R2103
limit level 1
relay 2
limit level 2
limit lvl. 1+2 function:
limit type:
standard A
inband B
out of band C
tendeny/speed D
+ additional params,
depending on
limit type
time pulse E
counting pulse R201B

function
pulse flow 1 F
pulse flow 2

alarm/diagnost. R201D
function
none
alarm relay G
diagnostics H
backwat. alarm I
dirt alarm J
field bus R201E

(only for Profibus DP function
instruments) none
DO1
...
DO10
R1001
relay/controls
relay simulation RX120
relay simulation
relay 1:
R2106
relay 2:
relay 2

simulation:
off
on
simulation value:
switch off
switch on
L00-FMU90xxx-19-11-01-en-106
174
Operating menu
R2103 R2104 R2103 R2104

A B/C
relay 2 relay 2 relay 2 relay 2
function: switch delay: limit: switch delay:
limit xxxx default: 0 s limit xxxx default: 0 s
limit type: invert. limit type: invert:
standard no inband/out of bd. no
switch on point: yes upper switchpt.: yes
default: 60% error handling: default: 60% error handling:
switch off point: actual value low switch point: actual value
default: 40% hold default: 40% hold
switch on hysteresis switch on
switch off default: 1% switch off
R2103 R2104 R2103 R2104

D E
function: switch delay: function: invert
limit xxxx default: 0 s time pulse no
limit type: invert: pulse width: yes
tendency/speed no default: 200 ms error handling:
switch on /min: yes pulse time: actual value
default: 60% error handling: default: 1 min stop
switch off /min: actual value
default: 40% hold
switch on
switch off
R2103 R2105 R2104 R2104

F G
function: pulse counter: invert: invert:
pulse flow 1 overflow x 10^7: no no
counter unit: reset counter yes yes
m3 no error handling:
l yes actual value
start counter: hold
pulse value: default: 0% stop
default: 1.000 m3 stop counter:
pulse width: default: 100%
default: 200 ms
R2103 R2104 R2104 R2104

H relay 2 relay 2 I J
relay 2 relay 2
function: invert: invert: invert:
diagnostics no no no
allocation 1: yes yes yes
none
echoloss sen 1

allocation 2:
none
echoloss sen 2

L00-FMU90xxx-19-08-02-en-106
175
Operating menu
12.5 "Output/calculations" (HART)
main menu
OX001
output/calculat
output/calculat

O1302
current output 1
current oputput 1
(current output 2) O1201
allocat./calculat allocat. curr. 1
output:
level 1
....
flow 1

average level

...
output current:
O1302
current output 1
OX202
extended calibr. mode current 1
current span:
4...20mA
0...20mA
OX202
fix. curr. HART
mode current 1
mA value:
default: 4mA
4mA threshold:
off
on
output damping:
default: 2 s
curr. turn down:
off
on Ox202
mode current 1

curr. turn down: on
turn down 0/4mA:
default: 0%
turn down 20mA:
default 100%
O1302
current output 1
HART settings O1203 O2205 O3206 O4207
(not for HART settings add. HART-value 2 add. HART-value 3 add. HART-value 4
current output 2) HART address: measured value 2: measured value 3: measured value 4:
default: 0 no sensor no sensor no sensor
no.of preambels: level 1 level 1 level 1
default: 5
short TAG HART: output damping 2: output damping 3: output damping 4:
default: 0 s default: 0 s default: 0 s
O1302
current output 1
simulation:
off
on
simulation value:
L00-FMU90xxx-19-05-01-en-106
176
Operating menu
12.6 "Output/calculations" (Profibus DP)
main menu
O1000
output calculat.
output/calculat
OXA01
analog input
output/calculat.
O1A02
analog input 1 analog input 1
... O1A02
analog input 10 measured value 1:
output
value:
status: none
level 1
...
flow 1
...
average level
...
digital input OXB01

output/calculat
digital input 1 O1B03
... digital input 1
digital input 10 allocation 1: O1B02
value: Digital Eingang 1
status: Pumpensteuerung 1 O1B02
Pumpensteuerung 2 Pumpensteuerung 1
keine Funktion
Pumpe 1 PST 1
...
Pumpe N PST 1
rake control O1B02
rake control
none
rake control
additional inputs O1B02

additional inputs
none
ext. digin 1
...
ext. digin 4
relay O1B02
relay
none
relay 1
...
relay 6
reset O1B02
reset
no
yes
Profibus DP O1C01
Profibus DP
profile version:
instrument addr.:
O1C11
ident number:
ident number
profile
manufacturer
L00-FMU90xxx-19-12-01-en-106
177
Operating menu
12.7 "Device properties"
main menu
D1001
device properties
device properties
D110D
D1101 D110B D110C
operating param.
distance unit temperature unit operating mode controls
distance unit: temperature unit: operating mode: controls:
m C level no
ft F level+flow pump control
mm flow rake controle
inch flow+backwater only for
operating modes
tag marking D1102 level and
tag marking level +flow
output 1:* * only for HART instruments
output 2:* * only for HART instruments
device marking:
D1103
language
language
language:
English

password/reset D1104
password/reset
reset:
(s. manual)
code:
(s. manual)
status:
L00-FMU90xxx-19-06-01-en-106
178
Operating menu
179
Operating menu
12.8 "System information"
main menu
IX001
system informat.
system informat.

IX101 IX102 IX103 IX105
device information
device family device order code serial no.
device family: device name: order code: serial no.:
IX108 IX108 IX109 IX109 IX10A*

in/output info
level (LVL) 1 level (LVL) 2 flow 1 flow 2 current output 1
(displays the main
links - depending on input: input: input: input: output:
settings and sensor selection: sensor selection: sensor selection: sensor selection:
instrument version) detected: detected detected: detected
* only for
HART instuments
IX10E
trend display ESC
trend display
(only for HART IX10F
instruments) trend output 1:
trend output 1
(trend output 2):
time interval:
min/max values IX300

min/max values
IX301
level
level
flow
level (LVL) 1 I1302
temperature
level (LVL) 2 level (LVL) 1
...
max. value:
min. value
reset level 1:
keep
erase
reset min.
reset max.
envelope curve
IX126
envelope curve
IX127 ESC
en. curve sen. 1 Plot settings
(en. curve sen. 2) IX128
Envelope curve Plot settings
Env.curve + FAC
Env.curve + cust.map single curve
cyclic
error list E1000

error list
E1002
actual error actual error
1: error description
2:
3:
last error E1003

last error
1: error description
2:
3:
I1404 I1404 I1405 I1405 I1406

diagnostics
operating hours actual distance act. meas. value appl. parameter echo quality sen.
operation hours: act. distance 1: level 1: sensor 1: echo quality 1:
act. distance 2: flow 1: (sensor 2:) (echo quality 2:)
...
L00-FMU90xxx-19-07-01-en-106
180
Operating menu
IX106 IX107 IX108

software version dev. version DD version
software version: dev. rev.: DD version:
IX11A* IX10B IX10B

current output 2 relay 1 relay N
output: function: function:
* only for
HART instuments
L00-FMU90xxx-19-07-02-en-106
181
Operating menu
12.9 "Display"
main menu
DX202 DX201 DX200
display
display display format back to home

type: format: back to home:
1xvalue + bargr. decimal default: 900 s
ft-in-1/16"
(value 1:)* no. of decimals:
(cust. text 1:)* default: x.xx
sep. character:
point
*: depending comma
on type customized text:
L00-FMU90xxx-19-09-01-en-106
12.10 "Sensor management"
main menu
sensor management D1018
FDU sensor
DX019
sensor management input
D1106 D1107
FDU sensor 1 US sensor 1 US sensor 1
(FDU sensor 2)
sensor operation: temp. measurement:
on US sensor
hold extern. temp.
off avg.USsens/ext
sensor priority: ext. send ctrl.:
detected: off
sensor selection: hold
detection window: value
input:
disabled
ext. digin 1
...
ext. digin 4
(distance:)
with external
temperature sensor
and external
limit switches
D1018
FDU sensor
ext. temp. sensor * D1020 D1021 D1022
ext. temp. sensor ext. temp. sensor ext. temp. sensor
sensor type: max. value: error handling:
no sensor min. value: alarm
FMT131 actual value: warning
PT100 reset: value at warning:
temperature unit: keep default: 20 C
erase
reset min.
reset max.
D1018
FDU sensor
external digin * DX024
external digin
*only for instruments D1025
external digin 1
with external external digin
external digin 2
temperature sensor external digin 3 invert:
and external external digin 4 no
limit switches yes
L00-FMU90xxx-19-10-01-en-106
182
Appendix
13 Appendix
13.1 Pre-programmed flow curves
13.1.1 Khafagi-Venturi flumes
BD
b0
Hmax
b0 be
L00-FMU90xxx-05-00-00-xx-004
BD: blocking distance of the sensor
Type of flume b0 [mm] be [mm] Hmax [mm] Qmax [m3/h]
Khafagi-Venturi QV 302 120 48 220 40,09

Khafagi-Venturi QV306 600 240 400 414,0
Khafagi-Venturi QV 308 800 320 600 1024
183
Appendix
The pre-programmed curves can also be used for Khafagi-Venturi flumes with elevated walls. To do
so, Qmax has to be adjusted ("linearization" function, "max. flow" subfunction):
Type of flume Hmax [mm] Qmax [m3/h]
Khafagi-Venturi QV 302 330 81,90
Khafagi-Venturi QV 308 850 1790
Khafagi-Venturi QV313 1350 5807
! Note!
After selecting the type of flume, Qmax can be adjusted to the flow conditions. Qmax defines the flow
at which the output current is 20 mA.
184
Appendix
13.1.2 ISO-Venturi flumes
BD
3 Hmax
Hmax
b0 be
L00-FMU90xxx-05-00-00-xx-004
Type of flume b0 [mm] be [mm] Hmax [mm] Qmax [m3/h]

ISO-Venturi 415 150 75 200 42,5
ISO-Venturi 425 250 125 300 130,3
ISO-Venturi 430 400 200 400 322,2
ISO-Venturi 440 400 267 625 893,6
ISO-Venturi 450 500 333 700 1318,9
ISO-Venturi 480 800 480 800 2200
! Note!
185
Appendix
13.1.3 British standard Venturi flumes (BS 3680)
BD
Hmax
2 Hmax 3 Hmax L 3 (B-b)
L00-FMU90xxx-05-00-00-xx-005

The bottom of the flume may not have any slope throughout the length x. (no measuring flume with data threshold)
Type of flume b Hmax [mm] Qmax [m3/h]
BST Venturi 4" 4" 150 36,25
BST Venturi 7" 7" 190 90,44
BST Venturi 12" 12" 340 371,1
BST Venturi 18" 18" 480 925,7
BST Venturi 30" 30" 840 3603
! Note!
186
Appendix
13.1.4 Parshall flumes
BD
2/3 A
L00-FMU90xxx-05-00-00-xx-006

A: horizontal bottom of the channel
Type of flume W Hmax [mm] Qmax [m3/h]
Parshall 1" 1" 180 15,23

Parshall 2" 2" 180 30,46
Parshall 3" 3" 480 204,2
Parshall 6" 6" 480 430,5
Parshall 9" 9" 630 950,5
Parshall 1 ft 1,0 ft 780 1704
Parshall 1,5 ft 1,5 ft 780 2595
Parshall 4 t 4,0 ft 780 7185
Parshall 6 ft 6 ft 780 10951
Parshall 8 ft 8,0 780 14767
! Note!
187
Appendix
13.1.5 Palmer-Bowlus flumes
D/4 D/2 D/4
30 30
Hmax
D/6
BD
D/2
L00-FMU90xxx-05-00-00-xx-007
Type of flume D Hmax [mm] Qmax [m3/h]
Palmer-Bowlus 6" 6" 120 37,94
Palmer-Bowlus 8" 8" 150 68,62

Palmer-Bowlus 10" 10" 210 150,55
Palmer-Bowlus 12" 12" 240 215,83
Palmer-Bowlus 15" 15" 300 376,97
Palmer-Bowlus 18" 18" 330 499,86
Palmer-Bowlus 21" 21" 420 871,05
Palmer-Bowlus 24" 24" 450 1075,94
Palmer-Bowlus 27" 27" 540 1625,58
Palmer-Bowlus 30" 30" 600 2136,47
! Note!
188
Appendix
13.1.6 Rectangular weirs
Hmax
2 Hmax
k 3 mm
k k
BD
3 Hmax
45
L00-FMU90xxx-05-00-00-xx-008
Type of weir B [mm] Hmax [mm] Qmax [m3/h]
RectWT0/5H 1000 500 2418
RectWT0/T5 1000 1500 12567
! Note!
In the "width" parameter, the width of the weir can be adjusted. The corresponding change of the
flow curve is automatically performed by the Prosonic S.
! Note!
After selecting the type of weir, Qmax can be adjusted to the flow conditions. Qmax defines the flow
189
Appendix
13.1.7 Constricted rectangular weirs
2 Hmax B
H max
2 Hmax
k 3 mm
k k
BD
3 Hmax
45
L00-FMU90xxx-05-00-00-xx-009
RectWThr 2H 200 120 51,18
RectWThr 3H 300 150 108,4

RectWThr 4H 400 240 289,5
RectWThr 5H 500 270 434,6
RectWThr 6H 600 300 613,3
RectWThr 8H 800 450 1493
RectWThr T0 1000 600 2861
RectWThr T5 1500 725 6061
RectWThr 2T 2000 1013 13352
! Note!
! Note!
190
Appendix
13.1.8 Rectangular weirs according to French standard NFX
Hmax
2 Hmax
k 3 mm
k k
BD
3 Hmax
45
xxxxxxxx
NFX Rect T0/5H 1000 500 2427,3

NFX Rect T0/T5 1000 1500 12582,5
! Note!
! Note!
191
Appendix
13.1.9 Constricted rectangular weirs according to French standard NFX
2 Hmax B
H max
2 Hmax
k 3 mm
k k
BD
3 Hmax
45
xxxxxxxx
NFX Rect WThr 2H 200 120 53,5


NFX Rect WThr 8H 800 450 1527,8
NFX Rect WThr T0 1000 600 2933,8
! Note!
192
Appendix
13.1.10 Trapezoidal weirs
2 Hmax
H max
2 Hmax
k 3 mm
k k
BD
3 Hmax
45
L00-FMU90xxx-05-00-00-xx-010
Trap.W T0/3H 1000 300 1049

Trap.W T0/T5 1000 1500 11733
! Note!
! Note!
193
Appendix
13.1.11 Triangular weirs
2 Hmax

H max
2 Hmax
k 3 mm
k k
BD
3 Hmax
45
L00-FMU90xxx-05-00-00-xx-011
Type of weir Hmax [mm] Qmax [m3/h]
V-Weir 22,5 22,5 600 276,0

V-Weir 30 30 600 371,2
V-Weir 45 45 600 574,1
V-Weir 60 60 600 799,8

V-Weir 90 90 600 1385
! Note!
194
Appendix
13.1.12 British standard triangular weirs (BS 3680)
2 Hmax

H max
2 Hmax
k 3 mm
k k
BD
3 Hmax
45
L00-FMU90xxx-05-00-00-xx-011
BST V-Weir 22,5 (1/4 90) 1/4 90 390 120,1

BST V-Weir 45 (1/2 90 ) 1/2 90 390 237,0
BST V-Weir 90 90 390 473,2
! Note!
195
Appendix
13.1.13 Triangular weirs according to the French standard NFX
2 Hmax

H max
2 Hmax
k 3 mm
k k
BD
3 Hmax
45
L00-FMU90xxx-05-00-00-xx-011
NFX V-Weir 30 30 600 375,9

NFX V-Weir 45 45 600 573,1
NFX V-Weir 60 60 600 793,1
NFX V-Weir 90 90 600 1376,7
! Note!
196
Appendix
13.2 The formula for flow calculation

If you have selected the "formula" linearization type, the flow calculation is performed according to:
Q = C (h + h)
where:
Q: the flow in m3/h
C: a scaling parameter
h: the upstream level
,: the flow exponents
: a weighting constant
Appropriate values of , , and C for the different types of flumes and weirs can be taken from the
following tables.
Khafagi-Venturi flumes
Type Qmax [m3/h] C
QV 302 40,09 1,500 2,500 0,0013140 0,0095299
QV 303 104,3 1,500 2,500 0,0004301 0,0238249
QV 304 231,5 1,500 2,500 0,0003225 0,0317665
QV 305 323,0 1,500 2,500 0,0002580 0,0397081
QV 306 414,0 1,500 2,500 0,0002150 0,0476497
QV 308 1024 1,500 2,500 0,0001613 0,0635329
QV 310 1982 1,500 2,500 0,0001290 0,0794162

QV 313 3308 1,500 2,500 0,0000992 0,1032410
QV 316 6181 1,500 2,500 0,0000806 0,1270659
ISO-Venturi flumes
Type Qmax [m3/h] C

ISO 415 42,5 1,500 2,100 0,0009336 0,0146865
ISO 425 130,3 1,500 1,600 0,0959719 0,0214406
ISO 430 322,2 1,500 2,000 0,0032155 0,0379104
ISO 440 893,6 1,600 1,700 -0,2582633 0,0590888
ISO 450 1318,9 1,600 1,800 -0,0895791 0,0553654
ISO 480 1862,5 1,600 1,800 -0,0928186 0,0795737
British standard Venturi flumes (BS 3680)
Type Qmax [m3/h] C
BST Venturi 4" 36,25 1,500 1,000 0,0000000 0,019732
BST Venturi 7" 90,44 1,500 1,000 0,0000000 0,034532
BST Venturi 12" 371,2 1,500 1,000 0,0000000 0,059201
BST Venturi 18" 925,7 1,500 1,000 0,0000000 0,088021
BST Venturi 30" 3603 1,500 1,000 0,0000000 0,148003
197
Appendix
Parshall flumes
Type 3
Qmax [m /h] C
Parshall 1" 15,23 1,550 1,000 0,0000000 0,0048651
Parshall 2" 30,46 1,550 1,000 0,0000000 0,0097302
Parshall 3" 203,8 1,547 1,000 0,0000000 0,0144964

Parshall 6" 430,5 1,580 1,000 0,0000000 0,0249795
Parshall 9" 950,5 1,530 1,000 0,0000000 0,0495407
Parshall 1 ft 1704 1,522 1,000 0,0000000 0,0675749
Parshall 1,5 ft 2595 1,538 1,000 0,0000000 0,0924837
Parshall 2 ft 3498 1,550 1,000 0,0000000 0,1151107
Parshall 3 ft 5328 1,566 1,000 0,0000000 0,1575984

Parshall 4 ft 7185 1,578 1,000 0,0000000 0,1962034
Parshall 5 ft 9058 1,587 1,000 0,0000000 0,2329573
Parshall 6 ft 10951 1,595 1,000 0,0000000 0,2670383
Parshall 8 ft 14767 1,607 1,000 0,0000000 0,3324357
Palmer-Bowlus flumes
Type Qmax [m /h] 3

C
Palmer-Bowlus 6" 37,94 0,200 2,000 0,01176 0,22063

Palmer-Bowlus 8" 68,62 0,200 2,000 0,00661 0,45306
Palmer-Bowlus 10" 150,55 0,200 2,000 0,00512 0,65826
Palmer-Bowlus 12" 215,83 0,200 2,000 0,0033 1,11787
Palmer-Bowlus 15" 376,97 0,200 2,000 0,00213 1,93489
Palmer-Bowlus 18" 499,86 0,200 2,000 0,00152 2,96269
Palmer-Bowlus 21" 871,05 0,200 2,000 0,00113 4,29769

Palmer-Bowlus 24" 1075,94 0,200 2,000 0,00091 5,73322
Palmer-Bowlus 27" 1625,58 0,200 2,000 0,00073 7,51238
Palmer-Bowlus 30" 2136,47 0,200 2,000 0,00061 9,57225
Rectangular weirs
Type Qmax [m /h] 3

C
RectWT0/5H 1049 1,500 1,000 0,0000000 0,2067454
RectWT0/T5 11733 1,500 1,000 0,0000000 0,2067454
198
Appendix
Constricted rectangular weirs
Type 3
Qmax [m /h] C
RectWThr 2H 51,18 1,500 1 0,0000000 0,038931336
RectWThr 3H 108,4 1,500 1 0,0000000 0,059018248
RectWThr 4H 289,5 1,500 1 0,0000000 0,077862671

RectWThr 5H 434,6 1,500 1 0,0000000 0,097949584
RectWThr 6H 613,3 1,500 1 0,0000000 0,118036497
RectWThr 8H 1493 1,500 1 0,0000000 0,156346588
RectWThr T0 2861 1,500 1 0,0000000 0,194656679
RectWThr T5 6061 1,500 1 0,0000000 0,3106200
RectWThr 2T 13352 1,500 1 0,0000000 0,4141600
Rectangular weirs according to French standard NFX
Type Qmax [m3/h] C
NFX Rect T0/5H 2427,3 1,400 2,000 0,0107097 0,2801013
NFX Rect T0/T5 12582,5 1,500 0,000 0,0000000 0,1951248
Constricted rectangular weirs according to French standard NFX

Type Qmax [m3/h] C
NFX RectWThr 2H 53,5 1,500 1,600 -0,1428487 0,0528094
NFX RectWThr 3H 111,7 1,500 1,600 -0,1115842 0,0744722

NFX RectWThr 4H 299,1 1,500 1,600 -0,0975777 0,0966477
NFX RectWThr 5H 445,8 1,500 1,600 -0,0884398 0,1187524
NFX RectWThr 6H 626,2 1,500 1,600 -0,0816976 0,1407481

NFX RectWThr 8H 1527,8 1,500 1,600 -0,0634245 0,1810272
NFX RectWThr T0 2933,8 1,500 1,600 -0,0671398 0,2285268
Trapezoidal weirs
Type Qmax [m3/h] C
Trap.W T0/3H 1049 1,500 1,000 0,0000000 0,2067454
Trap.W T0/T5 11733 1,500 1,000 0,0000000 0,2067454
Triangular weirs
Type 3
Qmax [m /h] C
V-Weir 22,5 276,0 2,500 1,000 0,0000000 0,0000313
V-Weir 30 371,2 2,500 1,000 0,0000000 0,0000421
V-Weir 45 574,1 2,500 1,000 0,0000000 0,0000651
V-Weir 60 799,8 2,500 1,000 0,0000000 0,0000907

V-Weir 90 1385 2,500 1,000 0,0000000 0,0001571
199
Appendix
British standard triangular weirs (BS 3680)
Type 3
Qmax [m /h] C
BST V-Weir 22,5 120,1 2,314 2,649,000 0,1430720 0,0000590
BST -Weir 45 237,3 2,340 2,610 0,2659230 0,0000880
BST V-Weir 90 473,2 2,314 2,650 0,1904230 0,0001980
Triangular weirs according to French standard NFX
Type 3
Qmax [m /h] C
NFX V-Weir 30 375,9 2,400 2,800 0,0241095 0,0000616
NFX V-Weir 45 573,1 2,476 0,000 0,0000000 0,0000757
NFX V-Weir 60 793,1 2,486 0,000 0,0000000 0,0000983
NFX V-Weir 90 1376,7 2,491 0,000 0,0000000 0,0001653
200
Appendix
13.3 System error messages
13.3.1 Error signal

Errors occurring during commissioning or operation are signalled in the following way:
Error symbol, error code and error description on the display and operating module
Current output, configurable ("output on alarm" function).
MAX, 110%, 22mA
MIN, -10%, 3,6mA
HOLD (the last value is held)
user-specific value
In the menu: "system information/error list/actual error"
13.3.2 Last error

To access a list of the last errors which have been cleared, go to "system information/error list/last
error".
13.3.3 Types of errors
Type of error Display symbol Meaning

The output signal assumes a value which can be defi-
ned by the "output on alarm" function:
MAX: 100%, 22mA
Alarm (A) MIN: -10%, 3,8mA
Hold: last value is held
continuous user-specific value
Additionaly, an error message appears on the display.
The instrument continues to measure.

Warning (W)
An error message is displayed.
flashing
201
Appendix
13.3.4 Error codes

The error code consists of 6 digits with the following meaning:
Digit 1: Type of error
A: alarm
W: warning
E: error (the user can define if the error behaves like an alarm or a warning.)
Digits 2 and 3:
indicate the input channel, output channel or the relay to which the error refers. "00" means that
the error does not refer to a specific channel or relay.
Digits 4-6:
indicate the error according to the following table.
Example:
W 01 641 W: Warning
01: sensor input 1
641: loss of echo
Code Description of error Remedy
A 00 100 software version does not fit to hard-

ware version
A 00 101 checksum error full reset and recalibration required

W 00 103 initializing - please wait if the message does not disappear after a couple of seconds:
replace electronics
A 00 106 downloading - please wait wait for completion of the download
A 00 111 electronics defective switch instrument off/on;

A 00 112 if the error persists:
A 00 114 call Endress+Hauser service
A 00 115
A 00 116 download error repeat download
A 00 117 hardware not recognised after exchange
A 01 121 current output 01 or 02 not calibrated call Endress+Hauser service

A 02 121
A 00 125 electronics defective replace electronics
W 00 153 initializing if the message does not disappear after a couple of seconds:
replace electronics
A 00 180 synchronization faulty check synchronization wiring (s. chapter "Wiring")
A 00 183 hardware not supported check if the installed board complies with the order code of
the instrument;
call Endress+Hauser service
A 01 231 sensor 01 or 02 defective - check con- check for correct connection of the sensor
A 02 231 nection (s. chapter "Wiring")
A 00 250 failure in external temperature sensor check external temperature sensor and connection
A 01 281 temperature measurement 01 or 02 check for correct connection of the sensor

A 02 281 defective - check connection (s. chapter "Wiring")
202
Appendix
W 01 501 no sensor selected for channel 01 or 02 allocate sensor

W 02 501 (s. "level" or "flow" menu)
A 01 502 Sensor 01 or 02 not recognized Enter type of sensor manually

A 02 502 ("level" or "flow" menu, submenu "basic calibration".
A 00 511 no factory calibration present
A 01 512 mapping in process wait for completion of mapping

A 02 512
W01 521 new sensor 01 or 02 detected

W02 521
W01 601 non-monotonic linearisation curve for re-enter linearisation

W02 601 level 01 or 02 (s. "level" menu")
W 01 602 non-monotonic linearisation for flow 01 re-enter linearisation

W 02 602 or 02 (s. "flow" menu)
W 01 603
W 02 603
A 01 604 faulty calibration for level 01 or 02 adjust calibration

A 02 604 (s. "level" menu)
A 01 605 faulty calibration flow 01 or 02 adjust calibration

A 02 605 (s. "flow" menu)
A 01 606
A 02 606
W01 611 linearisation points level 01 or 02: num- enter further linearisation points
W02 611 ber < 2 (s. "level" menu)
W01 612 linearisation points flow 01 or 02: num- enter further linearisation points
W02 612 ber < 2 (s. "flow" menu)
W01 613
W02 613
W 01 620 pulse value too low for relay 01 - 06 check counting unit
... (see "flow" menu, "flow counter" submenu)
W 06 620
E 01 641 no usable echo sensor 01 or 02 check basic calibration for the respective sensor
E 02 641 (s. "level" or "flow" menu)
A 01 651 Safety distane reached for sensor 01 or Error disappears if the level is out of the safety distance again.
A 02 651 02 - danger of overfilling Possibly, the function "acknowledge alarm" must be used
(s. "safety settings" menu)
E 01 661 temperature sensor 01 or 02 too high

E 02 661
W 01 682 Current 01 or 02 out of measuring Perform basic calibration;

W 02 682 range check linearisation
W01 691 filling noise detected sensor 01 or 02

W02 691
W00 692 backwater detected

(if backwater detection is active)
W00 693 dirt detected

(if dirt detection is active)
W 01 701 Operating hours alarm pump 1 ctrl 1 Reset operating hours
203
Appendix
W 01 711 Failure of pump 1 ctrl 1 check pump1)

W 02 711 Failure of pump 1 ctrl 2 check pump1

W00 801 simulation level swichted on switch off level simulation

(s. "level" menu)
W01 802 simulation sensor 01 or 02 switched on switch off simulation

W02 802
W01 803 simulation flow switched on switch off simulation

W02 803 (see "flow" menu)
W01 804
W02 804
W01 805 simulation current 01 switched on switch off simulation
(s. "output/calculations" menu)
W02 806 simulation current 02 switched on switch off simulation

(see "output/calculations" menu)
W01 807 simulation relay 01 - 06 switched on switch off simulation

...
W06 807
W01 808 sensor 01 or 02 switched off switch on sensor

W02 808 (see "device properties/sensor management" menu)
W01 809 current calibration D/A active
W02 809
A 00 820 Different units for calculation of average Check the units of the respective basic calibrations
... value, sum, difference or rake control (s. "level" or "flow" menu)
A 00 832
1) After a repair of the pump the pump control must be reset (chapter 5.3.2) or the FMU90 must be switched off and
on.
204
Appendix
13.4 Default block configuration (HART)
13.4.1 Function blocks

The Prosonic S contains various function blocks. During the commissioning procedure the blocks
are linked to each other in order to perform the desired measuring task. Depending on the
instrument version and installation environment, the following function blocks may occur:
Signal inputs
Sensor 1
Sensor 2 (if selected in the product structure)
Signal evaluation (calculation of the measured value)
Level 1
Level 2 (for instruments with 2 current outputs)
Flow 1 (for flow instruments)
Flow 2 (for flow instruments)
Controls
Pump control
Rake control
Backwater detection
Signal output
Display
Current output 1 with HART
Current output 2 (if selected in the product structure)
Relay 1
Relay 2 (for instruments with 3 or 6 relays)
Relay 3 (for instruments with 3 or 6 relays)
Relay 4 (for instruments with 6 relays)
13.4.2 Operating mode = "level"
1 sensor input / 1 current output

(FMU90 - *****1*1****)
Display
Sensor 1 Level 1 Current output 1

+HART
Alarm Relay 1
FDU9x
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-de-079
205
Appendix
1 sensor input / 2 current outputs

(FMU90 - *****1*2****)
Display
Level 1 Current output 1

+HART
Sensor 1
FDU9x Level 2 Current output 2
Alarm Relay 1
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-de-088
2 sensor inputs / 2 current outputs

(FMU90 - *****2*2****)
Display

+HART
FDU9x
Alarm Relay 1
FDU9x
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-de-080
13.4.3 Operating mode = "level + flow"

(FMU90 - *****1*2****)
Display
Flow 1 Current output 1

+HART
Sensor 1
FDU9x Level 1 Current output 2
Alarm Relay 1
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-de-092
206
Appendix

(FMU90 - *****2*2****)
Display
Sensor 1 Flow 1 Current output 1

+HART
FDU90
Alarm Relay 1
FDU90
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-de-094
13.4.4 Operating mode = "flow"
1 sensor input / 1 current output

(FMU90 - *****1*1****)
Display

+HART
Alarm Relay 1
FDU9x
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-de-090

(FMU90 - *****1*2****)
Display
Flow 1 Current output 1

+HART
Sensor 1
FDU9x Flow 2 Current output 2
Alarm Relay 1
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-de-095
207
Appendix

(FMU90 - *****2*2****)
Display

+HART
FDU9x
Alarm Relay 1
FDU9x
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-de-091
13.4.5 Operating mode = "flow + backwater"
Display
Flow 1
Sensor 1 Curent output 1
+ HART
FDU9x Backwater ratio

Backwater detection Curent output 2
(upstream water) (h2/h1)
Sensor 2 Alarm Relay 1
FDU9x
(downstream water)
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-de-096
208
Appendix
13.5 Default block configuration (Profibus DP)

The Prosonic S contains various function blocks. During the commissioning procedure the blocks
are linked to each other in order to perform the desired measuring task. Depending on the instru-
ment version and installation environment, the following function blocks may occur:
Signal input
Ultrasonic Sensor Block (US)
Digital Output Block (DO)
Measured value calculation
Level Block (LE)
Flow Block (FS)
Flow Block with BAckwater Detection (FB)
Flow Block with Averaged Level (FA)
Siganl output
Analog Input Block (AI)
Digital Input Block (DI)
Calculations
Sum Block Level (SL)
Average Block Level (AL)
Difference Block Level 1 - 2 (DL)
Difference Block Level 2 - 1 (LD)
Sum Block Flow (SF)
Average Block Flow (AF)
Difference Block Flow 1 - 2 (DF)
Difference Block Flow 2 - 1 (FD)
Counters
Totalizator Block (TO)
Daily Counter Block (DC)
Impulse Counter (IC)
Limits
Limit Block (LS)
209
Appendix
13.5.1 Operating Mode = " Level"
1 sensor input
US1 LE1 AI1
Distanz
AI2 Bus
FDU9x
Temperatur
AI3
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-yy-097
2 sensor inputs
US1 LE1 AI1
Distanz
AI3
FDU9x
Temperatur
AI5
LS1
LS3
LS5
SL AI7
AL AI8
DL AI9
US2 LE2 AI2
Distanz
AI4
FDU9x
Temperatur
AI6
LS2
LS4
LS6
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-yy-100
210
Appendix
13.5.2 Operating Mode = "Flow"
1 sensor input
US1 FS1 AI1
Distanz
AI2
FDU9x
Temperatur
AI3
Wert
TO1 AI5
bertrag
AI6
Wert
DC1 AI7
bertrag
AI8
TO2
DC2
TO3
DC3
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-yy-098
211
Appendix
2 sensor inputs
US1 FS1 AI1
Distanz
AI3
FDU9x
Temperatur
AI5
AI7
TO1
AI8
DC1
IC1
LS1
LS4
LS1
LS3
LS5
SF
AF LS3
DF LS6
US2 FS2 AI2
Distanz
AI4
FDU9x
Temperatur
AI6
AI9
TO2
AI10
DC2
IC2
LS2
LS5
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-yy-102
212
Appendix
13.5.3 Operating Mode = " Flow + Level"
1 sensor input
US1 FS1 AI1
FDU9x AI5
TO1
AI6
AI7
DC1
AI8
TO2
DC2
TO3
DC3
LE1 AI2
Distanz
AI3
Temperatur
AI4
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-yy-099
213
Appendix
2 sensor inputs
LS1
LS3
US1 LE1 AI3
Distanz
FS1 AI1
FDU9x
Temperatur
AI5
AI7
TO1
AI8
DC1
IC1
SL
AL
DL
TO3
SF DC3
AF IC3
DF
US2 LE2 AI4
Distanz
FS2 AI2
FDU9x
Temperatur
AI6
AI9
TO2
AI10
DC2
IC2
LS2
LS4
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-yy-103
214
Appendix
13.5.4 Operating Mode = "Flow + Backwater"
2 sensor inputs
US1 LE1 AI3
AI4
FDU9x AI1
AI2
AI7
FB1 TO1
AI8
TO2
TO3
AI9
DC1
US2 AI5 AI10
DC2
DC3
FDU9x IC1
IC2
IC3
LS1
LS2
LS3
LS4
LS5
LS6
L00-FMU90xxx-19-00-00-yy-104
215
www.endress.com/worldwide
BA290F/00/EN/07.09
71098302
FM+SGML 6.0 ProMoDo 71098302
Technical Information
Prosonic S
FDU90/91/91F/92/93/95/96
Ultrasonic sensors for non-contact continuous
level and flow measurement;
for connection to the transmitters FMU90 and FMU95
FDU91 FDU95
FDU92
FDU90
FDU91F FDU93
FDU96
Application Your benefits

Continuous, non-contact level measurement of fluids, Non-contact measurement method; minimizes service
pastes, sludges and powdery to coarse bulk materials requirements
Flow measurement in open channels and measuring Integrated temperature sensor for time-of-flight
weirs correction. Accurate measurements are possible, even
Maximum measuring range if temperature changes are present
FDU90: Hermetically welded PVDF sensors FDU91/92 for
3 m in fluids fluid measurement; for highest chemical resistance
1.2 m in bulk materials Integrated automatical sensor detection for
FDU91/FDU91F: transmitters FMU90; simple commissioning
10 m in fluids Can be installed up to 300 m from the transmitter
5 m in bulk materials Suited for rough ambient conditions thanks to separate
FDU92: installation from the transmitter
20 m in fluids Reduced build-up formation because of the self-
10 m in bulk materials cleaning effect
FDU93: Integrated heating against a build-up of ice at the
25 m in fluids sensor (optional); ensures reliable measurement
15 m in bulk materials Weather resistant and flood-proof (IP68)
FDU95: Dust-Ex and Gas-Ex certificats available (ATEX, FM,
45 m in bulk materials CSA)
FDU96:
70 m in bulk materials
Suited for explosion hazardous areas
TI396F/00/en/07.09
71098284
Prosonic S FDU90/91/91F/92/93/95/96
Table of Contents
Function and system design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Measuring principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Connecting cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Time-of-flight correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Blocking distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Certificates and Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 CE mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Ex approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 External standards and guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Measuring range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Operating frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Ordering information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Product structure FDU90 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Product structure FDU91 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Signal transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Product structure FDU91F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Auxiliary energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Product structure FDU95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Product structure FDU96 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Sensor heater (for FDU91) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Scope of delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Connection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Extension cable for sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Connection hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Protective cover for FDU91 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Connection of the sensor heater (for FDU90/FDU91) . . . . . . . . . . 8 Flanges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Extenxion cables for the sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Flooding protection tube for FDU90 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Shortening the sensor cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Cantilever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Mounting Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Installation conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Wall Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Installation options Mounting bracket for ceiling mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
(Examples) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Alignment unit FAU40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Mounting versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Power supply RNB130 for the FDU90/FDU91 sensor heater . . . 34
Installation conditions for level measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 IP66 protective housing for the power supply RNB130 . . . . . . . . 34
Installation conditions for flow measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Flush mounting with Supplementary documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
slip-on flange FAU80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Innovation booklet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Nozzle installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Technical Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Ultrasound guide pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Operating instructions
(for transmitter FMU90) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Ambient conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Description of Instrument Functions (for transmitter FMU90) . . . 35
Ingress protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Vibration resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Storage temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Thermal shock resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Electromagnetic compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Process conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Process temperature
Process pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Mechanical construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Counter nut G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Dimensions FDU90 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Dimensions FDU91 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Dimensions FDU91F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Dimensions FDU92 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Dimensions FDU93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Dimensions FDU95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Dimensions FDU96 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
2 Endress + Hauser
Prosonic S FDU90/91/91F/92/93/95/96
Function and system design

Measuring principle
FDU9x
Prosonic S
BD FMU90
100%
Prosonic S FDU9x
FMU90
D D
E F
Q
V
L
0%
L00-FMU90xxx-15-00-08-xx-009
BD: blocking distance; D: distance from sensor membrane to fluid surface; E: empty distance F: span (full distance);
L: level; V: volume (or mass); Q: flow
The sensor transmits ultrasonic pulses in the direction of the product surface. There, they are reflected back
and received by the sensor. The transmitter Prosonic S measures the time t between pulse transmission and
reception. From t (and the velocity of sound c) it calculates the distance D from the sensor membrane to the
product surface:
D = c t/2
From D results the desired measuring value:

level L
volume V
flow Q across measuring weirs or open channels
Time-of-flight correction In order to compensate for temperature dependent time-of-flight changes, a temperature sensor is integrated
in the ultrasonic sensors.
Endress + Hauser 3
Prosonic S FDU90/91/91F/92/93/95/96
Blocking distance The level L may not extend into the blocking distance BD. Level echoes within the blocking distance can not
be evaluated due to the transient characteristics of the sensor and thus a reliable measurement is not possible.
The blocking distance BD is dependent on the type of sensor:
FDU96
FDU93 FDU95
FDU90
FDU92
FDU91
A B
0.07 m
FDU95-#1###: 0.7 m (2.3 ft)

(0.23 ft)
0.3 m (1 ft)
0.4 m (1.3 ft)
FDU95-#2###: 0.9 m (3 ft)

0.6 m (2 ft)
1.6 m (5.25 ft)

L00-FDU9xxxx-05-00-00-xx-002
A: without flooding protection tube; B: with flooding protection tube
Transmitter The sensors can be connected to the transmitter FMU90. The transmitter recognizes the type of sensor
automatically.
4 Endress + Hauser
Prosonic S FDU90/91/91F/92/93/95/96
Input
Measuring range The effective range of the sensors is dependent on the operating conditions. To estimate the range, proceed as
follows (see also the example):
1. Determine which of the influences shown in the following table are appropriate for your process.
2. Add the corresponding attenuation values.
3. From the total attenuation, use the diagram to calculate the range.
Fluid surface Attenuation

calm 0 dB
waves 5 ... 10 dB
strong turbulence (e.g. stirrers) 10 ... 20 dB
foaming ask Endress+Hauser
Bulk material surface Attenuation

hard, rough (e.g. rubble) 40 dB
soft (e.g. peat, dust-covered clinker) 40 ... 60 dB
Dust Attenuation
no dust formation 0 dB
little dust formation 5 dB
heavy dust formation 5 ... 20 dB
Filling curtain in detection range Attenuation

none 0 dB
small quantities 5 dB
large quantities 5 ... 20 dB
Temperature difference between

Attenuation
sensor and product surface
to 20 C 0 dB
to 40 C 5 ... 10 dB
to 80 C 10 ... 20 dB
Example
R [m]
Silo with rubble: ~ 40dB
70 FDU 96
small quantities of
filling curtain: ~ 5dB
little dust: ~ 5dB
45
FDU 95
total: ~ 50dB
=> Range approx. 8 m

for FDU92
25
FDU 93
20
FDU 92
10
FDU 91(F)
3
FDU90
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 110 A [dB]
L00-FDU9xxxx-05-00-00-xx-001
A: Attenuation (dB); R: Range (m)
Endress + Hauser 5
Prosonic S FDU90/91/91F/92/93/95/96
Operating frequency Sensor Operating frequency
FDU90 90 kHz
FDU91 43 kHz
FDU91F 42 kHz
FDU92 30 kHz
FDU93 27 kHz
FDU95 - *1***
17 kHz
(low temperature version)
FDU95 - *2***
18 kHz
(high temperature version)
FDU96 11 kHz
Output
Signal transmission analogue voltages
Auxiliary energy
Power supply supplied by the transmitter FMU90
Sensor heater (for FDU91) The FDU90 and FDU91 sensors are available in a version with heater. The power for this heater must be
provided by an external power supply unit. The supply voltage is connected to the brown (BN) and blue (BU)
strands of the sensor cable.
Technical data
24 VDC 10%; residual ripple < 100 mV
250 mA per sensor
! Note!
If the sensor heater is applied, the integrated temperature sensor can not be used. Instead, an external
temperature sensor (Pt100 or FMT131 from Endress+Hauser) must be used. The transmitter FMU90 is
available in a version with an input for the external temperature sensor. For details refer to Technical
Information TI397F.
! Note!
The power for the sensor heater can be supplied by the power supply RNB130 from Endress+Hauser (see
chapter "Accessories").
6 Endress + Hauser
Prosonic S FDU90/91/91F/92/93/95/96
Electrical connection
Connection diagram
(A) (B)
FDU90/91/92 FDU90/91
(FDU80/80F/81/81F/82) (FDU80/81)
max. (1) (1)

30 m
FDU90/91/92 max. YE BK RD YE BK RD BN BU
(FDU80/80F/81/81F/82) 300 m
(2) (2)
(3) (3)
YE BK RD YE BK RD + -
9 10 11 9 10 11
24 VDC
(12) (13) (14) (12) (13) (14)
FMU90 FMU90
(C) (D)
FDU91F/93/95/96 FDU91F/93/95/96
(FDU83/84/85/86) (FDU83/84/85/86)
max.
(1) (1)
30 m
FDU91F/93/95/96 max. YE BK RD GNYE YE BK RD GNYE

(FDU83/84/85/86) 300 m
(2) YE BK RD
9 10 11
(12) (13) (14)
FMU90
(3)
YE BK RD
9 10 11
(12) (13) (14)
FMU90
L00-FDU9xxxx-04-00-00-xx-002
(A): without sensor heater;

(B): with sensor heater;
(C): grounding at the terminal box;
(D): grounding at the transmitter FMU90;
(1): Screen of the sensor cable;
(2): Terminal box;
(3): Screen of the extension cable;
Colours of the strands: YE = yellow; BK = black; RD = red; BU = blue; BN = brown; GNYE = green-yellow
Endress + Hauser 7
Prosonic S FDU90/91/91F/92/93/95/96
Connection hints
" Caution!
In order to avoid interference signals, the sensor cables should not be laid parallel to high voltage electric power
lines. The cables may not be laid in the proximity to frequency converters.
" Caution!
The cable screen serves as a return cable and must be connected to the transmitter without any electrical break.
With the pre-assembled cables, the screen ends in a black strand (BK). With the extension cable, the screen
must be twisted together and connected to the "BK" terminal.
# Warning!
The sensors FDU83, FDU84, FDU85 and FDU86 with an ATEX, FM or CSA certificate are not certified for
connection to the FMU90 transmitter.
# Warning!
for the sensors FDU91F/93/95/96 and FDU83/84/85/86:
The ground lead (GNYE) must be connected to the local potential equalization after a maximum distance
of 30 m. This can be done
either at the terminal box
or at the transmitter FMU90 or in the cabinet (if the distance to the sensor does not exceed 30 m).
! Note!
For easier mounting it is advisable to use the sensors FDU90/91/92 and FDU80/80F/81/81F/82 with a
maximum cable length of 30 m as well. For longer distances an extension cable with a terminal box should
be used.
Connection of the sensor The FDU90 and FDU91 sensors are available in a version with heater. The power for this heater must be
heater (for FDU90/FDU91) provided by an external power supply unit. The supply voltage is connected to the brown (BN) and blue (BU)
strands of the sensor cable.
Technical Data
24 VDC 10%; residual ripple < 100 mV
250 mA per sensor
! Note!
When using the sensor heater, the temperature compensation of the ultrasonic measurement must be
performed with an external temperature probe, which is connecte to the additional temperature input of the
FMU90 transmitter (see Technical Information TI397F).
Extenxion cables for the For distances up to 30 m the sensor can be directly connected by the sensor cable. For longer distances, it is
sensors recommended to use an extension cable. The extension cable is connected via a terminal box. The total length
(sensor cable + extension cable) may be up to 300 m.
" Caution!
If the terminal box is installed in explosion hazardous areas, all applicable national guidelines must be observed.
Suitable extension cables can be obtained from Endress+Hauser (s. chapter "Accessories")
Alternatively, cables with the following properties can be used:
Number of cores according to the connection diagram (see above)
braided wire screen for the yellow (YE) and red (RD) core (no foil screen)
Length: up to 300 m (sensor cable + extension cable)
Cross section: 0,75 mm2 to 2,5 mm2
up to 6 per core
max. 60 nF
for FDU91F/93/95/96 and FDU 83/84/85/86:
The earth lead must not be within the screening.
8 Endress + Hauser
Prosonic S FDU90/91/91F/92/93/95/96
Shortening the sensor cable If required, the sensor cable can be shortened. Please note:
Do not damage the cores when removing the insulation.
The cable is shielded by a metallic braiding. This shielding serves as a return cable and corresponds to the
black (BK) strand of the unshortened cable. After shortening the cable, loosen the metallic braiding, twist it
together securely and connect it to the "BK" terminal.
" Caution!
The protective earth conductor (GNYE), which is present in some of the sensor cables, may not be electrically
connected to the cable shield.
FDU90/91/92 FDU91F/93/95/96
(FDU80/80F/81/81F/82) (FDU83/84/85/86)
1. 1.
BN
24 VDC
BN (+)
BU BU (-)
RD
YE BK RD
YE
GNYE GNYE
RD
YE BK RD
YE
L00-FMU90xxx-04-00-00-xx-015
Colours of the strands: YE = yellow; BK = black; RD = red; BU = blue; BN = brown; GNYE = green-yellow
! Note!
The blue (BU) and brown (BN) strands are only present for sensors with heater.
Endress + Hauser 9
Prosonic S FDU90/91/91F/92/93/95/96
Installation conditions
Installation options
(Examples) A B C
.- Zone 21
FAU40
-
Zone 20
L00-FDU9xxxx-17-00-00-xx-001
A: at girder or angle bracket; B: with alignment unit FAU40; in ATEX Zone 20 the alignment unit can be used for zone
separation; C: with a 1" sleeve welded to a grating
A B
C
FDU9x FDU9x
L00-FDU9xxxx-17-00-00-xx-007
A: Installation with cantilever and wall bracket; B: Installation with cantilever and mounting frame; C: The cantilever can
be turned in order to position the sensor over the centre of the flume.
Cantilever, wall bracket and mounting frame are available as accessories (see chapter "Accessories").
" Caution!
The cable of the sensors is not designed as a supporting cable. Do not use it as a suspension wire.
" Caution!
The sensor membrane is part of the measuring system and must not be damaged during installation.
Mounting versions
A B C D
SW41
41 AF
FDU90 FDU90 FDU9x FDU9x
L00-FDU90xxxx-17-00-00-xx-001
A: FDU90: Ceiling mounting

B: FDU90: Mounted at front thread (G1-1/2 or NPT1-1/2)
C: FDU9x: Mounted at rear thread (G1 or NPT1)
D: FDU90, FDU91, FDU91F, FDU92: Mounting with G1 counter nut1); 42AF
1) The counter nut with gasket is supplied for the sensors FDU90, FDU91, FDU91F and FDU92 with a metric thread G1 at the process connection.
10 Endress + Hauser
Prosonic S FDU90/91/91F/92/93/95/96
Installation conditions for

2 3
level measurements
6
BD
BD
BD
4
1/6D
1
D
L
5
L00-FDU9xxxx-17-00-00-xx-003
If possible, install the sensor so that its lower edge projects into the vessel.
Make sure, that the maximum level does not reach into the blocking distance (BD, see table).
Do not install the sensor in the middle of the tank (2). We recommend leaving a distance (1) between the
sensor and the tank wall measuring 1/6 of the tank diameter.
Avoid measurements through the filling curtain (3).
Make sure that equipment (4) such as limit switches, temperature sensors, baffles etc. are not located within
the emitting angle . Emitting angles of the individual sensors are given in the table below. In particular,
symmetrical equipment (5) such as heating coils etc. can influence the measurement.
Align the sensor vertically to the product surface (6). An alignment unit (FAU40) is available as an accessory
(see chapter "Accessories").
If the two-channel version of the transmitter FMU90 is used, both sensors can be mounted in one vessel.
To estimate the detection range, use the 3 dB emitting angle :
Sensor Blocking distance BD (typically) Application L (max) r (max)

fluids 3m 0.31 m
FDU90 0.07 m 12
bulk materials 1.2 m 0.13 m
fluids 10 m 0.79 m
FDU91 0.3 m 9
bulk materials 5m 0.39 m
fluids 10 m 1.05 m
FDU91F 0.3 m 12
bulk materials 5m 0.53 m
fluids 20 m 1.92 m
FDU92 0.4 m 11
bulk materials 10 m 0.96 m
fluids 25 m 0.87 m
FDU93 0.6 m 4
bulk materials 15 m 0.52 m
FDU95 0.7 m (low temperature version) 5 bulk materials 45 m 1.96 m
0.9 m (high temperature version)
FDU96 1.6 m 6 bulk materials 70 m 3.6 m
# Warning!
All national guidelines applicable must be observed in explosion hazardous areas.
Endress + Hauser 11
Prosonic S FDU90/91/91F/92/93/95/96
Installation conditions for flow Install the sensor at the inflow side (A), above the maximum water level Hmax plus the blocking distance BD.
measurements Position the sensor in the middle of the channel or weir.
Align the sensor vertically to the water surface.
Comply to the installation distance of the channel or weir.2)
Use a protective cover, in order to protect the sensor from direct sun or rain. A protective cover is available
for the sensors FDU90 and FDU91 (see chapter "Accessories").
Example: Khafagi-Venturi flume
FDU 91
(A) (B)
BD
H max
1 x b0
b0
L00-FDU9xxxx-17-00-00-xx-004
(A): inflow side; (B): outflow side
Example: V-notch weir
FDU 91
BD
min. 3 H max
Hmax
L00-FDU9xxxx-17-00-00-xx-005
2) The installation distances of important flumes and weirs are specified in the Operating Instructions BA 289F (FMU90 with HART) and BA 293F (FMU90 with
PROFIBUS).
12 Endress + Hauser
Prosonic S FDU90/91/91F/92/93/95/96
Flush mounting with The FDU91F sensor can be flush mounted using a FAU80 slip-on flange. Flanges in polypropylene (PPs) should
slip-on flange FAU80 only be used with pressures up to 1.5 barabs, flanges in 316L also above.
D
k A
81
75.7
b
d2 97.5
0,5 A
L00-FDU9xxxx-17-00-00-xx-009
Order No. Material b [mm] D [mm] d2 [mm] k [mm] No. d2 Standard
FAU80 - CAP PPs DN80 PN16

20 200 18 160 8
FAU80 - CAJ 316L (DIN EN 1092-1-E)
FAU80 - AAP PPs ANSI 3" 150 psi

23,9 190,5 19,1 152,4 4
FAU80 - AAJ 316L (ANSI B 16.5)
FAU80 - KAP PPs JIS10 K80

18 185 19 150 8
FAU80 - KAJ 316L (JIS B 2220)
k
130
81
75.7
15
76
b
d2
D
L00-FDU9xxxx-17-00-00-xx-010
The adapter flange is included in the delivery
Order No. Material b [mm] D [mm] d2 [mm] k [mm] No. d2 Standard
FAU80 - CHP PPs DN100 PN16

20 220 18 180 8
FAU80 - CHJ 316L (DIN 2527)
FAU80 - AHP PPs ANSI 4" 150 psi

23,9 228,6 19,1 190,5 4
FAU80 - AHJ 316L (ANSI B 16.5)
FAU80 - KHP PPs JIS10 K100

18 210 19 175 8
FAU80 - KHJ 316L (JIS B 2220)
! Note!
The process seal is not included in the delivery.
" Caution!
For 3A applications:
The internal diameter of the nozzle should be selected according to the valid allowable limits for 3A
applications. Usually, the internal diameter of the nozzle should be larger than or equal to the internal diameter
of the sensor.
Endress + Hauser 13
Prosonic S FDU90/91/91F/92/93/95/96
Nozzle installation Install the sensor at a height so that the blocking distance BD is not undershot, even at maximum fill level. Use
a pipe nozzle if you cannot maintain the blocking distance in any other way. The interior of the nozzle must
be smooth and may not contain any edges or welded joints. In particular, there should be no burr on the inside
of the tank side nozzle end. Note the specified limits for nozzle diameter and length. To minimise disturbing
factors, we recommend an angled socket edge (ideally 45).
FDU90
FDU9x FDU91F
FDU90
L L
L
L 45 45
45
D
45 D
D
D
L00-FDU9xxxx-17-00-00-xx-006
Maximum nozzle length [mm]

1) 2)
Nozzle diameter FDU90 FDU90 FDU91 FDU91F FDU92 FDU93 FDU95 FDU96
DN50/2" 50
DN80/3" 340 250 340 2503)
DN100/4" 390 300 390 3003
DN150/6" 400 300 400 3003 400

DN200/8" 400 300 400 3003 400 520
3
DN250/10" 400 300 400 300 400 520 630
3
DN300/12" 400 300 400 300 400 520 630 800
Emission angle 12 12 9 12 11 4 5 6
Blocking distance [m] 0.01 0.01 0,3 0,3 0,4 0,6 0,7 1,6
Max. measuring range 3 3 10 10 20 25

[m)
in liquids
Max. measuring range 1.2 1.2 5 5 10 15 45 70

[m]
in solids
1) mounted at the rear side thread

2) mounted at the front side thread (flush mounting)
3) Valid for flush mounting; for mounting with G/NPT1" and DN100 or higher see FDU91F.
14 Endress + Hauser
Prosonic S FDU90/91/91F/92/93/95/96
Ultrasound guide pipe In narrow shafts with strong interference echoes, we

recommend using an ultrasound guide pipe (e.g. PE
or PVC wastewater pipe) with a minimum diameter A
of 100 mm (for FDU91). Make sure that the pipe is
not soiled by accumulated dirt. If necessary, clean the
pipe at regular intervals.
A: venting hole
Endress + Hauser 15
Prosonic S FDU90/91/91F/92/93/95/96
Ambient conditions
Ingress protection tested according to IP68/NEMA6P (24 h at 6 ft under water surface)
Vibration resistance DIN EN 600068-2-64; 20 ... 2000 Hz; 1 (m/s2)2/Hz; 3x100 min.
Storage temperature identical to process temperature, see below
Thermal shock resistance according to DIN EN 60068-2-14; examination to min/max process temperature; 0,5 K/min; 1000 h
Electromagnetic compatibility Interference emission to EN 61326; Equipment class A

Interference immunity to EN 61326; Appendix A (Industrial)
Process conditions
Process temperature Sensor Process temperature Process pressure (abs.)
Process pressure
FDU90 -40 ... +80 C1 0.7 ... 4 bar
1)
FDU91 -40 ... +80 C 0.7 ... 4 bar
-40 ... +105 C

FDU91F (30 min/135 C)2) 0.7 ... 4 bar
for Ex instruments: -40 ... +80 C
-40 ... +95 C

FDU92 0.7 ... 4 bar
-40 ... +95 C

FDU93 0.7 ... 3 bar
FDU95 - *1***
-40 ... +80 C 0.7 ... 1,5 bar
(low temperature version)
FDU95 - *2*** -40 ... +150 C

0.7 ... 1,5 bar
(high temperature version) for Dust-Ex versions: -40 ... 130 C
-40 ... +150 C

FDU96 for Dust-Ex or Gas-Ex versions: 0.7 ... 3 bar
-40 ... 140 C
1) In order to avoid ice build-up, the sensors FDU90 and FDU91 are available in a version with
integrated sensor heater (see page 6). If this heater is used, an external temperature sensor has to be
applied for time-of-flight correction. The transmitter FMU90 is available in a version with an input for
the external temperature sensor. For details refer to Technical Information TI397F.
2) only valid for Tri-clamp and flush mounting
16 Endress + Hauser
Prosonic S FDU90/91/91F/92/93/95/96
Mechanical construction
Counter nut G1 Is supplied for the sensor FDU90, FDU91, FDU91F
and FDU92 with a metric G1 thread.
8
Material: PA
Gasket (EPDM) is supplied G1
2
A
SW41
41AF
L0=-FDU9xxxx-06-00-00-xx-004
A: Gasket
Dimensions FDU90
FDU90-*G***
FDU90-*N*** FDU90-*W***
A B
~28
26
121 85 ~28
~109
~137
b A
58
B
86
26
a a 75
75
89 8
R2
.5
L00-FDU90xxxx-06-00-00-xx-004
Dimensions in mm
A: Cable gland for approval versions FDU90-C/D/E/G/H/J/R/U/V/1
B: Conduit connection NPT 1/2" for approval versions FDU90-Q/S
The conduit connection is partly potted (half-filled)
a: G1-1/2 or NPT1-1/2 (see product structure: 020 "Process connection")
b: G1 or NPT1 (see product structure: 020 "Process connection")
Dimensions FDU91 A B
28
26
20
G1" / NPT1"
110
70
L00-FDU91xxx-06-00-00-xx-001
Dimensions in mm
The conduit connection is partly potted (half-filled).
Endress + Hauser 17
Prosonic S FDU90/91/91F/92/93/95/96
Dimensions FDU91F
FDU91F - #F## FDU91F - #G## FDU91F - #S##
FDU91F - #N## FDU91F - #T##
A B A B A B
~28
~28
26
26
26
~56
25
G1 / NPT1
~124
~124
~152
80 80
80
3
76 76
97.5
119 (FDU91F-#S##)
76 106 (FDU91F-#T##)
97.5
L00-FDU91Fxx-06-00-00-xx-001
Dimensions in mm
A: Cable gland for approval versions FDU91F-C/D/E/G/H/J/R/U/V
B: Conduit connection NPT 1/2" for approval versions FDU91F-Q/S
Dimensions FDU92
A B
28
26
20
G1" / NPT1"
125
98
L00-FDU92xxx-06-00-00-xx-001
Dimensions in mm
Dimensions FDU93
A B
28
26
25
G1" / NPT1"
145
187
L00-FDU93xxx-06-00-00-xx-001
Dimensions in mm
A: Cable gland for approval version FDU93-C/D/E/G/H/J/R/U/W/1
B: Conduit connection NPT 1/2" for approval versions FDU93-P/T
18 Endress + Hauser
Prosonic S FDU90/91/91F/92/93/95/96
Dimensions FDU95
A B
28
26
G1" / NPT1"
25
170
235
L00-FDU95xxx-06-00-00-xx-001
Dimensions in mm
A: Cable gland for approval versions FDU95-C/D/E/H/J/R/U/W/1
B: Conduit connection NPT 1/2" for approval versions FDU95-P/T
Dimensions FDU96
A B
28
26
30
G1" / NPT1"
25
230
ca. 450
198
L00-FDU96xxx-06-00-00-xx-001
Dimensions in mm
A: Cable gland for approval versions FDU96-C/D/E/F/H/J/R/W/1
B: Conduit connection NPT 1/2" for approval versions FDU96-K/L/P/T
The conduit connection is partly potted (half filled).
Endress + Hauser 19
Prosonic S FDU90/91/91F/92/93/95/96
Weight Sensor Weight (including 5 m cable)
FDU90 approx. 0.9 kg without flooding protection tube

approx. 1.0 kg with flooding protection tube
FDU91 approx. 1.1 kg
FDU91F approx. 1.6 kg

FDU92 approx. 2 kg
FDU96 approx. 5 kg
Materials Sensor Material Material of Material Material

of sensor process connection of process seal of cable
EPDM
PVDF
FDU90 PVDF w/o sealing if PVC
counter nut: PA
flush-mounted
PVDF
FDU91 PVDF w/o sealing PVC
counter nut: PA
FDU91F 316L 316L w/o sealing PVC
PVDF
FDU92 PVDF w/o sealing PVC
counter nut: PA
housing: UP
FDU93 UP silicone PVC
membrane: Alu/PTFE
FDU95 - *1*** housing: UP
(low temperature membrane coating: UP silicone PVC
version) 316L/PE
FDU95 - *2*** housing: UP
(high temperature membrane coating: UP silicone silicone
version) 316L
housing: UP selectable:
FDU96 membrane coating: UP silicone silicone
Alu/PTFE 304
! Note!
The chemical compatibility of the sensors must be checked before installation with compatibility charts.
Connecting cable 5 ... 300 m

for cable length > 30 m, an extension cable is recommended.
In this case, the total length (sensor cable + extension cable) must not exceed 300 m.
20 Endress + Hauser
Prosonic S FDU90/91/91F/92/93/95/96
Certificates and Approvals

CE mark The measuring system meets the legal requirements of the EC-guidelines. Endress+Hauser confirms the
instrument passing the required tests by attaching the CE-mark.
Ex approval The available certificates are listed in the ordering information. Note the associated safety instructions (XA) and
control or installation drawings (ZD).
Measuring systems for use in hazardous environments are accompanied by separate "Ex documentation",
which is an integral part of this Operating Manual. Strict compliance with the installation instructions and
ratings as stated in this supplementary documentation is mandatory.
Ensure that all personnel are suitably qualified.
Observe the specifications in the certificate as well as national and local standards and regulations.
The transmitter may only be installed in suitable areas.
Sensors with a certificate for hazardous areas may be connected to a transmitter without a certificate.
# Warning!
For FM approvals:
Unauthorized substitution of components may impair the suitability for Division 1 or Division 2.
# Warning!
Do not disconnect equipment unless the area is known to be non-hazardous.
! Note!
The sensor must be installed and used in a way that eliminates any danger. Possible installation positions: in
tanks, vessels, silos, over stockpiles, open channels, weirs or other bins.
External standards and EN 60529

guidelines
Protection class of housing (IP code)
EN 61326
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC requirements)
NAMUR
Standards committee for measurement and control in the chemical industry
Endress + Hauser 21
Prosonic S FDU90/91/91F/92/93/95/96
Ordering information
Product structure FDU90 010 Approval
C IEC Ex t IIIC IP65 Da/Db, Ex ma II T6/T5 Gb (in preparation)
D IEC Ex ma IIC T6 Gb (in preparation)
E ATEX II 1/2 D, ATEX II 2G Ex ma II T6 (in preparation)
G ATEX II 3G Ex nA II T6 (in preparation)
H ATEX II 3D (in preparation)
J ATEX II 2G Ex ma II T6 (in preparation)
Q FM Cl.I,II,III Div. 1+2 Gr.A-G, zone 1,2,21,22 (in preparation)
R Non-hazardous area
S CSA C/US Cl.I,II,III Div.1+2 Gr.A-G, zone 1,2 (in preparation)
U CSA General Purpose (in preparation)
V TIIS Ex is IIC T6 (in preparation)
1 NEPSI DIP (in preparation)
020 Process connection (threaded boss)

G Thread ISO228, PVDF; rear side G1, front side G1-1/2
N Thread ANSI, PVDF; rear side NPT1, front side NPT1-1/2
W Ceiling mounting; front side G1-1/2
030 Cable length

1 5 m/16 ft
2 10 m/32 ft
3 15 m/49 ft
4 20 m/65 ft
5 25 m/82 ft
6 30 m/98 ft
8 ... m (variable length, up to 300 m)
A ... ft (variable length, up to 985 ft)
035 Heater
A W/o
B Connection to 24 VDC
Note Technical Information FMU90! (Temperature compensation)
040 Additional option

A Basic version
B Flooding protection tube
FDU90 - product designation
22 Endress + Hauser
Prosonic S FDU90/91/91F/92/93/95/96

C IEC Ex t IIIC IP6x Da/Db, Ex t IIIC IP6x Db, Ex ma IIC T6 Gb
D IEC Ex ma IIC T6 Gb
E ATEX II 1/2 D, ATEX II 2G Ex ma II T6
G ATEX II 3G EEx nA II T6 (in preparation)
J ATEX II 2G EEx ma II T6
Q FM Cl.I,II,III Div. 1+2 Gr.A-G, zone 1,2,21,22
S CSA Cl.I,II,III Div.1+2 Gr.A-G, zone 1,2
U CSA General Purpose
V TIIS Ex is IIC T6

G Thread ISO228 G1, PVDF
N Thread ANSI NPT1, PVDF
030 Cable length

1 5 m/16 ft
2 10 m/32 ft
3 15 m/49 ft
4 20 m/65 ft
5 25 m/82 ft
6 30 m/98 ft
035 Heater
A w/o
B Connection to 24 VDC
Note Technical Information FMU90! (Temperature compensation)

A Basic version
Endress + Hauser 23
Prosonic S FDU90/91/91F/92/93/95/96
Product structure FDU91F 010 Approval

J ATEX II 2G Ex ma II T6
V TIIS Ex is IIC T6 (in preparation)
020 Process connection

F for slip-on flange, 316L, accessory FAU80A
G Thread ISO228 G1, 316L
N Thread ANSI NPT1, 316L
S Tri-Clamp ISO2852 DN101,6 (4"), 316L, 3A
T Tri-Clamp ISO2852 DN88,6 (3"), 316L, 3A
030 Cable length

1 5 m/16 ft
2 10 m/32 ft
3 15 m/49 ft
4 20 m/65 ft
5 25 m/82 ft
6 30 m/98 ft

A Basic version
B EN10204-3.1 material, wetted parts, (316L wetted parts); inspection certificate
FDU91F - product designation
24 Endress + Hauser
Prosonic S FDU90/91/91F/92/93/95/96

J ATEX II 2G Ex m II T6
V TIIS Ex is IIC T6

G Thread ISO228 G1, PVDF
N Thread ANSI NPT1, PVDF
030 Cable length

1 5 m/16 ft
2 10 m/32 ft
3 15 m/49 ft
4 20 m/65 ft
5 25 m/82 ft
6 30 m/98 ft

A Basic version

C IEC Ex t IIIC IP6x Da/Db, Ex t IIIC IP6x Db
D IEC Ex t IIIC T6 Gb, Ex t IIIC IP6x Da/Db, Ex t IIIC IP6x Db
E ATEX II 1/2 D
J ATEX II 2G EEx m II T6, ATEX II 1/2D
P FM Cl.I,II,III Div. 1+2 Gr.A-G, zone 2,21,22
T CSA Cl.II,III Div.1 Gr.E-G, zone 2
W TIIS dust-Ex DP12 (in preparation)

G Thread ISO228 G1, UP
N Thread ANSI NPT1, UP
030 Cable length

1 5 m/16 ft
2 10 m/32 ft
3 15 m/49 ft
4 20 m/65 ft
5 25 m/82 ft
6 30 m/98 ft

A Basic version
Endress + Hauser 25
Prosonic S FDU90/91/91F/92/93/95/96

E ATEX II 1/2 D
J ATEX II 2G Ex ma II T6, ATEX II 1/D
P FM Cl.II Div.1 Gr.E-G, zone 2,21,22
T CSA Cl.II Div.1 Gr.E-G, zone 2
015 Temperature; blocking distance; material

1 -40 ... +80C/176F; 70 cm/2.3ft; membrane: 316L; PEcoated
2 -40 ... 150C/302F; 90 cm/2,9ft; membrane: 316L

030 Cable length

1 5 m/16 ft
2 10 m/32 ft
3 15 m/49 ft
4 20 m/65 ft
5 25 m/82 ft
6 30 m/98 ft

A Basic version
26 Endress + Hauser
Prosonic S FDU90/91/91F/92/93/95/96

E ATEX II 1/2 D, -40 ... +140 C
F ATEX II 1/2 D, -40 ... +80 C
J ATEX II 2G EEx ma II T6, ATEX II 1/2D
K FM Cl.I,II,III Div. 1+2 Gr.A-G; LT; Ambient temperature: -40 ... +80 C (176 F), zone 2,21,22
L CSA Cl.I,II,III Div.1 Gr.E-G; LT; Ambient temperature: -40 ... +80 C (176 F), zone 2
P FM Cl.I,II,III Div. 1+2 Gr.A-G; HT; Ambient temperature: -40 ... +140 C (284 F), zone 2,21,22
T CSA Cl.II,III Div.1 Gr.E-G; HT; Ambient temperature: -40 ... +140 C (284 F), zone 2

S Thread ISO228 G1, 304
V Thread ANSI NPT1, 304
030 Cable length

1 5 m/16 ft
2 10 m/32 ft
3 15 m/49 ft
4 20 m/65 ft
5 25 m/82 ft
6 30 m/98 ft
040 Additional options

A Basic version
Scope of delivery Instrument according to the version ordered

This Technical Information TI396F (serves as installation and operating instruction)
for certified instrument versions: Safety Instructions (XA) or Control Drawings (ZD)
for FDU90/91 with sensor heater: terminal module, to be mounted in the field housing of the transmitter
FMU90
for FDU90/91/91F/92 with G1" process connection: counter nut (PA) + seal (EPDM)
for FDU 93/95/96 with Ex-certificate: process seal (silicone)
Endress + Hauser 27
Prosonic S FDU90/91/91F/92/93/95/96
Accessories
Extension cable for sensors for Sensor Material Cable type Order code
FDU90
FDU91 PVC LiYCY/CUL 2x(0,75) 71027742
FDU92
FDU91F
FDU93 PVC (-40 ... +105 C) LIYY/CUL 2x(0,75)D+1x0,75# 71027743
FDU95
FDU95
Silicone (-40 ... +150 C) Li2G2G 2x(0,75)D+1x0,75# 71027745
FDU96
FDU90/FDU91
PVC LIYY/CUL 2x(0,75)D+2x0,75# 71027746
with heater
Total length (sensor cable + extension cable): up to 300 m
Protective cover for FDU91 Material: PVDF

Order code: 52025686
90
90
FDU91 FDU90
98 98
L00-FDU9xxxx-06-00-00-xx-003
Dimensions in mm
Flanges Version Material Order code
DIN B DN80/PN16 PP-FR 919789-0000

DIN B DN100/PN16 PP-FR 919789-0002
DIN B DN150/PN16 PP-FR 919789-0004
DIN B DN200/PN16 PP-FR 919789-0006
DIN B DN250/PN16 PP-FR 919789-0008
All flanges have a central G1" thread (also suited for NPT 1"). The maximum operating pressure of the sensor
is always valid.
Other flanges on request.
28 Endress + Hauser
Prosonic S FDU90/91/91F/92/93/95/96
Flooding protection tube for

FDU90
+ E
G1-1/2
125 mm
BD
SD
69 mm
L00-FDU90xxx-15-00-00-xx-001
Usage
The flooding protection tube prevents the level to rise into the blocking distance of the FDU90 sensor even if
the sensor is flooded.
The user can set a safety distance SD in the transmitter FMU90/FMU95 and define that a warning signal is
generated as soon as the level rises into the safety distance.
Mounting hints
In order to ensure tightness, the supplied gasket has to be applied and the flooding protection tube must be
screwed hand tight up to limit stop. When re-equipping the flooding protection tube, repeat the basic setup
including the mapping
! Note!
The flooding protection tube has a G1-1/2" thread.
If it is ordered together with the FDU90 sensor in the product structure, the sensor always has a G1-1/2"
thread at its front side, irrespective of the selection in feature 020, "Process connection".
If the flooding protection tube is ordered as an accessory, it can only be used for sensors with a G1-1/2" thread
at the front side.
Technical data
Weight: 0.12 kg (0.3 lbs)
Material: PP
Material of gasket: EPDM
Endress + Hauser 29
Prosonic S FDU90/91/91F/92/93/95/96
Cantilever The cantilever is used to mount the sensors FDU90, FDU91 and FDU92 above open channels for example.
20
C
20
100
50
35
25
D M8
75 75 100 B 35
35
22
C
105
6.5
15
L00-FMU4xxxx-06-00-00-yy-005
A B C D Material Order code

galvanised steel 919790-0000
585 mm 250 mm 2 mm 200 mm
316Ti/1.4571 919790-0001
galvanised steel 919790-0002

1085 mm 750 mm 3 mm 300 mm
316Ti/1.4571 919790-0003
The 35 mm orifices are for the sensors FDU9x.

The 22 mm orifice may be used for an external temperature sensor (e.g. FMT131).
The cantilever can be mounted in the following ways:
by a mounting frame (see below)
by a wall bracket (see below)
Fixing screws are supplied.
30 Endress + Hauser
Prosonic S FDU90/91/91F/92/93/95/96
Mounting Frame
13
100
25
55
3.2
33.7
60
20 4
700/1400
6.5
45
76
200
100
100
130 150
L00-FMU4x-00-00-00-yy-005
Height Material Order Code
700 mm galv. steel 919791-0000
700 mm 1.4301 (AISI 304) 919791-0001
1400 mm galv. steel 919791-0002
1400 mm 1.4301 (AISI 304) 919791-0003
Wall Bracket
3.2
5 33.7
6.5
180
213
150
110
25
13
88 110
150
L00-FMU4x-00-00-00-yy-006
Material Order Code
galv. steel 919792-0000
316Ti/1.4571 919792-0001
Endress + Hauser 31
Prosonic S FDU90/91/91F/92/93/95/96
Mounting bracket for ceiling

mounting 185
1.5
75
105
10 12 5.6
10
10
1102
100
95
50
15
5 35 15
155
L00-FDU9xxxx-00-00-00-xx-001
Dimsnsions in mm
Technical Data
Suited for FDU90, FDU91, FDU91F and FUD92
Material: 1.4404
32 Endress + Hauser
Prosonic S FDU90/91/91F/92/93/95/96
Alignment unit FAU40 For measurements in solids, usage of the alignment unit FAU40 is recommended. It is designed for simple
mounting and alignment of a FDU sensor on the product surface and can be used for zone separation in
explosion hazardous areas.
(A)
M20x1.5
21
-14NPT
30
max. 15
(B)
(C) (D)
SW/AF13 SW/AF 4
182 Nm 82 Nm 125
(E)
500
10
(G)
19
(F)
max.
360
70
(27) 101
G1A 1-11NPT
155
(H)
L00-FAU40xxx-06-00-00-xx-001
(A): Cable gland M20x1.5 (present if selected in the product structure); (B): sealant here; (C): screw for lateral movement;
(D): two Allen screws for height adjustment; (E): ground pin; (F): O-ring; (G): mounting grooves (present in the UNI
flange); (H): seal supplied with the sensor; must be used for applications in ATEX zone 20
The alignment unit can be rotated up to 15.

For further information see Technical Information TI 179F.
Product structure
010 Process connection (Flange)
1 Welding flange, 304/1.4301
2 UNI flange 2"/DN50/50A, 304, max. 1.5 bar abs./22psia
suitable for 2" 150lbs / DN50 PN16 / 10K 50A
020 Sensor connection

S Thread G1, cable gland M20, 304/1.4301
G Thread G1, cable gland M20, galvanised steel
N Thread NPT1, cable entry3/4, galvanised steel
FAU40 - product designation
Endress + Hauser 33
Prosonic S FDU90/91/91F/92/93/95/96
Power supply RNB130 for the Technical data

FDU90/FDU91 sensor heater
Primary switched-mode power supply
Input: 100 - 240 V AC
Output: 24 V DC connection, max. 30 V in the event of a fault
Connection to monophased a.c. networks or to two phase conductors of three-phase supply networks
(TN, TT or IT networks as per VDE 0100 T 300/IEC 364-3) with 100 - 240 V AC nominal voltage
For further information see Technical Information TI202R.
Product structure
010 Approvals
A Non-hazardous area
020 Connection
1 Screw strip
3 Screw connection, power terminal block
030 Version
A Standard
RNB130 - complete product designation
IP66 protective housing for Order number: 51002468

the power supply RNB130 For additional information refer to Technical Information TI080R.
34 Endress + Hauser
Prosonic S FDU90/91/91F/92/93/95/96
Supplementary documentation
Innovation booklet IN 003
Ultrasonic measurement - the solution for your application
Technical Information TI 397F

Technical Information for the transmitter Prosonic S FMU90
TI 179F
Technical Information for the alignment unit FAU40
Operating instructions Depending on the instrument version, the following operating instructions are supplied with the Prosonic S
(for transmitter FMU90) FMU90:
Operating instructions Output Application Instrument version
level measurement
FMU90 - *******1****
BA 288F alternating pump control
FMU90 - *******2****
screen and rake control
HART FMU90 - *2*****1****
flow measurement
FMU90 - *4*****1****
BA 289F backwater and dirt detection
FMU90 - *2*****2****
totalizers and counters
FMU90 - *4*****2****
level measurement
BA 292F alternating pump control FMU90 - *******3****
screen and rake control
PROFIBUS DP
flow measurement
FMU90 - *2*****3****
BA 293F backwater and dirt detection
FMU90 - *4*****3****
totalizers and counters
These operating instructions describe installation and commissioning of the respective version of the
Prosonic S. It contains those functions from the operating menu, which are required for a standard measuring
task. Additional functions are contained in the "Descripiton of Instrument Functions" (BA 290F, see below).
Description of Instrument BA290F

Functions (for transmitter
contains a detailed description of all functions of the Prosonic S and is valid for all instrument versions. A PDF
FMU90)
file of this document can be found
on the CD-ROM of the "ToF-Tool - FieldTool Package", which is supplied together with the instrument
in the internet at "www.endress.com"
Endress + Hauser 35
Prosonic S FDU90/91/91F/92/93/95/96
Safety Instructions The following Safety Instructions are supplied with certified versions of the sensors. If the sensors are used in
hazardous areas, comply with all the specifications in these Safety Instructions.
Sensor version Certificate Safety Instructions
ATEX
FDU91 - J****
FDU91F - J*** ATEX II 2 G Ex ma II T6 XA 321F
FDU92 - J***
FDU91 - E****
FDU91 - E***
FDU92 - E*** ATEX II 2 G Ex ma II T6
XA322F
FDU93 - J*** ATEX II 1/2 D
FDU95 - J****
FDU96 - J***
FDU93 - E***
FDU95 - E****
ATEX II 1/2 D XA323F
FDU96 - E***
FDU96 - E***
IEC Ex
FDU91 - C****
FDU91F - C***
IEC Ex t IIIC IP6c Da/Db
FDU92 - C***
IEC Ex t IIIC IP6x Db XA481F
FDU93 - D***
IEC Ex ma IIC T6 Gb
FDU95 - D***
FDU96 - D***
FDU91 - D****
FDU91F - D *** IEC Ex ma IIC T6 Gb XA482F
FDU92 - D***
FDU93 - C***
IEC Ex t IIIC IP6x Da/Db
FDU95 - C*** XA483F
IEC Ex t IIIC IP6x Db
FDU96 - C***
36 Endress + Hauser
Prosonic S FDU90/91/91F/92/93/95/96
Endress + Hauser 37
Prosonic S FDU90/91/91F/92/93/95/96
38 Endress + Hauser
Prosonic S FDU90/91/91F/92/93/95/96
Endress + Hauser 39
Instruments International
Endress+Hauser
Instruments International AG
Kaegenstrasse 2
4153 Reinach
Switzerland
Tel. +41 61 715 81 00

Fax +41 61 715 25 00
www.endress.com
info@ii.endress.com
TI396F/00/en/07.09
71098284
FM+SGML 6.0 ProMoDo
71098284
TYPE : RTD.H.A
TYPE : RTD.H-C TYPE : RTD-H-D
SHEATH OD
. 4.5.6.8
R_
9. 10 mm
SHEATH MATERIAL
. ,r56:55316 S2:SS321
.CABLEENTRY
-, IEI '/.' i,iPT(F)

208 %',Erln
16M [420x 1.5(D
158 7l BSP(F)
Standard tealure : a - Beference standard IEC 751 Class 2

b - lMineralinsulated (c0mpact l\490) c0nstructiofl
c - 1/2" NPT(IM) connection
d-3WireSystem
TypicalModelN0 : RTD-H-B-2P[100-8-S2-WS4-15N-250-C-75-2
_ s2 ws4 15[ 250
www.qomralolernentg.com
GENERAL INSTRUMENTS CONSORTIUM
Project NTPC
Order -No. Q08-0013
Customer Swan Environment
Tag-No. TE-101
Results as per ASME PTC 19.3 TW - 2010.
Wake Frequency fw 131.5 1/s Steady Stress LHS SvM 5.0 MPa
Nat. Frequency fn 1823.5 1/s Safety Bending stat 40.98 /
Freq. Ratio r 0.07 fw/fn Pressure Limit pmax 377.3 bar

Ratio Limit rmax 0.4 inline? Safety Pressure Sp 251.51 /
Fatigue Stress Somax 8.3 MPa Conclusion : Good

Safety Fatigue dyn 4.46 / Reduced Length? Lred mm
Process data:
Temperature T 40.00 C
Proc. Pressure P 1.50 bar
Velocity V 9.0 m/s
Flow Rate flr kg/h
Inner Diameter Di mm
Med.Density rho 999.97 kg/m3
Kin.Viscosity ny 0.890026701 mm2/s
Design data:
TW Shape Fig. 4a (2a...4e)
I
Insertion
ti Length
L th U 70.000
70 000 mm
shielded Length (Lo) 0 mm
Stepped Length (Ls) 0 mm
Bore Diameter d 7 mm
Root Diameter D2 16 mm
Tip Diameter D1 13 mm
Tip Thickness T 4 mm
Root Radius at A rA 0 mm
Radius at Step B (rB) 0 mm
welded ? as welded nw wm aw
Material data:
Thermowell shape Grade 316
spec. Weight D(T) 7.999 kg/dm3
tapered screwed Youngs Modul E(T) 193.7 GPa
Factor for Temp. FT 0.999 /
compare with standard Fatigue Strength Sf(T) 37.2 MPa
ASME PTC 19.3 TW - 2o1o Max.all.Stress 1.5S(T) 205.7 MPa
Press. Strength S(T) 137.2 MPa
class B
Printed Date : 9-Apr-15 By: CRD
GENERAL INSTRUMENTS CONSORTIUM

G. T. Road, Mahim, Mumbai - 4000016.
Plant - GAUGES BOURDON (I) PVT. LTD.,
Plot No. 4, 5, 6, Jawahar Ind. Estate, KAMOTHE., Panvel - 410209, Dist. - Raigad. Maharashtra.
Tel. : +91-22-27423744 / 45, Fax : +91-22-27421901. Email. : info@general-gauges.com
GENERAL has made every reasonable attempt to validate the calculation procedure contained in this spread sheet, however, responsibility for validation rests solely with the user.
This spread sheet is intended to assist the experienced designer of thermowells and should not be considered a replacement for professional engineering.
End user is responsible for process compatibility.
Mineral Insulated RTDs
How to Order
L1 Ex 55 mm E Ex
TYPE : RTD IA TYPE : RTD-I-TB
L1 Ex L2 L1 Ex
TYPE : RTD IB TYPE : RTD-I-PJ
OPTION / SPECIAL
1. Adjustable compression fitting in SS316
ELEMENT (specify the size)
1Pt100, 2Pt100, 1Pt46, 2Pt46, 1Cu53, 2. Spring loaded bayonet fitting
2Cu53, 1Pt1000, 2Pt1000 3. Lugs for tails
4. Special limits of error
SHEATH OD 5. Calibration standard
3, 3.2, 4.5, 6, 8, 9, 10 mm (specify other than IEC-751)
6. Triplex element
SHEATH MATERIAL 7. Bulk Head Connector
S6 : SS316, S2 : SS321 8. Thermowell
0. None
L1
Specify in mm
EXTENSION CABLE LENGTH
(L2) Specify in mtr
Ex
Specify in mm EXTENSION CABLE TYPE
1. PTFE insulated tails-55mm long
2. PTFE insulated, PTFE overall cable
3. PTFE insulated,overall PTFE & SS braided cable
Standard Features : a - Mineral insulated (compact MgO) construction

b - 3 Wire System
c - Reference standard IEC 751 Class 2
Typical Model No : RTD-I-B-1Pt100-4.5-S6-200-50-3-5-1/2BSP(M)

RTD IA 1Pt100 4.5 S6 200 50 3 5 BSP(M)
RTD Element Type Sheath Material Ex Length (mm) L2 Extension Cable Length
Construction Type Sheath OD (mm) L1 Length (mm) Extension Cable Type Special Requirement
(Adjustable compression fitting reqd.)
www.general-elements.com 31
Mineral Insulated RTDs
How to Order
E Ex E Ex
TYPE : RTD-H-A TYPE : RTD-H-B
E Ex L1 Ex L2
TYPE : RTD-H-C TYPE : RTD-H-D
ELEMENT
1Pt100, 2Pt100, 1Pt46, 2Pt46, 1Cu53,
2Cu53, 1Pt1000, 2Pt1000
SHEATH OD OPTION / SPECIAL

4, 5, 6, 8, 9, 10 mm 1. Cable gland (specify material)
2. Two cable entries
3. Head mounted transmitter
SHEATH MATERIAL 4. Plug for cable entry (specify material)
S6 : SS316, S2 : SS321 5. Connection(other than specified)
6. FG/FG, SS braided cable
HEAD (specify length e.g. 6(3) i.e. 3 Mtr cable)
WAL Aluminium (LM6 Gr.), Weatherproof (IP-66) 7. Special limits of error
WS4 SS304, Weatherproof (IP-66) 8. Thermowell
WS6 SS316, Weatherproof (IP-66) 0. None
FLAL Aluminium (LM6 Gr.), Flameproof (IIA, IIB)
FLS4 SS304, Flameproof (IIA, IIB) Ex
FLS6 SS316, Flameproof (IIA, IIB) Specify in mm
FCAL Aluminium (LM6 Gr.), Flameproof (IIC)
FCS4 SS304, Flameproof (IIC) CONNECTION MATERIAL
FCS6 SS316, Flameproof (IIC) C Cd plated CS
FCCAL Aluminium (LM6 Gr.), Flameproof (IIC+CCOE) S4 SS304
ATAL Aluminium (LM6 Gr.), ATEX certified S6 SS316
FMAL Aluminium (LM6 Gr.), FM/UL certified
E
Specify in mm
CABLE ENTRY
15N NPT(F)
20E ET(F)
15M M20 x 1.5(F)
15B BSP(F)
Standard Feature : a - Reference standard IEC 751 Class 2

b - Mineral insulated (compact MgO) construction
c - 1/2 NPT(M) connection
d - 3 Wire System
Typical Model No : RTD-H-B-2Pt100-8-S2-WS4-15N-250-C-75-2
RTD H-B 2Pt100 8 S2 WS4 15N 250 C 75 2
Special Requirement
RTD Element Type Sheath Material Cable entry Connection material (2 Cable entries)
Construction Type Sheath OD (mm) Head E Length (mm) Ex Length (mm)
32 www.general-elements.com
DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM
Port Details:
SIM TRAY : Sim tray is used to insert the sim card into it.In order to communicate to FTP server using
GPRS facility.
Ethernet: Eternet Port is used to connect LAN Cable into it.In order to communicate to FTP server using
LAN facility.
RS-485 : RS-485 connector is used for communication between DAS and Sensor Device using
RS-485 serial communication protocol.
CONNECTOR DETAILS OF RS-485 COMMUNICATION
pin-6 pin-1
Pin Number Signal Name

(DAS side)
3 Rx
4 Tx
1 GND
1
STEPS TO ACCESS AND USE IT:
1. Enter the IP address in browser. Now Member Login screen appears as shown below.
For Login Through USB use IP as:-223.0.0.10
For Login Through LAN use IP as :-192.168.1.227(or Your Local Configured LAN IP ).
You can Login as admin or operator(user).

To Login enter the Username and Password and click on Login button.
If you Login as admin, Admin Menu screen appears as shown below.
In Display,On Left Top Corner Home Icon Appers. By Clicking This ,We Revert Back To Login(Either
Admin Menu/User Menu ) Menu Display.
Similarly,On Right Top Corner Logout Icon Appears. By Clicking This ,We Revert Back To Member
Login Display.
Config Details:
2
To configure DAS click on Config Details Icon In AdminMenu . DAS CONFIGURATION screen
appears as shown below.
3
4
Using DAS Configuration screen we can configure:
i. Location: Enter the name of Area in this column.
ii. DAS SlNo: Enter the unique DAS number for unit. Each DAS must be given unique
number,else it will be difficult to monitor DAS status in InBound.
iii. S/W Version: Here firmware version gets displayed.

iv. Interval: Instant or present data of the device connected to that channel will be read for
specified minute of every hour.
v. APN Name: Enter the Access Point Name depending on the sim inserted in
DCU.(ex:airtelgprs.com)
vi. GPRS/LAN:
00 DAS Does Not Send Data To FTP Server .(Sending

Mode=NULL).
01 DAS Try To Send Data To FTP Server Through LAN
.(Sending Mode=LAN).
10 DAS Try To Send Data To FTP Server Through
SIM.(Sending Mode=SIM).
11 By Default,If Both Bits Are High Then DAS Try To Send
Data To FTP Server Through SIM.(Sending Mode=SIM).
FTP Details:
S NO:Enter The Serial numbers.
E/D:For Enable Enter 1.
For Disable Enter 0.
5
If Disable,then DATA will not be sent to InBound or will not accept request file from OutBound of that
respective client.
FTP IP: Enter The FTP IP (ex:183.82.1.10)

UserName: Enter The Appropriate UserName Of That Respective FTP-IP.
Password: Enter The Appropriate Password Of That Respective FTP-IP.
InBound: As Per User Required Client, Enter The InBound Path
OutBound:As Per The InBound Client,Enter The OutBound Path.
LAN Details:
Data Logger IP(Self): Enter Your Local LAN IP.(Ex:192.168.1.227)
Subnet Mask IP: Enter The Subnet Mask IP.(Ex:255.255.255.0)
Default Gateway IP: Enter The Default Gateway IP.(Ex:192.168.1.1)
DNS Server IP: Enter The DNS Server IP.(Ex:192.168.1.252)
DIP's
S no:Enter The Serial numbers.

Parameter Name: Enter The Tag As Per Your Requirement.
Status: It Will Be In Non-Editable Form. But Status Will Get Updated By Interacting
6
With DIP's Of The Logger.
DOP's:
S no:Enter The Serial numbers.

Parameter Name:Enter The Tag As Per Your Requirement.
Cont/Pulse:Enter Single Digit 0 or 1.But No Importance.

Pulse Width:Enter Single Pulse Width As Per Your Requirement .But No Importance.
Status:It Will Be In Editable Form. As You Enter The Status ON/OFF Of Each Column
That Particular DOP Relay Get Trip and Also It Can Be Operated From Outbound
Folders Of FTP.
Number of Channels: Enter The Number Of Sensor Device You Want To Configure.Then
Click On Click Here To ADD Channels.
7
You Can Configure The Sensor Device One By One,The Details You Need To Enter For
Each Sensor is As Below.
S no: Enter The Serial Number.
Sensor ID: Enter The Sensor ID.
By Default Enter Sensor ID As 1 For All 4 to 20 Sensor devices,In Case If Sensor Device Is Of RS485
Sensor ID Is Mandatory.
Reading E/D:For Enable Enter 1.
If Enabled,Then That particular Sensor Device Will Read After Every REBOOT and
During Every Given Interval.
If Disabled,That Sensor Device Will Not Read At All.
Sending E/D:
Sensor Name: Enter The Name Of Sensor Device.(Ex:DO,pH...)
Sensor Code: Enter The Code Of Sensor Device.(Ex:For DO-06,pH-04...)
lrng(Lower Range): Enter The Lower Range As 4mA.
urng(Upper Range):Enter The Upper Range As 20mA.
Min Qty:Enter The Minimum Quantity Of The Sensor Device.
Max Qty:Enter The Maximum Quantity Of The Sensor Device.
ALV:Enter The Acceptance Low Value Of The Sensor Device As Per User Requirement.
AHV:Enter The Acceptance High Value Of The Sensor Device As Per User Requirement.
M unit(Measuring Unit):Enter The Measuring Units Of The Sensor Device Which IS Added In
Sensor Name Column.
Unit: Enter The Unit As 'c'.
BM(BOD M Value): By Default,Enter the BM Value As 1.00
BC(BOD C Value): By Default ,Enter The BC Value As 0.00
CM(COD M Value): By Default,Enter The CM Value As 1.00
CC(COD C Value): By Default ,Enter The CC Value As 0.00
After fill all fields and click on SAVE button to save the entered details.
Now the following screen appears. Click on ok button.Admin Menu screen appears.
8
Analog Status:
To see analog Status click on Analog status Icon and following screen appears.
Instant Data:
9
To see Instant Data click on Instant Data Icon and following screen appears.
Alarms Log:
To see alarms log click on Alarms Log Icon and following screen appears.
Events Log:
To see Events log click on Events Log Icon and following screen appears.
10
Systems Log:
To see Systems log click on Systems Log Icon and following screen appears.
Digital I/O Status:

To see Digital I/O Status click on Digital I/O Status Icon and following screen appears.
11
If you Login as operator, Operator Menu screen appears as shown below.
In Display,On Left Top Corner Home Icon Appers. By Clicking This ,We Revert Back To Login(Either
Admin Menu/User Menu ) Menu Display.
Similarly,On Right Top Corner Logout Icon Appears. By Clicking This ,We Revert Back To Member
12
Login Display.
Analog Status:
To see analog Status Of Operator Menu click on Analog status Icon and following screen appears.
Digital I/O Status:

To see Digital I/O Status of Operator Menu click on Digital I/O Status Icon and following screen
appears.
FTP ROOT
13
1. Bhuvaneswar
1. Inbound
2. Outbound
2. Patna
1. Inbound
2. Outbound
3. Siliguri
1. Inbound
2. Outbound
4. Varanasi
1. Inbound
2. Outbound
In ftp root folder there will be four(or more)folders as mentioned above. In each folder there
will be two sub folder as Inbound and Outbound(Mandatory). The data logger should send all
the files into Configured(Enabled) Inbound folder. The user can put the on-demand request in
the Outbound folder(Only one request at each time,after processing this request,the user can
place the another req). Data logger is to take the req file from the Outbound folder and will
perform necessary activity according to the request available in the req file of Outbound folder.
The types of files data logger will be having like:
Instantaneous_online_record_file file code=01

Alarms_online_record_file file code=02
Events_online_record file file code=03
Configuration_file file code=04
Instantaneous_day_file file code=05
Alarms_day_file file code=06
Events_day_file file code=07
Configuration_day_file file code=08
System_logs_day_file file code=09
Request_file file code=10
Systemlogs_online_record_file file code=11
RawData_day_file file code=12
14
1. INSTANTANEOUS DATA
Every interval time data logger reads the connected sensors data ( Read flag should be enabled
in the configuration file) and forms a record. This record can be appended in the
Instantaneous_day_file. From this data the send flag enabled parameters only to be inserted in In
Instantaneous_online_record_file. Immediately the Instantaneous_online_record _file can be
uploaded into the corresponding Inbound folder.
Instantaneous_online_record_file name:- ddmmyyyyHHmmssxxxxxxxyyzzzzzz.csv

ddmmyyyy 8 bytes date
HHmmss 6 bytes time
xxxxxxx 7 bytes data logger number
yy 2 bytes file code=01
zzzzzz 6 bytes upload delay from the record generation.
.csv 4 bytes Extension of the file.
Total file length=33 bytes.
Instantaneous record format:

A01,Location,DataloggerNo,Date,Time,SeqNo,code|value,code|value,.......
Save this file in the INSTDATA folder. Upload the file into ftp inbound folder. If upload success then
delete the file from this folder. If uploading fails keep the file in the same folder.
If uploading of this file fails, next time the delay parameter to be modified (The difference of existing
ddmmyyyyHHmmss from the file name and the system current time stamp, it should be in minutes) in
the file name. Upload the current file and the pending files into Inbound folder.
On the day change, upload the Instantaneous_day_file into Inbound folder.

Instaneous_day_fle name is:- ddmmyyyyHHmmssxxxxxxxyyzzzzzz.csv
HHmmss 6 bytes time

Once upload success move this file into another(INSTBKP) folder. If it fails keep on trying to send
when ever ftp connected for sending other data with modifying the delay parameter in the file name.
At least one year files are to be maintained in the INSTBKP folder in the data logger unit.
2.ALARMS DATA
15
Alarms can be generated by the data logger unit as per the occurrence and forms as a record.
This record can be appended in the Alarms_day_file and also inserted in the
Alarms_online_record_file. Immediately the Alarms_online_record _file can be uploaded into the
corresponding Inbound folder.
Alarms_online_record_file name:- ddmmyyyyHHmmssxxxxxxxxyyzzzzzz.csv

HHmmss 6 bytes time
Alarms record format:

A02,Location,DataloggerNo,Date,Time,SeqNo,Alarmcode,DescriptionNewLine
Save this file in the ALRMDATA folder. Upload the file into ftp inbound folder. If upload success then
the file name.Upload the current file and the pending files into Inbound folder.
On the day change upload the Alarms_day_file into Inbound folder.

Alarms_day_fle name is:- ddmmyyyyHHmmssxxxxxxxxyyzzzzzz.csv
HHmmss 6 bytes time
yy 2 bytes file code = 06
zzzzzz 6 bytes Delay for upload
.csv 4 bytes file extension.
Once upload success move this file into another(ALARMSBKP) folder. If it fails keep on trying to
send when ever ftp connected for sending other data with modifying the delay parameter in the file
name.
At least one year files are to be maintained in the ALARMSBKP folder in the data logger unit
3. EVENTS DATA
Events can be generated by the data logger unit as per the occurrence and forms as a record.
This record can be appended in the Events_day_file and also inserted in the
16
Events_online_record_file. Immediately the Events_online_record _file can be uploaded into the
Events_online_record_file name:- ddmmyyyyHHmmssxxxxxxxyyzzzzzz.csv

HHmmss 6 bytes time
zzzzzz 6 bytes upload delay from the record generation
Events record format:

A03,Location,DataloggerNo,Date,Time,SeqNo,Eventcode,DescriptionNewLine
Save this file in the EVNTDATA folder. Upload the file into ftp inbound folder. If upload success then
On the day change upload the Events_day_file into Inbound folder.

Events_day_fle name is:- ddmmyyyyHHmmssxxxxxxxyyzzzzzz.csv
ddmmyyyy 8 bytes date.
HHmmss 6 bytes time
xxxxxxx 7 bytes data logger number.
zzzzzz 6 bytes Delay for upload.
Once upload success move this file into another(EVENTSBKP) folder. If it fails keep on trying to send
when ever ftp connected for sending other data with modifying the delay parameter in the file name
At least one year files are to be maintained in the EVENTSBKP folder in the data logger unit.
Diagnasis/Calibration/Remote Calibration data can be generated by the data logger unit as per the
occurrence and forms as a event record.
17
4. SYSTEM LOGS
System logs can be generated by the data logger unit as per the occurrence and forms as a record. This
record can be appended in the system_logs _day_file and also inserted in the system_logs
_online_record_file. Immediately the system_logs _online_record _file can be uploaded into the
System log record format:
system_logs_online_record_file name:- ddmmyyyyHHmmssxxxxxxxyyzzzzzz.csv

HHmmss 6 bytes time
zzzzzz 6 bytes upload delay from the record generation
Events record format:

A03,Location,DataloggerNo,Date,Time,SeqNo,Eventcode,DescriptionNewLine
Save this file in the EVNTDATA folder. Upload the file into ftp inbound folder. If upload success then
A04,Location,DataloggerNo,Date,Time,SeqNo,DescriptionNewLine
On the day change upload the System_logs_day_file into Inbound folder.
Syetem_logs_day_fle name is :- ddmmyyyyHHmmssxxxxxxxyyzzzzzz.csv
HHmmss 6 bytes time
zzzzzz 6 bytes Delay for upload
Once upload success move this file into another(LOGSBKP) folder. If it fails keep on trying to send
when ever ftp connected for sending other data with modifying the delay parameter in the file name
At least one year files are to be maintained in the LOGSBKP folder in the data logger unit.
18
Request file:
A on demand request is to be put in the Request.txt file(Only one Request file at each time,after
processing this request,the user can place the another req). This Request.txt file has to be kept in the
outbound folder. Data logger takes this file from the outbound folder, copies in to data logger and
deletes the file from outbound folder.Then Data Logger will perform necessary activity according to
the request available in the Request.txt file of Outbound folder.
The following data is required to get/set, by on demand.
1. Set Interval #49#min@

2. Set Time Stamp Of The Unit #50#ddmmyyyyHHmmss@
3. Get Configuration #51#
4. Get Previous Instantaneous data #52#ddmm@
5. Get Instantaneous data #53#
6. Get Previous Alarms data #54#ddmm@
7. Get Alarms data #55#
8. Get Previous Events data #56#ddmm@
9. Get Events data #57#
10. Get Previous system logs data #58#ddmm@
11. Get system logs data #59#
12. Reset the unit #60#
13. Get Time stamp of the unit #61#
14. Set APN #62#apnname@
15. Set FTP address with uname&pwd
#63#ftpaddress,uname,pwd,InboundPath,OutboundPath@
16. Set LAN Ips #64#DiviceIP,SubnetIP,GateWayIP,DNSServerIP@
17. Write Configuration #65#
For this first read the configuration by sending #51#. After getting the file into inbound folder, take out
the file from inbound folder and do edit as per the requirement and copy it in the outbound folder. Then
put request as #65# in the request_file.
18. FOTA #66#
19. Setting Digital Outputs #67#status of 4 DOP pin's@ (Ex:#67#0101@)
20. Get Previous Raw data File #68#ddmm@
19
1) INTRODUCTION
Analab Zero Air Generator ZA TOC is the most useful gas generation instrument for all
kind of TOC (online/offline) used in modern laboratories which reduces inventory of gas
cylinders and supplies smooth and accurate gases with prescribed flow and pressure.
Analab Generators are with great features like field proven reliability, Aesthetic &
ergonomic design, Minimal maintenance, Low & constant Hydrocarbon constant of Zero
Air, No pressure drop and having batter baseline stability.
Thank you for selecting ANALAB to meet your gas generation needs. Should you
require any further assistance or support, please contact your local ANALAB service
representative / dealer.
2) OPERATION OF ZERO AIR GENERATOR
If the temperature of the compressed air is more than 40 C then it is necessary to

provide AFTER COOLER which should ensure the outlet temperature of 40 C. During
this cooling process, some moisture condenses, which is removed from Pre filter. The
HEATLESS type Zero Air Generator is the simplest & economical Zero Air Generator
with Activated Alumina Molecular Sieve as the desiccant. The Twin absorbers filled with
these desiccant is assembled with 3 way, 2- way control valves and inter connected
pipings. The unit follows the drying sequences of 10 minutes. Here one absorbers
under drying cycle for 5 minutes and simultaneously the other absorber under goes for
regeneration and equalization process for (4 + 1) minutes respectively. The changeover
of the absorber takes place with the help of sequential timer. The moisture air and
regenerative air is drained out through the individual silencer of the absorbers provided
at the bottom hence Zero Air comes from the top of the Absorber and is taken to your
process for your applications.
3) FLOW DIAGRAM
Page 1 of 10
4) TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
Flow Capacity : 500 ml/min
Pressure : 6 Kg/Cm2
Purity : O2 - 20-21% - N2 79.0 %
Moisture : < 2 ppm
Hydrogen : Nil
Total HC : < 0.5 ppm
CO & CO2 : < 2 ppm
Dew Point : - 40 C
Micro Particulates : 0.01
Outlet : 1/4" OD (Ferrule Fitting)
Pressure Gauges : 1 Nos. for Zero air
Startup Time : 1 min
Electrical Requirements : 230 VAC 10% 50Hz 1 Phase
Dimension (H x W x D) : 26 x 22 x 12
Generator Environment:
Min. operating ambient temperature : 5C
Max. operating ambient temperature : 45C
Maximum relative humidity : 70%
Oil Free Piston Type Air Compressor:
10 Ltr tank storage capacity with pressure cut off switch

Safety Relief Valve,
High Pressure Hose,
Pressure Gauge
ferrule fitting type end connection
Pressure capacity : 7 Kg/Cm2
Noise Level of Air Compressor : 70dBA @ 1 m
Page 2 of 10
5) DESCRIPTION OF FRONT PANEL
Cylinder
Off
Generator
ZERO AIR PRESSURE DC SUPPLY

GAUGE INDICATION LED
Pressure Gauge : Indicate output pressure of Zero Air gas
Three Way Valve : To ON/OFF and for selection of output between

Cylinder and Generator
Cylinder Output
OFF
Generator Output
DC Supply LED : DC Supply for Solenoid Valve
ON/OFF Switch : Mains Power ON/OFF
Page 3 of 10
6) DESCRIPTION OF REAR PANEL
ZERO AIR
Air Comp ZA ZACyl.

I/P O/P I/P 230 V AC 50 Hz
Air Compressor I/P : To connect Compressor Air for Zero Air Inlet
Zero Air O/P : Zero Air Output from Generator
Zero Air Cylinder I/P : Zero Air Cylinder Input
Power Inlet : 230 VAC 10% 50Hz 1 Phase
7) DESCRIPTION OF SIDE PANEL
INLET 40 MICRON FILTER WITH OUTLET 0.01 MICRON FILTER

AUTO DRAIN WITH AUTO DRAIN
Front Left Front Right
Page 4 of 10
8) OPERATION PROCEDURE
The generator is designed for indoor use only. It should be installed adjacent to the
instruments in laboratory & Compressor should keep outside laboratory near cylinder
room and generator should connect with SS tubing with suitable ferrule fittings.
Note: Performance of the generator (like all sophisticated equipment) is affected

by ambient conditions. Care should also be taken to the proximity of air
conditioning outlets.
Connect tubings coming out from compressor at the rear side of instrument at Air
compressor INPUTs and connect necessary tubing at outlet port of generator where it
mention Zero Air and connect other end to the instrument.
Analab Gas generator has also facility to connect Air gas cylinder so that in case of
failure of generator, user can switch over the output gas supply to cylinder without
requires any further tools.
Pressure & Flow Adjustment

The system is configured in the factory to give standard Outlet Pressure and Flow Rate
as per the specification of unit. These settings should NEVER require adjustment
during normal operation. During service/fault diagnosis, the settings can be changed by
adjusting the pressure regulator and flow controller situated on the side panel. (It should
change only by authorized representative of ANALAB only)
System Drain
Please ensure that the drain port at the Bottom of the compressor is led to a suitable
connection or container. It should be noted that the generator will expel considerable
amounts of water from this port, which should be emptied at regular intervals.
Note: It is advisable to use Auto Drain unit supplied by Analab as an option to avoid
manually removal of excessive water from the compressor. Auto drain unit will drain the
water at regular interval
Sequential Timer
Located inside with control the Valves, and in turn controls Air Generation. Pl. Dont
attempt to alter the timer; any changes made will void the performance specifications.
Page 5 of 10
Start-Up
Verify that power supply is 220 V / 1 ph / 50 Hz with proper earthing.
Turn on the compressed air supply. Follow air compressor manufacturer's

Start-up instructions (see your manufacturer's manual).
Check that air pressure should be 7.0 kg. Open the air supply valve
Turn the Main Power switch to the OFF position of the main Generator Unit.
Plug the power cord into a properly fused and grounded electrical outlet of
the correct voltage as marked on the unit.
Turn Main Power switch to ON. Observe that the power indicator light is on. If
light is off, check fuse or light bulb.
Wait for 15 to 20 min. for stabilization of gas supply from the generator.
Pressure gauges on the front panel will indicate the outlet pressure
Change the valve position to Generator side , Gas will start flowing through
outlet and supplied to the instrument
Shutdown procedure
In Case of Emergency Shutdown, simply turn the Main Power Switch to OFF.
This will stop all generator functions immediately. Gas supply can be shut off
manually closing the valve located on the front panel.
While in case of Normal Shutdown Turn the Main Power switch to OFF. There
is no need to close the valve.
WARNING
The generator will remain pressurized after shut down. Before performing
any maintenance or opening any piping systems, always depressurize the
system. Failure to do so may result in injuries.
Page 6 of 10
MAINTENANCE
Analab Generators will provide many years of trouble-free operation if the

recommended maintenance is performed thoroughly and regularly. In addition to
the procedures given below, the customer must also perform all maintenance
recommended by the manufacturers of the component items employed in the
Generators.
The Analab generator is a rugged unit and requires only minimal maintenance.
Failure to follow the maintenance schedule may result in damage to the unit and
Voiding the warranty.
o Check for air and product leaks.
o Check Compressor air pressure.
o Visually check control panel.
o Verify that the automatic filter drain is working properly.
o Manually operate air receiver drains.
o Clean both filters connected at left and right sides by opening bottom cups
with soap solution followed by water and dry it properly before fixing back.
Pre-requisite
5 Amp stabilized power supply for Gas Generator
15 Amp stabilized power supply for Air Compressor
Page 7 of 10
9) GUARANTEE
This Air Generator is guaranteed for a period of 12 calendar months from the date of
delivery against defects in material or workmanship other then valves, semiconductor,
electrodes, batteries, PVC & Polycarbonate material etc. During the guarantee period,
our liability is limited to the repair or replacement at our option of the instrument or parts
thereof found to be defective.
10) SERVICE AFTER SALES
Utmost care is taken in the design, manufacture, and inspection of all ANALAB
Scientific Instruments Pvt. Ltd. to ensure trouble free service for long period. However in
case of unsatisfactory performance of any our instruments please contact our distributor
for your area through whom the instrument was purchased under intimation to us.
Manufactured By:
Analab Scientific Instruments Pvt. Ltd.
Plot No. 361, Sayajimarket,
N.H.No.8 By-Pass
At & Post: Sayajipura
Vadodara 390019 Gujarat (India)
Phone : +91-9714503393 Telefax : +91-265-2514404
E-mail: info@analab.co.in
Page 8 of 10
WIRING DIAGRAM FOR AIR GAS GENERATOR
Ground
N N R R R R R R R R R R R R N N
C C 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 C C
+ 24 VDC Air
Page 9 of 10
WIRING DIAGRAM FOR COMPRESSOR
From Mains Pressure Switch

15 AMPS
BLACK
WHITE
MCB
BLACK
RED
GREEN
Solenoid Valve
Earthing
Compressor
Page 10 of 10

Effluent Quality Monitoring System

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Título original

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Effluent Quality Monitoring System

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Operation & Maintenance

Package : EQMS Package for NTPC Power Stations

Swan Environmental Pvt. Ltd.,

2. Datasheet of BOD / COD analyzer

4. Datasheet of Clamp On-Open Channel

5. Datasheet of Temp element

6. Datasheet of DAS-Data Sheet

9. Datasheet of Air conditioner

10. Datasheet of Timer-Air Conditioner

11. Datasheet of UPS

12. Datasheet of Weir Calculations

13. Datasheet of Desktop-PC

14. Datasheet of IP 55 enclosure

1. Power Distribution box Circuit

4. Operation Manual Conductivity

5. Operation Manual TSS

6. Operation Manual OIW

7. Operation Manual Clamp On flow meter

8. Operation Manual Open Channel flow meter

9. Operation Manual Temp element

10. Operation Manual DAS-Data Sheet

11. Operation Manual Zero-Air-Generator

Temperature Element with

Ultrasonic Level measurement SDL-999V

BOD/COD 4-Port Ethernet

Effluent Quality Monitoring System NTPC

Ultrasonic clamp on flow meter Server in CPCB

pH (4-20mA) Server in SPCB

All the above shown items are in the scope of Swan

Sample and water flow circuit for EQMS

Title Data Sheet of DAS (Data Acquisition System)

AI-11 Et hernet cable For detail

4-20mA DI-01 RS232

SWAN w ill install necessary

1. FTP file t ransfer t o t he server (* .csv, * .t xt )

SWAN w ill install necessary softw are at CPCB to establish

DAS has 4 contact inputs.

DAS has one RJ45 port.

DAS has one USB port.

The details to be entered in this segment are

DIPS (Digital Inputs)

These are digital (Contact) inputs: DAS has 4 contact inputs.

Alarms are generated in this segment

Digital input/output status

SEW SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION

Current Channel Dashboard:

If they are not configured it displays the empty screen.

ON-LINE TOTAL ORGANIC

Read this Instruction Manual thoroughly before using

Original version is approved in English.

2011 Shimadzu Corporation. All rights reserved.

Notes Regarding this Instruction Manual

Indications Used in This Manual

The following symbols are used in this manual:

Indicates an action that must not be performed.

Indicates an action that must be performed.

Indicates information provided to improve product performance.

Indicates the location of related reference information.

Indicates text displayed on screen including buttons, menu items,

Do NOT use the instrument in hazardous areas.

Only connect a suitable power supply to the instrument.

Ground the power supply appropriately. (Class 3 grounding, grounding

Contact your Shimadzu representative to request installation, adjustment, or